AMS/IP
Studies in Advanced Mathematics &-T. Yau, Series Editor
Heat Kernel and Analysis on Manifolds Alexander Grigor'yan
American Mathematical Society
International Press
Heat Kernel and Analysis on Manifolds
AMS/IP
Studies in Advanced Mathematics Volume 47
Heat Kernel and Analysis on Manifolds Alexander Grigor'yan
American Mathematical Society
International Press
17
Shing-Tong Yau, General Editor 2000 Mathematics Subject Classification. Primary 58J35; Secondary 31B05, 351(05, 35P15, 47D07, 53C20.
For additional information and updates on this book, visit
www.ams.org/bookpages/amsip-47
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Grigor'yan, A. (Alexander) Heat kernel and analysis on manifolds / Alexander Grigor'yan. p. cm. (AMS/IP studies in advanced mathematics ; v. 47) Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 978-0-8218-4935-4 (alk. paper) 1. Heat equation. 2. Kernel functions. 3. Riemannian manifolds. I. Title. QA377.G754
4. Gaussian processes.
2009
515'.353-dc22 2009034350
Copying and reprinting. Individual readers of this publication, and nonprofit libraries acting for them, are permitted to make fair use of the material, such as to copy a chapter for use in teaching or research. Permission is granted to quote brief passages from this publication in reviews, provided the customary acknowledgment of the source is given. Republication, systematic copying, or multiple reproduction of any material in this publication is permitted only under license from the American Mathematical Society and International Press.
Requests for such permission should be addressed to the Acquisitions Department, American Mathematical Society, 201 Charles Street, Providence, Rhode Island 02904-2294, USA. Requests can also be made by e-mail to reprint -permissionflams.org.
© 2009 by the American Mathematical Society. All rights reserved. The American Mathematical Society retains all rights except those granted to the United States Government. Printed in the United States of America.
The paper used in this book is acid-free and falls within the guidelines established to ensure permanence and durability. Visit the AMS home page at http: //www. ams. org/ Visit the International Press home page at URL: http: //www. intipress. com/ 10987654321 141312111009
To my wife Tatiana
Contents Preface
Chapter 1. Laplace operator and the heat equation in R' I.I. Historical background 1.2. The Green formula 1.3. The heat equation Notes
Chapter 2. Function spaces in lR 2.1. Spaces Ck and LP 2.2. Convolution and partition of unity 2.3. Approximation of integrable functions by smooth ones 2.4. Distributions 2.5. Approximation of distributions by smooth functions 2.6. Weak derivatives and Sobolev spaces 2.7. Heat semigroup in R Notes
Chapter 3. Laplace operator on a Riemannian manifold 3.1. Smooth manifolds 3.2. Tangent vectors 3.3. Riemannian metric 3.4. Riemannian measure 3.5. Divergence theorem 3.6. Laplace operator and weighted manifolds 3.7. Submanifolds 3.8. Product manifolds 3.9. Polar coordinates in ]I8', S', IH[' 3.10. Model manifolds 3.11. Length of paths and the geodesic distance 3.12. Smooth mappings and isometries Notes Chapter 4. Laplace operator and heat equation in L2 (M) 4.1. Distributions and Sobolev spaces 4.2. Dirichlet Laplace operator and resolvent 4.3. Heat semigroup and L2-Cauchy problem
xi 1 1
2 4 13 15 15 17
20 23 28 34 40 47 49 49 53 56 59 64 67 70 72 74 80 85 91 95 97 97 103 112
CONTENTS
viii
122
Notes
Chapter 5. Weak maximum principle and related topics 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5.
Chain rule in WO,
Chain rule in W1 Markovian properties of resolvent and the heat semigroup Weak maximum principle Resolvent and the heat semigroup in subsets
Notes
Chapter 6. Regularity theory in Rh 6.1. Embedding theorems 6.2. Two technical lemmas 6.3. Local elliptic regularity 6.4. Local parabolic regularity Notes
123 123 127 130 135 143 149 151 151 159 162 170 181
Chapter 7. The heat kernel on a manifold 7.1. Local regularity issues 7.2. Smoothness of the semigroup solutions 7.3. The heat kernel 7.4. Extension of the heat semigroup 7.5. Smoothness of the heat kernel in t, x, y 7.6. Notes
183 183 190 198 201 208 215
Chapter S. Positive solutions 8.1. The minimality of the heat semigroup 8.2. Extension of resolvent 8.3. Strong maximum/minimum principle 8.4. Stochastic completeness Notes
217
Chapter 9. Heat kernel as a fundamental solution 9.1. Fundamental solutions
243
9.2. 9.3.
Some examples
Eternal solutions
Notes
Chapter 10. Spectral properties 10.1. Spectra of operators in Hilbert spaces 10.2. Bottom of the spectrum 10.3. The bottom eigenfunction 10.4. The heat kernel in relatively compact regions 10.5. Minimax principle 10.6. Discrete spectrum and compact embedding theorem 10.7. Positivity of Al 10.8. Long time asymptotic of log pt
217 219 222 231 241
243 248 259
263 265
265 271 275 277 284 287 291 292
CONTENTS
Notes
293
Chapter 11. Distance function and completeness 11.1. The notion of completeness 11.2. Lipschitz functions 11.3. Essential self-adjointness 11.4. Stochastic completeness and the volume growth 11.5. Parabolic manifolds 11.6. Spectrum and the distance function Notes
295 295 296 301 303 313 317 319
Chapter 12. Gaussian estimates in the integrated form 12.1. The integrated maximum principle 12.2. The Davies-Gaffney inequality 12.3. Upper bounds of higher eigenvalues 12.4. Semigroup solutions with a harmonic initial function 12.5. Takeda's inequality Notes
321 321 324 327 331 333 339
Chapter 13. Green function and Green operator 13.1. The Green operator 13.2. Superaveraging functions 13.3. Local Harnack inequality 13.4. Convergence of sequences of a-harmonic functions 13.5. The positive spectrum 13.6. Green function as a fundamental solution Notes
341 341 348 351 355
Chapter 14. Ultracontractive estimates and eigenvalues 14.1. Ultracontractivity and heat kernel bounds 14.2. Faber-Krahn inequalities 14.3. The Nash inequality 14.4. The function classes L and I' 14.5. Faber-Krahn implies ultracontractivity 14.6. Ultracontractivity implies a Faber-Krahn inequality 14.7. Lower bounds of higher eigenvalues 14.8. Faber-Krahn inequality on direct products Notes
365 365 367 368 371 380 381 384 386 388
Chapter 15. Pointwise Gaussian estimates I 15.1. L2-mean value inequality 15.2. Faber-Krahn inequality in balls 15.3. The weighted L2-norm of heat kernel 15.4. Faber-Krahn inequality in unions of balls 15.5. Off-diagonal upper bounds 15.6. Relative Faber-Krahn inequality and Li-Yau upper bounds Notes
391 391 397 399 402
357 359 362
404 409 414
x
CONTENTS
Chapter 16. Pointwise Gaussian estimates II 16.1. The weighted L2-norm of Ptf 16.2. Gaussian upper bounds of the heat kernel 16.3. On-diagonal lower bounds 16.4. Epilogue: alternative ways of constructing the heat kernel Notes and further references
417 417 422 424 428 429
Appendix A. Reference material A.1. Hilbert spaces A.2. Weak topology A.3. Compact operators A.4. Measure theory and integration A.5. Self-adjoint operators A.6. Gamma function
444 455
Bibliography
457
Some notation
475
Index
477
431 431
432 434 434
Preface The development of Mathematics in the past few decades has witnessed an unprecedented rise in the usage of the notion of heat kernel in the diverse
and seemingly remote sections of Mathematics. In the paper [217], titled "The ubiquitous heat kernel", Jay Jorgenson and Serge Lang called the heat kernel "... a universal gadget which is a dominant factor practically everywhere in mathematics, also in physics, and has very simple and powerful properties." Already in a first Analysis course, one sees a special role of the exponen-
tial function t -, eat. No wonder that a far reaching generalization of the exponential function - the heat semigroup {e-to}t>o, where A is a positive definite linear operator, plays similarly an indispensable role in Mathematics and Physics, not the least because it solves the associated heat equation u + Au = 0. If the operator A acts in a function space then frequently the action of the semigroup e-tA is given by an integral operator, whose kernel is called then the heat kernel of A. Needless to say that any knowledge of the heat kernel, for example, upper and/or lower estimates, can help in solving various problems related to the operator A and its spectrum, the solutions to the heat equation, as well as to the properties of the underlying space. If in addition the operator A is Markovian, that is, generates a Markov process (for example, this is the case when A is a second order elliptic differential operator), then one can use information about the heat kernel to answer questions concerning the process itself.
This book is devoted to the study of the heat equation and the heat kernel of the Laplace operator on Riemannian manifolds. Over 140 years ago, in 1867, Eugenio Beltrami [29] introduced the Laplace operator for a Riemannian metric, which is also referred to as the Laplace-Beltrami operator. The next key step towards analysis of this operator was made in 1954 by Matthew Gaffney [126], who showed that on geodesically complete manifolds the Laplace operator is essentially self-adjoint in L2. Gaffney also proved in [127] the first non-trivial sufficient condition for the stochastic completeness of the heat semigroup, that is, for the preservation of the Llnorm by this semigroup. Nearly at the same time S. Minakshisundaram [275] constructed the heat kernel on compact Riemannian manifolds using the parametrix method. Xi
xii
PREFACE
However, it was not until the mid-1970s when the geometric analysis of the Laplace operator and the heat equation was revolutionized in the groundbreaking work of Shing-Tong Yau, which completely reshaped the area. The culmination of this work was the proof by Li and Yau [258] in 1986 of the parabolic Harnack inequality and the heat kernel two-sided estimates
on complete manifolds of non-negative Ricci curvature, which stimulated further research on heat kernel estimates by many authors. Apart from the general wide influence on geometric analysis, the gradient estimates of Li and Yau motivated Richard Hamilton in his program on Ricci flow that eventually lead to the resolution of the Poincare conjecture by Grigory Perel'man, which can be viewed as a most spectacular application of heat kernels in geometry Another direction in heat kernel research was developed by Brian Davies [96] and Nick Varopoulos [353], [355], who used primarily function-analytic methods to relate heat kernel estimates to certain functional inequalities. The purpose of this book is to provide an accessible for graduate students introduction to the geometric analysis of the Laplace operator and the heat equation, which would bridge the gap between the foundations of the subject and the current research. The book focuses on the following aspects of these notions, which form separate chapters or groups of chapters. 1. Local geometric background. A detailed introduction to Riemannian geometry is given, with emphasis on construction of the Riemannian measure
and the Riemannian Laplace operator as an elliptic differential operator of second order, whose coefficients are determined by the Riemannian metric tensor. II. Spectral-theoretic properties. It is a crucial observation that the Laplace operator can be extended to a self-adjoint operator in L2 space, which enables one to invoke the spectral theory and functional calculus of self-adjoint operator and, hence, to construct the associated heat semigroup. To treat properly the domains of the self-adjoint Laplacian and that of the associated energy form, one needs the Sobolev function spaces on manifolds. A detailed introduction to the theory of distributions and Sobolev spaces is given in the setting of ' and Riemannian manifolds. III. Markovian properties and maximum principles. The above spectraltheoretic aspect of the Laplace operator exploits its ellipticity and symmetry. The fact that its order is 2 leads to the so-called Markovian properties, that is, to maximum and minimum principles for solutions to the Laplace equation and the heat equation. Various versions of maximum/minimum principles are presented in different parts of the book, in the weak, normal, and strong forms. The Markovian properties are tightly related to the diffusion Markov process associated with the Laplacian, where is reflected in
'Another striking application of heat kernels is the heat equation approach to the Atiyah-Singer index theorem - see [12], [132], [317].
PREFACE
xiii
the terminology. However, we do not treat stochastic processes here, leaving this topic for a prospective second volume. IV. Smoothness properties. As it is well-known, elliptic and parabolic
equations feature an added regularity phenomenon, when the degree of smoothness of solutions is higher than a priori necessary. A detailed account of the local regularity theory in R' (and consequently on manifolds) is given for elliptic and parabolic operators with smooth coefficients. This includes the study of the smoothness of solutions in the scale of Sobolev spaces of positive and negative orders, as well as the embedding theorems of Sobolev
spaces into Ck. The local estimates of solutions are used, in particular, to prove the existence of the heat kernel on an arbitrary manifold. V. Global geometric aspects. These are those properties of solutions which depend on the geometry of the manifold in the large, such as the essential self-adjointness of the Laplace operator (that is, the uniqueness of the self-adjoint extension), the stochastic completeness of the heat kernel, the uniqueness in the bounded Cauchy problem for the heat equation, and the quantitative estimates of solutions, in particular, of the heat kernel. A special attention is given to upper bounds of the heat kernel, especially the on-diagonal upper bounds with the long-time dependence, and the Gaussian upper bounds reflecting the long-distance behavior. The lower bounds as well as the related uniform Harnack inequalities and gradient estimates are omitted and will be included in the second volume. The prerequisites for reading of this books are Analysis in R' and the basics of Functional Analysis, including Measure Theory, Hilbert spaces, and Spectral Theorem for self-adjoint operators (the necessary material from Functional Analysis is briefly surveyed in Appendix). The book can be used as a source for a number of graduate lecture courses on the following topics: Riemannian Geometry, Analysis on Manifolds, Sobolev Spaces, Partial Differential Equations, Heat Semigroups, Heat Kernel Estimates, and others. In fact, it grew up from a graduate course "Analysis on Manifolds" that was taught by the author in 1995-2005 at Imperial College London and in 2002, 2005 at Chinese University of Hong Kong. The book is equipped with over 400 exercises whose level of difficulty ranges from "general nonsense" to quite involved. The exercises extend and illustrate the main text, some of them are used in the main text as lemmas.
The detailed solutions of the exercises (about 200 pages) as well as their LATEX sources are available on the web page of the AMS
http : //www.ams.org/bookpages/amsip-47 where also additional material on the subject of the book will be posted. The book has little intersection with the existing monographs on the subject. The above mentioned upper bounds of heat kernels, which were obtained mostly by the author in 1990s, are presented for the first time in a book format. However, the background material is also significantly differ= from the previous accounts. The main distinctive feature of the foundation
xiv
PREFACE
part of this book is a new method of construction of the heat kernel on an arbitrary Riemannian manifold. Since the above mentioned work by Minakshisundaram, the traditional method of constructing the heat kernel was by using the parametrix method (see, for example, [36], [37], [51], [317], [326]). However, a recent development of analysis on metric spaces, including fractals (see [22], [186], [187], [224]), has lead to emergence of other methods that are not linked so much to the local Euclidean structure of the underlying space. Although singular spaces are not treated here, we still employ whenever possible those methods that could be applied also on such spaces. This desire has resulted in the abandonment of the parametrix method as well as the tools using smooth hypersurfaces such as the coarea formula and the boundary regularity of solutions, sometimes at expense of more technical arguments. Consequently, many proofs in this book are entirely new, even for the old well-known properties of the heat kernel and the Green function. A number of key theorems are presented with more than one proof, which should provide enough flexibility for building lecture courses for audiences with diverse background. The material of Chapters 1 - 10, the first part of Chapter 11, and Chapter 13, belongs to the foundation of the subject. The rest of the book - the second part of Chapter 11, Chapters 12 and 14 - 16, contains more advanced results, obtained in the 1980s -1990s. Let us briefly describe the contents of the individual chapters. Chapters 1, 2, 6 contain the necessary material on the analysis in R'1 and the regularity theory of elliptic and parabolic equations in Rh. They do not depend on the other chapters and can be either read independently or used as a reference source on the subject. Chapter 3 contains a rather elementary introduction to Riemannian geometry, which focuses on the Laplace-Beltrami operator and the Green formula.
Chapter 4 introduces the Dirichlet Laplace operator as a self-adjoint operator in L2, which allows then to define the associated heat semigroup and to prove its basic properties. The spectral theorem is the main tool in this part. Chapter 5 treats the Markovian properties of the heat semigroup, which amounts to the chain rule for the weak gradient, and the weak maximum principle for elliptic and parabolic problems. The account here does not use the smoothness of solutions; hence, the main tools are the Sobolev spaces. Chapter 7 introduces the heat kernel on an arbitrary manifold as the integral kernel of the heat semigroup. The main tool is the regularity theory of Chapter 6, transplanted to manifolds. The existence of the heat kernel is derived from a local L2 ---+ L°° estimate of the heat semigroup, which in turn is a consequence of the Sobolev embedding theorem and the regularity theory. The latter implies also the smoothness of the heat kernel.
PREFACE
Chapter 8 deals with a number of issues related to the positivity or boundedness of solutions to the heat equation, which can be regarded as an extension of Chapter 5 using the smoothness of the solutions. It contains the results on the minimalin- of the heat semigroup and resolvent, the strong minimum principle for positive supersolutions, and some basic criteria for the stochastic completeness.
Chapter 9 treats the heat kernel as a fundamental solution. Based on that, some useful tools are introduced for verifying that a given function is the heat kernel, and some examples of heat kernels are given. Chapter 10 deals with basic spectral properties of the Dirichlet Laplacian. It contains the variational principle for the bottom of the spectrum )u, the positivity of the bottom eigenfunction, the discreteness of the spectrum and the positivity of Al in relatively compact domains, and the characterization of the long time behavior of the heat kernel in terms of Al. Chapter 11 contains the material related to the use of the geodesic distance. It starts with the properties of Lipschitz functions, in particular, their weak differentiability. which allows then to use Lipschitz functions as test functions in various proofs. The following results are proved using the distance function: the essential self-adjointness of the Dirichlet Laplacian on geodesically complete manifolds, the volume tests for the stochastic completeness and parabolicity, and the estimates of the bottom of the spectrum. Chapter 12 is the first of the four chapters dealing with upper bounds of the heat kernel. It contains the results on the integrated Gaussian estimates that are valid on an arbitrary manifold: the integrated maximum principle, the Davies-Gaffney inequality, Takeda's inequality, and some consequences.
The proofs use the carefully chosen test functions based on the geodesic distance.
Chapter 13 is devoted to the Green function of the Laplace operator, which is constructed by integrating the heat kernel in time. Using the Green function together with the strong minimum principle allows to prove the local Harnack inequality for of-harmonic functions and its consequences convergence theorems. As an example of application, the existence of the ground state on an arbitrary manifold is proved. Logically this Chapter belongs to the foundations of the subject and should have been placed much
earlier in the sequence of the chapters. However, the proof of the local Harnack inequality requires one of the results of Chapter 12, which has necessitated the present order. Chapter 14 deals with the on-diagonal upper bounds of the heat kernel, which requires additional hypothesis on the manifold in question. Normally such hypotheses are stated in terms of some isoperimetric or functional inequalities. We use here the approach based on the Faber-Krahn inequality for the bottom eigenvalue, which creates useful links with the spectral prop-
erties. The main result is that, to a certain extent, the on-diagonal upper bounds of the heat kernel are equivalent to the Faber-Krahn inequalities.
xvi
PREFACE
Chapter 15 continues the topic of the Gaussian estimates. The main technical result is Moser's mean-value inequality for solutions of the heat equation, which together with the integrated maximum principle allows to obtain pointwise Gaussian upper bounds of the heat kernel. We consider such estimates in the following three settings: arbitrary manifolds, the manifolds with the global Faber-Krahn inequality, and the manifolds with the relative Faber-Krahn inequality that leads to the Li-Yau estimates of the heat kernel. Chapter 16 introduces alternative tools to deal with the Gaussian estimates. The main point is that the Gaussian upper bounds can be deduced directly from the on-diagonal upper bounds, although in a quite elaborate manner. As an application of these techniques, some on-diagonal lower estimates are proved. Finally, Appendix A contains some reference material as was already mentioned above. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. The book was typeset in LATFY using an excellent editor Scientific Workplace by TCI Software Research and MacKichan Software. In the process of writing this book I was affiliated (permanently or temporarily) with the following institutions: Imperial College London, Institute of Henry Poincare Paris, Chinese University of Hong Kong, Research Institute of Mathematical Sciences Kyoto, Institute of Control Sciences Moscow, University of Bielefeld, and ETH Zurich, with the support of the appropriate funding bodies. However, the major part of the book was written during my three stays,
totalling to twelve months, at the Institute of Mathematical Sciences of the Chinese University of Hong Kong, and I am very grateful to Professor Shing-Tung Yau for giving me that excellent opportunity. His support and encouragement have been paramount to me at all stages of my work. Writing about maximum principle brings up memories of my teacher Eugene Landis. His masterful use of maximum principles has never been surpassed. My entire education in Analysis was hugely influenced by Landis, which has left an imprint on the style and choice of the material for this book. A special thank is due to the late Serge Lang for useful discussions of the structure of the book. It is a great pleasure to thank those colleagues of mine who have fruitfully affected my work in various ways: Martin Barlow, Alexander Bendikov, Isaac Chavel, Thierry Coulhon, Jozef Dodziuk, Brian Davies, Wolfhard Hansen, Elton Pei Hsu, Jiaxin Hu, Vladimir Kondratiev, Takashi Kumagai, Ka-Sing Lau, Peter Li, Terry Lyons, Vladimir Maz'ya, Minoru Murata, Nikolai Nadirashvili, Michael Rockner, Laurent Saloff-Coste, Theo Sturm, Nina Ural'tseva.
PREFACE
xvii
Last but not least I am indebted to my family and especially to my wife Tatiana for inspiration and support. Alexander Grigor'yan London - Paris - Hong Kong - Kyoto - Moscow - Bielefeld - Zurich 2002-2009
CHAPTER 1
Laplace operator and the heat equation in Rn The Laplace operator in R' is a partial differential operator defined by n (9 2
0=
2)
k=1
axk
where x1, ..., xn are the Cartesian coordinates in R'2. This operator plays a crucial role in many areas of mathematics and physics. In this Chapter we present some basic facts about the Laplace operator and the associated heat equation to motivate a similar study on manifolds.
1.1. Historical background The Laplace operator came to Mathematics from Physics. Laplace equation. Pierre-Simon Laplace discovered in 1784-85 that a gravitational field can be represented as the gradient of a potential function
U (x), and that this function satisfies in a free space the equation AU = 0. This equation is referred to as the Laplace equation. The gravitational potential of a particle placed at the origin o E 1[83 is given by U(x) _ -11 where m is the mass of the particle. It is easy to verify that A -x- = 0 in R3 \ {o} whence AU = 0 follows. The potential of a body located in an open set Sl C R3 is given by
Ux Ix_y, () =-- fn p(y)dy where p is the mass density of the body. Then it follows that AU(x) = 0 outside 11.
Heat equation. Fourier's law of heat conductivity ("Theorie analytique de la chaleur" 1, 1822) implies that the temperature u (t, x) at time t and point x c R3 satisfies the heat equation
au
k0u, at =
in any region that is free of sources and sinks of the heat (here k > 0 is the coefficient of heat conductivity). 1"The analytic theory of heat" 1
2
1. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND THE HEAT EQUATION IN
Wave equation. It follows from Maxwell's equations ("Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism", 1873), that each component u = u (t, x) of an electromagnetic field satisfies the wave equation, 02u
at2 =
c
2 2d,
in any region that is free of charges and currents (here c is the speed of light. The wave equation appears also in other physical phenomena related to wave propagation. Diffusion equation. Albert Einstein suggested a mathematical explanation of the Brownian motion in his paper "Uber die von der molekulakinetischen Theorie der Warme gefoderte Bewegung von in ruhenden fliissigkeite suspendierten Teilchen" 2 published in Annalen der Physik, 1905. He showed
that the density u (t, x) of the probability that the particle started at the origin o3 reaches the point x in time t satisfies the diffusion equation 8u
_DAu
at (here D > 0 is the diffusion coefficient). Using this equation, Einstein predicted that the mean displacement of the particle after time t was 4Dt. The latter was verified experimentally by Jean Perrin in 1908, for which he was honored with the 1926 Nobel Prize for Physics. That work was a strong argument in favor of the molecular-kinetic theory and thereby confirmed the atomic structure of matter. Schrodinger equation. In 1926, Erwin Schrodinger developed a new approach for describing motion of elementary particles in Quantum Mechanics. Developing further the idea of Louis de Broglie that the motion of a particle is governed by the wave function (t, x), Schrodinger formulated the following equation describing the dynamic of the wave function of a spin-less particle:
iha =-
2 mA0+U0,
where m is the mass of the particle, U is the potential field, It is the Planck
constant, and i =
He then applied this equation to the hydrogen
atom and predicted many of its properties with remarkable accuracy. Erwin Schrodinger shared the 1933 Nobel Prize for Physics with Paul Dirac.
1.2. The Green formula The Laplace operator appears in many applications (including all the physical laws) through the Green formula, which is a consequence of the divergence theorem. Let Sl be a bounded open subset of Rn with smooth 2 "On the motion of small particles suspended in liquids at rest required by the molecular-kinetic theory of heat"
1.2. THE GREEN FORMULA
3
boundary. Then the divergence theorem says that, for any vector field F that is C' in Q and continuous in 5l,
fF.vda=fdivFdx, in,
(1.1)
where a is the boundary area on a52 and v is the outward normal unit vector field on 852.
For any continuous function f defined in an open subset 52 of III', define its support by
suppf ={xE1: f (x)40},
(1.2)
where the closure is taken in Q. If u, v E C1 (52) and one of the supports of u and v is compact then the following integration-by-parts formula takes place:
a k v dx = - ( u av
dx,
(1.3)
which follows from (1.1) for F = uvek, where ek is the unit vector in the direction of the axis xk. If u, v E C2 (52) and one of the supports of u and v is compact then the following Green formula takes place:
fuvdx=-fVu.Vvdx=fuvdx,
(1.4)
which follows from (1.1) for F = uVv and F = vVu. Alternatively, (1.4) follows easily from (1.3):
ft
J
n
2
f
uAv dx =
u jx2
dx = - E f
k
k=1
au Ov
a x axk
dx = -
Vu Vv dxk=1
Exercises. 1.1. Denote by Sr (x) the sphere of radius r > 0 centered at the point x E Rn, that is
Sr(x)={yERn : Ix - yj = r}. Let a be the (n - 1)-volume on Sr (x), and note that a (Sr (x)) = warn-1 where w, is the area of the unit (n - 1)-sphere in R'. Prove that, for any f E C2 (Rn) and for all x E Rn, 2
wnr _1
sr(x)
fdv -f(x)=Of(x)2n+o(r2) as
(1.5)
1.2. Denote a round ball in R' by
BR(x)_{yER'2:Ix-yj
as R -- 0.
(1.6)
1. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND THE HEAT EQUATION IN Rn
4
1.3. The heat equation Our main subject will be the heat equation
an
Au, at =
where u = u(t, x), t varies in an interval of R, and x E R. According to the classification theory of partial differential equations, the Laplace operator belongs to the family of elliptic operators, whereas the heat operator at 0 belongs to the family of parabolic operators. The difference between these families manifests in many properties of the equations, in particular, which boundary and initial value problems are well-posed. One of the most interesting problems associated with the heat equation is the Cauchy problem (known also as the initial value problem): given a function f (x) on IRh, find u(t, x) such that
-
at = -Au
in R+ x IR7z,
17
where the function u is sought in the class C2(J + x IRTh) so that the heat
equation makes sense. The exact meaning of the initial data u1t=0 = f depends on the degree of smoothness of the function f. In this section, we consider only continuous functions f, and in this case ult=o = f means, by definition, that u (t, x) -+ f (x) as t -* 0 locally uniformly in x. Equivalently, this means that the function u (t, x), extended to t = 0 by setting u (0, x) _ f (x), is continuous in [0, oc) x R. We investigate here the existence and uniqueness in the Cauchy problem in the class of bounded solutions.
1.3.1. Heat kernel and existence in the Cauchy problem. The following function plays the main role in the existence problem:
_ (4)n/2 exP
(H2)
(1.8)
where t > 0 and x E R. The function pt (x) is called the Gauss- Weierstrass function or the heat kernel (see Fig. 1.1 and 1.2). The main properties of the heat kernel are stated in the following lemma.
LEMMA 1.1. The function pt (x) is C°° smooth in IR+ x IR', positive, satisfies the heat equation apt
at =
An,
the identity
r Jan
pt(x)dx - 1,
(1.10)
1.3. THE HEAT EQUATION
-5
2.5
0
-2.5
5
x
FIGURE 1.1. The graphs of the function x H pt (x) in IR for
t = 1 (thin), t = 3 (medium), and t = 9 (thick).
01T
-T D5
1.5
FIGURE 1.2. The graphs of the function t +-4 pt (x) in K
x = 0 (left) and x = 1 (right) and, for any r > 0,
pt(x)dx-+0 ast-+0. PROOF. The smoothness and positivity of pt (x) are ch s - - = to verify the equation (1.9) using the function
n
u (t, x) := log pt x = - log t - `? Differentiating the identity pt = eu, we obtain apt at
= au eu and at
a2pt axk
aZU axk
1. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND THE HEAT EQUATION IN R-
6
Denoting by Vuthe gradient of u, that is 8u au axn we see that the equation (1.9) is equivalent to au =AU +IVu12.
u-
(ax1'...)
(1.12)
at
Computing the derivatives of u,
au
n
at
2t + 4t2
1x12
and
-n, Vu=-1 (x1i...,x7), 2t 2t
Du
IxI2
IVU12= 4t2 '
we obtain (1.12). To prove (1.10), let us use the identity e-Sz
foo
ds=N/i
(1.13)
(cf. Example A.1), which implies by a change in the integral that e-s 2 / 4t ds =
Reducing the integration in Il 1
fR
pt(x)dx = (4,rt)n/2
1
(47-t)/2
47t.
to repeated integrals, we obtain
f exp (
x+...+x2 /
4t
dx1... dxn,
(v)Th
= 1.
Finally, to verify (1.11), let us make the change y = t-1'2x in the integral (1.11). Since dy = t-n12dx, the factor t_n/2 cancels and we obtain
f
pt(x)dx =
IxI>r}
1(4w)n/
f
e2/dy.
(1.14)
Iyl>t-1/2r}
Since the integral in the right hand side is convergent and t-1/2r -4 oo as t -3 oo, we obtain that it tends to 0 as t -* oo, which was to be proved. REMARK 1.2. It is obvious from (1.14) that, in fact,
{ 1xf>r}
pt(x)dx < const exp
(\ -
r2 J
so that the integral tends to 0 as t -3 0 faster than any power of t.
1.3. THE HEAT EQUATION
7
For any two continuous functions f, g in R'", their convolution f * g is defined by
f *g(x) =
ff(x_Y)9(Y)dYn
provided the integral converges for all x E Rn. It turns out that the Cauchy problem can be solved by taking the convolution of the heat kernel with the initial function f.
THEOREM 1.3. If f is a bounded continuous function in JR then the following function
u (t, x) = pt * f (x) is CO° smooth in I[8+ X Rn, satisfies the heat equation
(1.15)
au = Du
at
and the initial data no = f in the sense that u (t, x) -+ f (x) as t -+ 0
(1.16)
locally uniformly in x. Moreover, the function u is bounded and, for all t > 0 and x E lien,
inf f < u (t, x) < sup f.
(1.17)
PROOF. By the definition of the convolution, we have u (t, x) =
f
pt (x - y) f (y) dy = IR,
x
exp n/2
I
4tyl
f (y) dy (1.18)
The function (t, x) pt (x - y) is infinitely smooth in R+ x R whence the same property of u follows from the fact that we can interchange the order of differentiation in t and x and integration in (1.18) (note that the integral in (1.18) converges locally uniformly in (t, x) and so does any integral obtained by differentiation of the integrand in t and x, thanks to the boundedness of f). In particular, using (1.9) we obtain at
- AU
=L Cat -O Jpt(x-y)f(y)dy=0.
IRn
Let us verify (1.16). Using the identity (1.10), we can write
u(t,x) - f(x) = J pt(x - y)f(y)dy - f Pt(x - y)f(x)dy =
f n pt(x - y)(f(y) -
f(x))dy
Since f is continuous at x, for any e > 0 there exists 8 > 0 such that Iy - x1 < 6
If(x) - f(y)I < E.
1. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND THE HEAT EQUATION IN R"
8
Furthermore, since f is locally uniformly continuous, the same b can be chosen for all x varying in a bounded set. Then we have filly-x1<51
<E
pt(x - y)(f(y) - f(x))dy
fR
pt(x-y)dy=e
and, changing z = x - y,
f
< 2 sup if I
Pt (x - y)(f(y) - f(x))dy
I y-xl >b}
J
pt(z)dz.
The right hand side in the last integral tends to 0 as t -+ 0 by (1.11). Hence, we conclude that
f
Pt(x-y)(f(y)- f(x))dy-- Oast-- O,
and the convergence is local uniform in x, which proves (1.16). Finally, the positivity of the heat kernel and (1.10) imply that
u (x) < sup f J pt(x - y)dy = sup f and in the same way u > inf f.
11
REMARK 1.4. It is clear from the proof that if f (x) is uniformly continthen u (t, x) -+ f (x) uniformly in x E R".
uous in I1
Exercises. The next two questions provide a step-by-step guide for alternative proofs of Lemma
1.1 and (a version of) Theorem 1.3, using the Fourier transform. Recall that, for any is defined by function u E L' (R'), its Fourier transform u ii
J
(x) dx.
R"
Using the Plancherel identity, the Fourier transform extends to all u E L2 In all questions here, pt (x) is the heat kernel in R' defined by (1.8). 1.3. Prove the following properties of the heat kernel. (a)
A)=
e-tIEIZ
(1.19)
(b) fR"pt(x)dx=1.
(c) For all t, s > 0, pt * ps = pt+s.
(c) a = Opt 1.4. Fix a function f E L2 (R") and set ut = pt * f for any t > 0. Prove the following properties of the function ut. (a) ut (S) = e-t,l2f
(b) ut (x) is smooth and satisfies the heat equation in L. x k'. (c) IludL2 < JIf1 L2 for all t > 0. (d) u (t, x) -> f (x) as t -+ 0 in the norm of L2 (k"). (e) If f E L' (IIR") then u (t, x) -+ f (x) as t -+ 0 uniformly in x E 118".
1.5. Prove the following properties of the heat kernel. (a) For any e > 0, pt (x) 0 as t -4 0 uniformly in {x : jxj > e}.
1.3. THE HEAT EQUATION
9
(b) pt (x) -3 0 as x -4 oo uniformly in t E (0,+oo). (c) For any E > 0, pt (x) is continuous in {x : jxj > E} uniformly in t e (0, +oo).
1.3.2. Maximum principle and uniqueness in the Cauchy problem. The uniqueness in the bounded Cauchy problem will follow from the maximum principle, which is of its own interest. Let U C R' be a bounded open set. Fix some positive real T and consider the cylinder r = (0, T) x U lf8'+. The boundary aF can be split into three parts: the top as a subset in {T} x U, the bottom {0} x U and the lateral boundary [0, T] x aU (where aU is the boundary of U in R"). Define the parabolic boundary a r of the cylinder r as the union of its bottom and the lateral boundary, that is
apF := ({0} x u) U ([0,T] x au) (see Fig. 1.3). Note that apF is a closed subset of R'+1
FIGURE 1.3. The parabolic boundary apr' contains the bot-
tom and the lateral surface of the cylinder r, but does not include the top.
LEMMA 1.5. (Parabolic maximum principle) If u E C2 (F) n c (r) and
au
at
-Au<0inF
then sup u = sup U.
r
apr
In particular, if u < 0 on apF then u < 0 in F.
(1.20)
1. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND THE HEAT EQUATION IN I[ -
10
By changing u to -u, we obtain the minimum principle: if
au-Au >0inr then
inf u = inf u.
r
a'r
In particular, if u solves the heat equation in F then the maximum and minimum of u in r are attained also in apr. PROOF. Assume first that u satisfies a strict inequality in I': Tu
at
- AU < 0.
(1.21)
By slightly reducing T, we can assume that (1.21) holds also at the top of r. Let (to, xo) be a point of maximum of function u in r. Let us show that (to, xo) E apr, which will imply (1.20). If (to, xo) V 6pr then (to, xo) lies
either inside r or at the top of r. In the both cases, xo c r and to > 0. u (to, x) in U attains the maximum at x = xo, we
Since the function x have
82u
M (to, xo) < 0 for all j = 1, ..., n whence Du (to, xo) < 0.
FIGURE 1.4. The restriction of u(t, x) to the lines in the direction xj and in the direction of t (downwards) attains the maximum at (t0i xo).
On the other hand, the function t u (t, xo) in (0, to] attains its maximum at t = to whence 8u at (to, xo) > 0
1.3. THE HEAT EQUATION
11
(if to < T then, in fact, at (to, xo) = 0). Hence, we conclude that
au
at
- Au (to, xo) > 0,
contradicting (1.21).
Consider now the general case. Set uE = u - et where E is a positive parameter. Clearly, we have atu
Hence, the previous case applies to the function uE, and we conclude that
sup (u - et) = sup(u-et). r a'r Letting c -3 0 we obtain (1.20). REMARK 1.6. The statement remains true for a more general operator at
Ebjax
j=1
where bj are arbitrary functions in F. Indeed, the first order terms vanish at the point (to, xo) because a (to, xo) = 0, and the proof goes through unchanged.
Now we can prove the uniqueness theorem.
THEOREM 1.7. For any continuous function f (x), the Cauchy problem (1.7) has at most one bounded solution u (t, x). PROOF. It suffices to prove that if u is a bounded solution to the Cauchy
problem with f = 0 then u - 0. Compare u to the function
v(t,x) _ lx12+2nt, which is non-negative and obviously satisfies the heat equation av
- Ov=O. at Fix e > 0 and compare u and Ev in a cylinder r _ (0, T) x BR. At the bottom of the cylinder (that is, at t = 0) we have u = 0 < Ev. At the lateral boundary of the cylinder (that is, at +xj = R) we have u(x) < C where C := sup Jul, and Ev(x) > ER2. Choosing R so big that eR2 > C, we obtain that u < Ev on the lateral boundary of F. Hence, the function u - ev satisfies the heat equation in I, and u - Ev < 0 on the parabolic boundary aF. By Lemma 1.5, we conclude that u - Ev < 0 in F. Letting R --3 oo and T -+ oo we obtain u - ev < 0 in R+ x R'. Letting e -3 0, we obtain u < 0. In the same way u > 0, whence u - 0.
1. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND THE HEAT EQUATION IN R"
12
FIGURE 1.5. Comparison of functions u and Ev on 8PF
'REMARK 1.8. In fact, the uniqueness class for solutions to the Cauchy problem is much wider than the set of bounded functions. For example, the Tikhonov theorem says that if u (t, x) solves the Cauchy problem with f = 0 and
Ju(t,x) I
0, x E R7z, then u - 0. We do not prove this theorem here because it will easily follow from a much more general result of Chapter 11 (see Corollary 11.10).
Theorems 1.3 and 1.7 imply that, for any bounded continuous function the Cauchy problem has a unique bounded solution, given by pt * f. Let us show an amusing example of application of this result to the heat kernel.
f
,
EXAMPLE 1.9. Let us prove that, for all 0 < s < t, Pt-s * Ps = Pt.
(1.22)
(cf. Exercise 1.3). Let f be continuous function in R' with compact support. By Theorem 1.3, the function ut = pt * f solves the bounded Cauchy problem
with the initial function f. Consider now the Cauchy problem with the initial function us. Obviously, the function ut gives the bounded solution to
this problem at time t - s. On the other hand, the solution at time t - s is given by pt-s * us. Hence, we obtain the identity Ut = pt-s * us,
that is
pt*f=pt-s*(ps*f)
NOTES
13
By the associative law of convolution (which follows just by changing the order of integration), we have pt-s * (p3 * f) = (pt-s * ps) * f, whence
Pt * f = (pt-s * ps) * f. Since this is true for all functions f as above, we conclude that pt = Pt-s *P
Naturally, this identity can be proved by a direct computation, but such a computation is not very simple.
Exercises. 1.6. (Elliptic maximum principle) Let 1 be a bounded open set in R', and consider the
following differential operator in f2
L=A+>b;(x)"
,
j=1
where bj are smooth bounded functions in Q. (a) Show that there exists a function v E C2 (SZ) fl C (S2) such that Lv > 0 in 0. (b) Prove that if u E C2 (f) fl C (S2) and Lu > 0 in S2 then sup u = sup U. 0 ao 1.7. Evaluate the bounded solution u (t, x) of the Cauchy problem with the initial function f (x) = exp(- Ix12).
Notes The material of this Chapter is standard and can be found in many textbooks on partial differential equations - see for example, [38], [118], [121], [130], [243].
CHAPTER 2
Function spaces in Rn We have collected in this Chapter some properties of distributions and Sobolev spaces in R'Z mostly related to the techniques of mollifiers. The knowledge of the Lebesgue measure, Lebesgue integration, and Hilbert spaces
is assumed here. The reader is referred to Appendix A for the necessary background.
The full strength of the results of this Chapter will be used only in Chapter. 6 in the regularity theory of elliptic and parabolic equations. For the next Chapter 3, we will need only the material of Section 2.2 (the cutoff functions and partition of unity). In Chapter 4, we will introduce distributions and Sobolev spaces on manifolds, where the understanding of similar notions in R7L will be an advantage. At technical level, we will need there only the material of Section 2.3 (in fact, only Corollary 2.5). Chapter 5 does not use any results from the present Chapter. Sections 2.1-2.6 are self-contained. Section 2.7 is somewhat away from the mainstream of this Chapter (although it depends on the results of the preceding sections) and can be considered as a continuation of Chapter 1. Also, it provides a certain motivation for the L2-Cauchy problem on manifolds, which will be considered in Section 4.3. Technically, the results of Section 2.7 are used to prove the embedding theorems in Chapter 6, although alternative proofs are available as well.
2.1. Spaces Ck and LP Let xl, ..., xn be the Cartesian coordinates in R. We use the following short notation for partial derivatives: a 2
09x2
and, for any multiindex a = (al, ..., an) 0909
aIal (ax1)ai (09x2)«2 ...
a11a22...ann
(2.1)
(ax-)an where jal := al + ... + an is the order of the multiindex. In particular, if c e:= 0 then aau = u. For any open set c C R, C (SZ) denotes the class of all continuous functions in S2, and Ck (1) denotes the class of all functions f from C (Il) such as f E C (52) for all IaI < k (here k is a non-negative integer). Let 15
16
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN Rn
C°° (S2) be the intersection of all Ck (52), and Co (S2) be the subspace of C°° (S2), which consists of functions with compact support in 0. The sup-norm of any function u E C (52) is defined by IIuIIc(c) := sup Iul,
and the Ck-norm of u c Ck (9) is defined by II uII Ck(n)
max sup I BauI .
Despite the terminology, IIuIICk(c) is not a norm in Ck (S2) because it may take the value oo. In fact, the topology of the space Ck (S2) is defined by the family of seminorms JuIJck(q/) where S2' is any open subset of S2 such that
f2' C Q. The relation E C i (compact inclusion) means that the closure E of the set E is compact and E C Q. Denote by p the Lebesgue measure in lR'. By "a measurable function" we always mean a function measurable with respect to measure p. For any open set S2 C lien, LP (S2) stands for the Lebesgue space LP (S2, p), 1 < p <
oo (see Section A.4.5). The local Lebesgue space Li (S2) is the set of all measurable functions f in S2 such that f C LP (S2') for any open set S2' C= Q. Clearly, L, ,,, (S2) is a linear space, and it has a natural topology, defined by the family of seminorms II f I ILP(Q,) where S2' runs over all open sets compactly
contained in Q. If V and W are two linear topological spaces then an embedding of V to W is a linear continuous injection V - W. We will apply this notion when V, W are spaces of functions on the same set and a natural embedding of V
to W is obtained by identifying functions from V as elements from W. In this case, we denote the embedding by V" W and will normally consider V as a subspace of W (although, in general, the topology of V is stronger than that of W). Obviously, we have the embeddings Ck (S2) "C (S2)
* L' (S) .
For another example, let S2' be an open subset of Q. Any function from f c LP (S2') can be identified as a function from LP (S2) just by setting f = 0 in S2\52'. Since this mapping from LP (52') to LP (S2) is injective and bounded (in fact, norm preserving), we obtain a natural embedding LP (S2') -LP (0). One can, of course, define also a mapping from LP (0) to LP (S2') just by restricting a function on S2 to f2'. Although this mapping is bounded, it is not injective and, hence, is not an embedding. CLAIM. L o° (S2) -Li ° (52) for any p E [l, +00].
2.2. CONVOLUTION AND PARTITION OF UNITY
17
PROOF. Indeed, for all f E L'10C (2) and S2' C S2, we have by the Holder inequality IIfIILI(Q') = f 1' IfI d/c <- p
1/p (Q')1-1/P
IfI'dp)
= CIIfIILP(Q'), (2.2)
where C := it (Q')1-1/p < oc (strictly speaking, the above computations is valid only if p < oo, but the case p = cc is trivial - cf. Exercise 2.1). Therefore, any function from LLoc (S2) belongs also to L' c (Q), which defines
a natural linear injection from Loo (12) to Lloc (S2), and this injection is continuous by (2.2).
It follows that all the function spaces considered above embed into floc (Rn).
Exercises. 2.1. Prove that L', (1) " L o (52) for all 1 < p < q < +oo. 2.2. Let { fk} be a sequence of functions from LP (2) that converges to a function f in LP norm, 1 < p < oo. Prove that if fk > 0 a.e. then also f > 0 a.e..
2.2. Convolution and partition of unity
Llc
The purpose on this section is to approximate functions from L' and by smooth functions. The main technical tool for that is the notion of
convolution. Recall that, for any two measurable functions f, g on IR7L, their convolution f * g is defined by
f*g(x)= f f (x - y) g (y) dp (y),
(2.3)
provided the integral converges in the Lebesgue sense. Note that the function f (x - y) g (y) is measurable as a function of x, y and, by Fubini's theorem, if the above integral converges then it defines a measurable function of x.
Denote by B,. (x) the ball of radius r centered at x, that is, B, (x) = {y E Rl : Ix - yI < r}.
LEMMA 2.1. If f E L' (Rn) and cp E Coo' (Rn) then the convolution f * co belongs to C0° (Rn) and, for any multiindex a, as (f * y0) = f * 8acp.
(2.4)
Also, if supp cp C Br (0) then supp (f * (p) is contained in the r-neighborhood of supp f .
PROOF. Assuming that supp co C B,. (0) and changing z = x-y in (2.3), we obtain f * cp (x) =
f
n
f (z) co (x - z) dz =
f (z) cp (x - z) dz.
(2.5)
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN R''z
18
Since f E L' (Br (x)) and cp is bounded, we see that the integral in the right hand side converges for all x. If x is away from the r-neighborhood of supp f then Br (x) and supp f are disjoint, whence it follows that f * cp (x) = 0, which proves the second claim of Lemma 2.1. Let us show that f * co is continuous. If x' is close enough to x, namely,
x - x' < r then we have
f * (x') =
f
(x' - z) dz =
f (z)
Br (x' )
/
JB2r (x
f (z) p (
- z) dz.
Since f is integrable in B2r (x) and cp (x' - z) cp (x - z) as x' -+ x, we can pass to the limit in the above integral and obtain that f * cp (x') -f f * cp (x). Let us show that the derivative aj (f * (p) exists and is equal to f * aj cp. If h is a non-zero vector in the direction xj then we have
f*cp(x+h)- f*cp(x) uhf
-
f(z)10 (x+h-z)-cp(x-z)dz. Jean
Jhf
Again, if lhi is small enough then the integration can be restricted to z E B2r (x). Since f is integrable in this ball and
cp(x+h-z) -cp(x -z)
ajcp(x - z)
{hl
as h -3 0, we can pass to the limit under the integral and conclude that
-f*cp(x)
lof
f
lf
f (z) aj w (x - z) dx
f9jpWApplying the same argument to f * aj cp and continuing by induction, we obtain (2.4) for an arbitrary a and f * co E C°° (IRn).
We say that a function cp E Co (R') is a mollifier if supp cp C BI (0), cp > 0, and fMa
n
For example, the following function
P (x) =
cexp - (Ixl2-1/4)
I
Jxf < 1/2
ixJ > 1/2
0,
is a mollifier, for a suitable normalizing constant c > 0 (see Fig. 2.1). If cp is a mollifier then, for any 0 < s < 1, the function xl E
is also a mollifier, and supp co, C B, (0).
2.2. CONVOLUTION AND PARTITION OF UNITY
-0.25
-0.5
0
19
0.5
0.25
x
FIGURE 2.1. The mollifier (2.7) in JR.
THEOREM 2.2. (Partition of unity) Let K be a compact subset of Rn be a finite family of open sets covering K. Then there exand
ist non-negative functions cpj E Co (U;) such that Ej cps = 1 in an open neighbourhood of K and r_j cps < 1 in JRn.
Such a family of functions cps is called a partition of unity at K subordinate to the covering {Uj}. PROOF. Consider first the case when the family {U;} consists of a single set U. Then we will construct a function V% E Co (U) such that 0 < b < 1 and V - 1 in an open neighbourhood of K. Such a function is called a cutoff function of K in U. Let V be an open neighborhood of K such that V C U, and set f = 1V. Fix a mollifier W. Since f E Ll (RT), by Lemma 2.1 we have f * co, E C°° (Rn). If E is small enough then f * co is supported in U so that f * W, E Co (U). Clearly, f * cps > 0 and .f * We (x) < sup If I
f
yE (y) dy = supIfI = I.
Finally, if E is small enough then, for any x E K, we have B, (x) C V, whence f IBE(x) = 1 /and
f *cpE(x)= J
f (z)cpe(x-z)dz= /
BE (x)
Hence, the function V) = f * c. p, small enough.
W.(x-z)dz=1.
JBE (x)
all the requirements, provided E is
Consider now the general case of an arbitrary finite family { Uj }. Any
point x E K belongs to a set Uj. Hence, there is a ball Bx centered at x and such that Bx C= U;. The family of balls {Bx}XEK obviously covers K.
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN Rn
20
Select a finite subfamily with the same property, say {B,z}, and denote by Vj the union of those balls B,z for which B,,i C= Uj (see Fig. 2.2).
Set Vj is the union of balls
FIGURE 2.2. Function 'j is a cutoff function of Vj in Uj.
By construction, the set Vj is open, Vj C Uj, and the union of all sets Vj covers K. Let Oj b/e' a cutoff function of Vj in Uj, and set
p1=01) (P2=Y'2(1-Y'1), ..., Ok=Ok(1- 1)...(1-V)k-1) Obviously, coj E Co (Uj) and cpj > 0. It is easy to check the identity 1 - Y, cpj = (1 - 01) ... (I - 't/>k),
(2.8)
which, in particular, implies > goj < 1. Since 1-'bj = 0 on Vj, (2.8) implies also that >, cps = 1 on the union of sets Vj and, in particular, on K.
2.3. Approximation of integrable functions by smooth ones THEOREM 2.3. For any 1 < p < oo and for any open set Sl C R1, Co' (fl) is dense in LP (1), and the space L' (cl) is separable. PROOF. We need to show that any function f E LP (11) can be approximated in LP norm by a sequence of functions from C0 (fl). Recall that a simple function in Q is a linear combination of the indicator functions lE where E C Q is a measurable set with finite measure. Since the class of simple functions in dense in LP (fl) (see Section A.4.3), it suffices to prove the above claim in the case f = 1E. By the regularity of the Lebesgue measure (see Section A.4.1), for any e > 0 there exist a compact set K and an open set U C Sl such that
KCECU, and
g (U)
2.3. APPROXIMATION OF INTEGRABLE FUNCTIONS BY SMOOTH ONES
21
Let 0 E Co (U) be a cutoff function of K in U. Then 0 = 1 = 1E on K, = lE = 0 outside U, whereas in U \ K we have I1E - 01 < 1. Therefore,
which settles the first claim. To prove the separability of LP (Q), consider the following functions in LP (Q): k
(2.9)
ai1Qz
where k is a positive integer, ai are rationals, and Qi are disjoint open boxes in Q with rationals coordinates of the corners'. Clearly, the family of all such functions is countable. Let us show that this family is dense in LP (il), which will prove the separability. As in the first part, it suffices to prove that, for any measurable set E C Q of finite measure, the indicator function 1E can be approximated in LP norm by functions (2.9). Let E, K, U be as in the first part of the proof. Fix a rational 8 > 0 and consider the lattice 6Z', which induces the splitting of Rn into the cubes of the size J. Let Q1, ..., Qk be those (open) cubes that are contained in Q. If b is small enough then the closed cubes Q1, ..., Qk cover the compact set K. Hence, k
k
,f
Y"
(K)
,,rr
f'" i=1
(Qi) <
/t
Y"
(U)
i=1
whence it follows that II1E - > 1QtilILP i=1
which finishes the proof.
Mollifiers allow to construct smooth approximations to integrable function with additional properties. The following lemma has numerous extensions to other functional classes (cf. Lemma 2.10, Theorems 2.11, 2.13, 2.16, and Exercise 2.18). LEMMA 2.4. Let cp be a mollifier.
(i) If f is a uniformly continuous function on R' then f * gyp, f as c -4 0. If f E C (Wi) then f * co -+ f ass -+ 0 locally uniformly. (ii) If f E L' (Rn) then also f * cp c L' (Rn) and f*cpE
Lll f ass-+0.
(2.10)
1Here a box in 1R' is a set of the form Ii x ... X In where each Ik is a bounded open interval (ak, bk) C R- We choose the boxes with rational ak, bk.
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN
22
(iii) If f E L1 (Rn) then
f*
n
L1
f as s -+ 0.
)
o6
PROOF. (i) We have
f
(x)
f 0)f (x-y)wE(y)dy-f
=
(x - y) - f (x)) (pe (y) dy
The uniform continuity of f yields I f (x - y) - f (x) l -- 0 ass -- > 0, sup xERn,jyj<e
which implies f * o f. If f E C (Rn) then f (x) is uniformly continuous on compact sets, and the same argument works when x varies in a compact set rather than in Rn. (ii) Using Fubini's theorem and (2.6), we obtain
f
(x)Idx < f
-
nCfnIfI(x-y),p
(y)dy)dx
f Rf Ifl ]fin (x - y)dx J w(y)dy / 11f 41,
that is, If * OIILI < IIf
IILI.
(2.11)
By Theorem 2.3, Co (RT) is dense in L' (RTh). Hence, for a given 6 > 0, there exists g E Co (118Th) such that IIf - 9IIL1 < 6 (in fact, we need only that g is a continuous function with compact support). Then we have IIf*(PE-fIIL' <_ Using (2.11), we obtain
(f-9)*VellL1 <_ IIf-9IIL1 <8, whence (2.12) IIf*WE-f1lL'<-II9*We-9IIL1+ 26. By part (i), we have g * cpe g ass -4 0. Obviously, supp (g * cpe) is
contained in the e-neighborhood of supp g, which implies LI
9*We-f9Hence, (2.12) yields
urn sup If *cpE-f1IL1 <28, e-+o
and, since b > 0 is arbitrary, we obtain (2.10). (iii) It suffices to prove that, for any bounded open set Il c R72, f * cpe --
f in L' (Q). Let Q1 be the 1-neighborhood of 1 and set g = 1,f. Then
2.4. DISTRIBUTIONS
23
g E L' (R'ti) and, by part (ii), we have g * cos -- g in L' (Rn). Since f = g in Q and supp co, C B1 (0), we obtain that f * cp, = g * cp, in Q. Therefore, we conclude that f * cp, - f in L' (S2). .
COROLLARY 2.5. For any open set S2 C R', if f e L'10l (52) and
f bdy = 0 for any b E Co (S2) ,
(2.13)
10
then f = 0 a.e. in Q. PROOF. Let cp be a mollifier and fix an open set 2' C= Q. If e > 0 is small enough then, for any x E S2', the function p, (x - ) is supported in B, (x) C S2, which implies by (2.13) f *cPE(x) =
f
f (z)cpr(x-z)dz=0.
By Lemma 2.4 f * y -- f in Li (Rn), whence it follows that f = 0 a.e. C
in S2'. Since S2' was arbitrary, we conclude f = 0 a.e.in S2, which was to be proved.
Exercises. 2.3. Prove that if f E L°° (R') and g E L' (1!8") then f * g e L°° (R") and Iif * 9IILoo < IIfIIL-II9IIL3.
2.4. Prove that if f, g E L' (1R') then f * g E L' (R') and If *91IL1
IIfIIL1II91IL1-
2.5. Prove that if f, g, h E L' (R') then f * g = g * f and
(f*g)*h=f*(g*h). 2.6. Prove that if Ck (R") and cp E Co (R''') then, for any multiindex a with Ial < k, 2.7. Prove that if f E Ck (R1`) and co is a mollifier in R' then f * cp, -p f as e -3 0 in the topology of C" (R').
2.8. Let f e L_ (0). Prove that f > a.e. if and only if
for all non-negative function b E Co (0).
2.4. Distributions For any open set S2 C R71, define the space of test functions D (S2) as follows. As a set, D (12) is identical to Co (12) but, in addition, D (S2) is endowed with the following convergence: a sequence {Wk} converges to cp in D (S2) if
aacp for any multiindex a; (2) all supports supp Wk are contained in some compact set K C Q. (1) aacpk
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN Ilk"
24
D(Q)
If these two conditions are satisfied then we will write cpk co or cpk cp. It is possible to prove that this convergence comes from a certain topology, which makes D (S2) into a linear topological space2. It is easy to aacp for any multiindex a. see that if Wk -D4 cp then also as(Pk Denote by D' (SZ) the dual space to D (S2), that is, the space of all linear continuous functionals on D (S2). The elements of D' (SZ) are called distributions in Q. If u E D' (SZ) then the action of u at a test function co E D (52) is denoted by (u, cp). The bracket (u, y) is also referred to as the pair-
ing of a distribution and a test function. The continuity of u means that (u, cok) -* (u, (p) whenever Wk
D-
W-
Obviously, D' (i) is a linear space. We will use the following convergence (u, co) for any cp E D (S2) (this convergence in D' (St): Uk u if (Uk, cp) is associated with the weak topology of D' (11))
Any function u E Line (S2) can be identified as a distribution by the following rule3
(u) cp) = fud/ c for any cp E D (S2) where lc is the Lebesgue measure. Clearly, Wk
,
(2.14)
cp implies (u, Wk) -4 (u, cp)
so that (2.14), indeed, defines a distribution. If u E Lic (SZ) defines by (2.14) the zero distribution then Corollary 2.5 yields that u = 0 as an element of Lion (S2). If a sequence Uk converges to u in Ll C (S2) then obviously (Uk, cp) -* (u, cp) for any cp E D (S2), that is, uk
u. Therefore, the relation
(4.1) defines an embedding
Li (52) `4 D' (ci) . From now on, we will regard Laos (Q) as a subspace of D' (c). Hence, all other function spaces Ck (S2), LP (S2), and LP, (SZ) also become subspaces of D' (Q).
Another example of a distribution is the delta function S,z: for any fixed point z E S2, 6, is defined by
(Sz,co)=cp(z) for anycpED(S2). 2Any topology determines a convergence, which in this context is called a topological convergence. However, not every convergence is topological. For example, convergence almost everywhere is not a topological one. Although the convergence in D is topological, we never actually need the topology in D and will work only with the convergence. 3The notation (u, cp) is consistent with the usage of the brackets to denote the inner product in L2. Hence, if u E L2 then (u, cp) means both the inner product of u and cp and the pairing of u and cp in the sense of distributions. If it is still necessary to distinguish these notions then we will use (-I-) L2 to denote the inner product in L2. For example, the difference occurs when one considers complex valued functions (which we normally do not). In this case, (u, cp)L2 = (u, ip) where -p is the complex conjugate of W.
2.4. DISTRIBUTIONS
25
This example shows that there are distributions that are not obtained from functions by the rule (2.14). The delta function belongs to a class of distributions that arise from measures. Indeed, any Radon (signed) measure v in Sl determines a distribution by (v, p) = J cpdv.
Using the integration by parts formula, we see that, for all u E C1 (Sl) and co E D (Sl),
fd= - J
u 0, p dl.t.
This suggests the following extension of the operator a; to the space D' (a): for any distribution u E D' (S1), define its derivative aau E D' (f1) by the rule (aau, cp) = - (u, a;y) , for all co E D (f1) (2.15) .
Obviously, the right hand side of (2.15) is, indeed, a continuous linear func-
tional on D (0) and, hence, aju is defined as an element of D' (Q). Now we can define aau for any multiindex a either inductively, using (2.1), or directly by
(aau, (p) _ (-1)H (u, aacp)
,
for all cp E D (a)
.
(2.16)
It is worth mentioning that as is a continuous operator in D' (S2) (cf. Exercise 2.13). Clearly, we have aaaau = as+/3u for any u E D' (fl) and for all multiindices a, 0. It is a consequence of the definition that all distributions are differentiable infinitely many times. In particular, any function u E Li , (0) has all partial derivatives aau as distributions. However, a function can be differentiated also in the classical sense, when aau is defined pointwise as the limit of the difference quotient. We will distinguish the two kinds of derivatives by referring to them as distributional versus classical derivatives. It is clear from the above definition that if u E Ck (Sl) then all the classical derivatives aau of the order jal < k coincide with their distributional counterparts. Let us define one more operation on distributions: multiplication by a smooth function. If u E L'10C (0) and f E C°° (f1) then we have obviously the identity
f(fu)dJ us (f
) dti for any
E D (Q) .
Hence, for a distribution u E D' (S1) and a function f C°° (Q), define a distribution fu by the identity (fu,cp)=(u, fcp) for allcpED(Q). We say that a distribution u E D' (Q) vanishes in an open set U C Q if (u, cp) = 0 for any cp E D (U). It is possible to prove that if u vanishes in a family of open sets then it vanishes also in their union (cf. Exercise 2.10). Hence, there is a maximal open set in Sl where u vanishes. Its complement
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN
26
in SZ is called the support of u and is denoted by supp u. Clearly, supp u is a closed subset of Q. For any function u E L1 C (a), its support supp u is defined as the support of the associated distribution u. If u E C (SZ) then this definition of the support is consistent with (1.2) (cf. Exercise 2.11). Let us state for the record the following properties of distributions (the proofs are straightforward and are omitted). CLAIM. Let u E D' (1l). (i) For any derivative aa, we have supp aau C supp u. (ii) If cal, cp2 E D (t1) and cal = cp2 in a neighborhood of supp u then (u, cal) = (u, ca2) If supp u is a compact subset of SZ then u can be canonically extended to a distribution in llR' as follows. Let / E D (cl) be a cutoff function of a neighborhood of supp u in SZ (see Theorem 2.2). Then, for any co E D (RT), the function 2)cc belongs to D (a), which allows to define (u, ca) by (2.17)
(u, ca) = (u, bca)
Note that if ca E D (1) then OW = ca in a neighborhood of supp u and, hence, (u, bca) _ (u, (a). Therefore, the above extension of u is consistent with the action of u in D (Q). Also, this extension is independent of the choice of 0 in a neighborhood of because if ' is another cut-off function then supp u, which implies (u, 0 w) = (u, i'ca) .
LEMMA 2.6. Let u be a distribution in I with compact support and let
v = aau. Let u' and v' be the canonical extensions of u and v to Rn as described above. Then v' = 9'u' in
Rn.
PROOF. In other words, this statement says that the extension operator commutes with a«. It suffices to show that for the first order derivative. Hence, let us prove that, for any co E D (Rn), (U" a, cc) = - (v`, 0)
which, in the view of (2.17), amounts to (u, qPajca) = - (O u,
ca)
We have
- (8 u, 0cp) = (u, a; (M) and
a, (''ca) = (ago) ca + ba, ca.
Since alb - 0 in a neighborhood of suppu and hence, (u, (a,V) ca) = 0, we obtain (u, a, (cc)) = (u, ij a(p) 13 which finishes the proof. ,
27
2.4. DISTRIBUTIONS
LEMMA 2.7. For any distribution u E D' (Q) and for any open set U C
1, there exist a positive integer N and a real C > 0 such that, for any cp E D (U), I(u, )I < C lmaaxx sup 10'(P1 .
(2.18)
PROOF. Assume that (2.18) does not hold for any C and N. Then, for any positive integer k, there exists co E D (U) such that (u, Wok) >_ k max sup IaacPk l
jaj
Multiplying Wk by a constant, we can assume that (u, Wk) = 1, which implies max sup I as (Pk I <
k' It follows that, for any a, aacpk converges to 0 uniformly on U. Since all 1-1
supp cpk are contained in U, we conclude that cok - 0. By the continuity of u, this should imply (u, Wk) -4 0, which contradicts (u, cPk) = 1.
Exercises. 2.9. For a function f on R, denote by fdi,st its distributional derivative, reserving f' for the classical derivative.
(a) Prove that if f E C' (R) then fd9st = f' (b) Prove that the same is true if f is continuous and piecewise continuously differentiable.
(c) Evaluate fdjst for f (x) (d) Let f = 1[o,+.). Prove that fdtist = b, where S is the Dirac delta-function at D. 2.10. Let Il C R' be an open set. We say that two distributions u, v E D' (S2) are equal on an open subset U C Sl if (u, (p) _ (v, cp) for all cp E D (U).
(a) Let {f2,} be a family of open subsets of 0. Prove that if u and v are equal on each of the sets 0. then they are equal on their union U,SIa. (b) Prove that for any u E D' (S2) there exists the maximal open set U C S2 such that
u=0inU.
REMARK. The closed set c \ U is called the support of the distribution u and is denoted by supp u. 2.11. For any function u (x), defined pointwise in S2, set
S(u)={xEf2:u(x)54 0}, where the bar means the closure in Q. (a) Prove that if u E C (S2) then its support supp u in the distributional sense coincides with S (u). (b) If u E Leo, (S2) then its support supp u in the distributional sense can be identified by
supp u = n s (v), v=u a.e.
where the intersection is taken over all functions v in SZ, defined pointwise, which are equal to u almost everywhere.
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN Rn
28
2.12. Prove the product rule: if u c D' (fl) and f E C°° (fl) then
(;)af 0 u,
as (fu) =
(2.19)
where
(CI) C
/
(01n) 1JJ
is the product of the binomial coefficients, and $ < a means that Ni G a2 for all i = 1, ..., n.
2.13. Let {uk} be a sequence of distributions in Sl such that Uk D-) u. a°`u for any multiindex a. (a) Prove that a"uk (b) Prove that fUk 4 fu for any f E C°° (a).
2.14. Let X be a topological space. Prove that a sequence {xk} C X converges to x E X (in the topology of X) if and only if any subsequence of {xk} contains a sub-subsequence that converges to x. 2.15. Prove that the convergence "almost everywhere" is not topological, that is, it is not determined by any topology. 2.16. Prove that the convergence in the space D (2) is topological.
2.5. Approximation of distributions by smooth functions For any distribution u e D' (W5) and a function cp E D (1R), define the convolution u * cp as a function in Rn by (u * cp) (x) = (u) cp (x - '))
If u E L' (IlSn) then this definition obviously matches the one from Section 2.2 (cf. (2.5)).
LEMMA 2.8. For all u E D' (W') and cp E D (Rn), the function u * cp is continuous and, for any 0 E D (Wi), (u * cp, 2/b)
_
(u, cP *
(2.20)
where cp' (x) = cp (-x).
PROOF. Let us show that u*cp is a continuous function. Indeed, if y - x then obviously
,P(y_')-cP(x_') whence we conclude that (u * cp) (y) _ (u, cc (y - '))
(u, cp (x -
(u * cp) (y)
In particular, function u * cp can be considered as a distribution, which validates the left hand side of (2.20). To prove (2.20), transform the left hand side of (2.20) as follows: (u * cp,
Jan
(u, co (x - .))'4 (x) dx = fRn (u, 1' (x, ')) dx,
2.5. APPROXIMATION OF DISTRIBUTIONS BY SMOOTH FUNCTIONS
29
where
(P(x-y) (x)
'D (x,y)
CLAIM. For any function (P (x, y) E D (R 2,), we have
(uf
(u, (D
1,
(2.21)
Using (2.21), the proof of (2.20) is finished by the observation that
f 4n ) (x, y) dx =
f
(y - x) 0 (x) dx = (
Rn
*
)(y)
.
To prove (2.21), let us approximate the integral of 4) by the Riemann sums, as follows:
f
n
= urn
`1' (x, y) dx
(D (ek, y) E'.
(2.22)
kEZn
Since the sum here is, in fact, finite, the both sides of (2.22) belong to D (Rn) as functions of y, and the support of the right hand side is uniformly bounded for all e > 0. Since IV is uniformly bounded, the limit in (2.22) is uniform with respect to y. Applying the same argument for any derivative 8y (D, we obtain that the limit in (2.22) can be understood in the sense of the convergence in D (IRn). Therefore, (2.22) implies I
(uf ,
n
( D (x,) dx)
lim u, E (D (Ek, ) En kEZn
lim E (u,
E---i0
fR n
(Ek, .)) sn
kEZn
(u, -cD (x, )) dx,
which finishes the proof.
The following statement extends Lemma 2.1 to distributions. LEMMA 2.9. If u E D' (IRn) and co E D (1Rn) then u * cP E C°° (Rn) and,
for any multiindex ce,
,go (u*cp)_((au)*cP=u*((9«cP).
(2.23)
If supp co c Br (0) then supp (u * co) is contained in the r-neighborhood of
supp u. PROOF. Since if x is away from the r-neighborhood of supp u then supp c' (x
- ) and supp u
are disjoint whence u * cp (x) = 0, which proves the second claim.
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN Ilk"
30
The second equality in (2.23) is easily proved as follows:
(aau) * go (x) _ (aau, go (x _ )) _
(u, as [go (x
-
(u, (a"W) (x _ .)) = u * (aa(P) (x)
Before we prove the first equality in (2.23) and the smoothness of u * go, recall that, by Lemma 2.8, u * cp E C (W'). For any b E D (Rh), we have by Lemma 2.8 (2.24) (aa (u * (p) , qp) = (-1)a (u * W,aau) = (-1)a (u, go' * &a0) , where the derivative as (u * go) is understood in the distributional sense. By Lemma 2.1, we have a gO*a 0 ( go ' whence
(-1)a (u,
* eat) _ (-1)a (u, as (go' * t&)) _ (aau, g
/'
((aau) * go, Y')
Together with (2.24), this proves the first equality in (2.23). We still need to prove that u * cp E C°° (IE8'). What we already know is that u * ep is continuous and all its distributional derivatives as (u * go) are continuous as well. The proof will be completed if we prove the following fact (here adast and 0C1 stand for the distributional and classical derivatives, respectively). CLAIM. If f E C (RI) and adast f E C (Rn) then a3las f exists at any point and is equal to 04"t f. Let o be a mollifier. By Lemma 2.1, the function f * go is C'-smooth. Setting g = aaast f, using the identity (2.4) of Lemma 2.1 and the identity (2.23), we obtain a t a s (f * got) = adist (f * (PE) _ (adist f) * ic
3
3
ape = g * go
By Lemma 2.4, we obtain f * go --4 f as e -3 0 and
,gq" (f * VPE) = g * APE -fi g, where the convergence is locally uniform. This implies that O "' any point and is equal to g.
f exists at
In the rest of this section, we extend Lemma 2.4 to the spaces D' and L2
LEMMA 2.10. Let co be a mollifier in R'. (i) I f u E D (R n) then u * co,
V
u.
(ii) If u E D' (R") then u * go -+ U. PROOF. (i) By Lemma 2.4, we have u * cp6 2.9, we obtain, for any multiindex cx, as (u * gob) = (aau) * (pe
u. Using Lemma 2.1 or a)'u.
2.5. APPROXIMATION OF DISTRIBUTIONS BY SMOOTH FUNCTIONS
31
Finally, since all the supports of u * co, are uniformly bounded when E -+ 0, U. we obtain that u * '7-E (ii) By Lemma 2.8, for any E D (]R'), (u * We,
Since
7'E * Eli
D}
) = (u, W * bi) .
by part (i), we conclude that (u * ape,) (u, i)
which implies u *
7'E
U.
THEOREM 2.11. Let cp be a mollifier in W. (i) If u E L2 (1R) then u * eo is also in L2 (Rn) and (2.25)
llu * VIIL2 <_ IIulIL2.
Moreover, we have L2 u*cpe-4u asE-*0.
(ii) If u E Ll (R') then
u*cpeL2 -u asE-+0. (iii) If u ED' (Rn) and limionf Iu * c0eIIL2 < 00
then u E L2 (R n) and (2.26)
IIu1IL2 < limionf IIu * WEIIL2.
PROOF. (i) + (ii) Applying the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality and using
f
we obtain
n
(P (y) dy = 1,
112
lucp(x)12 =
p (y)u(x-y)dy/
n (fRn
2
` fa
f f whence 11U
(P112
f'b
f
P (y) dy
f
co (y) u2 (x
- y) dy
n(p(y)u2(x-y)dy,
(y)u2(x-y)dxdy= IIulIL2.
]I2
Alternatively, (2.25) follows from Exercise 2.20 with q (x, y) = cp (x - y) and
K=1.
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN Rn
32
i
After we have proved using (2.25), the convergencies in L2 and Lc are treated in the same way as those in L1 and Li c in Lemma 2.4. (iii) Let ek - 0 be a sequence such that urn
lim
IIU*
Set Uk = U * cpek. Since the sequence {uk} is bounded in L2, by the weak compactness of a ball in L2, there exists a subsequence {uki } that converges weakly in L2, say to v E L2. The weak convergence in L2 obviously implies u, v. By Lemma 2.10, we have Uk the convergence in D', whence uki which implies u = v and, hence, u E L2. We are left to verify (2.26). The fact that Uk converges to u weakly in L2 implies, in particular, that (Uk, U)L2 -* (u, u)L2 .
Using the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality, we obtain IIuIIL2 <- k IIukIIL2IIUIIL2,
whence (2.26) follows.
REMARK 2.12. It is useful to observe that the proof of inequality (2.25) works for a more general class of functions cp, in particular, if cp is a nonnegative integrable function on R' satisfying
f
(cf. Exercise 2.19).
cp (y) dy < 1 n
Exercises. 2.17. Prove that if u, v E L2 (i[2n) and 8%u, 81v E L2 (R n) for some index i, then (Bin, v)L2 = - (v, 8iv)L2 .
(2.27)
2.18. Let 1 < p < oo, u e LP (R n), and cP be a mollifier in R'. (a) Prove that u * cP E LP and IIu * cPII LP < IIuIILP.
(b) Prove that P
u*to -?u aSE-*0. 1 < p:5 oc, and g E L' ([fin) then f * g exists, belongs to
2.19. Prove that if f E LP LP (]inn), and
If *9IIP _< 11f 11P119111.
2.20. (Lemma of Schur) Let (M, µ) be a measure space with a a-finite measure µ. Let q (x, y) be a non-negative measurable function M x M such that, for a constant K,
fq(x,y)d/(y)
for almost all x
(2.28)
fM q (x, y) d(x) < K for almost all y.
(2.29)
M
and
2.5. APPROXIMATION OF DISTRIBUTIONS BY SMOOTH FUNCTIONS
33
Prove that, for any f E L' (M, /..c), 1 < r < oc, the function
Qf (x) := fM 4 (x, y) f (y) dk (y) belongs to Lr (M, lc) and IIQf}ILr < KIIfIILr.
(2.30)
2.21. Under the condition of Exercise 2.20, assume in addition that, for some constant C, q (x, y) < C,
for almost all x, y E M. Prove that, for any f E L' (M, µ), 1 < r < +oo, the function Q f belongs to L$ (M, M) for any s E (r, +oo] and Cl/r-1/9K1/r,+1/sIIfIILr5
IIQf IILs <
(2.31)
where r' is the Holder conjugate to r.
2.22. A function f on a set S C ' is called Lipschitz if, for some constant L, called the Lipschitz constant, the following holds:
If(x)-f(y)I _ 0, set
U ={xEU:BE(x)CU}. Let cp be a mollifier in R7 .
(a) Show that U. is an open set and Co
U = U U1/k.
(2.32)
k=1
Extend f to III" by setting f = 0 outside U. Prove that f * co, is Lipschitz in UE with the same Lipschitz constant L. (b) Prove that, for any S > 0, f * Wp =fin Ub as e -4 0. 2.23. Prove that if f is a Lipschitz function in an open set U C R' then all the distributional partial derivatives 8j f belong to L°° (U) and jV f I < L a.e. where 11/2 lvfl (ajf)2 and L is the Lipschitz constant of f.
2.24. Prove that if f and g are two bounded Lipschitz functions in an open set U C then f g is also Lipschitz. Prove the product rule for the distributional derivatives:
8j(fg)=(8jf)g+f(8jg) 2.25. Let f (x) be a Lipschitz function on an interval [a, b] C R. Prove that if f is its distributional derivative then
f
b
f'(x) dx = f (b) - f (a)
a
Prove that if g is another Lipschitz function on [a, b] then
f
6
f'gdx = [fg]a
-
f a
b
fg'dx.
(2.33)
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN W
34
2.6. Weak derivatives and Sobolev spaces 2.6.1. Spaces of positive order. If u E Lic (Q) and its distributional derivative aau happens to belong to Li c (Q) then we say that aau is a weak derivative 4 of U. For any non-negative integer k, consider the following space:
Wk(S2)={uEL2(Q):aauEL2(S2) foralla with jal
(u) V)Wk(52)
Ial
(aau, aav)L2(St) kal
The associated norm is given by
uI Iwk(0) = E
f1(90'u I2 dµ
lal
=
ll0 anlI12(o) IaI
In fact, Wk (cl) is a Hilbert space (cf. Exercise 2.28). The spaces Wk (f2) are called the Sobolev spaces. For example, Wo (0) L2 (S2),
W1(S2)={uEL2(52):ajuEL2(SZ), j=1,...,n}, and
(u, V) W1 = (u, V)L2 + L (aju, ajv)LZ j=1
Obviously, we have Wk+1 (Il) `? Wk (Q),
for any k > 0. Let us mention the following simple properties of the Sobolev spaces. CLAIM. (a) If U E Wk and Jai < k then aau E Wk-Ial (b) If aau E Wk for all a with !c < m then u E Wk+ PROOF. The first property is obvious. To prove the second one, observe that any multiindex /3 with 1,81 < k + m can be presented in the form /3 =
a+a' where jai < m and la'j < k. Hence, 00u = a" ((9"u) E Wk-Hail c L2, whence the claim follows.
Let S2' be an open subset of Q. For any u c Wk (1), the restriction of u to S2' belongs to Wk (S2') and IluIIWk(52/)
Il?IIWk(O)
Define the local Sobolev space Wloc (S2) as the class of all distributions u E
D' (S2) such that u E Wk (52') for any open set S2' C Q. The topology in 4The weak derivative 8"u can be equivalenlty defined as a function from L120. (SZ) that satisfies the identity (2.16).
2.6. WEAK DERIVATIVES AND SOBOLEV SPACES
35
Woc (Sl) is defined by the family of the seminorms Ilull Wk(c2,) . Let us mention
also that
Woc (1) _ {u c L1c (Q) : aau E Lloc
for all a with j al < k}
.
The scale of spaces Wcoc (0) is in some sense analogous to that of Ck (0), although, for the spaces Wioc, we use weak derivatives, whereas the spaces Ck
are associated with continuous derivatives. If U E Ck then all the classical derivatives of u are also weak derivatives and, for any open set Sl' C= SZ, Ilullwk(
/)
<
CIIullck(Q,).
Hence, we have an embedding Ck (12) " Woc (12)
The next statement extends Theorem 2.11 to the spaces Wk.
be a mollifier in Rn and k be a non-negative
THEOREM 2.13. Let integer.
(i) If it E Wk (Rn) then it * cp is also in Wk (lRn) and Ilu * Pllwk _< llullwk.
(2.34)
Moreover, we have Wk
u * cpE -f u as e -4 0.
(2.35)
(ii) If it ED' (R') and liminf Ilu*ccEllwk < oo,
(2.36)
then u E Wk (R') and llullwk < limionf llu * coEIIwk
PROOF. (i) By Lemma 2.9, we have as (u * cP) = (aau) * cP.
(2.37)
Applying Theorem 2.11 to aau, where I al < k, we obtain Ilaa (u
* (P)
11L2 < II aaUll L2
and 2
aa(u * 0) 4 aau, whence (2.34) and (2.35) follow.
(ii) For any multiindex a with lal < k, we have by (2.36) and (2.37) that lim ionf II (ON * C011 I L2 < oo.
By Theorem 2.11, we conclude that aau E L2 and lI aau II L2 < lim ionf 11 as
whence the both claims follows.
(u * (pE) IIL2
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN 1Rn
36
Exercises. 2.26. Let f E Ck (Sl), where k is a non-negative integer.
(a) Prove that if 11f11 ck(n)
then, for any u E Wk (0), also fu E Wk (ff) and llfullWk(c)
(2.38)
where the constant C depends only on k, n. (b) Prove that if u E W1oc (Il) then fu E Wco (S2).
2.27. Assume that fk -* f in Wk and as f -* g in Wk, for some multiindex a such that j al < k. Prove that g = 0'f. 2.28. Prove that, for any open set 0 C Rn, the space Wk (1) is complete. 2.29. Denote by Wk (52) the subset of Wk (52), which consists of functions with compact support in Q. Prove that D (S2) is dense in W. A.
2.30. Prove that D (Wi) is dense in W" (]fin), for any non-negative integer k. Warning: for an arbitrary open set S2 C R', D (S2) may not be dense in Wk (S2). 2.31. Denote by Wo (S2) the closure of D (52) in W' (0). Prove that, for any u E W1 (S2) and v E Wo (0), (00, v)L2 = - (u, 8tiv)L2
(2.39)
2.32. Let u E L2 (RTh) and aau E L2 (Wi) for some multiindex a.
(a) Prove that
a-u = (k), i (6 ,
(2.40)
where u is the Fourier transform of u and (b) Prove the following identity 115 uIIL2 = (27.)n J n
IZ
(S)12ISa IZ
(2.41)
2.33. Let u E L2 (Wi). Prove that if the right hand side of (2.41) is finite then a'u belongs to L2 (IRn) and, hence, the identity (2.41) holds.
2.34. Prove that the space Wk (IRn) (where k is a positive integer) can be characterized in terms of the Fourier transform as follows: a function u E L2 (Rn) belongs to Wk (R') if and only if
J
n
l"u (C)l2 (1 +
d < oo.
Moreover, the following relation holds: IlullWk
Jan
lw
(1 + IC12)k
(2.42)
where the sign z means that the ratio of the both sides is bounded from above and below by positive constants.
2.6. WEAK DERIVATIVES AND SOBOLEV SPACES
37
2.6.2. Spaces of negative order. In the previous section, the Sobolev space Wk of order k was defined for any non-negative integer k. Our next goal is to define the Sobolev spaces of negative orders. Fix an open set S2 C R' and, for any positive integer k and a distribution u E D' (S2), set
IU W-k :=
Sup
(u, W)
(2.43)
coEV(f2)\{0} IIPIIw'
Then the space W-k (52) is defined by W-k (S2) :_ {u E D' (S2) :
IIuIIW-k < oo} .
It follows directly from the definition (2.43) that I(u)co)l
IIuiiW-k(S2)IIS01IWk(Q)
,
foralluEW-k(S2) and cpED(S2). Here are some simple properties of the spaces Wk (S2) for all k E Z. CLAIM. If k < m then (2.44) IIuliwk < IIuIIw
and, consequently, WmcWk. In particular, if k < 0 then L2- Wk. PROOF. If k > 0 then this property is already known, so assume k < 0. If m > 0 then we can replace it by m = 0. Hence, we can assume k < m < 0.
Observe that the definition (2.43) is valid also for k = 0, that is, for the L2-norm, which follows from the fact that D (52) is dense in L2 (52) (see Theorem 2.3). Since Iki > Imi, we have ikoIIWIkl > IIPIIWImI, and (2.44) follows from (2.43).
CLAIM. If k E Z and u c Wk (12) then aju E Wk-1 (S2) and IlajUIiWk-1 <
II'IIwk.
(2.45)
PROOF. If k > 1 then this is already known, so assume k < 0. For any 0 E D, we have
(aju, (p) <
IIUIIWkllajcpIIWikl
IIUIIWkIIWIIWlkl+1,
and (2.45) follows.
In particular, we obtain that if u E L2 then a'u E W-lal, which gives many examples of distributions from Wk with negative k. CLAIM. If S2' C 52 then, for any k E Z, IIuIIwk(ol)
IIuIIWk(fz).
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN Rn
38
PROOF. For k > 0 this is already known. For k < 0 it follows from (2.43) and the fact that D (S2') C D (f2).
The function space WWo, (1) for k < 0 is defined in the same way as that for k > 0 in the previous section. Namely, a distribution u E D' A belongs to W,1,1, (5l) if u E Wk (f2') for any open set 92' C= Q. The topology in W1 (f2) is defined by the family of the seminorms IInIIwk(Q,). It follows from the above statements that Wio, (f2) increases when f2 expands and when k decreases. It is interesting to mention that any function from L'10 (S2) belongs to W10C -k (S2) if k > n/2 - see Example 6.2 below.
LEMMA 2.14. Let k c Z. (a) I f f E D (f2) and u E W oc (0) then f u E Wk (f2) and llfUII wk(f) c CIIf IiccJkj(sz) II uII wk(c,),
(2.46)
where f2' is an open set containing supp f and the constant C depends on k, n. (b) If f E CO° (1) and u E Wio, (f2) then fu E Wk,, (f2)
PROOF. (a) If k > 0 then we obtain by Exercise 2.26 fuE Wk (f2') and Ilfullwk(w) < CII f Ilck(Q1) IIuIIwk(Q'),
whence the claim follows. Let now k < 0. Assuming that co ranges in D (f2) and II(PIIWjkj(o) = 1, we have II fuIIWk(-) =SUP (fu,y) =SUP (u, f
W
'p
where the last inequality holds because f co E D (S2'). We are left to notice
that IIfcPIlwiki(QV) < CII f Ilciki Ilv0llwiki = CII f Ilciki,
whence the claim follows.
(b) Let us show that fu E Wk (S2') for any open set S2' C- Q. Fix a function co E D (9) such that co - 1 in f2'. Then co f E D (S2) and, by the previous part, cc f u E Wk (f2). It follows that W f u E Wk (S2') and, hence, f u E Wk (S2').
LEMMA 2.15. Let k be a positive integer. For any u E W-k (Rn), there exists a unique function v E Wk (R') such that
u=E
(_1)1a1 a2av.
(2.47)
jal
Moreover, we have the identity IIUIIw-k =
IIvIIwk.
(2.48)
2.6. WEAK DERIVATIVES AND SOBOLEV SPACES
39
Note that, for any v E Wk (R'), the equation (2.47) defines u E W-k (R n). Hence, we obtain a norm preserving bijection between Wk (R'n) and W-k (Rn).
PROOF. By definition, u E Wk (Rn) means that
-00.
sup
IIuIIW-k =
VED(Rn)\{o} II(pIIWk
Hence, u can be considered as a linear functional on D (Rn) bounded in the norm Wk. Since D (Rn) is dense in Wk (Rn) (see Exercise 2.30), this functional uniquely extends to a bounded functional on Wk (Rn), with the same norm. Denote it by Fu (p). However, Wk is Hilbert space and, by the Riesz representation theorem, there exists a unique function v E Wk (Rn) such that F. (cP) _ (v, W) Wk for all V E Wk (Rn) .
In particular, this means, that for all cp E D (Rn),
(u) W) _ (v, co)Wk = E (aav, aap)L2 jaj
_
(-1)H (a2av, co)
(aav, a«cp) _
,
jal
which proves the first claim. The functional W ,-+ (v, P) Wk on Wk (]Rn) has the norm IIvIIwk, whence it follows that II Fu I I = IIvIIwk where II Fu I I is the norm of the function Fu on Wk (Rn). By the first part of the proof, IIFulI = IIuiIw-k, whence (2.48) follows.
The following statement extends Theorem 2.13 to the Sobolev spaces of negative order.
THEOREM 2.16. Let k be a positive integer. If u e W-k (Rn) and co is a mollifies in Rn then u*YE
k
-*uasS-+0.
PROOF. Consider the following differential operator
D = > (-1)Ial a2a, jal
which maps Wk into W-k. By Lemma 2.15, for any u E W-k (Wi), there exists a unique v E Wk (Rn) such that u = Dv, and also IIDvDIW-k = IIVIIWk
Using Lemma 2.9, we obtain
u*cpE-u=(Dv)*cp6-Dv=D(v*cp6-v),
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN
40
whence ilu * (PC:: -
uIIW-k = IID(v * v,: - v)IIW-k = IIv * os - viiwk.
Since, by Theorem 2.13, the right hand side here tends to 0, we obtain that u * cp, -* u in W-k, which was to be proved.
Exercises. 2,35. Let k be a positive integer. Prove that if u E W-k (R") and cp is a mollifier in R' then IIu * ccII w-k <
(2.49)
IIuIIW-k.
2.36. Prove that, for any positive integer k, the space Hilbert space.
W-k
with the norm II
IIw-k
is a
2.7. Heat semigroup in R' Let 0 be the Laplace operator in I1 Y and 1
Pt (x) =
(47rt
2
exp
)n/2
I4t
(2.50)
be the heat kernel in RI (cf. Section 1.3). For any t > 0, denote by Pt the following operator on functions
Ptf
pt*f, t>0, f,
t=0,
w ienever the convolution pt * f makes sense. Denote by Cb (IR'n) the class of
bounded continuous functions in Rn. By Theorem 1.3, if f E Cb (R') then the function Ptf (x) is C°°-smooth in R+ x RT and solves in R+ x Rn the heat equation (2.51) at(Ptf) = 0 (Ptf) Besides, Ptf (x) is bounded and continuous in [0, -boo) x I8 In particular, for any fixed t > 0, we can consider Pt as an operator from Cb (R') to Cb (Rn) such that Pt f -3 f as t -+ 0 locally uniformly. The identity pt * Ps = Pt+s
(2.52)
(see Example 1.9) implies Pt Ps = Pt+s ,
for all t, s > 0. Hence, the family {Pt}t>0 is a semigroup. It is called the heat semigroup of the Laplace operator in R'. Here we consider some properties of the heat semigroup, which extend Theorem 1.3 to the class L2. These properties are closely related to the properties of mollifiers considered in the previous sections, which is not surprising because the heat kernel as a function of x in many respects looks like a mollifier although with non-compact support (compare, for example, Fig. 1.1 and 2.1).
2.7. HEAT SEMIGROUP IN Rn
41
In Chapters 4 and 7, the heat semigroup will be considered on an arbitrary weighted manifold, and most of these properties will be retained, although from a difference perspective.
We use the notation Ot = at and a; = aa; for j = 1, ..., n. Denote by C6 (Rn) the subspace of C' (R) that consists of functions u whose all partial derivatives up to the order k are bounded functions. LEMMA 2.17. If f E C0 (Rn) then Pt f E Cb ([0, +oo) x W1). Moreover, the following identities hold in [0, +oo) x Rn:
a, (Ptf) = Pt (ai f)
(2.53)
at(Ptf)=Pt(sf)
(2.54)
and
PROOF. The function Ptf is bounded and C°O-smooth in (0, +oo) x Rn
by Theorem 1.3. The identity (2.53) for t > 0 follows from Lemma 2.1 because
a (Ptf)=a,(Pt*f)=Pt*ajf =Pt ((9f).
(2.55)
This proves also (2.54), because using the heat equation (2.51) and iterating (2.53), we obtain
at(Ptf) =z (Ptf) =Pt(Of) To extend all this to t = 0, observe that the right hand sides of (2.53) and (2.54) are continuos functions up to t = 0. Therefore, the derivatives in the left hand side exist and satisfy these identities also up to t = 0. In particular, we obtain that Pt f is C1-smooth up to t = 0. Since a; f and A f are bounded functions, the identities (2.53) and (2.54) imply that aj (Pt!) and at (Pt f) are bounded in [0, +cc) x R', that is, Pt f E Cb ([0, +oo) x Rn) .
(2.56)
Since a; f and A f belong to Co' (Rn), we obtain by (2.53), (2.54) and (2.56) that a; (Pt f) and at (Ptf) are also in the class Cb ([0, +oo) x Rn), which implies that
Ptf ECb([0,+oo)xR')
.
0
Continuing by induction, we conclude the proof.
The following statement is similar to Theorem 2.11 but a mollifier is replaced by the heat kernel. LEMMA 2.18. If f e L2 (Rn) then Pt f E L2 (1R x) for any t > 0, and IIPtfIIL2 <
IIfIiL2.
(2.57)
Moreover, we have 2
Ptf
f as t -4 0.
(2.58)
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN Rn
42
PROOF. For t = 0 the claim is trivial. If t > 0 then we have by Lemma 1.1
f
n
pt (x) dx - 1.
(2.59)
Since Ptf = f *pt, the first claim follows from an extension of Theorem 2.11 by Remark 2.12.
Thanks to (2.57) and the fact that Co (1[8'1) is dense in L2 (Rn) (see Theorem 2.3), it suffices to prove (2.58) for f c Co (RT). Assuming that, we have by Theorem 1.3,
suplPtf - fI --0
as t --*0,
IRn
because the function f is uniformly continuos (cf. Remark 1.4). Since (2.59) implies IIPtfIILI IIfIILI (cf. Lemma 2.4), we obtain
IIPtf-
f112 L2
<suPIPtf - .fIIIPt.f 1n
-fllL'
< 2suplPtf-.fIII.fIILI -30. Rn
See also Exercise 1.4 for an alternative proof of (2.57) and (2.58). Hence, Pt can be now considered as a bounded operator from L2 to L2. The semigroup property Ptps = Pt+s (2.60)
obviously extends to L2 because Co is dense in L2. A new feature of Pt which comes with L2 spaces, is the symmetry, in the following sense: (Ptf, 9)L2 = (.f, Pt9)L2
(2.61)
,
for all f, g E L2. Indeed, if f, g c Co then this trivially follows from
(Ptf, g) = f nC
f
=f f n
n
pt (x - y) f (y) dy g (x) dx
/
pt(x-y).f(y)9(x)dydx
and from a similar expression for (f, Ptg), because pt (x - y) = pt (y - x); then the extension to L2 is obvious. In the next statement, we will use the notion of convexity. Recall that a function cp (t) on [0, +oo) is called convex if, for all t, s > 0 and E E (0, 1),
cp(Et+(1 -E) s) <ECp(t)+(1-E)cp(s).
(2.62)
If cp is continuous then it suffices to have this property for
1/2, that is,
s) (t
2
< cP (t)
W (s).
2
(2.63)
2.7. HEAT SEMIGROUP IN Rn
43
Indeed, by iterating (2.63), one obtains (2.62) for all binary fractions e, and then for all real 6 by continuity. A non-negative function cp is called log-convex if log cp is convex. The latter obviously amounts to
sl Ct
cp
(2.64)
(t) V (s)
2
Comparing (2.63) and (2.64) we see that the log-convexity implies the convexity. The following convexity lemma is frequently useful.
LEMMA 2.19. For any f E L2 (Wi), the function 0 (t)
(Ptf, f )L2
on t E [0, +oo) is non-negative, decreasing, continuous, and log-convex. PROOF. The proof is based only on the properties (2.57), (2.58), (2.60), (2.61) of the semigroup Pt and, hence, the statement of Lemma 2.19 remains true in any other setting where these properties can be verified. In particular,
this will be the case for the heat semigroup on an arbitrary manifold - see Section 4.3.
We start with the observation that, by (2.60) and (2.61), (2.65) cp (t) = (Pt/2Pt/2f, f) = (Pt/2f, Pt/2f) = IIPt/2f 112, which implies cp (t) > 0. Using (2.60) and (2.57), we obtain, for all t, s > 0,
IIPt+.5f II = IIP3 (Ptf) II s IIPtfII,
that is, the function t '--* IIPtfII is decreasing, which implies by (2.65) that cp (t) is also decreasing. The triangle inequality and (2.58) yield
IIPtfII-llPt+sfll
co (2t + 2s) = (Pt+sf, f) = (Psf, Ptf) <_
II Psf II II Ptf II =
4-(2s) W (2t),
which proves the log-convexity of W.
In the next statement, we show that the rate of convergence Ptf -4 f as t --* 0 depends on the regularity of f. If f E W1 then denote by V f the "vector" (ai f, ..., an f) of its first order partial derivatives, and set n
Iof12
EIajf12 j=1
and IIV!11L2 = II IVfI IIL2 so that
IIfIIL2+IlofIIL2 =IIfIIW1.
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN R"
44
If f E W2 then its distributional Laplacian A f belongs to L2 and n
IIofIIL2 <EIlajf11L2 _
LEMMA 2.20. If f E W1 (118Th) then, for any t > 0,
IIPtf - f42 < VtllofIIL2.
(2.66)
If f E W2 (Rn) then, for any t > 0, (2.67)
IIPtf -fIIL2
PROOF. It suffices to prove the both claims for f c D (1R) because D (R') is dense both in W1 (Rn) and W2 (W') (cf. Exercise 2.30) and the expressions in (2.66) and (2.67) are continuous in W1 and W2, respectively. Using the notation cp (t) = (Ptf, f) as in Lemma 2.19, we have
IIPtf-f112 = (Ptf,Ptf)-2(Ptf,f)+(f,f) = (p(2t)-2W(t)+cp(0). (2.68) Since co (2t) < co (t), this implies IIPtf-f112<
(2.69)
Using Lemma 2.17 and the Green formula, we can compute the derivative W'(0) as follows:
W, (0) = (at-(Ptf) It=o, f) = (sf, f)
f 1Vf12 dx = -IIofll22,
(2.70)
which together with the convexity of cp yields
(t) - W (0) = tc
tW' (0) = -tllof 112,
(2.71)
where E (0, t). Combining (2.69) and (2.71), we obtain (2.66). To prove (2.67), we need the second derivative of cp, which is computed as follows using Lemma 2.17:
(t) = (at(Ptf),f) = (L (Ptf),f) = (Ptf,sf), and
co" (t) = (atPtf, Of) = (Pt (AP, 0 f) .
(2.72)
By Lemma 2.19, (Pt (0 f) , A f) is non-increasing in t; hence, cp" (t) is nonincreasing. Using (2.68) and (2.72) for t = 0, we obtain IIPtf - f 112 =
(2t) -
(t) + (0)
t2 < 01` (0) t2 = Ilof I12t2,
which finishes the proof.
See Exercise 2.39 for a Fourier transform proof of Lemma 2.20, and Exercises 4.39, 4.40 for an extension of Lemma 2.20 to a general setting of manifolds.
2.7. HEAT SEMIGROUP IN R'"
45
DEFINITION 2.21. Let B be a Banach space and I be an interval in R. A path u : I -+ B is said to be strong differentiable at t E I, if the limit
u(t+s)-u(t)
1 E-40
(2.73)
exists in the norm of B. The value of the limit is called the strong derivative
of u at t and is denoted by u' (t) or dt The word "strong" refers to the fact that the limit in (2.73) is understood
in the strong topology of B, that is, the norm topology. If the limit is understood in the weak topology of B then one obtains the weak derivative.
In the next statement, we consider the function t -* Pt f as a path in L2
THEOREM 2.22. If f E W2 (Rn) then the path t -* Pt f is strongly differentiable in L2 (Rn) for all t E [0, +oo), and
d (Ptf)=A(Ptf)
(2.74)
Combining with Lemma 2.18, we see that the path u (t) = Ptf solves the Cauchy problem in the L2 sense: it satisfies the heat equation and the initial data
J dt dt _L\u, l ult=o = f, where the limits in the both conditions are understood in the L2-norm.
PROOF. Let us prove first that, when t -3 0,
Qtf :=
Ptft f
-+ A f in L2 (Rn).
(2.75)
Assume that f E D (Rn). Then, by Lemma 2.17, the function Ptf is smooth in [0, +oo) x R n, bounded, and all its derivatives are bounded. Therefore, by (2.54), Ptf (x) - f (x) 8tptf (x) 1t=0 = Af W. t
It follows that, for any bounded open set S2 C R n, Qt f -> A f in L2 (12). Choose S2 to contain K := supp f, and prove that also
Qt f - A f in L2 (S2c) ,
(2.76)
which will imply (2.75). Since in S2° we have f = A f = 0 and Qt f = Pt f , (2.76) amounts to t IIPtf I(L2(0c) = O (t) as t -4 00.
Since function Pt f (x) is bounded, it suffices to prove that
Wtf hl(Q-) = o (t)
as t - oo.
(2.77)
2. FUNCTION SPACES IN Rn
46
Denoting by E the distance from K to the boundary of 1, we obtain
C f (fx pt (x - y) f ()I dl dx
IIPtf IILI(Qc)
t
fx
Pt(x-y)dx)
If (y) I dy
Pt (x - y) dx
I f (y) I dy
K (f'1X-Yj>6j Unc
fx
If (y) I dy
pt (z) dz.
{fz{>e}
By Remark 1.2, the last integral decays as t - 0 faster than any power of t, which proves (2.77).
Let us prove (2.75) for f E W2 (Wi). By Exercise 2.30, there exists a sequence { fk} C D ( n) such that fk -- f in W2 ($n). Observing that, by Lemma 2.20,
IIQt(f-fk)lIL2 <_ IIA(f-fk)IIL2, we obtain Il Qtf - Af II L2
`-
II Qtf - QtfklI L2 + IlQtfk - ofkIIL2 + Ilofk - of IIL2
-5
IlQtfk-ofkIIL2+2llofk-AfIIL2
Letting t --> 0 and then k -+ oo, we obtain (2.75).
Note that (2.75) is a particular case of (2.74) for t = 0. Let us prove (2.74) for all t > 0. First show that, for any multiindex a of order < 2, as (Ptf) = Pt (aaf)
(2.78)
,
which will imply Ptf E W2. Indeed, for any test function 'b c D (RI), we have
(Pt (aaf) , V)
f Un aaf (x - y) pt (y) dy0 (x) dx Rn
f
Rn
Un
aaf (x - y) 0 (x) dxPt (y) dy
(ff (x - y)
(-1)IHI f
() dx) Pt (y) dy
II
(-1)Ia" (Ptf, aa0) = (aaPtf, 0) , whence (2.78) follows. Applying (2.75) to function Ptf E W2, we obtain
Pt+sf - Ptf s
- P., (Ptf) - Ptf - o(Ptf) ass-30,
which finishes the proof.
s
NOTES
47
Exercises. 2.37. Evaluate function cp (t) from Lemma 2.19 for f (x) = exp (- Ix12) .
2.38. Show that Lemma 2.17 remains true for f E Cb (R ) 2.39. Give an alternative proof of Lemma 2.20 using the Fourier transform and Exercises 1.4, 2.32.
Notes This Chapter contains a standard material on distributions and mollifiers in ' - see, for example, [207], [327], [356].
CHAPTER 3
Laplace operator on a Riemannian manifold We introduce in this Chapter the notions of smooth and Riemannian manifolds, Riemannian measure, and the Riemannian Laplace operator. From the previous Chapters, we use here only the material of Section 2.2. However, acquaintance with measure theory and integration is required (see Appendix A).
The core of this Chapter is the material of Sections 3.1-3.6, which is needed in the rest of the book except for Chapter 6. The material of Sections 3.7-3.10 is mostly used for constructing examples of manifolds. In Section 3.11, we introduce the geodesic distance, which will be seriously used only in Chapters 11 and 15.
3.1. Smooth manifolds Let M be a topological space. Recall M is called Hausdorff if, for any two disjoint points x, y c M, there exist two disjoint open sets U, V C M containing x and y, respectively. We say that M has a countable base if there exists a countable family {Bj } of open sets in M such that any other open set is a union of some sets Bj. The family {Bj } is called a base of the topology of M. DEFINITION 3.1. A n-dimensional chart on M is any couple (U, co) where
U is an open subset of M and cp is a homeomorphism of U onto an open subset of R1 (which is called the image of the chart). DEFINITION 3.2. A C-manifold of dimension n is a Hausdorff topological
space M with a countable base such that any point of M belongs to a ndimensional chart.
Let M be a C-manifold of dimension n. For any chart (U, co) on M, the local coordinate system x1, x2, ..., xn is defined in U by taking the copullback of the Cartesian coordinate system in lIe. Hence, loosely speaking,
a chart is an open set U C M with a local coordinate system. Normally, we will identify U with its image so that the coordinates x', x2, ..., xn can
be regarded as the Cartesian coordinates in a region in R n. However, there are some subtleties with this identification, which we would like to clarify before we proceed further.
If U C M is an open set and E C M then the relation E C= U (compact
inclusion) means that the closure E of E in M is compact and E C U. The 49
50
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
compact inclusion will be frequently used but it may become ambiguous if U is a chart on M because in this case E C U can be understood also in the sense of the topology of IR'. Let us show that the two meanings of E C= U are identical. Assume E C U and denote temporarily by E the closure of E in 1Rn. If E C= U in the topology of R" then E is compact in R' and, hence, its pullback to M (also denoted by E) is compact in M. The fact that M is Hausdorif implies that any compact subset of M is closed. Therefore, E is closed in M, which implies E C E and, hence, the inclusion E C= U holds also in M. The converse is proved in the same way. If U and V are two charts on a C-manifold M then in the intersection U n V two coordinate systems are defined, say x1, x2, ..., xn and yl, y2, ..., yn. The change of the coordinates is given then by continuous functions yi = yi (x1, ..., xn) and xi = xi (yl, ..., yn). Indeed, if co is the mapping of U to 1l and 0 is the mapping of V to Rn then the functions yi = yi(xl, ..., xn) are the components of the mapping 0 o cp-1 and the functions xi (y1, ..., y") are the components of the mapping cp o -1 (see Fig. 3.1).
x ...,x 11
1
n
Y ,..,y
FIGURE 3.1. The mapping cp
o-1
A family A of charts on a C-manifold is called a Ck-atlas (where k is a positive integer or +oo) if the charts from A covers all M and the change of coordinates in the intersection of any two charts from A is given by Ckfunctions. Two Ck-atlases are said to be compatible if their union is again a Ck-atlas. The union of all compatible Ck-atlases determines a Ck-structure on M. DEFINITION 3.3. A smooth manifold is a C-manifold endowed with a C°°-structure.
3.1. SMOOTH MANIFOLDS
51
Alternatively, one can say that a smooth manifold is a couple (M, A), where M is a C-manifold and A is a C°°-atlas on M. By a chart on a smooth manifold we will always mean a chart from its Cm-structure, that is, any chart compatible with the defining atlas A. A trivial example of a smooth manifold is R72 with the C°°-atlas consisting of a single chart (Rn, id). By default, the term "manifold" will be used as a synonymous of "smooth manifold". If f is a (real valued) function on a manifold M and k is a non-negative integer or oo then we write f E Ck(M) (or f E Ck) if the restriction of f to any chart is a Ck function of the local coordinates x1, x2, ..., x7L. The set Ck (M) is a linear space with respect to the usual addition of functions and multiplication by constant. For any function f E C (M), its support is defined by
suppf={x EM: f(x)
01,
where the bar stands for the closure of the set in M. Denote by Co (M) the subspace of Ck (M), which consists of functions whose support is compact. The fact that compact sets in M are closed implies that if f vanishes outside a compact set K C M then supp f c K. If S2 is an open subset of M then S2 naturally inherits all the above structures of M and becomes a smooth manifold if M is so. Indeed, the open sets in S2 are defined as the intersections of open sets in M with S2, and in the same way one defines charts and atlases in Q. The hypothesis of a countable base will be mostly used via the next simple lemma. LEMMA 3.4. For any manifold M, there is a countable family {Uz}2_1 of relatively compact charts covering all M and such that the closure Uz is contained in a chart.
PROOF. Any point x E M is contained in a chart, say Vx. Choose Ux C= Vx to be a small open ball around x so that Ux is also a chart. By definition, manifold M has a countable base, say {Bj 1. Let us mark each set Bj which is contained in some set U. Since Ux is open, it is a union of some marked sets Bj. It follows that all marked Bj cover M. Select for each marked Bj exactly one set Ux containing Bj. Thus, we obtain a countable family of sets Ux covering M, which finishes the proof. In particular, we see that a manifold M is a locally compact topological space.
The following statement extends Theorem 2.2 and provides a convenient vehicle for transporting the local properties of R' to manifolds.
THEOREM 3.5. Let K be a compact subset of a smooth manifold M and be a finite family of open sets covering K. Then there exist non-negative functions oj E Co (Uj) such that >j cps - 1 in an open neighbourhood of K and Ej cps < 1 in M.
52
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
A sequence of functions {cpj } as in Theorem 3.5 is called a partition of unity at K subordinate to the cover {U3}. A particular case of Theorem 3.5 with k = 1 says that, for any compact K and any open set U D K, there exists a function cp E Co (U) such that co - 1 in a neighborhood of K and, besides, 0 < cp < 1. Such a function cp is called a cutoff function of K in U.
PROOF. If each set Uj is a chart then the proof of Theorem 2.2 goes through unchanged. In the general case, for any point x E K, there is a chart Vx containing x and such that Vx C Uj for some j. Out of the family {Vx}xEK covering K select a finite subfamily {V } also covering K. Since each V is a chart, there exists a partition of unity {4bi} at K subordinate to {V}. Now define yl to be the sum of those functions V'i which are supported in U1; cp2 to be the sum of those functions ?Yi which are supported in U2 but not supported in Uj; ... ; cpk to be the sum of those functions ybi which are supported in Uk but not supported in U1, ..., Uk_1. Clearly, each coj is non-negative and belongs to Co (Uj). Since V is covered by some Uj, each
0i is supported in some Uj and, hence, each 0i will be used in the above construction exactly once. This implies E (Pi i
j
which finishes the proof. COROLLARY 3.6. Let {fZ«} be an arbitrary covering of M by open sets.
Then, for any function f E Co (M), there exists a finite sequence {fi}k 1 of functions from Co (M) such that each fi is supported in one of the sets Q,, and
f = fl + ... + fk.
(3.1)
PROOF. Let K = supp f and let S21i ..., SZk be a finite subfamily of {S2a} covering K. By Theorem 3.5, there exists a partition of unity {cpi}z 1 at K subordinate to {R}Z 1. Set fi = f coi so that fi E Co (a) Then .
Efi=f, because on K we have >i coi - 1, and outside K all functions f, fi vanish.
Exercises. 3.1. Prove that, on any C-manifold M, there exists a countable sequence {SZk} of relatively compact open sets such that 1 k C 11k+1 and the union of all 1 k is M. Prove also that if M is connected then the sets S2k can also be taken connected. REMARK. An increasing sequence {Ilk} of open subsets of M whose union is M, is called an exhaustion sequence. If in addition f2k C= S2k+1 (that is, f2k is relatively compact and ilk C slk+1) then the sequence {S2k} is called a compact exhaustion sequence.
3.2. TANGENT VECTORS
53
3.2. Prove that, on any C-manifold M, there is a countable locally finite family of relatively compact charts covering all M. (A family of sets is called locally finite if any compact set intersects at most finitely many sets from this family).
3.2. Tangent vectors Let M be a smooth manifold. DEFINITION 3.7. A mapping
: C°° (M) -4 R is called an R- differentiation
at a point xo E M if is linear; satisfies the product rule in the following form:
M(fg) _ (f)g(xo)+6(g)f (xo), for all f, g E C°°.
The set of all R-differentiations at xo is denoted by TxoM. For any rl E Txo M one defines the sum + rl as the sum of two functions on CO°,
and similarly one defined ) for any A E R. It is easy to check that both x+77 and ) are again IR-differentiations, so that TxoM is a linear space over
R. The linear space TxoM is called the tangent space of M at x0i and its elements (that is, II8-differentiations) are also called tangent vectors at xo.
THEOREM 3.8. If M is a smooth manifold of dimension n then the tangent space TxoM is a linear space of the same dimension n. We will prove this after a series of claims. CLAIM 1. Let U C M be an open set and Uo C= U be its open subset. Then, for any function f c C°° (U), there exists a function F E C°° (M) such that
f - F inUo.
PROOF. Indeed, let ,b be a cutoff function of Uo in U (see Theorem 3.5). Then define function F by
F='f in U, 1F=O
in M \ U,
which clearly satisfies all the requirements.
CLAIM 2. Let f E Coo (M) and let f - 0 in an open neighbourhood U of a point x0 E M. Then 6 (f) = 0 for any E T,;. M. Consequently, if F1 and F2 are smooth functions on M such that F1 - F2 in an open neighbourhood of a point xo E M then (Fl) _ (F2) for any E TxoM. PROOF. Let U0 be a neighborhood of xo such that U0 C= U and let 0 be a cutoff function of U0 in U. Then we have f - 0 on M, which implies the identity f = f (1 - 0). By the product rule, we obtain (1-0)) -0)f(xo) =0,
(f)
54
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
because f (xo) = (1- 0) (xo) = 0. The second part follows from the first one applied to the function f = F1 - F2. REMARK 3.9. Originally a tangent vector E Two M is defined as a functional on C°° (M). The results of Claims 1 and 2 imply that can be regarded as a functional on CO° (U) where U is any neighbourhood of X. Indeed, by Claim 1, for any f E CO° (U) there exists a function F E C°° (M) such that f = F in a neighborhood of xo; hence, set (f) :_ (F). By Claim 2, this definition of (f) does not depend on the choice of F. CLAIM 3. Let f be a smooth function in a ball B = BR(o) in RTh where o is the origin. Then there exist smooth functions hl, h2,..., h,,, in B such that,
for any x E B,
f(x) = f(o) + x'hi(x),
(3.2)
where we assume summation over the repeated index i. Also, we have hi (o)
= 8xi ( o)
(
3 3) .
.
PROOF. By the fundamental theorem of calculus applied to the function t y f (tx) on the interval t E [0, 1], we have
f(x) = f (o) + whence it follows
fo
dt f (tx) dt,
(3.4)
fwe
f (x) = f (o) + J xi Of (tx)dt. Setting
1
hi(x) =
O. (tx)dt
obtain (3.2). Clearly, hi E CO°(B). The identity (3.3) follows from the line above by substitution x = o. CLAIM 4. Under the hypothesis of Claim 3, there exist smooth functions hid
in B, (where i, j = 1, 2, ..., n) such that, for any x E B, f (x) = f (o) + xi axi (0) +
xixihij
(x).
(3.5)
PROOF. Applying (3.2) to the function hj instead of f we obtain that there exist smooth functions hid in B, i = 1, 2, ..., n such that h7 (x) = hj (o) + xZhij (x).
Substituting this into the representation (3.2) for f and using hj (o) = a (o) we obtain f (x) = f (o) + xihi(x) = f (o) + xi ax (o) + x2 k.j(x)-
3.2. TANGENT VECTORS
55
Now we can prove Theorem 3.8.
PROOF OF THEOREM 3.8. Let x', x2, ..., x' be local coordinates in a chart U containing xo. All the partial derivatives ax; evaluated at xo are I[8-differentiations at xo, and they are linearly independent. We will prove that any tangent vector E Tx0M is represented in'the form
=
where
(3.6)
(x2)
axi (note that, by Remark 3.9, the R-differentiation 6 applies also to smooth functions defined in a neighborhood of xo), which will imply that { e }i is a basis in the linear space Txo M and hence dim Txo M = n. Without loss of generality, we can assume that xo is the origin of the chart U. For any smooth function f on M, we have by (3.5) the following representation in a ball B C U centred at xo: f (x) = f (xo) + xi of (xo) + xZx'hi; (x) ,
where hid are some smooth functions in B. Using the linearity of 6, we obtain
(f) _ (1) f (xo) + (xi) axi
(xo) +
(xi
(3.7)
By the product rule, we have (1) = x (1 ' 1) = 6 (1) 1
whence
-6
(1) 1 = 26 (1),
(1) = 0. Set ui = xjhij. By the linearity and the product rule,
(Xiui) = (xi) ui(xo) + 6 (ui) xi(xo) = 0, because xi and hence ui vanish at xo. Hence, in the right hand side of (3.7), the first and the third term vanish, and we obtain
(f)
af
(3.8)
which was to be proved.
The numbers Ci are referred to as the components of the vector in the coordinate system xl, ..., xn. One often uses the following alternative notation for (f):
(f)= Then the identity (3.8) takes the form
of O which allows to think of directional derivative.
of axi ,
as a direction at xo and to interpret a£ as a
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
56
A vector field on a smooth manifold M is a family {v (x)}XEM of tangent
vectors such that v (x) E TxM for any x E M. In the local coordinates
x', ..., xn, it can be represented in the form v (x) = v2 (x) axi .
The vector field v (x) is called smooth if all the functions vi (x) are smooth in any chart.
Fix a point x E M and let f be a smooth function in a neighborhood of x. Define the notion of the differential df at x as follows: df is a linear functional on TxM given by
(df, ) = (f) for any
E TxM,
(3.9)
denotes the pairing of a linear functional on TxMand a vector where from TxM. Hence, df is an element of the dual space T,,*M, which is called a cotangent space. It is known from linear algebra that the dual space is also a linear space of the same dimension n. The elements of T, *M are called covectors.
Any basis {e,, ..., en}in TxM has a dual basis {e', ..., en} in the dual space T*M, which is defined by
j
(ei> ej) = 8
0,
j 4 i.
For example, the basis { ax= } has dual { dxi } because
a
(dxa, '9
x2 = S-.
axe) axe The covector df can be represented in the basis {dxi} as follows:
df =
of dxi,
(3.10)
that is, the partial derivatives a are the components of the differential df in the basis { dxi } . Indeed, for any j = 1, ..., n, -q-f(dxi = (af.dxi a) axe axe axe
a axe
=
of bi = of = (df a
axi
axe
' axe
).
3.3. Riemannian metric Let M be a smooth n-dimensional manifold. A Riemannian metric (or a Riemannian metric tensor) on M is a family' g = {g(x)}xEM such that g(x) is a symmetric, positive definite, bilinear form on the tangent space TxM, smoothly depending on x c M. 'One can also say that g is a smooth (0, 2)-tensor field on M.
3.3. RIEMANNIAN METRIC
Using the metric tensor, one defines an inner product gent space TxM by 2
57
in any tan-
77)g = g (x) (x,71)
for all tangent vectors , 77 E TxM. Hence, TxM becomes a Euclidean space. For any tangent vector E ,,x, its length is defined by 6)91/2
IIg =
In the local coordinates x1, ..., x't, the inner product in TxM has the form (3.11)
77)g = Yip (x) zrlj
where (gzj (x))i=1 is a symmetric positive definite n x n matrix. The functions gig (x) are called the components of the tensor g in the coordinates x1, ..., xn. The condition that g (x) smoothly depends on x means that all the components gzj (x) are C°°-functions in the corresponding charts. It follows from (3.11) that a
gz,axz,
a
(3.12)
DEFINITION 3.10. A Riemannian manifold is a couple (M, g) where g is a Riemannian metric on a smooth manifold M.
A trivial example of a Riemannian manifold is Rn with the canonical Euclidean metric gR. defined in the Cartesian coordinates x1, ..., xn by gRn = (dx1)2 + ... + (dxn)2.
For this metric, we have (gig) = id. It is frequently convenient to write the metric tensor g in the form g = gZjdxtdxj,
(3.13)
where dxidxj stands for the tensor product of the covectors dxz and dx2, which is a bilinear functional on TxM defined by dxidxj (y, 77) = (dx2, ) (dx', 77),
where (, ) is the pairing of covectors and vectors. Indeed, since (dxZ,) _
(x2)
-Z
f
(3.13) is equivalent tog (6, 77) = g2j627pi, which is just another form of (3.11).
Let (M, g) be a Riemannian manifold. The metric tensor g provides a canonical way of identifying the tangent space TxM with the cotangent
E ,,x, denote by g (x) a covector
space T, *M. Indeed, for any vector that is defined by the identity (g (x) , 77)
77)
g for all 77 E TxM.
(3.14)
2In the context when the metric tensor g is fixed, we will normally drop the subscript g from all notation.
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
58
Clearly, this makes g (x) into a linear mapping from TxM to TT M. In the local coordinates, we have (g (x) 0j I f = 9iAiR . which implies (g (x) S)j = 9ijSZ.
In particular, the components of the linear operator g (x) are gjj - the same as the components of the metric tensor. With a slight abuse of notation, one writes ij - (g (x) ) j so that the same letter is used to denote a vector and the corresponding covector. In this notation, we have j = g (x) is also non-zero as covector, because (g (x) ) > O.Therefore, the mapping ,
g(x) is injective and, hence, also bijective. Consequently, it has the inverse mapping g-1 (x) : TT M -3 TxM, whose components are denoted by (gij) so that (gii) = (9ij)-1
Hence, for any covector w E TT M, g-1 (x) w is a vector whose component are given by wi := (g-1 (x) w)Z (3.15) = gijwj.
Obviously, g-1 (x) can be considered as an inner product in TT M: for all v, w E TT M, set
(v, w)g-1 := (g-1 (x) v, g-1 (x) w)g = (V, g-' (X) LO). It follows that, in the local coordinates, (v) w)g-1 = gijviwj.
For any smooth function f on M, define its gradient V f (x) at a point x E M by V f (x) = g-1 (x) df (x) (3.16) that is, V f (x) is a covector version of df (x). Applying (3.14) with _ V f (x), we obtain, for any i E TxM, (V f, 71)g = (df, 77) = of ,
(3.17)
which can be considered as an alternative definition of the gradient. In the local coordinates x1, ..., x", we obtain by (3.15) and (3.16)
(Vf)Z=giiOf xi,
(3.18)
3.4. RIEMANNIAN MEASURE
59
If h is another smooth function on M then setting in (3.17) r, _ Vh and using (3.18), we obtain
(Vf,Vh)g = (df,Vh) =gija
ax = (df,dh)g-i.
(3.19)
Exercises. 3.3. Prove the product rule for d and V: d (uv) = udv + vdu and
V (uv) = vVv + vVu, where u and v are smooth function on M.
(3.20)
3.4. Prove the chain rule for d and V:
df (u) = f' (u) du and
V f (u) = f' (u) Vu where u and f are smooth functions on M and R, respectively.
3.4. Riemannian measure Some basic knowledge of the measure theory is required in this section (see the reference material in Appendix A, Section A.4). Let M be a smooth manifold of dimension n. Let B (M) be the smallest o-algebra containing all open sets in M. The elements of B (M) are called Borel sets. We say that a set E C M is measurable if, for any chart U, the intersection E fl U is a Lebesgue measurable set in U. Obviously, the family of all measurable sets in M forms a o-algebra; denote it by A (M). Since any open subset of M is measurable, it follows that also all Borel sets are measurable, that is, B (M) C A (M). The purpose of this section is to show that any Riemannian manifold (M, g) features a canonical measure v, defined on A (M), which is called the Riemannian measure (or volume). This measure is defined by means of the following theorem. THEOREM 3.11. For any Riemannian manifold (M, g) unique measure v on A (M) such that, in any chart U,
dv =
det gdA,
,
there exists a (3.21)
where g = (gig) is the matrix of the Riemannian metric g in U, and A is the Lebesgue measure in U. Furthermore, the' measure v is complete, v (K) < co for any compact set K C M. v (S2) > 0 for any non-empty open set 1 C M, and v is regular in the following sense: for any set A E A (M),
v (A) = sup {v (K) : K C A, K compact}
(3.22)
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
60
and
v (A) = inf {v (U) : A C 1, SZ open}.
(3.23)
For the proof we use the following lemma. LEMMA 3.12. Let x1, ..., x7 and y', ..., y7 be the local coordinate systems in open sets U and V, respectively. Denote by gX and gy the matrices of g in the coordinates xi xn and y1, ... , yn respectively. Let J = (Jf) nk,i=l be the Jacobian matrix of the change y = y (x) defined in U n V by Z
ayk
Ja =
(3.24)
axi,
where k is the row index and i is the column index. Then we have the following identity in U n V: gX = JTgVJ,
(3.25)
where jT is the transposed matrix. PROOF. By the chain rule, we have
a axi
ayk a ka J. axi ayk - ayk
whence by (3.12)
g
(3.26)
Noticing that Ji gyy'j = (JTgyJ)ij
we obtain
gx _
U=
JgyJ
ij
whence (3.25) follows.
PROOF OF THEOREM 3.11. The condition (3.21) means that, for any measurable set A C U,
v (A) _ f
det gda.
(3.27)
By measure theory, the identity (3.27), indeed, defines a measure v on the u-algebra A (U) of Lebesgue measurable sets in U (see Section A.4.3). We will show that the measure v defined by (3.27) in each chart, can be uniquely extended to A (M). However, before that, we need to ensure that the measures in different charts agree on their intersection. CLAIM. If U and V are two charts on M and A is a measurable set in U n V then v (A) defined by (3.27) has the same values in both charts. Let x1, ..., xn and y1, ..., yn be the local coordinate systems in U and V, respectively. Denote by gZ and gy the matrices of g in the coordinates
61
3.4. RIEMANNIAN MEASURE X11
x" and y1, ..., y', respectively. We need to show that, for any
measur-
able setACW:=Un/V, J
det gxdx = J
A
det gydy,
A
where dx and dy stand for the Lebesgue measures in U and V, respectively. By (3.25), we have
det gx = (det j)2 det gy.
(3.28)
Next, let us use the following formula for change of variables in multivariable
integration: if f is a non-negative measurable function in W then
f f dy = w
Jw
f Idet J1 dx.
Applying this for f = 1 A det gy, where A C W is a measurable set, and using (3.28), we obtain
f /-d-et gydy A
= JA
det gy Idet J1 dx =
det gxdx, A
which was to be proved. Now let us prove the uniqueness of measure v. By Lemma 3.4, there is a countable family {Ui}°O1 of relatively compact charts covering M and such that Ui is contained in a chart. For any measurable set A on M, define the sequence of sets Ai C Ui by
Al=An U1, A2=An U2\U1,..... Ai=AnUi\U1\...\Ui_1,... (3.29) (see Fig. 3.2).
FIGURE 3.2. Splitting A into disjoint sets Ai. Clearly, A = Ui Ai where the sign Li means "disjoint union". Therefore, for any extension of v, we should have
v(A)=Ev(Ai).
(3.30)
62
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
However, the value v (Ai) is uniquely defined because Ai is contained in the chart Ui. Hence, v (A) is also uniquely defined, which was to be proved.
To prove the existence of v, we use the same construction: for any measurable set A, define v (A) by (3.27), using the fact that v (Ai) is already defined. Let us show that v is a measure, that is, v is u-additive. Let {Ak} be a sequence of disjoint measurable sets in M and let
A=HAk. k
Defining the sets Ak similarly to (3.29), we obtain that
Ai=[Ai. k
Since v is v-additive in each chart U,, we obtain
v (Ai) _
v(Ak).
Adding up in i and interchanging the summation in i and k, we obtain
v(A)=Ev(Ak k
which was to be proved.
Let us show that measure v is complete, that is, any null set of v is measurable. Let N be a null set of v, that is, N C A for some set A with v (A) = 0. Defining Ni similarly to Ai by (3.29), we obtain Ni C Ai. Since v (A,) = 0, it follow from the formula (3.27) in Ui and det g > 0 that also A (Ai) = 0. Thus, Ni is a null set for the Lebesgue measure A in Ui. Since the Lebesgue measure is complete, we conclude that Ni is measurable and, hence, N is measurable. Any compact set K C M can covered by a finite number of charts Ui and, hence, K is a finite union of some sets Ki = K n Ui. Applying (3.27) in a chart containing Ui and noticing det g is bounded on Ui, we obtain v (Ki) < oo, which implies v (K) < oo.
Any non-empty open set Sl C M contains some chart U, whence it follows from (3.27) that
v(5)>v(U)=JU detgdA>0. Let us prove the inner regularity of v, that is (3.22). Let A be a relatively compact measurable subset of M. Then there is a finite family {Ui}z"_' 1 of charts that cover A. We can assume that each Ui is compact and is contained
in another chart Vi. By the regularity of the Lebesgue measure, each set Ai = A n Ui can be approximated by a compact set Ki C Ai such that Ai (Ai \ Ki) < ei where Ai is the Lebesgue measure in V and ei > 0 is any
3.4. RIEMANNIAN MEASURE
given number. Set Ci = supu2
63
det g, K = Ui'=, Ki, and observe that m
m
v (Ai \ Ki) < > Ciei
v (A \ K) <
i=1
i=1
Since Ei can be chosen arbitrarily small, the right hand side can be made arbitrarily small, which proves (3.22). If A is an arbitrary measurable subset of M, then take a compact exhaustion {f k} of M and apply the previous argument to Ak = A n SZk. Let Kk be a compact subset of Ak such that v (Ak \ Kk) < Ek where {Ek} is any sequence of positive numbers such that
rk-p0ask-*oo. Then we have
k ii(Kk)=u mnv(Ak)=v(A), which proves (3.22).
Finally, let us prove the outer regularity of v, that is (3.23). Let now {Ui} be a countable family of charts that cover M and such that each Ui is contained in another chart Vi, such that Vi is compact and is contained yet in another chart. By the regularity of the Lebesgue measure, the set Ai = A n Ui can be approximated by an open set S2i Ai so that S2i C V and Ai (Sl \ Ai) < Ei. Setting C i = s u p v, detg and S2 = U 1 Sli, we obtain as above
Ci6i
v (SZ \ A) < i=1
Since the right hand side can be made arbitrarily small by the choice of ei, we obtain (3.23). The extension of measure v from the charts to the whole manifold can also be done using the Caratheodory extension of measures. Consider the following family of subsets of M:
S = {A C M : A is a relatively compact measurable set and A is contained in a chart}
.
Observe that S is a semi-ring and, by the above Claim, v is defined as a measure on S. Hence, the Caratheodory extension of v exists and is a complete measure on M. It is not difficult to check that the domain of this measure is exactly A (M). Since the union of sets U, from Lemma 3.4 is M and v (Ui) < oo, the measure v on S is a-finite and, hence, its extension to A (M) is unique.
Since the Riemannian measure v is finite on compact sets, any continuous function with compact support is integrable against v. Let us record the following simple property of measure v, which will be used in the next section.
LEMMA 3.13. If f E C (M) and
fM for all cp E Co' (M) then f = 0.
f cpdv = 0
(3.31)
64
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
PROOF. Assume that f (xo) 0 for some point x0 E M, say, f (xo) > 0. Then, by the continuity of f, f (x) is strictly positive in a open neighborhood
1 of x0. Let cp be a cutoff function of {xo} in Q. Then cp - 1 in an open neighborhood U of xor.M Since v (U) > 0, it folllows that
=
J
ffdv > ffdu > 0,
which contradicts (3.31).
Exercises. 3.5. Let g, g be two Riemannian metric tensors on a smooth manifold M and let g and g be the matrices of g and g respectively in some coordinate system. Prove that the ratio det g det g
does not depend on the choice of the coordinates (although separately det g and det g` do depend on the coordinate system).
3.6. Let g, g be two Riemannian metric tensors on a smooth manifold M such that g g
that is, for alixE M and
_< C,
(3.32)
TIM,
i
6) < Cg
(a) Prove that if v and v are the Riemannian volumes of g and g, respectively. then
dv
dv where n = dim M. (b) Prove that, for any smooth function f on M, 1Of 19 < C O f 1g .
3.5. Divergence theorem For any smooth vector field v (x) on a Riemannian manifold (M, g), its divergence div v (x) is a smooth function on M, defined by means of the following statement. THEOREM 3.14. (Divergence theorem) For any C°°-vector field v (x) on
a Riemannian manifold M, there exists a unique smooth function on M, denoted by div v, such that the following identity holds
(divv) udv = for all u E Co (M).
JM
(v, Du)gdv,
(3.33)
3.5. DIVERGENCE THEOREM
65
PROOF. The uniqueness of div v is simple: if there are two candidates for div v, say (div v)' and (div v)" then, for all u E C0 (M),
l.,
(divv)'udv =
(
divv)"udv,
fM
which implies (div v)' = (div v)" by Lemma 3.13. To prove the existence of div v, let us first show that div v exists in any
chart. Namely, if U is a chart on M with the coordinates x1, ..., x' then, using (3.17), (3.21), and the integration-by-parts formula in U, we obtain, for any u E Co (U),
fu
(v, Vu)gdv
lu (
U
v,du)dv
vk 5xk
a _
fU axk 1
U
det gdA
(v/) (v/) u dA
a
k
det g ax
u dv.
(3.34)
Comparing with (3.33) we see that the divergence in U can be defined by
divv =
det g
a'k (1v).
(3.35)
If U and V are two charts then (3.35) defines the divergences in U and in V, which agree in U n V by the uniqueness statement. Hence, (3.35) defines div v as a function on the entire manifold M, and the divergence defined in this way satisfies the identity (3.33) for all test functions u compactly supported in one of the charts. We are left to extend the identity (3.33) to all functions u E Co (M). Let {SZa} be any family of charts covering M. By Corollary 3.6, any function u E C0 (M) can be represented as a sum U1 + ... + uk, where each ui is smooth and compactly supported in some Sta. Hence, (3.33) holds for each of the functions ui, and adding up all such identities, we obtain (3.33) for function u. El It follows from (3.35) that k
divv = axk + vk
aak
log
det g.
In particular, if det g =- 1 then we obtain the same formula as in
lR
: divv =
ax-
COROLLARY 3.15. The identity (3.33) holds also if u (x) is any smooth function on M and v (x) is a compactly supported smooth vector field on M.
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
66
PROOF. Let K = supp v. By Theorem 3.5, there exists a cutoff function of K, that is, a function cp E Co (M) such that cp - 1 in a neighbourhood offM K. Then ucp ErM Co (M), and we obtain in by Theorem 3.14
J
div v u dv =
J
(v, V (uco))gdv = - fm (v, Vu)gdv.
div v (ucp) dv = -
Alternative definition of divergence. Let us define the divergence div v in any chart by div v =
et g
Xk (/v'),
(3.36)
and show by a direct computation that, in the intersection of any two charts, (3.36) defines the same function. This approach allows to avoid integration in the definition of divergence but it is more technically involved (besides, we need integration and Theorem 3.14 anyway). We will use the following formula: if a =
is a non-singular n x n matrix smoothly depending on a real parameter t and (a?) is its inverse (where i is the row index and j is the column index) then 09
log det a = a ,
Oa
k
8t In the common domain of two coordinate systems x"...' x' and y',..., y', set _ i k
Jk = az' and Jk =
(3.37)
xk
y
Let g be the matrix of the tensor g and v' be the components of the vector v in coordinates
xl,, x", and let g be the matrix of g and v`k be the components of the vector v in coordinates y', ..., y". Then we have k
v=v'ati =v anti ayk
49 =v'Jk ayk
so that
vk=v'J;. Since by (3.28)
detg= detgIdetJr where J = (Jk), the divergence of v in coordinates yl,..., y' is given by det J div v = 1 sk ( det gk) = det g Jk 8x ( det gv' (det J) -1 Jk det g ay
8
_
1
j
a (v det gv) Jk 9Jzk + v Jk Jk det J a (det J)
et g 8x
det g 8x- (
axe
1
Aajk + viJk axe
_ k det gv') - v' axe log det J + v' J' axj
where we have used the fact that the matrices (Jr) and (Jk) are mutually inverse. To finish the proof, it suffices to show that, for any index i,
- axti log det J + Jk axz = 0. By (3.37), we have k ti
log det J = Jj ax'
(3.38)
3.6. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND WEIGHTED MANIFOLDS
67
Noticing that
a.r;
92yk
a2yk
axi = axiaxi =
aJk
axiax2 - axe '
we obtain (3.38).
3.6. Laplace operator and weighted manifolds Having defined gradient and divergence, we can now define the Laplace
operator (called also the Laplace-Beltrami operator) on any Riemannian manifold (M, g) as follows:
A = div o0. That is, for any smooth function f on M,
Af = div(Vf),
(3.39)
so that A f is also a smooth function on M. In local coordinates, we have L
det g axi
(gii_),
(3.40)
where g = (gig).
THEOREM 3.16. (Green formula) If u and v are smooth functions on a Riemannian manifold M and one of them has a compact support then
fM
uLv dv = - f (Vu, Vv)gdv = f viu dv. M
(3.41)
M
PROOF. Consider the vector field Vv. Clearly, supp Vv C supp v so that either supp u or supp Vv is compact. By Theorem 3.14, Corollary 3.15, and (3.39), we obtain f M u/v dv = M u div (V v) dv = - JM
f
J
The second identity in (3.41) is proved similarly.
For example, if (gig) - id then also (gig) - id, and (3.40) takes the form n
a2 (axi)2.
Any smooth positive function T (x) on a Riemannian manifold (M, g) gives rise to a measure p on M given by dtc = Tdv. The function T is called the density function of the measure p. For example, the density function of the Riemannian measure v is 1.
DEFINITION 3.17. A triple (M, g, u) is called a weighted manifold, if (M, g) is a Riemannian manifold and µ is a measure on M with a smooth positive density function.
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
68
The definition of gradient on a weighted manifold (M, g, p) is the same as on (M, g), but the definition of divergence changes. For any smooth vector field v on M, define its weighted divergence div, v by divN, v =
-lY
div (Tv)
.
It follows immediately from this definition and (3.33) that the following extension of Theorem 3.14 takes place: for all smooth vector fields v and functions u,
fM
dive v u dµ = - J (v, Du) gdp,
(3.42)
M
provided v or u has a compact support. Define the weighted Laplace operator 0,, by 0/Z = divA op.
The Green formulas remain true, that is, if u and v are smooth functions on M and one of them has a compact support then
fm u0v dy
f m(Vu, Vv)gdp = fm v0Au dp.
(3.43)
In the local coordinates x1, ..., x", we have dive, V = p a- ( -
(3.44)
and
_ 1 a (pgi3__). a axe
(3.45)
where p = T det g. Note also that dp = pdA, where A is the Lebesgue measure in U. Sometimes is it useful to know that the right hand side of (3.45) can be expanded as follows:
_ ii
-g
1 ap
a2
axiax3 +
ij
agi9
(Piii g + axi)
a axe
(3.46)
EXAMPLE 3.18. Consider the weighted manifold (IR, g, p) where g is the
canonical Euclidean metric and dp = Tdx. Then by (3.45) or (3.46)
Dµf
Tdx
T
dx
=
f
+ Tf
.
For example, if T = e-x2 then
0j f = f" - 2x f'.
(3.47)
3.6. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND WEIGHTED MANIFOLDS
69
Exercises. 3.7. (Product rule for divergence) Prove that, for any smooth function u and any smooth vector field w,
div, (uw) = (Du, w) + u div,, w
(3.48)
3.8. (Product rule for the Laplacian) Prove that, for any two smooth functions u and v, A,, (uv) = uA,,v + 2(Vu, Vv)g + (A,,u) v.
(3.49)
3.9. (Chain rule for the Laplacian) Prove that 2
Dµf (u) = f" (u) 1Vuj9 +
f,
(u) Aµ u,
where u and f are smooth functions on M and R, respectively. 3.10. The Hermite polynomials hk (x) are defined by
hk (x) = (-1)k eI
2 dk e_I2 xk
where k = 0, 1, 2, .... Show that the Hermite polynomials are the eigenfunctions of the operator (3.47). 3.11. Let a (x), b (x) be smooth positive functions on a weighted manifold (M, g, p), and define new metric g and measure µ by
g = ag and dµ = bdµ. Prove that the Laplace operator 2iT, of the weighted manifold (M, g, µ) is given by
Aµ = b dlv,
('V)
In particular, if a = b then
0 = 1Aµ. a 3.12. Consider the following operator L on a weighted manifold (M, g, µ): Lu = b div.. (AV u) ,
where b = b (x) is a smooth positive function on M and A = A (x) is a smooth field of positive definite symmetric operators on TIM. Prove that L coincides with the Laplace operator Dµ of the weighted manifold (M, g, Ei) where
g = bgA-1 and du = bdc. 3.13. Consider the following operator L on a weighted manifold (M, g, p):
Lu = 0µu + (Vv, Vu)g, where v is a smooth function on M. Prove that L = oy for some measure µ, and determine this measure.
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
70
3.7. Submanifolds If M is a smooth manifold then any open subset Q c M trivially becomes a smooth manifold by restricting all charts to Q. Also, if g is a Riemannian metric on M then gjQ is a Riemannian metric on Q. Hence, any open subset Sl of M can be considered as a (Riemannian) submanifold of a (Riemannian) manifold M of the same dimension. Consider a more interesting notion of a submanifold of smaller dimension. Any subset S of a smooth manifold M can be regarded as a topological space with induced topology. It is easy to see that S inherits from M the properties of being Hausdorff and having a countable base. A set S c M is called an (embedded) submanifold of dimension m if, for any point x0 E S, there is a chart (U, cp) on M covering x0 such that the intersection S n U is given in U by the equations xm+1 = xm+2
= ... = xn = 0
where x1, x2, ..., xn are the local coordinates in U (see Fig. 3.3). 9(snU)
9
Rn
FIGURE 3.3. The image w (S n u) lies in Rm c Rn.
In particular, this means that the image cp (U n s) is contained in the m-dimensional subspace of Rn ElRn:xm+l=xm+2=...=xn=0} {x which can be identified with R', so that cOI Uns can be considered as a
mapping from U n S to R1. Hence, (U n S, cpI uns) is a m-dimensional chart on S (with the coordinates x1, x2, ..., xm). With the atlas of all such charts, the submanifold S is a smooth m-dimensional manifold. Let 6 be an R-differentiation on S at a point x0 E S. For any smooth
function f on M, its restriction f Is is a smooth function on S. Hence, setting
(3.50) (f) (f Is), we see that can be extended to an R-differentiation on M at the same point x0. Therefore, (3.50) provides a natural identification of TT0S as a subspace of Two M.
71
3.7. SUBMANIFOLDS
Let (M, g) be a Riemannian manifold. If xo E S then by restricting the tensor g in Tx0M to the subspace Tx0S, we obtain the Riemannian metric gs on S, which is called the induced metric. Let (M, g, µ) be a weighted manifold and T be the density function of measure µ. Define the induced measure i s on S by the condition that ps has the density function Tis with respect to the Riemannian measure of gs. Hence, we obtain the weighted manifold (S, gs, µs). If dim S = n - 1 then the measure ps is also referred to as area as opposed to the n-dimensional measure µ, which in this context is called volume. LEMMA 3.19. Let M be a smooth manifold of dimension n and F : M -* IR
be a smooth function on M. Consider the null set of F, that is
N = {x EM:F(x)=0}. If dF 0 on N then N is a submanifold of dimension n - 1.
,3.51)
PROOF. For any point xo E N, there is a chart U on M containing xo
and such that dF 0 in U. This means that the row-vector (ax) does not vanish in U. By the implicit function theorem, there exists an open set V C U containing x0 and an index i E {1, ..., n} such that the equation F (x) = 0 in V can be resolved with respect to the coordinate xi; that is, the equation F (x) = 0 is equivalent in V to
xZ = f (X"... ..., xn), where f is a smooth function and the sign means that the coordinate x2 is omitted from the list. For simplicity of notation, set i = n so that the equation of set N in V becomes
n = f (X11
n-1
After the change of coordinates
yl = xl, yn-1 yn
xn-1
n- f(X1,...' n-1)
the equation of N in V becomes yn = 0 and hence N is a (n - 1)-dimensional submanifold. EXAMPLE 3.20. Consider in Rn+l the following equation (xn+1)2 = 1, (x1)2+... +
which defines the unit sphere Sn. Since Sn is the null set of the function
F (x) _ (x1)2 +... + (xn+1)2 - 1,
72
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
whose differential dF = (2x1, ..., 2xn+1) does not vanish on S'°, we conclude that §n is a submanifold of Rn+1 of dimension n. Furthermore, considering Rn+l as a Riemannian manifold with the canonical Euclidean metric, we see that Sn can be regarded as Riemannian manifold with the induced metric, which is called the canonical spherical metric and is denoted by gsn.
Exercises. 3.14. Let M be a smooth manifold of dimension n and N be its submanifold of dimension
n - 1 given by the equation F (x) = 0 where F is a smooth function on M such that dF 0 on N. Prove that, for any x E N, the tangent space TTN is determined as a subspace of TxM by the equation
TAN = { E TxM : (dF, ) = 01,
(3.52)
In the case when M = ]R', show that the tangent space TTN can be naturally identified with the hyperplane in R' that goes through x and has the normal
8F OF= 8x1
8F
...,-5
In other words, the tangent space TAN is identified with the tangent hyperplane to the hypersurface N at the point x.
3.8. Product manifolds Let X, Y be smooth manifolds of dimensions n and m, respectively,
and let M = X x Y be the direct product of X and Y as topological spaces. The space M consists of the couples (x, y) where x E X and y c Y, and it can be naturally endowed with a structure of a smooth manifold. Indeed, if U and V are charts on X and Y respectively, with the coordinates xl,..., x' and yl, ..., yfli then U x V is a chart on M with the coordinates xl xn yl ym The atlas of all such charts makes M into a smooth manifold. For any point (x, y) E M, the tangent space T(x,y) M is naturally identi-
fied as the direct sum TxX ® TY of the linear spaces. Indeed, fix a point (x, y) E M. Any JIB-differentiation E TxX can be considered as an )differentiation on functions f (x, y) on M by freezing the variable y, that is
C (f) _ C (f (', y)) This identifies TxX as a subspace of T(x y)M, and the same applied to TyY. Let us show that the intersection of TxX and TY in T(,y)M is {0} . Indeed,
if C E TxX n TyY then, for some vectors a E TxX and b E TyY and all f E C°° (M), (f) = a (f (', y)) = b (f (x, )), whence it follows that aZ
8xi (x, y) = b' a
(x) y)
9
,
3.8. PRODUCT MANIFOLDS
73
which is not possible for all f, unless all a2 = b = 0. Since dim TX = n, dim TyY = m, and dimT(x,y) = n + m, we conclude that T(x,y)M = TxX ® TyY.
(3.53)
If gx and gy are Riemannian metric tensors on X and Y, respectively, then define the metric tensor g on M as the direct sum
g=gx+gy.
(3.54)
Namely, for any (x, y) E M, any vector 6 E T(x y)M uniquely splits into the sum
where x E TxX and y c TyY; then set (gx + gY) (x, y) 77) = gx (x) (fix, 7 x) + gY (y) In the local coordinates x1, ..., xn, y', ..., y', we have
i)Y) .
gx + gy = (9x)Z dxzdxj + (9Y)kl dykdy'. The manifold (M, g) is called the Riemannian (or direct) product of (X, gx) and (Y, gy)
.
Note that the matrix g of the metric tensor g has the block form 0
9x
9Y
which implies a similar form for g-1 and det g = det gx det gy.
If vx and vy are the Riemannian measures on X and Y, respectively, then the Riemannian measure v of M is given by
dv = det gdxl...dx'zdyl...dy' = dvxdvy. Hence, v is the product of measures vx and vy, that is,
V=vxxvy (see Section A.4.6 for the definition of products of measures).
Denoting by Ox and Ay the Laplace operator on X and Y, respectively, and by zI, ..., zn+"n the coordinates x1, ..., x'i, y1, ..., yn'', we obtain the following expression of the Laplace operator A on M:
A_
a
1
det g azi det g axz 1
-vrd
gx
(Vldetgg"3
azi
(\/4/7) +
det g -z
9xi (\/det gx92X axe) +
(/gj)
d t gy ay',
(vde t gygy yi
J
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
74
that is,
A=Ox+Ay. Let (X, gx, µx) and (Y, gy, py) be weighted manifold. Setting M = X x Y, g = gx + gy and ,u = p X x µy, we obtain a weighted manifold (M, g, ,u), which is called the direct product of weighted manifolds (X, gx, ux) and (Y, gy, µy). A computation similar to the above shows that ON, = AAX + APY .
There are other possibility to define a Riemannian tensor g on the product manifold M = X x Y. For example, if 0 (x) is a smooth positive function on X then consider the metric
g = gx + 2 (x) gy.
(3.55)
The Riemannian manifold (M, g) with this metric is called a warped product of (X, gx) and (Y, gy). In the local coordinates, we have
g = (9x)ij dxdx' +02 (x) (9y)kl dykdyl Exercises. 3.15. Prove that the Riemannian measure v of the metric (3.55) is given by dv = Vim (x) dvxdvy,
(3.56)
and the Laplace operator A of this metric is given by
Af = Ax.f + m(Vx log'P, Vx.f)gx +
DYf,
(3.57)
where '7x is gradient on X.
3.9. Polar coordinates in W Sn, HI Euclidean space. In R, n > 2, every point x o can be represented in the polar coordinates as a couple (r, 0) where r := jxj > 0 is the polar radius and 0 E S 1 is the polar angle. CLAIM. The canonical Euclidean metric gin has the following representation in the polar coordinates: (3.58) 9Rn = dr2 + r2gsn-1, where gsn-1 is the canonical spherical metric. PROOF. Let 01,..., on-' be local coordinates on Sn-1 and let gsn-1 = ryyjd0id0j.
(3.59)
Then r, 01'...' 8n-1 are local coordinates on Rn, and (3.58) means that gRn = dr2 + r2 yjjd0id0i. (3.60) We start with the identity x = r8, which implies that the Cartesian coordinates x1, ..., xn can be expressed via the polar coordinates r, 0,...' 8n-1 as follows:
xz=rfz
(01,...,Qn-1),
(3.61)
3.9. POLAR COORDINATES IN R", S", H"
75
fn
where f' is the xi-coordinate in III' of the point 0 E S'-1. Clearly, f 1, are smooth functions of 91, ..., 9n-1 and
(fl)2+...+(fn)2=1.
(3.62)
Applying differential d to xi and using the product rule for d, we obtain dxz = f zdr + rdf z,
whence, taking the tensor product, (f i) 2 dr2 +
(rdr) (f2df2) + (fZdf2) (rdr) + r2 (dfi)2. Summing up these identities for all i and using (3.62) and its consequence (dxZ)2
=
E fzdf2 = 0,
(3.63)
i
we obtain i)2
9Rn =
= dr2 + r2
(
(dfi)2.
Clearly, we have
(dfi)2
2
ofzd9i
= (a0i
)
afz of2d0id9k = a0i a0k
which implies that the sum >i (df i) 2 can be represented in the form 2
(dfi) = ryjkd9id9k,
(3.64)
i where yjk are smooth functions of 01, ..., 0n-1. Hence, we obtain the identity (3.60).
We are left to verify that ryijdOidOj is the canonical spherical metric. Indeed, the metric gsn-i is obtained by restricting the metric gjn to Sn-1 On S-1 we have the coordinates 01,..., 0n-1 while r = 1 and dr = 0. Indeed, for any
E Twe have
(dr, ) = (r) _ (rlsn-1)
(1) = 0.
Therefore, substituting in (3.60) r = 1 and dr = 0, we obtain (3.59).
Sphere. Consider now the polar coordinates on S'. Let p be the north pole of Sn and q be the south pole of S7t (that is, p is the point (0, ..., 0, 1) in Wn+1 and q = -p). For any point x E Sn \ {p, q}, define r E (0, ir) and 9 E Sn-1 by x'
cosr = xn+1 and 0 =
/I ,
TX
(3.65)
where x' is the projection of x onto IEBW = {x E 1I8n+1 : xn+i = 0}. Clearly,
the polar radius r is the angle between the position vectors of x and p, and r can be regarded as the latitude of the point x measured from the pole. The polar angle 0 can be regarded as the longitude of the point x (see Fig. 3.4).
76
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD Axn+l
FIGURE 3.4. Polar coordinates on Sn
CLAIM. The canonical spherical metric gsn has the following representation in the polar coordinates:
gs = dr2 + sin 2 rg5n-1.
(3.66)
are local coordinates on Sn-1 and let us write PROOF. Let down the metric gsn in the local coordinates r, 01,..., 0'-1. Obviously, for any point x C Sn \ {p, q}, we have Ix'J = sinr whence x' = (sinr) B. Hence, the Cartesian coordinates x1, ..., xn+1 of the point x can be expressed as follows:
xi = sin r f z (81, ..., en-1) xn+1 =
cos r,
,
i = 1, ..., n,
3.9. POLAR COORDINATES IN R-, Sn, ]EII"'
77
where fz are the same functions as in (3.61). Therefore, we obtain using (3.62), (3.63), and (3.64), (dxl)2 +... + (dxn)2 + (dxn+i)2
_
)7 (f i cos rdr + sin rdf i) 2 + sin2 rdr2 i=1 En
((fi)2c0s2rdr2 + singr (dfi)2Il
i=1
n
(sin r cos rdr) (f 2df
E (f' df') (sin r cos rdr) i=1
i=1
+ sin2 rdr2
n
cost rdr2 + sin2 r
(df z) 2 + sin2 rdr2 i=1
dr2 + sin2 r 1 dO2d9' .
Since we already know that ryijdOidOj is the canonical metric on Sn-i, we obtain (3.66). Hyperbolic space. The hyperbolic space W2, n > 2, is defined as follows. Consider in Rn+1 a hyperboloid H given by the equation3 (xn+1) 2
_ (x) 2 = 1,
(3.67)
where x' = (xi, ..., xn) E Rn and xn+1 > 0. By Lemma 3.19, H is a submanifold of Rn+1 of dimension n. Consider in Rn+1 the Minkowski metric
-
(3.68) gMink = (dxi)2 + ... + (dxn)2 (dxn+I)2 , which is a bilinear symmetric form in any tangent space TxRn+1 but not positive definite (so, gMink is not a Riemannian metric, but is a pseudoRiemannian metric). Let gH be the restriction of the tensor gMink to H. We will prove below that gH is positive definite so that (H, gH) is a Riemannian manifold. By definition, this manifold is called the hyperbolic space and is denoted by ffl[n, and the metric gH is called the canonical hyperbolic metric and is denoted also by gun. Our main purpose here is to introduce the polar coordinates in if2 and to represent gHn in the polar coordinates. As a by-product, we will see that gnn is positive definite. Let p be the pole of Hn, that is p = (0, ..., 0,1) E Rn+1 For any point x E IH[n \ {p}, define r > 0 and 0 E Sn-1 by
coshr = xn+1 and 0 =
x
(3.69)
3For comparison, the equation of Sn can be written in the form (xn+1)2 + (x')2 = 1.
78
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
(see Fig. 3.5).
2------------------------------------------------------
FIGURE 3.5. Polar coordinates on IEIIV
CLAIM. The canonical hyperbolic metric gHn has the following representation in the polar coordinates:
gin = dr2 + sinh2 rgsn-,.
(3.70)
In particular, we see from (3.70) that the tensor gin is positive definite on T,,Hn for any x E Iflln \ {p}. The fact that gHn is positive definite on Tp1H['h follows directly from (3.68) because dxn+1 = 0 on Tpl[IT.
PROOF. Let 01, ..., 0n-1 be local coordinates on 8n-1 and let us write down the metric gHn in the local coordinates r, 01, ..., 0n-1. For any point
xEHn\{p}, we have Ix'1 =
Ixn+112 - 1 =
cosh2 r - 1 = sinh r,
whence x' = (sinh r) 0. Hence, the Cartesian coordinates x1, ..., xn+1 of the point x can be expressed as follows:
xi = sinh r f z (01, ..., on-1) i = 1, ..., n, ,
xn+1
= cosh r,
3.9. POLAR COORDINATES IN R", S", EI'
79
where f2 are the same functions as in (3.61). It follows that (dxl)2 + ... + (dxn)2 -
(dxn+1)2
n
(f 2 cosh rdr + sinh rdf 2) 2 - sinh2 rdr2 i=1
(i2 cosh2 rdr2 + sinh2 r (df i) 2)
n
n
n
(sinh r cosh rdr) (f zdf Z) + E (f 2df Z) (sink r cosh rdr) i=1
i=1
- sinh2 rdr2
n
cosh2 rdr2 + sinh2 r
(df z) 2
- sinh2 rdr2
i=1
dr2 + sinh2 rry2j dOidO3 .
Since y2jd92dOj is the canonical metric on 5n-1, we obtain (3.70).
Exercises. 3.16. Let q be the south pole of S". For any point x E S" \ {q}, its stereographic projection
is the point y at the subspace R" _ {zER' ':z"+1 =0}, which belongs to the straight line through x and q. Show that the stereographic projection is a bijection x H y between S" \ {q} and R' given by x'
x+1+1'
Y
where x = (x', ..., x"+') and x' = (x1, ..., x'). Prove that, in the Cartesian coordinates yl, ..., y", the canonical spherical metric has the form 4
gsn =
22
>
(1 + 1y )
where y12 = j (yz)2 and gR" = (dyl)2 +... + (dy'' )2 is the canonical Euclidean metric. 3.17. Prove that the canonical hyperbolic metric gH. is positive definite using directly the definition of gH" as the restriction of the Minkowski metric to the hyperboloid.
3.18. Show that the equation x
(3.71)
x"+1+1 determines a bijection of the hyperboloid H onto the unit ball B' = {lyl < 1} in W.
Prove that, in the Cartesian coordinates y', ..., y" in l3', the canonical hyperbolic metric has the form 4
gam" = (
where
1-
(3.72)
(yi)2 and gR" = (dyi)2 +... + (dy")2 is the canonical Euclidean metric.
REMARK. The ball B with the metric (3.72) is called the Poincare model of the hyperbolic space. Representation of the metric guy" in this form gives yet another proof of its positive definiteness.
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
80
3.19. Prove that the relation between the polar coordinates (r, 8) in IH" and the coordinates yi, ..., y" in the Poincare model of Exercise 3.18 are given by a
cosh r= 1+Yi2 and B= Iyi
3.10. Model manifolds DEFINITION 3.21. An n-dimensional Riemannian manifold (M, g) is called a Riemannian model if the following two conditions are satisfied:
(1) There is a chart on M that covers all M, and the image of this chart in Rn is a ball
Bro:={xER' :jxJ
then r, 01
en-1 are local coordinates on M \ {o}, and (3.73) is equivalent
to
g = dr2 +
,b2
(r) 7ijdOid9j.
(3.74)
Observe also that away from a neighborhood of o, 0 (r) may be any smooth positive function. However, b (r) should satisfy certain conditions near o to ensure that the metric (3.73) extends smoothly to o (see [133]). In some cases, the polar coordinates on a Riemannian manifold can be used to identify this manifold or its part as a model. For example, the results of Section 3.9 imply the following:
Rn is a model with the radius ro = oo and 0 (r) = r; Sn without a pole is a model with the radius ro = ir and 0 (r) _ sin r;
IH[n is a model with the radius ro = oo and 0 (r) = sinh r. The following statement is a particular case of Exercise 3.15. LEMMA 3.22. On a model manifold (M, g) with metric (3.73), the Riemannian measure v is given in the polar coordinates by dv = 0 (r)n-1 drdO,
(3.75)
3.10. MODEL MANIFOLDS
81
where dO stands for the Riemannian measure on Sn-1, and the Laplace operator on (M, g) has the form
(-log_1)
(3.76)
= 22 + ar + (r) ASn-i PROOF. Let g = (gij) be the matrix of the tensor g in coordinates r, 01, ..., Bn-1. For simplicity of notation, set 90 = r and assume that the .
indices i, j vary from 0 to n - 1. It follows from (3.74) that 0
1
g=
0
...
,b2
(3.77)
(r) 7ij
l
and 0
1
0
.
0
(gii) = g-1 =
0-2
0
In particular, we have
(3.78)
(r) 'yij
I1
I
,2(n-1) det g = det ly, where -y = ('yij), which implies (3.75). Using representation (3.40) of A in local coordinates, that is,
n-1
1
A
det g
a (\/giia\\ det
(3.80)
09j
_o aBi
(3.79)
and that goo = 1, goi = 0 for i > 1, we obtain
_
a
1
det g ar
(
det g
aar)
n-1
+
a (\/gii det g aBi aBj a
1
Applying (3.78) and (3.79) and noticing that depend only on 01,..., 61-1, we obtain
a(V/detg a) =
1
ar
det g ar
a2
8r2
+
(3.81)
depends only on r and
a
ar
log
det g
'yij
)a ar
a d n-1 a are + dr log ) ar and
Iet g ( Zeaja)
n-1
a
1
i,j-1
d
ae
det ggij
_ i j=
_
1
^1,21
Substituting into (3.81), we obtain (3.76).
r)
det
ai (
ae
Din-1 .
det ry'y2 a
aej )
82
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
EXAMPLE 3.23. In IRn, we have b(r) = r and, hence,
dv = r'-'drd8 and
n-1 a
a2
ARn =
In Sn, we have
(3.82)
ar2 +
r
1
Or
(3.83)
+ r2
(r) = sin r and, hence, dv = sinn-1 r drd8
and
a+ (n - 1) cot r a + 2 dsnOr ar2 sin' r z
.
(3.84)
In Hn, we have 0 (r) = sinh r and, hence, dv = sinhn-1 r drdO and
aar2 + (n - 1) coth rara 2
AHn =
+ sm1h2 r ASn-i
(3.85)
The formula (3.84) can be iterated in dimension to obtain a full expansion of As. in the polar coordinates (see Exercise 3.22). Consider now a weighted model (M, g, p) where (M, g) is a Riemannian model, and measure µ has the density function T (r), which depends only on r. Setting (r) we obtain from Lemma 3.22
dµ=v(r)drdO
(3.86)
and 2
A
`=
ar2 + ar + ,/j2 (r) D in-j
( 3 . 87)
Let wn be the full Riemannian measure of Sn-1, that is Wn =
d8.
J
Then it follows from (3.86) that, for any R E (0, ro), fR v (r) dr. p (BR) = Wn
J0
(3.88)
(3.89)
For example, in Rn we have a (r) = rn-1 and u (BR) =
nn
Rn.
(3.90)
The function R - p (BR) is called the volume function of the model manifold. Define the area function S (r) by S (r) := wnv (r) = wnT (r) 0" (r). (3.91) It obviously follows from (3.89) and (3.87) that
3.10. MODEL MANIFOLDS
IL (BR) = inR S (r) dr
83
(3.92)
and
µ - r2 + S (r) ar +i2 (r)
(3.93)
To explain the terminology, consider the sphere
Sr={xER' :jxj =r} as a submanifold of M of dimension n - 1 (cf. Example 3.20). It is easy to show that S(r)=/2S,(Sr),
where µs, is the induced measure on Sr. Hence, S (r) is the area of the sphere Sr, which explains the term "area function".
Exercises. Let w be defined by (3.88). (a) Use (3.89) to obtain a recursive formula for w". (b) Evaluate w" for n = 3,4 given w2 = 27r. Evaluate the volume functions of ]', 5",
3.20.
ffl[" for n = 2, 3, 4.
3.21. Prove that, for any n > 1, w" = 21, (n/2) ,
(3.94)
where P is the gamma function (cf. Section A.6).
3.22. Using (3.84), obtain a full expansion of As" in the polar coordinates for n = 2, 3. Hence, obtain a full expansion of A. and Ax . in the polar coordinates for n = 2, 3. 3.23. Consider in H3 a function u given in the polar coordinates by u =Sinn (a) Prove that, in the domain of the polar coordinates, this function satisfies the equation
AH3U+u=0.
(3.95)
(b) Prove that function u extends to a smooth function in the whole space H3 and, hence, satisfies (3.95) in I3. HINT. Write function u in the coordinates of the Poincare model (cf. Exercises 3.18 and 3.19).
3.24. Let M be a weighted model of radius ro and u = u (r) be a smooth function on M \ {o} depending only on the polar radius. Let S (r) be its area function. Prove that u is harmonic, that is, Au = 0, if and only if
u (r) = C J 1 S (r) + Cl, where C, Cl arbitrary reals and rl E (0, ro). Hence or otherwise, find all radial harmonic functions in R" S2 S3, H2, H3
84
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
3.25. Let M be a weighted model of radius ro. Fix some 0 < a < b < ro and consider the annulus
A={xEM:a<jxj
Vv)d+ f ur.vdsb -
(Au) v dj, = -
t
IA
JA
and
Lu)vd_
Ln
ff
a
urvd(3.96)
(ur'U - vru) dµSb
b-
Jsa
(urv - VrU) d)us.,
(3.97)
where u, = ar 3.26. Let S be a surface of revolution in Rn+1 given by the equation
Ix'I=(D (x"+l), where
is a smooth positive function defined on an open interval. (a) Prove that S is a submanifold of R"+1 of dimension n.
'
(b) Prove that the induced metric gs of S is given in the coordinates t = x"+1 and E S"-1 by 0= gs = (1 + b' (t)2) dt2 + (c) Show that the change of the coordinate
D2
(t) gsn-i .
p=J 1+V (t)2dt brings the metric gs to the model form
gs = dp2 + T2 (P) where ' is a smooth positive function.
(3.98)
gsn-1,
3.27. Represent in the model form (3.98) the induced metric of the cylinder
Cyl=Ix ER"+l:lxl=1} and that of the cone Cone = j x E R "+1 : x"+1 = I x' ` > 01.
3.28. The pseudo-sphere PS is defined as follows
PS =
' Ix E lin+1 0
xn+1
1
'
log
1+
1 - Ix' I2 1xI
Show that the model form (3.98) of the induced metric of PS is gps = dp2 + e-2pgs"-1 . HINT. Use a variable s defined by Ix' = cosh s 3.29. For any two-dimensional Riemannian manifold (M, g), the Gauss curvature KM,g (x)
is defined in a certain way as a function on M. It is known that if the metric g has in coordinates x1, x2 the form
g=
(dxl)2 + (dx2)2
f 2 (x)
(3.99)
3.11. LENGTH OF PATHS AND THE GEODESIC DISTANCE
85
where f is a smooth positive function, then the Gauss curvature can be computed in this chart as follows (3.100) Km,g = f 201og f,
where 0 = Pyr + (a=2 is the Laplace operator of the metric (dxl)2 +
(dx2)2.
(a) Using (3.100), evaluate the Gauss curvature of H2, S2, H2. { (x1, x2) E H2 : x2 > 0} the metric (b) Consider in the half-plane 1R g
- (dxl)2 + (dx2)2 (x2)2
Evaluate the Gauss curvature of this metric.
3.30. Let g be the metric (3.99) on a two-dimensional manifold M. Consider the metric g where h is a smooth positive function on M. Prove that KM,g = (KM,g + Og log h) h2
where Og is the Laplace operator of the metric g.
3.31. Let the metric g on a two-dimensional manifold M have in coordinates (r, 9) the form
g = dr2 + 02 (r) d92.
Prove that KM,g =
- (r)
(3.101) (3.102)
3.32. Using (3.102), evaluate the Gauss curvature of the two-dimensional manifolds H2, S2, 12, Cyl, Cone, PS.
3.33. Find all metrics g of the form (3.101) with constant Gauss curvature.
3.11. Length of paths and the geodesic distance Let M be a smooth manifold. A path on M is any continuous mapping
y : (a, b) -* M where -oo < a < b < +oo. In local coordinates xi, ..., xn, the path is given by its components y2 (t). If yi (t) are smooth functions of t then the path y is also called smooth. For any smooth path y (t), its velocity 'y (t) is an ll8-differentiation at the point -y (t) defined by (3.103) 'y (t) (f) _ (f o y)' (t) for all f c C°° (M) , where the dash ' means derivation in t. In the local coordinates, we have,
using the notation `' = d (f o 'y), = rye ax ,
whence it follows that
a
y = -Y 0 . This implies, in particular, that any tangent vector E TxM can be reprewill sented as the velocity of a path (for example, the path yi (t) = xi + do).
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
86
Let now (M, g) be a R.iemannian manifold. Recall that length of a tangent vector TTM is defined by ICI = (6, C)g. For any smooth path y : (a, b) -+ M, its length 2 (y) is defined by (y) =
f
b
I1' (t) I dt.
(3.104)
a
If the interval (a, b) is bounded and y extends to a smooth mapping from the closed interval [a, b] to M then f (y) < oo. If the image of y is contained in a chart U with coordinates x', ..., xn then gzi (y (t))
(t) I =
(t) 73 (t)
and hence b
(,Y) = f
gz Yi'Y dt.
a
For example, if (gjj) - id then b
a
Let us use the paths to define a distance function on the manifold (M, g).
We say that a path y : [a, b] --4 M connects points x and y if y (a) = x and y (b) = y. The geodesic distance d (x, y) between points x, y E M is defined by
d(x,y) =inff(y), 7
(3.105)
where the infimum is taken over all smooth paths connecting x and y. If the infimum in (3.105) is attained on a path y then y is called a shortest (or a minimizing) geodesics between x and y. If there is no path connecting x and y then, by definition, d (x, y) = +oo. Our purpose is to show that the geodesic distance is a metric4 on M, and the topology of the metric space (M, d) coincides with the original topology
of the smooth manifold M (see Corollary 3.26 below). We start with the following observation. CLAIM. The geodesic distance satisfies the following properties. (i) d (x, y) E [0, +oo] and d (x, x) = 0.
(ii) Symmetry: d (x, y) = d (y, x). (iii) The triangle inequality: d (x, y) < d (x, z) + d (y, z). 4We allow a metric d (x, y) to take value +oo. It can always be replaced by a finite metric
d(x,y)
d(x,y)
I+d(x,y)'
which determines the same topology as d (x, y).
3.11. LENGTH OF PATHS AND THE GEODESIC DISTANCE
87
PROOF. Properties (i) and (ii) trivially follow from (3.105). To prove (iii), consider any smooth path -yl connecting x and z, and a smooth path rye connecting z and y. Let 'y be the path connecting x and y, which goes first from x to z along yl and then from z to y along rye. Then we obtain from (3.105) that5
d(x,y)
('y)
whence the triangle inequality follows by minimizing in yl and -y2.
We still need to verify that d (x, y) > 0 for all distinct points x, y. A crucial step towards that is contained in the following lemma.
LEMMA 3.24. For any point p E M, there is a chart U D p and C > 1 such that, for all x, y E U,
C-i Ix - yj < d (x, y) < C Ix - yl.
(3.106)
PROOF. Fix a point p E M and a chart W around p with local coordinates xi, ..., xn. Let V C W be a Euclidean ball in W of (a small) radius r centered at p. _ For any x c V and any tangent vector C E TxM, its length in the metric g is given by gij (x)
Z
.
in the Euclidean metric e is given by
whereas its length
n i=1
Since the matrix (gij (x)) is positive definite and continuously depends on x, there is a constant C > 1 such that n
n
Ci-2 > (e)2 < gij (x) Sy < C2 E for all x E V and
(e2)2
E TxM. Hence, we obtain
C-1
Idle
(
Ig
C
t Idle,
which implies that, for any smooth path 'y in V,
C-'f. (7') C fg ('y) < Cue (7) Connecting points x, y E V by a straight line segment -y and noticing that the image of y is contained in V and fe (y) = Ix - yj we obtain
d(x,y) <_ ig(y)
88
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
Let U be the Euclidean ball in W of radius it centered at p. Let -y be any smooth path on M connecting points x, y E U. If y stays in V then 6e (y) > Ix - yl, whence 2g (y) > C-1 Ix - yI
(3.107)
(cf. Exercise 3.37)
FIGURE 3.6. Path -y connecting the points x, y intersects aV
at a point z.
If y does not stay in V then it intersects the sphere aV (see Fig. 3.6). Denoting by ry be the part of -y that connects in V the point x to a point z E aV, we obtain
Qg(y)>Qg(y)>C-'
Ix- zI
>C-12r>C-1
Ix-yl.
Hence, (3.107) holds for all paths y connecting x and y, which implies d(x,y)?C-IIx-yj .
COROLLARY 3.25. We have d (x, y) > 0 for all distinct points x, y E M. Consequently, the geodesic distance d (x, y) satisfies the axioms of a metric and, hence, (M, d) is a metric space.
3.11. LENGTH OF PATHS AND THE GEODESIC DISTANCE
89
PROOF. Fix a point p E M and let U be a chat as in Lemma 3.24. If x E U then d (x, p) > 0 by (3.106). We are left to treat the case x E M \ U. Considering U as a part of R', denote by Br (p) the Euclidean ball of radius r > 0 centered at p, that is,
Br(p)={yER7 . ly-pl C-1r, which finishes the proof.
For any x E M and r > 0, denote by B (x, r) the geodesic ball of radius r centered at x E M, that is B (x, r) = {y E M : d (x, y) < r} . In other words, B (x, r) are the metric balls in the metric space (M, d). By definition, the topology of any metric space is generated by metric balls, which form a base of this topology. Note that the metric balls are open sets in this topology. COROLLARY 3.26. The topology of the metric space (M, d) coincides with
the original topology of the smooth manifold M.
PROOF. Since the topology of M in any chart U coincides with the Euclidean topology in U, it suffices to show that the geodesic balls form a local base of the Euclidean topology in U. Fix a point p E M and let U be a chart constructed in Lemma 3.24, where (3.106) holds. Considering U as a part of RTh, recall that the Euclidean balls Br (p) form a local base of the Euclidean topology at the point p. For some E > 0, the ball Be (p) is contained in U and, hence, can be regarded as a subset of M. The result
will follow if we show that, for any r < Z, the geodesic ball B (p, r) is sandwiched between two Euclidean balls as follows: (3.108) BC-lr (p) C B (p, r) C BC, (p), where C is the constant from (3.106). Indeed,, if x E BC-ir (p) then x E U and
d(x,p)
g (7) !d (y, p) > C-' iy - pI = 2C > r, whence d (x, p) > r and x and, hence,
B (p, r). Therefore, x E B (p, r) implies x E U
Ix - pI < Cd(x,p)
.
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
90
FIGURE 3.7. If x U then any path y connecting x and p contains a point y c U such that IV - pi = --/2
Exercises. 3.34. Prove that the length f (-y) does not depend on the parametrization of the path -y as long as the change of the parameter is monotone. 3.35. Prove that the geodesic distance d (x, y) is finite if and only if the points x, y belong to the same connected component of M.
3.36. Let (M, g) be a Riemannian model, and let x', x" be two points on M with the polar coordinates (r', 0') and (r", 9"), respectively. (a) Prove that, for any smooth path y on M connecting the points x' and x",
$(7) > fr' - r"f. Consequently, d (x', x") > Ir' - r"I I. (b) Show that if 9' = 9" then there exists a path ry of length I r' - r" I connecting the points x' and x". Consequently, d (x', x") = I r' - r" I.
3.37. Let (M, g) be a Riemannian model. Prove that, for any point x = (r, 0), we have
d(0,x)=r. Hence or otherwise prove that in R the geodesic distance d (x, y) coincides with Ix - y(. 3.38. Let 'y be a shortest geodesics between points x, y and let z be a point on the image of -y. Prove that the part of -y connecting x and z is a shortest geodesics between x and z. 3.39. Fix a point p on a Riemannian manifold M and consider the function f (x) = d (x, p). Prove that if f (x) is finite and smooth in a neighborhood of a point x then Io f WI < 1-
3.40. Let (M, g) be a Riemannian model with infinite radius. Prove that, for any smooth even function a on R, the function a o r is smooth on M, where r is the polar radius on (M, g)
3.12. SMOOTH MAPPINGS AND ISOMETRIES
91
3.41. Denote by S the class of all smooth, positive, even functions a on Il', such that 00
a (t) dt = oo.
(3.109)
For any function a E S, let C. be the conformal transformation of the metric of a Riemannian model (M, g) with infinite radius given by Cag = a2 (r) g. (a) Prove that (M, Cag) is also a Riemannian model with infinite radius and that the polar radius r on (M, Cag) is related to the polar radius r on (M, g) by the identity
r (b)
=
fr
a (s) ds.
For any two functions a, b e S, consider the operation a * b defined by
(a*b) (t) =a (ftb(s)ds) b(t).
(3.110)
Prove that (S, *) is a group. (c)
Fix mENandsetforanyvERl logl"l r = (log r)" (log log r)"2 ... (log ... logr)vm m times
assuming that r is a large enough positive number. Let a and b be functions from S such that, for large enough r,
a (r) - ra-1 logl"I r and b (r)
-
r"-1 logl"I
r,
for some a, ,Q E 1[8+ and u, v E H''. Prove that a*b
' r- I log'-] r,
where
'y = a,Q and w = u + av.
(3.111)
REMARK. The identity (3.111) leads to the operation
(u, a) * (v,,3) = (u + av, CO),
that coincides with the group operation in the semi-direct product R- >4 R+, where the multiplicative group IL acts on the additive group R' by the scalar multiplication.
3.12. Smooth mappings and isometries Let M and N be two smooth manifolds of dimension m and n, respectively. A mapping J : M -4 N is called smooth if it is represented in any charts of M and N by smooth functions. More precisely, this means the following. Let x1, ..., x"'' be the local coordinates in a chart U C M, and yl, ..., yn be the local coordinates in a chart V C N, and let J (U) C V. Then the mapping JJu is given by n functions yi (x1, ..., xm), and all they must be smooth. A smooth mapping J : M -+ N allows to transfer various objects and structures either from M to N, or back from N to M. The corresponding operators in the case "from M to N" are called "push forward" operators, and in the case "from N to M" they are called "pullback" operators and
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
92
are denoted by J,,. For example, any function f on N induces the pullback function J,, f on M by J. f = f o J, that is
J. f (x) = f (Jx) for all x c M. Clearly, if f is smooth then J. f is also smooth. This allows to push forward a tangent vector 6 E TIM to the tangent vector in TjxN, which is denoted by dJ6 and is defined as an R-differentiation by
dJ (f) = (J* f) for any f E COO(N).
(3.112)
The push forward operator
dJ:TxM-*Tj(x)N
(3.113)
is called the differential or the tangent map of J at the point x. In the local coordinates, we have
(J*f)_
ei'9y' '9f
that is, aye
axi In terms of the differentials dxi and dyj, this equation becomes dyj
=aaxij dx i
(3.114)
.
Given a Riemannian metric tensor g on N, define its pullback J*g by J*g (x)
dJrl)
77) = g (Jx)
,
(3.115)
for all x E M and , i E TIM. Obviously, J*g (x) is a symmetric, nonnegative definite, bilinear form on TIM, and it is positive definite provided the differential (3.113) is injective. In the latter case, J*g is a Riemannian metric on M. In the local coordinates, we have gy
J. g = gijdytdyj = gij axk axl dxkdxl whence ay, aye
kxa
(J*g)k1 = gij a
ax.
(3.116)
Assume from now on that M and N have the same dimension n. A mapping J : M -* N is called a diffeomorphism if it is smooth and the inverse mapping J-1 : N -4 M exists and is also smooth. In this case, the differentials dJ and dJ-1 are mutually inverse, which implies that dJ is injective. Two Riemannian manifolds (M, gm) and (N, gN) are called isometric if
there is a diffeomorphism J : M -4 N such that
J*gN=gM-
3.12. SMOOTH MAPPINGS AND ISOMETRIES
93
Such a mapping J is called a Riemannian isometry. Two weighted manifolds (M, gm, µM) and (N, gN, [IN) are called isometric if there is a Riemannian
isometry J : M -* N such that J*TN = TM, where TN and TM are the density functions of AN and Am, respectively. Similarly, two weighted manifolds (M, gm, AM) and (N, gN, AN) are called quasi-isometric if there is a diffeomorphism J : M - N such that
J*gN -_ gm and J*TN - TM, (3.117) where the sign _ means that the ratio of the both sides is bounded by positive constants from above and below. Such a mapping J is called a quasi-isometry.
LEMMA 3.27. Let J be an isometry of two weighted manifolds as above. Then the following is true:
(a) For any integrable function f on N,
f (b) For any f E C°° (N), M
(J*.f) dN-M = fN .f dyN
(3.118)
(3.119) J* (ANf) = AM (J*f), where AM and AN are the weighted Laplace operators on M and N, respectively.
PROOF. By definition of the integral, it suffices to prove (3.118) for func-
tions f with compact supports. Using then a partition of unity of Theorem 3.5, we see that it is enough to consider the case when supp f is contained in a chart. Let V be a chart on N with coordinates y1, ..., yn. By shrinking
it if necessary, we can assume that U = J-1 (V) is a chart on M; let its coordinates be x1, ..., xn. By pushing forward functions x1, ..., xn to N, we can consider x1, ..., xn as new coordinates in V. With this identification of U and V, the operator J* becomes the identity
operator. Hence, (3.118) amounts to proving that measures µM and AN coincide in V. Let g . be the components of the tensor gN in V in the coordinates y', ..., yn, and let gki be the components of the tensor gN in V in the coordinates x1, ..., xn. By (3.26), we have x
Y
'9y'
aye gkl = gij 5xk 9x1
(3.120)
Let g k l be the components of the tensor gm in U in the coordinates xl, ..., xn.
Since gm = J*gN, we have by (3.116) that ayi ayj y
9kl = gij axk 8x1 whence gkl = gl1.
(3.121)
3. LAPLACE OPERATOR ON A RIEMANNIAN MANIFOLD
94
Since measures IBM and ,UN have the same density function, say T, it follows
that
dµN = =
7C
det edxl...dxn
`Y
det gdxl...dxn
= dpm, which proves the identity of measures µM and AN. In the same way, we have
=
1
a
T det gx axz
(T/(Yx)ii axe
= OM
Define the push forward measure JpM on N by (JAM) (A) = Am (J-1 (A))
where A is a subset of N. The identity (3.118) means that
J/JM=AN, provided J is an isometry. A typical situation when Lemma 3.27 may be useful is the following. Let J be an isometry of a weighed manifold (M, g, µ) onto itself. Then (3.119) means that AA commutes with J,,. Alternatively, (3.119) can be written in the form
(& f)oJ=LN,(foJ). In R with the canonical Euclidean metric gR-, a translation is a trivial example of a Riemannian isometry. Another example is an element of the
orthogonal group 0 (n) (in particular, a rotation). The latter is also an isometry of Sn-1 with the canonical spherical metric grp-i. Let (M, g, µ) be a weighted model with polar coordinates (r, 0) (see Section 3.10) and let J be an isometry of Sn-1. Then J induces an isometry of (M, g, /t) by
J(r,0) _ (r,JO), which implies that A. commutes with the rotations of the polar angle 0.
Exercises. 3.42. Let J : M -+ M be a Riemannian isometry and let S be a submanifold of M such that J (S) = S. Prove that Jis is a Riemannian isometry of S with respect to the induced metric of S. 3.43. Let (M, gm) and (N, gN) be Riemannian manifolds and J : M -* N be a Riemannian isometry. Prove the following identities: (a) For any smooth path 'y on M, /
£gM l'v)
'gN (J o 'y)
(b) For any two points x, y E M, dm (x, y) = dN (Jx, Jy) , where dM, dN are the geodesic distances on M and N, respectively.
95
NOTES
3.44. Let (M, gm, µM) and (N, gN, fcN) be two weighted manifolds and J : M -* N be a quasi-isometry. Prove the following relations. (a) For all smooth paths 'y on M,
'g, (7) ti ('j ry) (b) For all couples of points x, y E M, dm (x, y) L, dN (Jx, Jy) . (c) For all non-negative measurable functions f on N, f (J.f) dmm ^' M
JN
f dµ,.
(3.123)
IVfIgN dµ,v.
(3.124)
(d) For all smooth functions f on N, (J*f)IgM dgm IM 3 .45.
IN
For any real a, consider the mapping y = Jx of E"+1 onto itself given by
y=x
1
1
yn-1 = xn-1
(3.125)
yn = xn cosh a + xn+1 sinh a yn+1 = xn sinh a + xn+1 cosh a, which is called a hyperbolic rotation. (a) Prove that J is an isometry of II8n+1 with respect to the Minkowski metric 2. gMxnk = (dxl )Z + ... + (dxn)2 - (dxn+1) (b) Prove that JIw is a Riemannian isometry of the hyperbolic space lHV (cf. Section 3.9).
3.46. Prove that, for any four points p, q, p', q' E Hn such that
d(P,q') =d(p,q),
(3.126)
there exists a Riemannian isometry j of WL such that Jp' = p and Jq' = q.
Notes Most of the material of this Chapter belongs to the basics of Riemannian geometry and can be found in many textbooks, see for example [45], [51], [52], [200], [213], [228], [227], [244], [299], [326], [329]. The presentation of model manifolds follows [155].
CHAPTER 4
Laplace operator and heat equation in L2 (M) We use here quite substantially measure theory, integration, the theory of Hilbert spaces, and the spectral theory of self-adjoint operators. The reader is referred to Appendix A for the necessary reference material. All subsequent Chapters (except for Chapter 6) depend upon and use the results of this Chapter.
In Section 4.1, we introduce the Lebesgue spaces, distributions, and Sobolev spaces on a weighted manifold. This material is similar to the corresponding parts of Chapter 2, although technically we use from Chapter 2 only Corollary 2.5. The key Sections 4.2 and 4.3 rest on Section 3.6 from Chapter 3, especially on the Green formulas (3.43).
4.1. Distributions and Sobolev spaces For any smooth manifold M, define the space of test functions D (M) as CO- (M) with the following convergence: cok are satisfied:
cp if the following conditions
1. In any chart U and for any multiindex cx, 8acpk 8acp in U. 2. All supports supp Wk are contained in a compact subset of M. A distribution is a continuous linear functional on D (M). If u is a distribution then its value at a function cp E D is denoted by (u, W). The set D' (M) of all distributions is obviously a linear space. The convergence in D' (M) is defined as follows: uk -+ u if (Uk, co) -+ (u, cp) for all cp E D (M). Since any open set S2 C M is a manifold itself, the spaces D (SZ) and D' (S2) are defined as above. In any chart U C M, the spaces D (U) and D' (U) are identical to those defined in U as a part of R (cf. Section 2.4). A distribution u E D' (M) vanishes in an open set S2 C M if (u, co) = 0 for any co E D (Q). It is proved in the same way as in Rn (cf. Exercise 2.10) that if u vanishes in a family of open sets then it vanishes also in their union. Hence, there is a maximal open set in M where u vanishes, and its complement in M is called the support of u and is denoted by supp u. By construction, supp u is a closed subset of M. Next, we would like to identify a function on M as a distribution, and for that we need a measure on M. Assume in the sequel that (M, g, p) is a weighted manifold. The couple (M, µ) can also be considered as a measure space. Hence, the notions of measurable and integrable functions are defined 97
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
98
as well as the Lebesgue function spaces LP (M) = LP (M, A), 1 < p < oo (see Section A.4). Note that LP (M) are Banach spaces, and L2 (M) is a Hilbert
space. Sometimes it is useful to know that if 1 < p < oo then LP (M) is separable and D (M) is dense in LP (M) (cf. Theorem 2.3 and Exercise 4.4) Denote by LIP,,, (M) the space of all measurable functions f on M such
that f E LP (1) for any relatively compact open set 9 C M. The space L o (M) is linear space, and the topology of L PI,,: (M) is defined by the family of seminorms Iif IILP(s) for all open TI C= M. Clearly, we have the following embeddings:
LP (M) " - L PI,,, (M) " L1' (M) (cf. Section 2.1). Now we can associate any function u E Lion (M) with a distribution by the following rule: (u, cp) = fM ucpdµ for any W E D (M) L EMMA 4.1. Let u E Li C (M).
.
(4.1)
Then u = 0 a.e. if and only if u = 0 in
D' (M), that is, if
fudL=O for any
E D (M) .
(4.2)
N ote that if u E C (M) then this was proved in Lemma 3.13.
PROOF. Let U C M be any chart and A be the Lebesgue measure in U. Since the density Lt' is a smooth positive function, the condition (4.2) implies that ucp d\ = 0 for any cp E D (U) .
By Corollary 2.5, we obtain u = 0 a.e. in U. Since M can be covered by a countable family of charts, we obtain u = 0 a.e. on M. Lemma 4.1 implies that the linear mapping L1'0 (M) -- D' (M) defined by (4.1) is an injection, which enables us to identify Li, (M) as a subspace of D' (M) Since the convergence in L1'0 (M) obviously implies the convergence in D' (M), we obtain the embedding Lic (M) -+D' (M). In particular, this allows to define the support supp u of any function u E L1C (M) as that of the associated distribution. Let us introduce the vector field versions of all the above spaces. Let D (M) be the space of all smooth vector fields on M with compact supports endowed with the convergence similar to that in D (M). The elements of the dual space D' (M) are called distributional vector fields. The convergence in D' (M) is defined in the same way as in D' (M). A vector field v on M is called measurable if all its components in any chart are measurable functions. By definition, the space P2 (M) consists of .
4.1. DISTRIBUTIONS AND SOBOLEV SPACES
99
(the equivalence classes of) measurable vector fields v such that IvI LP (M) is the length of v). (where IvI = (v, Similarly, the space L oC(M) is determined by the condition IvI E L oc (M) The norm in Lp (M) is defined by II IvIIILP.
IIvII&
The spaces LP (M) are also complete (see Exercise 4.9). L2 (M) is a Hilbert space with the inner product (v, w)L2
Any vector field v E i
=
In particular,
JM (v, w)dp.
(M) determines a distributional vector field by
(v, 0) = fM(v, 0)dµ for any 0 E D (M)
,
which defines the embedding Li , (M) yD' (M). Let us define some operators in D' (M) and D' (M). For any distribution u E D' (M), its distributional Laplacian Amu E D' (M) is defined by means of the identity (Amu, cp) = (u, Aµcp) for all cp E D (M)
.
(4.3)
Note that the right hand side makes sense because Aµcp E D (M), and it determines a continuous linear functional of y E D (M). Indeed, it is easy to Dµcp and, hence, (u, Dµcpk) -- (u, Aµcp). If u is a smooth function then its classical Laplacian Aµu satisfies (4.3), because by the Green formula (3.43) see that cpk
-D>
W implies Dµcpk
(AMU, W)
-E)i
= fm (Aµu) Wdl-t = mf uDµcpol,G = (u, & ) .
Hence, in this case the distributional Laplacian coincides with the classical Laplacian, which justifies the usage of the same notation Aµu for the both of them.
If u E Li (M) and the distribution Aµu can be identified as a function from L210C (M), also denoted by Aµu, then the latter is called the weak Laplacian of u. Alternatively, the weak Laplacian Aµu can be defined as a function from Lio (M) that satisfies the identity (4.3). The weak Laplacian does not always exist unlike the distributional Laplacian. For any distribution u E D' (M), define its distributional gradient Vu E D' (M) by means of the identity
(Vu, V)) = - (u, divµ 0) for all E D (M) . (4.4) If u is a smooth function then its classical gradient satisfies (4.4) by Corollary 3.15.
If u E Ll (M) and Vu E L o, (M) then Vu is called the weak gradient of U.
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
100
We will always understand the operators 01, V in the distributional sense unless otherwise stated. The following lemma is frequently useful.
LEMMA 4.2. If uk -* u then Vuk -+ Vu. Consequently, if uk -+ U and VUk -- v then Vu = v. PROOF. By the definition. of the distributional gradient, we have, for any V) EV(M), (Vuk, 2b) = - (Uk, dive, 0)
.
Passing to the limit as k -* oo, we obtain
lim (Vuk, b) _ - (u, dive') _ (Vu,
k-ioo
)
,
which implies VUk
Vu.
The second claim is obvious. Define the following Sobolev space
W' (M) = W1 (M, g, f.t) :_ {u E L2 (M) : Vu E L2 (M) }.
That is, W1 (M) consists of those functions u E L2 (M), whose weak gradient Vu exists and is in L2 (M). It is easy to see that W1 (M) is a linear space. Furthermore, W1 (M) has a natural l inner product (u, V)W1
:= (u, V)L2 + (Vu, Vv)L2 = J uv dµ + f (Vu, Vv) dlz,
(4.5)
M
and the associated norm IIuIIWI
= IIuIIL2 + IIVuIIL2 = f Mu2dµ+fm
IVuI2dp.
(4.6)
LEMMA 4.3. W1 (M) is a Hilbert space.
PROOF. It follows from (4.6) that the convergence uk is equivalent to uk
-+ u and Vuk 4 Vu.
1
u in W1 (M) (4.7)
Let {uk} be a Cauchy sequence in W1 (M). Then the sequence {uk} is Cauchy also in L2 (M) and, hence, converges in L2-norm to a function u E L2 (M). Similarly, the sequence {Vuk} is Cauchy in L2 (M) and, hence, converges in L2-norm to a vector field v E L2 (M). Since convergence in L2 is stronger than the convergence in V, we conclude by Lemma 4.2 that Vu = v. It follows that the conditions (4.7) are satisfied and the sequence {uk} converges in W1 (M).
4.1. DISTRIBUTIONS AND SOBOLEV SPACES
101
In the case when M is an open subset of R, the above definition of W1 (M) matches the one from Section 2.6.1 - see Exercise 4.11. It is obvious from the definition of the norm (4.6) that IIuIIL2 < IIuIIwl, which implies that the identical mapping W1 (M) -+ L2 (M) is a bounded injection, that is, an embedding.
Exercises. 4.1. Prove that if Wk
W then
cp on M; (a) cpk AAW; (b) D,,cpk
(c) f Wk - f cpk for any f E C°° (M).
4.2. For any function f E C°° (M) and a distribution u E D' (M), their product fu is defined as a distribution by (f u) cp) = (u, f p) for any cp E V (M) .
(4.8)
Prove the following assertions.
u then f uk -4 fU. (a) If uk (b) supp (fu) C supp f fl supp u. (c) Product rule:
V (fu) = fVu+(Vf)u, where the product f Vu of a smooth function by a distributional vector field and the product (V f) u of a smooth vector field by a distribution are defined similarly to (4.8). 4.3. Prove that if f E C°° (M) is such that If I and I V f I are bounded, and u E W' (M) then fu E W1 (M) and IIfuIIW < CIIuIIW=,
where C = 2 max (sup If I, supIVf1).
4.4. Prove the extension of Theorem 2.3 to manifold: for any 1 < p < oo and for any weighted manifold (M, g, ii), V (M) is dense in LP (M), and the space LP (M) is separable.
4.5. Prove that D (M) is dense in Co (M), where Co (M) is the space of continuous functions with compact support, endowed with the sup-norm.
4.6. Let u e D' (M) and (u, cp) = 0 for all non-negative functions cp E D (M). Prove that
u=0.
4.7. Let u E Li° (M). (a) Prove that if (u, cp) > 0 for all non-negative functions W E D (M), then u > 0 a.e. (b) Prove that if (u, cp) = 0 for all non-negative functions co E D (M), then u = 0 a.e. 4.8. Let {uk} be a sequence from L2 (M) such that uk - - u, where u E D' (M).
(a) Prove that if the sequence of norms IIukIIL2 is bounded then u E L2 (M) and IIHIIL2 < liminf IIukIIL2. k-+oo
(b) Assume in addition that Vuk E L2 and that the sequence of norms IIVukIIL2 is bounded. Prove that u c W1 (M) and IIVUIIL2 < liminf IIVUkIIL2.
4.9. Prove that the space LP (M, p) is complete.
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
102
4.10. Define the divergence of a distributional vector field v E D' by (div,, v, co) _ - (v, Vcp) for all cp E D.
Prove that, for any distribution u E D', A,,u = div1, (Vu), where all operators AN,, V, and div,, are understood in the distributional sense.
4.11. Let (M, g, i) be a weighted manifold and U be a chart on M with coordinates x1, ..., x1 . Let f E
Li, (U).
(a) Assume that all distributional partial derivatives a are in La (U), considering U as a part of R'". Prove that the distributional gradient Vg f in U is given by (Ogf )" = and
9i'
ax3
2_ iia of
Iogflg = 9
(4.9)
axi 8xj'
Conclude that Vg f E L2 , (U). (b) Assuming that Og f E Lion (U), prove that distributional partial derivatives a are given by
8x' = gig' (V g f )' and that the identity (4.9) holds. Conclude that ax E L
oc
(U).
4.12. For an open set 0 C 1W', let W1 (0) be the Sobolev space defined in Section 2.6.1, and W1 (S2, g, \) be the Sobolev space defined in Section 4.1, where g is the canonical Euclidean metric and A is the Lebesgue measure. Prove that these two Sobolev spaces are identical.
4.13. Denote by Vdist the distributional gradient in R' (n > 2) reserving V for the gradient in the classical sense, and the same applies to the Laplace operators Adist and A.
(a) Let f e C' (Rh \ {o}) and assume that
f E L o, (R'") and V f E Li (R") . Prove that Vdistf = V f (b) Let f E C2 (R" \ {o}) and assume that
f E Li
(Rn)
Vf
E
E120
(R'")
,
and Af E Li (R-).
Prove that Adist f = A f (c) Consider in JR3 the function f (x) = jxl-1. Show that f E LI (R3) and Af = 0 in JR3 \ {o}. Prove that Adist f = -4-7rl where S is the Dirac delta-function at the origin 0.
4.14. Consider in 1W' (n > 2) the function f (x) _ xla, where a is a real parameter. (a) Prove that f E L10, provided a > -n/2. (b) Prove that f E L1 and V f E Et 2 provided a > 1 - n/2. Show that in this case
Vdistf = Vf (c) Prove that f E Li ,, V f E Lt , and Au E Lz provided a > 2 - n/2. Show that in this case Ad.,stf = Af 4.15. Prove that if {uk} is a sequence of functions from W1 that is bounded in the norm of W 1 then there exists a subsequence {uki } that converges to a function u E W 1 weakly in W 1 and weakly in L2.
4.2. DIRICHLET LAPLACE OPERATOR AND RESOLVENT
103
4.16. Prove that if {uk } is a sequence of functions from W1 that converges weakly in W 1 to a function u E W 1 then there is a subsequence {uk. } such that
uka L2 L2 u and Duk;L2- Vu, where -1 stands for the weak convergence.
4.17. Let {uk} be a sequence of functions from W1 that converges weakly in L2 to a function u E L2.
(a) Prove that if the sequence {uk} is bounded in the norm W1 then u c W' and Uk
W1 U. 1
(b) Prove that if in addition IIukIIWI -} IIuIIWI then Uk
U.
4.18. Let {uk} be an increasing sequence of non-negative functions from W' that converges almost everywhere to a function u E L2. Prove that if IIVukIIL2 < C
for some constant c and all k, then u E Wl, uk
W1
u, and IIVU IL2 < C-
4.2. Dirichlet Laplace operator and resolvent Let (M, g, p) be a weighted manifold. The purpose of this section is to extend the Laplace operator A. to a self-adjoint operator in the Hilbert space L2 = L2 (M, µ).
Initially, the Laplace operator AA is defined on smooth functions, in particular, on the space D = D (M). Since D is a dense subspace of L2, we can say that Aµ is a densely defined operator in L2 with the domain D. Denote this operator by A = A1,,1D. This operator is symmetric, because, by Green's formulas (3.43), (& u, v)L2 = (u, Aµv)L2 for all u, v E D.
However, A is not self-adjoint, which follows from the following statement. CLAIM. For the operator A = Aµ,1D, the adjoint operator A* has the domain
domA* _ {u E L2 : AN,u E L21,
(4.10)
and in this domain A*u = AA,u.
PROOF. Recall that the adjoint operator is defined by
domA*={ueL2:2f EL2 VV EdomA (Av,u)L2=(v,f)L2 }, and
A*u= f. The equation (Av, U)L2 = (v, f )L2 is equivalent to (u, APv)D = (f, v)D which
means that Au = f in the distributional sense. Hence, u E dom A* if and only if Aµu E L2, and in this domain A*u = A,,u, which was to be proved.
0
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
104
It is clear from (4.10) that domA* contains functions, which are not compactly supported, and, hence, dom A* strictly larger than dom A. For example, in R, the function u (x) = e-X2 belongs to dom A* but not to dom A.
If A is a densely defined symmetric operator in a Hilbert space 9-l then we always have A C A*.
If B is a self-adjoint extension of A then
ACB=B*CA*, which implies dom A C dom B C dom. A*.
Hence, the problem of constructing a self-adjoint extension of A amounts to an appropriate choice of dom B between dom A and dom A* because then the action of B can defined by restricting A* to dom B. Consider the following functional spaces on a weighted manifold (M, g, g):
Wo (M) = the closure of D (M) in W 1 (M) and
W0 (M) = {u e W0 (M) : Dµu E L2 (M)I. That is, Wo consists of those functions u E Wo, whose weak Laplacian J. u exists and belongs to L2. Clearly, D C W2o. The space Wo has the same inner product as W1 and is a Hilbert space as a closed subspace of W1. It is natural to consider also the following spacer
W2 (M) = {u E W1 (M) : Dµu E L2 (M)}.
(4.11)
Consider the operator Dµ W as a densely defined operator in L2, which obviously extends the operator Am1D. As will we prove below, the operator Aµ e,2
0
is actually self-adjoint. Let us first verify that it is symmetric.
LEMMA 4.4. (The Green formula) For all functions u E Wo (M) and v E W2 (M), we have
uDµvdp=-JM (Vu,Vv)dµ.
(4.12)
fM PROOF. Indeed, if u E V then by the definitions of the distributional Laplacian Aµv and the distributional gradient Vv, we have IM
uLµv dg = (0µv, u) = (v, Aµu)
= (v, divµ (Vu)) = - (Vv, Vu) = -
fm
(Vu, Vv)dg.
1 Warning. If Q is an open subset of R" then, in general, the space W2 (cl) defined by (4.11) does not match the space W2 (9) introduced in Section 2.6.1.
4.2. DIRICHLET LAPLACE OPERATOR AND RESOLVENT
105
For any u E W0 there is a sequence {uk} C D that converges to u in W1. Applying (4.12) to uk and passing to the limit we obtain the same identity for u because the both sides of (4.12) are continuous functionals of u E W'.
In particular, (2.39) applies when u c W0 and v c W. If the both functions u, v are in W0 then we can switch them in (2.27), which yields (A AU, v)L2 = (u, Dµv)L2
.
(4.13)
Hence, AAIW20 is a symmetric operator.
The identity (4.12) also implies that, for any u E W02, fM u
0u dµ = - IM
IDu12
dµ < 0,
(4.14)
that is, the operator AAJWo is non-positive definite. It is frequently more convenient to work with a non-negative definite operator, so set
G=-Dµ1Wo. The operator G (or its negative DAIWo) is called the Dirichlet Laplace operator of the weighted manifold (M, g, a). This terminology is motivated by the following observation. Let S2 be
a bounded open subset of Rn . Given a function f in S2, the problem of finding a function u in 1 satisfying the conditions
f Au = f inn, U=0
on 352,
(4.15)
is refereed to as the Dirichlet problem. In the classical understanding of this problem, the function u is sought in the class C2 (Q) fl C (n). However,
in general the Dirichlet problem has no solution in this class unless the boundary of S2 possesses a certain regularity.
It is more profitable to understand (4.15) in a weak sense. Firstly, the Laplace operator in the equation Au = f can be understood in the distributional sense. Secondly, the boundary condition u = 0 can be replaced by the requirement that u belongs to a certain functional class. It turns out that a good choice of this class is W0 (S2). The fact that W0 (S2) is the closure of C0 (S2) in W1 (S2) allows to show that functions from W0 (S2) do tend to 0 in a certain average sense when approaching the boundary 312. Hence, the weak Dirichlet problem in S2 is stated as follows: assuming
that f E L2 (S2), find a function u E Wo (0) such that Du = f. Obviously, if u solves this problem then Du E L2 and hence u E W0 (S2). We see that the space Wo appears naturally when solving the Dirichlet problem, which explains the above terminology. Replacing the boundary condition in (4.15) by the requirement u E W0 allows to generalize the weak Dirichlet problem to an arbitrary manifold. Namely, for a weighted manifold (M, g, µ), consider the following problem:
-0µu + cxu = f on M, U E W0 (M)
(4.16)
106
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
where a is a given constant and f E L2 (M) is a given function. If a < 0 then this problem may have more that one solution. For example, if M is a compact manifold, a = 0 and f = 0 then u = const is a solution. As we will see in the next statement, for a > 0 this problem has always exactly one solution (see Exercise 4.28 for the uniqueness conditions when a = 0, and Exercise 4.29 for a more general version of the weak Dirichlet problem with non-zero boundary condition). Consider the resolvent R« = (G + aid)-1 of the Dirichlet Laplace op-
erator L, which is defined whenever the operator L + aid is invertible in L2
THEOREM 4.5. For any a > 0, the resolvent R« (L + aid) exists and is a bounded non-negative definite self-adjoint operator in L2. Moreover, IIR«II <_
PROOF. Let us show that, for any f c L2, there exists a unique function u E Wo such that (L + a id) u = f , that is,
-Dµu + au = f
(4.17)
.
This will prove that the resolvent R« exists and R, f = u. The requirement u E Wo here can be relaxed to u E W. Indeed, if u E Wo and u satisfies
(4.17) then 0µu = au - f E L2, whence u E Wo (in particular, this will imply that the problem (4.16) has a unique solution). Considering the both sides of (4.17) as distributions and applying them to a test function cp E D, we obtain that (4.17) is equivalent to the equation -(u, DAMP) + a(u, W) = (.f, 0)
(4.18)
,
for any co E D, where we have used the definition (4.3) of the distributional L. Next, using the fact that u E Wo and the definition of the distributional gradient Vu, rewrite (4.18) in the equivalent form (4.19)
(Vu, VIP) + a (u, W) = (.f, y) .
Now, let us interpret the brackets in (4.19) as inner products in L2. Since D is dense in W011 we can extend to Wo the class of test functions cp for which (4.19) holds. Hence, the problem amounts to proving the existence and uniqueness of a solution u E W0 to (4.19) assuming that (4.19) holds for all E W01. Denote the left hand side of (4.19) by [u, cp]a, that is, [u, cc]« := (Vu, DAP) + a (u, v),
is an inner product in W. If a = 1 then coincides with the standard inner product in W. For any a > 0 and and observe that u E Wo, we have min (a, 1) IluI1wl < [u, u]« < max (a, 1)
IIuI1r2,v1.
4.2. DIRICHLET LAPLACE OPERATOR AND RESOLVENT
107
Therefore, the space WI with the inner product [-, -]a is complete. Rewriting the equation (4.19) in the form
[u, 0]a = (f 0) ,
(4.20)
,
we obtain by the Riesz representation theorem, that a solution u E Wo exists and is unique provided the right hand side of (4.20) is a bounded functional of cp E W0. The latter immediately follows from the estimate I(f,(P)I < IIfIIL2IIWIIL2
which finishes the proof of the existence of the resolvent. Substituting co = u in (4,19) we obtain IIouIIL2 + cxllulli2 = (f,
whence it follows (R, f, f) _ (u, f) Another consequence of (4.21) is
U),
(4.21)
0, that is, Ra is non-negative definite.
aIIUIIL2 < IIfIIL2IIuiIL2,
which implies II Raf 112 < 0-111f 112 and, hence, I I Ra II < a-1.
Since R is a bounded operator, in order to prove that it is self-adjoint it suffices to prove that it is symmetric, that is (Rf, g) = (f, Rg) for all f, g c L2. Setting Ra f = u, R,g = v, and choosing cp = v in (4.19), we obtain (Vu, Vv) + a (u, v) = (f, Rag) Since the left hand side is symmetric in u, v, we conclude that the right hand side is symmetric in f, 9, which implies that Ra is symmetric.
Now we can prove the main result of this section. THEOREM 4.6. On any weighted manifold, the operator Dirichlet Laplace
operator L = -D,,,IW20 is a self-adjoint non-negative definite operator in L2, and spec L C [0, +oo). Furthermore, W02 is a unique self-adjoint extension of Am I D whose domain is contained in W0
.
PROOF. The fact that L is symmetric and non-negative definite was already verified (see (4.13) and (4.14)).
Self-adjointness. By Theorem 4.5, the resolvent R = R1 = (L + id) -1 exists and is a 'bounded self-adjoint operator. Let us show that L = R-1 - id is also a self-adjoint operator. It suffices to prove that R-1 with the domain W0 is a self-adjoint operator. The symmetry of R-1 easily follows from the symmetry of L. Therefore, (RT1)* is an extension of R-1, and all we need to show is that dom (R-1)* C dom (R-1) . By the definition of the adjoint operator, dom (R-1) * = {u E L2 : 3f E L2 Vv e dom
R-1
(R-lv, u) = (v, f) } .
108
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
Since Rf is defined and is in domR-1, we have, by the symmetry of R-1,
(R-lv, Rf) = (v, R-1Rf) _ (v, f) Comparing the above two lines, we conclude
(R-1v, u) = (R-1v, R f) for all v E W02,
whence u = R f and u E dom R-1. Spectrum of H. Since the inverse operator (L + a id)
exists and is bounded for any a > 0, we see that -a is a regular value of L and hence spec L C [0, +oo). The latter follows also from a general fact that the spectrum of a self-adjoint non-negative definite operator is contained in [0, +oo) (see Exercise A.26).
Uniqueness of extension. Set Lo self-adjoint extension of Lo such that
and suppose that Li is a
dom Ll C W01.
(4.22)
We need to prove that Li =,C. By (4.10), we have
domLo* ={uEL2:DµuEL2} and in this domain
Lou = -Dµu. The inclusion Lo C Li implies L1 C Go. Combining with (4.22) we obtain dom L1 C Wo fl dom Li = {u E Wo : Dµu E L2 } = dom L.
Also, if u E dom Li then
Llu=Lou=-Aµu=Lu, whence it follows that L is an extension of L1, that is, Li C L. This implies
Li D L* and, hence, L1 = L, because both operators Li and L are selfadjoint.
SECOND PROOF. This proof does not use Theorem 4.5 and is overall shorter but at the expense of using the theory of quadratic forms. Consider the quadratic form E (u, v) = (Vu, Vv)L2
with the domain W01. This form is obviously symmetric and, as follows from Lemma 4.3, it is closed in L2. Hence, the form E has a self-adjoint generator L such that for all
UEdomLandvEdome,
E (u, v) = (Cu' V) .
The operator L is non-negative definite because, for all u E dom L, (Lu, u) = E (u, u) > 0.
The domain of L is dense in Wo and is defined by dom L = {u c Wo : v -> 9 (u, v) is a bounded linear functional of v E Wo in
L21.
4.2. DIRICHLET LAPLACE OPERATOR AND RESOLVENT
109
This condition means, by the Riesz representation theorem, that there exists a unique function f E L2 such that £ (u, v) = (f , v)
for all v E Wo .
(4.23)
Since D is dense in W011 we can rewrite (4.23) as follows:
£ (u, v) = (f, v)
for all v E D.
(4.24)
Using the definitions of the distributional Laplacian and gradient, we obtain, for any
uEdomLand vEV, (u, divµ Vv)
£ (u, v) = (Vu, Vv)
(u, A,v)
(Dµu, v),
and, comparing with (4.24), we see that for the distribution A,,u and for any v E D, - (Dµu, v) = (f , v) , whence -0µu = f . In particular, this means that A ,,u E L2 and hence u E Wo ; further-
more, Lu = f = -0µu. Conversely, it is easy to see that u E Wo implies u E domL. Hence, Wo = dom L and L = - L1 µ I,
,
which finishes the proof of self-adjointness of 1:1
Aµ I W02 .
THIRD PROOF. Here we provide yet another proof of the self-adjointness of L, based on some properties of closed operators. Let us consider gradient V as an operator from L2 to f2 with the domain W01. We claim that V is a closed operator. Indeed, if a sequence
{fk} C Wo is such that fk -+ f in L2 and V f -* w in L2 then {fk} is Cauchy in Wo and hence converges to f in W. Therefore, V f -* V f in f2 and w = D f , whence we conclude that V is closed. Consider the adjoint operator V* acting from f2 to L2. By definition, we have dom V * = { w E L'2:
l
f
dj.
is a bounded functional off E dom V }
,
and V*w is a unique function from L2 such that, for all f E Wo,
I
M
(V f, w) dµ = fm f 0*w dM.
Since D is dense in Wo , we can allow f here to vary in D instead of dom V. Then the above identity is equivalent to the fact that V*w = - divµ w where div, is understood in the distributional sense. Hence, we obtain that
domV*={w EL2:divµwEL2}, and V*w
divµ w in this domain.
Finally, let us show that L = V*V, which will imply that L is self-adjoint. Indeed, we have
dom(V*V) _ {f E dom0: Df E domV*} {f EWo :divµVf EL2} {f EWo :0µf EL2} dom L,
and in this domain V * V f = - divµ V f = -Aµ f = L f , which finishes the proof.
110
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
EXAMPLE 4.7. Let us prove that in Rn the domain Wo (III") of the Dirichlet Laplace operator coincides with the Sobolev space W2 (1R') (cf. Section 2.6). By Exercise 2.30, in
R' the space D is dense in W1, which implies that Wo = W. Therefore, UEW0 uEW2 = uEWo and AuEL2 which means that W2 C W02,
To prove the opposite inclusion Wo C W2, we need to show that if u E W1 and Au E L2 then all the second derivatives of u are also in L2. Let us first show that if u E V then n llaaajullLZ =IIAuIIL2.
(4.25)
',j=1
By the definition of the Laplace operator, we have
IIDuIIi2 = f n (Eti
a2u)z
dx = fn E; j 02u a, u dx.
(4.26)
For any two indices i, j, we obtain, using integration by parts, (02u, a; u) (azu, 9 02 u) = (ajazu, aiaju) = I18"ajUIIL2, whence (4.25) follows.
Let us now prove that if u E Wo and supp u is compact then u E W2 and n
IlaaajullL2 C IIAuIIL2.
(4.27)
i,j=1
Fix a mollifier cp and consider the sequence of functions Uk = U * lO1/k.
By Lemma 2.9, Uk E D and
Auk = (Au) * 01/k By Theorem 2.11, we obtain IIAukllL2 < IIAuIIL2,
which together with (4.27) implies n
Il8saiUkllL2 < IIAuIIL2
Since all norms Ila;ajukUUL2 are bounded uniformly in k, we conclude by Theorem 2.11 that azaju e L2 and (4.27) is satisfied. In particular, we have u E W2. Now let us prove that any function u E Wo belongs to W2. Let 0 be a cutoff function of the unit ball B1 = {Ix I < 1} in Rn so that lk E D (Rn) and 1 on B1. Set Uk (x) =
(k) u (x)
(4.28)
where k is a positive integer. Then Uk E W 1 and supp uk is compact. Let us show that Auk E L2. Using the product rule for second order derivatives (see Exercise (2.12)), we obtain
Auk = k-2 (&0) (k) u+2k-1 (NO) (k) Au +,k (k) Au.
(4.29)
Obviously, the right hand side here is in L2 and, hence, Auk E L2. Therefore, uk E W02, and, by the previous part, we conclude uk E W2. It also follows from (4.29) that IIAuk1IL2 < C (IIuIlw1 + IIAuIIL2),
where C does not depend on k. From (4.27), we obtain that, for any any multiindex a of order 2, lla'ukIIL2 < C (IIuhf W1 + II1NuIIL2) ,
4.2. DIRICHLET LAPLACE OPERATOR AND RESOLVENT
111
u, we have also 8auk D--r that is, the sequence {8auk}k 1 is bounded in L.2 Since Uk (9'u. By Exercise 4.8, we conclude that c9au E L2 and, hence, u E W2.
Exercises. 4.19. Let M be the unit ball B in H'. Prove that the Laplace operator A with domain
{f EC2(B):Af EL2(B)} is not symmetric in L2 (B).
4.20. Let A be an operator in L2 (M) defined by Af = -Aµf with domA = Co' (M). Prove that operator A is unbounded.
4.21. Prove that if f E Co (M) and u E Wo then fu E Wo (M). 4.22. Prove that the spaces Wo (M) and W2 (M), endowed with the inner product (u, v)w2 " (u, v)w + (Aµu, Dµv)L2 , (4.30) are Hilbert spaces.
4.23. Prove that, for any u E Wo (M), IIu!I 'i < c (IlullL + II ,2ullI.2) where c = 1
(4.31)
2 2
4.24. Let {E,\} be the spectral resolution of the Dirichlet Laplace operator L in L2 (M). Prove that, for any f c W02 (M),
f
(4.32)
0
4.25. Prove that domr112 = Wo (M) and that (4.32) holds for any f E Wo (M). HINT. Use Exercise A.13.
4.26. Prove that dom 1C1/2 = dom (C + id)'/2 and, for any f E Wo (M), Ilfllwi = II (1 +id)1/2 fIIL2. 4.27. Prove that, for all f E Wo (M),
(4.33)
IIofIIL2 ? AminII!iIL2,
(4.34)
Amin = inf spec L.
(4.35)
where
4.28. Assuming that Amin > 0, prove that the weak Dirichlet problem on M
-&/'u = f,
(4.36)
IIuiIL2 <- amx IIf!IL2
(4.37)
IIVUIIL2 < amin2ljfiiL2.
(4.38)
J
UEW0 (M), has a unique solution u for any f E L2 (M), and that for this solution and
4.29. Consider the following version of the weak Dirichlet problem: given a real constant
a and functions f E L2 (M), W E W1 (M), find a function u E L2 (M) that satisfies the conditions
f AAu+au= f,
(4.39) u = w mod Wo (M), where the second condition means u - w E Wo (M). Prove that if a < Amin then the problem (4.39) has exactly one solution.
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
112
4.30. Let A be a bounded self-adjoint operator in L2 such that, for a constant a > 0 and for any function f E L2 (M), 1llfII2 C (Af, f)L2 C all f ll2
(a) Prove that the bilinear form {f, 9} := (Vf, Vg) + (Af, 9) defines an inner product in Wo , and that Wo with this inner product is a Hilbert space.
(b) Prove that, for any h E L2, the equation
-A,u+Au=h has exactly one solution u E W02.
4.31. Prove that, for any a > 0 and f E L2 (M), the function u = R, f is the only minimizer of the functional
E(v) := Ilov112+a11y-f112, in the domain v E Wo (M).
4.32. Prove that for any a > 0 the operators V o R. : L2 (M) -+ L2 (M) and L o R. L2 (M) --) L2 (M) are bounded and 11V o R« II < a-1/2,
(4.40)
llroRall << 1.
(4.41)
4.33. Prove that, for any f E L2 (M), z
aRaf 4 f as a --3 +oo. Prove that if f c dom L then IlaRaf -f1IL2 -<
llffllL2.
4.34. Prove that, for all a, ,6 > 0,
R,, -Rp=(6-a)R0Re
.
(4.42)
4.3. Heat semigroup and L2-Cauchy problem Let (M, g, p) be a weighted manifold. The classical Cauchy problem is the problem of finding a function u (t, x) E C2 (R± x M) such that
f at = Aµu, t > 0, u1 t=0 = f
(4 . 43)
where f is a given continuous function on M and the the initial data is understood in the sense that u (t, x) --* f (x) as t -+ 0 locally uniformly in x. Obviously, if a solution u (t, x) exists then it can be extended to t = 0 by setting u (0, x) = f (x) so that u (t, x) becomes continuous in [0, +oo) x M. The techniques that has been developed so far enables us to solve an L2-version of this problem, which is stated as follows. Consider the Dirichlet Laplace operator L = -/,,,IW on M. The L2-Cauchy problem is the problem of finding a function u (t, x) on (0, +oo) x M such that u (t, ) E L2 (M) for any t > 0 and the following properties are satisfied:
4.3. HEAT SEMIGROUP AND L2-CAUCHY PROBLEM
113
The mapping t -* u (t, .) is strongly differentiable in L2 (M) for all
t>0.
For any t > 0, u (t, ) E dom L and du
dt = -Lu,
where at is the strong derivative of u in L2 (M). 2
u (t, ) -* f as t --> 0 where f is a given function from L2 (M). Shortly, the L2-Cauchy problem can be written in the form du dt
= -Lu, t > 0, ult=o=f,
(4.44)
where all the parts are understood as above. The problem (4.44) is reminiscent of a system of linear ordinary differential equations of the first order. Indeed, assume for a moment that u = u (t) is a path in RN, L is a linear operator in RN, and f E IR' Then the system (4.44) has a unique solution u given by u = e-tc f, .
where the exponential of an operator A in RN is defined by A3 A2 eA=id+A+2+3+...
In the case when A = -tL is an unbounded operator in L2, the exponential series does not help because the domain of the series, that is, the set of functions f where all the powers Ak f are defined and the series converges, is by far too small. However, one can apply the spectral theory to define e-tL provided L is a self-adjoint operator. Let us briefly summarize the necessary information from the spectral theory (see Section A.5.4 for more details). Let L be a self-adjoint operator in a Hilbert space W, and let spec L be its spectrum. Then any real-valued Borel function cp on spec L determines a self-adjoint operator co (L) in 9 defined by
f(A)dE=
cp(L) pec G
f
00 00
(A)dEA
(4.45)
,
where {E,\} is the spectral resolution of L. The domain of cp (L) is defined by domcp(L)
{f E W: f
pec G
Icp (A) 12 dJJEaf112 <
oo}
,
(4.46)
and, for any f E dom co (L), we have IIW(A)f 1I2 =
f(A2 dJIEf II2, pec A
(4.47)
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
114
If cp is bounded on spec L then the operator cp(L) is bounded and
11w(L)II < sup H. spec ,C
In this case, dom cp (L) = W. If cp is continuous on specG then II
(4.48)
'(C)II = sup ICI spec G
is bounded then
If cp and b are Borel functions on spec L and W (L) +
(L) _ (cP +
(4.49)
(L)
and
(4.50)
(L) 0 (L) _ (w O) (L)
(cf. Exercise A.23). The relations (4.49) and (4.50) include also the identity of the domains of the both sides. The following version of the bounded convergence theorem is frequently useful.
LEMMA 4.8. Let C be a self-adjoint operator in a Hilbert space l and {cpk}k 1 be a sequence of Borel functions on specG. If {Wk} is uniformly bounded and converges pointwise to a Borel function cp on spec L, then, for
any f E
1,
Wk (L) f - cp (L) f as k -3 00.
(4.51)
Note that the operators Wk (L) and cp (L) are bounded and their common
domain is '-l. The convergence in (4.51) is understood in the norm of 9-l, which means that the sequence of operators co (L) converges to cp (L) in the strong operator topology. In terms of the spectral resolution {EA} of the operator L, (4.51) can be stated as follows:
f
pecG
k (A) dEf > f
pec L
(4.52)
(A)dEAf,
which explains the reference to the bounded convergence theorem. PROOF. It follows from (4.49) that Wk (L) - co (L) = (Wk - cP) (L) ,
and (4.47) yields
IIcPk (L) f-W (L) f 112 = II (Wk - w) (L) f II2 = f(A) pec G
(A)12 dllEAf 2.
The sequence lcpk (A) - cp(A) l tends to 0 as k -* oo for any A E spec L. Since this sequence is bounded and the measure d11EA f 112 is finite (its total being If 11), the classical bounded convergence theorem yields that 2
f
I(Pk(A)-cP(A)I2d11EAf112 -'0as k-3oo,
pec G
whence (4.51) follows.
0
4.3. HEAT SEMIGROUP AND L2-CAUCHY PROBLEM
115
Given an operator L in a Hilbert space ?-l and a vector f E 7-l, consider the associated Cauchy problem to find a path u : (0, +oo) -3 f so that the following conditions are satisfied: u (t) is strongly differentiable for all t > 0.
For any t > 0, u (t) E dom L and du = dt
-Lu,
where di is the strong derivative of u. u (t) -* f as t -* 0, where the convergence is strong, that is, in the norm of W.
If G is a self-adjoint, non-negative definite operator, that is, spec L c [0, +oo), then this problem is solved by means of the following family {Pt}t>o of operators:
Pt := e-t,c =
e-tadEA
f
=J
pec G
e-tAdEA.
0
The family {Pt}t>0 is called the heat semigroup associated with G. In particular, we have Po = id.
THEOREM 4.9. For any non-negative definite, self-adjoint operator L in a Hilbert space 7-l, the heat semigroup Pt = e-t,c satisfies the following properties. (i) For any t > 0, Pt is a bounded self-adjoint operator, and (4.53)
11Ptif < 1.
(ii) The family {Pt} satisfies the semigroup identity: PtPs = Pt+s
,
(4.54)
forallt,s>0. (iii) The mapping t E Pt is strongly continuous on [0, +oo). That is, for any t > 0 and f E 7-l,
limPPf = Ptf, s-->t
(4.55)
where the limit is understood in the norm of X In particular, for any f E 7-l,
lim Ptf = f.
t-+0+
(4,56)
(iv) For all f e 7-1 and t > 0, we have Pt f E dom G and dt (Ptf) = - (Ptf), where dt is the strong derivative in 7-l. Consequently, the path u = Ptf solves the Cauchy problem in 7-l for any (4.57)
fER-l.
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
116
The properties (i)-(iv) mean that {Pt}t>o is a strongly continuous contraction semigroup in 7-l with generator L.
PROOF. The fact that u = Pt f solves the Cauchy problem is obviously contained in (iii) and (iv). (i) By (4.48), we have 11e`11 = sup e-ta < sup e-ta = 1. AEspecL
AE[0,+o0)
(ii) This follows from the property of the exponential function e-tAe-SA e-(t+s)a and from (4.50). (iii) The family of functions {e-Sa}S>o is uniformly bounded in A E [0, +oo) and tends pointwise to e-t,\ as s -+ t. Hence, by Lemma 4.8, for any f E 7-l,
Psf =
J0
f
SadE f
e
Ptf.
0
(iv) Fix t > 0 and consider the functions co (A) _ A, 0 (A) = e-tA, and (A) =_ P (A),O (A) =
.1e-tA
Since 0 (A) is bounded on [0, +oo), (4.50) yields o (G) 0 (G) = (y') (G) = (b (G)
that is
Ge-tL =
(,C)
.
Since 4 (A) is bounded on [0, +oo), the operator 1> (G) is bounded and, hence, dom (G) = W. Therefore, dom (Ge-'L) = 7-1 whence it follows that ran c dom G, that is, Pt f E dom G for any f E 7-l. e-tlc
For any f E 7-l, we have dt
(Ptf) = s
o
P= lim
= e-sa
Pt+Sfs- tf
s
- 1 e-tadE,\f
(4.58)
0
where the limit is understood in the norm of 7-L. Obviously, we have e-Sa
lim
s-+0
- 1 e-t) = -Ae-ta
5
We claim that the function e-5A A
-1
e-ta
s
is bounded on [0, +oo) uniformly in s E [-e, e] where E is fixed in the range 0 < E < t, say e = t/2. To prove this, let us apply the inequality I eo -
11
< 101 e101,
(4.59)
for any 0 E 1W, which follows from the mean value theorem. Setting 0 = -As in (4.59), we obtain e-'5A
-
11
< A Jsj ea181,
4.3. HEAT SEMIGROUP AND L2-CAUCHY PROBLEM
whence
e-as 1
-1
e-ta < Ae-ateaISI <
Ae-'(t-E)
117
(4.60)
S
Since the right hand side is a bounded function of A, the above claim is proved.
By Lemma 4.8, the right hand side of (4.58) is equal to cc
(_A) e-t 'dE, f = --P (L) f = -G (Ptf),
10
which was to be proved.
The existence in the Cauchy problem in, which follows from Theorem 4.9, is complemented by the following uniqueness result. THEOREM 4.10. Let C be a non-negative definite operator in a Hilbert Then the corresponding Cauchy problem in 9 has at most one solution for any initial vector f E W. space 91.
Note that operator L here is not necessarily self-adjoint. PROOF. Assuming that u solves the Cauchy problem, let us prove that the function J(t) Ilu (t, .)112 = (u (t) , u (t))
is decreasing in t E (0, +oo). For that, we use the following product rule for strong derivatives: if u (t) and v (t) are strongly differentiable paths in 9-l then the numerical function t
(u (t) , v (t)) is differentiable and dt(u'v)=(dtu'v)+(u,dty)
(cf. Exercise 4.46). In particular, we obtain that the function J (t) is differ-. entiable on (0, +oo) and
J` (t) = dt (u, u) = 2(u, t) = -2 (u, ,Cu) < 0, where we have used the fact that the operator L is non-negative definite. We conclude that J (t) is a decreasing function. To prove the uniqueness of the solution is suffices to show that f = 0 implies u = 0. Indeed, if u (t) -+ 0 as t - 0 then also J (t) - 0. Since J (t) is non-negative and decreasing, we conclude J (t) - 0 and u (t) = 0, which was to be proved. On any weighted manifold M, set Pt=e-tL,
where L = -O,,IW is the Dirichlet Laplace operator. 4.10 immediately imply the following result.
Theorems 4.9 and
COROLLARY 4.11. For any function f E L2 (M), the L2-Cauchy problem (4.44) has a solution. Moreover, this solution is unique and is given by
u=Ptf.
118
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
EXAMPLE 4.12. Let pt (x) be the Gauss-Weierstrass function defined by (1.8), that is,
2
Pt (x)
(47rt)l/2
exp (
4t)
(4.61) ,
where t > 0 and x E R'. By Lemma 2.18, for any f E L2 (l[R") and any t > 0, the function
ut =pt* f is inL2(Wi) and
ut -* f ast-+0. It follows from Theorem 2.22, that if f c W2 (III") then ut E W2 (R'), ut is strongly differentiable in L2, and dut
at
=Out.
As it was shown in Example 4.7, the domain dom£ = Wp ( i) of the Dirichlet Laplace operator in R coincides2 with W2 (Wi). Hence, ut E dome and we obtain that the path t H Ut solves the L2-Cauchy problem. By Corollary 4.11, the unique solution to the L2-Cauchy problem is given by e-t4 f. We conclude that, for all t > 0,
e-tc f
= Pt * f = f ptn (x _. y) f (y) dy,
(4.62)
for any f E W2. Since W2 is dense in L2 and all parts of (4.62) are continuous in f E L2, we obtain that (4.62) holds for all f E L2. Recall that, in Section 2.7, the heat semigroup {A} in R' was defined by Ptf = pt * f, whereas in the present context, we have defined it by Pt = e-"C. The identity (4.62) shows
that these two definitions are equivalent. Another point of view on (4.62) is that the operator Pt = e` in R" has the integral kernel pt (x - y). As we will see in Chapter 7, the heat semigroup has the integral kernel on any manifold, although no explicit formula can be obtained.
Exercises. 4.35. Fix a function f E L2 (a) Prove that the function co (t) := (Pt f, f) on t c (0, +oo) is non-negative, decreasing, continuous, and log-convex. (b) Prove that the function z/i (t) := IIOPtf II2 is decreasing on (0, +oo) and
f ,(t)dt < 111fIl2L2. 0
2
4.36. Prove that, for any f E W011 such that II f II L2 = 1, IIPtfI1L2 > exp
(-t f IVfl2d,,)
(4.6)
for any t > 0. HINT. Use Exercise 4.25 and 4.35.
'In fact, we need here only the inclusion W2 (R') C dom G, which follows from Wl (R") = Wo (R') (see Exercise 2.30).
4.3. HEAT SEMIGROUP AND L2-CAUCHY PROBLEM
119
4.37. Prove that, for all f E L2 and all t > 0,
(Ptf)
IIA
11L2 <
IAL2.
t
(4.64)
and
IIfIIL2. by 4.38. For any t > 0, define a quadratic form Et (f) IV (Ptf) IIL2 :5
Et(f)= (t'f)L2'
(4.65)
(4.66)
for all f E L.
(a) Prove that Et (f) is increasing as t is decreasing. (b) Prove that limo Et (f) is finite if and only if f E W01, and
limEt(f)= f IDf12dµ. M
9JProve
(c) Define a bilinear form Et (f, g) in L2 by
(f_PJ
Et (f>9) _
that if f, g c Wo then fM
Et(f,g)->J (0f,Vg)dp ast0.
(4.67)
4.39. Prove that if f E Wo then, for all t > 0,
IPtf-fIIL2
fILL2,
(4.68)
REMARK. Recall that, by Theorem 4.9, if f E L2 then Pt f > f as t -+ 0. The estimate (4.68) implies a linear decay of Pt f - f IIL2 as t -4 0 provided f E W02.
4.40. Prove that if f E Wo then
IlPtf - f IIL2
(4.69)
HINT. Use Exercise 4.25 or argue as in Lemma 2.20.
4.41. Prove that if f E Wo then
Ptf - f
(4.70)
t
4.42. Prove that, for any f E L2, Pt ft
f
-D
-
-
ON,f as t
where A, f is understood in the distributional sense. 4.43. Prove that if f E L2 and, for some g E L2,
Ptf -f t
-*gat-40
then f E Wo and g = Aµ f. 4.44. Let f E Wo be such that ©µ f = 0 in an open set S2 C M. Consider a path (t) = Pt f, t > 0,
f f,
t<0.
Prove that it (t) satisfies in R x cZ the heat equation dt = 0µu in the following sense: the path t -y it (t) is strongly differentiable in L2 (S2) for all t E H and the derivative dt is equal to 0µu where Dµ is understood in the distributional sense.
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
120
4.45. Prove that if f E Wo then
Ptf W1 -* f ast-*0. and if f E Wo then
Ptf w2 -+ f as t -4 0. 4.46. (Product rule for strong derivatives) (a) Let 9-l be a Hilbert space, I be an interval in IR, and u (t), v (t) : I -* N be strongly differentiable paths. Prove that
at (u, v) _ (u, at) + (at v). (b) Consider the mappings u : I -* LP (M) and v : I -* L9 (M) where I is an interval in R and p, q E [1, +oo]. Prove that if u and v are continuous then the function w (t) = u (t) v (t) is continuous as a mapping from I to L' (M) where r is defined by the equation 1
1
1
p
q
r
(c) Prove that if u and v as above are strongly differentiable then w is also strongly differentiable and
dw
dv
du
dt = u dt + dt
v.
4.47. For any open set cZ C M, denote by Cb (52) the linear space of all bounded continuous
functions on S2 with the sup-norm. Let u (t, x) be a continuous function on I x M where I is an open interval in R, and let the partial derivative at be also continuous in I x M. Prove that, for any relatively compact open set cZ C M, the path u (t, ) : I -* Cb (S2) is strongly differentiable, and its strong derivative dE coincides with the partial derivative 8u at
4.48. Let 9{ be a Hilbert space. (a) Let u (t) [a, b] -4 9-L be a continuous path. Prove that, for any x E 9{, the functions t (u (t) , x) and t H IIu (t) II are continuous in t E [a, b], and :
b (u (t), x) dtl <
/
(f' Ilu (t) II dt) IIx1I.
Conclude that there exists a unique vector U E 9{ such that b
f (u (t) , x) dt = (U, x) for all x E 9{, a
which allows to define fa u (t) dt by
fu(t)dt Prove that
fu(t)dt<
U.
fb JJU (t) 11 dt.
(b) (Fundamental theorem of calculus) Let u (t) : [a, b] -* 9{ be a strongly differentiable path. Prove that if the strong derivative u' (t) is continuous in [a, b] then b
f u'(t) dt = u (b) - u (a). a
4.49. Let u : [a, b] -* L1 (M, µ) be a continuous paths in L'. Prove that there exists an function w E L' (N, dv) where N = [a, b] x M and du = dtdp, such that w (t, ) = u (t) for any t E [a, b].
4.3. HEAT SEMIGROUP AND L2-CAUCHY PROBLEM
121
4.50. (Chain rule for strong derivatives) Let u (t) : (a, b) -3 L2 (M) be a strongly differentiable path. Consider a function 0 E C1 (IR) such that (4.71) (0) = 0 and sup It/i'I < oo. Prove that the path z(i (u (t)) is also strongly differentiable in t E (a, b) and du (u) dt
d V) (u)
dt
4.51. Let t (A) be a continuous function on [0, +oo) of a subexponential growth; that is, for any e > 0, (A) = o (eEa)
as A --> +oo.
(4.72)
Let L be a non-negative definite self-adjoint operator in a Hilbert space N. Fix f E N and consider the path v : R+ -4 N defined by v (t) :=
f
(4.73)
(A) e-tAdEa f
where {E,\ } is the spectral resolution of L. Prove that, for any t > 0, v (t) E dom L, the strong derivative at exists, and dv
d
= - fo - \,t ( A ) e -tadEA f = - L v (t)
(4.74)
Conclude that the strong derivative at, of any order k E N exists and k
v (t ) .
d tk
(4.75)
4.52. Let L be a non-negative definite self-adjoint operator in a Hilbert space W. For any t E IR, consider the wave operators
Ct = cos (t.1/2) and St = sin (tL1/2) (a) Prove that Ct and St are bounded self-adjoint operators. (b) Prove that, for all f, g E dom L112, the function
u(t)=Ctf+Stg is strongly differentiable in t and satisfies the initial data ult=o = f
du
and
dt t=o
= L
1/2
g.
(c) Prove that, for any f E dom L, both functions Ctf and Stf are twice strongly differentiable in t and satisfy the wave equation d2u dt2
= Lu
where daT is the second strong derivative. (d) (A transmutation formula) Prove the following relation between the heat and wave operators: e-tc 1 exp Csds, (4.76)
= fo'
I-rt
- 4t)
where the integral is understood in the sense of the weak operator topology (cf. Lemma 5.10).
4.53. Let cp (t) be a continuous real-valued function on an interval (a, b), a < b, and assume that cp (t) is right differentiable at any point t E (a, b). Prove that if cp' (t) < 0 for all t E (a, b) (where co' stands for the right derivative) then function cp is monotone decreasing on (a, b).
4. LAPLACE OPERATOR AND HEAT EQUATION IN L2 (M)
122
4.54.
Consider the right Cauchy problem in a Hilbert space 9-l: to find a path u
(0, +oo) -+ f-l so that the following conditions are satisfied: (i) u (t) is continuous and strongly right differentiable for all t > 0;
(ii) For any t > 0, u (t) E dom L and du
dt = -L u,
where ai is the strong right derivative of u.
(iii) u (t) -_ f as t -> 0, where f is a given element of R. Prove the uniqueness of the path u (t) for any given f.
Notes The main result of this Chapter is Theorem 4.6 that guaranties the self-adjointness of the Dirichlet Laplace operator. In the present form it was proved in [58]. We give three different proofs using different tools: resolvent, quadratic forms, and the adjoint operator V*, respectively (the latter being from [58]). Construction of the heat semigroup in Theorem 4.9 follows the standard routine of the spectral theory. Different methods for the construction of the heat semigroup (concurrently with the associated diffusion process on M) can be found in [16], [271].
CHAPTER 5
Weak maximum principle and related topics Here we study those properties of the heat semigroup that are related to inequalities. Recall that if u (t, x) is a solution the classical bounded Cauchy problem in R' with the initial function f , then by Theorem 1.3 f > 0 implies
u > 0 and f < 1 implies u < 1. Our purpose is to obtain similar results on any weighted manifold, where L is the for the heat semigroup Pt = Dirichiet Laplace operator. Such properties of the heat semigroup are called Markovian. Obviously, the Markovian properties cannot be extracted just from the fact that L is a non-negative definite self-adjoint operator; one has to take into account the fact that the solutions are numerical functions, but not just elements of an abstract Hilbert space. e-tlc
5.1. Chain rule in Wo Let (M, g, u) be a weighted manifold. be a C°°-function on JR such that
LEMMA 5.1. Let
(0) = 0 and sup I ' (t) I < oc.
(5.1)
tER
(u) E W0 (M) and
Then u E Wp (M) implies
V (u) = 0' (u) Vu.
(5.2)
PROOF. If u E Co then obviously 0 (u) is also in Co and hence in Wo , and the chain rule (5.2) is trivial (cf. Exercise 3.4). An arbitrary function u E W0 can be approximated by a sequence {uk} of Cp -functions, which converges to u in W1-norm, that is, uk
L2
u and Vuk
L2
Vu.
By selecting a subsequence, we can assume that also Uk (x) --* u (x) for almost all x E M. By (5.1) we have 10 (u) I < C Jul where C = sup 10'J, whence it follows that V (u) E L2. The boundedness of 0' implies also that '0' (u) Vu E L2. Let us show that (uk)
L2
) (u)
and V (uk)
0' (u) Vu,
(5.3)
which will imply that the distributional gradient of b (u) is equal to'' (u) Vu (see Lemma 4.2). The latter, in turn, yields that zb (u) is in W' and, moreover, in W01. 123
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
124
The convergence '0 (uk)
L2
0 (u) trivially follows from Uk
I0(uk) - b(u)I
L2
u and
.
To prove the second convergence in (5.3) observe that I V b (uk)
- b' (u) Vul = <
I,0/,' (uk) Duk - '0' (u) Vul
I4'' (uk) (Vuk - Vu)1 + I (sb' (uk) -OI (n)) VuI
,
whence
IIVV (uk) - b' (u) ouIIL2 < CIIVuk - ouIIL2 + II (V' (uk) - V' (u)) ouIIL2. (5.4)
The first term on the right hand side of (5.4) goes to 0 because Vuk By construction, we have also Uk (x) - u (x) a.e. , whence
2
Vu.
0'(uk)-0'(u) --+0 a. e. Since
I Z(J' (uk)
- 4b' (u)
12 Iou12
< 4C2 I Vui2
and the function IDuI2 is integrable on M, we conclude by the dominated convergence theorem that fM which finishes the proof. LEMMA 5.2. Let f 0k (t)} be a sequence of CO°-smooth functions on R such that k (0) = 0 and sup sup Irk (t) I < oo. (5.5) k
Assume that, for some functions 1k (t) --* V (t)
tER
(t) and cp (t) on 1i8,
and 0k (t) -3
(t) for all t c R.
(5.6)
Then, for any u E Wo (M), the function 0 (u) is also in Wo (M) and
V (u) = cp (u) Vu. PROOF. The function b (u) is the pointwise limit of measurable functions'bk (u) and, hence, is measurable; by the same argument, cp (u) is also measurable. By (5.5), there is a constant C such that I')k (t) I _< C Itl ,
(5.7)
for all k and t E Il8, and the same holds for function 0. Therefore, 10 (u) < C I uI , which implies 0 (u) E L2 (M). By (5.5), we have also I cp (t) J < C, whence cp (u) Vu E L2.
Since each function Ok is smooth and satisfies (5.1), Lemma 5.1 yields
that bk (u) E W0 (M) and Wk (u) = Ok' (u) Vu-
5.1. CHAIN RULE IN Wo
125
Let us show that L2
L2
Ok (u)
0 (u)
0,
l bk (u) - 0 (u)12 dp
fM because the integrand functions tend pointwise to 0 as k -+ oo and, by (5.7),
Vk (u) - (u) I2 < 4C2u2, whereas u2 is integrable on M. Simil//arly, we have M
f
k(u)-W(u)11I7u12dfc-40,
because the sequence of functions 10k (u) - cp (u)12 IVu12 tends pointwise to 0 as k -4 co and is uniformly bounded by the integrable function 4C2 I VuI2. EXAMPLE 5.3. Consider the functions
(t) = t+ and cp (t) _
0,
t < 0,
which can be approximated as in (5.6) as follows. Choose 01 (t) to be any smooth function on R such that 1 (t)
_
t-l, t>2, 0,
t<0
(see Fig. 5.1). Such function 01 (t) can be obtained by twice integrating a suitable function from Co (0, 2).
Wt) Wi(t) 0
2
t
0
2
t
FIGURE 5.1. Functions 0 (t) = t+ and 01 (t) and their derivatives Then define Ok by k (t) = I Yb1 (kt).
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
126
If t < 0 then bk (t) = 0. If t > 0 then, for large enough k, we have kt > 2 whence k(t) =
I
(kt - 1) = t -
1
-4 t ask -+ oo.
Hence, z//k (t) -4' (t) for all t E R. Similarly, if t < 0 then 0'' (t) = 0, and, for t > 0,
b'k(t)=
(kt)-+1 as k -4oc.
' (t) -4 co (t) for all t E R. By Lemma 5.2, we obtain that u+ E Wo and
Hence,
Vu+
_
I
Vu, u>0, 0, u < 0.
(5.9)
Applying this to function (-u), we obtain u_ E Wo and
Vu__{ -Vu, u<0.
(5.10)
Consequently, since Vu+ = Vu_ = 0 on the set {u = 0}, we obtain
Vu=0on {u=0}.
(5.11)
Of course, if the set {u = 0} has measure 0 then (5.11) is void because Vu is defined up to a set of measure 0, anyway. However, if the set {u = 0} has a positive measure then the identity (5.11) is highly non-trivial. In particular,
(5.11) implies that if u, v are two functions from Wo such that u = v on some set S then Vu = Vv on S. Similarly, u c Wo implies (u - c) (+ E Wo for any c > 0, and V (u - c)+ = {
0, 0,
u < c'
(5.12)
Since Jul = u+ + u_, it follows from (10.20), (5.10), (5.11) that V Jul = sgn (u) Vu.
(5.13)
Alternatively, this can be obtained directly from Lemma 5.2 with functions (t) = Itl and cp (t) = sgn (t). LEMMA 5.4. Let u be non-negative a function from Wo (M). Then there
exists a sequence {uk} of non-negative functions from Co (M) such that
ukW1 -+u. PROOF. By definition, there is a sequence {vk} of functions from Co (M) 1
such that vk W--> u. Let zb be a smooth non-negative function on R satisfying (5.1). By (5.3), we have
(u). Observe that 'b (vk) > 0 and '0 (vk) E Co (M). Hence, the function 0 (u) E W0 can be approximated in W1-norm by a sequence of non-negative func(vk) -+
tions from Co (M). We are left to show that u can be approximated in
5.2. CHAIN RULE IN W1
127
W1-norm by functions like 0 (u), that is, there exists a sequence {?k} functions as above such that 1
Ok (u)
Indeed, consider the functions
-*
U.
co (t) = 1(5.14)
2' (t) = t+ and
and let '%k be a sequence of non-negative smooth functions satisfying (5.5) and (5.6). Then, by (5.8), L2
'bk (u)
L2 2b (u) = u and Wk (u) -+ cp (u) 1u = Du,
which finishes the proof.
5.2. Chain rule in W1 The main result of this section is Theorem 5.7 that extends Lemma 5.2 to W1 (M).
Denote by W, (M) the class of functions from W' (M) with compact support. LEMMA 5.5. WW (M) C W0 (M)
.
PROOF. Set K = supp u and let {Ui} be a finite family of charts covering K. By Theorem 3.5, there exists a family {VQ of functions Vi E D (Ui) such that Ei 0i = 1 in a neighborhood of K. Then we have O u E WW (Ui) (cf. Exercise 4.2). Since u = EiV1iu, it suffices to prove that 2/Iiu E Wo (Ui). Hence, the problem amounts to showing that, for any chart U,
W": (U)CW0(U), that is, for any function u E W' (U), there exists a sequence {cpk} C D (U) such that cpk + u. Since U is a chart and, hence, can be considered as a part of R', also the Euclidean Sobolev space W ,',,,(U) is defined in U (see Section 2.6.1). In general, the spaces W ,',,,,(U) and W1 (U) are different. However, by Exercise 4.11(b), the fact that u E W1 (U) implies that u 1
and all distributional partial derivatives 8ju belong to Li (U). Since the support of u is compact, we obtain that u and O u belong to Leucl (U), whence u c Wd (U). By Exercise 2.30, there exists a sequence {cpk}k 1 of functions from D (U) that converges to u in We a (U), and the supports of cOk can be assumed to be in an arbitrarily small open neighborhood V of supp u. We are left to show that the convergence cpk -4 u in Wu.1 (U) implies that in W1 (U). By Exercise 4.11, for any v E Wed (U) we have 92'aZvajv'
IVgvlg = where Vv is the weak gradient of v in metric g of the manifold M. It follows that, for any fixed open set V C= U, IIVIIW1(V) <_ CIIvIIwi
(v)
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
128
where the constant C depends on the supremums of I g2j I and det g in V. Hence, choosing V C= U to contain all the supports of SPk and u, we obtain 0,
Iu - SOkIIWl(V)
that is, c'k -+ u in W1 (U). Define the space W1'0 (M) by Will"
(M)={uELiC(M):DuELic(M)}.
(5.15)
Clearly, if u E W,1, (M) then u E W1 (52) for any relatively compact open set S2 C M. Conversely, if u is a function on M such that u E W' (Qk) for an exhaustion sequence {s2k} then u E Wlo, (M). COROLLARY 5.6. If U E Wio, (M) and f E Co (M) then fu E W0 (M).
PROOF. Let S2 be any relatively compact open set containing supp f .
Then u E W1 (fl) and f E Co (92), whence we obtain by Exercise 4.3 that f u c W1 (ci). Since supp (f u) is compact and is contained in 52, we obtain f u E Wf (52) whence by Lemma 5.5 f u E Wo (0). It follows that fu EW0(M). The following result extends Lemma 5.2 to functions from W' (M). THEOREM 5.7. Let {Y'k (t)} be a sequence of C°°-smooth functions on R such that
"k (0) = 0 and sup sup 10k (t) I < 00. k
(5.16)
tE]R
Assume that, for some functions 0 (t) and cp (t) on IR,
V'k (t) - i (t) and 0k (t) - cp (t) for all t E Iii,
(5.17)
as k -+oo. (i) If u E W1 (M) then 0 (u) E W' (M) and 0' (u) = cP (u) Vu.
(5.18)
(ii) Assume in addition that function cp (t) is continuous in III \ F for some finite or countable set F. If Uk, u E W' (M) then Uk
-
U
Z(1 (Uk) -4 ?/J (u)
.
REMARK. The conditions (5.16) and (5.17) are identical to the conditions (5.5) and (5.6) of Lemma 5.2. PROOF. (i) As in the proof of Lemma 5.2, we have 0 (u) E L2 (M) and cp (u) Vu E L2 (M). The identity (5.18) means that, for any vector field WED (M), (5.19) (' (u) , div, w) = - (co (u) Vu, w) .
5.2. CHAIN RULE IN W1
129
Fix w E D (M) and let f E D (M) be a cutoff function of supp w. By Corollary 5.6, the function uo := f u is in Wo (M). Therefore, by Lemma 5.2,
o0 (u0) _'P (uo) Duo
and, hence,
(0(uo),div,.w) = Since u = uo in a neighborhood of suppw, this identity implies (5.19). (ii) It suffices to prove that a subsequence of {V (uk)} converges to 0 (u) (cf. Exercise 2.14). Since Uk --* u in L2, there is a subsequence {uk} that converges to u almost everywhere. Hence, renaming this subsequence back to {uk}, we can assume that Uk -4 u a.e.. What follows is similar to the proof of Lemma 5.1. It suffices to show
that V) (u) and 7V) (uk) Z V By (5.16), there is a constant C such that (uk)
(U).
(5.20)
10k (t)I < C and I0k (t) I < C Itl , for all k and t E R. Therefore, 110 (Uk) - 0 (u) 11 < Clink - ull
(where all norms are L2), which implies the first convergence in (5.20). Next, using (5.18), we obtain
llVV(uk) - V (u)II
<-
II CP(uk)(Duk - Vu)11 + I1((P(uk)
< C11(Duk - VU) 11 + 11(tP(uk)
- P(u))VujI
- P(u)) Vull. (5.21)
The first term in (5.21) tends to 0 by hypothesis. The second term is equal
f
to
1/2 1
(uk (x)) -
11
(u (x))121ou12 dµ (x))
(5.22)
Consider the following two sets:
S1 = {xEM:uk(x)74 u(x) ask-4oo},
S2 = {xEM:u(x)EF}, where F is set where cP is discontinuous. By construction, u (SI) = 0. Since
Vu = 0 on any set of the form {u = const} (cf. Example 5.3) and S2 is a countable union of such sets, it follows that Vu = 0 on S2. Hence, the domain of integration in (5.22) can be reduced to M \ (Si U S2). In this domain, we have
uk(x)--+u(x)VF, which implies by the continuity of ca in R \ F that cP (uk (x)) -+ cO (u (x))
Since the functions under the integral sign in (5.22) are uniformly bounded by the integrable function 4C2 l`7u12, the dominated convergence theorem
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
130
implies that the integral (5.22) tends to 0 as k -3 oo, which proves the second relation in (5.20). EXAMPLE 5.8. Fix c > 0 and consider functions
0 (t) = (t - c)+ and
(5.23)
(cf. Example 5.3). Since these functions satisfy all the hypotheses of Theorem 5.7, we obtain that if u E W 1 then (u - c)+ E W1, and V (u - c)+ is given by (5.12). Furthermore, by Theorem 5.7, Uk
u implies (Uk - c)+
(u - c)+.
Exercises. 5.1. Let fi (t) and cp (t) be functions satisfying the conditions (5.16) and (5.17) of Theorem 5.7. Prove that V)' it = co.
5.2. Let 0 E C' (1l) be such that
b (0) = 0 and sup Iii I < oc. Prove that the functions
satisfy the conditions (5.16) and (5.17) of Theorem
and cp
5.7.
5.3. Prove that if u, v E Wo (M) then also max (u, v) and min (u, v) belong to Wo (M).
5.4. Prove that if M is a compact manifold then W 1 (M) = Wo (M).
5.5. Prove that if u E W1 (M) then, for any real constant c, Vu = 0 a.e. on the set
{xEM:u(x)=c}.
5.6. Prove that, for any u E W' (M),
(u-c)+-u+ asc-+0+. 5.7. Let f E W1 (M) and assume that f (x) -+ 0 as x -+ oo (the latter means that, for any e > 0, the set {If > e} is relatively compact). Prove that f E Wo (M). 5.8. Prove that if u E Wdoo (M) and cp, 0 are functions on R satisfying the conditions of Theorem 5.7 then 0 (u) E Wtoc (M) and V (u) = cp (u) Vu. 5.9. Define the space Woo (M) by 2
Wioc
1 f E Waoc :A,,
2
E Laos} .
Prove the Green formula (4.12) for any two functions u E W0' and v E W.
5.3. Markovian properties of resolvent and the heat semigroup Set as before L = -Au,JW and recall that the heat semigroup is defined by Pt = e-t c for all t > 0, and the resolvent is defined by (5.24) Ra = (L + aid)-1 for all a > 0. Both operators Pt and Ra are bounded self-adjoint operator
on L2 (M) (cf. Theorems 4.9 and 4.5). Here we consider the properties of the operators Pt and Ra related to inequalities between functions.
5.3. MARKOVIAN PROPERTIES OF RESOLVENT AND THE HEAT SEMIGROUP 131
THEOREM 5.9. Let (M, g, p) be a weighted manifold, f c L2 (M), and
a>0.
(i) If f > O then Ra f > 0.
(ii) If f< 1 then R, f< a-1. PROOF. We will prove that, for any c > 0, f < c implies Ra f < ca-1, which will settle (ii) when c = 1, and settle (i) when c --+ 0+. Without loss
of generality, it suffices to consider the case c = a, that is, to prove that f < a implies Ra f < 1. Set u = Ra f and recall that u E dom.C = Wo and .Cu + au = f. (5.25) To prove that u < 1 is suffices to show that the function v := (u - 1)+ identically vanishes. By Example 5.3 and (5.12), we have v E W01 and Vu,
Vv = j
0
1
(5.26)
u < 1.
Multiplying (5.25) by v and integrating, we obtain (5.27)
(.Cu, v)L2 + a (u, v)L2 = (.f, v)L2 .
By Lemma 4.4 and (5.26), we have (Lu, V) L2 = - (& u, v)L2 = (Vu, Vv)L2 = J
/ {u> 1 }
whereas
(u, v)L2 = f
{v>0}
(v + 1) vdu = NvHi2 +
I Vu12 dµ >_ 0,
f
M
Hence, it follows from (5.27) and f < a that aiiv1122 + a fm vdµ < (f, v)L2 < a fm vdµ, whence we conclude IIVIIL2 = 0 and v = 0.
Many properties of the heat semigroup can be proved using the corresponding properties of the resolvent and the following identities. LEMMA 5.10. For an arbitrary weighted manifold (M, g, ,u) the following identity hold.
(i) For any a > 0,
Ra = f
e-atPtdt.
(5.28)
0
where the integral is understood in the following sense: for all f, g E L2 (M),
(R,f,9)L2 =
r e-at (ptfI9)L2
J0
dt.
(5.29)
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
132
(ii) For any t > 0,
`k
Pt= lim k-oo \t
Rkt=
(5.30)
where the limit is understood in the strong operator topology.
PROOF. Let {E,\} be the spectral resolution of the Dirichlet Laplace operator .C. Then by (4.45) we have
f
Pt f =
oQ
e-atdEaf
(5.31)
(a + A)-1 dEa f
(5.32)
0
and
R, ,,,f =
J
U
(see also Exercise A.24).
(i) Substituting (5.31) to the right hand side of (5.29) with g = f and using Fubini's theorem, we obtain
f
0°O
Cod (Ptf, f) L2
0
dt = f
00
Cat
0
f
(j00 a-atd (Eaf,
(o 0
o 0o
e
&2 ) dt
('+a)tdt) d (EA.f, .f )Lz
0 (a+A)-'d(Eaf,f)f
(Raf, f)L2
L2
,
which proves (5.29) for the case f = g. Then (5.29) extends to arbitrary
f, g using the identity
(Ptf,g)= 2(Pt(f+g),f+g)-2(Pt(f-g),f-g) and a similar identity for Rn (ii) Applying the classical identity
e-ta.kmooCl+) and the dominated convergence theorem, we obtain
I
00
e-tadEA =
km
t
I'm (l+)_kdE,
where the limit is understood in the strong sense. This implies (5.30) because the left hand side here is equal to Pt, and the integral in the right hand side
5.3. MARKOVIAN PROPERTIES OF RESOLVENT AND THE HEAT SEMIGROUP 133
is equal to 00
r (i+-)
- kdE),
kdEA
W kJ (+A)-k (t I k yd+r)
(k)k
/
k/t
THEOREM 5.11. Let (M, g, y) be a weighted manifold, f E L2 (M), and
t>0.
(i) If f > 0 then Ptf > 0. (iii) If f < 1 then Pt f < 1. PROOF. (i) If f > 0 then, by Theorem 5.9, Ra f > 0, which implies that Ra f > 0 for all positive integers k. It follows from (5.30) that Ptf > 0.
(ii) If f < 1 then, by Theorem 5.9, Ra f < a-1, which implies that Ra f < a-k for all positive k. Hence, (5.30) implies (k -k = 1,
Ptf <
lilim
on
(t) k
t)
which was to be proved.
Exercises. Let R. be the resolvent defined by (5.24). (a) Prove that, for any f E L2 and a > 0,
5.10.
Pt f=lim e -"
00
a 2ktk
L kf
Rk
f.
(5.33)
k=0
(b) Using (5.33), give an alternative proof of the fact that f < 1 implies Ptf < 1. 5.11. For all a, k > 0, define Rkk01 as cp (R,,) where cp (A) _ ak.
(a) Prove that, for all a, k > 0, R« =
f oa rtk-1 (k) e-«tPtdt
(5.34)
0
where the integral is understood in the weak sense, as in Lemma 5.10, and r is the gamma function (cf. Section A.6). (b) Write for simplicity Rl = R. Prove that Rk RI = Rk+a for all k, l > 0.
Prove that if f E L2 (M) then f > 0 implies Rkf > 0 and f < 1 implies k 'f < 1,
for allk>0.
(c) Prove that Rk = e-kL where L = log (id +G) and .G is the Dirichlet Laplace operator. REMARK. The semigroup {Rk}k>o is called the Bessel semigroup, and the operator log (id +i) is its generator.
5.12. Prove that, for any non-negative function f E L2 (M) and all t, a > 0,
PtRo.f < eatRaf 5.13. Let G be the Dirichlet Laplace operator on
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
134
(a) Prove that the resolvent R., = (G + Aid)-' is given for any A > 0 by the following formula:
-f 2 1
RAf=
e-N'_"=-vl f
(y) dy,
(5.35)
for any and f E L2 (R'). (b) Comparing (5.35) with co
RA =
e-1\tPtdt
J0
and using the explicit formula for the heat kernel in R1, establish the following identity: e-tom
exp I
=fy
-4s) e Sods
(5.36)
for all t > 0 and A > 0.
(-
REMARK. The function s exp 4s ) is the density of a probability distribution on R+, which is called the Levy distribution.
5.14. Let L be the Dirichlet Laplace operator on an arbitrary weighted manifold, and consider the family of operators Qt = exp (-tL1/2), where t > 0. (a) Prove the identity
Qt = Joy
v 4-7r83
exp (- t
4s
Pads.
(5.37)
(b) Let f E L2 (M). Prove that f > 0 implies Qt f > 0 and f < 1 implies Qt f (c) Prove that in the case M = R', Qt is given explicitly by
Qtf =
f
n
qt (x - y) f (y) dy
where 4t
(x)
=
2 t Wn+l (t2 + Ixl2)n+y
(5.38)
REMARK. The semigroup {Qt}k>0 is called the Cauchy semigroup, and the operator .112 is its generator. 5.15. Let 4 be a C°°-function on R such that' (0) = IF' (0) = 0 and 0 < T" (s) < 1 for
all s.
(a) Prove that, for any f E L2 (M), the following function F(t) := fM IF (Ptf) dot
(5.39)
i s continuous and decreasing in t E [0, -boo). (b) Using part (a), give yet another proof of the fact that f < 1 implies Ptf < 1, without using the resolvent.
5.4. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE
135
5.4. Weak maximum principle 5.4.1. Elliptic problems. Given functions f E L2 (M), W E W1 (M), and a real constant a, consider the following weak Dirichlet problem:
f Aµu+au= f,
(5.40)
u = w mod Wo (M) , where the second line in (5.40) means that u= w + wo for some wo E Wo (M)
,
and can be regarded as the "boundary condition" for u. If a < 0 and w = 0 then the problem (5.40) has exactly one solution u = -R_a f by Theorem 4.5. Set /3 = inf spec L,
where L is the Dirichlet Laplace operator on M. Then, by Exercise 4.29, the problem (5.40) has exactly one solution for any a <,6 and w E W1 (M). Here we are interested in the sign of a solution assuming that it already exists. In fact, we consider a more general situation when the equations in (5.40) are replaced by inequalities. If u, w are two measurable functions on M then we write u < w modWo (M) if
u < w + wo for some wo E Wp (M). The opposite inequality u > w mod Wo (M) is defined similarly.
LEMMA 5.12. If u E W1 (M) then the relation
u < 0 mod Wo (M)
(5.41)
holds if and only if u+ E Wo (M). PROOF. If u+ E Wo then (5.41) is satisfied because u < u+. Conversely, we need to prove that if u < v for some v E Wo then u+ E Wo. Assume first that v E Co, and let cp be a cutoff function of supp v (see Fig. 5.2). Then we have the following identity:
u+= ((1-(p)v-E-(pu)+
(5.42)
Indeed, if cp = 1 then (5.42) is obviously satisfied. If cp < 1 then v = 0 and, hence, u < 0, so that the both sides of (5.42) vanish. By Corollary 5.6, we have cpu E Wo. Since (1 - cp) v c Co, it follows that
(1-cp)v+cpuEWo. By Lemma 5.2 and (5.42) we conclude that u+ E W01. For a general v E Wo, let {vk} be a sequence of functions from Co such
that Vk 4 v. Then we have Uk :=u+(vk-v)
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
136
FIGURE 5.2. Functions u, v, ,p which implies by the first part of the proof that (uk)+ E Wo W. Since uk
it follows by Theorem 5.7 that (uk)+
W- U,
u+, whence we conclude that
0
uEW0.
We say that a distribution u E D' (M) is non-negative' and write u > 0 if (u, cp) > 0 for any non-negative function cp E D (M). Of course, if u E L1', C (M) then u > 0 in the sense of distributions if and only if u > 0 a.e.(cf. Exercise 4.7). Similarly, one defines the inequalities u > v and u < v between two distributions. It is possible to prove that u > v and u < v imply u = v (cf. Exercise 4.6). THEOREM 5.13. (Weak maximum principle) Set 0 = inf spec L and assume that, for some real a < 0, a function u E W' (M) satisfies in the distributional sense the inequality Amu + au > 0 (5.43) and the boundary condition u < 0 mod Wo (M) . (5.44) Then u < 0 in M.
REMARK. If a > 0 then the statement of Theorem 5.13 may fail. For example, if M is compact then 0 = 0 because the constant is an eigenfunction of L with the eigenvalue 0. Then both (5.43) and (5.44) hold with a = 0 for any constant function u so that the sign of u can be both positive and negative.
REMARK. Theorem 5.13 can be equivalently stated as a weak minimum principle: if u E W' (M) and Ottu + au < 0, u > 0 mod Wo (M) , then u > 0 in M. _
'It is known that any non-negative distribution is given by a measure but we will not use this fact.
5.4. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE
137
REMARK. Consider the weak Dirichlet problem (5.40) with the boundary
function w = 0. By Theorem 4.5, if a < 0 then the problem (5.40) has a unique solution u = -R-,,f. By Theorem 5.13, we obtain in this case that f > 0 implies R_a f > 0, which, hence, recovers Theorem 5.9(i). PROOF OF THEOREM 5.13. By definition, (5.43) is equivalent to the inequality (Auu, co) + a (u, W) > 0
for any non-negative cp E D (M), which, in turn, is equivalent to (Vu, V W) - a (u, W) < 0.
(5.45)
Considering the round brackets here also as the inner products in L2 (M) and noticing that all terms in (5.45) are continuous in co in the norm of W1 (M), we obtain that (5.45) holds for all non-negative cp E Wo (M) (cf. Lemma 5.4).
By Lemma 5.12 we have u+ E Wo (M). Setting (5.45) cp = u+, we obtain
f (Vu, Vu+)dp - a f u+dy<0. f f Iou+12dµ _> Q f u+dp,
u u+ dot < 0.
fm
M
It follows by (5.9), that
IVu+12dµ-aJ
(5.46)
M
M
By Exercise 4.27, we have
M
M
which together with (5.46) implies
(Q - a) fm u+dµ<0. Since a < 0, we obtain IIu+IIL2 = 0 and, hence, u < 0. COROLLARY 5.14. (Comparison principle) Assume that, for some a <,8, functions u, v E Wl (M) satisfy the conditions
A/-4u +au>A,.v+av, u
PROOF. Indeed, the function u-v satisfies all the conditions of Theorem 5.13, which implies u - v < 0. COROLLARY 5.15. (The minimality of resolvent) Assume that a function u E W1 (M) satisfies the inequality
-Amu + yu > f, where f E L2 (M) and y > 0, and the boundary condition
u>0modWo(M).
(5.47)
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
138
Then u > Ry f. PROOF. Using Theorem 4.5, we obtain that
-Ap (Ryf) +7
f = f < -Au +-yu
R.y f = 0 mod Wo (M) < u mod Wo (M), whence we conclude by Corollary 5.14 with a = -ry that Rj < u.
If f > 0 then, by Theorem 5.9, Ry f > 0. The statement of Corollary 5.15 implies that u = Ry f is the minimal function satisfying (5.47) among all non-negative functions u E W1 (M).
Exercises. 5.16. Give an example of a manifold M and a non-negative function u E Wjo (M) such
that u < 0 mod WW (M)
5.4.2. Parabolic problems. Now we turn to the weak maximum principle for the heat equation. In Section 4.3, we have considered the L2-Cauchy problem related to the Dirichlet Laplace operator L. In the next statement, we consider a more general version of this problem, where the requirement to be in domL is dropped. THEOREM 5.16. (Weak parabolic maximum principle) Let u : (0, T) -3 W1 (M) be a path that satisfies the following conditions:
(i) For any t E (0, T), the strong derivative ai exists in L2 (M) and satisfies the inequality
du_&u<0 dt
,
(5.48)
where AA is understood as an operator in D' (M).
(ii) For any t E (0,T), u (t, ) < 0 mod W0 (M) .
u+ (t,)
L2
5.49)
)
0 as t -+ 0. Then u (t, ) < 0 for all t E (0, T) .
REMARK. By Theorem 4.9, the function u = Ptf satisfies all the above conditions, provided f < 0. Hence, we conclude by Theorem 5.16 that f < 0 implies Ptf < 0, which recovers Theorem 5.11(i). Let u be a solution to the L2-Cauchy problem with the initial function f as stated in Section 4.3. Then, for any t > 0, u (t, ) E dom L which ,
implies
mod W0 (M). Applying Theorem 5.16 to u and -u, we see that f = 0 implies u = 0, which recovers Theorem 4.10.
5.4. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE
139
Similarly to Corollary 5.14, one can state in an obvious way a comparison principle associated with Theorem 5.16.
PROOF. The inequality (5.48) means that, for any fixed t E (0, T) and any non-negative function v E D (M),
(U V) <(&u, v), where u' = at , which implies (U
/' v)
(Vu, Vv)
(5.50)
.
Considering the both sides here as the inner products in L2 (M), we extend (5.50) to all non-negative functions v E W0 (M). Let a function cp E CO° (1I) be such that, for some positive constant C, s < 0, s > 0,
cp (s) = 0, cp (s) > 0,
(5.51)
0
=-
(u) Vu12 d< 0.
(5.52)
IM
Using the product rule (Exercise 4.46) and the chain rule (Exercise 4.50) for strong derivatives, we obtain dt (u, W (u)) L2
= (u', cp (u)) L2 + (u, cp (u) u) L2 (u', (p (u)) L2 + (u', 'b (u)) L2
(5.53)
where
' (s) = cp' (s) s.
(5.54)
Next, we specify function cp as follows. Define first its second derivative cp" as a non-negative smooth function on R, such that
cp"(s)=0, s<0ors>1, cp"(s)>0, O<s<1. Then co is obtained by two integrations of cp" keeping the value 0 at 0. Clearly, co satisfies (5.51). Also function 0 (s) from (5.54) satisfies (5.51), because its derivative
0'(s)=cp"(s)s+cp'(s)
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
140
is obviously non-negative and bounded. By (5.52), we conclude that the right hand side of (5.53) is non-positive, that is, (u, cp (u))L2 as a function of t is decreasing in (0, T). Since co (s) < Cs for any s > 0, we obtain that (u, c (u))L2 = (u+, W (u+))L2 G C (u+, u+)L2 .
By hypothesis, (u+, U+)L2 -3 0 as t -> 0. Hence, the function t H (u+, cp (u+))L2 is non-negative, decreasing on (0, T) and goes to 0 as t -3 0. It follows that
(u+, cp (U+))L2 = 0 for all t E (0, T), which implies that u+ (t, ) = 0 for all t E (0, T). COROLLARY 5.17. (The minimality of Pt f) Let u : (0, T) -3 W1 (M) be
a path in W' ( M) such that
dt > Op,u for all t E (0, T) u (t, ) > 0 mod Wo (M) for all t E (0, T) (t ' .) u f E LZ (M) as t -3 0
,
,
(5.55)
.
Then, for all t E (0, T),
u (t, ) > Pt f.
(5.56)
PROOF. Using Theorem 4.9, we obtain that the function v (t, ) = u (t, Pt f satisfies the conditions
dt > OAv
for all t E (0, T) ,
0 modW' (M), for all t E (0,T), V (t'.)
2
L
as t -4 0,
_> 0
whence (5.56) follows by Theorem 5.16. Corollary 5.17 implies the following minimality property of Pt f : if f > 0
then the function u (t, ) = Pt f is the minimal non-negative solution to the Cauchy problem du _ Opu, t > 0, dt 2
U (t, ) -4 f, as t -3 0.
Exercises. 5.17. Let the paths w : (0,T) -* W' (M) and v : (0,T) -* Wo (M) satisfy the same heat equation du dt_O,u
foralltE(0,T),
where de is the strong derivative in L2 (M) and A ,u is understood in the distributional sense. Prove that if )L2(M) w(t, v (t, 0 ast-*0, and w > 0 then w (t,) > v (t, ) for all t E (0, T).
5.4. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE
141
5.4.3. The pointwise boundary condition at oo. DEFINITION 5.18. The one point compactification of a smooth manifold M is the topological space MU{oo} where cc is the ideal infinity point (that does not belong to M) and the family of open sets in M U {oo} consists of the open sets in M and the sets of the form (M \ K) U {oo} where K is an arbitrary compact subset of M.
It is easy to check that this family of open sets determines the Hausdorff topology in M U {oo} and the topological space M U {oo} is compact. Note that if M is compact then oo is disconnected from M. If M is non-compact and v (x) is a function on M then it follows from the definition of the topology of M U {oo} that, for a real c,
v(x)-+c as x-+oo if, for any E > 0, there is a compact set KE C M such that sup Iv (x) - cl < E.
(5.57)
(5.58)
xEM\KE
EXAMPLE 5.19. If M = R' then any compact set is contained in a ball IxI
{x E 1R7z :
v(x)-+c as Ix1-4oo, so that x - oo means in this case jxI -> oo. If M = 52 where E2 is a bounded open set in R then every compact set in M is contained in S2a = {x E Q: d (x, aS2) > S}
for some J > 0. Then x --> oo in M means d (x, (9s2) --* 0 that is, x --+ aQ. If M = S2 where S2 is an arbitrary open set in lR' then arguing similarly
we obtain that x -> oo in M means that x
1
oo.
+ d (x, a1) -} If va (x) is a function on a manifold M that depends on a parameter a varying in a set A, then define the uniform convergence in a as follows: v (x)
c as x --+ oo uniformly in a E A if the condition (5.58) holds
uniformly in a, that is, sup
sup
I Va (x) - cl <E.
(5.59)
aEA xEM\KE
For c = boo the conditions (5.58) and (5.59) should be appropriately modified.
The next statement is a rather straightforward consequence of Theorem 5.16 for the classical (sub)solutions to the heat equation. COROLLARY 5.20. (Parabolic maximum principle) Set I = (0, T) where
T E (0, +oo]. Let a function u (t, x) E C2 (I X M) satisfy the following conditions:
142
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
au-L u<0inIxM. u+ (x, t)
0 as x
oe in M, where the convergence is uniform
in t E I. (M) L2 0 as t - 0. u+ (t ) L Then u < 0 in I x M. PROOF. The hypothesis u+ (x, t) * 0 as x -4 oo means that, for any e> 0 there is a compact set K C M such that sup sup u (t, x) < E. tE7 xEM\K
Let S2 be any relatively compact open subset of M containing K. Then it (t, ) E Wl (S2) for any t E I and the partial derivative at coincides with the strong derivative dt in L2 (Q) (cf. Exercise 4.47). Therefore, it satisfies the hypothesis (i) of Theorem 5.16 in Q. It follows that u - e also satisfies that condition. Since (u - E)+ is supported in K C S2, we obtain by Theorem 5.7 and Lemma 5.5 that (u - e)+ E W0 (0). This constitutes the hypothesis (ii) of Theorem 5.16. L-42 (0) 0 as t - 0, which gives the hypothesis Finally, we have (u - e)+ (iii) of Theorem 5.16. Hence, we conclude by Theorem 5.16 that it - E < 0 in I x Q. Finally, letting e -+ 0 and exhausting M by sets like S2, we obtain u < 0 in I x M.
REMARK 5.21. Corollary 5.20 remains true if u+ satisfies the initial condition in the Li . sense rather than in Li sense, that is, if -)L 11-:4(M)0
u+ (t,
as t -4 0.
See Exercise 5.21.
Exercises. 5.18. Let va (x) be a real valued function on a non-compact smooth manifold M depending
on a parameter a E A, and let c E R. Prove that the following conditions are equivalent (all convergences are inform in a E A): c as x --* oo. (i) va (x) (ii) For any sequence {xk}k 1 that eventually leaves any compact set K C M, va (xk)
cask --boo. (iii) For any sequence {xk} on M that eventually leaves any compact set K C M, there is a subsequence {xk, } such that va (xki) = c as i -3 00. (iv) For any e > 0, the set
VE={xEM:suplva(x)-cl ll
aEA
>s
(5.60)
is relatively compact. Show that these conditions are also equivalent for c = ±oo provided (5.60) is appropriately adjusted.
5.5. RESOLVENT AND THE HEAT SEMIGROUP IN SUBSETS
143
5.19. Referring to Exercise 5.18, let M = St where S is an unbounded open subset of 1R'". Prove that the condition (i) is equivalent to (v) v, (xk) c for any sequence {xk} C 1 such that either Xk -> x E 00 or xkl --> Co.
5.20. Let a function v E C2 (M) satisfy the conditions: (i) -A ,v + cev < 0 on M, for some a > 0; (ii) v+ (x) -3 0 as x --> oo in M. Prove that v < 0 in M. L'2_(M)
5.21. Prove that the statement of Corollary 5.20 remains true if the condition u+ (t, ) 0 as t -+ 0 is replaced by L, '_(M)
u+
0 as t -+ 0.
5.5. Resolvent and the heat semigroup in subsets Any open subset Sl of a weighted manifold (M, g, p) can be regarded as a weighted manifold (fl, g, µ). We will write shortly L2 (SZ) for L2 (52, µ), and the same applies to W0 (S2) and other Sobolev spaces.
Given a function f on S2, its trivial extension is a function f on M defined by (x)f(x),
0,
xES2, x E M \ Q.
The same terminology and notation apply to extension of a vector field in S2
by setting it 0 in M \ Q. It is obvious that if f E Co' (Q) then f E Co (M) and
Vf = Vf
and
O,f =& f.
The space L2 (S2) can be considered as a subspace of L2 (M) by identifying any function f c L2 (St) with its trivial extension.
CLAIM. For any f E Wo (a), its trivial extension f belongs to W0 (M) and
Vf = Vf.
(5.61)
Note for comparison that if f E W1 (S2) then f does not have to be in W' (M) - see Exercise 7.7.
PROOF. If f E Co- (Q) then obviously f E Co' (M) and hence f E Wo (M). For any f E W0 (1k), there exists a sequence { fk} of functions from Co' (1) such that
fk - f in Wa (Q)
.
Clearly,
fk- f inL2(M).
144
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
On the other hand, the sequence { fk} is obviously Cauchy in W01 (M) and hence converges in Wo (M). We conclude that the limit must be f, whence it follows that f E Wo (M) and
fk -- f in WO' (M) . In particular, this implies that
Vfk-+Vf in
_E2 (M).
(5.62)
On the other hand,
Vfk-*Vf in L2(S2), whence it follows that
0 fk -3 , f in L2 (M).
5.63)
Since V fk = 0 fk, we conclude from (5.62) and (5.63) that V f =V f. Hence, the space Wo (S2) can be considered as a (closed) subspace of W0 (M) by identifying any function f E Wo (11) with its trivial extension. This identification is norm preserving, which in particular, implies that we W1 (M). In what follows, we will follow the have an embedding Wo (S2) convention to denote the trivial extension of a function by the same, letter as the function, unless otherwise mentioned. Consider the Dirichlet Laplace operator in Q -ApjW (Q) , L'11
-
as well as the associated resolvent
Ra = (Ln + a id) and the heat semigroup
P"=exp(-tEf1). A sequence {S2i}°_°1 of open subsets of M is called an exhaustion sequence
if Sli C S2i+1 for all i and the union of all sets S2j is M.
THEOREM 5.22. Let f c L2 (M) be a non-negative function, and a > 0. (i) For any open set S2 C M,
Raf
Rai f
W1
Ra f as i -+ oo.
(5.64)
Note that Raf is a short form of Rn (fin). PROOF. (i) By Theorem 5.9, the functions u = Raf and v = Raf are non-negative. By convention, v - 0 outside S2, so that we only need to prove that u > v in Q. By the definition of resolvent, u E Wo (M) and u satisfies
in M the equation
-0µu+au= f.
5.5. RESOLVENT AND THE HEAT SEMIGROUP IN SUBSETS
145
In particular, we have u c W' (S2). Applying Corollary 5.15 to the manifold SZ, we obtain u > Ra f , which was to be proved. Alternative proof of (i). This proof is longer but it uses fewer tools from the present Chapter confining them to Lemmas 5.1 and 5.4. By the definition of resolvent, we have u E Wo (M), v E Wo (0), and
L0v + av = f in Q, Gu + au = f in M.
(5.65)
By Lemma 5.4, there are sequences of non-negative functions {uk } C Co (M) and {vk } C
Co (i2) which converge, respectively, to u and v in Wl-norm. Let ') be a smooth nonnegative function on H such that
7P (t)-0 fort <0,
'(t)>0and0< '(t)<1forallt>0.
(5.66)
One can think of (t) as a smooth approximation to t+ (see Fig. 5.1). Let us show that w := (v - u) E Wo (S2). For that, set wk = V) (vk - Uk) and observe that wk E Co (M) and 0 <_ Wk < Vk. The latter implies that suppwk is contained in Q and hence wk E Co (0) (see Fig. 5.3).
FIGURE 5.3. Function wk =
(vk
- Uk)
On the other hand, by (5.3) (see Lemma 5.1) we have
b(Uk - uk) W-i)V) (v-26), which yields w E Wo (S2). Subtracting the equations in (5.65) and multiplying them by w, we obtain
(Gov,w)
L2 (S2)
-(Gu,W)L2(n)+a(v-u,w)L2(o)=0.
By Lemma 4.4, we have
(r0v' w)l L2 (Q) =
(Vv, Vw)L2(n) = J (Vv, Vw)dµ.
and
(.Cu,w)L2(n) _ (.Cu,w)L2(M) = (Vu,Vw)L2(M) = f(Vu,Vw)dP, z
where in the last equality we have used (5.61). Hence, we obtain from the above three lines that f(v (v - u), Vw)dp + ce
f,
(v - u) wdp = U.
(5.67)
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
146
By (5.2), we have
Vw=V (v-u)=0'(v-u)V(v-u)
whence, by -tbb' (t) > 0,
f(V(v -
u),Vw)d=-u)1V (v-u)12d> 0.
Since t, (t) > 0 for all E R, we obtain
Therefore, the equation (5.67) is possible only when,that
is, when (v - u) 0 (v - u) = 0 in 52, whence v - u < 0.
(ii) Set ui = Ra' f and observe that, by part (i) and Theorem 5.9, the sequence {ui} is increasing and
0
0
is in Wo (M). Let us show that the sequence {ui} is Cauchy in W0 (M). Each function ui ui
in
satisfies the equation (5.68) (©ui, V(P) + a (ui, P) = (f, W) , is the inner product in L2 (M)). Choosing for any cp E W0 (ci) (where here cp = ui, we obtain
(Vui, Vui) + a (ui, ui) _ (f, ui) Fix k > i and observe that the function cp = uk - 2ui belongs to W0 (Ilk). Therefore, by the analogous equation for Uk, we obtain (Vuk, V (Uk - 2ui)) + a (Uk, Uk - 2ui) _ (f, uk - 2ui) . Adding up the above two lines yields !IVUk112+Ilouill2-2 (Vuk, Vui)+a (IlukII2 + Iluill2 - 2 (Uk, ui))
_ (f, uk - U0,
whence
11V(Uk-ui)112+alluk-uil12=(f,Uk-ui)< IIflllluk - Uill. Since link - ui 1I -+ 0 as k, i --+ oo, we conclude that also lI V (uk - ui) 11 - 0. Therefore, the sequence {ui} is Cauchy in W01 (M) and, hence, converges in
W0 (M). Since its limit in L2 (M) is u, we conclude that the limit of {ui} in W0 (M) is also u. In particular, u E W0 (M). We are left to show that u = Raf . Fix a function co c Co' (M) and observe that the support of cp is contained in Qi when i is large enough. Therefore, (5.68) holds for this cp for all large enough i. Passing to the limit
5.5. RESOLVENT AND THE HEAT SEMIGROUP IN SUBSETS
147
as i -* oo, we obtain that the same equation holds for u instead of ui, that is,
(5.69) (Vu, VP) + a (u, (P) _ (f, P) . Since Co (M) is dense in W0 (M), this identity holds for all cp E W0 (M). By Theorem 4.5, the equation (5.69) has a unique solution u E W01 (M), and this solution is Ra f , which finishes the proof.
THEOREM 5.23. Let f E L2 (M) be a non-negative function, and t > 0. (i) For any open set S2 C M, (5.70)
P1_1 f < Pt f.
(ii) For any exhaustion sequence {Oil', in M, Poi if L2z Ptf as i -> 00. REMARK. As we will see from the proof, we have also Phi f
Pt f . It will
be shown in Chapter 7 that the functions FOif, Ptf are C°°-smooth and, Co. in fact, Pti f - -* Ptf (see Theorem 7.10 and Exercise 7.18).
PROOF. (i) For any a > 0, we have by Theorem 5.22 Ra f < Ra f . By Theorem 5.9, the operators Ra and Ra preserve inequalities. Therefore, we obtain by iteration that (Ra) k f < Ra f, whence by (5.30)
P0f
lim
kt Ik(R?) k f
(-)t Rkf=Ptf
t
(cf. Exercise 2.2 for preserving inequalities by convergence in L2). Alternative proof of (i). By Theorem 4.9, function u (t, ) := Ptf satisfies the conditions
for all t > 0, = L1,u, udt(t, ) E Wo (M) , for all t > 0,
f
as t->0,
where dt is the strong derivative in L2 (M). It follows that the restriction of u to 0 (also denoted by u) belongs to Wi (0) for any t > 0 and solves the Cauchy problem in 0 with the initial function f. Since by Theorem 5.11 u > 0, we conclude by Corollary 5.17 that u > P° f , which was to be proved.
(ii) By part (i), the sequence of functions {P0i f }°_ is increasing and is bounded by Pt f Hence, for any t > 0, the sequence {P°i f } converges almost everywhere to a function ut such that .
0
f ZL2 ut. We need to show that ut = Pt f .
5. WEAK MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE AND RELATED TOPICS
148
Fix a non-negative function co c Co (M) and observe that cp E C0 (Slj) for large enough i. It follows from (5.29) and the monotone convergence theorem that, for any a > 0,
e-at(p.f,
)=
f(R'f,
,
)dt
f e-a(ut) dt, 0
as i --3 oo. On the other hand, by Theorem 5.22 and (5.29), (Raf, P) - J
(Ra2 f, (P)
00
e-at (pt f, (P) dt.
0
We conclude that 00
00
e-at
(ut, P) dt = J
J0
e-"at (Ptf, (P) dt,
0
which, in the view of inequality (Ut, cp) < (Pt f, cp), is only possible when (ut,
(5.71)
for almost all t > 0. Let us show that, in fact, both functions t (Ptf, gyp) and t -4 (ut, co) are continuous in t > 0, which will imply that (5.71) holds for all t > 0. By Theorem 4.9, the function (Pt!, cp) is even differentiable in t > 0. The same theorem also yields dt(P"'f,(P) _
where d
dt (P
(G'-'tiP 'f, W) = (Pozf,Aup),
is the inner product in L2. Using
f, P) <
1, we obtain II f IIL2(M)11 o,,01 L2(M).
Since the right hand side here does not depend on i, we see that all the functions
f, cp) have uniformly bounded derivatives in t and, hence, are Lipschitz functions with the same Lipschitz constant. Therefore, the limit function (ut, (p) is also Lipschitz and, in particular, continuous. Finally, since (5.71) holds for an arbitrary non-negative function cp E Co (M), we conclude that ut = Pt f (cf. Exercise 4.7).
Exercises. 5.22. Let u be a function from C (M) n W0 (M). For any a > 0, set
Ua={xEM:u(x)>a}. Prove that (u - a)+ E W0 (Un). 5.23. Let S2 be an open subset of a weighted manifold M and K be a compact subset of 0. Let f be a non-negative function from L2 (M). Prove that, for all a > 0,
R.f -Rcnl f G esupR«f. M\K
(5.72)
5.24. Under the hypotheses of Exercise 5.23, prove that, for all t > 0,
Ptf -Pof < sup esupPs f. sE[O,t] M\K
(5.73)
NOTES
149
5.25. Let {ci }°_-1 be an increasing sequence of open subsets of M, S2 = u°° 1 ci, and f E L2 (SZl). Prove that the family of functions {Pt ti f }°° considered as the paths in i_ 1 L2 (SZ), is equicontinuous in t E [0, +oo) with resect to the norm in L2 (52).
5.26. Let A be the multiplication operator by a bounded,non-negative measurable function a on M.
(a) Prove that A is a bounded, non-negative definite, self-adjoint operator in L2 and, for any non-negative f E L2 and t > 0, 0 < e-tA f < f. (5.74) (b) Prove that, for any non-negative f E L2 and t > 0, 0 < e-t(c+A) f < e-tcf. (5.75) (c) Using part (b), give an alternative proof of the fact that P I f < Pt f . HINT. In part (b) use the Trotter product formula: B1\n e-t(A+a) f = urn _ t (5.76) f n-f eo Ce nAe that is true for any two non-negative definite self-adjoint operators A, B in L2.
Notes There are different approaches to the maximum principle. The classical approach as in Lemma 1.5 applies to smooth solutions of the Laplace and heat equations and uses the fact that the derivatives at the extremal points have certain signs. We will use this approach in Chapter 8 again, after having established the smoothness of the solutions. In the present Chapter we work with weak solutions, and the boundary values are also understood in a weak sense, so that other methods are employed. It was revealed by Beurling and Deny [39], [106] that the Markovian properties of the heat semigroup originate from certain properties of the Dirichlet integral fM IDu12 dµ, which in turn follow
from the chain rule for the gradient V. This is why the chain rule for the weak gradient is discussed in details in Sections 5.1 and 5.2 (see also [130]). Another useful tool is the resolvent R. The use of the resolvent for investigation of the heat semigroup goes back to the Hille-Yoshida theorem. Obtaining the Markovian properties of Pt via those of R. is a powerful method that we have borrowed from [124]. Theorems 5.16, 5.22, 5.23 in the present forms as well as their proofs were taken from [162].
The reader is referred [41], [115], [124] for the Markovian properties in the general context of Markov semigroups and Markov processes.
CHAPTER 6
Regularity theory in Ilk' We present here the regularity theory for second order elliptic and parabolic equations in R7z with smooth coefficients. In the next Chapter 7, this
theory will be transplanted to manifolds and used, in particular, to prove the existence of the heat kernel. We use here the same notation as in Chapter 2.
6.1. Embedding theorems 6.1.1. Embedding W10C * Cm. In this section, we prove the Sobolev embedding theorem (known also as the Sobolev lemma), which provides the
link between the classical and weak derivatives. Let us first mention the following trivial embedding. CLAIM. For any open set S2 C Rn and any non-negative integer m, we have an embedding C+m
A " Wio'_ A
(6.1)
PROOF. Indeed, if u E C'm' (S2) then any classical derivative &au of order a < m is also a weak derivative from L oC (S2) and, for any open set S2' C= S2, Ilaaull L2(Q') < CSUp 1aaul 0'
,
which implies
ilullwmp) < Hence, the identical mapping C' (52) Wio (S2) is not only a linear injection but is also continuous, which means that it is an embedding. CIlulIcmp).
The next theorem provides a highly non-trivial embedding of Wk (S2) to Ctm (S2).
THEOREM 6.1. (Sobolev embedding theorem) Let S2 be an open subset
of R. If k and m are non-negative integers such that
k>m+2 then u E W oC (S2) implies u c C' (S2). Moreover, for all relatively compact open sets S2', S2" such that S2' C= S2" C S2
llullcm(c,) < 151
(6.2)
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN Rn
152
where the constant C depends on Q', SZ", k, m, n.
More precisely, the first claim means that, for every u E W/ (92), there is a version of u that belongs to C' (1)), which defines a linear injection from W10C (0) to Cm (a). The estimate (6.2) means that this injection is continuous, so that we have an embedding (ci) _ Cm (Q). W1 Set
00
W°°(12)= n Wk (0) k=0
and cc
Wit (c)= nWo°(1) k=0
The topology in the space WOO (SZ) is defined by the family of seminorms IIUIIWk()),
for all positive integers k, and the topology in Wf (0) is defined by the family of seminorms IIuIIWk(s2'),
where k is a positive integer and 1' C= 52 is an open set. It follows from (6.1) and (6.3) that Wig (c) = COO (9) ,
where the equality means also the identity of the topologies. Hence, in order to prove that a function from L OC belongs to COO, it suffices to show that it has weak derivatives of all orders. Although the latter may be difficult as well, the existence of weak derivatives can be frequently proved using the tools of the theory of Hilbert spaces, which are not available for the spaces Ck. EXAMPLE 6.2. Let us show that u E L100 (SZ) implies u E W- (S2), for
any k > n/2. Indeed, fix an open set S2' C SZ and observe that, for any cp c D (S2'), we have by Theorem 6.1
(u, ) =
fudsup
I
S2'
where C depends on SZ' and n. It follows that IIUIIW-k(c') <_ CIIuIIL1(n )
and, hence, u E W10C .
PROOF OF THEOREM 6.1. We split the proof into a series of claims. Recall that BR = {x E 1Rn : IxI < R}. CLAIM 1. For any u E D (BR) and k > n/2, Iu(0)I C CIIuIIWk,
(6.4)
6.1. EMBEDDING THEOREMS
153
where the constant C depends on k, n, R. We use for the proof the polar coordinates (r, 0) centered at the origin 0 E Rr' (cf. Section 3.9), and write u = u (r, 6) away from 0. The relations between the Cartesian and polar coordinates are given by the identities
xj =rfj (0), where f are the smooth functions of 0 E Sn-1 such that
(f,)21
(6.5)
ar = P (00j,
(6.6)
3
(cf. (3.61)). This implies that whence it follows by induction that, for any positive integer k, ar = fi I .... fjka,l...a,k. Applying the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality and (6.5), we obtain 2
jaau12.
aru <
(6.7)
HaH
In particular, we see that the function ar u is bounded in Rn \ {0} (note that this function is not defined at 0), which allows to integrate aT u in r over the interval [0, R]. For any 0 E Sn-1, we have u (R, 0) = 0 whence we obtain by the fundamental theorem of calculus R
u (0)
au(r,0)dr.
fo
Integration by parts yields
U (0)
fR /R [aru (r, 0) r]0 + J raru (r, 0) dr = ra9u (r, 0) dr,
J0
0
and continuing by induction, we arrive at U (0)
fRrk_18u(r,0)dr. (k-1)!Integrating
this identity in 0 over Sn-1 and using rn-1drd9 = dp, where p is the Lebesgue measure (cf. (3.82)), we obtain Wnu (0)
(k - 1)! IER
The Cauchy-Schwarz inequality/ yields then
(0) (2 < C f
BR
J
f
BR
lar ul2 dp.
(6.8)
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN
154
The first integral in (6.8) is evaluated in the polar coordinates as follows: R
LR
r2k-2ndp = Wn f r2k-2nrn-ldr = Wn
/R //
r2k-n-lydr =
CR2k-n < 00,
0
0
where we have used the hypothesis k > n/2. Hence, this integral is just a constant depending on R. By (6.7), the second integral in (6.8) is bounded by
Ir IaI
la«u12dµIIUI12
Therefore, (6.4) follows from (6.8).
For the next Claims 2-4, 52 C R is a bounded open set. CLAIM 2. For any u c D (92) and k > n/2, we have sup Jul < CIIuIIwk
(6.9)
where the constant C depends on k, n, and' diam Q. Indeed, let x be a point of maximum of Jul and R = diam S2. Applying Claim 1 in the ball BR (x), we obtain (6.9). CLAIM 3. Assume that u c Wk (Q), where k > n/2, and let the support of u be a compact set in Q. Then u E C (S2) and the estimate (6.9) holds. Let W be a mollifier and set uj = u * cpllj where j is a positive integer. By Lemma 2.9, we have uj E D (52), provided j is large enough, and by Theorem 2.13, uj -3 u in Wk when j -* oo. Applying (6.9) to the difference
ui - uj, we obtain Suplui-u.71 CCllui - ujllwk. Since the right hand side tends to 0 as i, j -+ oo, we obtain that the sequence {uj } is Cauchy with respect to the sup-norm and, hence, converges uniformly
to a continuous function. Hence, the function u has a continuos version, which satisfies (6.9). CLAIM 4. Assume that u c Wk (S2), where k > n/2 + m and m is a positive integer, and let the support of u be a compact set in Q. Then u E Ctm (S2) and (6.10) Ilullcm < CIIullwk, where the constant C depends on k, m, n, and diam Q.
Indeed, if at < m then aau E Wk-,, which yields by Claim 3 that a«u c C (S2) and sup l aaul < Cllaaullwk-m < CNullwk,
(6.11)
whence the claim follows2. 'In fact, the constant C in (6.9) can be chosen independently of 12, as one can see from the second proof of Theorem 6.1. 2See Claim in the proof of Lemma 2.9.
6.1. EMBEDDING THEOREMS
155
Finally, let us prove the statement of Theorem 6.1. Assume u E W10C (S2)
where S2 is an open subset of Rn and k > n/2 + m. Choose open sets 52' C S2" C Sl and a function 'b E Co' (1l") such that 'b - 1 on Q. Then ?u E Wk (Q11) (cf. Exercise 2.26) and the support of u is a compact subset of a". By Claim 4, we conclude that Ou E Cm (S2"). In particular, u E Cm (S2') because u = ibu in 1'. Since .l' may be chosen arbitrarily, we conclude that u E Cm (S1). It follows from (6.10) and (2.38) that 11U11Cm(D') <
C'llullwk(si ),
CII
which finishes the proof.
SECOND PROOF. We use here the Fourier transform and the results of Exercise 2.34. Assume first that u E Wk (Rn) with k > n/2 and prove that is defined and is also u E C (Rn). Since u c L2, the Fourier transform u in L2. By (2.42) we have
f
(6.12)
n
By the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality,
(fn l u () i d
\
l
2
n
u () I2 (1 + 112) k d J n
(1 + 112) -k d
(6.13)
The condition k > n/2 implies that the last integral in (6.13) converges, which together with (6.12) yields
f
nlu(C)ld <_CIIuIIwk.
(6.14)
In particular, we see that u E L' and, hence, u can be obtain from u by the inversion formula (6.15)
(2,)n/2 fn u (C)
u (x)
for almost all x. Let us show that the right hand side of (6.15) is a continuous function. Indeed, for all x, y E Rn, we have
fn u (C) eZxld- fn
u (;) e&y6d =
fn u () (et -
eiY6)
<.
If y -3 x then the function under the integral in the right hand side tends to 0 and is bounded by the integrable function 2 (u (C) 1. We conclude by the dominated convergence theorem that the integral tends to 0 and, hence, the function u has a continuous version, given by the right hand side of (6.15). It also follows from (6.14) and (6.15) that .
Sup IuI < CIIUIIWk Rn
Since this proves Claim 3 from the first proof, the rest follows in the same way.
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN Rn
156
THIRD PROOF. We will prove here a somewhat weaker version of The-
orem 6.1, when the hypothesis k > m + n/2 is replaced by the stronger condition k > m + 21, where l is the minimal integer that is greater than n/4. This version of Theorem 6.1 is sufficient for all our applications. The advantage of this proof is that it can be carried over to manifolds under a mild assumption that the heat kernel satisfies a certain upper estimate; besides, it can be enhanced to work also for the full range of k (cf. Exercises 7.43, 7.44, 7.46).
We start with the following claim. Recall that Pt is the heat semigroup defined in Section 2.7. CLAIM. If u E D (R'), k is a positive integer, and
f = (-A+ id)k u,
(6.16)
then, for any x E llgn, U (x) = / 0
00
tk-Ie-t (k _ 1)!Ptf (x) dt.
(6.17)
By Lemma 2.17, we have in [0, +oo) x Rn the identity
Ptf = Pt ((-A + id)k u) _ (-0 + id)k Ptu. Since Ptu satisfies the heat equation and, hence,
(-0 + id)k Ptu = (-at + id)k Ptu, we obtain
Pt f = (-at + id)k Ptu. Therefore, the right hand side of (6.17) is equal to 0o tk-le-t (k - 1)! (-at + id)k Ptu dt.
Integrating by parts in (6.18) and using the identity tk-2e-t
tk-le-t
(at + id) (k - 1)! which holds for any k > 2, we obtain tk-1e-t
0o
- (k - 2)!'
(-at + id) k Ptu dt
(k - 1)!
o
00
tk-1 e-t
(-at + id)'-' Ptu o tk-le-t (_at + id)k-1 Ptu dt (at + id)
[(k - 1)! 00
+ o 0o 0
(k - 1)! tk-2e-t
(k - 2)!
(-at + id) k-1 Ptu dt,
(6.18)
6.1. EMBEDDING THEOREMS
157
where the limits at 0 and oo vanish due to k > 1 and the boundedness of the function (-at + id)k-1 Ptu (x) in [0, +oo) x Rn (cf. Lemma 2.17). Hence, the integral in (6.18) reduces by induction to a similar integral with k = 1. Integrating by parts once again and using ((9t + id) e-t = 0 and Ptu -+ u as t --- 0 (cf. Theorem 1.3), we obtain co
which proves (6.17).
Let now 1 be the minimal integer that is greater than n/4, u E D (Rn) and
f = (-A+id)lu. It is easy to see that, by (1.22),
f pt (z) dz = pt * pt (0) = P2t (0) = (87rt)-n/2. Hence, for all x E Rn and t > 0, I Ptf (x) I
<
/n pt (x - y)dp)
1/2
1/2
( JJR' f 2(y)dy
CR
= (87ft)-n/4 If IIL2,
(6.19)
which together with (6.17) yields
fCo tet <(l-1)!IPtf(x)Idt< IfIIL2J
telu(x (l-1)R(87tt)-n/4dt.
The condition l > n/4 implies that the above integral converges, whence we obtain Iu(x)I < CIIfIIL2,
where the constant C depends only on n. Since f can be represented as a combination of the derivatives of u up to the order 21, it follows that suplul < CIIuhIw21
(6.20)
The proof is finished in the same way as the first proof after Claim 2.
Exercises. 6.1. Show that the delta function b in Rn belongs to
W-k
for any k > n/2.
E
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN Rn
158
6.1.2. Compact embedding Wo -a L2. Define the space Wo (t2) as the closure of Co (0) in W1 (0). Clearly, Wo (fl) is a Hilbert space with the same inner product as in W1 (Il). THEOREM 6.3. (Rellich compact embedding theorem) If Sl is a relatively compact open subset of Rn then the identical embedding Wo (S2)
`* L2 (1)
is a compact operator.
PROOF. Any function f E Wp (1) can be extended to W" by setting f = 0 outside Q. Clearly, f E L2 fl L1 (R'). Moreover, f E W' (Rn) because f is the limit in W1 (1) of a sequence {cpk} C Co (11), and this sequence
converges also in W1 (Rn) Let { fk} be a bounded sequence in Wo (Il). Extending fk to R as above, we can assume that also fk c W' (R n). Since { fk} is bounded in L2 (Rn), there exists a subsequence, denoted again by { fk}, which converges weakly in L2 (Wi) to a function f c L2 (Rn). Let us show that, in fact, { fk} converges to f in L2 (S2)-norm, which will settle the claim.
Let us use the heat semigroup Pt as in the third proof of Theorem 6.1. For any t > 0, we have by the triangle inequality 1lfk-fIIL2(G) <_
IIfk-PtfkIIL2(n)+IjPtfk-PtfIIL2(Rn)+IIPtf-fIIL2(Rn).
(6.21)
Let C be a constant that bounds (Ifkllwl for all k. Then Lemma 2.20 yields
IIfk -PtfkllL2(an)'5 Vt
IIfklIwi(aan)
< C/.
(6.22)
Since { fk} converges to f weakly in L2 (JR'2) as k -+ oo, we obtain that, for all x E Rn,
Ptfk(x) = (fk,Pt (x On the other hand, by (6.19) sup I Ptfkl
))L2 4 (f,pt (x - .))L2 = Ptf (x)
(81rt)
IIfkjIL2(Rn) < C
(8irt)-ni4.
Hence, for any fixed t > 0, the sequence {Pt fk} is bounded in sup-norm and converges to Ptf pointwise in R'. Since p (Q) < oc, the dominated convergence theorem yields II Ptfk - Ptf IIL2(G) -* 0 as k -* oo.
(6.23)
From (6.21), (6.22), and (6.23), we obtain that, for any t > 0, lim sup I I .fk - .f I I L2 (Q) k-+oo
< C/ + II Pt f - .f I I L2 (Rn) .
The proof is finished by letting t -* 0 because II Ptf - f Lemma 2.18.
IIL2(an)
-4 0 by
6.2. TWO TECHNICAL LEMMAS
159
Exercises. 6.2. The purpose of this problem is to give an alternative proof of Theorem 6.3 by means of the Fourier transform. Let 0 be a bounded open set in R'. Recall that Wo (S2) can be considered as a subspace of Wl (R') by extending functions by 0 outside 0.
(a) Prove that, for all f E Wof(8f)9dx (fl) and g E C' (R'),
=-f faigdx.
(6.24)
= (1 + ISI2) j() ,
(6.25)
a (b) Prove that, for any f E Wo (0) and for any e E R', (f, ez£x)
W1(,)
where f is the Fourier transform of f. (c) Let { fk} be a sequence from Wo (S2) such that fk converges weakly in W' (R') to a function f E W' (Wi). Prove that fk () -i f (k), for any e E R8 . Prove that also fk
fin L2
(II8 i).
(d) Finally, prove that if {fk} is a bounded sequence in Wo (0) then {fk} contains a subsequence that converges in L2 (S2). HINT. Use Exercises 2.28 and 2.34.
6.2. Two technical lemmas LEMMA 6.4. (Friedrichs-Poincare inequality) Let S2 be a bounded open set in R°. Then, for any cp E D (il) and any index j = 1, ..., n, f cp2dp < (diam. Q)2 fn (8
)2 dµ.
(6.26)
PROOF. Set l = diam Q. Consider first the case n = 1 when we can assume that f is the interval (0,1) (note that we can always expand 0 to an interval of the same diameter since a function co E D (Sl) can be extended to a function cp E D (R') by setting cp = 0 outside f2). Since cp (0) = 0, we have, for any x E (0, 1),
(fX P2
(x) = whence, integrating in x,
W' (s)
ds) < l
fl 0
2 (s) ds,
f t W2 (x) dx < l2 f0
J0
(V,) 2 (s) ds,
which is exactly (6.26) for the case n = 1. In the case n > 1, first apply the one-dimensional Friedrichs' inequality to the function cp (x) with respect to the variable xi considering all other variables frozen, and then integrate in all other variables, which yields (6.26). Recall that, for any mollifier cp, we denote by V, the function s-"W (x/E) (see Chapter 2).
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN R'
160
LEMMA 6.5. (Friedrichs lemma) Let 52 be an open set in R' and let a E Cc (S2). Consider the operator A in S2 defined by Au = a&j u,
for some j = 1, ..., n. Then, for any function u E L2 (S2) with compact support in Sl and for any mollifier cp in Rn, we have IIA (u * 7'E) -
1 1 L 2,
(0)
- 0 as e -3 0.
(6.27)
PROOF. Let S2o be the eo-neighborhood of supp u, where eo > 0 is so small that 52o C= Q. Let us extend u to a function in Rn by setting u = 0 outside supp u. Then the convolution u * cpe is defined as a smooth function
in R' and, if e < eo then u * 7'E is supported in Q. In turn, this implies that the expression A (u * cpe) defines a function from D (a). Similarly, Au is a distribution supported by supp u, and (Au) * cpE is a function from D (0). Let us show that, for e < eo, 11A (u * 7'E) - (Au) * We 11L2 < KIInIIL2,
(6.28)
K= sup IVal Cl+ f IxI IDjcpl dx)
(6.29)
where no
.
n
The point of the inequality (6.28) is that although the constant K depends on functions a, cp and on the set S2o, it is still independent of u and e. We have, for any x E 0,
A(u * cpE)(x) = a(aj(u * co))(x) = a(u *,9jco,)(x) a(x)u(y)ajcpe(x - y)dy
(6.30)
in and
(Au) * cpe(x) _ (Au, ( p
,,
- .))
_ (aju, - (u, aj
(x - y)dy
- f u (y) aj a (y),p, (x - y)dy.
(6.31)
Setting
AEu:=A(u*cog)-(Au)*cpa, we obtain from (6.30) and (6.31)
Aeu (x) = J (a(x) - a(y)) ajcye(x - y)u(y)dy + f aja(y)W,(x - y)u(y)dy.
(6.32)
6.2. TWO TECHNICAL LEMMAS
161
Note that the domains of integration in (6.32) can be restricted to y E supp u n B, (x). (6.33) If x 0 00 then the set (6.33) is empty and, hence, AEu(x) = 0. Therefore, A,u(x) zA 0 implies x E S2o. In this case, for any y is as in (6.33), we have x E BE (y) C SZo whence it follows that
la(x) - a(y)I < sup IVal lx - yi = C Ix - yl,
(6.34)
no
where C := supoo IVal (see Fig. 6.1).
B£(y)'
B£(x)
FIGURE 6.1. If y E supp unB, (x) then x E BE (y) C SZo and, hence, the straight line segment between x and y is contained in S2o, which implies (6.34).
Since also Iaja (y) I < C, we obtain from (6.32) IAeu(x)l
f
(Ix -
(x-y)+(PE(x-y) lu(y)I dy
fe (x -
y) I u(y) I dy,
where *E(x)
Ixl
Hence, for all x E Rn, we have
(x) + 0E(x).
Ef
IA,u(x)I cCIul*7PE(x),
which implies by rescaling the inequality (2.25) of Theorem 2.11 (see also Remark 2.12) that IIAEnIIL2 < c [f.n V),(x)dxl IlullL2.
Evaluating the integral of, by changing z = x/e, we obtain
(x)dx = 1 +
EX
J
II8
=
1+j n
IEzI
dz =1 +
f
IzJ
dz,
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN R
162
which gives II AEuII L2 < Kliu1lL2,
(6.35)
that is (6.28). Let us now prove (6.27), that is, IIAeuIIL2
0 as E-a 0.
If U E D (S2) then, by Lemma 2.10, u * Te
D u and, hence,
A(u*co.)-+Au. Applying Lemma 2.10 to Au, we obtain (Au) * co, - 4 Au, which together with the previous line implies AEu 0. For an arbitrary function u E L2 (1) with compact support, choose a sequence Uk E D (S2) such that Uk -> u in L2 (for example, take Uk = u * cp1/k - cf. Theorem 2.3) and observe that
AEu=Aeuk+Ae(u-uk). To estimate the second term here, we will apply (6.35) to the difference U - Uk. If k is large enough then supp (u - uk) is contained in a small neighborhood of supp u and, hence, the constant K from (6.29) can be chosen the same for all such k. Hence, we obtain IIAeuklIL2+KIIu-ukIIL2. (u-Uk)IIL2 -< Since J U - ukIIL2 -4 0 as k --* oo and, for any fixed k, I l Aeuk II L2 -4 0 as e -+ 0, we conclude that II Aeull L2 -+ 0, which was to be proved.
IIAEUIIL2 < IIAEukllL2+II I
6.3. Local elliptic regularity Fix an open set Sl C R and L be the following differential operator in 52:
L = ai (auj (x) Off)
,
where aia (x) are smooth functions in S2 such that the matrix (air (x))ij-1 is symmetric and positive definite, for any x E Q. Any such operator with a positive definite matrix (ai3) is referred to as an elliptic operator. The fact that the matrix (aij) is positive definite means that, for any point x E 0 there is a number c (x) > 0 such that azj (x) c (x) I 12 for any E R. (6.36) The number c (x) is called the ellipticity constant of operator L at x. Clearly, c (x) can be chosen to be a continuous function of x. This implies that, for
any compact set K C 0, c (x) is bounded below by a positive constant for all x E K, which is called the ellipticity constant of operator L in K.
6.3. LOCAL ELLIPTIC REGULARITY
163
The symmetry of the matrix a'3 implies that the operator L is symmetric
with respect to the Lebesgue measure p in the following sense: for any functions u, v E D (S2),
f Luvdp = - J a2j 8iu0,vdp
uLvdµ,
(6.37)
which follows immediately from the integration-by-parts formula or from the divergence theorem. The operator L is obviously defined on D' (f2) because all parts of the expression ai (a'jaj) are defined as operators in D' (cl) (see Section 2.4). For
alluED'(Sl) andcp E V (2), we have (Lu, c)
(ai (a2'aj u) , o)
_
- (C3, u, a'jaicp)
(aZ'aj u, aiy) (u, aj
that is, (Lu, co) _ (u, Lcp).
This identity can be also used as the definition of Lu for a distribution u.
6.3.1. Solutions from Li .. LEMMA 6.6. If a function u E L2 (fl) is compactly supported in Q and Lu E W-1 (0), then
L(u*YE)W 3Lu
(6.38)
PROOF. Consider the difference
L(u*CpE)-(Lu)*7E=5i(a'j aj (u*cpe)) -ai((a2j a, u) *YE) =aiff where
a23aj (u * y) - (a"jaj u) * cpE. As follows from Lemma 6.5, 11 fE II L2 -+ 0 as e --* 0 whence IIL (u * cpE) - (Lu) *
(pEIIW-i =
IIfEIIL2 --+0.
I(atifEIIW-i
Since by Theorem 2.16 (Lu) *
7o E
Lu,
we obtain (6.38).
LEMMA 6.7. (A priori estimate) For any open set S2' C f2 and for any u c D (S2'), IIulIWI < CIILuIIW-1
,
where the constant C depends on diam f2' and on the ellipticity constant of L in f2'.
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN
164
PROOF. Lemma 6.4 implies IIuIIWI -< CllouIIL2,
where C depends on diam S2'. Setting f = -Lu, we obtain by (6.37)
(f, u) = - fn (Lu) u dp =
faui(x)au5judi.
Let c > 0 be the ellipticity constant of L in 52' so that, for any x E S2', a23 (x) azu aju > c
I Vul2
.
Combining with the previous lines, we obtain
(f,u) > c ( IDuI2 dµ ? c IIuIIWI,
(6.39)
for some c' > 0. On the other hand, by the definition of the norm W-1, (f, u) <-
IIfIIW-1IIuUIW1,
which implies IIuIIWI < IIfIIW-1IIulIW1,
whence the claim follows.
LEMMA 6.8. For any integer m > -1, if u E Woo ' (I) and Lu E
Wio (Sl) then u E Wio+2 (a). Moreover, for all open subsets S2' C= P" C= 0, IIuiIWm+2(c') <- C (IluIIwm-+i(Q,) +
(6.40)
where C is a constant depending on f2', f2", L, m.
PROOF. The main difficulty lies in the proof of the inductive basis for m = -1, whereas the inductive step is straightforward. The inductive basis for m = -1. Assuming that u E L21,,,c (Sl) and Lu E Wio (S2), let us show that u E W1 (t) and that the following estimate holds:
Ilullwl(u,) < C (IIuhIL2(n/) +
(6.41)
Let 0 E D (S2") be a cutoff function of SZ' in 1" (see Theorem 2.2). Then the function v :=,Ou obviously belongs to L2 (S2") and supp v is a compact subset of a". We claim that Lv E W-1 (Q"). Indeed, observe that
Lv =Lu + 2azjai'baju + (LO) u,
(6.42)
and, by Lemma 2.14, the right hand side belongs to W-1 (Q") because Lu, aju, u belong to WW;,, whereas 0, aijaao, Lb belong to D (Il"). Let co be a mollifier in Rn. By Lemma 6.7, we have IIv * cEllwl < CIIL (v * cE) IIW-1,
whereas by Lemma 6.38 1
L (v * cpe) -+ Lv ass -* 0,
6.3. LOCAL ELLIPTIC REGULARITY
165
which implies that limsup llv * tpellwl < CllLvllw-1. C-40
By Theorem 2.13, we conclude that v E W1 (Q") and Cl
Since u = v on ft', we obtain that u E W1 (a') and Ilullw'(ci')
By varying the set fl' we conclude u E Wloc (Il). Finally, observing that by (6.42)
C
IiLullw-1(n,,))
and combining this with the two previous lines, we obtain (6.41).
The inductive step from m - 1 to m, where m > 0. For an arbitrary distribution u E V (Q), we have
al (Lu) - L (8lu) = alai (az3aju) - ai (aaja,alu) as [al (atija,u) - aajalaju] ai [(ala2?) aju] .
(6.43)
Assuming that u E Wlo +1 (5l) and Lu E Wi ,, (SZ) and noticing that the right hand side of (6.43) contains only first and second derivatives of u, we obtain
L (alu) = al (Lu) - ai [(ala2j) 9ju] E Wlo 1.
(6.44)
Since alu E WIT, we can apply the inductive hypothesis to alu, which yields alu E Wlo +1 and, hence, u E WI +2. Finally, we( see from (6.44) that IIL (alU) IIWm-1(n,,) <
CIIUIIWm+1(Q,,) + II Lull Wm(Q,,),
whence by the inductive hypothesis II aIUII Wm+1(52')
< C (II C (ll ull
+IIL (alu) IILuJI
which obviously implies (6.40).
THEOREM 6.9. For any integer m _> -1, if u E Ll (f) and Lu E Wl
(0) then u E Wlo +2 (1). Moreover, for all open subsets S2' C= Q" C= Sl, Ilullwm+2(ci') < C (IIuliL2(Q1') + II Lull
(6.45)
where C is a constant depending on SZ', 0", L, m.
Note the hypotheses of Theorem 6.9 are weaker than those of Lemma
6.8 - instead of the requirement u E Wlo+1, we assume here only u E Li c
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN Rn
166
PROOF. Let k be the largest integer between 0 and m + 2 such that u E W We need to show that k = m + 2. Indeed, if k < m + 1 then we have also Lu E W1o° 1, whence it follows by Lemma 6.8 that u E W10C 1, thus
contradicting the definition of k.
The estimate (6.45) is proved by improving inductively the estimate (6.40) of Lemma 6.8. For that, consider a decreasing sequence of open sets {52i}m 0 such that ci0 = a", S1m+2 = S2' and S2j+1 C= Q j. By Lemma 6.8, we
obtain, for any 1 < k < m + 2, IIUIIWk(ok)
< C (IIuIwk_1k_l) +
IILuIIWk-2(Q,_,)
< C (+ II LuII which obviously implies (6.45). COROLLARY 6.10. If u E Lloc (12) and Lu E W°, (S2) where
m>l+2-2. and l is a non-negative integer then u E Cl A. Consequently, if u E Li (52) and Lu E C°° (52) then also u c CO° (S2) . PROOF. Indeed, by Theorem 6.9 u e W1,O'+2 (S2) and, since m+2 > l+ 2 Theorem 6.1 implies u E Cd (S2). The second claim is obvious.
For applications on manifold, we need the following consequence of Theorem 6.9 for a bit more general operator L. COROLLARY 6.11. Consider in 52 the following operator
L=b(x)9i(a'j(x)aj), where a'j (x) and b (x) belong to C°° (S2), b (x) > 0, and the matrix (auk (x))Z -1 is symmetric and positive definite for all x E E2. Assume that, for some positive integer k,
u, Lu, ..., Lku E Li
C
(52)
.
(6.46)
Then u E Wi j, (S2) and, for all open sets 52' C= 52" C= S2, k
IIuIIW2k(Q-) <_ C E II L1uhI LZ(n ),
(6.47)
1=0
where C depends on S2', S2", L, k.
If m is a non-negative number and
k>2+4
(6.48)
then u E Cm (52) and (6.49)
IIu1Icm(c2,) < C 1=0
6.3. LOCAL ELLIPTIC REGULARITY
167
where C depends on S-t', Q//, L, k, m, n.
PROOF. Note that Theorem 6.9 applies to operator L as well because baz (aijaju) E Wl if and only if as (aajaju) E Wl ,, and the Wm (1')-norms of these functions are comparable for any f2' C= Q.
The inductive basis for k = 0 is trivial. Let us prove the inductive step from k - 1 to k assuming k _> 1. Applying the inductive hypothesis to function v = Lu, we obtain Lu E W277-2, whence u E W2k by Theorem 6.9. To prove (6.47) observe that by (6.40) IIulIW2k(n-) < C (IluhIL2*) +
IILu!Iw2k-2(n*))
,
where f2' C f2* C Il", and, by the inductive hypothesis, k-1 IILuIIw2k-2(n*) = IIV II W2k-2(Q*)
k
<_ C E II L1vil
II L`uII
t=1
1=o
whence (6.47) follows. Finally, u e W 12k (1) and 2k > m + n/2 imply by Theorem 6.1 that U E CM (cl). The estimate (6.49) follows from (6.2) and (6.47).
6.3.2. Solutions from V. Here we extend Lemma 6.8 and Theorem 6.9 to arbitrary negative orders m. We start with the solvability of the equation Lu = f (cf. Section 4.2). For an open set U C R', consider the space Wo.(U), which is the closure of D (U) in W1 (U). Clearly, Wo (U) is a Hilbert space with the same inner product as W1 (U). LEMMA 6.12. Let U C 1 be an open set. Then there exists a bounded
linear operator R : L2 (U) -4 Wo (U) such that, for any f E L2 (U), the function u = R f solves the equation Lu = f. The operator R is called the resolvent of L (cf. Section 4.2). PROOF. Denote by [u, v] a bilinear form in Wo (U) defined by
[u, v] := f8u3jv Let us show that [u, v] is, in fact, an inner product, whose norm is equivalent
to the standard norm in Wo (U). Indeed, using the ellipticity of L, the compactness of U, and Lemma 6.4, we obtain, for any /u E D (U),
[u, u] _ / azjatiu aju dµ > c f U
I VU 12 dE.t
> c' ( u2d/.c,
U
and
[u, u] < C
f
U
(6.50)
U
I Vui2 dµ,
and these estimates extend by continuity to any u E Wo (U). It follows that [u, u] is in a finite ratio with IIUIIWl =
f u2d,ct+f IVu12dµ, U
U
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN ]fin
168
and, hence, the space Wo (U) is a Hilbert space with the inner product The equation Lu = f is equivalent to the identity
fu
a"ajua;W dp=-(f,cp) for any
V(U),
(6.51)
which can be written in the form [u, cp] = - (f, cp) for all cp E Wo (U) .
(6.52)
(f, cc) is a bounded linear functional of cp in W0 (U), because, Note that cp using again (6.50), we have I(f,cc)I < IIfIIL2IIcIIL2 -< CIIfIIL2
[cp,cp]1/2.
(6.53)
Hence, by the Riesz representation theorem, (6.52) has a unique solution U E Wo (U), which allows to define the resolvent by lZf = u. The linearity R is obviously follows from the uniqueness of the solution. Using cp = u in (6.52) and (6.53) yields [u,u]
and, hence, [u, u]1/2 < CII f IIL2, which means that the resolvent R is a bounded operator from L2 (U) to Wo (U) . REMARK 6.13. If f E C°° n L2 (U) then, by Corollary 6.10, the function u = Rf also belongs to the class C°° n L2 (U). Let us mention for a future reference that R is a symmetric operator in
the sense that (R f, g) = (f, Rg) for all f, g E L2 (U)
.
(6.54)
Indeed, setting u = R f and v = Rg, we obtain from (6.52)
[u, v] = - (f, v) = - (f, Rg) and
[v,u] = - (g, U) _ - (g,Rf), whence (6.54) follows. Since Wo (U) is a subspace of L2 (U), we can consider
the resolvent as an operator from L2 (U) to L2 (U). Since U is relatively compact and, by Theorem 6.3, the embedding of Wo (U) into L2 (U) is a compact operator, we obtain that R, as an operator from L2 (U) to L2 (U), is a compact operator. LEMMA 6.14. For any m E Z, if u E Wio+1 (S2) and Lu E Wio (0) then u E Wio+2 (12)
PROOF. If m > -1 then this was proved in Lemma 6.8. Assume m <
-2 and set k = -m so that the statement becomes: if u E Wio
+1
and It suffices to prove that u E W-k+2 (12) for any V) E D (S2). Fix such and set v = bu. Clearly, V E W-k+1 (S2) and, as it follows from (6.42), Lv E W-k (12).
Lu E Waoc then u E
WI-k12.
6.3. LOCAL ELLIPTIC REGULARITY
169
Let U be a small neighborhood of supp v such that U C Q. We need to show that II V II W-k+2(U) < oo, and this will follow if we prove that, for any f E D (U), (v, f) < CII LvII w-k IIf
(6.55)
Ilwk-2.
By Lemma 6.12, for any f E D (U) there exists a function w e C°° fl L2 (U) solving the equation Lw = f in U and satisfying the estimate I1w1lL2(U) < CII f
(6.56)
IIL2(U).
Fix a function cp E D (U) such that cp - 1 in a neighborhood of supp 0. Then cpw E D (U) and
(v, f) _
(v, Lw) _ (v, L (pw)) _ (Lv, cpw) II Lvll w-k(U) II owII Wk(U) <- CII Lvll w-k(U) II W I I Wk(U-),
where U' C= U is a neighborhood of supp cp and the constant C depends only on V. By Theorem 6.9 and (6.56), we obtain IIwIIWk(U1) < C
(IwIiL2(u) +
IILwllwk-2(U)) < C'll f llwk-2(U),
whence (6.55) follows.
Finally, we have the following extension of Theorem 6.9.
THEOREM 6.15. For any m E Z, if u E D' (S2) and Lu E Wl u E Wia+2 (c)
(0) then
PROOF. Let us first show that, for any open set U C= 52 there exists a positive integer l such that u E W-1 (U). By Lemma 2.7, there exist constants N and C such that, for all cp E D (U), (u, cp) < C max sup I aacpl laj
It follows from Theorem 6.1 (more precisely, we use the estimate (6.10) from
the proof of that theorem) that the right hand side here is bounded above by const Ilcell W, (U) provided l > N + n/2. Hence, we obtain (u, cp) < C'II cPII wt(U),
which implies, by the definition of W-1,
Ilullw-1(u) < C' < 00 and U E
W_l
(U).
In particular, we have u c W10C (U). Let k be the maximal integer between -1 and m + 2 such that u E Wio, (U). If k < m + 1 then Lu E W o- 1 (U), which implies by Lemma 6.14 u E W o±1(U), thus contradicting the definition of k. We conclude that k = m + 2, that is, u E Wo +2 (U). It follows that u E WI" +2 (12), which was to be proved.
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN Rn
170
Exercises. 6.3. Prove that, for any open set SZ' C 0, for any m > -1, and for any u E D (S2'), HHuIIwm+2 < CjjLujjwm,
(6.57)
where a constant C depends on S'2', L, m. HINT. Use Lemma 6.7 for the inductive basis and prove the inductive step as in Lemma 6.8.
6.4. Consider a more general operator L = 8a (az' (x) 8;) + b3 (x) 8; + c (x) ,
(6.58)
where a43 is as before, and b' and c are smooth functions in Q. Prove that if u c D' (1) and Lu E WI (f) for some m E 7L then u E WZ +2 (St). Conclude that Lu E C°° implies UEC°°.
6.4. Local parabolic regularity 6.4.1. Anisotropic Sobolev spaces. Denote the Cartesian coordinates in Rn+1 by t, x1, ..., x'. Respectively, the first order partial derivatives
are denoted by at = at and a; = a; for j > 1. For any (n + 1)-dimensional multiindex a = (ao, the partial derivative a« is defined by
as
= (at)a°
(ax1)at
...
(axn)an -
at jai l...an".
Alongside the order Jul of the multiindex, consider its weighted order [a], defined by
[a] := 2ao + al + ... + an. This definition reflect the fact that, in the theory of parabolic equations, the
time derivative at has the same weight as any spatial derivative a; of the second order.
Fix an open set 1 C
The spaces of test functions D (1) and distributions D' (1) are defined in the same way as before. Our purpose is to introduce anisotropic (parabolic) Sobolev spaces Vk (f2) which reflect different weighting of time and space directions. For any non-negative integer k, set II8n+1.
Vk (fl) = {u c L2 (f2) : a«u E L2 (f2) for all a with [a] < k} ,
and the norm in Vk is defined by 11a«u11L2. [a]
Obviously, Vo - L2, whereas
V1(0)={uEL2(1):a,uEL2(f) Vj=1,...,n} and
V2 (c) _ {u E L2 (f2) : atu, aju, aia3u E L2 (f2) Vi, j = 1, ..., n}
.
(6.59)
6.4. LOCAL PARABOLIC REGULARITY
171
Most facts about the spaces Vk are similar to those of Wk. Let us
Vk-[a
point out some distinctions between these spaces. For simplicity, we write Vk - Vk (Q) unless otherwise stated. CLAIM.(a) If U E Vk and [a] < k then a'u E If aau E Vk for all a with [a] _< 1 and one of the numbers k, l is even then u E Vk+t PROOF. (a) Let Q be a multiindex with [,Ci] < k - [a]. Then [a + /3] < k and hence as+Qu E L2. Therefore, & (aau) E L2, which means that aau c V k- [al
(b) It is not difficult to verify that if one of the numbers k, l is even, then any multiindex /3 with [/3] < k + l can be presented in the form 0 = a + a' where [a] < l and [a'] < k. Hence, aQu = aa' (aau) E Vk-[a'I C L2, whence the claim follows.
It follows from part (a) of the above Claim that if u E Vk then aau E Vk-1 and atu E Vk-2 (provided k > 2). We will use below only the case l = 2 of part (b). Note that if both k, l are odd then the claim of part (b) is not true. For example, if k = 1 = 1 then the condition that aau E V1 for all a with [a] < 1 means that the spatial derivatives aju are in V'. This implies that 8iu, 8iaju are in L2. However, to prove that u E V2 we need to know that also Btu E L2, which cannot be derived from the hypotheses. For any positive integer k and a distribution u E D( Q), set IIuIIv-k :=
sup
(u' `p)
(6.60)
cOED(S2)\{o} IIOIIvk
The space V -k (11) is defined by V-k (St)
{u E D' (0) :
II
Iv-k < 0-0} .
Obviously, for all u E V-k (Q) and cp c D (0), we have I(u,(P)J < IIUIIv-k(n)IIcIIvk(c).
The local Sobolev spaces Voc (i) are defined similarly to Wo' A.
The statements of Lemma 2.14 and Theorems 2.13, 2.16 remain true for the spaces Vk, and the proofs are the same, so we do not repeat them. Observing that V2 (SZ) W oc (52) and applying Theorem 6.1, we obtain
that
provided k and m are non-negative integers such that k > m + n/2. Consequently, we have
V,(0)=CO°A.
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN Rn
172
6.4.2. Solutions from Ll Fix an open set 52 C Rn+1 and consider in Q the differential operator
P = p (x) at - az (air (x) a;)
(6.61)
where p and aij are smooth functions depending only on x = (x', ..., xn) (but not on t), p (x) > 0, and the matrix (a2j )i =1 is symmetric and positive definite. The operator P with such properties belongs to the class of parabolic operators. The results of this section remain true if the coefficients
air and p depend also on t but the proofs are simpler if they do not, and this is sufficient for our applications. Setting as in Section 6.3 L = a? (a'2 (x) aj)
,
we can write
P=pat - L. The operator P is defined not only on smooth functions in S2 but also on distributions from D' (1) because all terms on the right hand side of (6.61) are defined as operators in D' (0). For all u E D' (S2) and po E D (0), we have
(Pu, p) = (pate, co) - (Lu, W) whence it follows that .
(u, patco) - (u, Lip)
(Pu, cc) _ (u, P* c0)
,
(6.62)
where
P*= -pat - L is the dual operator to P. The identity (6.62) can be also used as the definition of P on D' (S2). We start with an analog of Lemma 6.7
LEMMA 6.16. (1st a priori estimate) For any open set 12' C= S2 and for any u c D (S2'), IIuIIvi << CIIPuIIv-1,
where the constant C depends on diam S2' and on the ellipticity constant of
Lin52'. PROOF. Setting ff = Pu and multiplying this equation by u, we obtain u f dp = J/c
J fn
pu atu d1i - J uLu dp, c
where dµ = dtdx is the Lebesgue measure in Il8n+1. Since
puatu = 1Ot(pu2) ,
after integrating the function puatu in dt we obtain 0. Hence,
fpuatud= 0.
6.4. LOCAL PARABOLIC REGULARITY
173
Applying the same argument as in the proof Lemma 6.7 (cf. (6.39)), we obtain,
-J uLudµ > cllullvl(Q)
(6.63)
where the constant c > 0 depends on the ellipticity constant of L in S2' and on diam S2'. Since
- f uLudp=
f
ufdµ= (f, u) -< Ilflly-lllullvl
we obtain cllullvi < Ilflly-=Ilullvi, whence the claim follows.
LEMMA 6.17. (2nd a priori estimate) For any open set 52' C= c and for any u E D (SZ'), Ilolly2 < CIIPuIIL2,
(6.64)
where the constant C depends on S2', P.
PROOF. If follows from (6.59) that we have to estimate the L2-norm of
atu as well as that of & u and aza;u. Setting f = Pu and multiplying this equation by atu, we obtain
fatufdp = fp(atu)2d_f3tuLud.
(6.65)
Since at and L commute, we obtain, using integration by parts and (6.37),
f atu Lu dµ = - f u at (Lu) dµ = - f u L(atu) dlt = - f
Lu atu dµ,
whence it follows that
fn atuLudµ=0. Since p (x) is bounded on S2' by a positive constant, say c, we obtain
in
P ((gto)2 d t > cll atoll L2.
Finally, applying the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality to the left hand side of (6.65), we obtain Ilatul1L2(-)IIfIIL2(c) >- CIlatoliL2(Q),
whence IlatuliL2(c) <- CIIfIIL2(c).
(6.66)
To estimate the spatial derivatives, observe that the identity f = patu - Lu implies
IILuI1L2(O) <- IIfiIL2(c +CliatullL2(o) <- C'IIfIIL2(-).
(6.67)
Let Q and Q' be the projections of S2 and S2', respectively, onto the subspace Il8n C Rn+1 spanned by the coordinates x1, ..., xn. Obviously, the operator L can be considered as an elliptic operator in Q. Since Q' C= Q and u (t, ) E
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN Rn
174
D (Q') for any fixed t, the estimate (6.57) of Exercise 6.3 yields, for any fixed t, IIuIIw2(Q) < CII Lu11 L2(Q)
(a somewhat weaker estimate follows also from Theorem 6.9). Integrating this in time and using (6.67), we obtain that the L2 (Q)-norms of the derivatives 9 u and 8i8ju are bounded by Of IIL2(s) Combining with (6.66), we obtain (6.64).
LEMMA 6.18. If u E Li o (SZ) and Pu E V o (S2) then u E V oC (52)
.
Moreover, for all open subsets S2' C 52" C= S2, (6.68)
Ilullvl(n1) < C (IIuIIL2(9211) +
where C is a constant depending on Q, S2", P. PROOF. Let O E D (S2") be a cutoff function of 52' in S2", and let us prove
that the function v = bu belongs to V' (52"), which will imply u E Vol A. Clearly, v E L2 (52") and supp v is a compact subset of W. Next, we have
P (0u) _ %Pu - 2a%8iDiu + (P) u
(6.69)
(cf. (6.42)), whence it follows that Pv E V-1 (S2") and
C
IIPuIIV-1(c )) ,
(6.70)
where C depends on S2', 52", P. Fix a mollifier co in R'+1 and observe that, for small enough E > 0, v * co belongs to D (52"). By Lemma 6.16, we have liv * WEIIvi < CIIP (v * (0 llv-1,
where the constant C depends on S2" and P. Let us show that IIP (v * co) - (Pv) * cp,Ily-1 -* 0 as E -- 0. By Lemma 6.5, we have ll pat (v * 0,) - (Pate) *
(6.71)
(6.72)
(6.73)
As in the proof of Lemma 6.6, we have L (v * cpe) - (Lv) * c
= 8i ff
where
fe := a",9 (v * cp.) - (aijajv) * cpE. By Lemma 6.5,
11 Ri I
I L2 - 3 0 whence
II L (v * WE) - (Lv) * WEII v-1 = II aifftI v-1
WIL2 -* 0.
(6.74)
Combining (6.73) and (6.74), we obtain (6.72).
By extension of Theorem 2.16 to the spaces V-k, the condition Pv E V-1 (52") implies (Pv) * cp6
Pv,
6.4. LOCAL PARABOLIC REGULARITY
175
which together with (6.72) yields
(v*cM--4 Pv ase -+ 0.
(6.75)
It follows from (6.71) and (6.75) that limsup Ilv * 0'Ilvl < CII Pvll v-I. e--r0
By extension of Theorem 2.13 to Vk, we conclude that v c V1 (S2") and llvllv1(s2") < CII'Pvlly-1(a ).
Combining this estimate with (6.70) and Ilulivl(cl,) = llvilv1(Q,), we obtain (6.68).
El
LEMMA 6.19. If u E V1', (52) and Pu E Li (S2) then u E V2, (S2). Moreover, for all open subsets S2' C 12" C= 52, (6.76)
IIUIlV2(Q,) < C
where C is a constant depending on S2', S2", P. PROOF. Let z/b E D (S2") be a cutoff function of a in S2", and let us prove that the function v = -%u belongs to V2 (S2"), which will imply u E VoC (S2).
It follows from (6.69) that Pv E L2 (0") and C
II PvII
NPuiI L2(c,-))
,
(6.77)
where C depends on 52', 0", P. Function v belongs to V1 (12") and has a compact support in W. For any mollifier cp in Rn+1 and a small enough e > 0, we have v * D (S2"). By Lemma 6.17, we obtain
cpe E
(6.78)
liv*coSIIV2
where C depends on S2", P. Let us show that ---+
(6.79)
For that, represent the operator P in the form P = -a2jaza1 - bias + p5t, where bj = alai?. The part of the estimate (6.79) corresponding to the first order terms bjaj and pat, follows from Lemma 6.5 because v E L2 (S2). Next, applying Lemma 6.5 to function acv, which is also in L2 (S2), we obtain Ila"a2 (acv * cps) - (aijaza,v) * cPEII L2 _4 0,
whence (6.79) follows. Since Pv E L2, we have by Theorem 2.11 (Pv) * cpE
Pv
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN R"
176
which together with (6.79) yields L2 P(v*co)-*Pv ase-+0.
Combining with (6.78), we obtain Jim SUP IIv * E-O
EIIv2 <
CIIPvIIL2.
Therefore, by extension of Theorem 2.13 to Vk, we conclude that v E V2 (S2") and
Combining this with (6.77) and Ilullv2(s') = Ilvllv2(12'), we obtain (6.76).
LEMMA 6.20. For any integer m > -1, if u E Va +1 (52) and Pu c Vo (12) then u E Vo +2 (12). Moreover, for all open subsets S2' C 12" C= 12, (6.80)
IluliVm+2(Q,) < C (Ilullv-+1(Q") +
where the constant C depends on S2', 0", P, m.
PROOF. The case m = -1 coincides with Lemma 6.18, and the case m = 0 coincides with Lemma 6.19. Let us prove the inductive step from m - 2 and m - 1 to m, assuming m > 1. To show that u E Vo+2, it suffices to verify that
atu, a,u, aia,u E Vo
.
Since atu E Vj-1 and 10C P (atu) = atPr E V,-2.
(6.81)
the inductive hypothesis yields atu E V m . It follows from (6.43) that
al (Pu) - P ((9au) _ (alp) atu - ai [(ala2j) aju]
,
(6.82)
which implies V--1.
P (alu) E Since alu C V the inductive hypothesis yields alv E V0C+1 Consequently, all the second0corder derivatives aiajv are in Vo , which was to be proved. Let us now prove (6.80). It follows from (6.81) and the inductive hypothesis for m - 2 that I1atU11vm(Q1)
117' (atu)
C
IlPullVm(si")) .
(6.83)
it follows from (6.82) that
C IT (alu) whence, by the inductive hypothesis for m - 1, Ilalull vm+1(c')
IlPullVm(Q )) ,
< C (II alulivm(Q") + IIP (alu)
C
(6.84)
6.4. LOCAL PARABOLIC REGULARITY
177
Combining (6.83) and (6.84) yields (6.80).
THEOREM 6.21. For any integer m > -1, if u E Li (S2) and Pu E C
Vo (52) then u E Vo+2 (a) Moreover, for all open subsets Q' C= Q" C= S2, IIuIIVm+2(o1)
(6.85)
<- C
where C depends on SZ', Sl", P, M.
PROOF. Let k be the largest number between 0 and m + 2 such that u E V0C (Q). If k < m + 1 then we have Pu E VoC 1, which implies by Lemma 6.20 that u E 10C 1, thus contradicting the definition of k. Hence, k = m + 2 and u E Vo +2 which was to be proved. To prove the estimate (6.85), consider a decreasing sequence of open sets {Sli} o2 such that Slo = Sl", 1m+2 = Q' and S1j+1 C SZi. By Lemma 6.20, we obtain, for any 1 < k < m + 2, IuIIVk(ok)
(IIuIIvk-1(Ok_l) +
IIPuIIVk-2(Qk_1))
(Iluvk_1(kl) +
which obviously implies (6.85).
(i) If U E L 10C (S2) and Pu = f where f E
COROLLARY 6.22.
C°° (Q) then also u E C°° (Q). (ii) Let {uk} be a sequence of smooth functions in S2, each satisfying
the equation Puk = f where f c C' (S2). If uk u c L210° (il) then Pu = 0, u E C°° (SZ), and uk
L2
u where
u.
PROOF. (i) Since Pu E V o (c) for any positive integer m, Theorem 6.21 yields that also u E Vo (Sl) for any m. Therefore, u E Wlo (Q) for any m and, by Theorem 6.1, we conclude u E C°° (52).
(ii) Let us first show that u satisfies the equation Pu = f in the distributional sense, that is, for all cp E D (sl) ,
(u, P*(p)
(6.86)
where P* _ -pat - L is the dual operator (cf. (6.62)). Indeed, Puk = f implies that (uk,
(f, c )
whence (6.86) follows by letting k -+ co. By part (i), we conclude that UGCOOA. Setting Vk = u - uk, noticing that Pvk = 0, and applying to vk the estimate (6.85), we obtain, for all open subsets Sl' C= S2" C i and for any positive integer m, IIVkIIVm(c1) < CllvkI L2(Q1/),
Since vk -- 0 in L2 (S2"), we obtain that vk --+ 0 in Vm (SZ').
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN Rn
178
Hence, Vk - 0 in Vr (0) for any m, which implies that also vk - 0 in Wzo (1) for any m and, by the estimate (6.2) of Theorem 6.1, Vk -+ 0 in C°° (fl), which was to be proved. 11
Exercises. 6.5. Let S2' C 52 be open sets and m > -1 be an integer. (a) Prove that, for any u E V (SZ'), Ilullvm+2(sa) S Cl)PuIIvm(sa),
(6.87)
where a constant C depends on £T, P, m. (b) Using part (a), prove that, for any u E C°° (1), Iku11vm+2(ca') < C (JIUJIL2(sa) + IIPUIIVm(o)) .
(6.88)
REMARK. The estimate (6.88) was proved in Theorem 6.21. In the case u E C°°, it is easier to deduce it from (6.87).
6.4.3. Solutions from D. We start with a parabolic analogue of Lemma 6.12.
LEMMA 6.23. Let U C- SZ be an open set of the form U = (0, T) x Q where T > 0 and Q is an open set in Rn. Then, for any f E L2 (U), there exists a function u E L2 (U) solving the equation Pu = f and satisfying the estimate IIUIIL2(U) < T II f/PII L2(u).
(6.89)
REMARK 6.24. As it follows from Corollary 6.22, if f c CO° n L2 (U) then the solution u also belongs to C°° f1 L2 (U). PROOF. By Lemma 6.12 and Remark 6.13, the resolvent R of the equation Lu = f is a compact self-adjoint operator in L2 (Q). The multiplication operator by the coefficient p (x) is a bounded self-adjoint operator in L2 (Q). Therefore, Rop is a compact self-adjoint operator in L2 (Q). By the HilbertSchmidt theorem, there exists an orthonormal basis {Vk} in L2 (Q), which consists of the eigenfunctions of the operator R op. Since 1Z (pv) = 0 implies pv = LO = 0 and, hence, v = 0, zero is not an eigenvalue of R op. Therefore, each Vk is also an eigenfunction of the inverse operator p-1L, and let the corresponding eigenvalue be .Xk, that is, Lvk = akPvk. (6.90) Since ran R is contained in W0 (Q), we have vk E Wo (Q). Using the identity (6.51) with u = cp = Vk and f = .Akpvk, we obtain
I aijaavk ajvk dx = -\k J
JU
pvk dx,
U
whence it follows that .Ak < 0.
Given f E D (U), expand function f /p in the basis {vk}: f (t, x) f,k (t) vk (x) P (x)
L-'
6.4. LOCAL PARABOLIC REGULARITY
179
where fk (t) = (f (t, ) /p, vk), and set Uk
(t) =
Jt
e-Aksfk (s) ds.
(6.91)
We claim that the function u (t, x)
Aktuk (t) Vk (x)
(6.92)
k
belongs to L2 (U) and solves the equation Pu = f. Indeed, since Ak G 0 and
= I t eak(t-s)fk (s) ds,
eaktuk (t)
0
we see that, for any t E (0,T), e,\ktuk
f
(t)
0
T
Ifk (s) I ds,
whence by the Parseval identity z
1: eAktuk (t)
T
<
k
Tf
k
I
(s)12
ds
fT
=TJ
IIf (s,) Ili2(Q)ds = TII f/pll L2(U).
Therefore, the series (6.92) converges in L2 (Q) and, for any t E (0,T), Ilu (t,')
2
112
< TIIf/p11L2(U)'
Integrating in t, we obtain u E L2 (U) and the estimate (6.89). The same argument shows that the series (6.92) converges in L2 (U). Using (6.90) and (6.91) we obtain
P (etuv) = peAkt (atUk) Vk + pAkeAktukvk - eAktukLvk = pfkvk Using the convergence of the series (6.92) in D' (U), we obtain
Pu = E pfkvk = f, k
which finishes the proof.
In the proof of the next statement, we will use the operator
P* :_ -pat - L, which is dual to P in the following sense: for any distribution u e D' (0) and a test function cp E D (a), (Pu, co) = (u, P*(P) (cf. Section 6.4.2). Let T be the operator of changing the time direction, that is, for a test function cp E D (52),
Tcp (t, x) = cp (-t, x)
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN 1Rn
180
and, for a distribution u E D' (a), (Tu, co) _ (u, Tco) for all co E D ('re)
.
Clearly, we have P* = P o T. Using this relation, many properties of the operator P* can be derived from those for P. In particular, one easily verifies that Theorem 6.21 and Lemma 6.23 are valid3 also for the operator P*.
THEOREM 6.25. For any m E Z, if u c D' (1) and Pu E V a (S2) then u E Vo+2 (c).
PROOF. As in the proof of Theorem 6.21, let us first show that u E Vo +' (Q) and Pu E Vo (1k) imply u E Vo +2 (S2). For m > -1, this was proved in Theorem 6.21, so assume k := -m > 2. It suffices to prove that ou E V-k+2 (S2) for any z/ E D (11) with sufficiently small support. Fix a cylindrical open set U C= S2, a function 0 E D (U), and set v = bu. It follows from the hypotheses that V E V-k+l (0) and Pv (z- V-k (S2) (cf. (6.69)).
We need to show that IIvIIv-k+2(u) < oo, and this will be done if we prove that, for any f E D (U), (v, f) < CIIPvIIv-k
IfIIVk-2.
(6.93)
By Lemma 6.23, for any f E D (U), there exists a function w E C°° n L2 (U) solving the equation P*w = f in U and satisfying the estimate IIWIIL2(U) < CII f IIL2(U).
(6.94)
Fix a function co E D (U) such that co - 1 in a neighborhood of supp 0. Then cow E D (U) and
(v, f) _
(v, P*w) = (v, P* (cow)) _ ('PV' WW) IIPvIIv-k(U)lcowllvk(U) <-CIIPvIIv-k(U)IIWIIvk(U/),
where U' C U is a neighborhood of supp co and the constant C depends only on co. Using the estimate (6.85) of Theorem 6.21 (or the estimate (6.88) of Exercise 6.5) and (6.94), we obtain Ilwllvk(U) < c (IIwIL2u) + IIP*WI!vk-2(U)) <- C'IIfIlvk-2(U), whence (6.93) follows.
Assume now that u E D' (12) and Pu E V c (1), and prove that u E V e+2 (fl). As was shown in the proof of Theorem 6.15, for any open set U C 0 there exists l > 0 such that u E W-1 (U). Since II 11W, < II - IIv21 and, hence, II Ilv-21 < II II w-c, this implies u E V-21 (U). Let k < m + 2 be the maximal integer such that u E Vk' (U). If k < m + 1 then Pu E Joe 1(U) .
-
whence by the first part of the proof u E V o 1 (U) . Hence, k = m + 2, which was to be proved. 3Let us emphasize that the solvability result of Lemma 6.23 is not sensitive to the time direction because we do not impose the initial data.
NOTES
181
Combining Theorems 6.25 and 6.1, we obtain the following statement that extends the result of Corollary 6.22(i) from Li to D` (1k) . COROLLARY 6.26. If u E V' (ft) and Pu E C' (S2) then u E C' (0).
Exercises. 6.6. Consider a more general parabolic operator
P=p8t-82(ai,(s)88)-b3(x)8g-c(x), where a'j and p are as before, and bi and c are smooth functions in f2. Prove that if u e D' (f2) and Pu E VC (fl) for some m E Z then u E Vo +2 (0). Conclude that Pu E C°° (f2) implies u E C°° (cl).
Notes All the material of this chapter is classical although the presentation has some novelties. The theory of distributions was created by L. Schwartz [327]. The Sobolev spaces were introduced by S. L. Sobolev in [328], where he also proved the Sobolev embedding theorem. We have presented in Section 6.1.1 only a part of this theorem. The full state2n ment includes the claim that if k < n/2 then W o°y L° 2k , and similar results hold for the spaces Wk'' based on LP. The modern proofs of the Sobolev embedding theorem can be found in [118], [130]; see also [1] and [269] for further results. One of the first historical result in the regularity theory (in the present sense) is due to H. Weyl [357], who proved that any distribution u E D' solving the equation Au = f
is a smooth function provided f E C°° (Weyl's lemma). This and similar results for the elliptic operators with constant coefficient can be verified by means of the Fourier transform (see [309]). The regularity theorem for elliptic operators with smooth variable coefficients was proved by K. O. Friedrichs [123], who introduced for that the techniques of mollifiers in [122]. Alternative approaches were developed concurrently by P. D. Lax [245] and L. Nirenberg [293], [294]. Nowadays various approaches are available for the regularity theory. The one we present here makes a strong use of the symmetry of the operator (via the Green formula) and of the mollifiers. The proofs of the Friedrichs lemma (Lemma 6.4) and the key Lemmas 6.7, 6.8 were taken from [208]. The reader may notice that Lemma 6.4 is the only technical part of the proof. Other frequently used devices include elementary estimates of the commutators of the differential operators with the operators of convolution and multiplication by a function. The parabolic regularity theory as presented here follows closely its elliptic counterpart, with the Sobolev spaces Wk being replaced by their anisotropic version.
Different accounts of the regularity theory can be found in [118], [121], [130], [241],
[241], [273], [308], although in the most sources the theory is restricted to solutions from L1 ° or even from W11.° as opposed to those from V. A far reaching extension and unification of the elliptic and parabolic regularity theories was achieved in L. Hormander's theory of hypoelliptic operators [208] (see also [297], [348]). Another branch of the regularity theory goes in the direction of reducing the smoothness of the coefficients - this theory is covered in [130], [118], [242], [241]. If the coefficients are just measurable functions then all that one can hope for is the Holder continuity of the solutions. The fundamental results in this direction were obtained by E. De Giorgi [103] for the elliptic case and by J. Nash [292] for the parabolic case. For the operators in non-divergence form, the Holder regularity of solutions was proved by N. Krylov and
182
6. REGULARITY THEORY IN Rn
M. Safonov [236], partly based on the work of E. M. Landis [243]. See [130] and [230] for a detailed account of these results.
CHAPTER 7
The heat kernel on a manifold This is a central Chapter of the book, where we prove the existence of the heat kernel and its general properties. From Chapter 6, we use Corollaries 6.11, 6.22, and 6.26.
7.1. Local regularity issues Let (M, g, µ) be a weighted manifold. The only Sobolev space on M we have considered so far was Wr (M). In general, the higher order Sobolev spaces Wk cannot be defined in the same way as in 1R' because the partial derivatives of higher order are not well-defined on M. Using the Laplace operator, we still can define the spaces of even orders as follows. For any non-negative integer k, set W2k (M) = Wax
(M, g, t1) _ {'u : u, A ,u, ..., 0µu E L2 (M) }
and k
11AI U112
Ilullw2k =
(7.1)
L2.
1=0
It is easy to check that W2k (M) with the norm (7.1) is a Hilbert spacer. Define the local Sobolev space Wi k (M) by Wi C (M) _ {u : u, OP u, ..., 0µu E LiC (M)}
.
Equivalently, u E W o, (M) if u E W2k (f2) for any open set Q C= M. The topology in W oc (M) is determined by the family of seminorms IIuIIw2k(a). The following theorem is a consequence of the elliptic regularity theory of Section 6.3.1. THEOREM 7.1. Let (M, g, µ) be a weighted manifold of dimension n, and let u' be a function from )/Vi c (M) for some positive integer k. 'By considering in addition the gradient of 0µu, one could define W2k+1 (M) similarly to W1 (M), but we have no need in such space (cf. Exercise 7.1). The reader should be warned that if M is an open subset of R then W2k (0) need not match the Euclidean Sobolev space W2k (Q), although these two spaces do coincide if M = R' (cf. Exercise 2.33(d)). 183
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
184
(i) If k > n/4 then u E C (M). Moreover, for any relatively compact
open set 52 C M and any set K C 12, there is a constant C = C(K, 52, g, y, k, n) such that (7.2)
sup Jul < CIIujIw2k(Q). K
(ii) If k > m/2 + n/4 where m is a positive integer then u E Cm (M). Moreover, for any relatively compact chart U C M and any set K C= U, there is a constant C = C(K, U, g, p, k, n, m) such that II uIl C"(x) <_
CIIUIIw2k(U).
(7.3)
PROOF. Let U be a chart with coordinates x1, ..., xn, and let A be the Lebesgue measure in U. Recall that by (3.21) dp = p (x) dA, where p = T det g and T is the density function of measure I.L. Considering U as a part of Rn, define in U the following operator L = P-10i (Pg2'8j) .
(7.4)
Lcp = Dµco for all co E D (U) .
(7.5)
By (3.45), we have
Now let us consider the operators L and A. in D' (U). Since we will apply the results of Chapter 6 to the operator L, we need to treat it as an operator in a domain of Rn. Hence, we define L on D' (U) using the definitions of 8ti and the multiplication by a function in D' (U) given in Section 2.4 (cf. Section 6.3).
However, we treat Dµ as an operator on M, and Dµ extends to D' (U) by means of the identity (4.3). Then L and A. are not necessarily equal as operators on D' (U) because their definitions as operators in D' (U) depend on the reference measures, which in the case of Dµ is g and in the case of L is A. Indeed, for any u E D' (U) and co E D (U), we have (p-'az(Pg''8j),W) = (8z(Pg2'8;),p-1W)
- (pgiiaj, ai(P-1S°)) _ (u, aj(Pgziai (P-1cP))) (u, PL (P-1W))
(7.6)
whereas
Aµu, 0) = (u, A/M
(7.7)
Obviously, we have in general Lu A.U. Nevertheless, when the distributions ON,u and Lu are identified with L210C (or L oc) functions, the reference measures are used again and cancel, which leads back to the equality Lu = Aµu. More precisely, the following it true2.
CLAIM. If u c Llo (U) and 0µu E Liar (U) then Lu = 0µu in U. 2Compare this to Exercise 4.11, where a similar identity is proved for the weak gradient.
7.1. LOCAL REGULARITY ISSUES
185
As follows from (7.6), if u E L2 , (U) then, for any cp E D (U)
(Lu, gyp) = fuPL
(p)
dA.
To prove the claim it suffices to show that
fu Aµu dA
= fu u p L
(p-1W) dA.
Since both u and O,Lu are in Ll (M), the identity (7.7) becomes
fudkt = fud.
Using this identity and (7.5), we obtain
f uL(p 1c )pdA,
JLucoda= f.pu (p lip) dµ = f u Ap(p U
U
U
U
which was to be proved. The hypothesis u E 11V1 10k
and the above claim imply that, in any
chart U,
u, Lu, ..., Lku E L
C
(U)
.
If k > m/2 + n/4 then we conclude by Corollary 6.11 that u E C"2 (U) and, hence, u c C72 (M). The estimate (7.3) follows immediately from the estimate (6.49) of Corollary 6.11 and the definition (7.1) of the norm Ilullw2k. To prove (7.2) observe that there exist two finite families {Uz} and {Uz} of relatively compact charts such that K is covered by the charts U and V C Uj C= Q (cf. Lemma 3.4). Applying the estimate (6.49) of Corollary 6.11 in each chart UZ for the operator L = AA and replacing L2 (Ui, A)-norm by L2 (U2 , µ)-norm (which are comparable), we obtain sup Jul < C Vi
IlA' UllL2(Ui,),) < C' i IloullL2(c2,,) 1=0
1=0
Finally, taking maximum over all i, we obtain (7.2). If we define the topology in Ctm (M) by means of the family of seminorms llUllCm(K) where K is a compact subset of a chart then Theorem 7.1 can be shorty stated that we have an embedding Wloc (M)
Cm (M)
provided k > m/2 + n/4. Let us introduce the topology in C°° (M) by means of the family of seminorms
sup l Gaul , K
(7.8)
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
186
where K is any compact set that is contained in a chart, and a« is an arbitrary partial derivative in this chart. The convergence in this topology, denoted by C°°
Vk ---3 V,
means that vk converges to v locally uniformly as k --3 oo and, in any chart and for any multiindex a, aavk converges to a°v locally uniformly, too. Denote by WIT (M) the intersection of all spaces Wi 1 (M), and define the topology in Wl (M) by means of the family of seminorms IIufjw21(O),
(7.9)
where l is any positive integer and St is a relatively compact open subset of M. The convergence in WWo° (M), denoted by Vk -4 v,
means that Vk converges to v in L10C (M) and, for any positive integer 1, Duvk converges to A' v in L oC (M). COROLLARY 7.2. The natural identity mapping
I : C°° (M) - Wf (M) (7.10) is a homeomorphism of the topological spaces C°° (M) and Wlo° (M).
PROOF. If f E C°° then I (f) is the same function f considered as an element of L,,,. Clearly, I (f) E Wlo° so that the mapping (7.10) is welldefined. The injectivity of I is obvious, the surjectivity follows from Theorem 7.1(ii) . The inequality (7.3) means that any seminorm in C°° is bounded by a seminorm in )4) . Hence, the inverse mapping I-1 is continuous. Any seminorm (7.9) in W,',, can be bounded by a finite sum of seminorms (7.8) in C°°, which can be seen by covering Il by a finite family of relatively compact charts. Hence, I is continuous, and hence, is a homeomorphism. El
It is tempting to say that the spaces C°° and WIT are identical. However,
this is not quite so because the elements of CO° are pointwise functions whereas the element of Wic.* are equivalence classes of measurable functions.
COROLLARY 7.3. If a function u E Li ,(M) satisfies in M the equation -D,u + an = f where a E lR and f E C°°(M), then u E COO (M). More precisely, the statement of Corollary 7.3 means that there is a C°° smooth version of a measurable function u.
PROOF. By Corollary 7.2, it suffices to prove that 0µu E L for all k = 1, 2,.... It is obvious that an - f c L oC and, hence,
AAu = an - f E L°. Then we have
OAu = a0Au - Du f E L °.
7.1. LOCAL REGULARITY ISSUES
187
Continuing by induction, we obtain
0µu = aDµ-lu -
Ak-1 f
E Ll c,
which finishes the proof.
Now we consider the consequences of the parabolic regularity theory of Section 6.4.3. Fix an open interval I C R and consider the product manifold N = I x M with the measure dv = dt d1t. The time derivative at is defined on D' (N) as follows: for all u E D' (N) and cp E D (N),
- (u, ate) , and the Laplace operator Aµ of M extends to D' (N) by (atu, W) =
(Dµu, cP) = (u, AIM
Hence, the heat operator at - A. is naturally defined on D' (N) as follows: (7.11)
((at-A,)u,(P) =-(u,8tcp+Dµcp).
THEOREM 7.4. Let N = I x M. (i) If u E D' (N) and Btu - Dµu E C°° (N) then u E CD° (N). (ii) Let {uk} be a sequence of smooth functions on N, each satisfying the same equation
atuk - Aµuk = f, where f E C°° (N). If Uk
L`°)uEL2loc (N)
then (a version of) function u is C°°-smooth in N, satisfies the equation
atu-Aµu=f, and Uk
C-
U.
PROOF. (i) As in the proof of Theorem 7.1, let U be a chart on M with coordinates x1, ..., xn, and A be the Lebesgue measure in U. Then we have dp = p (x) dA, where p (x) is a smooth positive function in U, and the Laplace operator A. on D (U) has the form Dµ = P-laz (P9ziaj) = P-1L, where
L=ai(pg2iaj) Note that U := I _x U is a chart on N. Using the definition of the operators Dµ and bj in D'(U), we obtain, for all u E D(U) and cp E D(U), (0µu, P)
_ (u, DµcP) = (u, P-lai (P9ti'a,(p)) =
- (az
(P-lu)
,
(p-1u,
ai (P9iia;w))
P92iajc,) _ (a, (P92iaj (p -'u)) cP) = (Lv, V), ,
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
188
where v = p-lu E D'(U). Hence, (atu - 0µu, (P) = (pats - Lv,
so that we have the identity
Btu-0µu=paty-Lv. The hypothesis atu - 0µu E C°° (N) implies pats - Lv E C°O(U), and Corollary 6.26 yields v E C°O(U). Hence, we conclude u E C°°(U), which finishes the proof. (ii) It follows from (7.11) that if {uk} is a sequence of distributions on N each satisfying the same equation atuk - Dµuk = f and uk -+ u then u also
satisfies atu - 0µu = f. In particular, this is the case when Uk u as we have now. By part (i), we conclude that u E C' (N), and the convergence Uk -- u follows from Corollary 6.22. LL *°
COROLLARY 7.5. The statement of Corollary 7.3 remains true if the hypothesis u E L a'(M) is relaxed to u E Li c (M).
PROOF. Indeed, consider the function v (t, x) = eatu (x), which obviously belongs to L10 (N) where N = R x M. In particular, v E D' (N). We have then atv - zµv = aeatu - eat&µu = eat f. Since eat f E C°° (N), we conclude by Theorem 7.4 that v E C°° (N), whence
uECO°(M). Exercises. For any real s > 0, define the space Wo (M) as a subspace of L2 (M) by )/V' (M) = dom (L + id)112
where L is the Dirichlet Laplace operator. The norm in this space is defined by IIfl1w8 := II (C+id)312 fIIL2.
7.1. Prove that Wo is a Hilbert space. 7.2. Prove that Wo = Wo and Wo = Wo including the equivalence (but not necessarily the identity) of the norms. 7.3. Prove that if k is a positive integer then f E Wok if and only if f, L f, ..., Lk-a f E W0 (M) and Ckf E L2 (M) . 7.4. Prove that Wok C W2k and that the norms in
W02k and W2k
(7.12)
are equivalent.
7.5. Prove that if f E Wok then, for all integer 0 < l < k, II.`fIIL2 _< IIfIIL2-`'1kilLkfllL2
(7.13)
7.6. Let M be a connected weighted manifold. Prove that if f c L2 10, (M) and V f = 0 on M then f = const on M.
7.1. LOCAL REGULARITY ISSUES
189
7.7. Let M be a connected manifold and 0 be an open subset of M such that and M \ S2 is non-empty. Prove that In 0 W1 (M) and In 0 Wo (Q). REMARK. If in addition u(S2) < oc then clearly lo E L2 (12) and V10 = 0 in 0 whence In E W1 (2). In this case we obtain an example of a function that is in W' (S2) but not in Wo (52).
7.8. (The exterior maximum principle)Let M be a connected weighted manifold and 0 be a non-empty open subset of M such that M \ ) is non-empty. Let u be a function from
C (M) n Wo (M) such that 0µu = 0 in Q. Prove that sup u = sup U. asa
Q
Prove that if in addition S2 is the exterior of a compact set, then the hypothesis u E C (M) n Wo (M) can be relaxed to u E C (S2) n Wo (M).
7.9. Assume that u E L210° (M) and 0µu E Li ° (M). Prove that u E WW'. (M) and, moreover, for any couple of open sets S2' C= S2" C M, (7.14)
1IUIIWl(sz') < C (IIuIIL2(ni,) + 1AAUIIL2(n/'))
where the constant C depends on S2', S2", g, p, n. The space Wio° (M) is defined in Exercise 5.8 by (5.15).
7.10. Prove that if u E D' (M) and 0µu E C°° (M) then u E C°° (M) . 7.11. A function u on a weighted manifold M is called harmonic if u c C°° (M) and 0µu = 0. Prove that if {uk}k 1 is a sequence of harmonic functions such that uk
L2
u e LCoc (M)
then (a version of) u is also harmonic. Moreover, prove that, in fact, uk
U.
7.12. Let {uk} be a sequence of functions from La ° (M) such that
-Dµuk + akuk = fk,
(7.15)
for some ak E lI and fk E W,2,, (M), with a fixed non-negative integer m. Assume further
that, as k -4 oo, 1/V2_
ak -+ a, fk _ f Prove that function u satisfies the equation
L2 and uk -4 u.
-0µu+au= f, and that
(7.16)
w2-+2 Uk
U.
c
(7.17)
Prove that if in addition fk E C°° (M) and fk -+ f then (versions of) uk and u belong to C°° (M) and uk U. 7.13. Let {uk} be a sequence of non-negative functions from C°° (M), which satisfy (7.15)
with ak E R and fk E C°° (M). Assume further that, as k -4 oo,
ak -4 a, fk 274 f and Uk (x) fi u (x) for any x c M, where u (x) is a function from L210° that is defined pointwise. Prove that u E C°° (M) and c°°
uk -+ U.
7.14. Prove that, for any relatively compact open set S2 (Z M, for any set K C= S2, and for sulp any a E 1R, there exists a constant C = C (K, S2, a) such that, for any smooth solution to
the equation -0µu + au = 0 on M,
IuI <- C1IuJIL2(SZ).
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
190
7.15. Let Ra be the resolvent operator defined in Section 4.2, that is, Ra = (L + aid) where a > 0. Prove that if f E L2 n COO (M) then also Ra f E L2 n C°° (M). 7.16. Let {f ,} be an exhaustion sequence in M. Prove that, for any non-negative function
f EL2nC°°(M) and any a> 0, Rni f
HINT. Use that R°i f -
2
Ra f as i --> oo.
Raf (cf. Theorem 5.22).
7.2. Smoothness of the semigroup solutions The next theorem is a key technical result, which will have may important consequences.
THEOREM 7.6. For any f e L2 (M) and t > 0, the function Pt f belongs to C°° (M). Moreover, for any set K C= M, the following inequality holds sup I Pt f I <_ FK (t) 11f 42(M),
(7.18)
K
where
FK (t) = C (1 + t-o) , (7.19) Q is the smallest integer larger than n/4, and C is a constant depending on
K,g,p,n. Furthermore, for any chart U C= M, a set K C= U, and a positive integer m, we have IIPtfilcm(K) <_ FK (t) IIfIIL2(M),
(7.20)
where FK (t) is still given by (7.19) but now a is the smallest integer larger than m/2 + n/4, and C = C(K, U, g, A, n, m). The estimate (7.18) is true also with a = n/4, which is the best possible exponent in (7.19) (cf. Corollary 15.7). However, for our immediate applications, the value of o- is unimportant. Moreover, we will only use the fact that the function FK (t) in (7.18) and (7.20) is finite and locally bounded in t E (0, +co). PROOF. Let {EA} be the spectral resolution of the operator L = -OJ,Iyl o Xke-tA, where t > 0 and k is a in L2 (M). Consider the function (A) = positive integer. Observe that by (4.50) Lke-tc =
45 (G) = f Ake-tadEa.
(7.21)
0
Since the function (A) is bounded on [0, +oo), the operator 4) (G) is bounded and so is L e-t,c. Hence, for any f E L2 (M), we have
Lk (e-tL f) EL 2 (M),
that is,
0 (Ptf) E L2 (M)
7.2. SMOOTHNESS OF THE SEMIGROUP SOLUTIONS
191
Since this is true for any k, we obtain Pt f E W°° (M). By Theorem 7.1 (or Corollary 7.2) we conclude that Ptf E C°° (M). Let us prove the estimates (7.18) and (7.20). Observe that the function A
,\ke-ta takes its maximal value at A = k/t, which implies, for any
f E L2, A II
Ilike-tCf
APtf 11L2
11L2
1/2 ( e-ta12 1 dllEa.f II il I l Uo':*
< sup (Ake_tx) ( \f
0
dEaf
2)
(tk lk
l
1/2
(7.22)
e-k11f1lL2.
Using the definition (7.1) of the norm in W2' and (7.22), we obtain, for any positive integer (7, v
IIPtfIIw2Q =
IIakPtfIIL2 k=0
k < C 1+E (t)
k
e-k
< C'(1+t-a)IIfIIL2.
IIf 11L2
(7.23)
By the estimate (7.2) of Theorem 7.1, we have sup IPtf I <_ CII Ptf IIW2a(M), K
provided o- > n/4, which together with (7.23) yields (7.18). In the same way, (7.20) follows from (7.3).
Initially Pt f was defined for as e-tc f, which is an element of L2 (M). By Theorem 7.6, this function has a C°°-version. From now on, let us redefine Ptf to be the smooth version of e-t"f . Now we are in position to prove
that, on any weighted manifold M, the operator Pt possesses an integral kernel.
THEOREM 7.7. For any x E M and for any t > 0, there exists a unique function pt ,x E L2 (M) such that, for all f c L2 (M), Ptf (x) = fMPtX (y) f (y) dµ (y) .
(7.24)
Moreover, for any relatively compact set K C M and for any t > 0, we have sup II pt,x II L2 (M) <_ FK (t) , xEK
(7.25)
where FK (t) is the same function as in the estimate (7.18) of Theorem 7.6.
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
192
REMARK 7.8. The function pt,x (y) is defined for all t > 0, x E M but for almost all y e M. Later on, it will be regularized to obtain a smooth function of all three variables t, x, y.
PROOF. Fix a relatively compact set K C M. By Theorem 7.6, for all t > 0 and f E L2 (M), the function Ptf (x) is smooth in x E M and admits the estimate
IPtf(x)I 0 and x c K, the mapping f H Ptf (x) is a bounded linear functional on L2 (M). By the Riesz representation theorem, there exists a function pt,x E L2 (M) such that Ptf (x) = (Pt,x, f )L2 for all f c L2 (M),
whence (7.24) follows. The uniqueness of pt,x is clear from (7.24). Since for any point x e M there is a compact set K containing x (for example, K = {x}), the function pt,x is defined for all t > 0 and x E M. Taking in (7.26) f = pt,s and using
Ptf (x) = (f, f)L2 = If IIL2 we obtain IIfIIL2 < FK (t) 11f 11L2,
whence (7.25) follows.
EXAMPLE 7.9. Recall that the heat semigroup in R' is determined by (4.62), which implies that in this case
pt,x (y) = pt (x - y) =
1
Ix_yI2
exp
4t
Using the identity pt * pt = pet (see Example 1.9), we obtain
IIpt22
2
pt
(x_y)dy=(pt*pt)(0)=p2t(0)=
1
(8,t)n/2
whence IIPt,xIIL2 = (8nt)-n/4
In particular, we see that the estimate (7.25) with FK (t) = C (1 + t--) and a > n/4 is almost sharp for small t.
Now we prove that the function Ptf (x) is, in fact, smooth jointly in t, x. Consider the product manifold N = R+ x M with the metric tensor gnr = dt2 + gm and with measure du = dtdp. The Laplace operator A. of (M, t) , which is obviously defined on C°° (N), extends to D' (N) as follows: (& v, 0) = (v, Dµ(P) for all v E D' (N) and co E D (N). The time derivative at is defined in on D' (N) by
(ata`
)
7.2. SMOOTHNESS OF THE SEMIGROUP SOLUTIONS
193
Hence, for a function u E L10C (N), it makes sense to consider the heat equation at = & u as a distributional equation on N.
THEOREM 7.10. For any f c L2 (M), the function u (t, x) = Ptf (x) belongs to C°° (N) and satisfies in N the heat equation at = Au.
More precisely, the statement means that, for any t > 0, there is a pointwise version of the L2 (M)-function u (t, ) such that the function u (t, x) belongs to C°° (N).
PROOF. We already know by Theorem 7.6 that the function u (t, x) is
C°° smooth in x for any fixed t > 0. To prove that u (t, x) is continuous jointly in t, x, it suffices to show that u (t, x) is continuous in t locally uniformly in x. In fact, we will prove that, for any t > 0, (7.27) u (t + e, ) -4 u (t, ) as e - 0, which will settle the joint continuity of u. By Corollary 7.2), to prove (7.27) it suffices to show that, for any non-negative integer k,
u(t+e,.)
(7.28)
We know already from the proof of Theorem 7.6 that, for any non-negative integer m, u (t, ) E dom L'n and, hence, A' u = (-L)' u. Therefore, it suffices to prove that, Lm (Pt+,F7 f) ---Z L' (Ptf)
(7.29)
Since by (7.21) 00
(Pt+Ef) =
Ame-(t+E)adEaf
J0 \,,e-(t+,)A and the function remains uniformly bounded in A as e -+ 0, Lemma 4.8 allows to pass to the limit under the integral sign, which yields (7.29).
Since u (t, x) is continuous jointly in (t, x), it makes sense to consider u as a distribution on N. Let us show that the function u (t, x) satisfies on N the heat equation in the distributional sense, which amounts to the equation
(u, a +
0,
(7.30)
for any cp E D' (N). Using Fubini's theorem, we obtain (u,
a+z uo) = f u(a+Auco)dv N
f
+ (U,
a )L2(M) dt + J + (u, OOP)L2(M) dt.(7.31)
Considering co (t, ) as a path in L2 (M), observe that the classical partial derivative at coincides with the strong derivative - (cf. Exercise 4.47).
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
194
The product rule for the strong derivative (cf. Exercise 4.46) yields (u, ddt,) d (u, u, (7.32) ) - (dt P)' dt (u'
where all the brackets mean the inner product in L2 (M), Since cp (t, ) vanishes outside some time interval [a, b] where 0 < a < b, we obtain
J
+
dt (u, W) dt = 0.
(7.33)
To handle the last term in (6.66), recall that, by Theorem 4.9, du = OAu'
dt which yields
(du, )dt R+
dt
= f (& u, co)dt = f (u, Atzw)dt. +
(7.34)
+
Combining (7.32), (7.33), and (7.34), we obtain that the right hand side of (7.31) vanishes, which proves (7.30). Applying Theorem 7.4 to function u (t, x), which satisfies the heat equation in the distributional sense, we conclude that u E CO° (N) and u satisfies the heat equation in the classical sense. SECOND PROOF. In this proof, we do not use the parabolic regularity theory (Theorem 7.4). However, we still use the first part of the first proof, namely, the convergence (7.27). Let us fix a chart U C M so that we can consider the partial derivatives as with respect
to x in this chart. By Theorem 7.6, a'u is C°°-smooth in x. By (7.27), we have -C-74 a"U (t, -)
as E-}0,
which implies that a"u is jointly continuous in t, x. To handle the time derivative atu, let us first prove that, for any t > 0,
u(t+E, -v,
9-!
ase
(7.35)
By Corollary 7.2, it suffices to prove that, for any non-negative integer k,
-Lu and this, in turn, will follows from Lm a (t + E, ) - u (t, ')
L2
E
+ -Lm+lu
(7.36)
provided (7.36) holds for all non-negative integers rn,. It follows from (7.21) that Lm
u (t + E, ) - u (t, ) = /'°° .,m. E
Jo
E
- 1 e-"dEAf
Since the function under the integration remains uniformly bounded in A as e -* 0 (cf the estimate (4.60) from the proof of Theorem 4.9), by Lemma 4.8 we can pass to the limit under the integral sign, which yields (7.36). It follows from (7.35) that atu exists in the classical sense for all t > 0 and x E M, and atu = &,,u. (7.37)
7.2. SMOOTHNESS OF THE SEMIGROUP SOLUTIONS
195
Moreover, (7.35) also yields that, for any partial derivative as in x,
aau (t + r, ) - aau (t, )
aaoA,u ( t ,
E
),
which implies that
at (aau) = aa0',u.
7.38)
In particular, we obtain that at (aau) is continuous in t, x. Observe that the function v = ON,u can be represented in the form v = Pt-sg where g E L2 (M), which follows from the identity -Le-(t-s)Ge-sG Ge-sG f=_e -(t-s)G v = -Lu = f) Therefore, all the above argument works also for function v instead of u and, hence, for Dku instead of u, for any positive integer k. Replacing in (7.38) u by A.u we obtain (aa0A_lu)
at
= as
(AA,u)
(7.39)
Iterating (7.39) for a decreasing sequence of values of k, we obtain
a-Aku = at
(aaAµ-1Zl) l1
= at 1 aa0k-2u) _ ... = ay -1 (a'o,,,u) = at aau.
Hence, we have the identity
at u = Dku, whence applying aa,
aaatu
=aa Ak
Au.
Finally, using the above two identities, any partial derivative at 1 aa1 ai 2 aa2 ....u
can be brought to the form aaAµu and, hence, it exists and is continuous in t, x, which finishes the proof.
THIRD PROOF. Let ' (A) be a continuous function on [0, +oo) of a subexponential growth; that is for any e > 0 I'D (A)l = o (eel as .l -4 +oo. (7.40)
Fix f E L2 (M) and, for any t > 0, consider the function v (t .)
f
7 (A) e-tadEAf,
(7.41)
0
where {E,\} is the spectral resolution of the Dirichlet Laplace operator L on M. We will prove that v (t, x) belongs to C°° (N) and satisfies the heat equation on N (obviously, this contains Theorem 7.10 as a particular case for 4) = 1). Fix the numbers 0 < a < b and consider the open set Na,b C N defined by Na.,b = (a, b) x M.
LEMMA 7.11. For any t E (a, b), function v (t, .) can be modified' on a subset of pmeasure 0 of M so that v (t, x) E L2 (Na,b). Furthermore, the weak derivatives at and A,,v exist in L2 (Na,b) and satisfy the identity (A) e-t)dEaf. av = Q,v = - f°° A
(7.42)
J0
3Such a modification is necessary because there are non-measurable subsets of N that have ,u-measure 0 for any fixed t.
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
196
PROOF. By (7.40), the function (b (A) e-t ' is bounded for any t > 0, which implies that the right hand side of (7.41) is defined for all f E L2 (M) and determines a function from L2 (M). As in the proof of Theorem 4.9, one shows that the mapping t H v (t, ) as a path in L2 (M) is strongly differentiable and satisfies the equation dv
(t, ) = -Gv (t, ) _ - J
Ab (A)
(7.43)
0
(cf. Exercise 4.51).
Consequently, the path t H v2 (t, .) is continuous in L' (M). By Exercise 4.49, the function v (t, ) can be modified for any t E (a, b) on a set of u-measure 0 in M so that v2 (t, x) E L' (Na,b). Hence, v (t, x) E L2 (Na.b). Since the function .qD (A) also satisfies the condition (7.40), we conclude by the above
argument that dt (t, x) E L2 (Na,b). Let us show that the distributional derivative at coincides with the strong derivative, that is, 8v
dv
(7.44)
8t= at
Indeed, applying the product rule of the strong derivative (see Exercise 4.46), we
obtain,
for any cP E Co (Na,b) d dt (v) 0)L2(M) Since
_
v,
dW + dt L2(M)
dv)L2(M) 1
( dt
i
fb (v, )L2(M) = 0,
it follows that
fb( d
fb (dv
dt ,
Since d =
e(cf.
t
P)L2(M)dt =v, d t )L2(M)dt.
Ja Exercise 4.47), we conclude that
= -(v,
dt , W )L2(N)
)L2(N),
which proves (7.44).
Let us prove that
Dµv = -CV. (7.45) By definition of L, for any fixed t > 0, 0µv (t, ) as a distribution on M coincides with -,Cv (t, ), which implies -(Gv,W)L2(N)
=-
jb (
v(t,')
(t,))L2(M)dt= f (v(t,),(t,'))dt a
f
(v, Al-P)L2(N),
a
whence (7.45) follows. Combining (7.43), (7.44), and (7.45), we obtain (7.42).
Let o be the (distributional) Laplace operator on the manifold N, that is, 2
8t2
+D
By Theorem 7.1, in order to prove that v E C°° (Nab), it suffices to show that 1kv E L2 (Na,b) for all k > 1. Since the function A) (A) also satisfies condition (7.40), Lemma 7.11 applies to function (A) e_tadEAf 8v = - f°°
at
J
A
7.2. SMOOTHNESS OF THE SEMIGROUP SOLUTIONS a2
and yields that the weak derivative
197
' exists in L2 (Na,b) and
a2v = r°° A2,D C7t2
(A)
0
Since ate and A ,v belong to L2 (Na,b), we obtain that also Av E L2 (Na.,b) and
av = f (A2 - A)
(A)
e-tadEAf
0
Applying the same argument to the function (A2 - A) (D (A) instead of (D (A) and then continuing by induction, we obtain, that for all integers k > 1, Okv = f °° (A2
- A)k (D (A) e
tadEAf,
0
and, hence, ']jkv E L2 (Na,b). We conclude that v E C°° (Na b) and the equation at = 0µv (which follows from (7.42)) is satisfied in the classical sense.
Exercises. 7.17. Prove that, for any compact set K C M, for any f E L2 (M, µ), and for any positive integer m, sup IA (Pt.f)I
Ct-"" (1 I
K
t Q) Jjf 112,
(7.46)
where a is the smallest integer larger than n/4. 7.18. Let f be a non-negative function from L2 (M) and {Il } be an exhaustion sequence
in M. Prove that
-'
Pt f S2;
Ptf asi -+oo.
HINT. Use the fact that, for any t > 0,
Ptntf -+Ptf asz -foo (cf. Theorem 5.23).
7.19. Prove that if f E Co (M) then Pt f
C-b fast -* 0.
7.20. Consider the cos-wave operator
Ct = cos (tL'12
(cf. Exercise 4.52). Prove that, for any f e Co (M) , the function 'u (t, x) = Ct.f (x)
belongs to COO (H x M) and solves in H x M the wave equation a2U C7t2
Dµu
with the initial conditions
u (0, x) =f (x) and at (0, x) = 0.
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
198
7.3. The heat kernel By Theorem 7.7, for any x E M and t > 0, there exists a function pt,x E L2 (M, p) such that, for all f E L2 (M, µ), Ptf (x) = (Pt,x, f )L2
.
(7.47)
Note that the function pt,x (y) is defined for all x but for almost all y. Here we construct a regularized version of pt,x (y), which will be defined for all y. Namely, for any t > 0 and all x, y E M, set Pt (x, y)
(Pt/2,x, Pt/2,y) L2
(7.48)
DEFINITION 7.12. The function pt (x, y) is called the heat kernel of the weighted manifold (M, g, /2).
The main properties of pt (x, y) are stated in the following theorem. THEOREM 7.13. On any weighted manifold (M, g, p) the heat kernel satisfies the following properties.
Symmetry: pt (x, y) = pt (y, x) for all x, y E M and t > 0. For any f E L2, and for all x E M and t > 0, Ptf (x) = im Pt (x, y) f (y) dlt (y) .
(7.49)
pt (x, y) > 0 for allfM x, y E M and t > 0, and Pt (x, y) dl-t (y)
1,
(7.50)
for all xEM andt>0. The semigroup identity: for all x, y E M and t, s > 0, Pt+s (x, y) = Im Pt (x, z) PS (z, y) dµ (z) .
(7.51)
For any y E M, the function u (t, x) := pt (x, y) is C°° smooth in (0, +oo) x M and satisfies the heat equation 8u _&u (7.52) 8t For any function f E Co (M), fM Pt (x, y) f (y) dµ (y) -+ f (x) as t -4 0,
(7.53)
where the convergence is in Coo (M). REMARK 7.14. Obviously, a function pt (x, y), which satisfies (7.49) and
is continuous in y for any fixed t, x, is unique. As we will see below in Theorem 7.20, the function pt (x, y) is, in fact, CO6 smooth jointly in t, x, y. Note also that pt (x, y) > 0 provided manifold M is connected (see Corollary 8.12).
7.3. THE HEAT KERNEL
199
PROOF. Everywhere in the proof, stands for the inner product in L2 (M). The symmetry of pt (x, y) is obvious from definition (7.48). The latter also implies pt (x, y) > 0 provided we show that pt,x > 0 a.e.. Indeed, by Theorems 5.11 and 7.6, Pt f (x) > 0 for all non-negative f E L2 and for all t > 0, x > 0. Setting f = (pt,x)_, we obtain
0 < Ptf (x) = (pt,x,f) = ((pt,x)+, f) - ((Pt,x)_,f) _
(f, f),
whence f = 0 a.e. and pt,x > 0 a.e.
The proof of the rest of Theorem 7.13 will be preceded by two claims. CLAIM 1. For all x E M, t, s > 0, and f E L2 (M),
Pt+sf (x) =
IM
(7.54)
(pt,z,ps,x) f (z) dy (z) .
Indeed, using Pt+s = P3Pt, (7.47), and the symmetry of Pt, we obtain
Pt+sf (x) = Ps (Ptf) (x) (ps,x, Ptf) = (Ptps,x, f )
f MPtps,x(z)f(z)dµ(z) fm (pt,z,ps,x) f (z) dp (z)
,
whence (7.54) follows.
CLAIM 2. For all x, y E M and t > 0, the inner product (ps,x, pt_s,y) does not depend on s E (0, t). Indeed, for all 0 < r < s < t, we have, using (7.47) and applying (7.54) with f = pr,x, (ps,x,pt-8'Y) = Pspt-s,y (x) = Pr (Ps-rpt-s,y) (x)
fM' x (z) (Ps-r,z, pt-s,y) dp (z) Pt-rpr,x (y) (pt-r,y,Pr,x)
which was to be proved. Proof of (7.49). Combining (7.54) and (7.48), we obtain
Ptf (x) = fm (pt/2,x,Pt/2,y) f (y) dlt (y) = fMpt
(x,
y) f (y) dp (y) .
(7.55)
Proof of (7.50). By Theorem 5.11, f < 1 implies Pt f (x) < 1 for all x E M and t > 0. Taking f = 1K where K C M is a compact set, we obtain
whence (7.50) follows.
f
pt,(x,y)dp(y)
< 1,
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
200
Proof of (7.51). It follows from Claim 2 that, for all x, y E M and
0<s
Pt (x, y) = (ps,x, pt-"Y)
(7.56)
Indeed, (7.56) holds for s = t/2 by definition (7.48), which implies that it holds for all s E (0, t) because the right hand side of (7.56) does not depend on s. Comparison of (7.47) and (7.49) shows that (7.57) pt (x, ) = pt,x a.e. Using (7.56) and (7.57), we obtain, for all x, y E M and t, s > 0,
r.. pt (x, z) ps (z, y) dp (z) = (pt (x, ) ps (y, )) _ (pt,x,ps,y) = pt+s (x) y)
(7.58)
Proof of (7.52). Fix s > 0 and y E M and consider the function v (t, x) Pt+s (x, y). We have by (7.58) v (t, x) _ (Pt,x, ps,y) = Ptps,y (x) .
(7.59)
Since ps,y E L2 (M), Theorem 7.10 yields that the function v (t, x) is smooth
in (t, x) and solves the heat equation. Changing t to t - s, we obtain that the same is true for the function pt (x, y). Proof of (7.53). If f E Co (M) then also Aµ f E Co (M) whence it follows by induction that f E dom £m for any positive integer m, where L is the Dirichlet Laplace operator. By (A.48), this implies that /°°A2mdllEEfll2 <
f
oo.
0
00 ,C- f = o AmdEaf 0
Lmpt f =
f
Ame-tadEAf
0
IIrm (Ptf - f) IIL2 = f A2m (1
- e-ta)2 dilEAfll2.
Since the function .2m (1 - e-t)) 2 is bounded for all t > 0 by the integrable function A2,, and ,\2m (1
- e-tA)
2
--+ 0ast-30,
the dominated convergence theorem implies that IiLm(Ptf-f)IIL2-30ast-40.
We see that Ptf - f -+ 0 in VVW (M), which implies by Corollary 7.2 that Pt f
f,
(7.60)
7.4. EXTENSION OF THE HEAT SEMIGROUP
201
which was to be proved.
Exercises. 7.21. Prove that, for all x, y E M and t > 0, (7.61) Pt (x, y) _ pt (x, x) pt (y, y). 7.22. Prove that, for all x E M, the functions pt (x, x) and EIpt,x 112 are non-increasing in t.
7.23. Let K C M be a compact set. (a) Prove that the function S (t) := sup pt (x, y) x,yEK
is non-increasing in t > 0. (b) Prove that, for all t > 0,
S(t) 0, where C depends on K.
7.24. Let J be an isometry of a weighted manifold M (see Section 3.12). Prove that
pt (Jx, Jy) ° Pt (x, y)
7.4. Extension of the heat semigroup So far the operator Pt has been defined on functions f E L2 so that Ptf E L2 n C°°. Using the identity (7.49), we now extend the definition of Pt as follows: set
Ptf (x)
LA
pt (x, y) f (y) dµ (y) ,
(7.62)
f or any function f such that the right hand side of (7.62) makes sense. In
particular, Ptf (x) will be considered as a function defined pointwise (as opposed to functions defined up to null sets).
7.4.1. Heat semigroup in Li c THEOREM 7.15. If f E Ll° (M) is a non-negative function on M then the function Ptf (x) is measurable in x E M (for any t > 0) and in (t, x) E
R+xM.
If, in addition, Pt f (x) E Ll (I x M) where I is an open interval in
R+, then the function Pt f (x) is C°° smooth on I x M and satisfies the heat equation at(Ptf)=AA(Ptf).
PROOF. Let {SZk} be a compact exhaustion sequence in M, that is, an increasing sequence of relatively compact open set fZk C M such that SZk C Qk+l and the union of all sets S2k is M. Set
fk = min (f, k) In,
202
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
and observe that functions fk are bounded, compactly supported, and the sequence { fk} is monotone increasing and converges to f a.e.. Since fk E L2 (M), by Theorems 7.10 and 7.13, the function uk (t, x) = Ptfk (x) is smooth in N := I x M and satisfies the heat equation in N. Set also u (t, x) = Pt f (x) and observe that, by (7.62) and the monotone convergence theorem, (7.63) uk (t, x) -+ u (t, x) for all (t, x) E N. Hence, u (t, x) is a measurable function both on M and N (note that so far u may take value oo). If, in addition, u E Li C (N) then u can be considered as a distribution on N. The heat equation for uk implies the identity
a
IN ( at + °j"P
uk dpdt = 0,
uk is unifor all co E D (N). Since the sequence of functions ( + formly bounded on N by the integrable function CIsUPP Pu, where C = sup l atcp + °NCol, we can pass to the limit under the integral sign as k -4 00 and obtain that u satisfies the same identity. Hence, u solves the heat equation in the distributional sense and, by Theorem 7.4, u admits a C°° (N)modification, which we denote by u (t, x). The sequence {uk} is increasing and, by (7.63), converges to ii a.e.. Since u is smooth and, hence, is E Li C (N), we obtain by the dominated (N)
u. By the second part of Theorem 7.4, convergence theorem that uk La°` u. Finally, since Uk -4 u pointwise, we see that we conclude that Uk u (t, x) = ii (t, x) for all (t, x) E N, which finishes the proof.
For applications, Theorem 7.15 should be complemented by the conditions ensuring the finiteness of Pt!. It is also important to understand whether Pt f converges to f as t -- 0 and in what sense. We present in the next subsections some basic results in this direction. 7.4.2. Heat semigroup in Cb. Denote by Cb (M) the class of bounded continuous functions on M. The following result extends Theorem 1.3 to arbitrary weighted manifold. THEOREM 7.16. For any f E Cb (M), the function Ptf (x) is finite for all t > 0 and x E M, and satisfies the estimate
inf f < Pt f (x) < sup f.
(7.64)
Moreover, Pt f (x) is Coo smooth in + x M, satisfies in 1+ x M the heat equation, and lim Pt f (x) = f (x) , (7.65) 19
where the limit is locally uniform in x E M.
7.4. EXTENSION OF THE HEAT SEMIGROUP
203
In particular, we see that Pt f E Cb (M) for any t > 0 so that Pt can considered as an operator in Cb (M). The statement of Theorem 7.16 can be rephrased also as follows: for any f E Cb (M), the function u (t, x) = Pt f (x) is a bounded solution to the Cauchy problem
f
= 0u in II8+ x M,
l ul t=0 understood in the classical sense. The question of uniqueness is quite subtle and will be first addressed in Section 8.4.1.
PROOF. By treating separately f+ and f_, we can assume that f > 0. By (7.50), we obtain, for all t > 0 and x E M, Pt f (x) < sup f
pt (x, y) dµ (y) < sup f ,
(7.66)
fM
which proves the finiteness of Pt f and (7.64). By the first part of Theorem 7.15, Ptf (x) E LO° (IR+ x M), and by the second part of Theorem 7.15, Pt f (x) E C°° (R+ x M) and Pt f satisfies the heat equation. The initial condition (7.65) was proved in Theorem 7.13 for f E Co (M).
Assume next that f E Co (M), where Co (M) is the class of continuous functions with compact supports. Since Co (M) is dense in Co (M) (cf. Exercise 4.5), there exists a sequence { fk} of functions from Co (M) that converges to f uniformly on M. Obviously, we have
Ptf -f =(Ptf -Ptfk)+(Ptfk-fk)+(fk-f) For a given e > 0, choose k large enough so that
sup fk - f I < e.
(7.67)
M
By (7.64) we have, for all t > 0,
suplPt(fk -A < E. M
By the previous step, Ptfk -+ fk as t -a 0 locally uniformly; hence, for any compact set K c M and for small enough t > 0, SuplPtfk - fkI < 6. K
Combining all the previous lines yields sup K
IPtf-fI<3s,
whence the claim follows.
Let now f E Cb (M). Renormalizing f, we can assume 0 < f _< 1. Fix a compact set K c M and a let V) E Co (M) be a cutoff function of K in M, that is, 0 < V < 1 and - 1 on K (cf. Theorem 3.5). Since f b = f on
K, we have the identity
Ptf - f = (Ptf - Pt (f V))) + (Pt (f ,)
- f0) on K.
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
204
Since
E Co (M), we have by the previous step
supIPt(f b)- fbl -+ 0 ast-40.
(7.68)
K
To estimate the difference Ptf - Pt (f 0), observe that, by 0 < f < 1 and (7.64),
0
By the previous part, we have Pb t-+ b as t -4 0 locally uniformly. Since 1 on K, we obtain that Pb t-* 1 uniformly on K, which implies that
supIPt(.f -fo)I -#0 ast-+0, K
which together with (7.68) implies
supIPtf -# fI -+ ast -+ 0, k
which was to be proved. REMARK 7.17. Consider the function u(t,x)
Ptf(x), t>0,
t=0.
.f (x) ,
It follows from Theorem 7.16 that if f E Cb (M) then u is continuous in [0, +oo) x M. The main difficulty in the proof of Theorem 7.16 was to- ensure that the convergence (7.65) is locally uniform. Just pointwise convergence is much simpler - see Lemma 9.2.
7.4.3. Heat semigroup in L'. Our next goal is to consider Pt f for f E L' (M). We will need for that the following lemma. LEMMA 7.18. Let {v2k} be a double sequence of non-negative functions
from Ll (M) such that, for any k, l
v2k
L* uk E L' (M) as i -4 oo
and 1
uk-4uEL'(M) ask -+ oo. Let {w2} be a sequence of functions from LI (M) such that, for all i, k, vik <wi and I1willL1 < IIuIIL1. 1
Then w24uasi-400. PROOF. All the hypotheses can be displayed in schematic form in the following diagram:
<
Uk + Ll
where all notation are self-explanatory.
w2
u
7.4. EXTENSION OF THE HEAT SEMIGROUP
205
Given e > 0, we have, for large enough k,
IIu-ukIIL1 <E. Fix one of such indices k. Then, for large enough i, we have Iluk
-VikllLl <- 6
so that IIu - vik II Ll < 2e.
Let us show that, for such i, IIu
- wiljL1 < 4e,
(7.69)
which will settle the claim. By condition vik < wi, we have
U-wi
(u - wi)+ < (u - vik)+ and, hence, II (u - wi)+ IILi < 2e.
Next, write
JM (u-wi)d1i = fu>wi} (u-wi)dA+J{u<wi} (u-wi)dµ = II (u - wi)+ IILi - II (u - wi)- IILi. By hypothesis,
fM
(u - wi) du = IIUIIL1 - IIWjIIL1 > 0,
whence it follows that II (u - wi)- IILi < II (u - wi)+ IILi < 2e, and which proves (7.69). and
THEOREM 7.19. For any f E L' (M) and t > 0, we have Pt f E L' (M)
(7.70) IIPtfIIL'
Ptf
Lip)
f ast-*0.
(7.71)
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
206
PROOF. Without loss of generality, we can assume f _> 0 (otherwise, use
f = f+ - f_). Note that by Theorem 7.15, Pt f (x) is a measurable function of x and of (t, x). Using (7.50), we obtain
f Ptf dp = f 1(1 f
(fM Pt (x, y) f (y) dp (y)/ du (x)
M
M
Pt (x, y)
M
<
M
df.L
(x))
f (Y) dlu (y)
f(y)dp(y)=IIfIILI,
which implies Pt f E Li (M) and the estimate (7.70). Integrating the latter in dt, we obtain that Ptf (x) E L1 (R+ x M). By Theorem 7.15, we conclude that Ptf E C°° (R+ x M) and Pt f satisfies the heat equation. Let us now prove the initial condition (7.71). Let {Slk} be a compact exhaustion sequence in M. Set C
fk=min(f,k)1Ok and observe that fk E L2 (SZk), which implies by Theorem 4.9 that
tkk f L4 ) A
Pt
as t -4 0.
Since A (1 k) < oo and, hence, L2 (SZk) y L' (SZk), we obtain also
Ptkfk
L1SZ
(4k) fk
ast-4 0.
Extending function Pnk fk (x) to M by setting it to 0 outside 12k, we obtain Pflk fk
L1) fk
ast-f0.
Obviously, fk L1) f as k -4 oo, so that we have the diagram Ptok fk
ILl
A
Ptf
<
f
1
-L4 1
and conclude by Lemma 7.18 that Ptf -+ f.
11
Exercises. 7.25. Prove that, for any two non-negative measurable functions f and g on M,
(Pt (fg))2 < Pt (f2) Pt (g2). Prove that
(Ptf)2 < Pt (f2). 7.26. Prove that the following dichotomy takes place: either sup Pt 1 = 1 for all t > 0 or there is c > 0 such that sup Pt 1 < exp (-ct) for all large enough t.
7.4. EXTENSION OF THE HEAT SEMIGROUP
207
7.27. Prove that, for any fixed t > 0 and x c M, the heat kernel pt (x, y) is a bounded function of y E M.
7.28. Let F be a set of functions on M such that f E F implies If I E F and Pt f E F. (a) Prove that the semigroup identity PtPs = Pt+s
holds in F. (b) Assume in addition that F is a normed linear space such that, for any f E .F, IIPtfII.F < IIfII.F and
IIPtf-flIF-0as t-0. Prove that, for any s > 0,
as ters. 7.29. Let f E WWo, (M) be a non-negative function such that At,, f < 0 in the distributional
sense. Prove that Pt f < f for all t > 0. 7.30. Let f E L10C (M) be a non-negative function such that Ptf f for all t > 0. (a) Prove that Ptf (x) is decreasing in t for any x c M. (b) Prove that Pt f is a smooth solution to the heat equation in IR+ x M. (c) Prove that Pt f L-`° f as t -+ 0. (d) Prove that A, f < 0 in the distributional sense.
7.31. Under the conditions of Exercise 7.30, assume in addition that A, f = 0 in an open set U C M. Prove that the function
u (t x) =
Pt f (x) ,
f( ),
t>0'
t<0,
is C°° smooth in R x U and solves the heat equation in R x U. REMARK. The assumption Pt f < f simplifies the proof but is not essential - cf. Exercise 9.8(c).
7.32. Let f E L10c (M) be a non-negative function such that Pt f E Li°, (M) for all t E (0,T) (where T > 0) and Pt f > f for all t E (0,T). (a) Prove that Pt f (x) is increasing in t for any x E M. (b) Prove that Pt f is a smooth solution to the heat equation in (0, T) x M. (c) Prove that Pt f L=am f as t
0.
(d) Prove that A ,f > 0 in the distributional sense. (e) Show that the function f (x) = exp (L4) in R- satisfies the above conditions.
7.33. Let f c L°° (M). Prove that Ptf E L°° (M) for any t > 0, IIPtfIIL- < IfIIL00, and the function u (t, x) = Pt f (x) is C°° smooth in I[8+ x M and satisfies the heat equation.
7.34. Let 0 C M be an open set, and consider the function 01, XEQ f (x) = in (x) { x C M \ 52. ,
Prove that
lim Pt f (x) = f (x) for all x E M \ 852, t--ro
and the convergence is locally uniform in x.
(7.72)
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
208
7.35. Prove that if a function f E L°° (M) is continuous at a point x E M then Pt f (x) -3 f (x) as t -* 0.
(7.73)
7.36. Let I < r < oo and f E L' (M). (a) Prove that Ptf E L' (M) for any t > 0, and (7.74)
IIfIILr-
(b) Prove that Ptf (x) is a smooth function of (t, x) E R+ x M and satisfies the heat equation.
7.37. Prove that if 1 < r < oo and f E L' (M) then Pt f
f as t -4 0.
7.38. Assume that
F (t) := sup pt (x, x) < 00. xEM
Prove that, for all 1 < r < s < +oo, f E L'` (M) implies Pt f E Ls (M) and
IIPtfIIL' < F
(t)lir-"S IIfIILr.
(7.75)
7.5. Smoothness of the heat kernel in t, x, y In this section, we prove the smoothness of the heat kernel pt (x, y) jointly in t, x, y.
THEOREM 7.20. The heat kernel pt (x, y) is C'-smooth jointly in t > 0
and x, y E M. Furthermore, for any chart U C M and for any partial differential operator Da in t c- R+ and x E U, Dapt (x, ) E L2 (M)
(7.76)
and, for any f E L2 (M),
DaPtf (x) =
IM
-Dapt (x, y) f (y) dµ (y)
(7.77)
PROOF. Fix a relatively compact chart U C M, and let X be a closed
ball in U. We. will assume that x varies in X and denote by as partial derivatives in x in chart U. Recall that, by Theorem 7.13, aapt (x, y) is a smooth function in t, x for any fixed y. Let us first prove the following claim, which constitutes the main part of the proof. CLAIM. Function aapt (x, y) is continuous in x locally uniformly in t, y. By Theorem 7.6, we have, for any f c L2 (M) and any multiindex a, sup 1a0Ptf 1 X
FX,lal (t) if 11L2
(7.78)
where Fx,k (t) is a locally bounded function of t E R+. Since (7.78) can be also applied to the derivatives 9jaa, it follows that, for all x, x' E X,
-
I aaPtf (x) a0Ptf (x) I c FX,101+1 (t) 1!f !IL2 IX - x'I , where Ix - x'J is the Euclidean distance computed in the chart U.
(7.79)
7.5. SMOOTHNESS OF THE HEAT KERNEL IN t, x, y
209
For all t, s > 0, y E M, and x, x' E X, we have by (7.56) pt+s (x) y) - Pt+s W, Y) = Ptps,y (x) - Ptps,y W) which implies by (7.79). Rapt+s (x, y) - 8apt+s (x', y) I C FX,I aI +l (t) II ps,y 11L2 IX - X' J . Restricting y to a compact set Y C M and applying the inequality (7.25) of Theorem 7.7 to estimate I IPs,y I I L2 , we obtain I aapt+s (x, y)
- 8apt+s (x', y) I
FX,lal+1 (t) Fy (s) I x - x'I
,
(7.80)
for all x, x' E X and y E Y. Hence, aapt+s (x, y) is continuous in x locally uniformly in t, y. Since s > 0 is arbitrary, the same holds for aapt (x, y), which was claimed. By Theorem 7.13, pt (x, y) is a continuous function in t, y for a fixed x.
By the above Claim, pt (x, y) is continuous in x locally uniformly in t, y, which implies that pt (x, y) is continuous jointly in t, x, y. Denote by Ax the operator 0,, with respect to the variable x. It follows from the above Claim that Oxpt (x, y) is continuous in x locally uniformly in t, y. Since by Theorem 7.13 Oxpt (x, y) =apt (x, y) = Dypt (x, y)
(7.81)
and AYPt (x) y) is continuous in t, y, we conclude that all three functions in (7.81) are continuous jointly in t, x, V. Now consider the manifold N = M x M with the product metric tensor and the product measure dv = djt dlt. Since pt (x, y) and its derivatives
(7.81) are continuous functions on R+ x N, all these derivatives are also the distributional derivatives of pt (x, y) on 118+ x N. Hence, we have the following equation 8
1
= 2 (Ox + Dy) pt,
atpt which is satisfied in the distributional sense in R+ x N. Since
Ox + AY = 0v, where Ov is the Laplace operator on (N, v), the function pt (x) y) satisfies the heat equation on R+ x N (up to the time change t H 2t). By Theorem 7.4, we conclude that pt (x, y) is CO° smooth on R+ x N, which was to be proved.
Let Da be any partial derivative in t and x. By the previous part of the proof, Dapt (x, y) is a smooth function in t, x, y, which implies that, for any
f E Co (M)
Da f pt (x, y) f (y) dp (y) = J m
Dapt (x, y) f (y) dp (y) ,
(7.82)
because the the function pt (x, y) f (y) is Coo-smooth in t, x, y and the range of t, x, y can be restricted to a compact set.
210
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
Observe that the estimate (7.78) holds also for the derivative D« in place of a«, because by (7.81) the time derivative operator at on pt (x, y) can be replaced by Ox and, hence, by a combination of operators a«. Then (7.78) implies that, for fixed t, x, the left hand side of (7.82) is a bounded linear functional on f E L2 (M). By the Riesz representation theorem, there exists a function ht,x E L2 (M) such that this functional has the form (ht,x, f). It follows from (7.82) that, for all f E C0 (M), fM
Dpt (x, y) f (y) dµ (y) = (ht,x, f
By Lemma 3.13, we conclude that
D pt x, = ht,x a.e., whence (7.83) D«pt (x, ) E L2 (M). Finally, to prove the identity (7.82) for all f E L2 (M), observe that, by (7.83), the right hand side of (7.82) is also a bounded linear functional on f E L2 (M). Hence, the identity (7.82) extends by continuity from C0 (M) to L2 (M) (cf. Exercise 4.4), which finishes the proof. In what follows we will give an alternative proof of Theorem 7.20, without the parabolic regularity theory. As we will see, the joint smoothness of the heat kernel in t, x, y follows directly from the smoothness of Ptf (x) for any f E L2 (M), by means of some abstract result concerning the differentiability of functions taking values in a Hilbert space.
Consider an open set ) C R', a Hilbert space W, and a function h : f2 --* W. Denote the inner product in 71. We say that the function h is weakly Ck if, for any cp E 7-l, the numerical function by
x'-+ (h(x),gyp)
belongs to Ck (Sl). The function h is strongly continuous if it is continuous with respect to the norm of 7-l, that is, for any x E 0,
Ilh(y)-h(x)II -4 0asy-4 x. The Gateaux partial derivative 8zh is defined by h (x)
h(x+ses) - h(x) =lim S
where eti is the unit vector in the direction of the coordinate xi and the limit is understood in the norm of 7-L. One inductively defines the Gateaux partial derivative 8«h for any multiindex a. We say that the function h is strongly Ck if all Gateaux partial derivatives 8°h up to the order k exist and are strongly continuous. Since the norm limit commutes with the inner product, one easily obtains that if h is strongly Ck then h is weakly Ck and
8' (h (x) ,,p) = (8'h (x) ,:p) for any cp E 7-L,
(7.84)
provided Ia! < k. It turns out that a partial converse to this statement is true as well. LEMMA 7.21. For any non-negative integer k, if h is weakly Ck+1 then h is strongly Ck. Consequently, h is weakly C°° if and only if h is strongly C'.
7.5. SMOOTHNESS OF THE HEAT KERNEL IN t, x, y
211
PROOF. We use induction in k.
Inductive basis for k = 0. Fix a point x E 1 and prove that h is strongly continuous at x. Fix also cp G 'H and consider a numerical function f (x) _ (h (x), cp),
which, by hypothesis, belongs to C' (Il). Choose e > 0 so small that the closed Euclidean ball BE (x) lies in Q. Then, for any vector v E WL such that Jul < e, the straight line segment connecting the points x and x + v lies in Q. Restricting function f to this segment and applying the mean-value theorem, we obtain
If(x+v)-f(x)I -< sup IVfIlvl BEW
Rewrite this inequality in the form
(h(s+v)_h(x),) Jul
where C (x, cp) := supBE(.) I V f I, and consider h(x+Ivl h(x) as a family of vectors in 71 parametrized by v (while x is fixed). Then (7.85) means that this family is weakly bounded. By the principle of uniform boundedness, any weakly bounded family in a Hilbert space
is norm bounded, that is, there is a constant C = C (x) such that
h(x+v)-h(x)
11
11-
(
786 )
1
for all values of the parameter v (that is, Ivl < e and v that h is strongly continuous at x.
0). Obviously, (7.86) implies
Inductive step from k - 1 to k. We assume here k > 1. Then, for any cp E 'H, the function (h (x), cp) belongs to C' (il), and consider its partial derivative 8i (h (x) , cp) at a fixed point x E 11 as a linear functional of cp E 7-l. This functional is bounded because by (7.86)
(h(s+sei)_h(s)ca)
< C (x) IIWIi
and, hence, jai (h(x),cc)l _
By the Riesz representation theorem, there exists a unique vector hi = hi (x) E 7-l such
that
8i (h (x) , cp) = (hi (x) , cp) for all cp E W.
(7.87)
The function hi (x) is, hence, a weak derivative of h (x). The condition that (h (x) , cp) belongs to Ck+i (1) implies that (hi (x) , cp) belongs to C" (Q), that is, hi is weakly Ck. By the inductive hypothesis, we conclude that hi is strongly Ck-1 To finish the proof, it suffices to show that the Gateaux derivative 8ih exists and is equal to hi, which will imply that h is strongly Ck. We will verify this for the index i = n; for i < n, it is done similarly. Consider a piecewise-smooth path y : [0, T] -3 52 such that 'Y (0) = xo and y (T) = x, and show that
f 0
2
hi (y ( t ) )
(t) dt = h (x) - h (xo)
.
(7.88)
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON, A MA NifOLD
212
Denoting the integral in (7.88) by I and using (7.87) and the fundamental theorem of calculus, we obtain, for any cp E 71, (I,A
f
T
(hi (7 (t)) , w) 7' (t) dt
0
T
J
6i (h
(t) dt
d
(h'(7(t)),ca)dt JoT dt (h(x),:p) - (h(xo), p), whence (7.88) follows.
Now fix a point x E 0 and choose e > 0 so that the cube (x - s, x - e)' lies in 1. For simplicity of notation, assume that the origin 0 of 1R' is contained in this cube, and consider the polygonal path 7 connecting 0 and x inside the cube, whose consecutive vertices are as follows:
0 0)
(0 0
(xl 0,
0 0)
...
xn-1 0), (x' x'
(xl x2
x°
n)
By (7.88), we have T
h (x) = h (0) + f hi (7 (t)) Y' (t) dt.
(7.89)
0
The integral in (7.89) splits into the sum of it integral over the legs of ^r, and only the last one depends on x'2. Hence, to differentiate (7.89) in xn, it suffices to differentiate the integral over the last leg of 7. Parametrizing this leg by 7 (t) _ (xl, x2, ..., Xn-1, t) , 0 < t < xn, we obtain x"
hi (7 (t))' i' (t) dt = n f
C7nh (x) = aan f which was to be proved.
yn hn (XI.
t) dt = h, (x)
/
SECOND PROOF OF THEOREM 7.20. Let S2 be a chart on the manifold R- x M, and
consider pt,,. as a mapping Q -> L2 (M). By Theorem 7.10. for any f E L2 (M), the function Ptf (x) = (pt,x, f )L2 is C°°-smooth in t, x. Hence, the mapping pt.x is weakly C°°. By Lemma 7.21, the mapping pt, is strongly C°°. Let Sl' be another chart on + x M which will be the range of the variables s, y. Since ps, is also strongly C°° as a mapping from S2' - L2 (M), we obtain by (7.56) pt+s (x, y) = (Pt,m, ps,Y)L2 = C°°
(n x 9'):
which implies that pt (x, y) is C°°-smooth in t, x, y. Let D'' be a partial differential operator in variables (t, x) E Q. By (7.84), we have, for any f E L2 (M),
D' (pt,., f) = (Daps,.if ) (7.90) where Dapt, is understood as the Gateaux derivative. Since the left hand sides of (7.82) and (7.90) coincide, so do the right hand sides, whence we obtain by Lemma 3.13
Dapt (x, ) = Daps,. a.e. Consequently, Dapt (x, ) E L2 (M) and, for any f E L2 (M),
Da f pt (x, y) f (y) dp = Da (pt,., f) _ (Dapt,x, f) = f Dapt (x, y) f (y) dA, M
which finishes the proof.
M
7.5. SMOOTHNESS OF THE HEAT KERNEL IN t, x, y
213
Exercises. 7.39. Let f : M -* [-co, +oo] be a measurable function on M. (a) Prove that, if f > 0 then the function Ptf (x) = fMPt (x, y) f (y) dl-t (y)
7.91)
is measurable on M for any t > 0. (b)
(c)
Prove that if f is signed and the integral (7.91) converges for almost all x then Ptf (x) is measurable on M. Prove the identity
Pt+Sf = Pt(Psf) for any non-negative measurable function f. 7.40. For any open set l C M, denote by pt' (x, y) the heat kernel of the manifold (fl, g, lc).
(a) Prove that pt (x, y) < pt (x, y) for all x, y E 0 and t > 0. (b) Let {l } be an exhaustion sequence in M. Prove that C°°(R+xMxM)
" A (x, y)
-#
pt (x, y) as i --> oo.
(c) Prove that, for any non-negative measurable function f (x),
,
Pif (x) -+ Pt.f (x) asi--3oo, for any fixed t> 0 and XE M. (d) Prove that if f c Cb (M) then
f (x)
C°O(-- M)
Ptf (x) as i --+ oo.
7.41. Let (X, gx, Ax) and (Y, gy, iy) be two weighted manifold and (M, g, lt) be their direct product (see Section 3.8). Denote by pt and pt the heat kernels on X and Y, respectively. Prove that the heat kernel pt on M satisfies the identity
pt ((x, y) , (x , y')) = px (x, x) pe (y, y) , for all t > 0, x, x' E X, y, y' E Y (note that (x, y) and (x', y') are points on M).
(7.92)
7.42. For any t > 0, consider the quadratic form in L2 (M), defined by
Et(f)=
(f_ftf,f)2
(cf. Exercise 4.38). Prove that if the heat kernel is stochastically complete, that is, for all
XE M and t> 0, IM
pt (x, y) dl-t (y) = 1,
(7.93)
then the following identity holds:
Et (f) = 2t M f M(f(x) - f(y))2pt(x,y)dl-,(y)dFt(x), for allt > O and f EL 2 (M).
(7.94)
7.43. Prove that, for any real k > 0 and for any f E L2 (M), k-1
(G + id)-k f (x) = f 0
rt (k) e -'P, f (x) dt,
for almost all x E M, where r is the gamma function. HINT. Use Exercise 5.11.
(7.95)
7. THE HEAT KERNEL ON A MANIFOLD
214
7.44. Assume that the heat kernel satisfies the following condition pt(x,x)
for allxEMandO
(7.96)
where -y, c > 0. Fix a real number k > ry/2.
(a) Prove that, for any f E L2 (M), the function (L + id)-l' f is continuous and suupI(L+id)-k fl
(7.97)
where C = C (c, ry, k).
(b) Prove that, for any u E dom Gk, we have u E C (M) and sup Jul <_ C
(lItIIL2 + II LkuII
M
L2)
.
(7.98)
7.45. Prove that if (7.98) holds for all u E dom Lk with some k > 0 then the heat kernel satisfies the estimate (7.96) with 'y = 2k. 7.46. The purpose of this question is to give an alternative proof of Theorem 6.1 (Sobolev embedding theorem). (a) Prove that if u E Wk (R') where k is a positive integer then u E dom Lk12, where L
is the Dirichlet Laplace operator in R'. Prove also that, for any u E Wk (R'), II (L+id)k/2uIIL2 < CIIujjWk, where C is a constant depending only on n and k. (b) Prove that if u E Wk (R") where k is an integer such that k > n/2 then u E C (R") and
-
sup IuI < CII"ullwk. Rn (c)
Prove that if k > m + n/2 where m is a positive integer then u E Wk (III") implies
u E C' (Wi) and IIUIIC-(Ra)< CIIUIIWk(R.).
(d) Prove that if 12 is an open subset of R and k and m are non-negative integers such that k > m + n/2 then u E WWo (12) implies u E Ctm (0). Moreover, for any open sets S2' Cc 12" C E2,
IlullCm > G C with a constant C depending on S2', f2", k, m, n. HINT. Use Exercise 4.25 for part (a) and Exercise 7.44 for part (b) 7.47. (Compact embedding theorems)
(a) Assume that p (M) < oo and sup pt (x, x) < oo for all t > 0. xEM
(7.99)
Prove that the identical embedding Wo (M) -*L2 (M) is a compact operator. (b) Prove that, on any weighted manifold M and for any non-empty relatively open compact set 12 C M, the identical embedding Wo (S2) " L2 (Sl) is a compact operator (cf. Theorem 6.3 and Corollary 10.21). HINT. Use for part (a) the weak compactness of bounded sets in L2 and Exercises 7.36, 4.40.
7.48. Let I be an open interval in JR and 1l be a Hilbert space. Prove that if a mapping h : I -3 7-l is weakly differentiable then h is strongly continuous.
7.6. NOTES
215
7.6. Notes One of the main results of Chapter 7 is the existence of the heat kernel satisfying various nice properties (Theorems 7.7, 7.13, and 7.20). The classical approach to construction of the heat kernel on a Riemannian manifold, which originated from [275], [276], uses a parametrix of the heat equation, that is, a smooth function which satisfies the necessary conditions in some asymptotic sense. The parametrix itself is constructed using as a model the heat kernel in R'. A detailed account of this approach can be found in many sources, see for example [36], [37], [51], [58], [317], [326]. This approach has certain advantages as it gives immediately the short time asymptotics of the heat kernel and requires less of abstract functional analysis. On the other hand, the theory of elliptic and parabolic equations with singular (measurable) coefficients, developed by de Giorgi [103], Nash [292], Moser [279], [280], and Aronson [9], has demonstrated that the fundamental solutions for such equations can be constructed using certain a priori estimates, whereas the parametrix method is not available. The method of construction of the heat kernel via a priori estimates of solutions has been successfully applied in analysis on more general spaces - metric measure spaces with energy forms.
In our approach, the key a priori estimate (7.18) of the heat semigroup is given by Theorem 7.6. The proof of (7.18) uses the elliptic regularity theory and the Sobolev embedding theorem. As soon as one has (7.18), the existence of the heat kernel follows as in Theorem 7.7. This approach gives at the same token the smoothness of Ptf (x) in variable x. There are other proofs of (7.18) based only on the local isoperimetric properties of manifolds, which can be used in more general settings (cf. Corollary 15.7 in Chapter 15).
The heat kernel obtained as above is not yet symmetric. Its symmetrization (and regularization) is done in Theorem 7.13 using a general method of J.-A. Yan [360]. The smoothness of the heat kernel pt (x, y) is proved in three installments: first, smoothness of Pt f (x) in x (Theorem 7.6), then smoothness of pt (x, y) in (t, x) (Theorems 7.10 and 7.13) and, finally, smoothness of pt (x, y) in (t, x, y) (Theorem 7.20; the second proof of this theorem uses the approach from [96, Theorem 5.2.1] and [92, Corollary 1.42]). Other methods for construction of the heat kernel are outlined in Section 16.4. An somewhat similar approach for construction of the heat kernel via the smoothness of Ptf was used by Strichartz [330], although without quantitative estimates of Pt!. That method was also briefly outlined in [96]. After the heat kernel has been constructed, the heat semigroup Pt f can be extended from L2 to other function classes as an integral operator. We consider here only extensions to L' and Cb. A good account of the properties of the heat semigroup in spaces L4 can be found in [330].
CHAPTER 8
Positive solutions This Chapter can be regarded as a continuation of Chapter 5. However, the treatment of the Markovian properties is now different because of the use of the smoothness of solutions.
8.1. The minimality of the heat semigroup We say that a smooth function u (t, x) is a supersolution of the heat equation if it satisfies the inequality
at
-
in a specified domain. The following statement can be considered as an extension of Corollary 5.17.
THEOREM 8.1. Set I = (0, T) where T E (0, +oo]. Let u (t, x) be a non-negative smooth supersolution to the heat equation in I x M such that L2
u (t, ) f as t --3 0, (8.1) for some f E Ll (M). Then Pt f (x) is also a smooth solution to the heat equation in I x M, satisfying the initial condition (8.1), and u (t, x) > Pt f (x) , (8.2)
for all tEI andxEM. PROOF. Note that f _> 0. Let (8.2) be already proved. Then Ptf (x) is locally bounded and, by Theorem 7.15, it is a smooth solution to the heat equation. Let us verify the initial condition 2
Pt f
L° f
as t -+ 0.
(8.3)
Indeed, for any relatively compact open set S2 C M, we have
Pt (fin)
we conclude that Ptf -4 f, which implies (8.3). In order to prove (8.2), we reduce the present setting to the L2-Cauchy problem.(5.55) of Corollary 5.17. Choose an open set 92 C M. The smoothness of u implies that u (t, ) E W1 (S2) and the strong derivative at in L2 (12) obviously coincides with the classical derivative -aFut. Hence, u (t, ) as a path 217
8. POSITIVE SOLUTIONS
218
in W1 (St) satisfies the conditions (5.55), and we conclude by Corollary 5.17,
that' (8.4)
Let {1 k} be a compact exhaustion sequence in M, and set fk = f lQk. It follows from (8.4) that
u (t, ) > Pt"kfi, for all i and k. Since fz c L2 (M), by Theorem 5.23 we obtain z
P"kfi- Ptfz as k-4oo, whence it follows that
Letting i -3 oo, we obtain
u (t, ) > Pt f a.e. (8.5) This implies Pt f E Li c (I x M), and we conclude by Theorem 7.15 that the function Pt f (x) is smooth in t, x. Hence, (8.5) implies the pointwise estimate (8.2). COROLLARY 8.2. Let u (t, x) be a non-negative smooth solution to the
heat equation in I x M such that Lz
ast-+0
for some f E Li c (M), and 0 as x -- oo in M, where the convergence is uniform in t E I. Then u (t, x) = Ptf (x). u (t, x)
(8.6)
The hypotheses of Corollary 8.2 are exactly those of Theorem 8.1 except for the additional condition (8.6), which leads to the identity of u (t, x) and
Ptf W. PROOF. It follows from Theorem 8.1 that the function v (t, x) := u (t, x)L2
Pt f (x) satisfies the heat equation in I x M and the initial condition v (t, ) ° 0 as t -+ 0. Besides, (8.6) implies v (t, x) 0 as x -* oo. Hence, by Corollary 5.20, v - 0, which was to be proved. COROLLARY 8.3. For any non-negative f E Cb (M), the function u (t, x) = Ptf (x) is the minimal non-negative solution to the following Cauchy problem
f at = 0µu, ult=o = f,
in ]R
x M,
(8 7)
where ujt=o = f means that u (t, ) -* f as t -* 0 locally uniformly in x. 'Corollary 5.17 says that (8.4) holds almost everywhere on M (for any t E I). However, since by Theorem 7.10 Pn f is a smooth function, (8.4) holds, in fact, everywhere on M.
8.2. EXTENSION OF RESOLVENT
219
PROOF. Indeed, by Theorem 7.16, the function Pt f (x) does solve (8.7), and by Theorem 8.1, u (t, x) > Pt f (x) for any other non-negative solution U.
Exercises. 8.1. Prove that if h is a non-negative function satisfying on M the equation
-A ,h + ah = 0, where a is a real constant, then Pth < e"h for all t > 0.
8.2. Extension of resolvent Our goal here is to extend the resolvent Ra f to a larger class of functions
f and to prove the properties of R« similar to the properties of the heat semigroup Pt given by Theorems 7.15 and 8.1.
Recall that, for any a > 0, the resolvent Ra is a bounded operator in L2 (M) defined by
Ra = (L+aid)-1 where L is the Dirichlet Laplace operator (cf. Section 4.2). For any f E L2 (M), the function u = Ra f satisfies the equation
-AAu + au = f
(8.8)
in the distributional sense. As an operator in L2, the resolvent is related to the heat semigroup by the identity -at (R«f) 9)L2 = rn
e
(Pt.f, 9)L2 dt,
(8.9)
for all f, g E L2 (M) (cf. Theorem 4.5 and Lemma 5.10). Now we extend Ra f to a more general class of functions f by setting 00
Raf (x)
e-atPtf (x) dt = fo,
1M
e-atPt (x, y) f (y) dp (y) dt, (8 .10)
whenever the right hand side of (8.10) makes sense. Note that the function Ra f (x) is defined by (8.10) pointwise rather than almost everywhere. If f is a non-negative measurable function then the right hand side of (8.10) is always a measurable function by Fubini's theorem, although it may take value oo. If, in addition, f E L2 (M) then substituting Ra f from (8.10) into (8.9), we obtain, again by Fubini's theorem, that (8.9) holds for all nonnegative g E L2 (M), which implies that the new definition of Ref matches the old one. For a signed f E L2 (M), the same conclusion follows using
f = f+ - f-. THEOREM 8.4. Fix a non-negative function f c Li (M) and a constant
a>0.
S. POSITIVE SOLUTIONS
220
(a) If u E Ll (M) is a non-negative solution to the equation
-AAn + au = f
(8.11)
then u>Raf. (b) If Raf E Ll (M) then the function u = Raf satisfies the equation (8.11).
PROOF. Let {Ilk} be a compact exhaustion sequence in M and set fk = min (k, f )1c2k.
(a) It follows from (8.11) that ANu E L oC (M), and we conclude by Exercise 7.9 that u E W110 (M). Then u E Wl (Slk) and, applying Corollary 5.15 in S2k, we obtain u > R«k f . Consequently, we have, for all indices i, k, u > Rak f2.
Since fZ E L2 (M), Theorem 5.22 yields R«k f2 L--* Rf, as k -* oo, whence it follows u > Ra f2. Passing to the limit as i --* oo, we finish the proof. (b) Since fk E L2 (M), the function and Uk = R« fk belongs to L2 (M) and satisfies the equation
-AAuk + auk = fk (cf. Theorem 4.5). Hence, for any co E D (M), we have
J u(-+ a) d=f fd.
(8.12)
M
llM
Since the sequence fk is monotone increasing and converges to f a.e., we obtain by (8.10) and the monotone convergence theorem that Uk (x) t u (x) pointwise. Since u and f belong to Ll (supp cp), we can pass to the limit in (8.12) by the dominated convergence theorem and obtain that u also satisfies this identity, which is equivalent to the equation (8.11).
REMARK 8.5. Part (a) of Theorem 8.4 can be modified as follows: if u E Wioc (M), u > 0, and u satisfies the inequality
-Aµu + an > f, then u > Raf.. This is proved in the same way because the only place where the equality in (8.11) was used, is to conclude that A,,u E L o, and, hence,
u E W. COROLLARY 8.6. If f E L°° (M) and a > 0 then Raf is bounded, sup I Raf I < a-I Iif IIL°°,
(8.13)
and u = Raf is a distributional solution to the equation (8.8). PROOF. The estimate (8.13) follows from (8.10) and sup I Ptf I c Iif IIL°° (cf. Exercise 7.33).
If f > 0 then the fact that Raf solves (8.8) follows
from Theorem 8.4(b). For a signed f, the same follows from Raf = Raf+ Ra f- .
-
8.2. EXTENSION OF RESOLVENT
221
Some cases when one can claim the smoothness of Ra f are stated in the following theorem.
THEOREM 8.7. Let f E C°° (M) and a > 0. (i) I f f > 0 and and RC f E L aC (M) then RC f E C°° (M) . (ii) If f is bounded then R, ,f E C°° (M).
PROOF. Consider first a special case when f > 0 and f c Co (M), and prove that Ra f E C°O (M). Since the function u = RC f satisfies the equation (8.8), it is tempting to conclude that u c COO applying Corollary 7.3. Indeed, the latter says that every distributional solution to (8.8) is a smooth function, which means that u as a distribution is represented by a C°° function, that is, there is a function u E C°° such that u = u a.e.. However, our aim now is to show that u (x) itself is C. Recall that, by Theorem 7.13, function Ptf is C°° smooth in [0, +oo) x M (cf. (7.53)). Therefore, the function ul (x) =
f
l
e-CtPtf (x) dt
0
is C°° smooth on M for any finite 1 > 0 and, moreover, any partial derivative of ul can be computed by differentiating under the integral sign. Using the properties of the heat semigroup, we obtain
rt
t
& ul
= J e-Ct/m (Ptf) dt = J 0
e-at_ (Ptf) dt
0
e-atpt.f] o + a I
t
e-CtPtf dt, 0
which implies that
-Dul + aul = .fl := f - e-a*Plf By the estimate (7.20) of Theorem 7.6, we have, for any compact set K that is contained in a chart, and for any positive integer m, II PIf IICm(K) < FK,m (1) II f II L2(M),
where FK,,m (1) is a function of 1 that remains bounded as l -* oo. This implies e -«1 P1f
0 asl-3oc
and, hence, A -- f . The sequence {ui (x)} increases and converges to u (x) pointwise as l -+ oo. Since u E L2 (M), this implies by Exercise 7.13 that u (x) belongs to Coo, which finishes the proof in the special case. (i) Let {SZk} be a compact exhaustion sequence in M and let Vik be a cutoff function of Stk in SZk+l. Set fk = Ok f so that fk E Co (M). By the special case above, the function Uk = Ra fk belongs to C°°. Since the sequence { fk } increases and converges pointwise to f, by (8.10) the sequence
222
8. POSITIVE SOLUTIONS
Uk (x) also increases and converges pointwise to u = Ra f . Since u E Li ° coo and fk ---4 f, we conclude by Exercise 7.13 that u E C. (ii) By Corollary 8.6, Ra f is bounded and, hence, belongs to L1 '. If
f > 0 then Ra f is smooth by part (i). For a signed f, the smoothness of Ra f follows from the representation
f=of - (ef - f) because both function of and of - f are bounded, smooth, and non-negative. REMARK 8.8. If f is a non-negative function from C°° fl L2 then Ra f E
L2 and we obtain by Theorem 8.7 that Ra f E C°°. This was stated in Exercise 7.15, but using the definition of R,, as an operator in L2. In other words, the statement of Exercise 7.15 means that the L2-function Ra f has a smooth modification, whereas the statement of Theorem 8.7 means that the function Ra f which is defined pointwise by (8.10), is C°° itself. ,
Exercises. 8.2. If u E L2 ,2 (M) is a non-negative solution to the equation
-0µu + au = f where a > 0 and f E L 102': (M), f > 0. Prove that if
u(x)-*0as x- oo, then u=Raf. 8.3. Let U E L2 (M) satisfy in M the equation
Dµu+au=0, where A E R, and
u(x)->0as x-3oo. Prove that u E Wo (M). REMARK. Since by the equation 0µu E L2 (M), it follows that u E dom (L) and, hence, u satisfies the equation Lu = -Au. Assuming that u 0 0 we obtain that u is an eigenfunction of the Dirichlet Laplace operator.
8.3. Strong maximum/minimum principle 8.3.1. The heat equation. As before, let (M, g, µ) be a weighted manifold. For an open set SZ C R x M, define its top boundary OtopI as the set of points (t, x) E 852 for which exists an open neighborhood U C M of x and e > 0 such that the cylinder (t - e, t) x U is contained in 1 (see Fig. 8.1). For example, if t2 = (a, b) x Q where a < b and Q is an open subset of M, then Btp1 = {b} x Q. If M = 1I81 and SZ is a Euclidean ball in Rn+1 then BtopSI = 0.
8.3. STRONG MAXIMUM/MINIMUM PRINCIPLE
223
ato
t
(t-E. t) x U ; .
M
FIGURE 8.1. The top boundary of a set Q. DEFINITION 8.9. The parabolic boundary apse of an open set S2 C R x M is defined by apS2 := aS2 \ at',s2.
If 52 is non-empty and the value of t in 0 has a lower bound then apt is non-empty - indeed, a point (t, x) E S2 with the minimal value of t cannot
belong to atps2. The importance of this notion for the heat equation is determined by the following theorem, which generalizes Lemma 1.5.
THEOREM 8.10. (Parabolic minimum principle) Let S2 be a non-empty relatively compact open set in R x M, and let a function u E C2 (S2) satisfy in 52 the inequality (8.14) Then
inf u = inf u. 'a
(8.15)
apse
REMARK. Any function u E C2 satisfying (8.14) is called a supersolution to the heat equation, while a function satisfying the opposite inequality
is called a subsolution. Obviously, Theorem 8.10 can be equivalently stated as the maximum principle for subsolutions: sup u = sup U. apf
In particular, if u < 0 on the parabolic boundary of 1 then u < 0 in Q. Let 52 = (0, T) x Q where Q is a relatively compact open subset of M. Then the condition u < 0 on apQ can be split into two parts: u (t, x) < 0 for all x E aQ and t E (0, T)
u(0,x)<0forallxEQ,
8. POSITIVE SOLUTIONS
224
which imply the following (assuming u e C (M): u+ (t, x) = 0 as x --> oo in Q (considering Q is a manifold itself)
u+(t,x)z3 0 ast-30. Then the conclusion that u < 0 in SZ follows from Corollary 5.20. Hence,
for cylindrical domains 11, Theorem 8.10 is contained in Corollary 5.20. However, we will need Theorem 8.10 also for non-cylindrical domains, and for this reason we provide below an independent proof of this theorem. PROOF OF THEOREM 8.10. The proof is similar to that of Lemma 1.5. Assume first that u satisfies a strict inequality in 1:
at
> & u.
(8.16)
Let (to, xo) be a point of minimum of function u in fZ. If (to, xo) E O 2 then
(8.15) is trivially satisfied. Let us show that, in fact, this point cannot be located elsewhere. Assume from the contrary that (to, xo) is contained in SZ or in atpQ. In the both cases, there exists an open neighborhood U C M of
xo and E > 0 such that the cylinder r :_ (to - E, to) x U is contained in Q. Since function t H u (t, xo) in [to - E, to] takes the minimal value at (to, xo), we necessarily have
at (to, xo) <
(8.17)
0.
By the choice of U, we can assume that U is a chart, with the coordinates xl, ..., xn. Let g be the matrix of the metric tensor g in the coordinates xl, ..., xn and g be the matrix of g in another coordinate system y', ..., yn in U (yet to be defined). By (3.25), we have
g=JTgJ, where J is the Jacobi matrix defined by k
Jz =
aX
It is well known from linear algebra that any quadratic form can be brought to a diagonal form by a linear change of the variables. The quadratic form
is positive definite and, hence, can be transform to the form (1)2 + ... + (Sn)2 by a linear changei = A is a numerical non-singular matrix. This implies that gig (xo)
ATg(xo)A=id. Defining the new coordinates yi by the linear equations x2 = Ajy-7, we obtain
that J (xo) = A and, hence, g (xo) = id. So, renaming y2 back to xi, we obtain from (3.46) that the Laplace operator A. at point xo has the form A1,1.0
-
a2
(axi)2 +
ia
b
axi
8.3. STRONG MAXIMUM/MINIMUM PRINCIPLE
225
for some constants b'. Since xo is a point of minimum of function x -u (to, x) in U, we obtain that z
(to, xo) = 0 and (Sx2)z (to, xo) > 0. axz
This implies A, u (to, xo) >_ 0,
which together with (8.17) contradicts (8.16). In the general case of a non-strict inequality in (8.14), consider for any e > 0 the function uE = u + et, which obviously satisfies (8.16). Hence, by the previous case, we obtain
inf (u + et) = inf (u + Et)
,
whence (8.15) follows by letting e -* 0.
El
THEOREM 8.11. (Strong parabolic minimum principle) Let (M, g, ,u) be
a connected weighted manifold, and I C R be an open interval. Let a nonnegative function u (t, x) E C2 (I x M) satisfy in I x M the inequality
at
OMu.
If u vanishes at a point (t', x') E I x M then u vanishes at all points (t, x) E
IxMwith t
Under the conditions of Theorem 8.11, one cannot claim that u (t, x) = 0 for t > t' - see Remark 9.22 in Section 9.3. Note that the function u in Theorem 8.11 is a supersolution to the heat equation. Since u+const is also supersolution, one can state Theorem 8.11 as follows: if u is a bounded below supersolution then u (t', x') = inf u at some point implies u (t, x) = inf u for all t < t' and x. Equivalently, Theorem 8.11 can be stated as the strong parabolic maximum principle for subsolutions: if u is a bounded subsolution in I x M then u (t', x') = sup u at some point implies u (t, x) = sup u for all t < t' and x. PROOF. The main part of the proof is contained in the following claim. CLAIM. Let V be a chart in M and xo, xj be two points in V such that the straight line segment between xo, xj is also in V. If u is a function as in the hypotheses of Theorem 8.11 then u (to, xo) > 0
u (ti, xi) > 0 for all tj > to,
(8.18)
assuming that to, tj E I. For simplicity of notation, set to = 0. By shrinking V, we can assume that V is relatively compact and its closure V is contained in a chart. Let r > 0 be so small that the Euclidean 2r-neighborhood of the straight line
226
8. POSITIVE SOLUTIONS
segment [xo, xl] is also in V. Let U be the Euclidean ball in V of radius r centered at X. By further reducing r, we can assume that also inf u (0,x) > 0.
(8.19)
xEU
Setting = tl (x1 - xo) we obtain that the translates U+t are all in V for any t c [0, ti]. Consider the following tilted cylinder (see Fig. 8.2)
F={(t,x):0
FIGURE 8.2. Tilted cylinder r. This cylinder is chosen so that the center of the bottom is (0, xo) while the center of the top is (ti, xi). We will prove that, under condition (8.19),
u is strictly positive in r, except for possibly the lateral surface of r; in particular, this will imply that u (ti, XI) > 0. To that end, construct a non-negative function v E C2 (P) such that av < A AV in 1',
(8.20)
and
(8.21) v = 0 on the lateral surface of I', and v > 0 otherwise. Assuming that such a function v exists, let us compare v and Eu, where E > 0 is chosen so small that
inf u (0, x) > E sup v (0, x) .
xEU
xEU
Due to this choice of e, we have u > ev at the bottom of r. Since v = 0 on the lateral surface of r and u is non-negative, we conclude that inequality
8.3. STRONG MAXIMUM/MINIMUM PRINCIPLE
227
u > Ev holds on the whole parabolic boundary of P. The function u - Ev satisfies the hypotheses of Theorem 8.10, and we conclude by this theorem that u > Ev in P. By (8.21), this implies that u is positive in f except for the lateral surface, which was to be proved. Assume for simplicity that xo = 0 is the origin in the chart V. Let us look for v in the form v (t, x) = e-atf (I x - t12)
where a > 0 and function f are to be specified, and 1.1 stands for the Euclidean length of a vector. Note that (t, x) E P implies x - t E U, which means IX - t12 < r2. Hence, to satisfy conditions (8.21), function f should be positive in [0, r2) and vanish at r2. Let us impose also the conditions
f' < 0 and f">0 in [0, r2],
(8.22)
which will be satisfied in the final choice of f. Denoting by xi, ..., x' the coordinates in V and setting n
w(t,x) := i=1
we obtain, for (t, x) E P, av = -ae-at f (w) + e-at f' (w)
at
(fat - xi) < -e-at (a f (w) + C f' (w))
where C is a large enough constant (we have used that the ranges of t and x are bounded, 6 is fixed, and f _< 0). Observe that, by (3.46),
a 2w
09w + bi axi ,
°Aw ^ 9u axia x where bi are smooth functions, which yields
°A,w = 2gZZ + 2bz (x2 - eit) < C,
where C is a large enough constant. Computing the gradient of w and using the positive definiteness of the matrix (gij), we obtain Vw
2
= = g'3
Ig
z
aw (9W >
axi axe -
i=1
(ax )
= cw,
where c' and c = c'/4 are (small) positive constants. Using the chain rule for °N, (see Exercise 3.9) and (8.22), we obtain from the above estimates
°µv = e-«t (fn
(w) IVwlg + f' (w) °uw) > e-at (cw f" (w) + Cf' (w)) ,
which yields `
Y - °v <
-e-at (a f
(w) + C f' (w) + cw f" (w))
,
8. POSITIVE SOLUTIONS
228
where we have merged two similar terms Cf' (w). Now specify f as follows:
f (W) = (r2 -'W)2. Obviously, this function is smooth, positive in [0, r2), vanishes at r2, and satisfies (8.22). We are left to verify that, for a choice of a, c if (w) + C f' (w) + cw f" (w) > 0 for all w c [0, r2], which will imply (8.20). Indeed, we have
of (w)+Cf'(w)+cwf"(w) = a(r2-w)2-2C(r2-w)+2cw = az2-2(C+c)z+2cr2, where z = r2 - w. Clearly, for large enough a, this quadratic polynomial is positive for all real z, which finishes the proof of the Claim. The proof of Theorem 8.11 can now be completed as follows. Assuming u (t', x') = 0, let us show that u (t, x) = 0 for all (t, x) E I x M with t < t'. By the continuity of u, it suffices to prove that for t < t'. Since M is connected, it is possible to find a finite sequence {xz}k o so that xo = x, Xk = x', and any two consecutive points xi and xti+l are contained in the same chart together with the straight line segment between them. t
t= to
x=xp
x1
x2
x3
xk=x
M
FIGURE 8.3. If non-negative supersolution u vanishes at (t', x') then it vanishes also at any point (t, x) with t < t'. Choosing arbitrarily a sequence of times (see Fig. 8.3)
t=to 0 then also u (tj, xi) > 0 and, continuing by induction, u (tk, xk) > 0, which contradicts the assumption u (t', x') = 0.
The strong maximum/minimum principle has numerous applications. Let us state some immediate consequences.
8.3. STRONG MAXIMUM/MINIMUM PRINCIPLE
229
COROLLARY 8.12. On a connected manifold (M, g, µ), the heat kernel pt (x) y) is strictly positive for all t > 0 and x, y E M.
PROOF. Assume that pt (x', y') = 0 for some t' > 0, x', y' E M. Since the function u (t, x) = pt (x, y') satisfies the heat equation (see Theorem 7.20), we obtain by Theorem 8.11 that pt (x, y') = 0 for all 0 < t < t' and all x E M. Consider any function f E Co (M) such that f (y') zA 0. By Theorem 7.13, we have fMPt (x, y') f (x) dy (x) --+ f (y')
as t - 0,
which, however, is not possible if pt (x, y') = 0 for small t > 0. Note that, by Example 9.10 below, if M is disconnected then pt (x, y) = 0 whenever x and y belong to different connected components of M.
8.3.2. Super- and subharmonic functions. DEFINITION 8.13. Let a E R. A function u E C2 (M) is called asuperharmonic on M if it satisfies the inequality -Dµu+au > 0. It is called a-subharmonic if -D,,,u + au < 0, and a-harmonic if -0µu + au = 0.
Of course, in the latter case u E C°° (M) by Corollary 7.3. If a = 0 then the prefix "a-" is suppressed, that is, u is superharmonic if AMU < 0, subharmonic if A Au < 0, and harmonic if 0µu = 0. COROLLARY 8.14. (Strong elliptic minimum principle) Let M be a connected weighted manifold and u be a non-negative a-superharmonic function
on M, where a E R. If u (xo) = 0 at some point x0 E M then u (x) = 0. PROOF. Consider function v (t, x) = eatu (x). The condition
-0µu + au > 0 implies that v is a supersolution to the heat equation in R x M, because av - 0µv = aeatu eat0µu > 0.
at
-
If u (x0) = 0 then also v (t, xo) = 0 for any t, which implies by Theorem 8.11
that v (t, x) = 0 and, hence, u = 0. There is a direct "elliptic" proof of the strong elliptic minimum principle,
which does not use the heat equation and which is simpler than the proof of Theorem 8.11 (see Exercise 8.4).
COROLLARY 8.15. Let M be a connected weighted manifold. If u is a
superharmonic function in M and u (x0) = inf u at some point xo then u = inf u. If u is a subharmonic function in M and u (xo) = sup u as some point xo then u -=sup u. PROOF. The first. claim follows from Corollary 8.14 because the function
u - inf u is non-negative and superharmonic. The second claim trivially follows from the first one.
8. POSITIVE SOLUTIONS
230
COROLLARY 8.16. (Elliptic minimum principle) Let M be a connected weighted manifold and SZ be a relatively compact open subset of M with non-
empty boundary. If u E C (S2) fl C2 (52) is a superharmonic function in Sl then inf u = inf u. an n PROOF. Set m = infa u and consider the set
S={xES2:u(x)=m}. We just need to show that S intersects the boundary 852. Assuming the contrary, consider any point x E S. Then x E it and, in any connected open neighborhood U C SZ of x, function u takes its minimal value at the point x. By Corollary 8.15, we conclude that u - m in U, which means that U c S and, hence, S is an open set. Since set S is also closed and non-empty, the connectedness of M implies S = M, which contradicts to
Sc52CM\852. A companion statement to Corollary 8.16 is the maximum principle for subharmonic functions: under the same conditions, if u is subharmonic then sup u = sup U. an ?i
Exercises. 8.4. Let M be a connected weighted manifold and E, F be two compact subsets of M. Prove that, for any real a there is a constant C = C (a, E, F) such that, for any nonnegative a-superharmonic function u on M, inf u < C inf u. E
-
F
8.5. (A version of the elliptic minimum principle) Let M be a non-compact connected weighted manifold and let u (t, x) E C2 (M) be a superharmonic function. Prove that if lim sup u (xk) > 0
(8.23)
k-4oo
for any sequence {xk} such that xk -4 oo in M, then u (x) > 0 for all x E M.
8.6. (A version of the parabolic minimum principle) Fix T E (0, +oo] and consider the manifold N = (0, T) x M. We say that a sequence {(tk,xk)}k 1 of points in N escapes from N if one of the following two alternatives takes place as k -* oc:
1. xk--+ ooinMandtk -+tE [0,T];
2. xk-4xEMand tk- 0.
Let u (t, x) E C2 (N) be a supersolution to the heat equation in N. Prove that if lim sup u (tk, xk) > 0 k-+oo
for any sequence {(tk, xk)} that escapes from N, then u (t, x) > 0 for all (t, x) E N.
(8.24)
8.4. STOCHASTIC COMPLETENESS
231
8.4. Stochastic completeness DEFINITION 8.17. A weighted manifold (M, g, p) is called stochastically complete if the heat kernel pt (x, y) satisfies the identity
IM
pt (x, y) d,u (y) = 1,
(8.25)
for all t>0and xEM. The condition (8.25) can also be stated as Ptl - 1. Note that in general we have 0 < Ptl < 1 (cf. Theorems 5.11 and 7.16). If the condition (8.25) fails, that is, Ptl 0- 1 then the manifold M is called stochastically incomplete. Our purpose here is to provide conditions for the stochastic completeness
(or incompleteness) in various terms.
8.4.1. Uniqueness for the bounded Cauchy problem. Fix 0 < T < oo, set I = (0, T) and consider the Cauchy problem in I x M
j at =A u, inIxM, u1t=o = f
(8.26)
where f is a given function from Cb (M). The problem (8.26) is understood in the classical sense, that is, u c CO° (I x M) and u (t, x) --+ f (x) locally uniformly in x E M as t --+ 0. Here we consider the question of the uniqueness of a bounded solution of (8.26). THEOREM 8.18. Fix a > 0 and T E (0, oo]. For any weighted manifold (M, g, p), the following conditions are equivalent. (a) M is stochastically complete. (b) The equation O,-,v = av in M has the only bounded non-negative solution v = 0. (c) The Cauchy problem in (0, T) x M has at most one bounded solution.
REMARK 8.19. As we will see from the proof, in condition (b) the assumption that v is non-negative can be dropped without violating the statement.
PROOF. We first assume T < oo and prove the following sequence of implications
- (b)
- (c) -, (a) , where -, means the negation of the statement. Proof of - (a) -, (b). So, we assume that M is stochastically incomplete and prove that there exists a non-zero bounded solution to the equation --A,v + av = 0. Consider the function (a)
u (t, x) = Ptl (x) =
fm
pt (x, y) dp (y) ,
8. POSITIVE SOLUTIONS
232
which is C°° smooth, 0 < u < 1 and, by the hypothesis of stochastic incompleteness, u # 1. Consider also the function 00
W (x) = Ra1(x) = J
e-atu (t, x) dt,
o
(8.27 )
which, by Theorem 8.7 and Corollary 8.6, is C°°-smooth, satisfies the estimate 0 < w < a-1 (8.28) and the equation -&, w + caw = 1. (8.29) It follows from u 0 1 that there exist x E M and t > 0 such that u (t, x) < 1.
Then (8.27) implies that, for this value of x, we have a strict inequality w (x) < 01-1. Hence, w # a-1. Finally, consider the function v = 1 - aw, which by (8.29) satisfies the equation Acv = av. It follows from (8.28) that 0 < v < 1, and w # a-1 implies v 0 0. Hence, we have constructed a non-zero non-negative bounded solution to A v = av, which finishes the proof. Proof of (b) = (c). Let v be a bounded non-zero solution to equation
A,v = av. By Corollary 7.3, v E C°° (M). Then the function u (t, x) = eats (x)
(8.30)
satisfies the heat equation because DtLu = eatLµv = aeaty = at
Hence, u solves the Cauchy problem in R+ x M with the initial condition u (0, x) = v (x), and this solution u is bounded on (0, T) x M (note that T is finite). Let us compare u (t, x) with another bounded solution to the same Cauchy problem, namely with Ptv (x). By Theorem 7.16, we have sup IPtvj < sup IvI, whereas by (8.30)
sup Ju (t, )I = eat sup lvl > sup jvj.
Therefore, u # Ptv, and the bounded Cauchy problem in (0, T) x M has two different solutions with the same initial function v. Proof of -, (c) (a). Assume that the problem (4.43) has two different bounded solutions with the same initial function. Subtracting these solutions, we obtain a non-zero bounded solution u (t, x) to (4.43) with the
initial function f = 0. Without loss of generality, we can assume that 0 < sup u < 1. Consider the function w = 1 - u, for which we have 0 < inf w < 1. The function w is a non-negative solution to the Cauchy problem (4.43) with the initial function f = 1. By Theorem 8.1 (or Corollary 8.3), we conclude that w (t, ) > Pt 1. Hence, inf PtI < 1 and M is stochastically incomplete.
8.4. STOCHASTIC COMPLETENESS
233
Finally, let us prove the equivalence of (a), (b), (c) in the case T = cc.
Since the condition (c) with T = oo is weaker than that for T < oo, it suffices to show that (c) with T = oc implies (a). Assume from the contrary
that M is stochastically incomplete, that is, Ptl 0- 1. Then the functions ul - 1 and u2 = Ptl are two different bounded solutions to the Cauchy problem (4.43) in R x M with the same initial function f - 1, so that (a) fails, which was to be proved.
Exercises. 8.7. Prove that any compact weighted manifold is stochastically complete.
8.8. Prove that R' is stochastically complete (cf. Exercise 8.11).
8.9. Prove that ifPtl(x)=lforsome t>0,xEMthen Ptl(x)=1forallt>0,xEM. 8.10. Fix a > 0. Prove that M is stochastically complete if and only if
a-1.
8.4.2. a-Super- and subharmonic functions. We prove here convenient sufficient conditions for stochastic completeness and incompleteness
in terms of the existence of certain a-super- and a-subharmonic functions (see Sections 8.3.2 for the definitions).
THEOREM 8.20. Let M be a connected weighted manifold and K C M be a compact set. Assume that, for some a > 0, there exists an asuperharmonic function v in M \ K such that v (x) -3 +oo as x -+ 002. Then M is stochastically complete.
PROOF. By enlarging K, we can assume v is defined also on aK and
that v > 0 in M \ K. Then v is also 0-superharmonic in M \ K for any a so we can assume a > 0. By Theorem 8.18, in order to prove that M is stochastically complete, it suffices to verify that any non-negative bounded solution M to the equation AAu = au is identical zero. Assume that 0 < u < 1 and set
m = maxu. K
Then, for any e > 0, we have
Ev>0>u-m on8K.
(8.31)
By hypothesis v (x) -3 +oo as x - oo and Exercise 5.18, the set {v < E-1} is relatively compact; therefore, there exists a relatively compact open set 1 C M that contains {v < e-1} and K. Compare the functions Ev and u-m in S2 \ K. By the choice of S2, we have v > e-1 on 8SZ and, consequently,
ev > 1 > u - m on 0SZ. In SZ \ K, the function ev satisfies the equation -Ou, (EV) + a (ev) = 0, 2See Definition 5.18.
(8.32)
8. POSITIVE SOLUTIONS
234
whereas
-Aµ(u-m)-I-a(u-m)=-am<0, whence it following that the function ev-(u - m) is superharmonic in 11\K. By (8.31) and (8.32), we have ev > u - m on the boundary a (SZ \ K), which
implies by Corollary 8.16 that ev > u - m in 12 \ K. Exhausting M by a sequence of sets 2, we obtain that ev > u - m holds in M \ K; finally, letting
e- 0, we obtain u < m in M \ K. Hence, m is the supremum of u on the entire manifold M, and this supremum is attained at a point in K. Since &, u = au > 0, that is, the function u is subharmonic, Corollary 8.14 implies that u - m on M. The equation Au = au then yields m = 0 and u = 0, which was to be proved.
O
THEOREM 8.21. Let M be a connected weighted manifold. Assume that there exists a non-negative superharmonic function u on M such that u coast and u E Ll (M). Then M is stochastically incomplete. PROOF. Let us first construct another non-negative superharmonic func-
tion v on M such that v E LI (M) and Dµv # 0. Fix a point x0 E M such that Vu (xo) 0 and set c = u (x0). Then the function u := min (u, c) is not differentiable at xo. Consider the function Ptu. Since u is superharmonic, we have by Exercise 7.29
Ptu
Ptu
Ptu
8.33)
Therefore,
Pt+su = P3(Ptu) < Ptu,
that is,
at
Ptu < 0.
8.34)
Since Ptii is a smooth function for any t > 0, and ii is not, we see that there
ist>0andxeMsuch that
at
Ptu (x) < 0.
(8.35)
Set v = Ptii and observe that, by (8.33), (8.34), and (8.35), v E LI (M) , -0µv > 0 and Dµv # 0.
Therefore, there exists a non-negative function f E Co (M) such that f 0 0
and -0µv > f on M. Since v E W' (M) and v satisfies for any a > 0 the inequality
-&µv -}- av > f,
8.4. STOCHASTIC COMPLETENESS
235
Theorem 8.4 yields v > Ra f a.e.(cf. Remark 8.5). Since R, ,f is smooth by Theorem 8.7, we obtain v > Ra f pointwise. Letting a -9 0 and using (8.10), we obtain, for all x E M,
f
00
v (x) >
0
Ptf (x) dt =
ff 0
M
pt (x, y) f (y) dµ (y) dt.
Integrating in x and using the condition v E L1 (M), we obtain
f ff M
M
pt (x, y) f (y) dµ (y) dtdp (x) < oo,
whence it follows by interchanging the order of integration that 00
f J However, if M is stochastically complete and, hence, Ptl = 1, this integral Pt1(y) f (y) dµ (y) dt < co.
M
should be equal to
f
( f°° t\ M f (y) d(y) dt = oo. This contradiction finishes the proof.
REMARK 8.22. The hypothesis u # const cannot be dropped because it can happen that 1 E L' (M) and M is stochastically complete, for example, if M is a compact manifold (see Exercise 8.7).
THEOREM 8.23. Assume that, for some a > 0, there exists a non-zero non-negative bounded a-subharmonic function v on M. Then M is stochastically incomplete. PROOF. By hypothesis, we have Dµv > av and, without loss of generality, we can assume that 0 < v < 1. Let {1 k} be a compact exhaustion sequence in M. Consider in each S2k the following weak Dirichlet problem
-Dµuk + auk = 0 uk = 1 mod Wo (Slk) .
(8.36)
Since 1 E W1 (92k), this problem has a unique solution uk, by Exercise 4.29 (or by Theorem 4.5). We will show that V C Uk+1 < uk < 1
(8.37)
(see Fig. 8.4), which will imply that the sequence {uk} has a limit u that,
hence, satisfies the equation 0u = au on M and v < u < 1. The latter means that u is bounded but non-zero, which implies by Theorem 8.18 that M is stochastically incomplete. To prove (8.37), observe that function v belongs to W1 (&2k) and obviously satisfies the conditions
-0µv + av < 0,
v<1.
(8-38)
8. POSITIVE SOLUTIONS
236
FIGURE 8.4. Functions v, uk, uk+l
Comparing (8.36) and (8.38) and using Corollary 5.14, we conclude v < uk. Since the constant function 1 satisfies the condition
-L h1 + al > 0, the comparison with (8.36) shows that Uk < 1. Of course, the same applies also to Uk+l. Noticing that uk+1 satisfies in S2k the conditions -& Uk+1 + auk+1 = 0, 1 uk+1 <_ 1,
and comparing them to (8.36), we obtain Uk+1 < uk, which finishes the proof.
Exercises. 8.11. Prove the following claims.
(a) 118" is stochastically complete for all n > 1. (cf. Exercise 8.8).
(b) 1R' \ {0} is stochastically complete if n > 2, whereas 1[81 \ {O} is stochastically incomplete. (c) Any open set f2 C ]R such that n 54 R', is stochastically incomplete.
8.12. Let Sl be an open subset of 1IV and h be a positive smooth function in ) such that
Ah=0in0, h (x) = e°(I-I) as jxj -+ oo
Prove that P°h = h for all t > 0. 8.13. Let f be a non-negative superharmonic function on M. (a) Prove that the function v (x) . tlm Pt f (x) +00
(8.39)
satisfies the identity Ptv = v for all t > 0 and, hence, is harmonic on M (the limit in (8.39) exists and is finite because by Exercise 7.29 the function Pt f (x) is finite and decreases in t). (b) Assume in addition that manifold M is stochastically complete and f is bounded. Prove that, for any non-negative harmonic function h on M, the condition h < f implies h < v.
8.4. STOCHASTIC COMPLETENESS
237
REMARK. The maximal non-negative harmonic function that is bounded by f is called the
largest harmonic minorant of f. Hence, the function v is the largest harmonic minorant of f. 8.14. Set v (x) = limt..r Ptl (x). Prove that either v - 0 or sup v = 1. Prove also that either v - 1 or inf v = 0.
8.15. Let SI be the exterior of the unit ball in R', n > 2. Evaluate limt, Pt 1 (x).
8.4.3. Model. manifolds. Let (M, g, E.i) be a weighted model based on M = ][8' as it was defined in Section 3.10. This means that, in the polar coordinates (r, 0) in R', the metric g and measure p are expressed as follows: g = dr2 + b (r) 2 gsn-1,
(8.40)
where V) (r) is a smooth positive function on (0, +oo), and dp. = T (r)
(r)'-1 drd0,
where dO is the Riemannian measure on function on (0, +oo). Recall that
(8.41)
S'z-1 and T (r) is a smooth positive
S (r) := w,zT (r) 2bn'-1 (r)
is the area function of M, and
V(Br)=fs(t)dt is the volume function of M. By (3.93), the weighted Laplace operator of (M, g, y) has in the polar coordinates the following form:
0A _ 3r2 + S
)
ar +
y2
1r)
(8.42)
It is important to observe that, away from a neighborhood of 0, the functions
(r) and T (r) can be chosen arbitrarily as long as they are smooth and positive. Near 0 some care should be taken to ensure that the metric g, defined by (8.40), extends smoothly to the origin. If 0 (r) and T (r) are prescribed for large r then it is always possible to extend them to all r > 0 so that 0 (r) = r and T (r) = 1 for small enough r. This ensures that the metric and measure in a neighborhood of the origin are exactly Euclidean and, hence, can be extended to the origin. It follows from this observation that any function S (r) can serve as the area function for large r, as long as S (r) is smooth and positive. Furthermore, setting T 1, we can realize S (r) as the area function of a Riemannian model.
Our main result here is the following criterion of the stochastic completeness of the model manifold.
8. POSITIVE SOLUTIONS
238
THEOREM 8.24. The weighted model (M, g, u) as above is stochastically complete if and only if O° V (r)
J
S (r)
dr = oo.
(8.43)
For example, if V (r) = exp r' for large r then M is stochastically com-
plete if a < 2 and incomplete if a > 2. The manifolds R' and En with their canonical metrics satisfy (8.43) because S (r) = wnrn-1 for Rn and S (r) = w, sinhn-1 r for IH[n (see Section 3.10). Hence, both R and Hn are stochastically complete. Note that 5n is stochastically complete by Exercise 8.7.
PROOF. Let us show that (8.43) implies the stochastic completeness of M. By Theorem 8.20, it suffices to construct a 1-superharmonic function v = v (r) in the domain {r > 1} such that v (r) -> +oo as r -* oo. In fact, we construct v as a solution to the equation AAv = v, which in the polar coordinates has the form
v+v'-v=0. " -
(8.44)
So, let v be the solution of the ordinary differential equation (8.44) on [1, +oc) with the initial values v(1) = 1 and v'(1) = 0. The function v(r) is monotone increasing because the equation (8.44) after multiplying by Sv and integrating from 1 to R, amounts to /R
Svv'(R) = J S (v12 + v2) dr > 0. 1
Hence, we have v _> 1.
Multiplying (8.44) by S, we obtain
(Sv')' = Sv, which implies by two integrationsf
v(R) = 1+ I R S(r)
f I r S(t)v(t)dt.
Using v > 1 in the right hand side, we obtain, for R > 2, JR (V(r) - V(1))dr > c J2R V(r)dr v(R) > R dr JRS(t)dt S(r) S(r) S(r)
-
--
-
where c = 1 - V(2) > 0. Finally, (8.43) implies v (R) --+ oo as R - oo. Now we assume that
S (r) dr < oo,
(8.45)
and prove that M is stochastically incomplete. By Theorem 8.21, it suffices to construct on M a non-negative function u E L1 (M) such that -AY U = f, (8.46)
8.4. STOCHASTIC COMPLETENESS
239
where where f E Co (M), f > 0 and f 0 0. Both functions u and f will depend only on r so that (8.46) in the domain of the polar coordinates becomes U11+
S
u'= f.
(8.47)
Choose f (r) to be any non-negative non-zero function from Co (1, 2), and set, for any R > 0, 00
U (R) = IR
dr jor S (t) f (t) dt. S (r)
(8.48)
Since f is bounded, the condition (8.43) implies that u is finite. It is easy to see that u satisfies the equation
(Su')' = -Sf, which is equivalent to (8.47). The function u (R) is constant on the interval
0 < R < 1 because f (t) - 0 for 0 < t < 1. Hence, u extends by continuity to the origin and satisfies (8.46) on the whole manifold. We are left to verify that u E Ll (M). Since f (t) - 0 for t > 2, we have
forR>2 u (R) = C
/r°°
dr
JR S (r)
where C = fo S (t) f (t) dt. Therefore,
f
00
udtC = R>2}
u (R) S (R) dR
J2
dr C J `0 (fR S (r) 00
/
S (R) dR
= C /2'f
(f' S (R) dR)// Sdr(r)
s
J
dr < oo,
which gives u E L1 (M). EXAMPLE 8.25. Let us show that, for any continuous positive increasing
function F (r) on (0, +oo) such that F (r) -+ oo as r -+ oo, there exists a stochastically complete model M for which
F (r) - 1 < V (r) < F (r)
(8.49)
,
for large enough r. Indeed, for large r, the volume function V (r) of a weighted model M may be any smooth positive increasing function. Choose first any such function V (r) satisfying
F (r) - 1/2 < V (r) < F (r)
,
(8.50)
240
8. POSITIVE SOLUTIONS
and then modify V (r) as follows. Select a sequence of disjoint intervals (ak, bk) such that ak ---+ oC and
F (bk) = F (ak) + 1/2. (8.51) Now reduce V (r) on each interval (ak, bk) to create inside (ak, bk) the points with very small derivative V' (r) while keeping the values of V (r) at the ends and the monotonicity, which together with (8.50) and (8.51) will ensure (8.49) for the modified V (see Fig. 8.5).
ak
bk
r
FIGURE 8.5. Modification of function V (r) on the interval (ak, bk).
By doing so, we can make the value of integral fak v ) dr arbitrarily large, say, larger than 1, which implies ao
J
V,()dr = oo. r
Therefore, M is stochastically complete by Theorem 8.24.
Exercises. 8.16. (A -model with two ends) Set M = R x S'-1 (where n > 1) so that every point x E M can be represented as a couple (r, 0) where r E R and 0 E S"-1. Fix smooth positive functions 0 (r) and T (r) on II8, and consider the Riemannian metric on M g = dr2 + y)2 (r) gsn-1,
and measure µ on (M, g) with the density function T. Define the area function S (r) by S (r) = wnT (r) on-1 (r) and volume function V (R) by
V (R) = f
S (r) dr,
[o,R]
so that V (R) > 0. (a) Show that the expression (8.42) for Du remains true in this setting.
NOTES
241
(b) Prove that if function V (r) is even then the following are equivalent: (i) (M, g, µ) is stochastically complete. (ii) There is a non-constant non-negative harmonic function u E L' (M, µ). (r) dr = oo. (iii) f o VV(r) (c) Let S (r) satisfy the following relations for some a > 2: S (r)
-{
eexp (ral)
xp
la), r < 1 1.
Prove that (M, g,,u) is stochastically incomplete. Prove that any non-negative harmonic function u E L' (M,,u) is identical zero.
Notes The material of Sections 8.1 and 8.2 extends the Markovian properties of Chapter 5. The proofs of the parabolic maximum/minimum principles (Theorems 8.10 and 8.11) are taken from [243]. Theorems 8.18, 8.20, 8.23 are due to Khas'minskii [223] (see also [93], [155]), Theorems 8.21, 8.24 were proved in [142] (see also [155]).
CHAPTER 9
Heat kernel as a fundamental solution Recall that the heat kernel was introduced in Chapter 7 as the integral kernel of the heat semigroup. Here we prove that the heat kernel can be characterized as the minimal positive fundamental solution of the heat equation. This equivalent definition of the heat kernel is frequently useful in applications.
9.1. Fundamental solutions DEFINITION 9.1. Any smooth function u on R+ x M satisfying the following conditions 1
at = Ofu
in 1+ x M, by
9.1
as t--0,
is called a fundamental solution to the heat equation at the point y. If in addition u > 0 and, for all t > 0, 1,
(9.2)
then u is called a regular fundamental solution. As it follows from Theorem 7.13, the heat kernel pt (x, y) as a function of t, x is a regular fundamental solution at y. The following elementary lemma is frequently useful for checking that a given solution to the heat equation is a regular fundamental solution. LEMMA 9.2. Let u (t, x) be a smooth non-negative function on R+ x M satisfying (9.2). Then the following conditions are equivalent: (a)
-*by ast-+0.
(b) For any open set U containing y,
as t-}0.
(9.3)
(c) For any f E Cb (M), fd/-t -4 f (y) as t-++0. 243
(9.4)
9. HEAT KERNEL AS A FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTION
244
PROOF. The implication (c) = (a) is trivial because u (t, ) J. is equivalent to (9.4) for all f E D (M). (a) = (b). Let f c D (U) be a cutoff function of the set {y} in U. Then (9.4) holds for this f. Since f (y) = 1 and
f
Mu(t,fdu<
fuu(t, )dl-t<1,
(9.3) follows from (9.4).
(b) = (c) . For any open set U containing y, we have
fM
u (t, x) f (x) dµ (x)
=
f
M\U u
(t, x) f (x) dp (x)
+ J u (t, x) (f (x) - f (y)) dp (x) U f +f (y) u (t, x) dp (x) JU The last term here tends to f (y) by (9.3). The other terms are estimated as follows:
fM\U
u (t, x) f (x) dp <supIfI
fM\uu(t,x)dµ(x)
(9.5)
and
fu(t,x)(f(x)_f(Y))dsup I.f (x) - f (y)I f u (tx) d(x) XEU U
sup If (x) - f (y)I
xEU
(9.6)
Obviously, the right hand side of (9.5) tends to 0 as t --} 0 due to (9.2) and (9.3). By the continuity of f at y, the right hand side of (9.6) can be made arbitrarily small uniformly in t by choosing U to be a small enough neighborhood of y. Combining the above three lines, we obtain (9.4).
O
REMARK 9.3. As we see from the last part of the proof, (9.4), in fact, holds for arbitrary f E L°° (M) provided f is continuous at the point y.
The next lemma is needed for the proof of main result of this section Theorem 9.5.
LEMMA 9.4. Let u (t, x) be a non-negative smooth function on R+ x M such that u (t, ) - ay as t -4 0. Then, for any open set f C= M and any
f E Cb (f),
L. as t--30.
u (t, x) f (x) dµ (x) -->
j f (y), l 0,
if y E 0,
ifyEM\S2,
(9.7)
9.1. FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTIONS
245
REMARK. Extend f to M by setting f = 0 outside Q. Then in the both cases in (9.7), f is continuous at y. Hence, (9.7) follows from Lemma 9.2 and Remark 9.3, provided u satisfies (9.2). However, we need (9.7) without the hypothesis (9.2), which requires a more elaborate argument.
PROOF. If f E D (S2) then, by hypothesis u (t, ) which implies (9.7).
6y, we have (9.4),
Representing f E Cb (Il) as f = f+ - f_, it suffices to prove (9.7) for non-negative f . By scaling f, we can assume without loss of generality that
O< f <1. Let us first prove (9.7) for y E M\n. Let b E D (M) be a cutoff function of SZ in M \ {y} (see Fig. 9.1).
FIGURE 9.1. Functions f and
.
Then f
fu(t,.)d(y)=0as t
0,
Z
which implies
f u (t, f dp
0.
Assume now y E S2 and set f (y) = a. By the continuity of f at y, for any E > 0 there exists an open neighborhood U C= SZ of y such that
a-E< f
so that
(a-E)cp< f <(a+E)z/5 in U.
y FIGURE 9.2. Functions f, cp, 0.
9. HEAT KERNEL AS A FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTION
246
have
Therefore,
fd<(a+E)fu (t,dµ.
fu (a - e)Ju U
Passing to the limit as tf-+ 0, we obtain lim sup t--+O
JU
u (t, )fdµ < (a + E) V) (y) = a +
(9.8)
and
liminf J u (t, ) fdµ > (a - e) cp (y) = a - E. t->o
Let us show that
(9.9)
U
f
f
f dµ-+0.
(9.10)
Indeed, let V C U be an open neighborhood of y. Since P \ V is a relatively
compact open set and y 0 sZ \ V, we obtain by the first part of the proof that 0,
whence (9.10) follows.
Finally, combining together (9.8), (9.9), (9.10) and letting E -3 0, we obtain fdµ-*a= f (y) ast--30. The next theorem provides a characterization of the heat kernel, which can serve as an alternative definition. THEOREM 9.5. For any y E M, the heat kernel pt (x, y) is the minimal non-negative fundamental solution of the heat equation at y. PROOF. Let u (t, x) be another non-negative fundamental solution at y, and fix s > 0. The function t, x H u (t + s, x) satisfies the heat equation in R+ x M and, hence, u (t + s, x) can be considered as a non-negative solution to the Cauchy problem in R+ x M with the initial function f (x) = u (s, x). Since u is a smooth function, we have f E L210c (M) and 2
u(t+s,) L-` f ast-->0. all t > 0 and x E M, By Theorem 8.1, we conclude that, for all (9.11) u (t + s, x) > Pt f (x) = fMPt (x, z) u (s, z) dµ (z) . Fix now t > 0, x E M and choose an open set SZ C M containing y. Then
pt (x, ) E Cb (S2) and, by Lemma 9.4, in pt (x, z) a (s, z) dµ (z) --+ pt (x, y) ass ---* 0.
247
9.1. FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTIONS
Hence, letting s -4 0 in (9.11), we obtain u (t, x) > pt (x, y), which was to be proved.
COROLLARY 9.6. Let (M, g, µ) be a stochastically complete weighted manifold. If u (t, x) is a regular fundamental solution at a point y E M,
then u (t, x) - pt (x, y). PROOF. By Theorem 9.5, we have u (t, x) > pt (x, y), which implies
1 > f u (t, x) dp (x) > J pt (x, y) dp (x) = 1, M
M
where in the last part we have used the stochastic completeness of M. We conclude that all the inequalities above are actually equalities, which is only possible when u (t, x) = pt (x, y). The next theorem helps establishing the identity of a fundamental solution and the heat kernel using the "boundary condition", which may be useful in the case of stochastic incompleteness. THEOREM 9.7. Let u (t, x) be a non-negative fundamental solution to the
heat equation at y E M. If u (t, x) 0 as x -f oc where the convergence is uniform in t E (0,T) for any T > 0, then u (t, x) = pt (x, y). REMARK 9.8. The hypothesis that u (t, x) is non-negative can be relaxed
to the assumption that lim sup u (tk, xk) > 0, k-oo
(9.12)
for any sequence (tk, xk) such that tk -+ 0 and xk -4 x E M. Indeed, by the maximum principle of Exercise 8.6, (9.12) together with the other hypotheses implies u > 0. PROOF. By Theorem 9.5, we have u (t, x) > pt (x, y) so that we only need to prove the opposite inequality. Fix some s > 0 and notice that the function v (t, x) = u (t + s, x) solves the heat equation with the initial function f (x) = v (0, x) = u (s, x). Since v (t, x) = 0 as x --> oo, we obtain by Corollary 8.2 that v (t, x) = Ptf (x) that is, u (t + s, x) = Ptf (x) = fM pt (x, ) u (s, ) dp.
Let {Slk}k1 be a compact exhaustion sequence in M. For any k, we have u (t + s, x)
- in
pt (x, ) u (s, ) dp =
SZ k
fM\Slk
pt (x, ) u (s, ) dg
sup a (s, ) fmn\Qk pt (x, ) dµ. M\Slk
Since the total integral of the heat kernel is bounded by 1 and sup u (s, z) -+ 0 as k --+ oo, sup sE(O,T) zEM\Slk
9. HEAT KERNEL AS A FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTION
248
we see that, for any E > 0 there is k so big that, for all s c (0, T),
u (t + s, x) -
pt (x, ) u (s, ) d < a.
Letting here s -* 0 and applying Lemma 9.4 in 92k with function f = pt (x, ), we obtain
U(t,x)-Pt(x,y) <E. Since E > 0 is arbitrary, we conclude u (t, x) < pt (x, y), which was to be proved.
EXAMPLE 9.9. By Lemma 1.1, the Gauss-Weierstrass function
Pt (x, y) _ (47rt )n/2 exp -'x 4tyl
(9.13)
is a regular fundamental solution of the heat equation in R. Since Rn is stochastically complete, we conclude by Corollary 9.6 that pt (x, y) is the heat kernel in R n. Alternatively, this can be concluded by Theorem 9.7 because pt (x, y) --3 0 as x -3 oo uniformly in t (cf. Exercise 1.5). Yet another proof of the fact that pt (x, y) is the heat kernel in ' was given in Example 4.12.
EXAMPLE 9.10. For any weighted manifold (M, g, /2) and an open set 92 C M, denote as before by pt (x, y) the heat kernel in (92, g, it). Extend pt (x, y) to all x, y c M by setting it to 0 if either x or y is outside Q. Let us show that if 01 and 922 are two disjoint open sets and 92 = Q1 U 522 then
Pt = pt' + pt2
.
(9.14)
Indeed, if y c 921 then pt ' (x, y) is a fundamental solution not only in 921 but also in 92 because, being identical zero in i2i it satisfies the heat equation also in 922. Therefore, by the minimality of pt, we conclude pt (x, y) < pt"' (X, Y) On the other hand, since 921 C 92, we have the opposite inequality by Exercise 7.40. Hence, -
Pt (x, y) = At" (x, y) , which implies (9.14) because p0t2 (x, y) = 0. Similarly, (9.14) holds if y E 922.
The identity (9.14) implies that pt (x, y) = 0 if the points x, y belong to different connected components of M (assuming, of course, that M is disconnected). Indeed, if x is contained in a connected component 121 and 922 := M \ 01 then y E 922 and, hence, pt' (x, y) = 0 for i = 1, 2, whence Pt (x, y) = A" (x, y) +p2 (x, y) = 0.
9.2. Some examples We give here some examples of application of the techniques developed in the previous sections.
9.2. SOME EXAMPLES
249
9.2.1. Heat kernels on products. Let (X, gx, µx) and (Y, gy, µy) be two weighted manifold and (M, g, t) is their direct (see Section 3.8). Denote by pX and pt the heat kernels on X and Y, respectively. THEOREM 9.11. Assume that (M, g, p) is stochastically complete. Then the heat kernel pt on M satisfies the identity
pt ((x, y) , W, y')) = pt (x, x') pt (y, y')
,
(9.15)
for alit >0 andx,x' E X, y,y' E Y. The statement is true without the hypothesis of stochastic completeness, but the proof of that requires a different argument (see Exercise 7.41).
PROOF. Denote by OX and Ay the Laplace operators on X and Y, respectively. Then the Laplace operator 0,,, on M is given by
Duu = Oxu + Dyu, where u (x, y) is a smooth function on M, and OX acts on the variable x, Ay acts on the variable y (see Section 3.8). Fix (x', y') E M and prove that the function
u(t, (X, Y)) =pt (x,x')pt (y,y') is a regular fundamental solution at (x', y'), which will imply (9.15) by Corollary 9.6. Indeed, the heat equation for u is verified as follows:
at
at pt (x,
x') pt (y, y') + pt, (x, x')
pt (y, y')
oxpX (x, x') pt (y,) + Pt (x, x') Oypt (y, y') (Ax + Dy) u = AMU.
The integral of u is evaluated by
f
M
u (t, ) dp =
f MpX (., x') dµx JMpt (', y') d/ty < 1.
To check the condition (9.3) of Lemma 9.2, it suffices to take the set U C M
in the form U = V x W where V C X and W C Y. If (x', y') E U then x' E V and y' E W, which implies
fu u
(t,) dp =
pX
x') dlux fW pt (', y') dµy -+ 1
V
as t -4 0. Hence, by Lemma 9.2, u is a regular fundamental solution at (x', y').
11
9. HEAT KERNEL AS A FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTION
250
9.2.2. Heat kernels and isometries. We use here the notion of isometry of weighted manifolds introduced in Section 3.12. THEOREM 9.12. Let J : M -* M be an isometry of a weighted manifold (M, g, .t). Then the heat kernel of M is J-invariant, that is, for all t > 0 and X, y E M,
Pt (Jx, Jy) = Pt (x, y) See also Exercise 7.24 for an alternative proof.
(9.16)
PROOF. Let us first show that the function u (t, x) = pt (Jx, Jy) is a fundamental solution at y. Indeed, by Lemma 3.27, for any smooth function
f on M,
(0µf) (Jx) = Dµ (f (Jx)) Applying this for f = pt au
Jy), we obtain
a
at Pt (Jx, Jy) = (D&Pt) (Jx, Jy) = Dµu, so that u solves the heat equation. By Lemma 3.27, we have the identity at
f (x) dµ (x) , fm for any integrable function f. Hence, for any co E D (M),
f M f (Jx) dp (x) =
(9.17)
J u(t,x),p(x)dµ(x) = J pt(Jx,Jy)cp(x)dp(x) M
M
= fMPt (x, Jy) w (J-1x) da (x)
.
Since pt (x, Jy) is a fundamental solution at Jy, the last integral converges
as t-+0to
(gyp o J-1)
(Jy) = co (y)
,
which proves that u (t, x) by. Hence, u (t, x) is a non-negative fundamental solution at y, which implies by Theorem 9.5
u(t,x) ?Pt(x,y), that is,
Pt(Jx,Jy) : Pt(x,y) Applying the same argument to J-1 instead of J, we obtain the opposite inequality, which finishes the proof.
EXAMPLE 9.13. By Exercise 3.46, for any four points x, y, x', y' E H7' such that d (x', y') = d (x, y),
there exists a Riemannian isometry J : El -4 H1 such that Jx' = x and Jy' = y. By Theorem 9.12, we conclude
Pt(x,y) =Pt(x,y)
9.2. SOME EXAMPLES
251
Hence, pt (x, y), as a function of x, y, depends only on the distance d (x, y).
9.2.3. Heat kernel on model manifolds. Let (M, g, p) be a weighed model as in Sections 3.10 and 8.4.3. That is, M is either a ball B,0 = {IxI < ro} in R7L or M = R7b (in this case ro = oo), and the metric g and the density function of p depend only on the polar radius. Let S (r) be the area function of (M, g, p) and pt (x, y) be the heat kernel. Let (M, g, µ) be another weighted model based on the same smooth manifold M, and let S (r) and pt (x, y) be its area function and heat kernel, respectively.
THEOREM 9.14. If S (r) - S (r) then pt (x, 0) = pt (y, 0) for all x, y E M such that jxj = !yL.
Note that the area function S (r) does not fully identify the structure of the weighted model unless the latter is a Riemannian model. Nevertheless, A (x, 0) is completely determined by this function. PROOF. Let us first show that pt (x, 0) = pt (y, 0) if I xI = lyI I. Indeed,
there is a rotation J of Il87L such that Jx = Jy and JO = 0. Since j is an isometry of (M, g, p), we obtain by Theorem 9.12 that pt is J-invariant, which implies the claim. By Lemma 9.2, the fact that a smooth non-negative function u (t, x) on I[8+ x M is a regular fundamental solution at 0, is equivalent to the conditions 8u
8t fM
u (t, x) dp (x) < 1,
(9.18)
fu(t,x)dP(x)1 ast0, E
for all 0 < e < ro. The heat kernel pt (x, 0) is a regular fundamental solution on (M, g, p) at the point 0, and it depends only on t and r = jxj so that we can write pt (x, 0) = u (t, r). Using the fact that u does not depend on the polar angle, we obtain from (3.93)
82u S' (r) 8u Auu-are+S(r)8r
For 0 < E < ro, we have by (3.86), (3.88), (3.91)
Judp = n f 6 fn 1 it (t, r) S (r) dOdr =
Be
f
it (t, r) S (r) dr.
252
9. HEAT KERNEL AS A FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTION
Hence, we obtain the following equivalent form of (9.18):
au _ 02u
S' (r) au
ar2 + S (r) 8r'
at ro
u (t, r) S (r) dr < 1,
J
(9.19)
o
fu(t,r)S(r)dr1 ast0. Since by hypothesis S (r) = S (r), the conditions (9.19) are satisfied also with S replaced by S, which means that u (t, r) is a regular fundamental solution at 0 also on the manifold (M, R, ;u). By Theorem 9.5, we conclude that u (t, I xl) > pt (x, 0), that is, pt (x, 0) ? At (x, 0)
The opposite inequality follows in the same way by switching pt and pt, which finishes the proof.
9.2.4. Heat kernel and change of measure. Let (M, g, h) be a weighted manifold. Any smooth positive function h on M determines a new measure µ on M by dµ = h2dp, (9.20) and, hence, a new weighted manifold (M, g, µ). Denote by Pt and pt respectively the heat semigroup and the heat kernel on (M, g, µ). THEOREM 9.15. Let h be a smooth positive function on M that satisfies the equation
&,h +ah=0,
(9.21)
where a is a real constant. Then the following identities holds C1 _
o (0t, + aid) o h,
Pt=eat1 oPtoh, at pt (x7 y)
pt ( x1 2J ) = e h (x) h (y)
(9.22) (9.23)
(
9 24) .
for all t > 0 and x, y E M. In (9.22) and (9.23), h and h are regarded as multiplication operators, the domain of the operators in (9.22) is CO° (M), and the domain of the operators in (9.23) is L2 (M, µ). The change of measure (9.20) satisfying (9.21) and the associated change of operator (9.22) are referred to as Doob's h-transform.
253
9.2. SOME EXAMPLES
PROOF. By the definition of the weighted Laplace operator (see Section 3.6), we obtain, for any smooth function f on M,
Of=
2
diva,(h2V f) = diva,(V f) + h2 (Vh2, Vf)g
+2(Oh,Vf)g
AI.f
(9.25)
On the other hand, using the equation (9.21) and the product rule for t (cf. Exercise 3.8) and (9.21), we obtain
1 A,. (hf) = h (h0,,,f + 2(Vh, Vf)g + f 0jh) +2(Vh,Vf)g+
OIf
f0ph
= Oj,f - af. Hence, we have the identity
O-f = A,, (hf) + af,
(9.26)
which is equivalent to (9.22). Next, fix a point y E M, set
u (t, x) = eat ht)
h (y)
and show that u (t, x) is a fundamental solution on (M, g, i) at point y. Using (9.26), we obtain
au (x, y) - au + eat ata pt h (x) h (y) at eat
au +
h (x) h (y)
= au + h (x) 1 `
Oot (x, y) h (x) eat pt (x, y) h (x) h (y)
= au + h A,, (hu) = au + ATu - au = D;,u, so that u solves the heat equation on (M, g'µ)For any function co E D (M), we have fM
u (t, x) cp (x) dµ (x) = f
r
eat pt (x' y) h (x) cp (x) dy (x) h (y)
Cet
h (y) Pt
(y).
Since h (x) cp (x) ED (M), we have Pt (h(P) (y) -4 hcp (y) as t -+ 0,
(9.27)
254
9. HEAT KERNEL AS A FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTION
whence it follows that fM u (t, x) o (x) dl (x)
and, hence, u (t, )
jo(y)
Sy on (M, g, fit).
Therefore, u is a non-negative fundamental solution on (M, g, E,c) at point
y and, by Theorem 9.5, we conclude that u (t, x) > pt (x, y), that is, eat pt (x, y) h (x) h (y)
> At (x, y)
(9.28)
To prove the opposite inequality, observe that the function h := h satisfies the equation
ah = 0, which follows from (9.26) because hh = 1 and
Aj,h =
cah = ah.
Switching the roles of /,t and /c, replacing a by -a and h by h, we obtain by the above argument e
-«t pt (x, y) h (x) h (y)
> Pt (x, Y),
which is exactly the opposite inequality in (9.28). Finally, using (9.20) and (9.24), we obtain, for any f e L2 (M, /2), Pt f
Im A (x, y) f (y) dµ (y)
f
eat pt (x) y) h (x) h (y)
M
f (y) h2 (y) dµ (y)
1
eat - Pt (f h) ,
whence (9.23) follows. EXAMPLE 9.16. The heat kernel in (RTh, gRn, p) with the Lebesgue mea-
sure µ is given by
A (x, y) _
)n/2 exp - I x 4t
(9.29)
(4-7rt
Let h be any positive smooth function on Rn that determines a new measure µ on RTh by dµ = h2 dµ. Then we have 0A = d2 and
0- =
d2 dx2
c
+2
d
h dx
(cf. (9.25)). The equation (9.21) becomes
h"+ah=0,
() 9.30
9.2. SOME EXAMPLES
255
which is satisfied, for example, if h (x) = cosh,(3x and a we have by (9.30)
In this case,
2
Du = d +2,Qcoth,3xd-. 22
By Theorem 9.15, we obtain eat pt (x, y) h (x) h (y)
pt (x) y)
-
1
1
(41rt)"2 cosh Ox cosh y
exp
lx-yl`
-2t
4t
EXAMPLE 9.17. Using the notation of the previous Example, observe that the heat kernel (9.29) is a regular fundamental solution also on (M, gRn, p)
where M := R' \ {0}. If n > 2 then by Exercise 8.11, M is stochastically complete, which implies by Corollary 9.6 that pt is the heat kernel also in M. Assuming n > 2, consider the following function h (x) = 1 x
12-n
,
that is harmonic in M (cf. Exercise 3.24). Hence, (9.21) holds for this function with a = 0. Defining measure µ by dE = h2d1.c, we obtain by Theorem 9.15 that the heat kernel in (M, g, µ) is given by
ll-2 n
pt (x, y) _ (4
lyln-2
exp
Ix _ 12 4t y
EXAMPLE 9.18. Consider in R' measure u is given by dp = ex2dx,
where dx is the Lebesgue measure. Then, by (9.30) with h = e2x2, 2
a = dx2 + 2x dx .
(9.31)
We claim that the heat kernel pt (x, y) of (R, gR, µ) is given by the explicit formula:
(2xYe2t_x2 _ pt (x) y) =
-
(9.32) t J1 e 4t which is a modification of the Mehler kernel (cf. Exercise 11.18). It is a matter of a routine (but hideous) computation to verify that the function ,
1
(27r sink 2t)
(9.32) does solve the heat equation and satisfy the conditions of Lemma 9.2, which implies that is it a regular fundamental solution. It is easy to see that x_4tyl 2
Pt (x, y) <-
exp
1
-t
,
which implies that pt (x) y) -+ 0 as x - oc uniformly in t (cf. Exercise 1.5). Hence, we conclude by Theorem 9.7 that pt (x, y) is indeed the heat kernel.
9. HEAT KERNEL AS A FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTION
256
Alternatively, this follows from Corollary 9.6 provided we know that the manifold (R, gR, p) is stochastically complete. To prove the latter, observe that (R, gR, p) fits the description of "a model with two ends" of Exercise 8.16. Its area function is S (r) = ere, and the volume function
V (r) =
ex2dx
J [O,rl
is even and satisfies the condition
+°°V(r)dr-oo, S (r)
because
2r as r -4 +oo.
S
Hence, by Exercise 8.16, (R, gg, ,u) is stochastically complete. Alternatively,
this conclusion follows also from Theorem 11.8, which will be proved in Chapter 11, because 1R is geodesically complete and, for large r, V (r) < exp (Cr2). EXAMPLE 9.19. Continuing the previous example, it easily follows from (9.31) that function e-x2
h (x) =
satisfies the equation
&h+2h=0.
Clearly, the change of measure dµ = h2dµ is equivalent to e-,2
d=
dx.
By Theorem 9.15 and (9.32), we obtain that the heat kernel pt of (R, gR, µ) is given by
pt (x) y) =
e2t
x
h (x) h (y) = pt (x, y) eXP (x2 + 2xye-2t
_1
(27r sinh2t) "2
exp
y2 + 2t)
- (x2 + y2) e-4t + 1 - e-4t
t
9.2.5. Heat kernel in 1H13. As was shown in Example 9.13, the heat kernel pt (x, y) in the hyperbolic space IEI[' is a function of r = d (x, y) and t. The following formulas for pt (x, y) are known: if n = 2m + 1 then
(-1) m
1
Pt (x1 y) _ (27r)' (47rt)1/2
and if n = 2m + 2 then _ (-1)m'_/ V Pt (x' y)
(29r)m (4irt)
e
2mf1 2 t 4
a
(sinhr 8r
am ( sinh rOr )
e
_m2t_r2 4t
,
(9.33)
Se- 4t ds
1
r
(cosh s - cosh r)2 (9.34)
9.2. SOME EXAMPLES
257
In particular, the heat kernel in 12 is given by _1t e
pt ( )
4
se-4tds
I
1,
(cosh s - cosh r) 2
9.35 (
)
and the heat kernel in 1H13 is expressed by a particularly simple formula 1
Pt (X, y) =
r
(4,,t) 3/2 sink r
r2 exp - 4t t
.
(
(9.36)
Of course, once the formula is known, one can prove it by checking that it is a regular fundamental solution, and then applying Corollary 9.6, because H is stochastically complete. We will give here a non-computational proof of (9.36), which to some extend also explains why the heat kernel has this form. Rename y by o and let (r, 0) be the polar coordinates (r, 0) in i3 \ {o}. By means of the polar coordinates, 13 can be identified with ii and considered as a model (see Sections 3.10 and 9.2.3). The area function of 1H13 is given by S (r) = 4ir sinh2 r,
and the Laplacian in the polar coordinates is as follows: 8 a2 + 2 coth r OHs = + 1 OS2 Ore
Or
sinh2 r
.
(9.37)
Denote by p the Riemannian measure of IE113. For a smooth positive function h on IEL3, depending only on r, consider the weighted model (]H[3, /.t) where dµ = h2dp. The area function of (IH[3, µ) is given by
S (r) = h2 (r) S (r) . Choose function h as follows:
r sinhr'
so that S (r) = Orr2 is equal to the area function of 1183. By a miraculous coincidence, function h happens to satisfy in H3 \ {o} the equation Ooh + h = 0, (9.38) which follows from (9.37) by a straightforward computation. The function h extends by continuity to the origin o by setting h (o) = 1. In fact, the extended function is smooth' in TEL3, which can be seen, for example, by representing h in another coordinate system (cf. Exercise 3.23). Denoting by pt the heat kernel of (JHI3, E:t), we obtain by Theorem 9.15
that pt (x, y) =
etpt (x, y) h (x) h (y)
(9.39)
'It is true for any weighted manifold of dimension n > 2 that any bounded solution to (9.38) in a punctured neighborhood of a point extends smoothly to this point, but we do not prove this result here.
9. HEAT KERNEL AS A FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTION
258
Since the area functions of the weighted models ()E3[3,µ) and R3 are the same,
we conclude by Theorem 9.14 that their heat kernels at the origin are the same, that is 2
pt(x,o)=
13/2exp(-r4t)
(47rt)
Combining with (9.39), we obtain r2
pt(x,o) =e-tpt(x,o)h(x)h(o) _ (47rt)3/2 sinh r exp ( 4t - t which was to be proved.
Exercises. 9.1. Let t be a measure in R" defined by
dµ= where dx is the Lebesgue measure and c is a constant vector from '. Prove that the heat kernel of (1R', gR' t) is given by ,
pt (x, y) _
1
(47rt)
exp (_.c (x + y) - Icl2 t -
Ix - y12
4t
(9.40)
9.2. (Heat kernel in half-space) Let
M={(x...... xn) ERn:xn>0}. Prove that the heat kernel of M with the canonical Euclidean metric and the Lebesgue measure is given by
pt (x, y) _ (4 In/2 (exp
(12)
at
where y is the reflection of y
_
z
- exp (- Lx4tyl ))
(9.41)
the hyperplane x" = 0, that is,
y = (y1, ... , 9.3. (Heat kernel in Weyl's chamber) Let
yn-1 -yn)
.
<x2 <... <xn}.
M={(x1,...,xn) E E
Prove that the heat kernel of M with the canonical Euclidean metric and the Lebesgue measure is given by lln
pt (x, y) = det where
(9.42)
(xt' yj
is the heat kernel in
9.4. Let (M, g, µ) be a weighted manifold, and let h be a smooth positive function on M satisfying the equation
-D,,h+0h=0,
(9.43)
where 4' is a smooth function on M. Define measure µ on M by dµ = h2dµ. (a) Prove that, for any f E C°° (M),
A,,f - Of = h0;j
(h-1 f)
.
(9.44)
o.
(9.45)
(b) Prove that, for any f E D (M),
fM (vj2 + 4'f2) d
9.3. ETERNAL SOLUTIONS
259
9.5. Applying (9.45) in 1R'\{0} with suitable functions h and ', prove the Hardy inequality:
for any f ED(R"\{0}), z
fR ID.fI dx >
fzdx.
(n - 2)2
(9.46)
fl' IxIz
4
9.3. Eternal solutions In this section, we consider solutions to the heat equation defined for all t E (-oo, +oo), which, hence, are called eternal solutions. Let u (t, x) be a regular fundamental solution at a point y E M. Let us extend u (t, x) tot < 0 by setting u (t, x) - 0. Since for any t E R, fM
u (t, x) da (x) < 1,
(9.47)
we see that u (t, x) E L10C (R x M). In particular, u (t, x) can be regarded as a distribution on R x M. THEOREM 9.20. Let u (t, x) be a regular fundamental solution of the heat
equation at y E M, extended to t < 0 by setting u (t, x) - 0. Then u (t, x) satisfies in R x M the following equation au
at - L p.u = S(o,y)
(9.48)
Here S(9,y) is the delta function at the point (0, y) on the manifold R x M, defined by (S(o,y), cp) =
.
The equation (9.48) means that u (t, x) is a fundamental solution of the operator at - t A in R X M. PROOF. The equation (9.48) is equivalent to the identity
- f xM (at
u dtcdt =
(9.49)
which should be satisfied for any cp E D (1[8 x M). Since u - 0 for t < 0, the integral in (9.49) is equal to
J0 JM
(8tcp + Ol,cp) u dµdt = lim J 30-{-
s
J
M
(8tcp + Al,,co) u dpdt.
9. HEAT KERNEL AS A FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTION
260
Next, we have, for any e > 0,
ff e
M
Je
M
(at o + D,u,P) u dudt
(at (cpu) - V,9tu) dpdt +
f(atf
f
M
u ddt - J
M
e
f
(f
Js
dt
O,, cp u
M
f f 00
atu ddt +
M
s
u ddt
M
(9.50)
(E, ') u (,F, ') dµ,
where we have used the Green formula for A. and the fact that u (t, x) satisfies the heat equation for t > 0. We are left to verify that the integral in (9.50) tends to cp (0, y) when e -+ 0. By the definition (9.1) of a fundamental solution, we have
dµ-*co(0,y) ase-*0.
IM
(9.51)
Using the regularity (9.2) of the fundamental solution, we obtain
f
M
fM
W (--,
) u (e',) dtc - fM
(0, ) u (e,) d,u
(e, ') - W (0, ')) u (e, ') dp
< sup IW(e,x)-co(0,x)I ->0 ase-+0. xEM
Together with (9.51), this proves that the integral in (9.50) tends to cp (0, y), which was to be proved.
Since the heat kernel pt (x, y) is a regular fundamental solution for any fixed y (or x), Theorem 9.20 can be applied to it as well. The next statement contains the ultimate result on the smoothness of the heat kernel jointly in t, x, y. Set
diag:={(x,y) EMxM:x=y}, and denote by Ax, Ay the operator Du with respect to the variables x and y, respectively. COROLLARY 9.21. Let us extend pt (x, y) for t < 0 by setting pt (x, y) 0.
Then, as a function on IR x M x M, the heat kernel pt (x, y) is C°°
smooth away from {0} x diag (see Fig. 9.3), and it satisfies in this domain the equation apt
at
A xpt = D y pt
(9.52)
PROOF. Let N = M x M be the product manifold with the product measure dv = dp dµ. It follows from (9.47) that pt (x, y) E L1, (R x N). If we show that pt (x, y) satisfies in R x N \ {0} x diag the equation (9.52) in
9.3. ETERNAL SOLUTIONS
261
FIGURE 9.3. The heat kernel is singular at the set 0 x diag the distributional sense, then this will imply the CO°-smoothness of pt (x, y)
in this domain. Indeed, the Laplace operator OL on N can be represented as Av = Ox + Ay (cf. the proof of Theorem 7.20), so that (9.52) implies atpt =
1
2
DUpt.
Hence, the function pt (x, y) satisfies the heat equation in t E R (up to the change t H 2t) and (x, y) E N (away from {0} x diag) which implies the C°°-smoothness of pt (x, y) by Theorem 7.4. Since pt (x) y) is symmetric in x, y, it suffices to prove the first of the equations (9.52). This equation is equivalent to the identity
f
xMxM
(8t
pt (x, y) dl-t (x) dµ (y) dt = 0,
(9.53)
which should be satisfied for any function co (t, x, y) E D (JR x N) supported away from {0} x diag. Expanding the integral in (9.53) by Fubini's theorem
with the external integration in y, we see that it suffices to prove that, for
anyyEM,
f
(atcP + A. w) pt (x, y) dµ(x)dt = 0.
(9.54)
XM
Since y is fixed here, we obtain by Theorem 9.20 (more precisely, by (9.49))
that
f
xM
(atcP +
pt (x, y) dp(x)dt
(0, x, y) I x=y = -cP (0, x, y)
By hypothesis, we have W (0, y, y) = 0 whence (9.54) follows.
REMARK 9.22. Let M be connected so that the heat kernel pt (x, y) is strictly positive for t > 0 (cf. Corollary 8.12). Considering function
9. HEAT KERNEL AS A FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTION
262
u (t, x) = pt (x, y) in IR x (M \ {y}), we obtain an example of a solution to the heat equation which is identical zero for t < 0 and strictly positive for t > 0. This example shows that, in the parabolic strong minimum principle (Theorem 8.11), the time direction is essential: the fact that a non-negative solution vanishes at a point does not imply that it will vanish in the future, although it does imply that it was identical zero in the past.
Exercises. 9.6. Prove that if u and v are two regular fundamental solutions at point y E M then the difference u - v is a C°°-smooth function on R x M satisfying in J x M the heat equation.
9.7. Let S2 C M be an open set. Prove that the function ut (x, y) := pt (x, y) - pt (x, y) is C°° smooth jointly in t E R and x, y E Il. 9.8. Let a smooth function u (t, x) on IR+ x M satisfy the following conditions
fll at =0µu L u (t, )
°
inR+xM, f
(9.55)
as t -4 0,
where f E Li(M). Extend u (t, x) to t < 0 by setting u (t, x) = 0. (a) Prove that the function u (t, x) satisfies in JR x M the equation 8u - Dµu = F, 8t where F is a distribution on R x M defined by
(9.56)
(F, w) = fM v (0, x) f (x) dµ (x)
for any cpEV(JxM). (b) (c)
Prove that if in (9.55) f - 0 in M then u E C°° Prove that if f E C°° (M) then u (t, )
C
M
)fast-30+.
Consequently, the function
u(t,,x),
u(t,x)=
fO,
t>0, t<0,
belongs to C°° (J x M). HINT. Use Exercise 7.19.
9.9. Prove that, on any weighted manifold M, for any open set Sl, any compact set K C SZ,
and any N>0, sup J pt (x, y) dp (y) = o (t`v) as t
xcK
,
0.
(9.57)
c
9.10. Define the resolvent kernel ra (x, y) by ra (x, y) = J o" e-atpt (x, y) dt.
(9.58)
0
Prove that, for any a > 0, ra (x, y) is a non-negative smooth function on M x M \ diag. Furthermore, for any y c M, ra y) satisfies the equation
-AµTa + ara = Sy.
(9.59)
NOTES
263
Notes Theorem 9.5 was proved by Dodziuk [108]. Theorem 9.14 can be regarded as a simple model case for comparison theorems of [58] and [104].
The idea of changing the measure by d = h2d/.c, where h is a harmonic function, is widely used in the theory of stochastic processes where it is referred to as Doob's htransform (probabilistically this means conditioning of the diffusion process to exit in the direction h on the Martin boundary). The Mehler kernel is by definition the heat kernel of the operator - d + (x2 - 1) that is the Hamiltonian of the quantum harmonic oscillator. The Mehler kernel is given explicitly by the Mehler formula (11.21) ( see Exercise 11.18). The formula (9.32) for the e'2 heat kernel in (1, gR, dx) is equivalent to the Mehler formula. The proof of the latter can be found in [92]. H2 The formula (9.35) for the heat kernel P in 12 was stated by McKean [272]2, and the formula (9.36) for p 3 was stated in [104] (the derivation of (9.36) in Section 9.2.5 seems to be new). The formulas (9.33) and (9.34) for pH follow then by the recursive p, relation between p,' and 2 (see [51], [104], [96]). A direct proof of (9.33) and (9.34), based on the reduction to the wave equation, can be found in [175]. Convenient explicit estimates of P111, can be found in [102].
The extension of the heat kernel to negative times is a standard procedure for evolution equations (see, for example, [356]).
2It
was privately communicated to the author by Peter Laurence, that Henry McKean attributed (9.35) to the book [311, p.154].
CHAPTER 10
Spectral properties Here we consider some spectral properties of the Dirichlet Laplace operator such as the discreetness of the spectrum, the positivity of the bottom of the spectrum, and others. The notion of the bottom of the spectrum will be essentially used in Chapters 13, 14, 15.
10.1. Spectra of operators in Hilbert spaces We start with some basic properties of spectra of self-adjoint operators in a Hilbert space. The knowledge of the relevant material from Appendix A is assumed here.
10.1.1. General background. Let A be a densely defined self-adjoint operator in a Hilbert space 1-l. Denote by Amin (A) the bottom of the spectrum of A, that is, Amin (A) := inf spec A.
Since spec A is a closed subset of R, Amin (A) is the minimal point of spec A
provided Arvin (A) > -co. It is a general fact that .min (A) admits the following variational characterization: )min (A) =
inf
xEdom A\(0)
(Ax, x)
(10.1)
11x112
(cf. Exercise A.26).
DEFINITION 10.1. The discrete spectrum of A consists of all a E spec A such that
a is an eigenvalue of A of a finite multiplicity;
and a is an isolated point of spec A, that is, for some E > 0, the interval (a - e, a + e) contains no other points from spec A, except for a. The essential spectrum of A is the complement in spec A of the discrete spectrum of A. It easily follows from the definition that the discrete spectrum is at most countable, and any point of accumulation of the discrete spectrum belongs to the essential spectrum or is +oo. 265
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
266
Let {EA}AER be the spectral resolution of A. For any Borel set U C IR, set
EU := lu (A) =
JU
dEa = J
dEA.
Unspec A
The operator EU is a projector in IL (cf. Exercise A.27). Moreover, if a is an eigenvalue of A then E{a} is the projector onto the eigenspace ker (A - a id) of a (cf. Exercise A.28).
LEMMA 10.2. Let S be the essential spectrum of A. Then the space
(ran Es)' (the orthogonal complement of ran Es in H) admits at most countable orthonormal basis {vk}k i such that each vk is an eigenvector of A. Moreover, if ,\k is the eigenvalue of vk then the sequence {)'k}k i consists of all the points of the discrete spectrum of A counted with multiplicities. In particular, if S is empty, that is, if the entire spectrum of A is discrete,
then ran Es = {0} and, hence, such a basis {vk} exists in the entire space H. Assuming that dim IL = oo, we obtain that in this case the basis {vk} is countable, and J Ak I -i oo as k -* oo, because oo is the only possible accumulation point of the sequence {I\kI}.
PROOF. Let fail be a sequence of all distinct points in the discrete spectrum of A, enumerated in some order. By the spectral theorem, we have
id=Ispec A
dEA=Es+>E{ai},
whence it follows that, for any x1 ran Es,
X = E E{ai}x
(10.2)
(a priori, the convergence of the series in (10.2) is weak, which, however, implies the strong convergence by Exercise A.4). Since ran E{',',} is the eigenspace of the eigenvalue ai, it admits an orthonormal basis that consists of the eigenvectors of A. Since the eigenspaces of different eigenvalues are orthogonal, merging the bases of the eigenspaces across all ai, we obtain an orthonormal sequence, say {vk} (this sequence is at most countable because each eigenspace is finitely dimensional and the number of points ai is at most countable). Since E{ai}x is a linear combination of some vectors vk, it follows from (10.2) that every x E (ran ES)' can be expanded into a series Ekckvk, which means that {vk} is a basis in (ran Es)-LLet
now Ak be the eigenvalue of Vk. By construction, the number of the eigenvectors Vk with the given eigenvalue ai is equal to dim ran E{ai}, which
is the multiplicity of ai. Hence, each ai is counted in the sequence {Ak} as many times as its multiplicity.
10.1. SPECTRA OF OPERATORS IN HILBERT SPACES
267
10.1.2. Counting measure. The counting measure of the operator A is the following function defined on all Borel sets U C 118:
m (U) := dim ran Eu. The value of m (U) is a non-negative integer or +oo. As was mentioned above, if a is a real number then ran E{a} = ker (A - aid) , which implies
(10.3)
m ({a}) = dim ker (A - aid). (10.4) Hence, if a is an eigenvalue of A then m ({a}) is the multiplicity of the eigenvalue a; otherwise, m ({a}) = 0. THEOREM 10.3. Let m (U) be the counting measure of a self-adjoint operator A. Then the following is true: (i) rn (U) is a Borel measure on R. (ii) For any open interval U C 118, m (U) > 0 if and only if the intersection U fl spec A is non-empty. (iii) A point a E Spec A belongs to the discrete spectrum of A if and only if m (U) < oo for some open interval U containing a. PROOF. (i) The proof of this part consists of two claims. CLAIM 1. If U and V two disjoint Borel subsets of 118 then
m(UUV) =m(U)+m(V).
(10.5)
Indeed, if U and V disjoint then lUly = 0 and hence EUEV = 0, that is, the ranges of EU and Ev are orthogonal subspaces. On the other hand, 1 Uuv = lu + lv whence
Eu v = EU + Ev. Therefore, EUUV is the projector onto ran EU ® ran EV whence dim ran EUuv = dim ran EU + dim ran Ev, which is equivalent to (10.5).
Consequently, we obtain from Claim 1 that if U C V then m (U) < m (V), because m (V) = m (U) + m (V \ U) . CLAIM 2. If {Uk}k 1 is a sequence of disjoint Borel sets in R and U = Uk Uk then
00
m (U) = E m (Uk) .
(10.6)
k=1
Consider first a particular case when m (Uk) = 0 for all k and show that m (U) = 0. The condition m (Uk) = 0 means that Euk = 0. Since
lU=E1UU k
,
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
268
we obtain by Lemma 4.8 that, for any x E f,
whence EU = 0 and m (U) = 0. In the general case, the previous Claim implies that
m(U) > Fm(Uk). k
If >k m (Uk) = oo then this yields (10.6). If 1k m (Uk) < oo then only finitely many terms m (Uk) are non-zero, say, for k = 1, 2,..., K. Let
V= U Uk k>K
so that m (V) = 0 by the first part of the proof. Since U is a disjoint union of V and U1, ..., UK, we obtain by the previous Claim, that K
K
00
m(U)=Em(Uk)+m(V)=Em(Uk)=Em(Uk) k=1
k=1
(ii) Let
k=1
be any continuous function on R supported in U and such
that 0 < cp < 1 and cp (A) = 1 for some A E U fl spec A. Then by (A.53) IIw (A) J 1 = sup
J
=1,
spec A
so that there is x E ?-l \ {0} such that cp (A) x IIEUx1J2
=
f
R
1U (A)2 dIJEAx112 =
0. Then we have by (A.50)
f
dJJEaxJJ2
U
f (A)2 dJJEAXJJ2 = JJ(p (A) x112 > 0, U
whence it follows that EU 0 0 and, hence, m (U) > 0. (iii) Let a belong to the discrete spectrum of A. Then there is an open interval U containing no spectrum of A except for a, whence it follows by parts (i), (ii) and (10.4), that
m (U) = m ({a}) = dim ker (A - aid) < oo. Conversely, assume that m (U) < oo for some open interval U containing a. Since m is a v-additive measure, we have
m ({a}) _ inf m (U) , where the infimum is taken over all open intervals U containing a. By part (ii), we have m (U) _> 1 for any such interval U, and by hypothesis, we have m (U) < oo for some interval U. Hence, we conclude that
1 <m({a}) <00,
10.1. SPECTRA OF OPERATORS IN HILBERT SPACES
269
which together with (10.4) implies that a is an eigenvalue of A of a finite multiplicity.
Let us show that a is an isolated point of the spectrum. If not, then there exists a sequence {ak} C spec A such that ak -+ a, all ak are disjoint, and ak a. There exists a sequence {Uk} of disjoint open intervals such that Uk contains ak and Uk -+ a. Then any open interval U containing a, contains infinitely many of the intervals Uk, whence it follows by parts (i)
and (ii) that
m(U)? >, m(Uk)> ), 1=oo, UkCU
UkCU
thus, contradicting the hypothesis m (U) < 00.
Exercises. 10.1. Let (X, d) be a separable metric space and S C X be a subset of X. Prove that if all points of S are isolated then S is at most countable.
10.1.3. Trace. In this section, A is a densely defined self-adjoint operator in a Hilbert space 9-l such that spec A E [0, +00).
(10.7)
The condition (10.7) is equivalent to A being non-negative definite, that is, to
(Ax, x) > 0 for all x E dom A (cf. Exercise A.26). Define the trace of such an operator by
trace A = f
Adm ()
,
(10.8)
0,+oo)
where m is the counting measure of A defined by (10.3). Note that the point 0 is excluded from the domain of integration in (10.8), and that trace A takes values in [0, +oo].
LEMMA 10.4. If {vk} is an orthonormal basis in 9-l such that all vk E dom A then
trace A= ) ' (Avk, vk)
.
(10.9)
PROOF. We have by (A.49)
(Avk,vk) =
f
Ad (Exvk,vk)
f
AdlEvk12
ff [0,+oo)
pec A
= fO,+co) AdJJEavk11. (10.10)
Fix a Borel set U C R and let {ui} be an orthonormal basis in ran Eu. Then EUvk
= )' (vk, ui) ui i
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
270
and, applying twice the Parseval Identity, we obtain IIEUVkII2 = > (vk,
ui)2
and
1: (vk, ui)2
II EUVkII2 = k
k
= E 1: (vk, ui)2 i
i
k
=dim ranEU =m(U). (10.11) i
Since the right hand side of (10.10) is a Lebesgue integral against the meaIIEUVk1I2, when adding up in k we obtain a Lebesgue integral sure U against the measure m (U), that is,
(Avk, vk) = f
Adm (A) = trace A,
0,+00)
k
which was to be proved.
REMARK 10.5. The identity (10.9) can be used as the alternative definition of the trace. In this case, Lemma 10.4 means that the definition of the trace is independent of the choice of the basis {vk}. For a direct proof of this fact see Exercise 10.4. LEMMA 10.6. For any non-negative Borel function cp on [0, +oo), trace cp (A) = where
Js
(10.12)
co (A) dm (A) ,
S:_{A>0: (A)>0}.
(10.13)
PROOF. By (10.9), we have
trace(A) _ Y(cp(A)vk,vk) where {vk} is an orthonormal basis. Similarly, to (10.10), we have (W (A) Vk, Vk) = fo,+-) W (A) dllEAvkll2 =
f
w (A)
dllEavkll2.
Summing up in k and using (10.11), we obtain (10.12). LEMMA 10.7. Let cp be a non-negative continuous function on [0, +oo).
(i) If trace cp (A) < oo then the spectrum of A in the set S is discrete, where S is defined by (10.13). (ii) If the spectrum of A in S is discrete then trace cp (A) = > cp (Ak) ,
(10.14)
k
where {Ak} is the sequence of all the eigenvalues of A in S counted with multiplicities.
10.2. BOTTOM OF THE SPECTRUM
271
PROOF. (i) Let a E S be a point of the essential spectrum of A. By Theorem 10.3, for any open interval U containing a, we have m (U) = 00. Since co is continuous, the set S is open and, hence, there is a bounded open interval U C S containing a. Furthermore, we can assume that the closed interval U is also contained in S. Then by (10.12) trace cp (A) >
f
W (A) dm (A) >
nf
because infU cp > 0 and m (U) = oo. (ii) By hypothesis, the set S n spec A consists of isolated eigenvalues of
finite multiplicity. In particular, the set S n spec A is at most countable and, hence, can be enumerated as a sequence {ail (where each eigenvalue is counted once). The set S \ spec A is open and is outside the spectrum. It follows from Theorem 10.3, that measure m does not charge this set. Hence, measure m in S sits at the sequence fail whence by (10.12)
trace cp (A) _ /
{a;}
co (ai) m ({ail) .
co (A) dm (A) _ ,
Noticing that by (10.4) m (f ail) is the multiplicity of the eigenvalue ai, we obtain (10.14).
Exercises. 10.2. Prove that, for any Borel set U, m (U) = trace Eu.
10.3. Prove that if A is a non-negative definite self-adjoint operator with a finite trace then A is a compact operator. 10.4. For any non-negative definite operator A with dom A = f, define its trace by
trace A = " (Avk, vk) , where {vk} is any orthonormal basis of W. Prove that the trace does not depend on the choice of the basis {vk}.
10.2. Bottom of the spectrum The Dirichlet Laplace operator L = -ApjW, (M,) constructed in Section 4.2, is a self-adjoint operator, and spec G C [0, +oo). Here we investigate further properties of the spectrum of L. Denote by min (M) the bottom of
the spectrum of L, that is Arvin (M) = inf spec L.
This notation reflect the point of view that the spectral properties of G are regarded as the properties of manifold M itself.
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
272
For any non-zero function f E W1 (M), define its Rayleigh quotient by 2
(f)
ffMf2dµ,4
(10.15)
THEOREM 10.8. (The variational principle) The following identity is true
.min(M) =
inf
fEnfol
7Z (f)
,
(10.16)
where T is any class of functions such that
Co (M)CTCW0(M).
(10.17)
Furthermore, the infimum in (10.16) can be restricted to non-negative func-
tions f E T. PROOF. It is obvious that the functional 7Z is continuous on W1 \ {0}.
Since Co C Wo and that Co' is dense in W01 in Wl-norm, the infimum in the right hand side of (10.16) is the same for any functional class T satisfying (10.17). Since Co C Wo C W01, it suffices to verify (10.16) for
T=W o =domG. By (10.1), we have inf spec C =
inf {
f Edom G
,Cfl 0 } ( 11f 1122 )
(10.18)
By Lemma 4.4, we obtain, for any f E domG,
(Gf,f)L2 = - f f&,,,fdµ= f pf12dµ M M whence
inf spec C =
fM 1,7f !2 dEc
inf
fEdomr\{0}
fM f2dtt
which proves (10.16). Let us show that the infimum in (10.16) can be restricted to non-negative
functions, that is, Amin(M) =
inf
0
7Z (f) .
(10.19)
It suffices to consider the borderline cases T = Co and T = W01, By Lemma 5.4, for any non-negative function f E Wo there is a sequence { fk} of non-negative functions from Co that converges to f in W1. Therefore, the right hand side of (10.19) has the same value for T = Co and T = W01. Hence, it suffices to prove (10.19) in the case T = W01. For simplicity of notation, let us allow also f = 0 in (10.19) by setting 7Z (0) = +00. As
follows from Lemma 5.2, for any f E W01, also the functions f+ and f_ belong to W0 and
Vf+ = 1{f>o}Vf and V f- _ -1{f
(10.20)
10.2. BOTTOM OF THE SPECTRUM
273
(see (5.9) and (5.10)). Let us show that
R(f) > min (7Z (f+), 7Z (f-)).
(10.21)
If f+ = 0 or f- = 0 then this is obvious. Otherwise, observe that, by (10.20),
'7f+ and 17f_ are orthogonal in L2. Since f = f+ - f-, we obtain
R (f) =
IlyfII2 = JjVf+112+11yf_112 >min (R(f+) 11f+112 + 11f-112
((f112
,R (f-))
Set R (0) = 0 so that the infimum in (10.19) can be taken for all f
W01.
It follows from (10.21) that
inf R(f) > inf R(f+) = fEWa
fEWa
inf 0
R(f),
whereas the opposite inequality inf R (f)
inf R (f) <
0
fEWa
is trivial. We conclude that
Amin (M) = inf R (f) = fEWa
inf R (f)
,
0
which finishes the proof. EXAMPLE 10.9. Let us show that
"min(Rn)=0
(10.22)
Choose a non-zero function co E Co (Rn) and set (Pk (x) = cP (x/k) , k = 1, 2,....
cPk(x)dx=k' f3 (P2(x) dx Ilfn
I V k I2 dx = k2 R
n
R (cok) = k
o2 dx
27Z
Letting k -+ oo, we obtain (10.22). It is possible to show that the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplace operator in R72 is the interval [0, +oo).
THEOREM 10.10. Assume that the infimum of R (f) in (10.16) is attained on a function f E W0 (M) \ {0}. Then f E dome and L f = Amin (M) f
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
274
PROOF. Denote for simplicity A _ Amin (M) and observe that, for any E Co (M) and real t, we have
that is Ilof112-a11f112.
We have
I1of+toP112 = IIVf112+2t(Vf,V )+t211VW112 and If +t(PI12 = IIf112+2(f,(p)
+t211(P112,
whence I V (f +
Allf+
2t ((Vf, V) - A (f, (p)) + t2
(11,7(p
112 - a(p2)
.
Since the left hand side is non-negative for all real t, the linear in t term in the right hand side must vanish, that is
(Vf,V o)-A(f,i,o)=0. This implies
(f,Al,o)D+A(f,io)D = 0 whence it follows that Am f + Af = 0 in the distributional sense. Therefore,
Dµ f E L2, whence f E Wo = dom G and L f = Af, which was to be proved.
Exercises. 10.5. Prove that, for any f c L2 (M), (Ptf, f) !5 exp (-Amin (M) t) 1If lIL2. 10.6.
Prove the following properties of Amin for subsets of a weighted manifold M. (a) If 01 C St2 are two open sets then Amin (01) > Amin (c 2)
(b) If {l } is a finite or countable sequence of disjoint open sets and Sl = Uk Qk then Amin (0) = inf Amin (fk) . k
(c) If {f2k}k 1 is an increasing sequence of open sets and n = Uk Stk then Amin (S2) = lim Amin (ilk) . k-ioo
10.7. Let (M, g, p) and (M, g, Ft) be two weighted manifolds based on the same smooth
manifold M of dimension n. Assume that they are quasi-isometric, that is, for some positive constant A and B,
A-1
(10.23)
g where T and t are the density functions of measures p and µ respectively. Prove that
(10.24) C-'Amin (M) < Lin (M) < C.\min (M) where C = C (A, B, n) is a positive constant, )imin (M) is the bottom of the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplacian on (M, g, p), and )'min (M) is the bottom of the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplacian on (M, g, ii).
10.3. THE BOTTOM EIGENFUNCTION
275
10.8. (Cheeger's inequality) The Cheeger constant of a manifold is defined by
h (M) .-
fM IofI dA inf fEC0(M)\{0} fMI.fI dp
(10.25)
Prove that Amin (M) > 4 h2 (M) .
(10.26)
10.3. The bottom eigenfunction A non-zero function f E dom (G) such that ,Cf = Amin (M) f,
is called the bottom eigenfunction of L. The bottom eigenfunction does not always exist (for example, it does not exist in Rn). Theorem 10.10 provides a sufficient condition for the existence
of the bottom eigenfunction. The next theorem ensures that the bottom eigenfunction does not change the sign and, hence, can be assumed to be positive. THEOREM 10.11. If f is the bottom eigenfunction on a connected weighted
manifold M then f never vanishes on M. The connectedness of M is essential. Indeed, if M is disconnected and contains a compact component f then the function f = 1Q is the bottom eigenfunction with the eigenvalue Amin (M) = 0, while f vanishes in M \ Q.
PROOF. Denote for simplicity A = )'min (M) so that C f = A f in M. Then we have
(f) _ (ff, f) (f, f)
7
= A.
(10.27)
Let us prove that either f+ or f- is identical zero. Assume from the contrary that the both functions f+ and f- are non-zero as elements of L2 (M). Since f E Wo (M), by Lemma 5.2 both f+ and f_ belong to Wo (M) and
Vf+ = 1{f>o}Vf, Of- = 1{f
R (f+) > A and R (f-) > A.
(10.28)
(10.29)
Assume that one of these two inequalities is strict, say the first one. Then we obtain by (10.28) and (10.29)
and
I I
2d >a
12
f>0}
f<0}
I
f
lVfI2 dl> A
{f>0}
f 2dµ
r f2dEc.
f<0}
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
276
Adding up these inequalities yields
J
IV f
M
12
dµ > a
f
JM f2dA,
which contradicts (10.27). Hence, the both inequalities in (10.29) turn to be equalities. By Theorem
10.10, we conclude that both functions f+ and f- are eigenfunctions of L with the eigenvalue A, whence
Dj,f±+Aff = 0.
(10.30)
By Corollary 7.3, f+ and f_ are C°° smooth functions in M, and, by the strong minimum principle (cf. Corollary 8.14), they cannot vanish in M. However, this contradicts the fact that the inequalities f+ (x) > 0 and f_ (x) > 0 cannot occur at the same point x. This proves that either f+ or f_ is identical 0. Changing the sign of f , if necessary, we can assume f > 0. Since f 0 0, applying again the strong minimum principle, we conclude that f > 0 in M, which was to be proved.
SECOND PROOF. Since inf spec Pt = At, it follows that II Pt II L2-+L2 = e-at and, hence, (10.31) IlPtf11 <e-atIIfII. Since f is the eigenfunction of G with the eigenvalue A, f is also the eigen-
function of Pt = e-t- with the eigenvalue e-At, that is,
Ptf=e-atf. On the other hand, the identity
Ptf = Ptf+ - Ptfimplies that
e-taf+ Ptf+ >- (Ptf)+ = The comparison with (10.31) shows that we have, in fact,
Ptf+ = e-taf+ A similar identity holds for f_, so that we obtain (10.30). The proof is then finished in the same way as the previous proof. COROLLARY 10.12. For any connected weighted manifold, dim ker (G - Amin id) < 1.
In other words, if the bottom eigenfunction exists then it is unique up to a constant multiple. PROOF. Indeed, let f and g be two linearly independent bottom eigenfunctions. By Theorem 10.11, we can assume that both f and g are positive on M. Fix a point xo E M and choose a real constant c so that f (xo) + cg (xo) = 0.
10.4. THE HEAT KERNEL IN RELATIVELY COMPACT REGIONS
277
The function h = f + cg is obviously contained in ker (L - Amin id). However, h cannot be the bottom eigenfunction because it vanishes at point x0. The
only alternative left is that h - 0, which contradicts the assumption of the linear independence of f, g. It follows from Theorem 10.11 and Corollary 10.12 that if the bottom eigenfunction f exists then f can be normalized to satisfy the conditions
IIfIIL2=1 and f > 0,
(10.32)
which determines f uniquely.
10.4. The heat kernel in relatively compact regions Let (M, g, µ) be a weighted manifold. To simplify the terminology, we will call by the spectrum of M the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplace operator L = -AAIWo on M, and the same convention applies to the eigenvalues and the eigenfunctions of L. The next statement is one of the main results of this chapter. THEOREM 10.13. Let 1 be a non-empty relatively compact open subset of a weighted manifold (M, g, µ). Then the following is true.
(i) The spectrum of S2 is discrete and consists of an increasing sequence {Ak}k 1 of non-negative eigenvalues (counted according to Ak = +oo. There is an orthonormal multiplicity) such that basis {CPk}kl in L2 (1) such that each function C,ok is an eigenfunction of f with the eigenvalue Ak. (ii) In any such basis {CPk}, the heat kernel pn (x, y) of Q admits the following expansion
pt, (x, y) = Y"
(x) CPk (y)
(10.33)
k=1
The series in (10.33) converges absolutely and uniformly in the domain t > e, x, y c 52 for any e > 0, as well as in the topology of C°° (R+ x
x 1) .
Clearly, Theorem 10.13 applies when M is compact and S = M. In a more general context, the eigenvalue Ak of S2 will be denoted by 'k A. One can consider Ak (SZ) as a function of k and f2, and this function is tightly linked to various analytic and geometric properties of the set S2, the identity (10.33) being one of them. Note that the first eigenvalue Al (S2) is the bottom of the spectrum of Sl, that is, Al (2) = Amin (Q)
(10.34)
It is also worth mentioning that Ak (Q) = R ((Pk)
(10.35)
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
278
Indeed, we have cpk E W0 (1) and
-DµWk = £ 0k = Ak (Il) Wk, which implies by the Green formula (4.12)
- Jst kkdP Ak () !
//
2dP,
JJJ S2
whence (10.35) follows.
For the proof of Theorem 10.13, we need the following abstract lemma. LEMMA 10.14. Let (X, p) be a measure space such that L2 = L2 (X, p) is a separable Hilbert space. Set L2,2 := L2 (X X X" U x p) and consider a non-negative symmetric function q (x) y) E L2,2 and the operator Q defined on measurable functions on X by
Qf (x) =
f
X
(10.36)
q (x, y) f (y) dp (y) ,
whenever the right hand side of (10.36) make sense. Then Q is a bounded self-adjoint operator in L2 and trace Q2 =
(10.37)
IIgII2 L2,2.
PROOF. The fact that Q is bounded as an operator from L2 to L2 follows from the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality: Qf (x)12
_4q2 (x, y) dp (y) 11f I12
and
fx2djc
( x)
ffq2(x,Y)dp(Y)dp(x)IFflF2L2
=
IIg1IL2,2IIf IIi2.
Let us show that the operator Q is symmetric. For all f, g E L2, we have by Fubini's theorem (Qf, g)
= fx Qf (x) g (x) dp (x) = Ix fx q (x, y) f (y) g (x) dp (x) dµ (y)
and similarly (.f, Qg) = fx Jx q (x, y) f (x) g (y) dp (x) dµ (y)
Switching x and y and using q (x, y) = q (y, x), we obtain (Q f, g) = (f, Qg) . The operator Q2 is, hence, also bounded and self-adjoint. Besides, Q2 is non-negative definite because for any f E L2, (Q2f, f) = (Qf, Qf) >_ 0. To prove (10.37), choose any orthonormal basis {vk}° 1 in L2. Write (10.36) in the form
Qf (x) = (qx, f),
10.4. THE HEAT KERNEL IN RELATIVELY COMPACT REGIONS
279
where qx := q (x, ). By Lemma 10.4 and (10.36), we have. trace Q2 =
(Q2vk) vk)
_
f(qx,vk)2d(x),
(Qvk, Qvk) = k
k
(10.38)
Expanding qx E L2 in the basis {vk} we obtain qx =
(10.39)
(qx, vk) Vk
whence, by the Parseval identity, (10.40)
(gx,vk)2 = IIgXIIL2. k
Hence, (10.38) and (10.40) yield
trace Q2 = fX IIgxII22dy (x)
1q112
(10.41)
,
which was to be proved. PROOF OF THEOREM 10.13. (i) Since 1 is relatively compact, by the estimate (7.25) of Theorem 7.7 (cf. Theorem 7.6) we obtain sup Ilpt,x11L2 < F0 (t) := C (1 +t-a) , (10.42) xEI
where u is any integer larger than n/4 and C is a constant depending on Q. Since p 5 < pt ,x (cf. Exercise 7.40 or Theorem 5.23), (10.42) implies sup Ilpt'x IIL2 < Fn (t)
(10.43)
xES2
and IIPt1112L 2,2 = f Ipt x 1122 dp < F22 (t) l-t (c)
,
(10.44)
sz
whence it follows that IIPt'IIL2,2 < CO.
Applying Lemma 10.14 to the operator Q = Po and noticing that Q2 = Pet, we obtain that trace Pet = II P1t I122,2 < oo.
(10.45)
Since Pet = exp (-2tr0), we conclude by Lemma 10.7, that the spectrum of Lo is discrete on the set where the function A H e-2ta is positive; hence, all the spectrum of 0 is discrete. l of eigenfunctions By Lemma 10.2, there is an orthonormal basis of 0 in L2 (SZ) such that the sequence {Ak} of their eigenvalues consists of all eigenvalues of Lo counted with multiplicity. Besides, we have I Ak I -+ oo and Ak > 0, which implies that Ak -+ +00. Since any bounded interval contains only a finite number of terms Ak, the sequence {Ak} can be renumbered in the increasing order.
(ii) Noticing that
P (Pk (x) =
(x) = e-tlk(Pk (X),
(10.46)
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
280
we obtain the following expansion of pox in the basis {cPk}:
ptx =
(10.47)
e-t1k Wk (x) Wk,
that is, P11-1 (x, y) = r,
e-take(x) Wk (y) ,
(10.48)
where the series converges in L2 (S2) in variable y for any x E 0 and t > 0. Note that, by (10.14) and (10.45), e-2tak
= traceP2t = Ilpt IIL2,2 < 00.
(10.49)
k
The sequence {cPk (x) Wk (y)}k 1 is obviously orthonormal in L2 (0 X Sl),
which together with (10.49) implies that the series (10.48) converges in L2(Slxcl). To show the absolute and uniform convergence, observe that by (10.43), for any f E L2 (Sl),
sup I P' f (x) xEc
sup I (ptx) f) L2 < FF (t) 11f 11L2. xEc
Applying this to f = cOk and using (10.46), we obtain sup xEn
e-takcPk
(x) < Fo (t)
(10.50)
,
whence
sup x,yEO
I e-2tak Pk (x) cPk (y) I
< F1 (t)2.
Since function Fn (t) is decreasing in t, we obtain, for any E > 0, e-3tak
sup
up k x t>E
e-'5"k,
Wk (x)'Pk (y) < F0 (E) 2
(10.51)
I
k
where the right hand side is finite by (10.49). Renaming 3t to t and 3s to E, we obtain that the series (10.48) converges absolutely and uniformly in the domain t > e, x, y E Q. Finally, let us show that the series (10.48) converges in C°° (R+ x Q x 0). The function u (t, x, y) = pet (x, y) satisfies the heat equation
au
at = (A,+ Ay) u
with respect to the Laplace operator Ax + Ay of the manifold Q x Q (cf. the proof of Theorem 7.20), and its is straightforward to check that each function Uk (t, x, y) = e-2takcpk (x) Wk (y) also satisfies the same equation. It follows from the previous argument that the series >k Uk converges to u in L 210C ()£8+ x Q x 11), which implies by Theorem 7.4 that it converges also in
C°O(R+xSlxSl).
10.4. THE HEAT KERNEL IN RELATIVELY COMPACT REGIONS
281
REMARK 10.15. It follows from (10.51) that, for any t > 0 and n E N, cc
Sn (t) :_
e-Akt Sup Iok (x) Pk (y)I < 00. X,yES2
k=n
Since Sn (t) is a decreasing function of t, it follows that, for all t > to > 0 S. (t) < e-a_t/2Sn (t/2) < e-ant/2Sn (10.52) (to/2). In particular, if An > 0, then Sn (t) -+ 0 as t -* oo. EXAMPLE 10.16. Let us show that if S2 is a non-empty relatively compact
open subset of a weighted manifold, then, for all large enough k, .k (S2) > ckl/(2,)
,
(10.53)
where o- is the exponent from (10.42) and c is a positive constant depending on S2 (better estimates for Ak (S2) will be proved later in Corollary 15.12). Write for simplicity Ak = Ak (S2). Since the sequence {Ak}k 1 is increasing, we have, for any k > 1, 00
E e-2tak > ke-2tak. k=1
It follows from (10.49) that ke-2t'k < IIpt2112
and, hence, Ak (Q) >
2t log Ilpt"k2 11 L2,2
(10.54)
Assuming 0 < t < 1, we obtain from (10.42) and (10.44), I1ptl1L2,2 <
Ct-2o
for some constant C depending on S2, whence ak
kt 26 2t log C 1
(Q)
Let us choose t from the condition
kt-
(10.55)
= e, that is
Cc 1/(2c) k
(10.56)
Since we want t < 1, this is only possible if k > Ce. Assuming that k is that large and substituting (10.56) into (10.55), we obtain (10.53).
EXAMPLE 10.17. It is easy to show that the eigenvalues of the circle S1
are given by the sequence { k21110 0, all with multiplicity 1 (see Exercise
10.18). For the sphere Si', the distinct eigenvalues are given by
ak=k(k+n-1), k=0,1,...,
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
282
(see Exercise 10.19), where the multiplicity of ao is 1 and the multiplicity of ak, k > 1, is equal to (k+n-2)1
(2k+n-1).
(n - 1)!k!
Exercises. 10.9. In the setting of Lemma 10.14, prove that the integral operator Q is compact without using the trace. 10.10. Let M be a .compact weighted manifold, which has a finite number in of connected components. (a) Prove that a1 (M) Am (M) = 0 and Am+i (M) > 0. (b) Show that the estimate (10.53) holds for all k > m+1 and does not hold for k < in.
10.11. Let M be a compact connected weighted manifold. Prove that as t -4 oo, (M) where the convergence is uniform for all x, y E M.
Pt (x, y) =
10.12. Let f be a non-empty relatively compact connected open subset of a weighted manifold M. Using the notation of Theorem 10.13, prove that, for all x, y E 52, pit (x, y) .' e-A1tcP1 (x) cP1 (y) as t -+ oo.
10.13. Prove that, under the conditions of Theorem 10.13,
sup ji (x)j
(10.57)
XEQ
where v is the exponent from (10.42) and C is a constant that does not depend on k. 10.14. Let (M, g, µ) be a weighted manifold with the discrete spectrum. Let {Wk} be an orthonormal basis in L2 (M) that consists of the eigenfunctions of M, and let )k be the eigenvalue of Wk.
(a) Prove that, for any f e L2 (M), if f = >k akcpk is the expansion of f in the basis {cpk} in L2 (M) then e-,\ktakcpk,
Ptf =
(10.58)
where the series converges in L2 (M) for any t > 0. Show also that the series converges in C°° (R+ x M). (b) Assume in addition that e_,\kt
< 00
trace Pt = k
for all t > 0. Prove that Pt (x, y) _
e-A"Wk (X) Wk (Y),
(10.59)
where the series converges in C°° (IR+ x M x M).
10.15. On an arbitrary weighted manifold, consider the resolvent R = (id+.C) powers RS = (id+G)-S, where L is the Dirichlet Laplace operator and s > 0. (a) Prove that
and its
Co
trace R3 = f 1 (s) e-t trace Ptdt.
(10.60)
10.4. THE HEAT KERNEL IN RELATIVELY COMPACT REGIONS
283
(b) Assuming in addition that fc (M) < oo and
forall0
pt(x,x)
where C and v are positive constants, prove that trace RS is finite for all s > v. 10.16. Let 1 be a relatively compact open subset of a weighted manifold M of dimension n. Let {wk} be an orthonormal basis in L2 (S2) that consists of the eigenfunctions of M, and let {Ak} be the sequence of the corresponding eigenvalues.
(a) Prove that if s > so = so (n) then (10.61)
Ak S < co. k:Ak>0
(b) Prove that if f E Co (S2) then the Fourier series f = ECkCQk k
of function f converges to f absolutely and uniformly in Q. 10.17. Let (M, g, t) be a compact weighted manifold and {cpk} be an orthonormal basis in L2 (M) that consists of the eigenfunctions of M. Prove that the set of all finite linear combinations of functions Wk is dense in C (M). REMARK. This can be considered as a generalization of the classical Stone-Weierstrass theorem that any continuous 27T-periodic function on H can be uniformly approximated by trigonometric polynomials. 10.18. In this problem, the circle S1 is identified with H/21rZ. (2) Prove that the heat kernel pt (x, y) of S' is given by 1
Pt (x, y) = 2I +
1 *7r
=
e
k2 tcos
k (x - y) .
(10.62)
k=1
(ii) Show that the heat kernel pt (x, y) of S' can be obtained from the heat kernel pt (x, y) ofH1 by (10.63)
Pt (x, y) = L Pt (x + 2i7rn, y) . nEZ
(iii) Prove the Poisson summation formula
V' -k2
exD
(10.64)
nEZ
kEZ
Prove 10.19. Let P (x) be a homogeneous of degree k harmonic polynomial on H' that the function f = Pjsn is an eigenfunction of the Laplacian of §n with the eigenvalue .
a=k(k+n-1).
REMARK. It is possible to prove that such eigenfunctions exhaust all eigenfunctions on Sn.
e-'2dx. Prove that the 10.20. Consider the weighted manifold (H,ga,,u) where dµ = spectrum of this manifold is discrete, its eigenvalues are Ak = 2k, k = 0,1, ..., and the eigenfunctions are hk (x) - the Hermite polynomials (see Exercise 3.10). Hence, show that the heat kernel of this manifold satisfies the identity 00
Pt (x) y) = k=0
-2kt hk (x) hk (y) V-7r2kki
(10.65)
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
284
REMARK. The same heat kernel is given by the formula
p(x, y) -
- (2 +
1
exp
-4t
-\ e-4t
1
(2ir sinh 2t)1 /2
)
cf. Example 9.19.
10.5. Minimax principle Let (M, g, lc) be a weighted manifold with discrete spectrum, and let {ak (M)}k1 be the increasing sequence of all the eigenvalues of M, counted according to multiplicity. The following theorem generalizes the variational formula (10.1) for )tmin (M).
THEOREM 10.18. If the spectrum of (M, g, p) is discrete then the following identities hold: sup inf RY) , (10.66) Ak (M) = dimE=k-1 fEE-\{0}
where the supremum is taken over all subspaces E C W0 (M) of dimension k-1 and the infimum is taken over all non-zero functions f in the orthogonal complement of E in W0 (M), and sup R (f) , (10.67) Ak (M) = inf dim F=k fEF\{0}
which is understood similarly.
For example, for k = 1 (10.66) and (10.67) yield Al (M) = inf R (f) , f EWo \{0}
matching Theorem 10.8. PROOF. Let {cpk} be an orthonormal basis in L2 (M) such that co is an eigenfunction of M with the eigenvalue Ak = Ak (M) (cf. Lemma 10.2). CLAIM 1. For any f E Wo (M) and i > 1, (D.f, Vco )L2 = Ai (f, c'i)L2 .
(10.68)
Indeed, since f E W0 (M) and Dµcoi = -Aicoi E L2 (M) the Green formula 4.12 yields
(Of, VWi)L2 = -
,
f f JM .f A,,,Wjdµ = Ai JM .f idlt,
which is equivalent to (10.68). In particular, applying (10.68) to f = cpj, we obtain (VWi,Vcoj)L2
0,,
i
i=
j
(10.69)
10.5. MINIMAX PRINCIPLE
285
CLAIM 2. If E is a (k - 1)-dimensional subspace of a Hilbert space ?-l and F is a k-dimensional subspace of 7-l then there exists a non-zero vector v E
FnE1. Indeed, let {cP1i ..., cpk} be a basis in F and let us look for v in the form k
v=
Ci(pi
)
i=1
where c1i ..., ck are unknown reals. If {el, ...ek_1} is a basis in E then the condition v E E1 means (v, ej) = 0 for all j = 1, ..., k - 1, which amounts to a linear system for ci: k
ej) c = O, j = 1, ..., k - 1. i=1
Since the number of the equations in this homogeneous system is less than the number of unknowns, there is a non-zero solution {ci}, which determines to a non-zero vector v E F n E1. Now we can prove (10.66) and (10.67). Consider the space E = span {cpli ..., cpk_1} ,
which is a (k - 1)-dimensional subspace of W0 (M). Any function f E E-- \ {0} can represented in the form
f =YCicoi, i>k
whence we obtain, using (10.69),
(f) -
(V f, V f )L2
(f, J )L2
- Ei,j>k Cicj (V coi, Ocpj )L2 _ ii>k >i,j>k Cic? (vi, Pj)L2
\i C2
Ei>k ci2 >
A k.
Hence, we obtain, for this particular space E inf
f EE-'-\{O}
R M >Ak.
(10.70)
If F is any k-dimensional subspace of W0 (M) then, by Claim 2, there exists
a non-zero function f c F n E1, which implies that
sup R (f) > Ak.
(10.71)
f EF\{0}
Hence, taking in (10.70) supremum over subspaces E and in (10.71) infimum
over F, we obtain upper bounds for \k in (10.66) and (10.67), respectively. To prove the lower bounds, consider the k-dimensional subspace F = span {cPi, .., cPk} Writing a function f E F \ {0} in the form
f=Y' GcPi, i
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
286
we obtain, similarly to the first part of the proof, Ei
Hence, for this particular space F,
sup 1Z(f)_<)k.
(10.72)
f EF\{0}
If E is any (k - 1)-dimensional subspace of W0 (M) then, by Claim 2, there is a non-zero function f E F fl E', which implies that R(f) < Ak.
inf
(10.73)
f EE -\{0}
Taking in (10.72) infimum over all subspaces F and in (10.73) supremum over
E, we obtain the lower bounds for Ak in (10.67) and (10.66), respectively, which finishes the proof. COROLLARY 10.19. If SZ and S2' are non-empty relatively compact open
subsets of M and Il' c SZ then, for any k > 1, Ak (2) .
Ak (Q')
PROOF. Note that the space W0 (S2') can be considered as a subspace of W0 (S2) by identifying any function f E W0 (a') with its trivial extension (cf. Section 5.5), and the trivial extension does not change R (f ). Hence,
any k-dimensional subspace F of W0 (a') is also that of W0 (fl), and the value of the functional
R (F) = sup R(f) f EF\{0}
does not depend on whether F is considered as a subspace of W.1 (Q') or Wo (S2). By (10.67), we obtain
Ak (fl') =
inf
FCWo 0')
R (F) >
inf
FCWo (0)
R (F) _ Ak A ,
which was to be proved.
Exercises. 10.21. Let (M, g, w) be a weighted manifold with discrete spectrum, and let {cpk } be an orthonormal basis in L2 (M) of the eigenfunctions of M with eigenvalues {Ak}. (a) Prove that {Wk} is an orthogonal basis also in W01 (M). (b) Let f E L2 (M) and assume that f = Eh akcpk is its expansion in the basis {Wk} in L2 (M). Prove that if, in addition, f E Wo (M) then
V f = EakVcpk in L2 (M)
(10.74)
k
and
fMvf12=
Akak.
(10.75)
10.6. DISCRETE SPECTRUM AND COMPACT EMBEDDING THEOREM
287
(c) Prove that if f E Wo (M) then
-A f =',Akakcpk ,
in L2 (M)
(10.76)
and
f
(A,. f) 2 dp =
2 2 Akak.
(10.77)
M
10.22. Let manifold M admit k non-zero functions fl,..., fk E Wo (M) with disjoint supports such that 7Z (f2) < a for all i = 1, ..., k and some number a. Assuming that the spectrum of G is discrete, prove that '\k (M) < a.
10.6. Discrete spectrum and compact embedding theorem Recall that, on any weighted manifold (M, g, µ), the identical mapping W1 (M) - L2 (M) is an embedding (cf. Section 4.1). In this section, we discuss the conditions when the embedding operator ,W(M) 'L2 (M) is compact. THEOREM 10.20. Let (M, g, p) be a weighted manifold. Then the following conditions are equivalent.
(a) The spectrum of M is discrete. (b) The embedding operator W0 (M) -L2 (M) is compact. (c) The resolvent Ra = (G + a id)-1 is a compact operator in L2 (M), for some/all a > 0. PROOF. (a) (b). If the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplace operator L is discrete, then, by Lemma 10.2, there exists an orthonormal basis {tok}k=1 in L2 (M) such that each cPk is an eigenfunction of L, and the corresponding eigenvalues Ak tend to +oo as k -4 oo. It follows from (10.68) that, for any f E W0 (M) and any k > 1, (f, Wk) W, = (1 + Ak) (f, gok)L2 .
(10.78)
In particular, (10.78) implies that JkcPkll'
1 = 1 +Ak
By Exercise 10.21, the sequence {c,k} forms an orthogonal basis in W0 (M).
Hence, any function f c L2 (M) can be expanded in the basis {(ok} as follows: cc
f-
akVk, k=1
where ak = (f, Yk)L2, and if f E W0 (M) then the same series converges in Wo (M) . By the Parseval identity, we have cc 11f 11L2
= E ak k=1
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
288
and
IIf1Iw1=E(1+Ak)a2 k=1
Now assume that we have a sequence { f} in W0 (M), which is bounded
in the norm Wl (M), and prove that there exists a subsequence that converges in L2 (M), which will prove that the embedding Wo (M) -4 L2 (M) is compact. Set ank = (fn, cpk)L2 and observe that, by the boundedness of I
I fn I I wl , there exists a constant C such that, for all n, 00
(10.79)
(1 + Ak) ank < C.
k=1
In particular, all the coefficients ank are uniformly bounded. Consider the infinite matrix
all
a21
a31
...
and
a21
a22
a32
...
an2
ak1
ak2
ak3
...
ank
...
...
The boundedness of the entries implies that, in any row, there is a convergent subsequence. Using the diagonal process, choose a sequence of column indices nl, n2, ... -+ oo such that the subsequence {an,,k}°O1 converges for any k. Let us show that the subsequence { f, } converges in L2 (M). For simplicity of notation, renumber this sequence back to { fn}. Then we have, for all indices n, m, K, K
00
Ilfn - fmII L2 = E (ank - amk)2 =
00
(ank - amk)2 +
(ank - amk)2 . k=K+1
k=1
k=1
The condition (10.79) implies
W
00
00
E (ank - amk)2 < 2
ank + 2 k=K+1
k=K+1
k=K+1
whence
K 2
11A - fmIIL2 < 1: (ank k=1
4C amk < 1 +AK
- amk)2 + 1 +4C
\K.
Given e > 0, choose K so big that 4C
1+AK <2' which is possible because AK -4 oo as K -* oo. For the already chosen K, we have
K k=1
(ank - amk)2 <
15
2
for large enough n, m,
10.6. DISCRETE SPECTRUM AND COMPACT EMBEDDING THEOREM
289
because by construction the sequence {ank}°_1 is Cauchy for any k. Hence, for large enough n, m,
II fn-fmIL2<E, that is, { fn} is a Cauchy sequence in L2 (M), which was to be proved. (c) . Recall that, by Theorem 4.6, the resolvent Ra = (L + aid) (b) is a bounded self-adjoint operator in L2 (M). For any f E L2 (M), we have
u:=Raf EdomLCW0(M) and
Lu+au= f
whence
(Vu, Vu)L2 + a (u, U)L2 = (u, LU)L2 + (u, au)L2 = (u, P L2
(cf. (4.21)). Therefore, min (1, a) IIUIIWI < IIUIIL2IIf IIL2 < IIUIIWiIIf IIL2
and (10.80) < max (1, a-1) If Consider the operator Ra : L2 (M) -+ W0 (M) defined by Raf = Raf (the IIL2.
IIuliwi.
difference between Ra and Ra is that they have different target spaces). By (10.80), the operator R_a, is bounded. The resolvent Ra : L2 (M) + L2 (M) is the composition of Ra and the embedding operator, as follows:
(M).
L2 (M) -% Wo (M)
Since Ra is bounded and the embedding operator Wo (M) -L2 (M) is compact, their composition is a compact operator.
(c) = (a). Note that ker Ra = {0} because Ra, f = 0 implies f = (L + a id) 0 = 0. By the Hilbert-Schmidt theorem, there is an orthonormal basis {Wk} in L2 (M) that consists of the eigenfunctions cPk of Ra with the eigenvalues pk 0 such that pk -+ 0 as k -+ oo. Since L = Ra 1- a, function Wk is also an eigenfunction of L with the eigenvalue Ak = pk1 - a. Since Ak --} oo, there is no finite accumulation point of the sequence {Ak}. Using this, the operator (L Aid)-1 can be explicitly constructed for any A Ak as follows: if f = Ek akcpk in L2 (M) then
-
ak
(L-Aid)-1 f
(Pk
k
and this operator is bounded because infk IAk - Al > 0. Hence, the entire spectrum of L coincides with the sequence {Ak}, which implies that the spectrum of L is discrete. COROLLARY 10.21. (Compact embedding theorem) If I is a non-empty relatively compact open subset of a weighted manifold M then the embedding operator W0 (SZ) -4 L2 (Sl) is compact.
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
290
PROOF. By Theorem 10.13, the spectrum of Go is discrete, whence the result follows from Theorem 10.20.
SECOND PROOF. Let us present a more direct proof, without using Theorems 10.13
and 10.20. Instead, we assume that the compact embedding theorem is known for the case M = R' (see Theorem 6.3). Let us show that, for any bounded sequence {fk} in Wo (0), there is a subsequence {fk;} that converges in L2 (Il). Since Co (I2) is dense in Wo (I2), we can assume without loss of generality that all functions fk are in Co (If). Since I2 C M is relatively compact, there is a finite family {U } of small enough relatively compact charts such that
IICUU;=:U. By Theorem 3.5, there exist functions cps E Co (Ui) such that Ej oj - 1 in a neighborhood of N. Fix j and observe that the sequence { fk cps }' 1 is bounded in W0 , because (suppressing indices k, j)
IIMi W
01
=
I1fcILL2 + 11 V (f'P) 11L2
< <
coast .
IlfllL +21IVfllL +2supV,o IfU
Since Wo (Uj) embeds compactly into L2 (Uj), there is a subsequence {fkjc'j}°°1 that converges in L2 (U3). Using the diagonal process, one can ensure that this subsequence converges in L2 (U;) for any j. Since E, cpj - 1 in 0, we conclude that {fki } converges in L2 (I2), which finishes the proof. Applying further Theorem 10.20, we obtain that the spectrum of Gn is discrete, which is the main part of Theorem 10.13. Hence, this approach allows to prove Theorem 10.13 without Theorem 7.6. However, we use Theorem 7.6 also to prove the existence and smoothness of the heat kernel and, at the same token, it leads to a short proof of Theorem 10.13 via the properties of trace. Yet another approach to the proof of Corollary 10.21 is presented in Exercise 7.47. That proof also uses the heat kernel, but in a more direct way.
Exercises. 10.23. Prove that if the spectrum of a weighted manifold (M, g, µ) is discrete then also the spectrum of any non-empty open subset Il C M is discrete.
10.24. Let (M', g', µ) and (M", g", µ') be two weighted manifold with discrete spectra, whose eigenvalues are given by the sequences {ai} and {/3,}, respectively (each eigenvalue
is counted with multiplicity). Prove that the spectrum of the direct product (M, g, µ) is also discrete, and the eigenvalues are given by the double sequence {a; + /j, }. L2 j Let {uk} be a sequence of functions 10.25. (Compactness of the embedding Wio. from Wlo. (M) such that {uk} is bounded in Wl (I1) for any relatively compact open set 0 C M. Prove that there exists a subsequence {uk,, } that converges in Lion (M).
10.7. POSITIVITY OF Al
291
10.7. Positivity of Al Throughout this section, Q is a non-empty relatively compact open subset of a weighted manifold (M, g, µ). Recall that, by Theorem 10.13, the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplace operator Lo is discrete and consists of a sequence {Ak (51)}k 1 of non-negative eigenvalues such that Ak (11) -+ oc as
k-4oc. THEOREM 10.22. Let (M, g, E.c) be a connected weighted manifold. If Sl C M is a non-empty relatively compact open set such that M \ Sl is non-
empty then Al (11) > 0.
Neither connectedness of M nor the fact that Sl M can be dropped. Indeed, if a disconnected manifold is allowed then let M consist of two disjoint copies of Sn and Sl be one of these copies. Obviously, function cp - 1 is an eigenfunction in Sl and, hence, Al (S1) = 0. If 11 = M is allowed
then take Sl = M = S' with the same effect. PROOF. Assume that Al (51) = 0 so that there is an eigenfunction f of G° with the eigenvalue 0, that is, L" f( = 0. By Lemma 4.4, we have (V/f,V/f)LZ(SZ) = (L°f,f)L2(O) = 0
so that V f = 0 in Q. By Corollary 7.3, f E C°° (11). Hence, f is a constant on any connected component of 51. Since f # 0, there is a component of 51 where f is a non-zero constant, say, f - 1. Denote this component again by Q.
The set n is closed and its complement is non-empty. Since M is connected, 51 is not open, which implies that the boundary 851 is not empty. Choose a point xo E 851 and let U be any connected open neighborhood of x0. Consider the set 11' = 51 U U, which is a connected open set. Note that, by construction, 12' \ Ti is non-empty.
Since f E dom J
C W01 (51), extending f to 51' by setting f = 0 in
S2' \ 12, we obtain a function from W0 (11') (see Section 5.5). Since f = 0 on 12' \ 51, by (5.11) we have V f = 0 in 11' \ Q. Since also V f = 0 in 51, we conclude that V f = 0 in 11'. This implies, that, for any co E D (12'),
-
(Aµf, `p)D = (f, L f )D = (V/f, V O)D = 0. Hence, we have f c W0 (11') and Al f = 0 in 12', which implies by Theorem 7.1 that f E C°° (12'). Since V f - 0 in 11, we conclude that f const in 11',
which contradicts to the construction that f = 1 in 12 and f = 0 in 11' \ Ti. Theorem 10.22 is complemented by the following statement. THEOREM 10.23. For any a weighted manifold (M, g, y) and any nonempty relatively compact connected open set 12 C M, A2 (12) > Al (Q).
(10.81)
PROOF. Indeed, by Corollary 10.12, the eigenvalue Al (11) is simple whence (10.81) follows.
292
10. SPECTRAL PROPERTIES
10.8. Long time asymptotic of log pt We will show here that the bottom of the spectrum the long time behavior of the heat kernel.
(M) determines
THEOREM 10.24. On any connected weighted manifold (M, g, u), we have, for all x, y E M, lilog pt(x, t y)
= -\min (M)
t +00
(10.82)
PROOF. Set A = Amin (M). Since the spectrum of operator Pt = e-""- is bounded by e-at, we obtain that II Pt II < e-at and, hence, for any f E L2, IlPtfilL2 < e-"tllfljL2.
(10.83)
Applying this to f = ps,x (where s > 0 and x E M) and notices that PtP8,x = pt+s,x, we obtain IIPt+s,xIIL2 < e-,\t iIPs,xlIL2,
(10.84)
whence lim sup log IIPt,x IIL2 <
t-oo
t
It follows from (7.48) that Pt (x, y) _ (Pt/2,x,Pt/2,y) < IIPt/2,xjIL2lIPt/2,yIIL2,
whence lim sup
t-*
logPtt(x, y) < -A.
To prove the opposite inequality, take any connected relatively compact open set 52 c M and recall that, by Theorem 10.13, the spectrum of the Dirichlet
Laplace operator Ln is discrete, and the heat kernel po is given by the expansion (10.33). By Theorem 10.23, \k (SZ) > a1 (1) for any k > 1 and, by Theorem 10.11, the first eigenfunction co (x) of L 2 is strictly positive in Q. Hence, the first term in expansion (10.33) is the leading one as t -* oo, that is, PtZ (x, y) ' e-al(Q)t(P1 (x)
lim log At' (X, Y)
-
Al
Since pt > pt (cf. Theorem 5.23 and Exercise 7.40), it follows that
t y) > -Amin (1) lim f logPt(x,
.
Exhausting M be such sets 12 and noticing that Amin (12) -* A (see Exercise O 10.6), we finish the proof.
NOTES
293
Exercises. 10.26. Let f E C2 (M) be a non-negative function on a connected weighted manifold M that satisfies the inequality
LN,f+of <0
with a real constant a. Prove that either f = 0 or a < )min (M). REMARK. The converse is also true, that is, for any a > Amin (M) there exists a positive solution to the equation &µ f + a f = 0. This will be proved later in Chapter 13 (cf. Theorem 13.16). Exercise 10.27 contains a partial result in this direction.
10.27. Let a be a real number. (a) Prove that if a < Amin (M) then the operator G - aid has the inverse in L2 (M) and 00
(L - aid)-1 =
J0
eatPtdt.
(10.85)
(b) Prove that if a (M) < oo and a < Amin (M) then the weak Dirichlet problem
A'u+au=0 u e 1 mod Wo (M) has a unique solution that is given by the formula
u= 1+ a J
00
eat (Pl) dt
(10.86)
0
Deduce that u > 0.
10.28. (Maximum principle) Let S2 be a non-empty relatively compact open set in a connected weighted manifold M such that M \ SZ is non-empty. Prove that if u E C (S2) n C2 (f) is a subharmonic function in C then sup u = sup U. an a
(10.87)
REMARK. Of course, this statement follows from Corollary 8.16. Find another proof using Theorem 10.22 and Exercise 4.28.
10.29. Prove that, for all x, y E M and t > s > 0, pt (x, y)
-x)(x,p., ps
(y, y) exp (-Amin (M) (t _' s))
Notes Most of the material of this Chapter is an adaptation of the classical spectral theory, that is associated with the names of Rayleigh, Courant, Neumann, Weyl, to the particular case of the Dirichlet Laplacian. The computation of the spectra of S' and some other compact manifolds can be found in [36] (see also [51]).
CHAPTER 11
Distance function and completeness Here we introduce the techniques of Lipschitz test functions (Section 11.2), which allow to relate the geodesic distance to the properties of solutions of the Laplace and heat equations. Apart from the applications within the present Chapter, this techniques will also be used in Chapters 12, 15, 16.
11.1. The notion of completeness Let (M, g) be a Riemannian manifold and d (x, y) be the geodesic distance on M (see Section 3.11 for the definition). The manifold (M, g) is said to be metrically complete if the metric space (M, d) is complete, that is, any Cauchy sequence in (M, d) converges.
A smooth path -y (t) : (a, b) -* M is called a geodesics if, for any t E (a, b) and for all s close enough to t, the path ' y sj is a shortest path between the points 'y (t) and 'y (s). A Riemannian manifold (M, g) is called geodesically complete if, for any x E M and E TAM \ {0}, there is a geodesics 'y : [0, +oo) -4 M of infinite length such that ry (0) = x and 'y (0) = t;. It is known that, on a geodesically complete connected manifold,
any two points can be connected by a shortest geodesics. We state the following theorem without proof. HOPF-R1Now THEOREM. For a Riemannian manifold (M, g), the following conditions are equivalent: (a) (M, g) is metrically complete. (b) (M, g) is geodesically complete. (c) All geodesic balls in M are relatively compact sets. This theorem will not be used, but it motivates us to give the following definition.
DEFINITION 11.1. A Riemannian manifold (M, g) is said to be complete if all the geodesic balls in M are relatively compact. For example, any compact manifold is complete.
Exercises. 11.1. Let g be a metric in R', which is given in the polar coordinates (r, 0) by
g=dr2+'02(r)g5tt-1,
(11.1)
where z() (r) is a smooth positive function (cf. Sections 3.10 and 8.4.3). Prove that the Riemannian model (Rn, g) is complete. 295
296
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
(a) of Hopf-Rinow Theorem, that is, if all geodesic balls 11.2. Prove the implication (c) are relatively compact then (M, d) is a complete metric space.
11.2. Lipschitz functions Let d be the geodesic distance on a Riemannian manifold (M, g). Let f be a function defined on a set S C M. We say that f is Lipschitz on S if there exists a finite constant C such that if (x) - f (y) l < Cd (x, y)
for all x, y E S.
The constant C is called the Lipschitz constant of f . The smallest possible value of C is called the Lipschitz seminorm off and is denoted by IIf hip(s) that is, If (x) - f (Y) l 11f hip(S)
sup
x,yES,x}y
d (x, y)
The set of all Lipschitz functions on M is denoted by Lip (M). It is obvious that Lip (M) is a linear space (cf. Exercise 11.5). It follows from Lemma 3.24 that any Lipschitz function on M is continuous, that is, Lip (M) C C (M) .
A large variety of Lipschitz functions arise from the following construction. For any non-empty set E C M and any point x E M, define the
distance from x to E by d (x, E) := inf {d (x, z) : z E E} . LEMMA 11.2. If manifold M is connected then the function x i-+ d (x, E) is Lipschitz on M with the Lipschitz constant 1.
PROOF. The connectedness of M ensures that d (x, E) is finite. Let us show that, for any two points x, y E M,
d (x, E) - d (y, E) < d (x, y),
(11.2)
which will imply the claim. For any E > 0, there exists z E E such that d (y, E) > d (y, z) - E.
Then we have by the triangle inequality
d (x, E)-d (y, E) < d (x, z)-(d (y, z) - e) < d (x, z)-d (y, z)+E < d (x, y)+E. Since e > 0 is arbitrary, (11.2) follows. It is important for applications that any Lipschitz function has the weak gradient as stated below. THEOREM 11.3. Let (M, g, µ) be a weighted manifold. Then, for any f E Lip (M), the distributional gradient V f is an L' -vector field on M and IIVfIILOO
IIfIILip
(11.3)
11.2. LIPSCHITZ FUNCTIONS
297
FIRST PROOF. Let U be a chart on M such that d (x, y) < C I x - yj for all x, y E U,
where Ix - yj is the Euclidean distance in the local coordinates in U. By Lemma 3.24, the manifold M can be covered by charts with this property. It follows that the function flu is Lipschitz with respect to the Euclidean distance. We will take without proof the following fact from the theory of functions of real variables. RADEMACHER'S THEOREM. Any Lipschitz function f in a an open set U C RT is differentiable at almost all points x E U in the following sense: there exists a covector u (x) E R7L, such that I),
as e- 0.
(11.4)
Moreover, the components ui (x) of u (x) coincide with the distributional
derivatives a off . The Lipschitz condition implies that all the components ui = a belong to L°° (U). By Exercise 4.11, the vector field v with components v2 = g2Uui
is the distributional gradient of f in U with respect to the Riemannian metric g. In particular, if x E U is a point where (11.4) holds then, for any vector E TIM, we have (v, S)g =
(11.5) uis2 = (u, ). C a.e. where C = If II Lip, which will prove
gikvitk
_:5
=
Let us show that JvIg (11.3). It suffices to show that, for any point x E U where (11.4) holds and for any tangent vector C E TIM, (v, )g < C j
Ig
.
Choose a smooth path y in U such that y (0) = x and - (0)
(11.6)
Then
y (t) - y (0) = Ct + o (t) as t -+ 0, whence, by (11.4) and (11.5),
f (y (t)) - f (y (0)) = (u, y (t) -y (0)) +0 (t) = (u, )t+o (t)
(v, )gt+o (t) .
On the other hand, the Lipschitz condition implies
if (y (t)) - f (y (o))I < _ CQ (yl[o,t]) = C ft I (s)Ig ds = 0
Comparing the above two lines and letting t -* 0, we obtain (11.6), which was to be proved.
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
298
SECOND PROOF. In this proof, we do not use Rademacher's theorem, but instead, we will use Exercise 2.23, which proves the statement of Theorem 11.3 in the case when M is an open set in R' and the metric is Euclidean. Let us first prove the following claim. CLAIM. For any point p E M and for any C > 1, there exists a chart U D p such that for all C2
gij (x)
((1)2 + ... +
(11.7)
and 9ij
(x) ?7irlj < C2 (rl1 + ... +
(11.8)
Let so far U be any chart containing p. Arguing as in the proof of Theorem 8.10, the coordinates x1, ..., xn in U can be chosen so that gij (p) =
id. By continuity, the matrix g is close enough to id in a small enough neighborhood V of p. More precisely, by choosing V small enough, we can ensure that the matrices gij and gj satisfy the conditions (11.7) and (11.8), respectively. We are left to rename V to U, yi to xi, and g to g. Shrinking further the chart U from the above Claim, we can assume that
U is a ball in the coordinates x1, ..., x" centered at p. Then, for any two points x, y E U, the straight line segment between x, y is also contained in U. By (11.7), the Riemannian length of this segment is bounded by C Ix - yl, which implies that
d(x,y)
(11.9)
Let now f be a Lipschitz function on M with the Lipschitz constant K. In a chart U as above, we have
If (x) - f (y)I
(11.10)
i=1 C of 2 By Exercise 4.11, the Riemannian distributional gradient Vgf is given by
(Vgf)k = gki and
Iogf l
2
ax
- g ij of of
axi c?xj
It follows (11.8) and (11.10) that n
IVgf < C2 E
2
I2
i=1
9f / (19xi
<
C2 (CK)2 a.e.
299
11.2. LIPSCHITZ FUNCTIONS
that is, in U,
IVgfI < C2K a.e.. (11.11) Since M can be covered by a countable family of such charts U, (11.11) holds also in M. Finally, since C > 1 was arbitrary, we obtain I Vg f < K a.e., which finishes the proof. Denote by Lipo (M) the set of all Lipschitz functions on M with compact
support. It is obvious that Lipo (M) C LP (M), for all 1 < p < oo. COROLLARY 11.4. We have the following inclusions:
Co (M) c Lipo (M) c Wo (M)
(11.12)
.
PROOF. By Theorem 11.3, any function f c Lipo (M) has distributional gradient V/f E L°O (M). Since supp f is compact, it follows that f E L2 (M) and V f E L2 (M), that is, f E W1 (M). By Lemma 5.5, the compactness of supp f implies f E Wo (M), which proves the second inclusion in (11.12). Let now f E Co (M). Set
C:= sup IVfI <00 M
and show that, for any two points x, y E M,
If (x) - f (y) I < Cd (x, y),
(11.13)
which will prove the first inclusion in (11.12). If the points x, y E M cannot
be connected by a smooth path then d (x, y) = oo and (11.13) holds. Let 7 (t) : [a, b] -4 M be a smooth path such that 'y (a) = x and ry (b) = y. Then
f (y) - f (x) = f b ¢
f ('y (t)) dt =
f(df)dt
¢
(vf, )gdt,
whence
If(y)-f(x)I <_
fa IVfIV dt
b
Minimizing over all -y, we obtain (11.13).
A function f on M is said to be locally Lipschitz if f is Lipschitz on any compact subset of M. The class of all locally Lipschitz functions is denoted by Lipid, (M), so that we have
Lipo (M) C Lip (M) C Lipi. (M) . Some additional properties of Lipschitz and locally Lipschitz functions are stated in the following Exercises.
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
300
Exercises. 11.3. Prove that a function f c C' (M) is Lipschitz if and only if IV f I is bounded, and IIfIILip=sup 1VfI M
Prove the following properties of Lipschitz functions.
11.4.
(a) Let fl, ..., f,,, E Lip (M) and let Ik = fk (M) be the range of fk. Let cp be a Lipschitz function on the set I. x ... x I,,,, C R'. Then the composite function fi (x)
W Yi W, ..., f,,,. (x))
is Lipschitz on M and II4'IILip <_ IIVIILip
(
11/2 IIfkIILip I
k=1
/
.
(11.14)
(b) If f e Lipo (M) and V E Lip (R) is such that V (0) = 0 then cp o f E Lipo (M).
11.5. Prove that f, g E Lip (M) then also the functions f + g, max (f, g), min (f, g) are Lipschitz; moreover, f g is also Lipschitz provided one of the functions f, g is bounded on the support of the other.
Hence show, that if f, g E Lipo (M) then also the functions f + g, f g, max (f , g), min (f, g) belong to Lipo (M). 11.6. Prove that for any open set Sl C M and any compact set K C Sl there is a function f E Lipo (Il) such that 0 < f < 1 in ), f I K = 1, and If IILip < d(x,QC) REMARK. A function f with the above properties is called a Lipschitz cutoff function of K in Q. 11.7. Let f be a real valued function on a Riemannian manifold M. (a) Prove that if {U is a countable family of open sets covering the manifold M such
that C := SUP IIf II
Lip (M) and IIf II Lip(M) < C.
(b) Prove that if E1, E2 are two closed sets in M such that E, U E2 = M and f is Lipschitz in each set El, E2 with the Lipschitz constant C, then f is also Lipschitz in M with the Lipschitz constant C.
11.8. Prove that C' (M) C Liptoc (M) C Wto° (M).
11.9. Prove that the set of functions from Liptoc (M) with compact support is identical to Lipo (M).
11.10. Prove that if E Lipt°° (M) and V E Lipt° (lR) then the composite (fl (x) , ..., f (x)) is locally Lipschitz on M.
function (P (x) :=
11.11. Prove that if f, g E Lipton (M) then the functions f + g, f g, max (f, g), min (f, g) are also in Lijto° (M). 11.12.
Prove that if f E Lipt° (M) then the distributional gradient V f belongs to
L- (M). 11.13. (Product rule for Lipschitz functions) (a) Prove that, for all f, g E Lipt°° (M),
V (fg) = fVg+gvf.
(11.15)
(b) Prove that if f E Lip (M)flL°° (M) and g c Wo (M) then fg c Wt; (M) and (11.15) holds.
11.3. ESSENTIAL SELF-ADJOINTNESS
301
(c) Prove that if f E Lipo (M) and g E WWo (M) then fg E Wo (M) and (11.15) holds. 11.14. (Chain rule for Lipschitz functions) Prove that if f E Lipton (M) and then 0 (f) E Lipid, (M) and
E C' (H),
V (f)=VG'(f)Vf
11.3. Essential self-adjointness Apart from the Dirichlet Laplace operator, the operator Lt µ ID may have other self-adjoint extensions related to other boundary conditions. A densely defined operator in L2 is said to be essentially self-adjoint if it admits a unique self-adjoint extension.
THEOREM 11.5. If the weighted manifold (M, g, µ) is complete then the operator AµID is essentially self-adjoint in L2 (M).
We precede the proof by lemmas of independent interest. LEMMA 11.6. Let (M, g, µ) be a complete weighted manifold. If a function u E L2 (M) satisfies the equation A,,u - Au = 0 with a constant A > 0, then u const on each connected component of M. If in addition A > 0 then u 0.
PROOF. By Theorem 7.1, we have u E C°° (M). Let f E Lipo (M), that is, f is a Lipschitz function on M with compact support. Then also U f 2 E Lip0 (M) and, hence, U f 2 E W0 (M) (cf. Corollary 11.4). Multiplying
the equation Au = Au by U f 2, we obtain U f 2APu > 0. Integrating this inequality and using the Green formula (4.12), we obtain
0 > - fM uf2AYudµ = fM (0 (uf2) ,Vu)gdp f IVu12f2dµ+2 f (Vu,Vf)gufdµ, M
M
whence fM IDuI2 f
2dµ < -2 <
2
f
(Vu, V f )gu f dµ
M
f IDu12f2dµ+21 M
M
IVfI2u2dp
and
f I,7u12f2dµ<4 f M
M
Iofl2u2dµ.
(11.16)
Fix a point o c M, numbers R > r > 0, and specify f as follows: f (x) = (R - d (x, o))+ . Alternatively, this function can be defined by f = W o d o) where cp (s) (R - s)+. Since both functions cp and d o) are Lipschitz function on R and M, respectively, with Lipschitz constants 1, the function f is also Lipschitz with the Lipschitz constant 1 (cf. Exercise 11.4). Obviously, supp f coincides
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
302
with the closed geodesic ball B (o, R). By hypotheses, all the geodesic balls
on M are relatively compact, whence it follows that supp f is compact. Hence, f c Lipo (M), and (11.16) holds with this f. Since f _> R - r on B (o, r) and, by Theorem 11.3, Iofl < 1 a.e., we obtain from (11.16)
JB(o r)
I(R VuI2dµ <
4
2dµ r)2 fm u
Letting R -* oo and using u E L2 (M), we obtain
f
(o,r)
Vul2dli=0.
Since r is arbitrary, we conclude Vu - 0 and hence u - const on any connected component of M. In the case A > 0 it follows that u = 0 because 0 is the only constant that satisfies the equation Au - Au = 0.
LEMMA 11.7. On a complete weighted manifold, if u E L2 (M) and
&uEL2(M) then uEWo (M). PROOF. By Theorem 4.5, the equation -D,,v + v = f has a solution v = R1 f E Wo (M) for any f EL 2 (M). Set f = -&, u + u and observe that, for the function v = R1 f , we have
-0,,(u-v)+(u-v)=0. Since u - v E L2 (M) we conclude by Lemma 11.6 that u - v = 0 whence u E Wo (M). PROOF OF THEOREM 11.5. Let L = -JjIWo and Lo inclusion Lo C L'implies L = L* C Lo. By (4.10), we have dom Lp = {u E L2 (M) : &,,u E L2 (M)1,
= -&. The
whence by Lemma 11.7,
dom Lo C Wo (M) = dom L,
which implies Lo = L. If L1 is another self-adjoint extension of Lo then Lo C L1 implies L1 =
Li C Lo and, hence, L1 C L. In turn, this implies L* C Ll whence L = L1.
Exercises. 11.15. Prove that if (M, g, µ) is a complete weighted manifold then W0 (M) = Wl (M). 11.16. Let (M, g, µ) be a complete weighted manifold. (a) Let {uk}' 1 be a sequence from W1 (M) such that, for all cP E Co (M), (Uk, W)W1 - (U, cc)Wl
(11.17)
(uk, P)L2 -+ (v,'.P)1
(11.18)
for some u E W', and for some v E L2 (M). Prove that u = v.
,
11.4. STOCHASTIC COMPLETENESS AND THE VOLUME GROWTH
303
(b) Show that without the hypothesis of completeness, the claim of (a) is not true in general.
11.17. Let (M, g, lc) be a complete weighted manifold, and let h be a smooth positive function on M satisfying (9.43). Set d = h2dµ. (a) Let G = -D-IW2 be the Dirichlet Laplace operator of (M, g, µ). Prove that the operator -ON, + (DI D is essentially self-adjoint in L2 (M, lc), and its unique selfadjoint extension, denoted by L", is given by
L, = JGJ-1,
(11.19)
where J is a bijection L2 (M, i) -+ L2 (M, p) defined by J f = h f . (b) Prove that the heat semigroup e-t.c`' of the operator L'I' in L2 (M, p) has the integral kernel pt (x, y), given by (11.20)
p (x, y) = h (x) h (y) pt (x, y)
11.18. Consider in R the function (x) = x2 - 1. Verify that the function h (x) = e 2x2 satisfies (9.43) with this function. Hence, prove that _ 2 x2 2 et y tanh t) . (11.21) Pt' (x, y) = (2-7r sinh 2t) 1/2 exp (- 2 sinh 2t 2 REMARK. The function (11.21) is called the Mehler kernel. HINT. Use Example 9.19.
11.4. Stochastic completeness and the volume growth Define the volume function V (x, r) of a weighted manifold (M, g, A) hV
V (x, r) := µ (B (x, r))
,
where B (x, r) is the geodesic ball. Note that V (x, r) < oo for all x E M and r > 0 provided M is complete. Recall that a manifold M is stochastically complete, if the heat kernel Pt (x, y) satisfies the identity/'
J pt (x, y) du (y) = 1, M
for all x E M and t > 0 (see Section 8.4.1). The result of this section is the following volume test for the stochastic completeness. THEOREM 11.8. Let (M, g, p) be a complete connected weighted manifold. If, for some point xo E M,
rdr
[00
J
log V (x o, r
then M is stochastically complete.
= 00,
(11.22)
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
304
Condition (11.22) holds, in particular, if (11.23) V (xo, r) < exp (Cr2) for all r large enough or even if (11.24) V(xo,rk) < exp (Crk) , for a sequence rk -> oo as k -* oo (cf. Exercise 11.19). This provides yet another proof of the stochastic completeness of 1[Rn and W. See Exercise 12.4 for an alternative proof of the stochastic completeness of M under the condition (11.24).
Fix 0 < T < oo, set I = (0, T) and consider the following Cauchy problem in I x M
at = 0µu in I x M,
{ u1t-o = 0.
(11.25)
A solution is sought in the class u E C°°(I x M), and the initial condition means that u (t, x) -4 0 locally uniformly in x E M as t -+ 0 (cf. Section 8.4.1). By Theorem 8.18, the stochastic completeness of M is equivalent to the uniqueness property of the Cauchy problem in the class of bounded solutions. In other words, in order to prove Theorem 11.8, it suffices to verify that the only bounded solution to (11.25) is u - 0. The assertion will follow from the following more general fact. THEOREM 11.9. Let (M, g, p) be a complete connected weighted mani-
fold, and let u(x,t) be a solution to the Cauchy problem (11.25). Assume that, for some x0 E M and for all R > 0,
jTj
u2 (x, t) dp(x)dt < exp (f (R)) ,
(11.26)
(xo,R)
where f (r) is a positive increasing function on (0, +oo) such that
rdr
= 00 .
(11.27)
f (r)
Then u - 0 in I x M. Theorem 11.9 provides the uniqueness class (11.26) for the Cauchy problem. The condition (11.27) holds if, for example, f (r) = Cr2, but fails for f (r) = Cr2+e when e > 0. Before we embark on the proof, let us mention the following consequence.
COROLLARY 11.10. If M = ]R'2 and u (t, x) be a solution to (11.25) satisfying the condition Ju(t, x) I < Cexp (CIx2)
for alit E I, x E I[8n,
(11.28)
then u = 0. Moreover, the same is true if u satisfies instead of (11.28) the condition
Iu(t,x)I
(11.29)
11.4. STOCHASTIC COMPLETENESS AND THE VOLUME GROWTH
305
where f (r) is a convex increasing function on (0, +oo) satisfying (11.27).
PROOF. Since (11.28) is a particular case of (11.29) for the function
f (r) = Cr2, it suffices to treat the condition (11.29). In IRn we have
f
V (x, r) = crn. Therefore, (11.29) implies that T
u2(x, t) d,u(x)dt < CRn exp (f (R)) = C exp(f (R)),
Jo
B(O,R)
where f (r) := f (r) + n log r. The convexity of f implies hat log r < C f (r) for large enough r. Hence, f (r) < C f (r) and function f- also satisfies the condition (11.27). By Theorem 11.9, we conclude u - 0. The class of functions u satisfying (11.28) is called the Tikhonov class,
and the conditions (11.29) and (11.27) define the Tacklind class. The uniqueness of the Cauchy problem in R' in each of these classes is a classical result, generalizing Theorem 1.7. PROOF OF THEOREM 11.8. By Theorem 8.18, it suffices to verify that
the only bounded solution to the Cauchy value problem (11.25) is u - 0. Indeed, if u is a bounded solution of (11.25), then setting S:= sup Jul <00 we obtain T
L
u2 (t, x)dp(x) < S2TV (xo, R) = exp (f (R)), L(XO,R)
where
f (r) := log (S2TV (xo, r)) . It follows from the hypothesis (11.22) that the function f satisfies (11.27). Hence, by Theorem 11.9, we obtain u - 0. PROOF OF THEOREM 11.9. Denote for simplicity Br = B(xo, r). the main technical part of the proof is the following claim. CLAIM. Let u (t, x) solve the heat equation in (b, a) x M where b < a are reals, and assume that u (t, x) extends to a continuous function in (b, a] x M. Assume also that, for all R > 0,
fbf
u2 (x, t) du(x)dt < exp (f (R)) R
where f is a function as in Theorem 11.8. Then, for any R > 0 satisfying the condition R2
a-b<
8f(4R)'
(11.30)
the following inequality holds:
f
u2(a, )di < R
f
JB4R
u2(b, )dp + R2.
(11.31)
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
306
Let us first show how this Claim allows to prove that any solution u to (11.25), satisfying (11.26), is identical 0. Extend u (t, x) to t = 0 by setting u (0, x) = 0 so that u is continuous in [0, T) x M. Fix R > 0 and t E (0, T). For any non-negative integer k, set Rk = 4kR
and, for any k > 1, choose (so far arbitrarily) a number Tk to satisfy the condition /R2
0
(11.32)
Rk)
where c = 128. Then define a decreasing sequence of times {tk} inductively by to = t and tk = tk_1 - Tk (see Fig. 11.1).
FIGURE 11.1. The sequence of the balls BRk and the time moments tk.
If tk > 0 then function u satisfies all the conditions of the Claim with a = tk-1 and b = tk, and we obtain from (11.31)
f
u2(tk-1, )du < f
u2(tk, )d/.c + 2
BRk
R k_1
Rk-1
(11.33)
,
which implies by induction that
f u2(t, .)d/2
J
BR
u2(tk, .)d/2 + Rk
.
i=1
(11.34)
Ri-1
If it happens that tk = 0 for some k then, by the initial condition in (11.25),
f
U Rk
2
(tk, )dµ = 0.
11.4. STOCHASTIC COMPLETENESS AND THE VOLUME GROWTH
307
In this case, it follows from (11.34) that
I
4
u2(t, )dµ <
2 Ri-1
_
2'
t) - 0 (here we use the connectwhich implies by letting R -3 0o that edness of M). Hence, to finish the proof, it suffices to construct, for any R > 0 and t E (0, T), a sequence {tk} as above that vanishes at a finite k. The condition tk = 0 is equivalent to
t=T1+T2+...+Tk.
(11.35)
The only restriction on Tk is the inequality (11.32). The hypothesis that f (r) is an increasing function implies that 00 00 r/dr rdr R2+l f (r) JR f (r) C k=O JRk f (Rk) /PRk+1
which together with (11.27) yields 00
R2k
k=1 f (Rk)
Therefore, the sequence {Tk}k 1 can be chosen to satisfy simultaneously (11.32) and 00
ETk=DOk=1
By diminishing some of Tk, we can achieve (11.35) for any finite t, which finishes the proof. Now we prove the above Claim. Since the both integrals in (11.31) are continuous with respect to a and b, we can slightly reduce a and slightly
increase b; hence, we can assume that u (t, x) is not only continuous in [b, a] x M but also smooth. Let p(x) be a Lipschitz function on M (to be specified below) with the Lipschitz constant 1. Fix a real s 0 [b, a] (also to be specified below) and consider the following the function
'e(t x) _ '
p2(x)
4(t-s)'
which is defined on R x M except for t = s, in particular, on [b, a] x M. By Theorem 11.3, the distributional gradient Vp is in L°° (M) and satisfies the inequality jVpj < 1, which implies, for any t=h s, p (x)
l v (t, x) < 2(t-s)' Since aS
p2 (x)
at
4 (t - s)2'
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
308
we obtain (11.36)
a+IVe12 <0. For a given R > 0, define a function y (x) by c0 (x) = min
((3 -
d ER o) 1
71/
(see Fig. 11.2). Obviously, we have 0 < cc < 1 on M, cp - 1 in B2R, and x0) is Lipschitz a. .1 the Lipschitz
cp - 0 outside B3R. Since the function d
constant 1, we obtain that cc is Lipschitz with the Lipschitz constant 1/R. By Theorem 11.3, we have JVcpl < 1/R. By the completeness of M, all the balls in M are relatively compact sets, which implies cp E Lipo (M).
FIGURE 11.2. Function cp (x)
Consider the function ucp2ee as a function of x for any fixed t E [b, a]. Since it is obtained from locally Lipschitz functions by taking product and composition, this function is locally Lipschitz on M (cf. Exercise 11.11). Since this function has a compact support, it belongs to Lipo (M), whence by Corollary 11.4 ucp2e E W. (M) .
Multiplying the heat equation
au
_0 u
at -
A
by ucp2e and integrating it over [b, a] x M, we obtain a
a
r
J J at bM
ucp2e d,ccdt.
bM
(11.37)
11.4. STOCHASTIC COMPLETENESS AND THE VOLUME GROWTH
309
Since both functions u and are smooth in t E [b, a], the time integral on the left hand side can be computed as follows:r
a 2
Jba
C?t) cp2etdt
[u22et] - 2 J a t u2cp2eedt.
=
(11.38)
b
2
Using the Green formula (4.12) (cf. Exercise 5.9) to evaluate the spatial integral on the right hand side of (11.37), we obtain fM
(APU) ucp2etdµ =
- fM(V U, V (ucp2e ))dp.
Applying the product rule and the chain rule to compute V
(cf.
Exercises 11.13 and 11.14), we obtain
-(Vu, V (ucp2ee)) _
- IVU12 cp2et - (Vu, V )ucp2ee - 2(Vu, V p)ucpe6 - IVu12
I
IuI) (P 2e + 2 IVcpI2 u2et.
Combining with (11.37), (11.38), and using (11.36), we obtain a
a
[IM
ff /ff
at u2cp2e dµdt +
b
21
bM
<
(APU)
bM u2
I
- IVu12 + 2 IVul IvSI IuI \I cO2etdµdt C
bM
as
+4
f
V2
Jb JM a
-f f
Jul
- IVul)2 cp2eldltdt
b M a
+4f f I
u2eedydt
b M
whence a
1
IfM
l
a< 4 if IDcp12 u2eedµdt. b
b M
(11.39)
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
310
Using the properties of function cp (x), in particular, JV pj < 1/R, we obtain from (11.39) a
LR
u2( b,
u2(a, .)eC(a'')dµ <
)e (b,')dµ + 4 f
fB4R
f
u2e ddt.
b B4R\B2R
(11.40)
Let us now specify p(x) and s. Set p(x) to be the distance function from the ball BR, that is,p(x) = (d(x, xo) - R)+ (see Fig. 11.3).
.......................
FIGURE 11.3. Function p (x).
Set s = 2a - b so that, for all t E [b, a], a - b < s - t < 2 (a - b), whence
-t) <
2 (X
(t, x} _
4(s
8
-
(a ( )b)
(11.41)
0.
Consequently, we can drop the factor e on the left hand side of (11.40) because = 0 in BR, and drop the factor e in the first integral on the right hand side of (11.40) because < 0. Clearly, if x E B4R\B2R then p(x) > R, which together with (11.41) implies that (t, x) -<
- 8 (a
b)
in [b, a] x B4R\B2R
Hence, we obtain from (11.40)
f u2(a, )dµ < JB4R R
u2(b, )dµ + 4
R2
exp (-8 (a - b))
a
a ! u2dµdt. b B4R
11.4. STOCHASTIC COMPLETENESS AND THE VOLUME GROWTH
311
By (11.26) we have a
II u2dpdt < exp (f (4R)) b B4R
whence JBR
u2 (a, )dl <_ f u2 (b, )dl + B4R
R2
(
exp
2
\ 8 (a b)
+ f (4R))
Finally, applying the hypothesis (11.30), we obtain (11.31). EXAMPLE 11.11. The hypothesis
f
_
rdr
00
00
(11.42)
log V (xo, r) of Theorem 11.8 is sufficient for the stochastic completeness of M but not necessary as one can see from Example 8.25. Nevertheless, let us show that
the condition (11.42) is sharp in the following sense: if f (r) is a smooth positive convex function on (0, +oo) with f' (r) > 0 and such that
/00f(r rdr
<00,
(11.43)
JJ
then there exists a complete but stochastically incomplete weighted manifold
M such that log V (xo, r) = f (r) , for some xo E M and large enough r. Indeed, let M be a weighted model as in Section 8.4.3. Note that M is complete by Exercise 11.1. Define its volume function V (r) for large r by
V (r) = exp (f (r)) so that
V(r)
1
V' (r)
f' (r)
(11.44)
Let us show that, for all r > 1,
r f (r) < c f (r) ' 1
(11.45)
where
c=min( f'(1)(1) f ,1) >0. Indeed, the function > .is non-negative
Eience,
h (r) = r f' (r) - c f (r) for r = 1 and its derivative is h' (r) = rf" (r) + (1 - c) f' (r) > 0.
h is increasing and h (r) > 0 for r > 1, whence (11.45) follows.
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
312
Combining (11.44), (11.45), and (11.43), we obtain
V, r) dr < oo, which implies by Theorem 8.24 the stochastic incompleteness of M. EXAMPLE 11.12. We say that a weighted manifold (M, g, µ) has bounded
geometry if there exists e > 0 such that all the geodesic balls B (x, E) are uniformly quasi-isometric to the Euclidean ball Be; that is, there is a constant C and, for any x E M, a diffeomorphism cp,, : B (x, E) -3 BE such that cc changes the Riemannian metric and the measure at most by the factor C (see Fig. 11.4).
FIGURE 11.4. A manifold of bounded geometry is "patched" by uniformly distorted Euclidean balls.
For example, 1R'z and 1H[' have bounded geometry. Any manifold of bounded geometry is stochastically complete, which follows from the fact that it is complete and its volume function satisfies the estimate V (x, r) < exp (Cr) , for all x E M and large r (see Exercise 11.20 for the details).
Exercises. 11.19. Let f (r) be a positive increasing function on (0, +oo) and assume that there exists a sequence {rk} --* oo such that
f (rk) < Crk for all k. Prove that /
rdr
T R 11.20. Let M be a connected manifold with bounded geometry as in Example 11.12. (a) Prove that there is a constant N such that for any x E M, the ball B (x, e) can be covered by at most N balls of radius e/2.
11.5. PARABOLIC MANIFOLDS
313
(b) Prove that for any x E M and integer k > 1, the ball B (x, ke/2) can be covered by at most N'`-1 balls of radii e/2. (c) Prove that any geodesic ball on M is relatively compact. (d) Prove that, V (x, r) < exp (Cr) for all x E M and r > 1. Conclude that M is stochastically complete.
11.21. Let (M, a) be a complete connected weighted manifold with µ (M) < oo. Prove that, for all x, y E M, (11.46) (M) as t -i co. Pt (x, y) -+
'11.22. Let (M, i) be a complete connected weighted manifold and let h be a positive harmonic function on M such that, for some xo E M, the function
v (r) := J
h2dµ
B(ro,r)
satisfies the condition
/'°°
rdr
logV(- r)
(11.47)
0<) .
Prove that Pth = h.
11.5. Parabolic manifolds DEFINITION 11.13. A weighted manifold (M, g, µ) is called parabolic if any positive superharmonic function on M is constant. THEOREM 11.14. Let (M, g, µ) be a complete connected weighted manifold. If, for some point xo E M, Oo
rdr V (X0' r)
(11.48)
= 00 ,
then M is parabolic.
For example, (11.48) holds if V (xo, r) < Cr2 for all r large enough or even if V (xo, rk) < Crkk , for a sequence rk -- oo as k -* oc (cf. Exercise 11.19).
(11.49)
PROOF. Let u E C2 (M) be a positive superharmonic function on M. Choose any Lipschitz function v on M with compact support. Multiplying
the inequality D,,,u < 0 by u and integrating using the Green formula (4.12) (note that v2 E Wo (M)), we obtain 2
Iy zl
v2dµ < 2
M
f(VU, Vv) U
v dµ
I Dull
2
If
2
u
v2dµ
1/2
IVvl2 \ fm
dpM 1/2
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
314
whence it follows that z
f
IVu) vzdµ<4f IVvlzdµ. M u2 M
(11.50)
Set p (x) = d (x, xo) and choose v (x) in the form v (x) = cp (p (x)) where
cp is a function on [0, +oo) to be defined. Denote for simplicity V (r) _ V (xo, r) and Br = B (xo, r). Fix a finite sequence
0
W(r)=1 if 0 < r < ro,
W(r)=O if r > rk,
(11.51)
and, for any i = 1, ..., k,
W' (r) = -ariV(ri) 1 if ri_1 < r < ri,
(11.52)
where
(see Fig. 11.5).
FIGURE 11.5. Function cp (r).
For this value of a, we have rk
kfrz
(r) dr = o
(r) dr = -a x_1
z
i
(rz
V(ri) 1)2
-1
i_1
which makes the conditions (11.51) and (11.52) compatible. Clearly, cp (r) is a Lipschitz function, which implies that v = cp o p is Lipschitz on M. By (11.51), supp v C B,.k and, since the balls are relatively
11.5. PARABOLIC MANIFOLDS
315
compact, v c Lipo (M). Obviously, Vcp = 0 in Bro and outside Brk. Since Ippl < 1 a.e., in each annulus Bri \ Bri_1 we haves I VvI <
arz - ri-1
(11.53)
V(r)
which implies k
I
IDvl2 d µ
M
_
IVvl2dµ <
k
a
2E
-// i=1
Bri\Bri-1
(ri-ri2) 2 V(ri)=a.
i=1
V (rZ)
(11.54)
On the other hand, using the monotonicity of V (r), we obtain
/ rk rdr Jr, V (r)
k-1 r f '+1 rdr < 1 / =+1 d / V (r) i=1 V (ri) A i=1 ri
rr = 1
k-1
2 Z=1
2
2
rz+l - rZ V (ri)
Specifying {ri} to be a geometric sequence with ri = 2ri-1, we obtain i+1 r? = 3r? = 12 (ri ri_i)2 ,
-
-
which implies
rk rdr < 6 rl V (r) -
k-1 (ri
- ri-1)2 < 6a-1.
V (ri)
Comparing with (11.54), we conclude that
fMUri rk
rdr \-1 V (r) )
Returning to (11.50) and using the fact that v = 1 on B,,,, we obtain 12
I
ra
U2
dµ < 24 /
rk
rdr
1
n V (r)
We can still choose ro and k. By the hypothesis (11.48), for any ro > 0 and
> 0, there exists k so big that rrlk
rdr (r) > e-1,
V
'Strictly speaking, we can apply the chain rule Vv = ep' (p) V p and, hence, obtain (11.53) only in the open set Br; Then (11.53) in Br, \ Bri_1 follows from the fact that the boundary of any geodesic ball has measure zero. However, the proof of this fact requires more Riemannian geometry than we would like to use here. Without this fact,
one can argue as follows. The volume function V (r) is monotone and, hence, the set S of the points of discontinuity of V (r) is at most countable. We can choose the sequence {ri} to avoid S, which implies that IL
=limo(V(ri+e)-V(ri))=0.
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
316
which implies fBr0
d24E.
U
Since ro and e are arbitrary, we conclude Vu - 0 and u = const, which was to be proved. REMARK 11.15. Assume that the volume function V (r) belongs to C' (IR+)
and V' (r) > 0. Then one can choose function cp (r) is a simpler manner. Namely, for fixed 0 < ro < R, define cp (r) by
c'(r)=0 ifr>R,
W(r)=1 if0
cp (r) _ -V r) if r0 < r < R, where
R b
Then we have
J
I VvI2
M
dp <
f
1
l
- \Jro V' (r) )
b2
R
b2
dy = f rp R V' (r) 2 BR\Bro V' (P)2
dV (r) = b2 J ro
dr
V/ (r) - b
whence it follows that
fBr0IVu!2du<4 f
R
dr
V'(r) f^
Letting R -4 oo and ro -> oo, we obtain that u = const provided the
following condition holds:
dr
00
_ 00 .
VI-011 )
(11 . 55)
Note that (11.48) implies (11.55) by Exercise 11.23. EXAMPLE 11.16. Set M = I1
and let (M, g, p) be a weighted model as
in Section 8.4.3. Let V (r) be the volume function of M, that is, V (r) _ V (0, r). Let us show that in this case the condition (11.55) is not only sufficient but is also necessary for the parabolicity of M. Denoting as in Section 8.4.3 S (r) = V' (r) andf assuming that S (r) < oo,
(11.56)
J
consider the function u (R) from the proof of Theorem 8.24 defined by (8.48),
that is, U (R) =
fR S
(r) f S (t) f (t) dt, non-zero
function. It was shown in where f E C0 (1, 2) is a non-negative the proof of Theorem 8.24 that u extends to a smooth function on M and
11.6. SPECTRUM AND THE DISTANCE FUNCTION
317
Auu = -f on M so that u is a positive superharmonic function on M. Since u 0 const, we conclude that M is non-parabolic. The non-parabolicity test (11.56) implies that R7z is non-parabolic if ana only if n > 2, and Elt is non-parabolic for any n > 2.
Exercises. 11.23. Let f (r) be a C1-function on (0, +oo) such that f' (r) > 0. Prove that f /
rdr
f T _r)
= oo =
r)
=m
11.24. Prove that any parabolic manifold is stochastically complete.
11.6. Spectrum and the distance function We present here some estimates of Amin (M) using the geodesic distance.
THEOREM 11.17. Assume that, on a weighted manifold (M, g, p), there exists a Lipschitz function p with the Lipschitz constant 1 such that Aup
> a,
where a is a positive constant and the inequality is understood in the distributional sense. Then 2
(11.57)
Amin (M) >_ 4
PROOF. For any function c E D (M), we have by hypothesis (11.58)
(A"P, W2) -> a fM V2dju
By Theorem 11.3, V p ELO° (M) and I VpI < 1 so that (AMP,
_
(diva, (,7p), W2)
(VP, v 2)
= -2 fM (V P, V co)gco dp < 2(\fm I Vw12 dµ
1/2
(
11/2
\f MP2dµ/
Combining with (11.58), we obtain
(fMW2dp)
1/2
1/2
<2 (fMIV'I2dµ)
a which implies (11.57) by Theorem 10.8.
EXAMPLE 11.18. Let o be the origin of the polar coordinate system in
1", and set p (x) = d (o, x). Function p is Lipschitz with the Lipschitz
constant 1 (cf. Lemma 11.2). Evaluating by (3.85) its Laplacian away from o and noticing that, in the polar coordinates (r, 0), p (x) = r, we obtain
OHnp=
arp+(n-1)cothrop
= (n-1)cothr> n-1.
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
318
Therefore, for any open set S2 C lH[n not containing o, we obtain by Theorem 11.17
(n 41)2 (11.59) Observe that the origin o may be taken to be any point of H (cf. Exercise 3.46), which implies that (11.59) holds for any open subset 0 C Hn with Amin (0)
non-empty complement. Finally, applying (11.59) to an exhaustion sequence {f2k} and using Exercise 10.6, we obtain 2
Amin (Hn) >
(11.60)
(n 41)
Alternatively, by Exercise 11.26, (11.60) follows from (11.59) with f = Hn {o}
.
THEOREM 11.19. Assume that, on a weighted manifold (M, g, p), there exists a Lipschitz function p with the Lipschitz constant 1 such that p (x) -4
+oo as x -f oo and
e-OP
E Ll (M) for some,3 > 0. Then 2
(11.61)
\min (M) < PROOF. Set f (x) = e-10P(x) so that f Exercise 11.14,
L2 (M) and notice that, by
V/f = 21)3f VP'
whence 2 MIof12du
f2IVp12
4
J
dµ<
2
4
]
f2dµ
In particular, we see that f E W' (M) and 7Z (f) _< /32/4. The hypothesis p (x) -3 +oo implies f (x) -- 0 as x -+ oo, whence f (x) .-> 0 as x -4 oo. By Exercise 5.7, we obtain that f E W0 (M). Hence, (11.61) follows from Theorem 10.8.
EXAMPLE 11.20. Consider again IEP, and let p be the same function as in Example 11.18. Using the area function
S (r) = w,z sinh-1 r
of f' (see Section 3.10), we obtain e-Bp 11, II
= f e-16Pd/, _ feTS(r)dr.
Since S (r) - const e('-l)T, the above integral converges for any 0 > n - 1, which implies by Theorem 11.19 that Amin (H') <
(n -41) 2
NOTES
319
Comparing to (11.60), we obtain Amin (Ha) _ (n
41)
It is possible to show that the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplace operator in Hn is the full interval [( 41)2, +oo).
Exercises. 11.25. Prove that, for any bounded open set SZ C R', Amin (Q) ?
1
n (diam S2)
2
(11.62)
Hence or otherwise show that there exists a constant c,,, > 0 such that, for any ball Br C Rn
,
Amin (Br) = Cnr-2.
11.26. Let (M, g, i) be a weighted manifold of dimension n > 2, and o be a point in M. (a) Prove that, for any open neighborhood U of o and for any e > 0, there exists a cutoff function ,o of {o} in U such that fu I V
I2dp<e.
(b) Prove that Amin (M \ {o}) = Amin (M) .
(11.63)
(c) Show that (11.63) fails if n = 1. 11.27. Let (M, g, p) be a complete weighted manifold. Fix a point xo E M and set a = lim sup 1 log µ (B (xo, r)) . r-*
r
(11.64)
Prove that Amin (M) <
4
11.28. Let (M, g, lc) be a weighted model based on R' as in Sections 3.10 and 8.4.3, and let S (r) be the area function of this model. Set c e'
S (r)
and a = lim sup S' (j .
(11.65)
Prove that ( 4)2 < Amin (M) < 4 .
Notes The proof of the Hopf-Rinow theorem can be found in the most of standard courses on Riemannian geometry (see for example [227], [299]). The proof of Rademacher's theorem, that was used in the first proof of Theorem 11.3, can be found in [119, p.281]. The essential self-adjointness of the Dirichlet Laplacian on a complete manifold was
proved by Gaffney [126] (see also [63] and [316]). The proof presented here is due to R.Strichartz [330]. The key ingredient of the proof - Lemma 11.6, was proved by S.-T. Yau [363].
A statement that any harmonic function from a function class S on a manifold M is
identical constant is called the S-Liouville theorem. Lemma 11.6 is a particular case of a more general result of [363] that the LP-Liouville theorem holds on any complete manifold
320
11. DISTANCE FUNCTION AND COMPLETENESS
for any p c (1, +oo). Although L°°-Liouville theorem does hold in R" by the classical Liouville theorem (cf. Exercise 13.23), on an arbitrary complete manifold the L°°- and Ll-Liouville theorems are not necessarily true (see [72], [142], [155], [240], [246]). The uniqueness class (11.28) for the Cauchy problem in lW was obtained by Tikhonov [347] and (11.29) - by Tacklind [342]. Similar integrated uniqueness classes for parabolic equations in unbounded domains in Rd were introduced by Oleinik and Radkevich [298] and by Gushchin [192], using different methods.
The fact that the condition V (xo, r) i exp (Cr2) on complete manifolds and other similar settings implies the stochastic completeness was proved by various methods in [97], [209], [222], [338], [343]. Historically, the first result in this direction is due to Gaffney [127] who obtained the stochastic completeness under a stronger assumption log V (x, r) = o (r). Theorems 11.8 and 11.9 in the present form were proved in [137] (see also [143], [155;). Let M be a geodesically complete manifold with bounded below Ricci curvature, and let µ be its Riemannian measure. It follows from the Bishop-Gromov volume comparison theorem that V (x, r) < exp (Cr) (11.66) (see for example [48]) so that M is stochastically complete. The stochastic completeness for Riemannian manifolds with bounded below Ricci curvature was first proved by S.T.Yau [364] (see also "155], [209], [212], [286], [352] for extensions of this result). It was proved earlier by Azencott [16] that a Cart an-Hadamard manifold with bounded below sectional curvature is stochastically complete. Azencott also gave the first example of a geodesically complete manifold that is stochastically incomplete. Note that Theorem 8.24 provides plenty of examples of such manifolds (cf. Example 11.11). It was shown by T.Lyons [266] that the stochastic completeness is in general not stable under quasiisometry. It is also worth mentioning that on manifolds of bounded geometry not only
a regular fundamental solution is unique but also any positive fundamental solution is unique that hence coincides with the heat kernel (see [214], [231], [286]). The condition (11.49) for the parabolicity of a complete manifold is due to Cheng and Yau [62]. Theorem 11.14 was proved in [134], [136], [221], (352] (see also [110], [155], [211], [206], [274] for related results). The stability of the parabolicity under quasi-isornetry was proved in [136] using the capacity criterion (see also [155]). Theorem 11.17 was proved in [362], Theorem 11.19 is due to R.Brooks [47]. The fact that the spectrum of H2 fills the interval [1/4, +oo) was proved in [272].
CHAPTER 12
Gaussian estimates in the integrated form As one can see from explicit examples of heat kernels (9.13), (9.32), (9.36), (9.40), the dependence of the heat kernel pt (x, y) on the points x, y that is called the Gaussian is frequently given by the term exp factor. The Gaussian pointwise upper bounds of the heat kernel, that is, the estimates containing the Gaussian factor, will be obtained in Chapters 15 and 16 after introduction of the necessary techniques. These bounds require additional hypotheses on the manifolds in question. On the contrary, it is relatively straightforward to obtain the integrated upper bounds of the heat kernel, which is the main topic of this Chapter. From the previous Chapters, we use general the properties of solutions of the heat equation, including those of the heat semigroup Pt, as well as the properties of Lipschitz functions from Section 11.2.
The results of this Chapters are used in the subsequent chapters as follows:
Theorem 12.1 (the integrated maximum principle) - in Chapters 15 and 16. Theorem 12.3 (the Davies-Gaffney inequality) and depending on it Lemma 12.7 - in Chapter 13 from Section 13.3 onwards. Theorem 12.3 is also used in the proof of Theorem 16.2 in Chapter 16.
The results of Sections 12.3 and 12.5 do not have applications within this book.
12.1. The integrated maximum principle Recall that, by Theorem 11.3, any function f c Lipid, (M) has the distributional gradient V f C L° (M). THEOREM 12.1. (The integrated maximum principle) Let (t, x) be a continuous function on I x M, where I C [0, +oo) is an interval. Assume that, for any t c I, (t, x) is locally Lipschitz in x C M, the partial derivative t, exists and is continuous in I x M, and the following inequality holds on
Ix M:
(12.1) 321
12. GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES IN THE INTEGRATED FORM
322
Then, for any function f E L2 (M), the function
f (Pt f)2 (x) e(t x)dµ(x)
J(t)
(12.2)
is non-increasing in t e I. Furthermore, for all t, to E I, if t > to then (12.3) J (t) < J (to) e-2Amin(M)(t-to) REMARK 12.2. Let d(x) be a Lipschitz function on M with the Lipschitz constant 1. By Theorem 11.3, we have jVdI < 1. It follows that the following functions satisfy (12.1): 2
6(t, x) = d t and
)
2
(t, x) = ad(x) - 2 t, where a is a real constant. In applications d (x) is normally chosen to be the distance from x to some set (cf. Lemma 11.2).
PROOF. Let us first reduce the problem to the case of non-negative f Indeed, if f is signed then set g = I Pto f and notice that
.
Pt-to9 Assuming that Theorem 12.1 has been already proved for function g, we obtain IPtf I = IPt-toPtof I
IM
f
(Ptf)2 e"t, )du
M
(Pt-to9)2 e£(t,
.)dl
< e-2amin(t-to) fM 9 2et(to)di e-2,\min(t-to)
(
fM
Pto f )2
e1(to,
dt
Hence, we can assume in the sequel that f > 0. In the view of Theorem 5.23, it suffices to prove that, for any relatively compact open set S2 C M, the function
JJ (t) :=
f Since u (t, ) := P" f E L2 (0) and (Pt f )2 (x)
t
is is non-increasing in t E I. bounded in Q, the function Jn (t) is finite (unlike J (t) that a priori may be equal to oo). Note also that JJ (t) is continuous in t E I. Indeed, by
Theorem 4.9 the path t u (t, ) is continuous in t E [0, +oo) in L2 (Il) and the path t e2'01') is obviously continuous in t e I in the sup-norm in Cb (a) which implies that the path t H u (t, ) e20,') is continuous in t E I ,
in L2 (SZ) (cf. Exercise 4.46).
To prove that JJ (t) is non-increasing in I it suffices to show that the derivative dt exists and is non-positive for all t E lo := I \ {0}. Fix some t E Io. Since the functions (t, ) and a (t, ) are continuous and bounded
12.1. THE INTEGRATED MAXIMUM PRINCIPLE
323
is at in ,Si, they both belong to Cb (a). Therefore, the partial derivative the same time the strong derivative at in Cb (SZ) (cf. Exercise 4.47). In the same way, the function e (t,*) is strongly differentiable in Cb (Il) and de
aCe
d=at
_ _
eea
(12.4)
at
By Theorem 4.9, the function u (t, ) is strongly differentiable in L2 (Sl) and its strong derivative dt in L2 (S2) is given by du = AMU. dt
(12.5)
Using the product rules for strong derivatives (see Exercise 4.46), we conclude that ueC is strongly differentiable in L2 (52) and C
dt e + u d dt (ueC) =
(12.6)
l
It follows that the inner product (u, ueC) = Jc (t) is differentiable as a real valued function of t and, by the product rule and by (12.4), (12.5), (12.6),
dJJ
du
\
Cd,ue I + (u,
dt
2(dt,ue
2
d (ue)
)+(u2,
(iu,uet)
dt dt
+ (u2, 0 J)
.
(12.7)
By the chain rule for Lipschitz functions (see Exercise 11.14), we have eC(t,*) E Liplo, (M). Since the function eO,-) is bounded and Lipschitz in 11 and
u (t, ) E W0 (1), we obtain by Exercise 11.13 that ueC E WO' (a) . By the Green formula of Lemma 4.4, we obtain 2
(u,ueC) _ -2 J (Du, V (ueC))d.
Since both functions u and
are locally Lipschitz, the product rule and the chain rule apply for expanding V (ueC) (cf. Exercises 11.13, 11.14). Substituting the result into (12.7) and using (12.1), we obtain dJts
< -2J -2
fn
eC(t,')
(Vu 2 eC + ueC(Vu, V) ±
(Vu +
eldp,
whence rata < 0. To prove (12.3), observe that
(Vu +
e /2
= V(ue /2).
iVi2 e) dti (12.8)
12. GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES IN THE INTEGRATED FORM
324
E W0 (a), we can apply the variational principle (Theorem 10.8) Since which yields 2
st
= J stjV
eedi
(u+ 12
I2du
> Amin (0) f I ue /212d/i = Amin (Q) Jn (((2.9)
Hence, (12.8) yields
dJq < -2Amin dt
(11) Jfl (t) ,
whence (12.3) follows.
Exercises. 12.1. Let ' be a C2-function in 1:= [0, +oo) such that ', V, V" > 0 and >8
(12.10)
for some S > 0. Let (t, x) be a continuous function on I x M and assume that C (t, x) is locally Lipschitz in x E M for any t E I, at exists and is continuous on I x M, and the following inequality holds on I x M: 8t + 4S
Prove that the quantity J (t)
jVC12 < 0.
f I' (P, f) M
is non-increasing in t E I for any non-negative f c L2 (M).
12.2. The Davies-Gaffney inequality For any set A on a weighted manifold M and any r > 0, denote by Ar the r-neighborhood of A, that is,
Ar={xeM:d(x,A)
fA ( Ptf)2 d< r
C2t f2dµ+exp
- 2At) f f2dµ, A
(12.11)
where ) = Amin(M). In particular, if f E L2 (A) then
fA(Ptf )2 dtC AC
(see Fig. 12.1).
Iif ll2 exp
-
2
2t
- 2At
(12.12)
12.2. THE DAVIES-GAFFNEY INEQUALITY
325
A
FIGURE 12.1. Sets A and AT
PROOF. Fix some s > t and consider the function
t S(T,x) =
d2(x, ., Ac)r ' 2(T - s)
defined for x E il'! and T E [0, s). Set also J (T) :_
Since the function
fu
r
(Prf )2 e&,-) dµ.
satisfies the condition Or
2
we obtain by Theorem 12.1 that
J (t) < J (0) exp (-2,\t) .
(12.13)
Since 4(T,x)=0for xEA;,we have J (t) ?
J
(12.14)
(Pt.f )2dµ.
On the other hand, using the fact that (0, x) < 0 for all x and 2
(0'
x)
2s
for all x E A,
we obtain 2
J (0) < A
f 2dµ + exp (-i-) s
f2 dp.
(12.15)
A
Combining together (12.13), (12.14), (12.15) and letting s -+ t-}-, we obtain (12.11).
The inequality (12.12) trivially follows from (12.11) and the observation that fAc f 2dµ = 0. O
12. GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES IN THE INTEGRATED FORM
326
COROLLARY 12.4. (The Davies-Gaffney inequality). If A and B are two
disjoint measurable subsets of M and f E L2(A), g E L2(B), then, for all t > 0, I(Ptf,9)1 <- II!112119112exp
At)
d2(4tB)
(12.16)
(see Fig. 12.2_
d(A,B) FIGURE 12.2. Sets A and B
PROOF. Set r = d (A, B). Then B C Ar and by (12.12) 2
f (Ptf)2 du < 11f lit exp (-2t B
- 2At)\
.
Applying the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality, we obtain 1/2
I(Ptf,9)I c
(fB(Ptf)2dµ)
119112
2
I I f 11 21I9I I2 exp (_
4t
- At
,
which was to be proved.
Note that (12.16) is in fact equivalent to (12.12) since the latter follows from (12.16) by dividing by 119112 and taking sup in all g E L2 (B) with
B=Ar.
Assuming that the sets A and B in (12.16) have finite measures and setting f = IA and g = 1B, we obtain from (12.16) (PtlA, lB)
µ(A)u(B) exp (-d2(4' B)
- At)
,
or, in terms of the heat kernel,
ffPt(xy)d(x)d(y) <
u(A)u(B) exp
(d2(AB)
- At)
.
(12.17)
AB
This can be considered as an integrated form of the Gaussian upper bound of the heat kernel. Note that, unlike the pointwise bounds, the estimate (12.17) holds on an arbitrary manifold.
12.3. UPPER BOUNDS OF HIGHER EIGENVALUES
327
Exercises. 12.2. Give an alternative proof of (12.12) applying Theorem 12.1 with the function z
(t, x) := ad(x, A) - 2 t, where a is an arbitrary real parameter.
12.3. The purpose of this question is to prove the following enhanced version of (12.16): if f and g are two functions from L2 (M) such that d (supp f , supp g) > r,
where r > 0, then, for all t > 0, 1
I(Ptf,9)l G U112119112 Jr
r
exp C-4t I ds.
(12.18)
\\\
(a) (Finite propagation speed for the wave equation) Let u (t, x) be a C°° function on R x M that solves in R x M the wave equation a2U
at2
= ON,2G.
Set Kt = supp u (t, ) . Prove that Kt is contained in the closed Iti-neighborhood of Ko.
(b) Prove (12.18) using part (a) and the transmutation formula of Exercise 4.52. REMARK. See Exercise 13.25 concerning the additional factor e- at in (12.18).
12.3. Upper bounds of higher eigenvalues We give here an application of Corollary 12.4 to eigenvalue estimates on a compact weighted manifold M. Recall that by Theorem 10.13 the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplace operator L on M is discrete. As before, denote by Ak (M) be the k-th smallest eigenvalue of L counted with the multiplicity. Recall that Ak(M) > 0 and A1(M) = 0 (cf. Exercise 10.10).
THEOREM 12.5. Let M be a connected compact weighted manifold. Let A1, A2, ...,
Ak be k > 2 disjoint measurable sets on M, and set
S := mind(Ai,Aj). i¢j Then
Ak (M) <
4 b2
2p(M) max log i j 1p(Ai)A(Aj)
2
(12.19)
In particular, if we have two sets Al = A and A2 = B then (12.19) becomes 2
A2(M) < b2
log
(12.20)
u(A
where 6 := d(A, B).
(B)
12. GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES IN THE INTEGRATED FORM
328
PROOF. We first prove (12.20). Let {cpk}_ 1 be an orthonormal basis in L2 (M, µ) that consists of the eigenfunctions of L, so that cpk has the eigenvalue Ak = Ak(M). By the eigenfunction expansion (10.33), we have for any t > 0
-tai
pt(x,y)dµ(x)dµ(y) =
L (x)d/2(x) fB pi(y)d/2(y)
i=1 00
-tAiaibi,
(12.21)
i=1
where
and
ai = (1A, cpi)
bi = (1B, cpi) .
By the Parseval identity 00
00
and
=II1A112=p(A)
bZ =II1B112=/2(B). i=1
i=1
Since a1 = 0, the first eigenfunction cpl is identical constant. By the normalization condition c01 11 2 = 1 we obtain cp1 - 1/ µ(M) , which implies and
al = (1A, 'p1) = µµ(M)
bl = (ls, cPl) = µu(M)
Therefore, (12.21) yields 00
e-tai aibi
albs +
JfB pt(x, y)dµ(x)dµ(y)
i=2 1/2
00
> a1b1 - e-ta2
a2 i=2
p(A)p(B) µ(M) Comparing with (12.17), we obtain
e-tae
>
\i=2
l2(A)µ(B)
b2 µ(A)µ(B)e 4t > p(A)µ(B) _ e _tA2 µ(A)µ(B), µ(M)
whence e-tae > //2(A)1-t(B)
_ e52
µ(M) Choosing t from the identity 32
e
4t =
µ(A)µ(B)
1
µ(M)
2
we conclude A2 <
1
t
log
2µ(M)
µ(A)p(B)
_
2
4 S2
21-L(M)
log
µ(A)µ (B)
12.3. UPPER BOUNDS OF HIGHER EIGENVALUES
329
which was to be proved.
Let us now turn to the general case k > 2. Consider the following integrals
f f p(t, x, y)d(x)d(y)
Jim
,,,
and set aii)
(1At, Pi)
Exactly as above, we have 00
-tai at(i)ai(m)
Jim = i=1
_ >
k-1
µ(Ai)p(Am) ,a(M) u(A1),U(Am)
µ(M)
-Aita(i)a(m) + ` e-Aita(i)a(m) i=k
_
i==2
e-,Nkt
l-t(Ai)lt(Am)
k-i
(12.22)
i=2
On the other hand, by (12.17) 52
Jim C
/-t(Al)/ t(Am)e
at.
(12.23)
Therefore, we can further argue as in the case k = 2 provided the term in (12.22) can be discarded, which the case when k-1
e-\ita?i)a("z) > 0. E i=2
(12.24)
Let us show that (12.24) can be achieved by choosing 1, m. To that end, let us interpret the sequence a(j) := (azj), a3j) ..., akW1)
as a (k - 2)-dimensional vector in Rk-2. Here j ranges from 1 to k so that we have k vectors a(i) in Rk-2. Let us introduce the inner product of two vectors u = (u2i ..., uk-1) and v = (v2, ..., vk_1) in Rk-2 by k-1 (2t v)t
E
e-,\ituivi
(12.25)
i=2
and apply the following elementary fact: LEMMA 12.6. From any n+2 vectors in a n-dimensional Euclidean space, it is possible to choose two vectors with non-negative inner product.
12. GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES IN THE INTEGRATED FORM
330
Note that n + 2 is the smallest number for which the statement of Lemma 12.6 is true. Indeed, choose an orthonormal basis ei, e2, ..., e1 in the given Euclidean space and consider the vector
v:=-el-e2-...-enThen any two of the following n + 1 vectors
el + Ev, e2 + Ev. ...., en + Ev, v have a negative inner product, provided E > 0 is small enough.
Lemma 12.6 is easily proved by induction in n. The inductive basis for n = 1 is trivial. The inductive step is shown on Fig. 12.3. Indeed, assume that the n + 2 vectors v1, v2, ..., Vn+2 in Rn have pairwise obtuse angles. Denote by E the orthogonal complement of vn+2 in R7 and by vi' the orthogonal projection of vi onto E.
FIGURE 12.3. The vectors vz are the orthognal projections of vi onto E.
For any i < n + 1, the vector vi can be represented as vi = Vi - Eivn+2 , where Ei = -(vi, vra+2) > 0.
Therefore, we have (vi, vj) = (vi, 4 j) + ciEj Ivn+212 .
By the inductive hypothesis, we have (vi', (vi, vj) _> 0, contradicting the assumption.
0 for some i, j, which implies
Now we can finish the proof of Theorem 12.5. Fix some t > 0. By Lemma 12.6, we can find 1, m so that (a(), a(-))t > 0; that is (12.24) holds.
12.4. SEMIGROUP SOLUTIONS WITH A HARMONIC INITIAL FUNCTION
331
Then (12.22) and (12.23) yield
µ(M) and we are left to choose t. However, t should not depend on 1, m because we use t to define the inner product (12.25) before choosing 1, m. So, we first write a2
e_tak > min i,j
- e
4t
and then define t by e
V r'
1
62
4t = - min
(Aj)l_(A.j)
µ(M)
2 i,j
whence (12.19) follows.
12.4. Semigroup solutions with a harmonic initial function The next statement can be viewed as an example of application of Theorem 12.3. On the other hand, it will be used in Section 13.3 in the proof of Theorem 13.9.
LEMMA 12.7. Let V be an exterior of a compact subset of M and let f be a function from Wo (M) such that At j = 0 in V. Then, for any open set U C V such that U C V, the following holds:
o
tlim
Ptft f ll Il
= 0.
(12.26)
L22 (U)
REMARK 12.8. Since the function Ptf satisfies the heat equation in IR+ x
uf,
V with the initial function f c C°O (V), by Exercise 9.8 the function
Ptf, t>0, t<0
is CO0 smooth in Il8 x V. Since f is harmonic in V, it follows that u satisfies the heat equation in I18 x V. Hence, we have in V as t -4 0+
Ptft
f
tu(0,
u(t
)
at
}
A
-0,
t=o
where the convergence is local uniform in V. If U is relatively compact then it follows that also
Ptf _ f t
L2(U)
-40 ast-40.
However, this argument does not work in the general case when U is noncompact, and the latter case requires a different argument as below.
332
12. GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES IN THE INTEGRATED FORM
PROOF. Let us first prove (12.26) in the case when f is a function from L2 (M) such that f = 0 in V. Noticing that r := d (U, Vc) > 0 and applying the inequality (12.12) of Theorem 12.3 with A = Vc, we obtain IIPtfIIL2(U)
IIfIIL2expC-2t) =o(t) ast-+0.
Together with 11f 11L2 (U) = 0, this yields (12.26).
Let us now prove (12.26) in the case when f E Wo (M) and &f = 0 in U. By Exercise 4.41, we have Pt f t whence it follows that
L2(
Ptf
)A µ f as t-+0 ,
z
L* 0 as t-+0
t
,
which is equivalent to (12.26).
FIGURE 12.4. Illustration to the proof of Lemma 12.7
Finally, consider the general case, when f E Wo (M) and Dµ f = 0 in V. Let cp be a cutoff function of the compact set V° in the open set U° (see Fig. 12.4). Since cp f = 0 in V' _ (supp cp)C and U C V', we conclude by the first of the above cases that Pt((Pf) - cPf L2(U) 0as t-->0.
t Next, we claim that the function
(12.27)
g=(1-c,)f belongs to Wo (M). Indeed, by Exercise 4.21 (or 11.13), we have W f E W0 whence g E W01. In a neighborhood of V°, where co = 1, we have g = 0 and,
hence, L,,g = 0. On the other hand, using the hypothesis 0,,f = 0 in V, we obtain that the following identity holds in V:
Ol'g = (1 - cP) DIf - 2VcoV f - (Aj,,(p) f = -2V pV f - (& ) f (12.28)
12.5. TAKEDA'S INEQUALITY
333
(cf. Exercise 3.8) Since Vco and A,,cp are bounded, while f and V f belong to L2, we obtain that A,,,g E L2 (V). It follows that AN,g E L2 (M) and, hence, g E Wo (M). Since in U we have cp - 0, which implies by (12.28) that AN,g = 0, we obtain by the second of the above cases, that a
tgt - gL) 0ast-- 0.
(12.29)
Since f = V f + g, adding up (12.27) and (12.29), we obtain (12.26).
12.5. Takeda's inequality Similarly to Theorem 12.3, the next theorem provides a certain L2estimate for a solution to the heat equation. However, the setting and the estimate are essentially different.
THEOREM 12.9. Let A, B be two relatively compact open subsets of a weighted manifold M such that A C= B and let R = d (A, BC). Let u (t, x) be a non-negative bounded C2 -function in (0, T) x B such that
.
-A1u_0in(0,T)xB,
. and u (t, )
L-
0 as t -* 0 (see Fig. 12.5). Then, for any t E (0, T), i
f u2 (t, .) dp < la (B \ A) A
IIuIIL_ Max
(R
2
2t ,
2
2
I exp
/
(- R2t
+ 1)
.
(12.30)
FIGURE 12.5. The function u (t, x) in (0, T) x B.
REMARK. The hypotheses of Theorem 12.9 are in particular satisfied if u (t, ) = Ptf where f is a non-negative function from L°° (BC) (see Exercise
12. GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES IN THE INTEGRATED FORM
334
12.5). Let us mention for comparison that Theorem 12.3 yields in this case the following estimate u2(t,.) du<-11f112eXp
(R
assuming that f E L2 (B°). The advantage of (12.30) is that it can be applied to functions like f = 1Bc that are bounded but are not necessarily in L2. There are also applications of Theorem 12.9 for solutions u that do not have the form Pt f (see Exercise 12.4). PROOF. Without loss of generality, we can assume throughout that 0 < u < 1. Let (t, x) be a continuous function on [0, T] x B such that (t, x) is Lipschitz in x, continuously differentiable in t, and the following inequality holds almost everywhere on [0, T] x B:
'+
2
Io,12 < 0
(12.31)
for some a > 1, where
We claim that the following inequality is true for any t E (0,T) and any cp E W0 (B):
'B u
(t,
dy < a2a 1
)2
f
t
IDcp12 ells > dads
(12.32)
B
the inequality (11.39) from the proof of Theorem 11.9). Since the functions u, and cp are uniformly bounded in the domain of integration, the both sides of (12.32) are continuous as functionals of cp in W'-norm. (cf.
Hence, it suffices to prove (12.32) for cp E Co (B), which will be assumed in the sequel.
Let us differentiate in t the left hand side of (12.32). Note that the time derivative at and fB are interchangeable because the function under the integral is continuous differentiable in time and the integration can be restricted to a compact set supp W. We obtain dt
f u2cp2e dp B
=2 <2
u2cp2e'etdA B
B
f (& u) u2etd+ J
u22'eEdB
-2 f (cp2ee + (Vu,
2(emu Vcp)ucpe )
+J
B
Here we have applied the Green formula (4.12) using that u E W,2,,, (B) and
ucp2J E W' (B) (cf. Exercise 5.9), and the product and chain rules for Lipschitz functions to evaluate V (ucp2e) (cf. Exercises 11.13 and 11.14). Applying the inequalities
(Du,V )u> -IDu1IOeIu
335
12.5. TAKEDA'S INEQUALITY
and
2(Vu,Vcp)ucp> -
(2
2+EIVu12cp2/
IV
J
where E E (0, 1) is to be specified later, we obtain d dt
f
2
u2 IVcPI2 B
B
-2 f
((1 - E)
IVu12
- IVul IV I u -
2 etdp.
Using (12.31) we see that the expression in brackets in the last integral above is bounded below by
(1- E)
IVu12
- IVnI IVil u+
4u2
which is identical to a complete square
(\/1IvuJ -
a/4u
provided
(1-E)a=1. Choosing E to satisfy this condition, that is, e = 1 - a- we obtain dt
<
Lu2e2
Integrating this inequality against dt from 0 to t and using the hypotheses
u(t,.)L%( )0ast-4 0andu2<1,weobtain (12.32). Now we will specify the functions cp and C in (12.32). In all cases, we will have cp - 1 on A, whence also IVcpl = 0 on A, so that (12.32) implies
L
u (t,.)2 e (t,')dp < a2a1
t
IB\A
(
ds)
d.
(12.33)
0
In order to prove (12.30) for R = d (A, BC), it suffices to prove (12.30) for any R < d (A, Bc). Fix R < d (A, Bc), t c (0, T), set p (x) = d (x, A),
and consider the function cP (x) = cl' (P (x))
where V (r) is a Lipschitz function on [0, +oo) such that
0(0)=land (r)=0ifr>R (see Fig. 12.6).
This ensures that cp E Lipo (B) C WO' (B) (cf. Corollary 11.4), and cp - 1 on A. The function O will be chosen to be smooth in (0, R). Then by Exercise 11.14 we have
cP=
(P) VP'
336
12. GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES IN THE INTEGRATED FORM
FIGURE 12.6. Function cp (x) and since Vp I I L- < 1 (see Theorem 11.3), it follows that IV(p (x) < I V)' (p (x)) I for almost all x E B \ A.
(12.34)
To specify further V) and , consider two cases. Case 1. Let R2
2t
-
then set e - 0 and
(r) _
(R - r)+
R R, and it follows from (12.33) that
By (12.34) we have
fu2(t,.) d<
a-R
Letting a -+ oo, we obtain
1A u2 (t,) du <
2t
2t
R2
(B \ A) < e 2t +l,u (B \ A). R2 p R2
(12.35)
Case 2. Let R2 > 1. 2t
In this case, set e (s, x) _ -2ap (x) - bs,
where a and b are positive constants to be chosen below. Clearly, (12.31) provided
satisfies
b = 2a2a.
Note also that
t
L
e(s,x) ds =
e-bt e-2ao(x).
1b
(12.36)
12.5. TAKEDA'S INEQUALITY
337
Next, define 0 as follows:
- earl eaR-1 +
(eaR
fi(r)= \ Then we have
,0' (r) = -cear for r E (0, R) , where
a
c:= eaR-1, whence it follows that (12.37)
Ion (x)12 < C2e2a'°(x)
for almost all x E B \ A. Substituting (12.36) and (12.37) into (12.33) and observing that cIA = -bt, we obtain
1,
ebt f u (t, .)2 e
(t, .)2 dµ
<
(fte1(s,')
2a ebt
a-1 2a
a-1 1
fB\A ebt
ds) dµ
o
- 12 (B b
\ A)
e2a2at
a-1(eaR-1)2µ(B\A) Setting further
S=R -1, a=SS1
R
and a=2ta'
we obtain the identities 2
2a2at = aR =
S
a
a1
1
whence
fA U (t, )2 dµ 5
b es
1µ
(B \ A)
Since eb > 1 + 6, we have
1+S
e5
1+S
whence S
<(1+S)e-5
ea-1 and
IA u
(t,.)2 dµ <
Re_ zt +lµ (B \ A).
Combining (12.35) and (12.38), we obtain (12.30).
(12.38)
12. GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES IN THE INTEGRATED FORM
338
REMARK 12.10. As one can see from the proof, if u satisfies the heat equation at = t u in (0, T) x B then the assumption u > 0 can be dropped. COROLLARY 12.11. Under the conditions of Theorem 12.9, the following inequalities are satisfied: R2 R2 2 (12.39) f u2 (t, .) dp < µ (B) II uII max (2t ' 1) exp (- 2t + 1) A
and
f
2
u (t, ) dµ <
µ (A) µ (B)II uIIL- Max
(Rt,1) exp (- 4t + 2)
A
(12.40)
PROOF. If R2/2t > 1 then (12.39) trivially follows from (12.30). If R2/2t < 1 then
f
(B)Julli00exp(-R
_<,4
+1),
A
which implies (12.39). Inequality (12.40) follows from (12.39) and the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality.
In fact, the following inequality is true:
u (t, .) dµ < 16p (B) IIuIIL A
f
(4;l 1/2
exp
(-r4t
dr,
(12.41)
which is called Takeda's inequality. Estimating in a certain way the integral in the right hand side, one obtains
f
u (t, ) da <
16
V"t
p (B) IIuIIL°° R exp
2
(- 4t)
A
For large ratios , this inequality is somewhat better than (12.40). The vtinequalities (12.30) and (12.39) can be considered as L2 versions of Takeda's inequality. For applications of Theorem 12.9 and Corollary 12.11 see Exercises 12.4, 12.5, 15.1, 9.9.
Exercises. 12.4. Using Corollary 12.11, prove that if the weighted manifold M is geodesically complete
and, for some point x E M, a constant C > 0, and a sequence {rk} -+ 00, µ (B (x, rk)) < exp (Crk) (12.42) then M is stochastically complete. REMARK. Of course, this follows from Theorem 11.8 but the purpose of this Exercise is to give an alternative proof.
NOTES
339
12.5. Let A and B be sets as in Theorem 12.9. (a) Prove that, for any function f E L°° (B°), 2
(P t f )2 dµ < u (B) jI f jIL° max( 2t ' 1)e 2t +1.
(12.43)
(b) Prove that R
2
f fpt(x, y)du(y)du(x) < C u(A)u(B) max(7, 1)e at
(12.44)
A B°
where C =
e/2.
Notes The integrated maximum principle goes back to Aronson [10], [9]. A good account of it in the context of parabolic equations in R' can be found in [306]. Here we follow [147], [146] and [154]. For the integrated maximum principle in a discrete setting see [85]. The Davies-Gaffney inequality was proved by B.Davies [97] with reference to [127]. The present proof is taken from [147]. A somewhat sharper version of (12.16), 'I/'°°
I(Ptf,9)I <_
1
Sz
-exp
( 4t) ds,
was proved in [154], using the finite propagation speed approach of [57]. The upper bounds of eigenvalues of Section 12.3 were proved in [65], [66]. See also [43] for further results. A slightly weaker version of Takeda's inequality (12.41) was first proved by M.Takeda [343] using a probabilistic argument. It was improved and brought to the form (12.41) by T,Lyons [265]. An analytic proof of an L2 version of Takeda's inequality (12.30) was obtained in [147]. Here we reproduce the proof of [147] with some simplifications. An interesting application of Takeda's inequality to the escape rate of the Brownian motion on M can be found in [152].
CHAPTER 13
Green function and Green operator Here we introduce the Green function and apply it to prove the local Harnack inequality, which requires a substantial use of the heat kernel. The results will not be used in the subsequent chapters.
13.1. The Green operator By definition, the Green operator G acts on non-negative measurable as follows: functions f on a weighted manifold G f (x) =
M00
J0
Pt f (x) dt.
(13.1)
More generally, Gf is defined whenever the right hand side of (13.1) makes sense. If 1 is an open subset of M then set GQ f
=
JP?f(x)dt.
LEMMA 13.1. Let f be a non-negative function from Ll (M) such that G f E L210° (M). Then the function u = G f is the minimal non-negative solution in Lio (M) of the equation -Au = f considered in the distributional sense. If in addition f E C°° then also u E C°O. PROOF. Let us use the resolvent operator R, , a > 0, as it was defined in Section 8.2, that is
Raf (x) =
J, r e-atpt (x, g) f (g) dµ (g) dt. M
If f > 0 then by the monotone convergence theorem, R, f (x) t G f (x) as ca.,0. If f > 0, f EL i c, and G f E Li then also Ra f E L o° and, by Theorem 8.4, the function ua = Ra f satisfies the equation
-& ua + au, = f. Passing to the limit as a -+ 0 and noticing that ua -4 u, we obtain -A,,,u =
f
If v E Li ° is another non-negative solution to the equation -A,,,v = f then, for any a > 0,
-Aµv+av=f+avEL0C. 341
13. GREEN FUNCTION AND GREEN OPERATOR
342
Therefore, by Theorem 8.4, v>Ra(f+av)>Raf.
Letting a -* 0, we obtain v > u. If f E C°° then ua E C°° by Theorem 8.7. As a J, 0, the sequence ua (x) increases and converges to u (x) pointwise. By Exercise 7.13 we conclude that u c C°°. It follows from (13.1) that, for any non-negative measurable function f on M,
Gf (x) = ff p(x, y) f (y) dp (y) dt M
(13.2)
= im 9 (x, y) f (y) dp (y) where the function g (x, y) =
f
00
pt (x, y) dt
(13.3)
0
is called the Green function of M. Note that g takes values in [0, +oo]. The Green function is called finite if g (x, y) < oo for all distinct x, y E M. If 1 is an open subset of M then define the Green function of 1 by similarly cc
(13.4)
9' (x, y) = fo pto (x, y) dt. 0
EXAMPLE 13.2. Applying (13.3) with the Gauss-Weierstrass heat kernel (2.50) and using the identity (A.60) from Solution to Exercise 5.14, we obtain the following formulas for the Green function in lR": (
9 (x, y) = 4
l +
where cn
_ r (n/2 - 1) _
x
_
2-n
n< I' (n/2)
(13.5)
2,, 1
(n - 2) wn 27rn/2 (n - 2) 4irn/2 (cf. (3.94)). Hence, the Green function in JR is finite if and only if n > 2. DEFINITION 13.3. A function h E L'10C (M) is called a fundamental solution of the Laplace operator at a point x E M if -O/-Lh = b,.
In particular, a fundamental solution h is harmonic away from x and, hence, is smooth in M \ {x} (cf. Theorem 7.4 and Exercise 7.10). THEOREM 13.4. If )',min (M) > 0, then the following is true.
(i) The Green function g of M is finite and, for any x E M, g (x, ) is a fundamental solution of 0bt at x. (ii) The Green operator G maps L2 (M) into itself. Moreover, it is a bounded self-adjoint operator in L2 (M), and G = G-1, where L = -AAIW is the Dirichlet Laplace operator.
13.1. THE GREEN OPERATOR
343
(iii) If f E Co (M) then G f E C°° (M). PROOF. Let us first show that the integral in (13.3) converges for distinct
x, y. Indeed, the convergence at 0 follows from the fact that pt (x, y) -+ 0 as t -* 0 (cf. Corollary 9.21), and the convergence at oo follows from A := Amin (M) > 0 and the inequality (13.6) pt (x, y) C ps (x, x) p3 (y, y) exp (-A (t - s)) (cf. Exercise 10.29). Fix s > 0, a compact set K C M, and set
C = sup yEK
ps (y, y),
so that, for all x E M, y E K, and t > s, the following inequality takes place: x)ea(t-s).
Pt (x, y) < CV//P--l (x,
(13.7)
Using (7.50), (13.3), and (13.7), we obtain 00
8
fK g(x,y)dp(y)
ffPt(xY)dY)dt+ffPt(xY)dtd(Y) Ks
0K < s + A p (K)
p3 (x, x)
Hence, the integral
L g(x,y)du(y) is finite and, moreover, it is locally bounded as a function of x. It follows that g (x, .) E L11, (M). Let us also mention the following consequence of the
above estimate and of the symmetry of g (x, y): for any function f E L1 (M) with compact support, we have 11
IG f I dp <_ fM (fK' y) d1c (x)) If (y) I dtc (y) < oo 1K
that is, G f E L10 (M) . The spectrum of G is contained in [A, +oo) and hence, G-1 exists as a bounded operator, and JIL-111 < A-1. By the functional calculus, we have
(e-tL f) dt =,C-'f
(13.8)
for any f E L2 (M). Comparing (13.8) with (13.1), we see that the left hand side here coincides with Cf. Hence, the Green operator G maps L2 (M) into itself and coincides in L2 (M) with L-1. Consequently, for any f E L2 (M) there is a unique solution u E Wo (M) to the equation
-& u = f,
(13.9)
and this solution is given by u = G f . The fact that f E Co (M) implies G f E C°° (M) follows from Lemma 13.1 if f > 0. If f is signed then it can be represented as a difference of two
13. GREEN FUNCTION AND GREEN OPERATOR
344
non-negative functions from C0 (M) (cf. Exercise 4.6), which settles the claim.
Finally, let us prove that g (x, -) is a fundamental solution at x, that is, -Aug (x, .) = Sx. (13.10) We need to verify that, for any u E Co (M),
- fM 9(x,y)A,u(y)dµ(y)=u(x).
(13.11)
Indeed, any such function u satisfies the equation (13.9) with the right hand
side f :_ -Auu. Hence, by, the uniqueness of the solution in Wo (M), functions u and G f coincide as L2-functions. Since both functions u (x) and
G f (x) are C°° (the latter being true because f c Co (M)), it follows that they coincide pointwise, which proves (13.11).
As one can see from (13.5), the Green function g (x, ) does not have to belong to L2 (M). Indeed, in 1R4 the integral of g2 (x, ) diverges both at x and at oo. The following statement shows that, in a restricted setting, a "cut-down" Green function belongs even to W0 (M). This is a technical result that has many applications. LEMMA 13.5. Assume that )min (M) > 0 and µ (M) < oo. Let V) (s) be a C°°-function on [0, +oo) such that, for some constant C > 0,
/(0)=0, 0<0
(13.12)
Then, for any xo E M, the function u = 0 (g (xo , )) belongs to W01 (M) and ),(8)12
IIouIIL2 < f
ds
PROOF. Define a new function cp on [0, +oo) by cp (r) =
fr
I0' (s2 ds.
(13.13)
Clearly, cp also satisfies the conditions (13.12) with the constant C2 instead
of C. Extending oddly
and y to (-oo, 0), we obtain that cp and b are
smooth Lipschitz functions on lid that vanish at 0. Since 0 is bounded, the function u = i (g (xo, )) is also bounded. Since p (M) < oo, it follows that u c L2 (this is the only place where the finiteness
of tt (M) is used). The main difficulty lies in the proof of the fact that u E W01. By Theorem 13.4, the Green operator is bounded in L2 and coincides with the inverse of L. Consider for any t > 0 the function which is hence in L2 (M) and, moreover,
9tEdom(L)=W0 CWo. It follows that
-AA9t = Pt (x0, )
(13.14)
13.1. THE GREEN OPERATOR
345
On the other hand, we have 9t (x)
_ fg(x,Y)pt(xoY)d(Y) Ps (x, y) ds J Pt (xo, y) dµ (y) ps (x, y) pt (xo, 2J) dot
(y))
ds
00
L
Pt+s (x,xo) ds 00
1,
(13.15)
ps (x, xo) ds.
It follows from (13.15) that gt is increasing as t decreases, and gt (x) t g (xo, x) as t 4 0.
(13.16)
By Lemma 5.1, the functions 0 (gt) and cp (gt) belong to W01. Using the chain rule, the Green formula of. Lemma 4.4, (13.13) and (13.14), we obtain JMIo0(9t)12 dp
0' (9t)121Vgt12 dp
I,. fM
1p' (9t) IVgtI
(9t) , ogt) dp
fM
-
2
f
M
v (gt) Du,9t dp
fM W (9t) pt (xo, ) dp Ptco (9t) I.o
(13.17)
It follows that, for all t > 0,
fM V
(gt)12 dsup< oo.
(13.18)
In particular, the integral in (13.18) remains bounded as t -+ 0. By (13.16), the sequence V) (gt) increases and converges pointwise to ,0 (g) as t ,(. 0, where we write for simplicity g = g (xo, ). Using the uniform bound (13.18) and that (g) E L2, we conclude by Exercise 4.18 that b (g) E W', (9t) W' 0 (9), and
f
M
IV
(9)12 dµ<supcp= f I,b'(s)I2ds. 0
Finally, since ' (gt) E Wo and Wo is weakly closed in W1 (cf. Exercise A.5), it follows that also 0 (g) E Wo, which finishes the proof.
13. GREEN FUNCTION AND GREEN OPERATOR
346
COROLLARY 13.6. Assume that .\min (M) > 0 and p (M) < oo. Then, for any constant c > 0 and any xo E M, the function u = min (g (xo, ) , c) belongs to Wo (M) and IIVuIIL2 < c.
PROOF. Clearly, we have u =
(g (xo, )) where
0 (s) = min (s, c).
It is easy to see that there is a sequence {'k}.1 of smooth non-negative functions on [0, +oo) such that 0 < k < 1 and Ok (s) t 0 (8) as k -> oo.
(see Fig. 13.1).
(s)=min(s,c), ................... ...................
k(S)
1
j(s)
a
0
s
c
C
0
S
FIGURE 13.1. Construction of functions 't/'k (s) via their derivatives
Since each 'k satisfies the hypothesis of Lemma 13.5, we conclude that ' bk (g) E W0 and IVOk(g)I2d6j
f
0
Letting k -* oo, we conclude by Exercise 4.18 that 0 (g) E W0 and fM I
V0 (g) I2 d , < C.
REMARK 13.7. The hypotheses Amin (M) > 0 and y (M) < oo in Corollary 13.6 (as well as in Lemma 13.5) can be dropped but the conclusion will change as follows: u E Wi0 and IIDuI12L2 < c - see Exercise 13.12.
13.1. THE GREEN OPERATOR
347
Exercises. 13.1. Prove that if M is a compact manifold then (a) 9 (x, y) ° oo; (b) there is no fundamental solution of the Laplace operator on M. Let M be a weighted model (cf. Section 3.10) and S (r) be the area function of M. (a) Prove that, for any positive real R that is smaller than the radius of M, the following function fh (x) _ S (r)
13.2.
CI
is a fundamental solution in BR of the Laplace operator at the pole o. (b) Using (a), evaluate the fundamental solutions on lR' and H. 13.3. Prove that if the manifold M is connected then g (x, y) > 0 for all x, y E M.
13.4. Prove that if the Green function g is finite then the following identity takes place for all t > O and xo GM: Pt9 (xo, ) = Gpt (xo, ) 13.5. Prove that if Amin (M) > 0 then the Green function g (x, y) is C°° smooth jointly in x, y in M x M \ diag.
13.6. Prove that if Amin (M) > 0 then 1
Amin (M)
(13.19)
13.7. Prove that if Amin (M) > 0 and p (M) < oo then g (x, y) E Ll (M x M). 13.8. Prove that if {SZk} is any exhaustion sequence in M then, for all x, y E M, 9Ok (x, y) fi 9(x,y) as k -3 oo.
13.9. Let fl be an open subset of a weighted manifold M. Prove that, for any compact set K C SZ and for any non-negative function f E L2 (M),
Gf
(13.20)
13.10. Let Sl be a non-empty relatively compact open subset of a connected manifold M such that M \ Ti is non-empty. Fix a point xo E Q. (a) Let cp be a cutoff function of {xo} in Q. Prove that
(1 - p) g° (xo, ) E Wo A (b) Prove that for any open set U C S2, containing xo, 9" (xo, )
- 9U (xo, ) E Wo (0).
13.11. Assume that Amin (M) > 0 and µ (M) < oo. Prove that, for all 0 < a < b and any x0 E M, the function v (x) =
g (xo, x)
if g (xo, x) E [a, b] ,
a,
if g (xo, x) < a, if g (xo, x) > b,
b,
belongs to W' (M) and IDvII L2 < b -a.
13.12. Prove that, for any weighted manifold M and for all c > 0, xo E M, the function u = min (g (xo, ) , c) belongs to WWo, (M) and IIouIIL2 < c.
13, GREEN FUNCTION AND GREEN OPERATOR
348
13.13. Let S2 be a non-empty relatively compact connected open subset of a weighted manifold M. Prove that sup In, 9" (x, y) d/. (y) >:
1
(13.21)
min (n)
13.14. Let M be a connected weighted manifold and S2 be a relatively compact open subset
of M such that M \ ?i is non-empty. Let {cpk}k 1 be an orthonormal basis in L2 (0) of eigenfunctions of S2 and {Ak} be the corresponding sequence of eigenfunctions. Prove the identity
9" (x, y) _ k=1
k
cok (x) cpk (y)
where the series converges in D' (S2 x 92).
13.2. Superaveraging functions We say that a function f on M is superaveraging if f E Li (M), f > 0, and
Ptf 0. By Exercise 7.30, if f is superaveraging then Ptf is a smooth solution of the 1
heat equation, which is decreasing in t, and Ptf L--`4 f as t --f 0; besides, A j f < 0 in the distributional sense. Furthermore, if f E W11 (M) and 0C f > 0 then f is superaveraging if and only if 0I f < 0 (cf. Exercise 7.29). In particular, any non-negative superharmonic function is superaveraging. LEMMA 13.8. Let U be an open subset of M such that )n,i,, (U) > 0 and
U' is compact. Fix a function f E W' (M), a cutoff function & of U° in M, and let u E Wl (U) be the solution to the weak Dirichlet problem in U: 5 Amu = 0,
u= f' mod W, (U).
(13.22)
Define the function f on M by
f_
f
in Uc, u in U
(see Fig. 13.2).
(a) Then f e Wo (M). (b) If in addition f is superaveraging then also f is superaveraging and
0
PROOF. (a) By Corollary 5.6, we have f E Wo (M), and by (13.22) f'0 - u E Wo (U). Extending v to M by setting v = 0 in U, we obtain v E Wo (M). Observe that v
f = fi - v in M. Indeed, in U° we have
f=f=fb-v
(13.23)
13.2. SUPERAVERAGING FUNCTIONS
349
FIGURE 13.2. Function fin Lemma 13.8 because
'
1 and v
0 in UC, and in U we have
f =u=fV)-v by the definition of v. It follows from (13.23) that f E Wo (M). (b) Since f o > 0 and amin (U) > 0, by Theorem 5.13 we obtain from (13.22) that u > 0. Hence, f > 0. Since f is superaveraging, we have in U
-ON, (u - f) = -Aµu + Dµ f < 0 and
u- f
Pt f
ddl-0µw1=0
- 0µw2,
wl -< w2 mod Wo (M),
lim w1 t(, ) = two lim w 2 \ t , )= T. t-40 Hence, by Theorem 5.16, w1 < w2i which finishes the proof.
Exercises. 13.15.
Prove the following properties of superaveraging functions.
(a) If {fk}k 1 is an increasing sequence of superaveraging functions and fk -* f E Li then f is also superaveraging.
13. GREEN FUNCTION AND GREEN OPERATOR
350
(a) If {f;}iE' is a family of superaveraging functions depending on a parameter i then the function
f =inf fi iEI
is also superaveraging.
13.16. Let M be a connected, stochastically complete weighted manifold, and let f be a non-negative continuous superaveraging function on M.
(a) Prove that the inequality Pt f < f is satisfied pointwise and that Pt f --> f as t -* 0 pointwise.
(b) (Strong minimum principle) Prove that if f (x) = inf f at some point x E M then f - const on M. (b) (Minimum principle) Let f2 be a relatively compact open subset of M with nonempty boundary. Prove that inf f = inf f. an
13.17. Prove that if the Green function is finite then it is superaveraging with respect to each of its arguments. 13.18. Let f2 be a relatively compact open subset of M such that )min (f2) > 0. Let u be a solution of the following weak Dirichlet problem in f2
O,u = 0,
(13.24)
u = f mod Wo (f2) ,
where f E W1 (M), and set
7=
° inc, u in S2,
f
(see Fig. 13.3).
FIGURE 13.3. Function fin Exercise 13.18 (a) Prove that if f E Wo (M) then also f E Wo(M). (b) Prove that if f is superaveraging then also f is superaveraging and 0 < f < f. 13.19. Let f and h be two superaveraging functions from Wo (M). Then, for any t > 0, (-O&,Pt f, h) < (V f, Vh).
(13.25)
13.3. LOCAL HARNACK INEQUALITY
351
13.20. Let f E Wo (M) and {Slk} be a compact exhaustion sequence in M. Let Uk E W' (elk) solve in Qk the weak Dirichlet problem problem c
Dµuk = 0, uk = f mod Wo (f2k) .
Then JIVuk11L2 ->0ask ->oo. 13.21. Let f and h be two superaveraging functions from WO' (M). If {I k}k 1 is a compact exhaustion sequence such that An;n (lk) > 0 for any k, then
(-A,Pt f) h dµ -+ 0 as k -g oo. sup t>O JM\Ok
13.3. Local Harnack inequality The next statement contains a useful technical result, which will be then used to prove the local Harnack inequality in Theorem 13.10. THEOREM 13.9. Let M be a weighted manifold with min (M) > 0, and let 52o C= S21 C= St2 be relatively compact open subsets of M. Then, for any non-negative harmonic function f c- Wl (M), we have
sup f G C inf f
(13.26)
no
00
where
g (x' y)
C = sup
(13.27)
X,X'GQo 9 (x/, y)
yES22\1Z1
and g is the Green function of M. REMARK. Note that, due to the hypothesis Amin (M) > 0, the Green function g is finite (cf. Theorem 13.4).
The hypotheses Amin (M) > 0 and f E W' (M) are not restrictive because this theorem is normally applied when M is a relatively compact open subset of another manifold.
PROOF. Choose an open set Sl such that 1 C= Q C= Q2i and let 0 be a cutoff function of Il in 522. Let u be the solution to the following weak Dirichlet problem in d c: A/_4 u = 0,
j u = f ' mod Wo (SZC) Consider the function
f-{
f
.
in 0,
u in ?1c.
Since f = f in 92 D do, it suffices to prove (13.26) for f instead of f (see Fig. 13.4). _ Let us mention the following properties of f , which will be used. Since f is harmonic and, hence, superaveraging, we conclude by Lemma 13.8, that
352
13. GREEN FUNCTION AND GREEN OPERATOR
f =f
FIGURE 13.4. Illustration to the proof of Theorem 13.9
f c Wo (M) and f is superaveraging. Since the both functions f and u are harmonic in their domains, we obtain that Dµ f = 0 outside 852. Renaming for simplicity f back to f, we have by (13.1)
G (f - Ptf) =
00
fpu_Ptf)ds
f
00
P3f ds - jo 00 Ps(Ptf)ds
0
00
r Ptf ds - / o 0
T
I
Ptf ds - J
Pj ds
t
o
t
fo
Ps+tf ds
0
Pt f ds.
Since Ptf L2 -4 f as t -* 0, we obtain that
G(f -Ptf
)
f ast-*0.
Observe that function f satisfies the hypotheses of Lemma 12.7 with V = M \ 852 and U = 521 U 522. Hence, we conclude by Lemma 12.7 that
f -Ptf -2=x)0 ast---*0 t Since by Theorem 13.4 the Green operator is bounded in L2, it follows that
(L11't5Liu) -*0 ast -0,
13.3. LOCAL HARNACK INEQUALITY
whence
ht:=G
f
353
L2 tPtf1U) L2 f as t-+ 0.
Noticing that UC = S22 \ 521i we can write
ht (x) =
f
9 (x, y)
f tPtf (y) dii (y)
Since f - Ptf > 0, it follows from (13.27) that sup ht (x) < C inf ht (x). XEno
xEHo
Since ht L2 -* f as t -4 0, the same inequality holds for f. Indeed, there is a f as k -* oo. It follows that sequence tj 0 such that htk esup f < C einf f . no
no
However, since f is continuous in 11o, esup a -1 einf can be replaced by sup and inf, respectively, which yields (13.26). El .
Now we can prove the main result of this section. THEOREM 13.10. (The local Harnack inequality) Let M be an arbitrary connected weighted manifold and K be a compact subset of M. Then there is a constant C = C (K) such that, for any non-negative harmonic function
f on M, sup f < Ci tf f.
(13.28)
K
PROOF. If M is compact then any harmonic function f on M is constant because in this case f/ E Co (M) and, hM ence,
1Vf2-
fAmf dp=0. f Therefore, (13.28) is satisfied with C = 1.
J
M
Assuming in the sequel that M is non-compact, choose a sequence 520 CS21 C 02 C= S2 of relatively compact open subsets of M such that K C 520. By Theorem 10.22, we have )'m;n (52) > 0. Applying Theorem 13.9 to the manifold 52 and noticing that f E W1 (0), we obtain that (13.28) holds with
the constant C defined by (13.27) with g" instead of g, that is,
C= sup F (x, x , y)
,
x,x' ES2o
yE02\.Ql
where
F (x, x', y) = 9' (x, y)
90 (x/, y)
We have still to make sure that C < oo. For that, it suffices to show that function F is finite and continuous in the compact domain (x, x', y) E no x no x (S22 \ 11) .
(13.29)
13. GREEN FUNCTION AND GREEN OPERATOR
354
y. Choosing the set f to (x, y) < oo because x By Theorem 13.4, be connected, we obtain by Exercise 13.3 that g0 (x', y) > 0, whence F is finite in the domain (13.29). Finally, by Exercise 13.5, go (x, y) is continuous jointly in x, y away from the diagonal, which implies that F is continuous in (13.29).
The next theorem extends the local Harnack inequality to a-harmonic functions.
THEOREM 13.11. Let M be an arbitrary connected weighted manifold and assume that there is a positive function h on M such that
-0µh + ah = 0, where a is a real constant. Then, for any compact K C M and for any /3 > a, there is a constant C = C (K, /3) such that, for any non-negative ,3-harmonic function f on M, sul p f < C in f. K
(13.30)
Moreover, the constant C (K, /) as a function of ,3 - [a, +oo) is uniformly bounded on any bounded interval.
PROOF. Let us first prove the statement in the case /3 = a, that is, when f is a-harmonic. By Corollary 7.3, we have.h E C°°. Consider a new measure µ on M defined by d- = h2dµ.
By (9.26), we have, for any smooth function function u on M,
Abu = hoµ (hu) - au.
(13.31)
Setting u = f /h, we obtain
Oj,u=h1 f-haf =0. Hence, u is a non-negative harmonic function on the weighted manifold (M, g, µ) . By Theorem 13.10, we have
sup u < CK inf u, K
K
for some constant CK. Then (13.30) holds with the constant C
CK,a
.
CK inpK h
To handle the case Q > a, fix a compact K C M, a relatively compact connected open set S2 containing K, and construct a positive /-harmonic function ha on 0. Consider the weak Dirichlet problem on the weighted manifold (0, g, ii): u = 1 mod W0 (S2) ,
(13.32)
13.4. CONVERGENCE OF SEQUENCES OF a-HARMONIC FUNCTIONS
355
which has a unique solution u E Wl (Il) by Exercise 4.29. Since the constant function v - 1 satisfies the inequality
-Agv + (/3 - a) v > 0,
we obtain by the comparison principle of Corollary 5.14 that u < 1. Similarly, we have u > 0. Moreover, by the strong minimum principle (cf. Corollary 8.14), we conclude that u > 0 in Q. Observe that the function u decreases when the parameter /3 increases. Indeed, if function u' solves the problem (13.32) with /3' instead of /3 and if ,Q' > /3 then
-LXµu'+(/3-a)u' < 0, which implies by Corollary 5.14 that u' < u. The function hp := hu is positive in 1 and is ,6-harmonic in (1, g, µ), which easily follows from (13.31). By the first part of the proof, we conclude that, for any positive /3-harmonic function f in SZ, (13.30) holds with the constant SUPK h,6 C=CK,a: CKlnfKhQ.
We are left to verify that CK,p is uniformly bounded from above if /3 is bounded. By the monotonicity of u in 0 mentioned above, we have that h,3 decreases when 6 increases. Therefore, if 6 varies in an interval [/31 i /32] where /31 < X32 then Ck surK hal lnfK h,32
whence the uniform boundedness of CK,,a follows.
Exercises. 13.22. Prove the classical Harnack inequality: if f (x) is a positive harmonic function in a ball B (x, r) in l[I" then sup f < CC, inf f , (13.33) B(x,r/2)
B(x,r/2)
where the constant C. depends only on n. 13.23. (The Liouville theorem) Prove that any positive harmonic function in R" is identical constant.
13.4. Convergence of sequences of a-harmonic functions THEOREM 13.12. (The compactness principle) Let {uk} be a sequence of non-negative harmonic functions on a connected weighted manifold M. If the sequence {uk (x)} is bounded at some point x E M then there is a subsequence {uk1 } that converges to a harmonic function u on M in the sense of COO (M) .
13. GREEN FUNCTION AND GREEN OPERATOR
356
PROOF. By the Harnack inequality of Theorem 13.10, if the sequence {uk (x)} is bounded at some point x then it is uniformly bounded in any compact set K 3 x. Hence, the sequence {uk} is locally uniformly bounded on M. In particular, this sequence is uniformly bounded in L2 (S2) for any relatively compact open set 0 C M. Using Exercise 7.9 and La12Uk = 0, we conclude that the sequence {uk} is uniformly bounded in W1 (Q), also for any relatively compact open set 0 C M. By Exercise 10.25, there is a subsequence {ukz} that converges in L2,,i , (M). By Exercise 7.11, the limit CCC function u of the sequence {ukz } is also harmonic and ukz - 3 u. COROLLARY 13.13. (Harnack's principle) Let {uk} be a monotone sequence of harmonic functions on a connected weighted manifold M. If limkioo Uk (x) is finite at some point x E M then it is finite at all points x E M. Moreover, the function u (x) = lim uk (x) k-+oc
is harmonic and uk
C°°°M)
u as k - oo.
PROOF. Assume for certainty that {uk} is monotone increasing. Replacing Uk by Uk - ul, we can assume that uk > 0. By Theorem 13.12, there is a subsequence {ukz } that converges locally uniformly. Since the sequence {uk} is monotone increasing, the entire sequence {uk} must converge locally uniformly as well. Then the convergence is in CO° by Exercise 7.11. The following theorem extends the compactness principle to a-harmonic functions. THEOREM 13.14. Let {uk}k 1 be a sequence of non-negative functions on a connected weighted manifold M such that Uk is ak-harmonic for some real ak. Assume that the sequence {ak} is bounded and {uk (x)} is bounded
for some x E M. Then there is a subsequence {ukt} that converges to an a-harmonic function u on M in the sense of COO (M), for some real a. PROOF. Passing to a convergent subsequence of {ak}, we can assume
that {ak} converges and set a = limk,,, ak. Fix a connected relatively compact open subset S2 C M such that Amin (S2) > supk (-ak), that is, ak >_ -Amin (Sl) for all k > 1
(13.34)
(the question of existence of such sets will be addressed below). Set ao = -Amin (S2) and observe that, by Theorem 10.11, there is a positive aoharmonic function on S2 (namely, the first eigenfunction of Ln). Therefore, by Theorem 13.11, we conclude that the Harnack inequality (13.30) holds for any compact K C S2 and any positive ,6-harmonic function f in Q. Moreover, the constant C in (13.30) can be taken to be the same for any bounded
range of f3. In particular, if ,6 takes only the values a and ak, k = 1, 2, ... then the constant C can be assumed to be the same.
13.5. THE POSITIVE SPECTRUM
357
Now we can argue as in the proof of Theorem 13.12. By the Harnack inequality (13.30) if the sequence {uk (x)} is bounded at some point x E 0 then it is uniformly bounded in any compact set K E) x. In particular, the sequence {uk} is uniformly bounded in L2 (S2') for any relatively compact open set SZ' C Q. Using Exercise 7.9 and Opuk = akuk, we conclude that the sequence {uk} is uniformly bounded in W' (11'), also for any relatively compact open set 12' C= Q. By Exercise 10.25, there is a subsequence {uk; }
that converges in L (11). By Exercise 7.12, the limit function u of the C
u. sequence {uk, } is a-harmonic and uk, To ensure the convergence of {uk. } on M, let us observe that, for any
point x E M, there is a connected relatively compact open subset 12 C M such that x E SZ and .min (12) is arbitrarily large. Indeed, choose first a chart containing x and then take 11 to be a little Euclidean ball in this chart centered at x. By Exercise 11.25, the bottom eigenvalue of 12 in the Euclidean metric is ct2r-2 where c,,, is a positive constant depending only on the dimension n = dim M and r is the radius of the ball. Taking r small enough, we can get c,,,r-2 arbitrarily large. At the same time, in a small neighborhood of x, the ratio of the Riemannian metric g and the Euclidean metric remains uniformly bounded, and so is the ratio of the measure u and the Lebesgue measure. This implies by Exercise 10.7 that the eigenvalue Amin (Q, g, µ) is also large enough.
Hence, for any point x E M there is a set 11 as above and such that (13.34) is satisfied. Choose a cover of M be a countable sequence {S2j}'1 of such sets and order then so that any two consecutive sets overlap, which is possible by the connectedness of M. We can assume also that 121 contains the point x where the sequence {uk (x)} is bounded. Then by the above argument there is a subsequence that converges in 111. Since this subsequence converges in SZl f1 1Z2, there is a sub-subsequence that converges in 122, etc. Applying the diagonal process, we obtain finally a subsequence that converges on M.
Exercises. 13.24. Let M be a connected weighted manifold. Prove that if g (x, y) < oo for some couple x, y E M then g (x, y) is finite, that is, g (x, y) < oo for all distinct points x, y E M. REMARK. Hence, the following dichotomy takes places: either g (x, y) = oo for all x, y E M or g (x, y) < oc for all distinct x, y E M.
13.5. The positive spectrum DEFINITION 13.15. The positive spectrum of (the Laplace operator on) a weighted manifold M is the set of all real a such that the equation
Al,u + au = 0 has a positive solution u on M.
(13.35)
13. GREEN FUNCTION AND GREEN OPERATOR
358
THEOREM 13.16. For any connected weighted manifold M, the positive spectrum coincides with the interval (-oo, Amin (M)]
In particular, there is always a positive solution on M of the equation
A,,u-I-Amin(M)u=0, which is called the ground state of the manifold M. For comparison, let us recall that, by the definition of Amin (M), the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplace operator is contained in [Amin (M), +oo). Hence, .min (M) is the only common point of the L2-spectrum and the positive spectrum of the Laplacian. In terms of a-harmonic functions, Theorem 13.16 can be stated as follows: a positive a-harmonic function exists if and only is a > -Amin X. PROOF. That any a from the positive spectrum satisfies a < Amin (M) follows from Exercise 10.26. We need to prove the converse, that is, if a < Amin (M) then there is a positive solution of (13.35) on M. Choose a compact exhaustion sequence {SZk} in M such that all Qk are connected. Since by Exercise 10.6 Amin (lk) T Amin (M) as k -+ oo,
there is a sequence {ak} such that ak < Amin (Ak) for any k and ak T a as k -3 00. By Exercise 4.29, the weak Dirichlet problem in S2k {
u=
l
modWo (SZk),
has a unique solution Uk. Moreover, we have Uk > 0 by Theorem 5.13 and Corollary 8.14. Alternatively, the solution of this problem is given explicitly by the formula uk = 1
{
ak
J0
(Pdk 1) eaktdt
(see Exercise 10.27). Select some point x0 E S21 and consider functions vk
Uk
Uk (x0)
so that vk (xo) = 1. Using Theorem 13.14, we conclude that there is a subsequence {vki} that converges to function v on M, that satisfies (13.35). This function is clearly non-negative; moreover, since v (xo) = 1, it is strictly positive by Corollary 8.14.
Exercises. 13.25. Prove the following improved version of (12.18): if f and g are two functions from L2 (M) such that d (supp f, supp g) > r,
where r > 0, then, for all t > 0,
I(Ptf,g)I <
1
I1f112lgll2e-'\min(M)t
J,
1rt
exp
s2
(
4t
ds.
(13.36)
13.6. GREEN FUNCTION AS A FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTION
359
13.6. Green function as a fundamental solution THEOREM 13.17. Let M be a connected weighted manifold and x0 be a point of M. (a) If the Green function g of M is finite, then g (xo, ) is a positive fundamental solution of the Laplace operator at x0. (b) If h (x) is a positive fundamental solution at x0 then g (x0i x) < h (x) for all x 0 xo. This can be equivalently stated as follows: g (xo, -) is the infimum of all positive fundamental solutions at x0 (using the convention that the infimum of an empty set is oo). PROOF. If M is compact then all is settled by Exercise 13.1, which says
that g - oo and there is no fundamental solution. Assume that M is noncompact, and let {S2k}k l be a compact exhaustion sequence in M. Then 0. By Theorem 10.22 all 11k are relatively compact and, hence, M \ S2k we have .Xmin (1 k) > 0, and by Theorem 13.4 the weighted manifold 1 k has the Green function gQk E L L (Qk) satisfying the equation (13.37)
-DILgQk = 8.,o in SZk.
By Exercise 13.8, the sequence {gllk } increases and converges pointwise to g as k -* oo. (a) The identity (13.37) implies that, for all k > m, AM (gI2k
- gfm) = 0 in
Q,,,,.
-
It follows from Corollary 7.5 that the function gnk gO- is smooth (and hence harmonic) in SZm; more precisely, this function being a priori smooth in 52m \ {x0}, can be extended to x0 to become C°° (Ilm). By the Harnack principle of Corollary 13.13, the function
g - go- = lim (gOk -9 nm) k-+oo
is also harmonic in 52,,, and the convergence takes places in C°° (E2,,,,).
Hence, g E Li ° (Rn) and g satisfies (13.10) in D,.,,,. Letting m -4 oo we conclude that g E Li c (M) and g satisfies (13.10) in M, that is, g is a fundamental solution. The positivity of g follows from Exercise 13.3. (b) Let us first observe that, for any open set U such that xo E U C= SZk (see Fig. 13.5), g0k E L°° U W1 (fk \ U) . (13.38) Indeed, we have gOk < g0k+1, and the function gOk+l is smooth in S1k+1 \ {x0}. It follows that gOk+1 is bounded on SZk \ U, whence the boundedness of gOk follows. Next, set
C := sup
gOk
Qk\u
and notice that gOk = min (g2k, C) in S2k \ U. Since by Corollary 13.6 the function min (gOk, C) belongs to WI (ak), it follows that its restriction to
13. GREEN FUNCTION AND GREEN OPERATOR
360
FIGURE 13.5. The Green function gOk
S2k \ U, that is gok, belongs to W1 (Qk \ U), which finishes the proof of (13.38).
Let h be a positive fundamental solution at xo, that is, -& h = So. We need to verify that h > g, and it suffices to show that h > gIk for all k. For any index k consider a function Uk = 9Qk
- h.
Clearly, Dµuk = 0 on S2k so that Uk is a smooth harmonic function in 52k. We need to prove that uk < 0, and we will do it in four steps. 1. The function Uk belongs to W1 (52k), that is, Uk and IVUkI belong to L2 (S2k). Indeed, let U be an open set as above. Then Uk, IVukI E L2 (U) just by the smoothness of Uk in 52k, while Uk, I Vuk I E L2 (S2k \ U) because both functions gnk and h belong to W1 (S2k \ U). 2. The function uk is bounded from above in Stk. Indeed, uk is bounded in U by continuity, and is bounded in Ilk \ U because Uk < gdIk and g2k is bounded in Ilk \ U3. We have Uk < 0 mod W0 (S2k) .
(13.39)
Set C = supnk Uk. Then the following inequality holds in Ilk: Uk < min (gnk, C) =: Vk.
By Corollary 13.6, the function vk belongs to W0 (S2k), whence (13.39) follows.
4. Since the function Uk belongs to W1(S2k), satisfies in Ilk the Laplace
equation DAuk = 0 and the boundary condition (13.39), we conclude by Theorem 5.13 that Uk < 0.
13.6. GREEN FUNCTION AS A FUNDAMENTAL SOLUTION
361
Exercises. 13.26. Let M be a connected non-compact manifold and SZ be a relatively compact open subset of M. (a) Prove that, for any p E [1, +oo], Gn is a bounded operator from LP (S2) to LP (0). (b) Prove that the function u = Gn f satisfies the equation -Aµu = f for any f E LP (a).
13.27. Let M be a connected weighted manifold and let f E Li , (M) and f > 0. Prove that if G f (x) is finite then G f belongs to L 0C and -Dµ (G f) = f. 13.28. Let M be a connected weighted manifold with a finite Green function g (x, y). Fix a point xo E M and a compact set K C M. Prove that if u is a harmonic function on M and u (x) < g (x, xo) for all x E M \ K,
then u(s) <0forallxEM. 13.29. Let M be a connected weighted manifold. Prove that if h (x) is a fundamental solution of the Laplace operator at a point xo E M such that h (x) -4 0 as x -+ oo, then h (x) = g (x, xo).
13.30. Prove that, on an arbitrary connected weighted manifold M, the following conditions are equivalent: (i) the Green function is finite;
(ii) there exists a positive non-constant superharmonic function (that is, M is nonparabolic); (iii) there exists a positive non-constant superaveraging function.
13.31. Let M be a connected weighted manifold and 0 be a non-empty relatively compact open subset of M such that M \ 1 is non-empty. Prove that, for all x E M, Y E 0, g (x, y) < g° (x, y) + sup g (z, y) .
(13.40)
=East
13.32. Prove that a fundamental solution of the Laplace operator exists on any noncompact connected weighted manifold.
13.33. Prove that if, for some x E M and a compact set K C M,
ff,K
g
(x, y) dµ (y) < co
(13.41)
then M is stochastically incomplete.
13.34. Let M be a weighted model of dimension n > 2, and S (r) be its boundary area function (cf. Section 3.10). Prove that the Green function of the central ball BR satisfies the identity
9BR(x,0)= /RA(s),
(13.42)
where r = jxj. Deduce that the Green function of M satisfies the identity g (x, 0 )
=
f
o
S(9)
.
( 13 .
43 )
Hence or otherwise give an example of a complete manifold M where the Green function belongs to Li (M).
13.35. Prove that the Green function of the ball B = BR (0) in R' is given by the following formulas, for all x, y E B:
13. GREEN FUNCTION AND GREEN OPERATOR
362
R-1
(a) Ifn > 2 then 1
()n2
1
9B (x, y)= Wn (n - 2) (lx yln-2 I x - y* In-2 lyj where y' is the inversion of y with respect to the ball B, that is
-
I2
Y
(13.44)
R2
(b) If n = 2 then 1
9B (x, y) =
27r
log Ix - y* I
1Y1
Ix-ylR
(c) Ifn = 1 then 1
1
R
9B (x, y) = 2 I x - yI - 2Rxy + 2
13.36. Let F (t) be a positive monotone increasing function on R+ and assume that Pt (x, y)
F (- n exp for some x, y E M and all t > 0, where r = d (x, y) and c > 0. Prove that if F satisfies the doubling property F (2s) < AF (s)
for all s > 0,
then
g (x, y) < C Jr
sds
F, (s),
(13.45)
(13.46)
where C = C (A, c). If in addition F satisfies the condition
F(s)
((slla
F(s') a\s'/
for all s > s' > 0,
(13.47)
where a > 0 and a > 2 then 9 (x, y)
C Fr2(r)
(13.48)
where C = C (A, a, a, c).
Notes The present account of the Green function is somewhat different from the traditional approach (cf. [155]). Some proofs would have been simpler, had we used the fact that the Green function go (x, y) in a relatively compact open set S2 with smooth boundary vanishes at every point x E 852 while y C Q. For example, the proof of the minimality of g in Theorem 13.17(b) would be as short as this: since h (x) - go (x, xo) is a harmonic function in 52 that takes non-negative value on 852, by the classical maximum principle this function is non-negative in S2, that is, h (x) > go (x, xo); letting 52 - M, we obtain h (x) > g (x, xo). However, following the general approach adopted in this book, we avoid using the boundary regularity of solutions and employ instead other methods, based on the Sobolev space Wo (S2). Despite of technical complications, we feel that this strategy has good
prospects for the future applications in more singular settings. The idea to use the Green function for the proof of the local Harnack inequality (Section 13.3) goes back to A.Boukricha [46] and W.Hansen [197]. However, the present implementation of this idea is entirely new. This approach allows us to avoid at this stage the technically involved proofs of the uniform Harnack inequalities, although at expense of loosing the uniformity of the Harnack constant. However, the local Harnack inequality
NOTES
363
is sufficient to prove the convergence properties of sequences of harmonic functions as we do in Section 13.4.
The treatment of the positive spectrum in Section 13.5 follows S.-T.Yau [3621 and D.Sullivan [3401. We wanted necessarily to demonstrate how the convergence properties allow to prove the existence of the ground state. The latter is an important tool that is used in many applications (cf. Section 9.2.5).
CHAPTER 14
Ultracontractive estimates and eigenvalues In the Chapter we study the problem of obtaining the uniform ondiagonal upper bounds of the heat kernel of the form pt (x, x)
(t)
(14.1)
with some increasing function 'y (t). If A = Amin (M) > 0 then by Exercise 10.29 the heat kernel pt (x, y) decays as exp (-At) when t -+ oo. However, if A = 0 then we do not get any decay of pt (x, y) from the spectral theory, and more subtle methods are required. As we will see below, the function y (t) in (14.1) can be determined by a lower bound of Amin (Q) via /1 (0), which shows the rate of Amin (0) approaching 0 when ci exhausts M.
14.1. Ultracontractivity and heat kernel bounds By Theorems 4.9 and 7.19 the heat semigroup {Pt} on any weighted manifold (M, g, p) admits the estimates IIPtIII-+I < 1,
IIPtII2-+2 <- 1,
so that Pt is a contraction in L2 and Ll. In fact, by Exercises 7.33 and 7.36, IIPtIIT-+1 c1
for any r E [1, +oo]. Here we consider some estimates of IIPtIIP1q with p < q.
DEFINITION 14.1. Let 1 < p < q < +oo. We say that the semigroup {Pt} is LP -3 Lq ultracontractive if there exists a positive function 0 (t) on (0, +oo) such that, for all f c LP fl L2 and t > 0, we have Pt f E Lq and IIPtfliq < 0(t)lJfIIP.
We write in this case IIPtlIP-+q < 0(t).
The function 6 is called the rate function of ultracontractivity. For any r E [1, +oo], denote by r* its Holder conjugate, that is
-+-=1. r r* 1
1
For example, 2* = 2, 1* = +oo, and +oo* = 1. THEOREM 14.2. Let the heat semigroup {Pt} be LP -* Lq ultracontractive LP* ultracontractive
with the rate function 0(t). Then {Pt} is also Lq* with the same rate function. 365
14. ULTRACONTRACTIVE ESTIMATES AND EIGENVALUES
366
PROOF. By the hypothesis, we have for any g E L p n L2 and t > 0 IIPt9IIq
0(t)11911p.
Then for any f E Lq* n L2 we obtain by the Holder inequality (Ptf, 9) _ (f, Pt9) s IIf jIq* IIPt9IIq <_ 0(t) IIf IIq* II9IIp
Therefore, II Ptf II p* =
(Ptf,g)
sup gELPnL2\{0}
II9IIp
< 0(t) II f IIq*,
whence the claim follows.
O
COROLLARY 14.3. The semigroup {Pt} is Ll -4 L2 ultracontractive if and only if it is L2 -3 L°° ultracontractive, with the same rate function.
The following statement elucidates the importance of the notion of ultracontractivity. THEOREM 14.4. The heat semigroup {Pt} is L' -+ L2 ultracontractive with the rate function 0(t) if and only if the heat kernel satisfies estimate
P2t(x,x) C 92(t),
(14.2)
forallt>0 andxEM. PROOF. By Theorem 14.2, the hypothesis that {Pt} is L1 -* L2 ultracontractive with the rate function B(t) is equivalent to the fact that L2 -3 L°O
is ultracontractive with the same rate function; that is, for all f E L2 and
t>0
IIPtf11. < 0(t)Ilf112.
(14.3)
Substitute in (14.3) f = pt (x, ) for some fixed t > 0 and x E M. Then, using the properties of the heat kernel from Theorem 7.13, we obtain
Ptf (x) =
IM
pt (x, z) pt (x, z) dµ (z) = pet (x, x)
and
IIfII2 -p2t(x,x), whence by (14.3) 9 (t)
pet (x, x)
pet (x, x),
which proves (14.2).
Conversely, if the heat kernel satisfies (14.2) then, for all t > 0 and
xEM,
IPtf(x)I = <_
fM pt(x) y)f (y)dµ(y)
(I Pt (x, y) dp (y) ) M
= P2t (x, x)1/2 if II2
1/2 IIf 112
14.2. FABER-KRAHN INEQUALITIES
367
whence
IIPtf(x)II
<0(t)fl.f112,
which proves (14.3). REMARK 14.5. Using the inequality
pt (x, y) < pt (x, x) pt (y, y) (see Exercise 7.21), we obtain the following version of Theorem 14.4: the heat semigroup {Pt} is L' --> L2 ultracontractive with the rate function 0(t) if and only if the heat kernel satisfies estimate pet (x, y) < 92 (t),
for all t > 0 and x,y E M.
Exercises. 14.1. Prove that if the heat semigroup {Pt} is LP -3 LP* L2 ultracontractive with the rate function 0(t) where 1 < p < 2 then {Pt} is also LP -# ultracontractive with the rate function 02(t/2).
14.2. Faber-Krahn inequalities Given a non-negative non-increasing function A on (0, -boo), we say that a weighted manifold (M, g, i) satisfies the Faber-Krahn inequality with function A if, for any non-empty relatively compact open set 52 C M, Amin (12)
A (p (12)) .
(14.4)
Of course, since the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplacian Gn is discrete in S2, we can replace here Amin (S2) by Al (S2). However, for most applications we do not need to use the fact that Arvin (12) is an eigenvalue. If 12 is an open subset of RTh then, by the Faber-Krahn theorem, Al (12) ? A, (12*)
,
where 12* is a ball of the same volume as Q. If the radius of 12* is r then with some positive constant c,Z (see Exercise 11.25). Since by Al (0*) (3.90)
µ (12) _ p (I*) = nn rn, it follows that A1(S2) > ap
(14.5)
where a = a (n) > 0. Therefore, (14.4) holds with the function A (v) _ av-2/-n..
An alternative proof of (14.5) (although with a non-sharp constant a) can be found below in Example 14.31. REMARK 14.6. It is known that the Faber-Krahn inequality (14.5) with some constant a > 0 holds on the following two classes of n-dimensional Riemannian manifolds:
368
14. ULTRACONTRACTIVE ESTIMATES AND EIGENVALUES
(1) Cartan-Hadamard manifolds, that is, complete simply connected manifolds of non-positive sectional curvature. This class includes,
in particular, R' and H. (2) Minimal submanifolds of RN.
See the Notes at the end of this Chapter for bibliographic references.
Exercises. 14.2. Prove that if (14.4) holds for all relatively compact open sets Sl then it holds also for all open sets SZ with lL (cl) < oc.
14.3. The Nash inequality LEMMA 14.7. (The generalized Nash inequality) Let (M, g, µ) a weighted manifold satisfying the Faber-Krahn inequality with a function A : (0, +oo) -
[0, +oo) that is monotone decreasing and right continuous. Then, for any
0 < e < 1 and for any function u E L' n W0 (M) \ {0}, the following inequality holds 2
Jou12 dµ > (1 - _-) IIu112A
IM
For example, for the function A (v) =
(14.6)
- JIU112l
av-2/n
we obtain from (14.6) IVu12 dµ
l
/fM
>c
4/n
Jul dp I
\ 1+2/n (
u2da I
,
(14.7)
fm / fm where c = c (a, n) > 0. In (particular, (14.7) holds in Rn where it is referred to as the (classical) Nash inequality.
PROOF. It suffices to consider non-negative u since by (5.13) JVul _ IV Iu11. Consider first the case when u is in addition continuous. For any s > 0, consider the open set
Sts={x EM:u(x)>s} and observe by Exercise 5.22 (u - s)+ E W' (a), and by (5.12) IV
J By Theorem 10.8, we have Amin(DS)J
(u-s)+12dµ
(u-s)+dii<
k V (u - s)+
Set for simplicity A = I!uIll
and B = IJu112
(14.8)
2 dg.
(14.9)
14.3. THE NASH INEQUALITY
369
Integrating the obvious inequality, u2
- 2su < (u - s)+
we obtain
B - 2sA < fM(u - s)2 dlj,,
(14.10)
which together with (14.8) and (14.9) yields
1Vu12
Amin (Qs) (B - 2sA) <
dp.
(14.11)
On the other hand, by the definition of 0, we have 1
1
/
M
whence by the Faber-Krahn inequality A(
Amin (Qs) >- A (p (Qs))
A),
(14.12)
where we have used the hypotheses that A is monotone decreasing. Combining (14.11) and (14.12), we obtain
A(s A) (B - 2sA) < f
l Vu12
dµ,
M
whence (14.6) follows upon setting here s = 2A To treat the general case u E L1 fl W0 (M), we will use the following observation. CLAIM. If {wk} is a sequence of functions from L' fl W0 (M) such that 11Wk-ulll--30,
llwk-U112-+ 0,
11VWk-vu112-+0,
(14.13)
as k - oo and if (14.6) holds for each function wk then (14.6) holds also for U.
Indeed, it follows from the hypotheses that the function A is lower semicontinuous that is, for any convergent sequence {rk} of positive reals, hm inf A (rk) _>
m rk).
(14.14)
Hence, using (14.13), we can pass to the limit in the inequality (14.6) for wk and obtain (14.6) for u. Consider now the case when u is a non-negative function from W' (M). Let Sl be a relatively compact open neighborhood of supp u. Since by Lemma
5.5 u E W0 (0), and Co (S2) is dense in Wp (S2), there exists a sequence {uk } C Co (M) such that lluk-u112-*0
and IIVuk-Vu112 -*0.
(14.15)
By the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality, we have u, uk E L' (12) and lluk - u111 C
A(Q)lluk - u112 --* 0.
(14.16)
14. ULTRACONTRACTIVE ESTIMATES AND EIGENVALUES
370
Since (14.6) holds for each function uk by the first part of the proof, the above Claim applies, and we obtain (14.6) for function u. Finally, let u be an arbitrary non-negative function from L' f1 W0 (M). As above, there is a sequence {uk} C Co (M) such that (14.15) holds. By Lemma 5.4, we can assume that uk > 0. Let 12k be any relatively compact open set that contains supp uk. Consider the function Wk := min (u, Uk) = u - (u - Uk)+
and observe that Wk E W01 (M) (cf. Example 5.3 and Exercise 5.3). Since supp wk C supp Uk, we conclude by the previous part of the proof that (14.6) holds for the function wk. We are left to prove that a subsequence of {wk} satisfies (14.13). We have
IIVwk - vul12 = (ftUk!5U} + flUk'Ul) I D (wk - u)12 {uk
l
V(uk-u)l2dµ
< IIVuk - Vull2) because on the set {uk > u} we have wk = u and, hence, V (wk - u) = 0 (cf. (5.11)) and on the set {uk < u} we have wk = Uk and, hence, V (wk - u) _ V (Uk - u). It follows that JIVwk-Vull2--30as k- oo,
and similarly one proves that
llwk-UI12--+0as k-+oo. Therefore, there is a subsequence {wkti } such that wki -* u almost everywhere. Since 0 < wk; < u and u E L', the dominated convergence theorem yields
k-*oo. Hence, the subsequence {wkti } satisfies all the conditions of the Claim, which finishes the proof.
Exercises. 14.3. Assume that the following Nash inequality holds: IVU12
dµ
IIu112A I1u112/' fm for any non-zero function u E Co (M), where A is a decreasing function on [0, +oo)..
Prove the Faber-Krahn inequality min (Q) > A (j.l (a)) ,
for any open set SZ C M with finite measure.
14.4. Give an example of a manifold where the Faber-Krahn inequality can holds only with function A (v) - 0.
14.4. THE FUNCTION CLASSES L AND r
371
14.5. Prove that the Faber-Krahn inequality with function A (v) = av-2/v
(14.17)
where a and v are positive constants, implies that, for any relatively compact ball B (x, r),
it (B (x, r)) > cav/2r",
(14.18)
where c = c (v) > 0. HINT. First prove that
A (B (x, r/2)) 4
p (B (x, r)) > c (are) and then iterate this inequality.
14.6. Prove that the Faber-Krahn inequality with function (14.17) with v > 2 is equivalent to the Sobolev inequality: v-2
f
lVu12
d1z > c (fm Jul - dA)
(14.19)
M
for any u E Wo (M), where c = c (a, v) > 0. 14.7. Prove that the Sobolev inequality (14.19) implies the following inequality, for any u E Co (M):
f lval2 dµ > c M
lul' dµ)
(fm
(f lul' du
b
(14.20)
M
for any set of positive reals a,,8, a, b that satisfy the following conditions:
a<
(3<
,
2v v-2
(14.21)
ba1
and
(14.22)
,Bb - as = 2.
REMARK. Under the conditions (14.21), the numbers a, b solving (14.22) always exist and
are positive. For example, if a = 1 and / = 2 then a = 4/v and b = 1 + 2/v, so that (14.20) coincides with the Nash inequality (14.7). If a = 2 and /3 = 2 + 4/v then a = 2/v and b = 1, and we obtain the Moser inequality f IDu12 d 1j > M
c
(fM lull
dµ)
l12+4/ dµ)
(fM
.
14.4. The function classes L and r We consider here a certain ordinary differential equation, which will be used in Section 14.5. The main results are Lemmas 14.10 and 14.18. This section can be skipped at first reading and be consulted in case of need. DEFINITION 14.8. We say that a function A : (0, +oo) R belongs to the class L if (i) A is non-negative, monotone decreasing, and right continuous; (ii) A is positive in a right neighborhood of 0 and dv
,o vA(v)
< 0-0.
(14.23)
14. ULTRACONTRACTIVE ESTIMATES AND EIGENVALUES
372
For example, if a function A satisfies (i) and A (v) = v_a (a > 0) for const then A L.
small v, then A belongs to L, while if A (v)
DEFINITION 14.9. We say that a function y : (0, +oo) -* R belongs to the class r if y is positive, monotone increasing, log-concave, and y(0+) = 0.
Consequently, for any y E F, the function logy is monotone increasing and concave. Hence, log y is absolutely continuous, and its derivative (log 7)' exists almost everywhere and is monotone decreasing. Taking the right continuous version of (log y)', we can assume that (log y)' is defined pointwise. We see that 7 E F if and only if (i) the function y is positive, monotone increasing, absolutely continuous, and y(0+) = 0; (ii) the function y'/-y is monotone decreasing. For example, the functions y (t) = to and y (t) = exp (-t-') belong to
Ffor any a>0. LEMMA 14.10. For any function A E L, the following Cauchy problem on (0, +oo)
dt = yA(y),
y(0+) = 0
(14.24)
has a unique positive absolutely continuous solution 7(t). This solution belongs to r and can be determined by
t= J
ry(t)
v_A( v) ,
0< t< to, (14.25)
J11
y(t) = vo,
t > to,
where vp
vo = sup {v : A(v) > 0}
and to =
Jo
v d v) .
(14.26)
Conversely, for any function y c F, there exists a unique non-negative, monotone decreasing, right continuous function A satisfying (14.25). This function belongs to L and can be determined by
A(y(t))
(t), t > 0, (14.27)
A(v)=0,
V>sup y.
Hence, the equation (14.24) (and each of the identities (14.25) and (14.27)) can be considered as the definition of a bijective mapping from L to r and back. DEFINITION 14.11. For any A E L, the function y, defined by (14.25), is called the F-transform of A. For any y E F, the function A, defined by (14.27), is called the L-transform of y.
14.4. THE FUNCTION CLASSES L AND P
373
PROOF OF LEMMA 14.10. Uniqueness of y. Let (0, vo) be the maximal
interval of positivity of A, that is vo is defined by (14.26). By (14.24) we have y' > 0 so that ry is monotone increasing. Let (0, to) be the maximal interval where y(t) < vo, that is to := sup {t : y(t) < vo}. For any t E (0, to), we have A(y(t)) > 0 so that (14.24) implies upon integration t y'dt = t. fo yA('Y)
Changing v = y(t) we arrive at the identity f(t)
for all 0 < t < to.
t =
(14.28)
,
By continuity, (14.28) holds also for t = to. By the definition of to, we have y(to) < vo. Let us prove that in fact y(to) = vo, that is to satisfies (14.26). Indeed, if y(to) < vo then (14.28) and (14.23) imply
to=
7(to)
dv
<00.
vA(v) However, for a finite to, we have y(to) = vo just by continuity. fo
Hence, we have proved that the function y is determined for t < to by (14.28) where to is determined by (14.26). For t > to we have y(t) > vo whence A(-y(t)) = 0. Therefore, (14.24) implies y'(t) - 0 and (14.29) y(t) - vo for all t > to, which finishes the proof of the uniqueness of y. It follows directly from (14.24) that y E r (the fact that y'/-y is decreasing follows from y'/y = A (y) and the monotonicity properties of A and y).
Existence of y. Define y(t) by (14.25), where vo and to are defined by (14.26). Observe that if to is finite then also vo is finite. Indeed, if vo = 00 then we obtain from (14.26) and the monotonicity of A O°
dv
- dv
dv
= oo. vA(v) A(1) vA(v) v Hence, (14.25) defines a positive absolutely continuous function yon (0, +00).
to = Jo
It is straightforward to check that y solves (14.24). Uniqueness of A. Set vo := sup y and let (0, to) be the maximal interval where y(t) < vo, that is to := sup{t : y(t) < Vol.
We claim that y > 0 on the interval (0, to). Indeed, if y (t1) = 0 for some 0 < t1 < to then by the monotonicity y (t) = 0 for all t _> ti. Therefore, y attains its maximum at t = t1, which cannot be the case because -y(ti) < vo.
14. ULTRACONTRACTIVE ESTIMATES AND EIGENVALUES
374
Hence, y' > 0 on (0, to), and the function y is strictly monotone on this interval and has the range (0, vo). It follows from (14.24) that A
t
t
for all 0 < t < to,
(14.30)
which uniquely determines A(v) on the interval (0, vo). If vo = oo then (14.30) proves the uniqueness of A. Assume now vo < oo and show that in this case A(vo) = 0; this would imply by monotonicity that
A(v)-0 for allv>vo
(14.31)
and prove the uniqueness of A in this case. Indeed, if to < oo then for all t > to we have 'y(t) - vo and hence y'(t) = 0, which implies by (14.24) A(vo) = 0.
Assume now to = oo and show that lim (t) = 0. t-oo y Indeed, the function y'/-y is monotone decreasing and has a non-negative limit at oo; denote it by c. If c > 0 then -y'/-y > c implies that y(t) grows at least exponentially as t -3 oo, which contradicts the assumption sup y =
vo < cc. Hence, we conclude c = 0, which implies by (14.24)
tlrn A('y(t)) = 0. It follows by the monotonicity of A that A(vo) = 0. Finally, let us verify (14.23) that would prove A E L. Indeed, dividing (14.30) by the left hand side and integrating it as above we obtain again the identity (14.28), for any t E (0, to), whence (14.23) follows. Existence of A. Define A by (14.27). Set vo = sup -y and observe that the first line (14.27) defines A(v) for all v in the range of y, which is either (0, vo) or (0, vo]. If vo = oc then the second line in (14.27) is void. If vo < 00
and the range of y is (0, vo) then the second line in (14.27) extends A to be 0 in [vo, +00). If the range of y is (0, vo] then y attains its supremum; therefore at a point of the maximum of y we have y'(t+) = 0 and hence A(vo) = 0, which is compatible with the second line in (14.27). It is obvious that this function A satisfies (14.24). EXAMPLE 14.12. For all a, c > 0, the function A (v) =
cv_a
belongs to L and its F-transform is
y (t) = (cat)"' In the next examples, let us always assume that A E L and A (v) =
cov-a
for v < 1,
0
14.4. THE FUNCTION CLASSES L AND r
375
where co, a > 0. Set 1
(coa)-1 to = Jo vA (v) = Let 7 (t) be the F-transform of A. For all t < to, we obtain by (14.25) ,Y (t) =
(coat)'/' .
Let
A (v) = cv-Q for v > 1, where 0, c > 0 and c < co. Then the identity t - to
=
y(t)
dv (14.32)
vA (v)
implies that ry
(t) _ (cat + c')1/'8 fort > to
where c' = 1 - -o . It follows that in this case
Y()-
t1/a,
t < 1,
t1/Q,
t>1.
Let
A(v)-cfor v>1, where 0 < c < co. Then by (14.32)
-y (t) = exp (c (t - to)) fort>to.
(14.33)
Let
A(v)-0for v> 1. Then by (14.25) we obtain
'y(t)-1for t>to. Formally this follows also from (14.33) with c = 0. Let A (v) = c log-0 v for v > 2. Then it follows from (14.32) that, for large enough t,
7 (t) = exp ((c It where c' = c
I
cn) a+ 1
1) and c" is a real number.
LEMMA 14.13. Let A E L and -y be its I'-transform. If f (t) is a positive absolutely continuous function satisfying on an interval (0, T) the inequality
f' > fA(f), then
f (t) > -y(t)
for all 0 < t < T.
(14.34)
14. ULTRACONTRACTIVE ESTIMATES AND EIGENVALUES
376
PROOF. Let (0, vo) be the maximal interval of positivity of A(v), and let (0, r) be the maximal interval where f (t) < vo. For all t E (0, T) we obtain from (14.34)
f f
I Jot
whence
'(f) >
f(t)
t,
dv
>t f Comparing with (14.25), we obtain f (t) > y(t) for all t E (0, r). If r = T .
f (o) vA(v)
then this finishes the proof.
If r < T (which includes also the case r = 0) then for all t E (r, T) we have f (t) > vo, which implies f (t) > y(t) simply because y(t) < vo. DEFINITION 14.14. Fix J E (0, 1) and let -y be a function from class r and A be its L-transform. We say that -y belongs to the class F,s (and A belongs to the class Ls) if, for all t > 0, y(2t) 7
(t) +
8-11+s
(1+t)
>_ 0.
(14.35)
We say that -y belongs to the class F, (and A belongs to the class La) if, for
allt>0,
ry (2t) > b- (t).
(14.36)
Clearly, (14.36) implies (14.35) so that Fa C F,s. Observe also that the parameter 6 occurs in (14.35) three times. One could have three different parameters instead but the fact that the left hand side of (14.35) is monotone decreasing with 6 allows to manage with a single parameter. This also implies that the class Fb increases when 8 decreases. It is obvious that if -y E Fb or -y E Fa then the function ay (bt) belongs to the same class for any positive constants a, b. Recall that, for any y E F, the function -y/-y is monotone decreasing.
The condition -y E Fb means that the rate of decay of y'/-y is at most polynomial. For example, the function y (t) = t', a > 0, satisfies (14.36) with 8 = a and, hence, belongs to F1/2 To have more examples, let us first prove the following lemma that helps in checking that y e Fa or y E Fs.
LEMMA 14.15. Let0 b, then y E F, for some 8' > 0. (b) If (14.36) holds for all t < a and t > b and y' (2b) > 0 then y E F5' for some 8' > 0. PROOF. Denote f = 7 and recall that f is non-increasing.
14.4. THE FUNCTION CLASSES L AND r
377
(a) Then, for all t c- [a, b), we have
f (t) < C := f (a) and, for a small enough b', (f(2t)-b f(t))
(1 +
t)l+a'
.
Hence, for t E [a, b), (14.35) is satisfied with b = Y. Since for t outside [a, b) (14.35) is satisfied by hypothesis, we conclude that y E Fey. (b) If t E [a, b) then f (2t) > f (2b) = E f (a) > e f (t),
0. Hence, replacing bin (14.36) by min (b, E), we obtain where e = that (14.36) holds for all t > 0. EXAMPLE 14.16. 1. The function 1
,y (t) =
belongs to F, with b = 2-'2. The function
y(t)=
ta,
t < 1,
t", t>1, where a,,6 > 0, belongs to some F. Indeed, each of the function -y (t) = to and -y (t) = t/ belong to F112i and the claim follows by Lemma 14.15. 3. In the same way, the functions ta, t < 1,
exp(0 -1), t>1
yO
and
y (t) =
t < 1, 1 + logo t, t > 1 ta,
belong to some Fa. 4. The function (14.37) y (t) _ { 1 ' t > 1 ' obviously satisfies (14.36) if t < 2 or t > I. By Lemma 14.15, -y E FS for
some 6. Note that y Fb because in the range t E [2, 1) we have ry' (2t) = 0 while ' (t) > 0, and (14.36) fails for any 6 > 0. LEMMA 14.17. If y E Fa with 6 < 1 then there exists a smooth function g on [0, +oo) such that
1 < g < eS-3, g' > 0, and such that the function %y := yg belongs to F5.
(14.38)
14. ULTRACONTRACTIVE ESTIMATES AND EIGENVALUES
378
PROOF. Define function g (t) to be the solution of the Cauchy problem 2 g (0) = 1,
9
(t)
(1 + t)1+a'
that is, t
g (t) = exp j-2 o
ds
(1+s)l+a yg so that
The properties (14.38) are obvious. Set Yr
7,
9
'Y
'y
9
whence
ryr (2t) - S 7r (t) =
[i(2t)_ S 7r (t)]
+
[gr
-1
>
(1 + t)+a 5-2
(1 + 2t)1+6
(2t) - Sgr (t)]
-2
+
(1 + 2t)1+a
S-1
(1 + t)1+'
25-1
(1 + t)1+6
(14.39)
We are left to verify that the right hand side of (14.39) is non-negative, which is true provided S < 1 because (1 +
2t)11+-f-ab
(1+t)
< 21+s < 5 < S-1 2
2
To state the next result, we use the notation log+ s := (logs)+. LEMMA 14.18. If y E rb then, for any v > 0, sup 1 1og+ y(t) > jA(Cbv) ,
(14.40)
2 v t>o t where A is the L-transform of y and Cb > 1 is a constant that depends only
on S.
If -y E ra then (14.40) is true with CS = 1.
PROOF. Assume first that y E r5. If v > sup -y then A (v) = 0 and (14.40) is trivially satisfied. If v < sup y then there exists t > 0 such that v = 7 (t/2). Using the concavity of logy we obtain 2 log+ -y (t) > logy (t) - log y(t/2) > (t) = ry' (t) (log7)r t t/2 y
v-
-
By (14.36) and (14.24) we obtain r (t) > S (t/2) = SA (7(t/2)) = SA(v), 7 7
14.4. THE FUNCTION CLASSES L AND r
379
whence log+ 7(t) > 2A(v).
sup
(14.41)
t of generality, we can assume S < 1. Let g Let now y c F. Without loss be the function from Lemma 14.17 so that ry := yg E F5. Taking a multiple of g, we can assume that
cb
where cb > 0. Therefore, ry < y and, by the first part of the proof, sup 1 log+ y(t) > sup 1 log+ V t>0 t t>0 t
-A(v), V
2
where A is is the L-transform of ry.
If v < sup y then v = y (t) for some t. Using g' > 0 and 7 < ca lry, we obtain
(v) =
(y) = ry = ry + g > ry = A ('y) > A (cb l Y = A (C6v), 9
Y
7
where Cb = cb 1. Combining the previous two lines, we obtain (14.40). If v > sup =y then Cbv_> sup y and A (Cbv) = 0 so that (14.40) is trivially satisfied.
Exercises. 14.8. Prove that if Al, A2 are two functions of class L then also Al +A, and max (Al, A2) belong to L.
14.9. Let A be a function of class L such that
J civ-°l,
V < v1,
A (v) _ l C2 V-12, V > v2, where al, C1, V1 > 0, a2, c2 > 0, and v2 > Vi. Prove that A E L, for some S > 0.
14.10. For any function y E r, denote by A, the L-transform of y, and for any function A E L, denote by yA the r-transform of A. Let a, b be positive constants. (a) Set A (v) = aA (bv). Prove that
ry (t) = b-'7A (at). (b) Set ry (t) = ay (bt). Prove that Ary (v) = bA.y (a-'v) .
(c) Prove that if Al and A2 are two functions from L and Al < A2 then -yA1 < 7A2
-
14.11. Prove that the product of two functions from ra belongs to 1 , and the product of two functions from rs belongs to ra/2 14.12. Show that there is a function y E r that does not belong to any class r5. 14.13. Let F (s) be a positive function of class C2 on [0, +oc) such that F' (s) does not vanish for large s. Assume that f°° ds _ and
J0 F (s) - 00 F"F (s) $ 0. c:= lim s-io0 (F')
14. ULTRACONTRACTIVE ESTIMATES AND EIGENVALUES
380 Prove that
c
c_i
ds
-F'(t) ast-300.
F(s)
14.14. Let A be a function of class L such that
A(v)=exp(-v$) forv> 1, where 0 > 0. Evaluate the asymptotic of its F-transform ry (t) as t -a co.
14.5. Faber-Krahn implies ultracontractivity As before, denote by Pt the heat semigroup of a weighted manifolc (M, g, ,u) and by PQ the heat semigroup of Q, for any open set Il C M We use in this section the functional classes L and r defined in Section 14.4
THEOREM 14.19. Assume that the Faber-Krahn inequality holds on c weighted manifold (M, g, µ) with a function A E L. Then, for any functior f c LI n L2 (M, p) and for all t > 0, j1Ptf 112
Y(t)
Ilf 112 ,
(14.42)
where ry (t) is the F-transform of A. Consequently, for all t > 0 and x, y E M,
A (x ) y )
(14. 43)
-y l2)
PROOF. Without loss of generality, we can also assume that (14.44)
lif III = 1.
For any t > 0, set u (t, ) = Pt f and consider the function
J(t)
Ilu(t,')112 = IIPtf112.
(14.45)
By Theorem 4.9(iv), we have for any t > 0
u(t, ) E dome C W0 (M) and
du
= -Lu E L2 (M), dt where A is the strong derivative in L2 and L. is the Dirichlet Laplace operator. It follows that function J (t) differentiable in (0, +oo) and
dJ _
d
(u U)L2 = 2(du u)L2 = -2 (Lu' U)L2 . dt dt On the other hand, by the Green formula (4.12),
dt
(Lu, u) = - (& u, u) = whence we obtain
fM
Du12 dii,
dJ = -_21 rIVU12 dµ. dt
M
(14.46)
14.6. ULTRACONTRACTNITY IMPLIES A FABER-KRAHN INEQUALITY
381
In particular, function J(t) is monotone decreasing. Let (0, T) be the maximal interval where J(t) > 0. For any t > T we have J(t) = 0, and (14.42) is trivially satisfied. Assuming in the sequel that t E (0, T) and applying Lemma 14.7 (with s = ), we obtain 2
lVul2
IM
2
dµ >
2
-9 UuH 2 A (411 U112
(14.47)
Theorem 7.19 and condition (14.44) imply Ilulkl < 1.
(14.48)
Combining (14.45), (14.46), (14.47), and (14.48), we obtain the following differential inequality for J on the interval (0, T):
dt < -JA ().
(14.49)
Consequently, the function f (t) ._
4
J(t)
satisfies on (0, T) the inequality
f'>fA(f). Resolving this inequality by Lemma 14.13, we conclude f (t) > y(t) whence J(t) _< 4/-y(t), which is equivalent to (14.42). The estimate (14.43) follows from (14.42) by Theorem 14.4 and Remark 14.5.
Exercises. 14.15. Prove that the claim of Theorem 14.19 remains true for any f E Ll (M).
14.6. Ultracontractivity implies a Faber-Krahn inequality Here we prove a theorem which is "almost" converse to 14.19. THEOREM 14.20. Let (M, g, jt) be a weighted manifold, and assume that the heat kernel satisfies the estimate
Pt (x, x) <
Y (t)
for all t > 0 and x E M, where ly (t) is a positive function on (0, +oo). Then M satisfies the Faber-Krahn inequality with the function A(v) defined by
A(v) = sup 1 log+ -y(t) (14.50) v t>o t If in addition -y c F5 then M satisfies the Faber-Krahn inequality with the function 2A(C5v) where A is the L-transform of 'y and Cs is the constant from Lemma 14.18. .
The proof of Theorem 14.20 will be preceded by a lemma.
14. ULTRACONTRACTIVE ESTIMATES AND EIGENVALUES
382
LEMMA 14.21. For any function f E Wo (M) such that If 112 = 1 and for any t > 0, the following inequality holds
of2d)
exp
(14.51)
< IIPtf(2
fM PROOF. Let {EA} be the spectral resolution of the Dirichlet Laplacian ,C. Then, for any f E dom (G) = Wo such that If 112 = 1 we have 00
1=IIf II2=f
dllEAfll2
and
f
I2
M I Vf
dtt
- fm (A`f) f dp = (Cf, f) = f
dII Eaf II2
(14.52)
(cf. Exercise 4.24). Since the measure dII EA f II2 has the total mass 1, we can apply Jensen's inequality which yields exp
(-
f'
fx 2tAdII Eaf II2) <_
exp (-2tA) dII Eaf II2. o
Using (14.52) and the identity 00
IIPtf
112
= f exp (-2tA) dII Eaf II2,
we-obtain
exp
(-2t
f
V
f l2
dµ)
IIPtf ll2,
which coincides with (14.51). Assume now that f E W0 and If 112 = 1. Since Co is dense W01, there is a sequence { fk} C Co such that fk -W f. Then ck := II fk II2 -* 1, which
wf
. The inequality (14.51) holds for each function Since both sides of (14.51) survive when passing to the limit in the norm 11 l l w' we obtain (14.51) for f.
implies that also ck 1 fk ck1 fk.
See Exercise 4.36 for an alternative proof. PROOF OF THEOREM 14.20. By Theorem 14.4, the heat semigroup Pt on M is L1 -+ L2 ultracontractive with the rate function 1 /7(2t), that is IIPt/2111-12 <-
(14.53)
-
Let Il C M be an open set with finite measure and f E Wo (S2) be a function such that If 112 = 1. Then also f E Wo (M) and we obtain by Lemma 14.21 and (14.53) exp
(_tfM Io f I2 dp)
<-
Il Pt/2f II2 <-
(t)
Ilf Ill.
14.6. ULTRACONTRACTIVITY IMPLIES A FABER-KRAHN INEQUALITY
Since by the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality 11f 11 2 jVf12dp
I.
>
f log+
383
µ(1l) it follows that 74).
Taking the infimum in f and the supremum in t, we obtain Arvin (11) >- A(p(p)),
(14.54)
which was to be proved. If y E F5 then by Lemma 14.18
A(v) >
2ACsv),
which proves the second claim. REMARK 14.22. It follows from (14.50) that A (v) > 0 provided sup y = co. By (14.54), we conclude that ..,,u, (SZ) > 0 for any open set SZ with finite measure.
Recall that by Theorem 14.19 if M satisfies the Faber-Krahn inequality with a function A E L then the heat kernel satisfies the estimate pt (x, x) < y (t/2)'
where -y is the F-transform of A. Hence, putting together Theorems 14.19 and 14.20 and assuming y c 1`6 (which is equivalent to A E La), we obtain essentially the equivalence pt (x, x) S
1'(t)
Amin(12) > A(I-t(l))
(14.55)
where all the constants factors are discarded. COROLLARY 14.23. For any weighted manifold and any n > 0, the following conditions are equivalent:
(a) The on-diagonal estimate pt (x, x) < Ct-"`'2, for all t > 0 and
xEM.
(b) The Faber-Krahn inequality with function A (v) = CV-2/"n where
c>0.
(c) The Nash inequality (14.7). (d) The Sobolev inequality (14.19), provided n > 2. PROOF. Indeed, the equivalence (a) 4* (b) follows from the above Re-
mark 14.22 because the A-transform of the function y (t) = C-ltn/2 is A (v) = cv-2/n. The equivalence (b) . (c) holds by Lemma 14.7 and Exercise 14.3, and (b)
(d) holds by Exercise 14.6.
REMARK 14.24. As it follows from Corollary 14.23 and Remark 14.6, all the equivalent conditions (a) - (d) are satisfied on Cartan-Hadamard manifolds and minimal submanifolds of IRS'
384
14. ULTRACONTRACTIVE ESTIMATES AND EIGENVALUES
14.7. Lower bounds of higher eigenvalues Here we prove a remarkable consequence of the equivalence (14.55) that
the Faber-Krahn inequality, that is, the lower bound Al (52) > A (µ (0)) for the bottom eigenvalue for any relatively compact open subsets 92 c M, implies a similar estimate for the higher eigenvalues Ak (9) > cA (CIL (Q)
subject to a mild restriction on the function A (see Corollary 14.28). THEOREM 14.25. Assume that the heat kernel on a weighted manifold M satisfies for all t > 0 the following estimate
fMPt (x, x) d/ (x) < p(t),
(14.56)
where p is a positive function on (0, -boo). Then the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplace operator C is discrete, and its k-th smallest eigenvalue )'k (M) satisfies for all k = 1, 2,... the inequality Ak (M) > sup log+ t
(14.57)
PROOF. Note that
f
d/ pt/2 (x, y)2 du (x) d/2 (y) = -M pt (x, x) (x) = JM M By Lemma 10.14 and (14.56), we have trace e-tL = trace P2/2 =
Iipt/2IIL2,2
Ilpt/2IIL2,2.
p (t)
and by Lemma 10.7 we conclude that the spectrum of L is discrete. Furthermore, by (10.14) we have 00
E e-tAk = trace
e-tG < p(t).
(14.58)
k=1
Since the sequence {AkJk 1 is arranged in the increasing order, the left hand side of (14.58) is bounded below by ke-tAk for any index k. Therefore, ke-tak < p(t) , which implies Ak >
1
log
k
p(t)
Since Ak > 0, the function log can t be replaced by log+; since t > 0 is arbitrary, we obtain (14.57) by taking the supremum in t. COROLLARY 14.26. If the heat kernel on M satisfies the estimate
pt (x, x) <
7 fit)
(14.59)
14.7. LOWER BOUNDS OF HIGHER EIGENVALUES
385
for all t > 0 and x E M, where y is a function of the class r5 then, for any open set Q C M with finite measure the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplace operator Lo is discrete and, for any k > 1, (14.60) At, (I) ? 2A (c5 F (Il) `, where A is the L-transform of y and C5 is the constant from Lemma 14.18.
Applying (14.60) for k = 1, we obtain the alternative proof of Theorem 14.20.
PROOF. We have
d, pt'(x,x)dµ(x) < 7t) so that S2 as a manifold satisfies the hypotheses of Theorem 14.25 with function P (t) =
lL (c) 'Y (t)
By Theorem 14.25, we obtain that the spectrum of Ln is discrete and 1
Ak A >_ SUP
t
log+ t)
If y E F5 then by Lemma 14.18 we obtain that
A (C) sup log> t>ot p( 1
ky fit)
2
)
which finishes the proof. EXAMPLE 14.27. Let us show that, for any weighted n-dimensional manifold M and for any relatively compact open set Sl C M, there exist constant c, C > 0 such that Ak
(U)
k
?C
l
1/(2v)
(14.61)
for all open U c Il and k > Ctc (U), where o- is the same as in Theorem 7.6, that is, the smallest integer larger than n/4 (cf. Example 10.16). Indeed, it follows from Theorem 7.6, that, for any f E L2 (S2), IIPPf11. < 0 (t)11f112
where B (t) = C (1 + t-7) and C = C (Z). Hence, the semigroup {Po} is.
L2 .+ L°° ultracontractive with the rate function 0 (t), which implies by Theorem 14.4 that Pt" (x, x) < B2 (t/2) < < Y( ) where
y(t)=C'
t21,
t < 1,
t>1.
14. ULTRACONTRACTIVE ESTIMATES AND EIGENVALUES
386
As was shown in Example 14.16, y E P8. Evaluating A from (14.27), we obtain A (v) > cv-11(2a) for v < vo,
for some c, vo > 0. By Corollary 14.26 we obtain that (14.61) is true whenever C8 µ(k )) < vp, which is equivalent to k >_ Cµ (U) with C = Cavo 1 As we will see later, (14.61) holds with or = n/4 (see Corollary 15.12). COROLLARY 14.28. Assume that M satisfies the Faber-Krahn inequality with a function A E Lb. Then, for any open set Sl C M with finite measure,
the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplace operator Lo is discrete and satisfies for all k > 1 the estimate
Ak (S) > A
(C8P))
(14.62)
where C8 > 0 depends only on 8.
pt (x, x) <
4
(t/2) for all t > 0 and x E M, where y is the I'-transform of A. Since the function
y (t) = 4y (t/2) belongs to r, we obtain by Corollary 14.26 the estimate (14.60) with function A that is the L-transform of ry, whence (14.62) follows (cf. Exercise 14.10).
14.8. Faber-Krahn inequality on direct products Here we give another example of application of the equivalence (14.55). THEOREM 14.29. If X and Y are two weighted manifolds satisfying the Faber-Krahn inequalities with functions Al, A2 E L8, respectively, then the product manifold M = X x Y satisfies the Faber-Krahn inequality with the function
v - 4A (C8v) where
A(v) := inf (Al (u) -i- A2(w))
(14.63)
vw=v
and C8 > 0 depends only on J.
PROOF. By Theorem 14.19, the heat kernels on X and Y admit the estimates ptX (x1, x2)
yl(/2)
and pt (y1, y2)
y2(/2)'
for all X1, x2 E X and yl, y2 E Y, where yl and y2 are the r-transforms of Al and A2, respectively.
14.8. FABER-KRAHN INEQUALITY ON DIRECT PRODUCTS
387
The heat kernel pt on M is the product of pX and pt in the following sense: if zi = (xi, yi) E Ml x M2 where i = 1, 2 then Pt(zl,z2) = Pt (x1,x2)Pt (Y1,Y2)
(see Theorem 9.11 and Exercise 7.41). Hence, we obtain for all zl, z2 E M, pt(zl, z2)
71(t/2)'Y2(t/2)
7(t/2)'
where y = yly2. By hypothesis, the functions yl and y2 are in the class I's; then y is in F512 by Exercise 14.11. Therefore, by Theorem 14.20, M satisfies the Faber-Krahn inequality with the function v H 4A(Cbv)
where A is the L-transform of y. We are left to show that A (v) > A (v) where A is defined by (14.63). If v < supy and, hence, v = y (t) for some t then by (14.27) and (14.63) A(v) = A('Y (t)) =
ly
I
-/ 11
A, (-y, (t)) + A2('Y2 (t)) > A (v)
.
yl + 72 = y If v > sup-/ then we can choose numbers u > sup yl and w > sup y2 such that uw = v. Since Al (u) = A2 (w) = 0, it follows from (14.63) that A (v) = 0. Hence, in the both cases, A (v) > A (v), which finishes the proof.
EXAMPLE 14.30. Let Al (u) = clu-21n and A2 (w) = c2w-2/m. Then (14.63) gives
A (v) =uw=v inf (c1u_2'n + c2 w-2/m lJ =
cv-2/(n+m),
where c = c (Cl, c2, n, m) > 0. Since both Al, A2 belong to LS for some 6 > 0, we conclude that X x Y satisfies the Faber-Krahn inequality with the function const v-2/(n+m) EXAMPLE 14.31. Let us show how the above example allows to prove the
Faber-Krahn inequality in Rn with function A (v) = cv-2/n by induction in n. In R1 any open set SI is a disjoint union of open intervals {Ik}. Set rk -= p (Ik), where y is the Lebesgue measure. Then we have, for some c > 0, .min (S2) > inf )tmin (Ik) = inf
-
> cp
(S2)-2
Exercises 10.6 and 11.25), which proves the above claim in the case n = 1. Assuming that the Faber-Krahn inequality in Rn holds with function (cf.
A (v) = c tv-2/n, we obtain by Example 14.30 that it holds in R7L+1 = F xR1 with function A (v) = const v-2(n+l), which was to be proved.
388
14. ULTRACONTRACTIVE ESTIMATES AND EIGENVALUES
EXAMPLE 14.32. Let X satisfy the Faber-Krahn inequality with the function Al (u) = clu-2/n; for example, X may be any Cartan-Hadamard manifold of dimension n. Let Y be any compact manifold of dimension m. By Exercise 15.2, Y satisfies the Faber-Krahn inequality with the function A2 (w) - ( C2w-2/m, w < wo, W>wo, jll 0, which belongs to L6 by Exercise 14.9. By (14.63), we have
A (v) = min
ui fv clu-2/', w>wo
r v-2/(n.+m)
< C {l v-2/n,
in f v w<wo
(ciu2'n + c2w-2/m}l
v < v° i v > vo,
(14.64)
with some c, vo > 0. Hence, we conclude by Theorem 14.29 than X x Y satisfies the Faber-Krahn inequality with the function (14.64).
Notes The proof of the classical Faber-Krahn theorem in R' as well as its extensions to S" and 1H1' can be found in the book by I.Chavel [51] that is a good general reference for the properties of the eigenvalues of the Laplace operator on manifolds.
The fact that the ultracontractivity of the heat semigroup is equivalent to a heat kernel on-diagonal upper bound is widely known. Moreover, the argument that is used to prove the upper bound, can be turned into the proof of the existence of the heat kernel in a rather general setting - see [49], [96], [163], [184].
The method of obtaining the heat kernel upper bound from the Nash inequality, which was used in of Theorem 14.19, goes back to a seminar paper of J. Nash [292]. The equivalence of the Sobolev inequality and the heat kernel upper bound
Pt (x, x) < Ct "12
(14.65)
was first proved by N.Varopoulos [353], [355]. The equivalence of the classical Nash inequality and (14.65) was proved by Carlen, Kusuoka and Stroock in [49]. The equivalence of the Faber-Krahn inequalities and the heat kernel upper bounds in full generality (Theorems 14.19 and 14.20) was proved in [146]. A particular case that (14.65) is equivalent to Al (SZ) > cµ
(S2)_2/"
(14.66)
was obtained independently by G.Caxron [50]. The equivalence of the generalized Nash inequality and the heat kernel upper bounds in full generality was proved by T.Coulhon [77]. In particular, Lemma 14.21 is taken from [77]. A direct derivation of various types of Nash and Sobolev inequalities each from others can be found in [17].
The discreteness of the spectrum in the setting of Theorem 14.25 was proved by L. Gross [188]. The fact that the lower estimates for Ai (1) implies non-trivial lower estimates for Ak (SZ) (Corollary 14.28) was proved in [146]. Further results in this direction can be found in [67] and [184].
We do not use here a geometric tool for obtaining Faber-Krahn inequalities: the isoperimetric inequalities of the form a (8f2) > F (µ (S2)) ,
(14.67)
NOTES
389
where 0 is any relatively compact open subset of M with smooth boundary 8f and a- is the induced measure on 0& , and F is a non-negative function on [0, +oo). For example, in R' the isoperimetric inequality (14.67) holds with the function n-I F (v) = cv (14.68) (see, for example, [53], [196]). By the Cheeger inequality, if (14.67) holds with function F such that F (v) /v is monotone decreasing then the Faber-Krahn inequality holds with function A(v)= (F(,,))2 (cf. [56], [146]). For example, the isoperimetric inequality with the function (14.68) implies the Faber-
Krahn inequality (14.66). This can be used to prove the Faber-Krahn inequality (14.66) on Cartan-Hadamard manifolds and minimal submanifolds of RN as was mentioned in Remark 14.6, because the corresponding isoperimetric inequalities on such manifolds are known - see [203], [325] for Cartan-Hadamard manifolds, [44] for minimal submanifolds, and [67], [154] for the both classes. A far reaching extension of Cheeger's inequality - Maz'ya's inequality, and its applications can be found in [153], [268], [269], [270]. Further relations of isoperimetric inequalities and heat kernels can be found in [54], [55], [76], [153]. Faber-Krahn inequalities on direct products were proved in [83] without using heat kernels. Isoperimetric inequalities on direct products were proved in [135], [278]. A powerful isoperimetric inequality on groups and covering manifolds was proved by T.Coulhon and L.Saloff-Coste [86], which provides plenty of examples of manifolds with explicit functions F and A in the isoperimetric and Faber-Krahn inequalities, respectively.
CHAPTER 15
Pointwise Gaussian estimates I In this Chapter we obtain the pointwise Gaussian upper bounds of the heat kernel, that is, the estimates containing the factor exp (- ` The key ingredient is a mean value inequality that is deduced from the FaberKrahn inequality. The mean value inequality enables one to obtain upper bounds for a certain weighted L2-norm of the heat kernel, which then implies the pointwise estimates. In contrast to Chapter 14, the Faber-Krahn inequality is assumed to hold in some balls rather than on the entire manifold.
In the core part of this chapter, we use from the previous chapters only the properties of Lipschitz functions (Section 11.2) and the integrated maximum principle (Section 12.1).
15.1. L2-mean value inequality Consider a weighted manifold N = 1[8 x M with the product measure dv = dtdp. Let I be an interval in R and 1 be an open set in M so that the
cylinder I x SZ can be considered as a subset of N. A function u : I x fZ -4 R is called a subsolution to the heat equation if u E C2 (I x SZ) and
at
(15.1)
THEOREM 15.1. Let B (x, R) be a relatively compact ball in M and assume that, for some a, n > 0, the Faber-Krahn inequality A1(U) > ap (U)-21,,
(15.2)
holds for any open set U C B(x, R). Then, for any T > 0 and for any subsolution u (t, y) of the heat equation in the cylinder C = (0, T] x B (x, R), we have
U' (T, x)
Caa-n/2
miR)
n+2
(15.3)
where C = C(n).
Although n does not have to be the dimension of M, in most applications of Theorem 15.1 one has n = dim M. We prove first two lemmas. 391
15. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES I
392
LEMMA 15.2. Let 0 be an open subset of M and To < T. Let rl (t, x) be a Lipschitz function in the cylinder C = [To, T] X Sl such that rl (t, ) is supported in some compact set K C 0 for any t. Let u be a subsolution to the heat equation in C and set v = (u - 8)+ with some 8 _> 0. Then the following inequality holds: 1
[f v2772 (t, .) dA
T
] t=To
+ f to (v77)12 dv < C
v2 (1V7 I2 + 117
J
I) dv.
C
(15.4)
2
In particular, if 7(To, )
f
0 then
v2772 (t, ) dµ < 2
r
J
v2 (!V7712
a'1,
+
'l at ) dv
(15.5)
for any t c [To, T], and
<J 'U2 (IVql2 +
J
077 77
(15.6)
at ) dv.
PROOF. Since u (t,) E Wl0 (92), by Exercise 5.8 we have v (t, ) E Wlo, (Sl) and
Vv = 1{u>e}Du = 1{v00}Vu, which implies
(Vv, Vu) = Ivvl2 and vVu = vVv. Since 77 (t, ) E Lipo (S2), by Exercise 11.13 we have vrl2 E Wo (S2) for any fixed time t and V (vq2) = vV772 +7J2Vv = 2v7V77 +772Vv,
whence (Vu,V (vr72)) = 2vr7(Vv,V 7) +1721Vv12.
Multiplying the inequality (15.1) by v?72 and integrating over C, we obtain
fv772dv at
T
<
ff(Lu)v772ddt
- Jfnf (Vu, V (v712))dpdt 40, = - Jr (2vv, Vv) + I Vv12) dv, 772
where we have used the Green formula of Lemma 4.4. Since 2v77(Vv, Vv) + 772 Iov l2
=
IV (v17)12 1- V2 10812
,
we obtain auv772dv c
8t
<-
I
IV(v71)12dv+ f v2IV7712dv. c
(15.7)
15.1. L2-MEAN VALUE INEQUALITY
393
For any fixed x, all functions u, v, 77 are Lipschitz in t E [To, T]. Therefore, using the integration by parts formula for Lipschitz functions (see Exercise 2.25) we obtain, for any fixed x E 1, ate)
=
2
TO
T To
T (772
IV
2
2
2
a
Integrating this identity over 9 and combining with (15.7), we obtain (15.4). The estimate (15.5) follows from (15.4) if one replaces T by t, and (15.6) is an obvious consequence of (15-4). LEMMA 15.3. Under the hypotheses of Theorem 15.1, consider the cylinders
Ck=[Tk,T] XB(x,Rk), k=0,1, where 0 < R1 < Ro < R and 0 < To < T1 < T (see Fig. 15.1).
Choose
01 > Bo > 0 and set
Jk =
(u - Bk)+ dv.
JCk
Then the following inequality holds
CJo1+2/n
J1 <
(15.8)
a61+2/,-, (0 - Bo)4 n
where C = C (n) and
8=min(Ti - To,(Ro - R1)2) PROOF. Replacing function u by u - 0o we can assume that 0o = 0 and rename 81 to 0. Consider function rl (t, y) = cp (t) 0 (y) where
(t-To)+
fi(t)= T1-To
1,
A1
=
t > T1,
TT, To < t < Ti, 0,
(15.9)
t < To
and
- d (x, y))+ n R1/4 - R1/2
(R1/4
(y)
where RA = \R1 + (1 - ).) Ro. Obviously, supp
1,
= B (x, R1/4) is a compact subset of B (x, Ro) because the ball B (x, Ro) is relatively compact by hypothesis.
15. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES I
394
To
-
---- -- -
----B((Ro)
FIGURE 15.1. Cylinders CO and C1
Applying the estimate (15.6) of Lemma 15.2 in the cylinder CO for func-
tion v = u+ with t E [TI,T] and noticing that cp (t) = 1 in this range and = 1 in B (x,R1/2), we obtain
f
jCO
( Rl`2) u+ (t, ) d1t <_ 2
/
dv <
u+ I IV?712 + n at
6 J,,,
(15.10)
\\\
where we have also used that I V1
(Ro
(Ri/4 - R1/2)2
16
16
- R1)2
b
and a17
1 1
'' at For any t E [T1, T], consider the set
Ut = { y E B (x, R3/4) : u (t, y) > 01
so that by (15.10) (Ut
B2
f
B(x R3/4)
u+(t,.)dµ:
p2 F2
f
B(x R112)
u+(t,.)dµ<- 02J 20r (15.11)
15.1. L2-MEAN VALUE INEQUALITY
395
Consider now a different function 0:
_
(R3/4 - d (x, y)) +
R3/4 - R1
(y)
Al.
(15.12)
Applying (15.6) for function v = (u - B)+ with rl (t, x) = cp (t) 0 (y) where co is given by (15.9) and 0 is given by (15.12), we obtain
oCo
dv<
j IV(vr7)12dv<
-
1
v2dv< Ca
-
Jo.
(15.13)
For a fixed t, the function vrl (t, y) can take a non-zero value only if y E B (x, R3/4) and u (t, y) > 0. It follows that supp (vi (t, )) C Ut,
whence vrl (t, ) E Lipo (1) for any open set 1 containing L. Choose such an 1 with additional conditions S1 C B (x, Ro) and p (0) : 2µ (Ut) <- 82SJo, where we have used (15.11) (still assuming that t E [T1, T]). Then we obtain by the variational principle and (15.2) fB(x,Ro)
> Amin (St) J
IV (vi)12 (t, ) dp
(vr7)2 (t, ) dl.G (x,Ro)
> ap (q)-2/n f 2/n
2
> a(68)
(v)2 (t, ') d(x,Ro)
Jo2/nI B (x,Ri )
where we have used that r) (t, y) = 1 for t E [T1, T] and y E B (x, Rj). Integrating this inequality from T1 to T and using (15.13), we obtain 17 b>-
fTf i
V (v) I2 dv (x, Ro)
2/n
2
> a 168
f
Jo n
T
ff I
e2j2/n
a(68}
v2 (t, ) dudt (x ,Rl)
Jo 2/n J1,
whence (15.8) follows.
11
PROOF OF THEOREM 15.1. Consider a sequence of cylinders Ck = [Tk, T] x B (x, Rk) ,
15. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES I
396
where {Tk}k o is a strictly increasing sequence such that To = 0 and Tk < T/2 for all k, {Rk}ko is a strictly decreasing sequence such that Ro = R and Rk > R/2 for all k. Assume also that (15.14) (Rk - Rk+1)2 = Tk+1 - Tk =: sk. In particular, the sequence of cylinders {Ck}k o is nested, Co = C and Ck contains [T/2, T) x B (x, R/2) for all k. Fix some 0 > 0 and set Bk = (r1 - 2-(k+1)) 0 and
Jk=J (u-0k)2dv. Ck
Clearly, the sequence {Jk}ko is decreasing. We will find 0 such that Jk-+0 as k -3 oo, which will implies that T
(u - 0)2 dv = 0. T/2 B(x,R/2)
In particular, it follows that u (T, x) < 0 and, hence, u+ (T, x) < 02. For an appropriate choice of 0, this will lead us to (15.3). Applying Lemma 15.3 for two consecutive cylinders Ck D Ck+1, we obtain n
CJ1+2/n
Jk+1
-
C'16k/nJ1+2/k
__ ask+2/n
(Ok+1 -
0,,)4/n
.15 ) (15.15)
ask+2/nB4/n
where C' = 162/nC. Assume that 8k is chosen so that for any k C'16
-k/n Jp /n
aSk1+2/nB4/n
_
1
(15.16)
16'
We claim that then
Jk < 16-kJo, (15.17) which in particular yields Jk -+ 0. Indeed, for k = 0 (15.17) is trivial. If (15.17) is true for some k then (15.15) and (15.16) imply Jk+1 <
C'16k/n (16-kJo)2/n ask+2/nB4/n
A
C'16-k/nJp/n abk+2/nB4/n
Jk =
116 Jk
whence Jk+l < 16-(k+1) Jo. The equation (15.16) can be used to define 8k, that is, C'161-k/TJo/nl n+2+2
sk =
a84/n
C"16-n+2 Jo+2
n
4
(15.18)
an+20n+2
where C" = (16C') n+2 , but we must make sure that this choice of 6k does
not violate the conditions Tk < T/2 and Rk > R/2. Since by (15.14) k-1
k-1
Tk = E si and Rk = R i=o
sk, i=o
15.2. FABER-KRAHN INEQUALITY IN BALLS
397
the sequence {bk} must satisfy the inequalities 00
00
6k < T12 and
VS,, < R/2. k=0
k=0
Substituting 8k from (15.18) and observing that {bk} is a decreasing geometric sequence, we obtain that the following inequalities must be satisfied: °
1/2
2
2
J n+2
J° n+2+2
4
< c2T and
n
4
w_2 8 +2
a n+2+2 0 n+2
< cR,
for some c = c (n) > 0. There conditions can be satisfied by choosing 0 as follows:
a-n/2J0
62
(c.../)
n+2
a_n/2Jo
and B > 2
(cR) n+2
Taking 02
a-n/2Jo
=
cn+2 min (VT, R)
n+2
and recalling that u+ (T, x) < 02, we finish the proof.
Exercises. 15.1. Fix xo E M, R > r > 0 and let the ball B (xo, R) be relatively compact. Assume also that, for some a, n > 0, the Faber-Krahn inequality Amin(U) > aµ (U)-2/n , (15.19) holds for any open set U C B(xo, r). Let u (t, x) be a non-negative bounded C2-function (0,T) x B (xo, R), where T > 0, such that
(i) L- 1µu < 0,
(ii) u (t, ) --> 0 as t -3 0 in L2 (B (xo, R)). Prove that, for all x E B (xo, r/2) and t E (0, T),
i U (t, x) < CIIUIIL- p (B (t)n R))
max
(1, )
n
max (',) e
t 4
(15.20)
where b= R- r and C= C (n).
15.2. Faber-Krahn inequality in balls Here we show how the local geometry of a manifold and the mean value inequality of Theorem 15.1 can be used to give an alternative proof (of the improved version) of the key estimate (7.18) of Theorem 7.6.
THEOREM 15.4. On any weighted manifold (M, g,,u) of dimension n there is a continuous function r (x) > 0 and a constant a = a (n) > 0 such that any ball B (x, r (x)) is relatively compact and, for any open set U C B (x, r (x)), Amin (U) >_ as
(U)-2/n
.
(15.21)
15. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES I
398
PROOF. For any point x E M, one can always choose p = p (x) so small that the ball B (x, p (x)) is relatively compact and is contained in a chart. Furthermore, reducing p further, one can achieve that the Riemannian metric g and the Euclidean metric e in this ball are in a fixed finite ratio, say
2e
Then the Faber-Krahn inequality (14.5) in JR' implies the Faber-Krahn inequality (15.21) in B (x, p (x)) with n = dim M and with a fixed constant a = a (n). To make a continuous function from p (x), denote by po (x) the supremum of all possible values of p (x) such that the above conditions are satisfied, capped by 1 (the latter is to ensure the finiteness of po (x)). Let us show that the function po (x) is continuous. Indeed, if y E B (x, p0 (x)) then the ball B (y, p (y)) satisfies the above conditions with p (y) = Po (x) - d (x, y), which implies Po (y) ? PO (x) - d (x, y) .
Swapping x and y, we obtain I Po (x) - Po (y) i < d (x, y),
which proves the continuity of p0 (x).
Finally, setting r (x) = po (x), we obtain the required function r (x).
a
2
REMARK 15.5. If M has bounded. geometry (see Example 11.12) then the function r (x) is uniformly bounded below by some s > 0. COROLLARY 15.6. Under the hypotheses of Theorem 15.1, for any f E
L2 (M) and for all t > 0, (R-n/2 + t-n/4) IIf IIL2,
sup IPt f 1:5 Ca-n/4 B(x,R/2)
(15.22)
where C=C(n). PROOF. The function u (t, ) = Pt f satisfies the hypotheses of Theorem 15.1. Since II u (t, .) IIL2 5 IIf IIL2, we obtain 2 u2 dv < t II f IIL2
It
( x, R)
I
whence
u+ (t, x) <
-n/2t min
R)n+2
IIf IIL2 <
Ca-n/2 (R-m + t-n/21 11
f
11 L2 2.
15.3. THE WEIGHTED L2-NORM OF HEAT KERNEL
399
Applying the same argument to u = -Pt f , we obtain a similar estimate for I Pt f (x) I2. Finally, replacing x by any point x' E B (x, R/2) and applying the above estimates in the ball B (x', R/2) instead of B (x, R), we obtain (15.22).
El
Now we can improve the inequality (7.18) of Theorem 7.6 as follows. COROLLARY 15.7. For any weighted manifold M of dimension n and for
any set K C= M, there exists a constant C such that, for any f E L2 (M) and all t > 0, (15.23) sup I Pt f I < C (1 + t-n/4) If 42(M). K
PROOF. Let r (x) be the function from Theorem 15.4. Then any ball B (x, r (x)) satisfies the hypotheses of Theorem 15.1, and we obtain by Corol-
lary 15.6 that, for all x E M, IPtf (x) I <_ C (r
(x)-n/2
+t-n/4) IIfIIL2,
where C = C (n). Replacing r (x) by infK r (x), which is positive by the
0
continuity of r (x), we obtain (15.23).
15.3. The weighted L2-norm of heat kernel For any D > 0, define the function ED (t, x) on R+ x M by
(d2(xY))
ED (t, x) = fM
da (y) .
(15.24)
This quantity may take value oo. For example, in R' we have ED (t, x) = 00
for anyD<2. If D > 2 then the function
(t y) =
d2 (x, y)
Dt
satisfies (12.1). It follows from Theorem 12.1 that ED (t, x) is a non-increasing
function of t > 0, because we can represent it in the form ED (t, x) =
fM
(
P2 e t)dp
where 0 < s < t and f = ps (x, ) E L2. Furthermore, by (12.3) ED (t, x) < ED (to, x) e 2Amin(M)(t-ta)
(15.25)
for all t>to>0. One can naturally extend the definition (15.24) to D = oo by setting
Ea, (t, x) = fMt) dN- (y) = pet (x, x) . Then (15.25) remains true also for D = oo (cf. (10.84) and Exercise 10.29). Observe also that ED (t, x) is non-increasing in D E (0, +oo].
15. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES I
400
THEOREM 15.8. Let B (x, r) be a relatively compact ball on a weighted manifold M. Assume that the following Faber-Krahn inequality holds: for any open set U C B(x, r), A1(U) > ap (U)-21n, (15.26)
where a, n are positive constants. Then, for any t > 0 and D E (2, -boo]
C (ab)- n/2
ED (t, x)
(15.27)
min(t, r2)n/2
where C = C(n) and S = min (D - 2, 1).
By Theorem 15.4, for any x E M there exists r > 0 that satisfies the hypotheses of Theorem 15.8 with n = dim M. In particular, this implies the following statement: COROLLARY 15.9. On any weighted manifold M and for all t > 0, x E
M, and D > 2, ED (t, x) < oo. The main part of the proof of Theorem 15.8 is contained in the following lemma.
LEMMA 15.10. Under the conditions of Theorem 15.8, set
p (y) = (d (x, y) - r)+ Then, for- all t > 0, 2
Ca-n/2
(y)1) dP, (y) f pt (x, y) exp CP M 2t where C = C (n).
min (t, r2)nl2
(15.28)
PROOF. By Theorem 12.1, the left hand side of (15.28) is a non-increasing
function of t > 0. Hence, it suffices to prove (15.28) for t < r2. Fix a function f E L2 (M) and set u = Pt f . Applying the mean value inequality of Theorem 15.1 in cylinder [t/2, t] x B (x, r), we obtain u2(t, x) <
t
C
t1 n
2
t
f u2 (s, y) dtz (y) ds.
(15.29)
Consider the function (s, y) =
P 2 (y)
2(s-t)'
defined for 0 < s < t and y E M. Since function
vanishes in B (x, r), we
can rewrite (15.29) as follows:
u2(t, x) <
l+n/
t
f
f u2e6dltds.
0 B(x,r)
(15.30)
15.3. THE WEIGHTED L2-NORM OF HEAT KERNEL
401
Function obviously satisfies the condition (12.1) of Theorem 12.1. Hence, the function
J (s) :=
JM
u2 (s, .) e6(s, )dm
is non-increasing in s E [0, t), in particular, J (s) < J (0) for all s E [0, t). It follows from (15.30) that u2 (t, x) < C (at) -n/2 J (0). Since 2
J (0) =
(_) dt,
fMf2
we obtain u2
f
(at)-n/2
(t, x) < C
f2 exp
M
2
(- pt) dµ.
(15.31)
Now choose function f as follows f (y) = pt (x, y) exp (p 2ty))
(y)
where cp is any cutoff function. Applying (15.31) with this function f, we obtain 2
Pt
(at)-n/2
tcpdµ) < C
pt (x, ) exp
fm
(x, )eXp
M
p2dp.
c
Using the inequality Sot < cp and cancelling by the integral in the right hand side, we obtain
f
M
\
Pt (x, ) exp ('02 ) cpdµ < C
(at)-n/z
whence (15.28) follows. PROOF OF THEOREM 15.8. Since ED (t, x) is decreasing in D, it suffices
to prove (15.27) for D < 3. Since ED (t, x) is decreasing in t, it suffices to prove (15.27) for t < r2
Set J = D - 2 and observe that
St < r, so that the Faber-Krahn
inequality (15.26) holds in B (x, St) . Applying Lemma 15.10 with place of r, we obtain
f
((d(xY)_)2\
-n/2
,
M Pt (x, y) eXp
2t
+
dµ (y)
Using the elementary inequality a2
t +
b2
s
St in
> (a+b)2
t+s
- (6t)n/2
(15.32)
15. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES I
402
which is true for real a, b and positive t, s, we obtain
(d(x,y)_)2
+ (
2t whence (d (x , y )
-
l
dt)
2t
bt) 2
d2 (x, y)
it
(2+8)t
2
+
(x, y) _ - d2 Dt
1
Substituting into (15.32), we obtain (15.27).
15.4. Faber-Krahn inequality in unions of balls In this Section we demonstrate the heat kernel techniques for merging the Faber-Krahn inequalities, that is, obtaining the Faber-Krahn inequality in a union Sl of a family of balls assuming that it holds in each ball separately. At the same token, we obtain non-trivial lower estimate for higher eigenvalues, similarly to Corollary 14.26 but in a different setting. THEOREM 15.11. Let a, n, r be positive numbers and {xi}iE, be a family of points on M where I is any index set. Assume that, for any i E I the ball B (xi, r) is relatively compact and, for any open set U C B (xi, r), > (U)-2/n . (15.33) A (U) ap Let 52 be the union of all the balls B(xi, 2r), i E I. Then, for any open set U C 52 with finite measure (see Fig. 15.2), the spectrum of .CU is discrete and
Ak (U) > ca (,a
k
2/n
(U)
for any k such that k > Ca-n/2r-' m (U) where c, C are positive constants depending only on n. In particular,
µ (U) < C-1an/2rn = Al (U) > cap (U)-2/n
PROOF. If x E 5Z then x E B(xi, 2r) for some i E I. Therefore, B(x, 2r) c B(xi, r) which implies that the Faber-Krahn inequality (15.33) holds for any open set U C B(x, jr). By Theorem 15.8 with D = oo, we obtain Gra-n/2
A (x, x) <
(15.34)
min (t, r2)n/2 Fix now an open set U C S2 with finite measure. It follows from (15.34) that sup pt (x, x) < xEU
Ca-n/2
(t_2 +
r) J
=
I 7 (t)
15.4. FABER-KRAHN INEQUALITY IN UNIONS OF BALLS
403
FIGURE 15.2. Set U where
C-1 an/2 I
- t-n/2 + r-y,,
By Corollary 14.26, the spectrum of LU is discrete and (15.35)
k
where c = c (n) > 0 and A is the L-transform of y. If v = y (t) for some t < r2 then
v>
(at)n/2
2C
'
and by (14.27)
n
t-n/2-1
(t) = n2 t-n/2 A (v) = y' 'y (t) + r-n
4t
> cav -2/n'
where c = c (n) > 0. The condition t < r2 is equivalent to y (t) < (2C)-1 an/2r' . Hence, we conclude that v<
(2C)-1 an/2rn
= A (v) > cav-2/Th,
which together with (15.35) finishes the proof. COROLLARY 15.12. On any connected weighted manifold M and for any
relatively compact open set S2 C M, such that M \ S2 is non-empty, there exists a > 0 such for any open subset U C f2 and any k c N, k Ak
(U) > a
l2/n
\µ (U))
(15.36) '
where n = dim M. In particular, the Faber-Krahn inequality holds in S2 with
function A (v) = av-2/n.
15. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES I
404
PROOF. Since the function r (x) from Theorem 15.15 is continuous, we have
R:= inf r (x) > 0. XED
By Theorem 15.15, the family of ball {B (x, R)}.EQ satisfies the hypotheses of Theorem 15.11 with n = dim M. By Theorem 15.11, we obtain l2 /n (U)
>_ co
(
\µ(U))
where co = co (n) > 0, provided k satisfies k > Cp (U), where C = C (n, 0). Since M \ S2 is non-empty, by Theorem 10.22 we have Al (S2) > 0. Therefore, if k < Cp.c (U) then
(U)' A l
k
1
Al
(C
Y
1
k
2/n
2/n
= cl (A(U))
(U))
where cl = al (S2) C-2/n. Hence, (15.36) holds with a = min (co, cl) for all
k>1.
El
Exercises. 15.2. Prove that the Faber-Krahn inequality holds on a weighted n-dimensional manifold M with function A (v) _ { Cv-2/n, V < V0, v > vo, 0, where c, vo are some positive constants, provided M belongs to one of the following classes: (a) M is compact; (b) M has bounded geometry (see Example 11.12). REMARK. If M is non-compact and has bounded geometry then the Faber-Krahn function A can be improved by setting A (v) = cv-2 for v > vo - see [148].
15.5. Off-diagonal upper bounds Our main result in this section is Theorem 15.14 that provides Gaussian upper bounds of the heat kernel assuming the validity of the Faber-Krahn inequalities in some balls. It is preceded by a lemma showing how the weighted norm ED (t, x), defined by (15.24), can be used to obtain pointwise upper bounds of the heat kernel.
LEMMA 15.13. For any weighted manifold M, for any D > 0 and all x, y E M, t > to > 0, the following inequality is true: 2
Pt (X, Y) <
VE D
x)ED(2to, y) exp C-2Dt
- . (t - to))
(15.37)
where p = d(x, y) and A = Amin(M).
In particular, setting t = to we obtain Pt(x,y)
ED(2t,x EED(2t,y)exp(-d2Dt ))
(15.38) °
15.5. OFF-DIAGONAL UPPER BOUNDS
405
PROOF. For any points x, y, z E M, let us denote a = d(y, z),
=
d(x, z) and 'y = d(x, y) (see Fig. 15.3). By the triangle inequality, we have a2 -}- UQ2 > 12,2. 2
FIGURE 15.3. Distances a, /3, y
Applying the semigroup identity (7.51), we obtain pt(x,y)
fM
pt/2(x, z)pt/2(y, z)dp(z) fMPt/2(x,z)eDPt/2(Y,z)eDte- n dp(z) 1
14
2
z)e Dt
dp(z)\
)
C
fm(P 12(x1
=
ED(Zt1x)ED(2t,y)eXp
2
(fm
z)e Dt dµ(z)) e Dt
Pt/2(y,
(d2 x,
-
2Dt)
,
which proves (15.38). Combining (15.38) with (15.25), we obtain (15.37). THEOREM 15.14. Let M be a weighted manifold and let {B (xi, ri)}iEI be a family of relatively compact balls in M, where I is an arbitrary index set. Assume that, for any i E I, the Faber-Krahn inequality holds (15.39)
Amin (U) > aig (U)-2/n
for any open set U C B (xi, ri), where ai > 0. Let S2 be the union of all the balls B(xi, Zri), i E I. Then, for all x, y E 5 and t > to > 0,
C(n)
(1+-)n/2exp
(-4t
pt(x,y) (aia3 min(to, ra) min(to, r ))
-A(t-to)
n/4
(15.40)
15. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES I
406
where p = d (x, y), i and j are the indices such that x E B(xi, 2ri) and y E B(xj, 2r.7), and A _ Amin (M).
PROOF. If x c B(xi, 2ri) then B(x, 2ri) C B (xi, ri) so that the FaberKrahn inequality (15.39) holds for any open set U C B(x, 2ri). Applying Theorem 15.8, we obtain, for all t > 0 and D > 2, ED (t'
x)
(aiJ)-n/2
min(t, r,)n/2
Using a similar inequality for ED (t, y), we obtain by (15.37) CS-n/2
pt(x,y) C
exp { - 2Dt - Amin (M) (t - to) I \ (aiaj min(to, r?) min(to,
(15.41)
1
Setting here
8=
(i+)1
(15.42)
and, consequently, D = 2 + S, we obtain that
so that the term
p2
p2
4t
2Dt
S p2
4D t
C
2t in (15.41) can be replaced by 4t . Substituting (15.42)
into (15.41), we obtain (15.40).
COROLLARY 15.15. On any weighted manifold M there is a continuous
function r (x) > 0 such that, for all x, y c- M and t > to > 0,
c (1 + -) n/2 exp (- 4t - A (t - to)) Pt (x, y) <
min(to, r (x)2)n/4 min(to, r
(15.43)
(y)2)n/4
where n = dim M, p = d (x, y), A = Amin (M), and C = C (n).
PROOF. Let r (x) be the function from Theorem 15.4. Then the family {B (x, r (x))}xEM of balls satisfies the hypotheses of Theorem 15.14, and (15.43) follows from (15.40).
COROLLARY 15.16. For any weighted manifold, and for all x, y E M,
limsup4tlogpt(x,y) < -d2(x, y).
(15.44)
t-+o+
PROOF. Indeed, setting in (15.43) t = to < min (r (x), r (y)), we obtain t log pt (x, y) < t log (Ct_fh2) + t log (1
Letting t -+ 0, we obtain (15.44).
2 +p
n/2
2
15.5. OFF-DIAGONAL UPPER BOUNDS
407
In fact, the matching lower bound in (15.44) is also true. More precisely, on any weighted manifold the following asymptotic takes place:
lim 4tlogpt(x,y)=-d2(x,y).
(15.45)
Hence, the term 4t in (15.43) is sharp. Note also that if Amin (M) > 0 then the term Amin (M) t in (15.43) gives a sharp exponential rate of decay of E\ n/2 pt (x, y) as t -* oo - see Theorem 10.24. The term (1 + in (15.43) is almost sharp: as it was shown in [277], on sphere the following asymptotic is true n-dimensional
c
n/2-1
exp (-P2) 4t pt (x, y) - to/2 t t provided x and y are the conjugate points and t - 0. p2
J
COROLLARY 15.17. Let M be a complete weighted manifold of dimension
n. Then the following conditions are equivalent:
(a) The Faber-Krahn inequality holds on M with function A (v) _ cv-2/n for some positive constant c. (b) The heat kernel on M satisfies for all x, y E M and t > to > 0 the estimate pt(x5 y) <
n/2
C
2 to/2/2
(1 + t)
4t - A (t - to)) p2
exp
(15.46)
where p = d (x, y), A = .min (M), and C is a positive constant. (c) The heat kernel on M satisfies the estimate Pt (x, x) <
Ct-n/2
(15.47)
for all x E M, t > 0, and for some positive constant C. PROOF. The implication (a) = (b) follows from Theorem 15.14 by tak-
ing rz = rj = i (by the completeness of M, all balls B (x, /) are relatively compact). The implication (b) = (c) is trivial, and (c) (a) is true by Theorem 14.20 (or Corollary 14.26).
Sometimes it is convenient to use (15.46) in the following form:
A ( x, y )
p2 - min (t,C T) l2 (i+)
n/2
p2
eXp
( - 4t
-
A (t
- T)+)
( 1 5.48)
for all t, T > 0, which is obtained from (15.46) by setting to = min (t, T). The statement of Corollary 15.17 remains true without assuming the
completeness of M. Indeed, the only place where the completeness was used is (a) = (b), and this can be proved by a different method without completeness - see Exercise 16.4.
15. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES I
408
Examples of manifolds satisfying (a) were mentioned in Remark 14.24. Hence, on such manifolds, the heat kernel satisfies the estimates (15.46) and (15.47).
Observe that, under the conditions of Corollary 15.17, the heat kernel satisfies also the following estimate, for any e > 0 and all x, y E M, t > 0: pt (x, y) 5
Ct-n/2 exp (-(4:)
(15.49)
,
where the constant C depends on E. Indeed, this follows from (15.46) by setting to = t and then using the inequality
C,exp (-4+) which is true for all
,
(15.50)
> 0.
COROLLARY 15.18. Let (M, g,µ) be a complete weighted manifold whose
heat kernel satisfies any of the equivalent upper bounds (15.46), (15.47), (15.49). If a weighted manifold (M, g, µ) is quasi-isometric to (M, g,µ) then the heat kernel on (M, g, i) satisfies all the estimates (15.46), (15.47), (15.49).
PROOF. Thanks to Corollary 15.17, it suffices to prove that the FaberKrahn inequality with function A (v) = cv-2/n is stable under quasi-isometry. For simplicity of notation, let us identify M and M as smooth manifolds. It follows from-Exercise 10.7 or 3.44 that, for any open set U C M, Amin (U) _ )\min (U) ,
where )'min (U) and )'min (U) are the bottoms of the spectrum of the Dirichlet respectively. By Laplacians in U on the manifolds (M, g, p) and Exercise 3.44, we have also
µ(U) "µ(U) Hence, the Faber-Krahn inequality Amin (U) > c/1
(U)-2/"
implies Amin
(U)-2/"
(U) > C i
,
which was to be proved.
Exercises. In the following exercises, we use the notation p = d (x, y).
15.3. Prove that, on any weighted manifold M there is a positive continuous function F (x, s) on M x JR+, which is monotone increasing in s and such that the heat kernel on M satisfies the following estimate
C('+e
2
n/2
Pt(x, y) < F, (x V-t) 1/2 F (y, Vt_)112
exp
p2\ - 4t
(15.51)
15.6. RELATIVE FABER-KRAHN INEQUALITY AND LI-YAU UPPER BOUNDS 409
for all x, y E M and t > 0,where n = dim M and C = C (n) (cf. Exercise 16.3). 15.4. Prove that if M has bounded geometry then, for some constant C,
C(1+')/2 Pt (x, y)
min (1, t)n/2
/
p2
exp - 4t
(15.52)
for allx,yEMandt>0. 15.5. Under the hypotheses of Corollary 15.17, assume in addition that n > 2 and
µ (B (x, r)) < Cr' for all r > 0. Prove that each of the conditions (a) - (c) is equivalent to the following estimate of the Green function:
Cd (x, y)2-
9 (x, y)
for all distinct x, y E M. REMARK. Note for comparison that the Faber-Krahn inequality of Corollary 15.17 implies a (B (x, r)) > const r" - see Exercise 14.5.
15.6. Under conditions of Corollary 15.17, let n > 2 and A := )'min (M) > 0. Prove that, for any e c- (0, 1), the Green function of M satisfies the estimate
for all x
n > 2,
p2-,`
g (x, y) <
(1 + log+ a)
,
(15.53)
n = 2,
y, where C = C (n, e, A, c).
15.7. Let M be an arbitrary weighted manifold of dimension n > 2. Prove that if the Green function of M is finite then, for any x E M and for all y close enough to x, (
P
2-n ,
9 (x, Y) 5 C 5 log l , P l
n > 2,
n = 2,
(15.54)
where C = C (n).
15.6. Relative Faber-Krahn inequality and Li-Yau upper bounds DEFINITION 15.19. We say that a weighted manifold M admits the relative Faber-Krahn inequality if there exist positive constants b and v such
that, for any ball B(x, r) C M and for any relatively compact open set U C B(x, r), ,\1(U) >
b (i(B(xr))) 2/v r2
(15.55)
/-4U)
In R' (15.55) holds with v = n, because it amounts to (14.5). It is possible to prove that the relative Faber-Krahn inequality holds on any complete non-compact manifold of non-negative Ricci curvature - see the Notes at the end of this Chapter for bibliographic references. DEFINITION 15.20. We say that the measure µ on M is doubling if the volume function V (x, r) :_ p (B (x, r)) satisfies the inequality V (x, 2r) < CV (x, r), (15.56)
15. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES I
410
for some constant C and for all x E M and r > 0. If (15.56) holds then one also says that the manifold M satisfies the doubling volume property.
Now we can state and prove the main theorem of this section. THEOREM 15.21. Let (M, g, i) be a connected, complete, non-compact manifold. Then the following conditions are equivalent: (a) M admits the relative Faber-Krahn inequality (15.55).
(b) The measure µ is doubling and the heat kernel satisfies the upper bound
2!y12
C (1 + pt (x, y) :5
It-) 1/2 t
V (yt
1/2
exp
-
p2
(15.57)
4t)
V (x, for all for all x, y E M, t > 0, and for some positive constants C, v, where p = d (x, y). (c) The measure a is doubling and the heat kernel satisfies the inequality ,
pt (x, x) <
C
(15.58)
V (x, VIt)
for all for all x E M, t > 0, and for some constant C. REMARK 15.22. For the implication (a) = (b), the value of v in (15.57) is the same as in (15.55). In this case, the estimate (15.57) can be slightly improved by replacing v/2 by (v - 1) /2 - see Exercise 15.9.
REMARK 15.23. As we will see later (cf. Corollary 16.7), under any of the conditions (a) - (c) of Theorem 15.21 we have also the matching lower bound pt (X, X)
V(x ' c
for all x E M, t > 0 and for some constant c > 0. PROOF. (a) = (b) By Definition 15.19, we have, for any ball B(x, r) C M and any relatively compact open set U C B(x, r), (15.59)
Al (U) ? a (x, r) µ(U)-21U,
where
a (x, r) =
b V (x, r) 21,. r
(15.60)
Applying Theorem 15.14 with the family of balls {B (x, r)}XEM, we obtain
that, for all x, y E M and r, t > 0,
C (1 + )vl2 pt (x, y)
- (a (x, r) a (y, r) mint, r2) min(t, r2))''/4
exp
( \
p2
4t )
15.6. RELATIVE FABER-KRAHN INEQUALITY AND LI-YAU UPPER BOUNDS 411
Note that r is arbitrary here. Choosing r = Vt- and substituting a from (15.60) we obtain (15.57). An alternative proof of this part will be given in Section 16.2. By Exercise 14.5, the Faber-Krahn inequality (15.59) in the ball B (x, R) implies that, for any r < R. N, (B (x, r)) > ca (x, R)"12 r
where c = c (v) > 0. Substituting a (x, R) from (15.60), we obtain
V(x,r)>c'(R) V (x, R),
(15.61)
where the doubling property follows.
(b) = (c) Trivial. (c) = (a) It follows easily from the volume doubling property (15.56) that there exists v > 0 such that
V(x'R)
(15.62)
r)
V (x, r) -
for all x E M and 0 < r < R. Fix a ball 12 = B (x, r) and consider an open set U C Q. Then, by (14.58) and (15.58), e-al(U)t < fu pt (y, y) dp (y) C C
d t (y)
Ju V (y V't)
.
(15.63)
For any y c U and t < r2, we have by (15.62) V (x, r) < V (y, 2r)
V (y, V)
V (y, v
v
r
Therefore,
f
dµ (y)
<
v V (y, VI) Now choose t from the condition
(U) C V (x, r)
(rV _
r .
x,r
(15.64)
(1565) .
for some e E (0, 1). Since we need to have t < r2, we have to assume for a while that ,u (U) < eV (x, r) . If so then we obtain from (15.63), (15.64), and (15.65) that
XI (U) >
Choosing e =
&'C-2
1
(15.66)
1
log C26'
and evaluating t from (15.65), we obtain Al (U) >
b
(VA(MX,
))2/v
where b > 0 is a positive constant, which was to be proved.
(15.67)
15. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES I
412
We are left to extend (15.67) to any U C B (x, r) without the restriction (15.66). For that, we will use the following fact. CLAIM. If M is connected, complete, non-compact and satisfies the doubling volume property then there are positive numbers c, v' such that V (x,
R)
>c (R)
(15.68)
r
V (x, r) -
for all xEM and0 V (x, r) + V (y, 2 r). By (15.56), we have V (x, r)
V (y, 4r)
V(y, 2r)
V (y, 2r)
3
whence
V(x,2r) > (1+C-3)V (x, r). Iterating this inequality, we obtain (15.68) with v' =1og2 (1 + C-3). Returning to the proof of (15.67), find R > r so big that V (x, R > V (x, r)
1
E
were E was chosen above. Due to (15.68), we can take R in the form R = Ar, where A is a constant, depending on the other constants in question. Then U C B (x, R) and
p(U) <EV(x,R), which implies by the first part of the proof that
1 (U)
b (V (x'
R) \ 2/U b
/Jl
(Ar)2
it (U)
R2
(V
(x, r) \ 2/v /)l
p (U)
which was to be proved.
Using (15.61), we obtain, for p = d (x, y),
(x) (Y'
(y,
/
Replacing V (y, /) in (15.57) according to the above estimate, we obtain pt (x, y) C V
C
(x f)
C1 +
p
3v/4
2
exp
(- 4t)
(15.69)
l
15.6. RELATIVE FABER-KRAHN INEQUALITY AND LI-YAU UPPER BOUNDS 413 2
where C = C (b, v). Absorbing the term (1 +
we/
exponential by means of the inequality (15.50),
3v/4
in (15.69) into the obtain
2
pt (x, y) C V (x Vi-) exp
\
(15.70)
(4 + e) t/
where e > 0 is arbitrary and C = C (b, v, e). It follows from Theorem 15.21 that all the estimates (15.57), (15.58), (15.69), (15.70) are equivalent', provided the measure .t is doubling. DEFINITION 15.24. Each of the equivalent estimates (15.57), (15.58), (15.69), (15.70) are referred to as the Li-Yau upper estimate of the heat kernel.
COROLLARY 15.25. Assume that (M, g, p) is connected, complete, non-
compact weighted manifold and measure i be doubling. Let (M, g, µ) be another weighed manifold that is quasi-isometric to M. If the heat kernel on M_ admits the the Li-Yau upper estimate then so does the heat kernel on M. In other words, the Li-Yau upper estimates are stable under quasiisometry.
Consequently, the Li-Yau upper estimate holds on manifolds that are quasi-isometric to complete non-compact manifolds of non-negative Ricci curvature. PROOF. In the view of Theorem 15.21, it suffices to prove that the relative Faber-Krahn inequality (15.55) is stable under quasi-isometry. For simplicity of notation, let us identify M and M as smooth manifolds. _Let d be the geodesic distance of the metric g B (x, r) be a metric ball of d. By Exercise 3.44, there is a constant K > 1 such that ,
K-1d (x, y) c d -(x, y) < Kd (x, y) .
Hence, any open set U C B (x, r) is also contained in B (x, Kr), and we obtain by the relative Faber-Krahn inequality on (M, g, p) that
(U) >
b) (Kr 2
ti (B (x,
Kr))2/v
µ(U)
b
p(B(x, r))
K2r2
A (U)
1
r2
µ(U) ((x,
r))
2/v
) 2/v
(15.71)
1Note that the equivalence of (15.58) and (15.70) can be proved without the hypothesis of completeness - see Exercise 16.5.
15. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES I
414
Let Amin (U) be the bottom of the spectrum of the Dirichlet Laplacian in U on the manifold ()W, g, µ). By Exercise 10.7, we have that min (U) ^ Amin (U), which together with (15.71) implies the relative Faber-Krahn inequality on (M, g, µ).
Exercises. 15.8. Let M be a complete manifold satisfying the relative Faber-Krahn inequality. Prove that the Green function g (x, y) is finite if and only if, for all x E M, f /'°° f
V.rdr(r) < oo.
Prove also the estimate for all x, y E M:
g(x,G C Y)
rdr
°° d(x,v) ) V
(x,r)
15.9. Under conditions of Theorem 15.21, prove that the relative Faber-Krahn inequality (15.55) implies the following enhanced version of (15.57): a
Pt (x, y) <
V
P2
exp
,qt
(x,
" t 1/2 V (y,
1/2
4t
(15.72)
HINT. Use the mean-value inequality of Theorem 15.1 and (12.18).
Notes The L2-mean value inequality of Section 15.1 was introduced and proved by J.Moser [279], [280] for solutions of uniformly elliptic and parabolic equations in R'. Moser used for the proof his celebrated iteration techniques when one estimates the L°°-norm of a solution via its L2-norm in a larger ball my means of a series of iterations through LPnorms with p -+ oo. A possibility to increase the exponent of p comes from the Sobolev inequality. Here we use a different approach, which goes back to de Giorgi and employs the
Faber-Kralin inequality in the level sets of a solution. We follow the account of this method in [145], which in turn is based on [241] and [242]. A more general mean value inequality under the Faber-Krahn inequality with an arbitrary function A (v) was proved in [145] and [146]. See also [105] for extension of the mean value inequality to non-linear operators.
The use of the weighted L2-norm of the heat kernel in conjunction with the mean value inequality was introduced by Aronson[9], [10] in the context of parabolic equations
in R'. A good account of Aronson's estimates of the heat kernel as well as of the Harnack inequality of Moser can be found in [306], [333]. The relation between the mean value inequality and the heat kernel upper bound was extensively studied in [255]. An alternative method of obtaining Gaussian upper bounds can be found [94], [95]. Our treatment of Gaussian upper bounds follows [141] and [146], where all the results of Sections 15.3 and 15.5 were obtained. Let us emphasize that Theorem 15.14, which provides the main Gaussian upper bound of the heat kernel, applies even when the FaberKrahn inequality is known locally, in some balls. The output of this theorem varies depending on how much is known about the Faber-Krahn properties of the manifold in question. The short time asymptotics (15.45) of log pt (x, y) was proved by Varadhan [351] (see also [296], [326]).
NOTES
415
The relative Faber-Krahn inequality (15.55) was introduced in [145], where it was shown that (15.55) holds on complete non-compact Riemannian manifolds of non-negative Ricci curvature (see [128], [154], [325] for alternative proofs). The equivalence of (15.55) and the Li-Yau upper estimate was proved in [146]. The two-sided Li-Yau estimates for the heat kernel on complete manifolds of non-negative Ricci curvature was first proved by P.Li and S.-T. Yau [258], using the gradient estimates.
Let us briefly outline an alternative approach to obtaining the Li-Yau upper bound from the relative Faber-Krahn inequality (Theorem 15.21), which is due to [81], [154] and which avoids using Theorem 15.14.
Stepl. Observe that under the relative Faber-Krahn inequality, the L2-mean value inequality Theorem 15.1 becomes
u+(T, x) <
BC btx, VTT))
ffu2+ddt,
(15.73)
provided R = T, which follows from (15.3) by substitution a = R2 p (B (x, R))2
Step 2. The L2-mean value inequality (15.73) together with the doubling volume property (which is also a consequence of the relative Faber-Krahn inequality - see the proof of Theorem 15.21) implies its Ll-counterpart - see [248], [255]. Step 3. Combining the Ll-mean value inequality with the Davies-Gaffney inequality (12.17) yields (15.57).
CHAPTER 16
Pointwise Gaussian estimates II In this Chapter we describe another approach to the off-diagonal upper bounds of the heat kernel. This method allows to deduce the Gaussian estimates for pt (x, y) directly from the estimates of pt (x, x) and pt (y, y) and does not require the completeness of the manifold in question.
16.1. The weighted L2-norm of Pt f DEFINITION 16.1. We say that a function 'y defined on an interval (0, T)
is regular if y is an increasing positive function such that, for some A > 1,
a > l and all 0 < tl < t2 < T/a, 'y(atl) < Ay(at2) -f (h)
(16.1)
'y(t2)
Here are two simple situations when (16.1) holds: y(t) satisfies the doubling condition, that is, for some A > 1, and
all0
y(2t) < Ay(t). Then (16.1) holds with a = 2 because
(16.2)
'y(2ti) < A _< Ay(2t2) Y(tl)
Y(t2)
y(t) has at least a polynomial growth in the sense that, for some a > 1, the function y(at)/y(t) is increasing in t. Then (16.1) holds for A = 1. Let T = +oo and y be differentiable. Set l(T) := log y(eT) and observe that l is defined on (-oo, +oo). We claim that y is regular provided one of the following two conditions holds: l' is uniformly bounded (for example, this is the case when -y(t) = tN
or y(t) = logN(1 + t) where N > 0); l' is monotone increasing (for example, y(t) = exp(tr)). On the other hand, (16.1) fails if l' = exp (-T) (which is unbounded as -r -3 -oo), that is y(t) = exp (-t-1). Also, (16.1) may fail if l' is oscillating. THEOREM 16.2. Let (M, g, JL) be a weighted manifold and S C 111 be a a
non-empty measurable subset of M. For any function f E L2(M) and t > 0 417
16. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES II
418
and D > 0 set
ED(t,f) = fM (Ptf)2exp
(d2I \ Dt
dµ.
(16.3)
///
Assume that, for some f E L2 (S) and for all t > 0, 1
11Ptf 112
2:5
(16.4)
Y(t)'
where y(t) is a regular function on (0, +oo) in the sense of Definition 16.1. Then, for all D > 2 and t > 0,
ED(t,f) < 6A
(16.5)
7(ct)' where c = c(a, D) > 0 and A, a are the constants from (16.1). PROOF. The proof will be split into four steps. Step 1. For any t > 0 and r > 0 define the following quantity
Jr(t)
fr. (ptf)2dµ, s
where Sr is the open r-neighborhood of S. By the inequality (12.11) of Theorem 12.3, we have, for all 0 < r < R and 0 < t < T,
(PTf)2dµ< f (Ptf)2dµ+exp
fsR By (16.4), we have
+'
f
r
(Ptf )2 dµ
R-r 2
-2(T-t) )
f,
(Ptf)2dµ.
(t)
whence it follows that
JR(T) <
Jr(t)
+
1
exp - (R - r)2 2 (T
ry(t)
(16.6)
t)
Step 2. Let us prove that
Jr(t)
3A
exp
(_e)
(16.7)
t y(t/a) for some e = E(a) > 0. Let {rk}' o and {tk}k o be two strictly decreasing sequences of positive reals such that
r0 = r, rk .L 0, tO = t, tk .. 0 ask --+ oo. By (16.6), we have, for any k > 1, Jrk-1(tk-1) < Jr, (tk) +
1
'Y(tk)
exp
(rk-1 - rk)
2
2(tk--1 - tk)
(16.8)
16.1. THE WEIGHTED L2-NORM OF Ptf
419
When k -4 oo we obtain `jrk(tk) =
f
Sk
f (Ptf)2df fd0,
(Ptkf)2dµ
(16.9)
Sc
°
where we have used the fact that Pt f -* f in L2 (M) as t - 0+ (cf. Theorem 4.9) and the hypothesis that f - 0 in Sc. Adding up the inequalities (16.8) for all k from 1 to oo and using (16.9), we obtain 00
1
Jr(t)
1 - rk)2
(rk
exp
(16.10)
1
Y(tk)
k
Let us specify the sequences {rk} and {tk} as follows:
r
rk =
and tk = t/ak,
k 4-1
where a is the constant from (16.1). For all k > 1 we have (a - 1)t
r rk-1 - rk = k (k + 1)
and
(rk-1 - rk)2
ak
ak
tk-1 - tk =
whence
_
r2 > E(k + 1) r2
2(a - 1)k2(k + 1)2 t
2(tk-1 - tk)
where
t
k
1)a
-
E(a) =
>
+ 1)3
k>i 2(a -
(16.11)
0.
By the regularity condition (16.1) we have 'Y(tk-1) < A'Y(to) 'Y(tk) 'Y(tl)
,
which implies
_
-Y (t)
'Y(tk)
'Y(to)'Y(t1) 'Y(tl) -Y(t2)
... `Y(tk-l) 'Y(tk)
'Y(to)
k
< \A-Y(t1)
Substituting into (16.10), we obtain
)k
00
JT(t)
<
71 YY7-(AY(to) exp ( Y(t)
(_(k+ 1)
exp
°°
r2-
exp (kL - Ek k= 1
where
L := log (Ary(to)) Consider the following two cases:
.
t)
,2
t
/
16. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES II
420
(1) If et -L>1then Jr(t) <
exp
(-e t) 00 (t)
2
exp (-k)
(-ET).
exp
(2) If e= - L < 1 then we estimate JJ(t) in a trivial way:
f
T(t)<
(p f)2d <
1
whence
Jr(t)
e t J.'Y(t) eXp l 1 + L -,5'-
t
7(t) A'Y(t1) exp
(_e)
3A \ r2 y(t/a)exp(-e
Hence, in the both cases we obtain (16.7).
Step 3. Let us prove the inequality 6A
(16.12)
ED(t, f) < y(t/a) under the additional restriction that D > 5e-
(16.13)
where s was defined by (16.11) in the previous step.
Set p(x) = d(x, S) and split the integral in the definition (16.3) of ED (t, f) into the series ED (t, .f) =
f
00
{p
+
(pt.f) 2 exp
42k- lr
k=1
(P2) Dt
dµ,
(16.14)
where r is a positive number to be chosen below. The integral over the set {p < r} is estimated using (16.4):
f
< {p_r}
(
(r2
2
(pt
f)2
ex p
t ) d µ < e xp Dt ) <
1
-Y(t)
f
(
M
(pt.f)2 dµ
2
exp
t)
.
(16 . 15)
16.1. THE WEIGHTED L2-NORM OF Pt f
421
The k-th term in the sum in (16.14) is estimated by (16.7) as follows /'
J
(Ptf )2 exp
{2k-1r
(P ) Dt dl
4Dkr2
t)Js
< exp
(Ptf )2dµ
2k-1r
exp C
4kr2
3A
<
`y(tla) 3A ry( t / a)
Dt ) J2k-lr(t) (4kr2
exp
Dt -
4k-lr2 s
/ 4k 4r2 exp {
-
t
(16.16)
Dt
where in the last line we have used (16.13).
Let us choose r = VD-t. Then we obtain from (16.14), (16.15), and (16.16) 3
Y(t /a) exp \-4
k-1 ) )
<
3 F 3A -y(t/a)
whence (16.12) follows.
Step 4. We are left to prove (16.5) in the case
2 < D < Do := 5e-1
(16.17)
By Theorem 12.1, we have for any s > 0 and all 0 < T < t
(2(P2)) dp.
2
IM
2
(2(ts)) d< IM
(16.18)
Given t > 0 and D as in (16.17), let us choose the values of s and r so that the left hand side of (16.17) be equal to ED (t, f) whereas the right hand side be equal to ED,, (T, f ). In other words, s and T must satisfy the simultaneous equations
12(t + s) = Dt, l 2(7 + s) = DoT, whence we obtain
s=D2 2t
and
T=Do-2t
Hence, we can rewrite (16.18) in the form
ED(t,f)
ED, (T, f)
By (16.12), we have EDo (r, f)
6A 'Y(ae1T)'
16. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES II
422
whence we conclude
ED(t, f)
2 6A
lil DO-2 a-
1t)'
thus finishing the proof of (16.5).
LI
16.2. Gaussian upper bounds of the heat kernel We will again use the notation J PR x, y) exp (d2 (Dt y)) dµ (y) M
ED (t, x)
THEOREM 16.3. If, for some x E M and all t > 0, pt (x, x) < 71
(16.19)
,
where -y is a regular function on (0, +oo)"'then, for all D > 2 and t > 0, ED (t, x)
(16.20)
,
ry( )
where C = 6A, c = c(a, D) > 0, and a, A are the constants from (16.1). PROOF. Let U be an open relatively compact neighborhood of the point
x, and let cp be a cutoff function of {x} in U. For any s > 0 define the function cps on M by cps (z) = ps (x, z)co (z)
Clearly, we have cps < p, (x, ) whence Ptcps
Ptps (x, ') = pt+s(x,
and 1
IIPt(psII2 < IIpt+s(x,')jI2 G llpt(x,')1I2 =P2t(x,x) < y (2t)
By Theorem 16.2, we conclude that, for any D > 2, M (Ptcps)2 exp
(d2(U))
dµ
7(ct) Fix y E M and observe that, by the definition of cps, Ptw., (y) _
Im
(16.21)
pt (y, z) p,, (x, z) cp (z) dµ (z) = PsOt (x)
where
t(z) Pt(y, z)cp (z) Since function Vt is continuous and bounded (cf. Exercise 7.27), we conclude by Theorem 7.16 that
Psot (x) -+ Ot (x) as s --3 0,
that is, Pt
ass -3 0.
16.2. GAUSSIAN UPPER BOUNDS OF THE HEAT KERNEL
423
Passing to the limit in (16.21) as s -a 0, we obtain by Fatou's lemma U) (x,
1M p2
-) eXp (d2Dt
) dp <
-Y(ctC
)
Finally, shrinking U to the point x, we obtain (16.20). COROLLARY 16.4. Let 71 and rye be two regular functions on (0, +oo),
and assume that, for two points x, y E M and all t > 0 and pt(y, y) <
pt (X, x) C 71(t)
(16.22)
72(t)
Then, for all D > 2 and t > 0, pt(x,y)
C
exp
'y1(ct)'Y2(ct)
(_d2(xY)) ,
2Dt
'
where C and c depend on the constants from the regularity condition, and c depends in addition on D. PROOF. By Theorem 16.3, we obtain and ED (t, y) :5
ED (t, x) < 71(ct)
C Y2 (ct)
Substituting these inequalities into the estimate (15.38) of Lemma 15.13, we finish the proof.
In particular, if 7 (t) is regular and 1
pt (x, x) <
7 (t)
forallxEMandt>Othen A
-- 7(ct) exp
(-d2Dt
)
for all x, y c M and t > 0. If the manifold M is complete and the function -y is of the form -y (t) = ct''V 2 then this was proved in Corollary 15.17.
Exercises. 16.1. Let for some x E M and all t E (0,T) Pt (x, x) <
(16.23)
} (t)
where T E (0, +oo] and ry is a monotone increasing function on (0, T) satisfying the doubling property -y(2t) < A7(t),
(16.24)
for some A > 1 and all t < T/2. Prove that, for all D > 2 and t > 0, C En(t x) < 7(tAT)' >
where C = C(A).
(16.25)
424
16. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES II
16.2. Using Exercise 16.1, give an alternative proof of Corollary 15.9: on any weighted manifold M, ED (t, x) < oo
for all D>2,xEM,t>0. 16.3. Using Lemma 15.13, prove that on any weighted manifold M, for any D > 2 there exists a function b(t, x) that is decreasing in t and such that the following inequality holds pt (x, y) <
(t, x)`h(t, y) exp
(_d2(xY) - Amin (M) tl
,
(16.26)
for all x, y c M and t > 0 (cf. Exercise 15.3).
16.4. Assume that a weighted manifold M admits the Faber-Krahn inequality with a function A E L and let y be its L-transform. Assume that y is regular in the sense of Definition 16.1. Prove that, for any D > 2 and for all t > 0 and x, y E M, Pt (x, y) 5 l (t) eXp c
(_dz 2Dty))
where C depends on D and on the regularity constants of y. 16.5. Assume that the volume function V (x, r) = u (B (x, r)) of a weighted manifold M is doubling and that the heat kernel of M admits the estimate pt (x, x) 5
V (x vt-) for all x E M and t E (0, T), where T E (0, -boo] and C is a constant. Prove that Pt (x> y)
C
V (X -,/t-)
dz (x, y)
eXp - 2Dt (
for all D > 2, x, y E M, t E (0, T) and some constant C. REMARK. If T = +oo and the manifold M is complete and non-compact, then this follows from Theorem 15.21.
16.3. On-diagonal lower bounds Here we demonstrate the use of the quantity ED (t, x) for the proof of some lower bounds of the heat kernel in two settings. For any x E M and r > 0, set V (x, r) = p (B (x, r)) . Observe that V (x, r) is positive and finite provided M is complete. THEOREM 16.5. Let M be a complete weighted manifold. Assume that,
for some x E M and all r > ro, V (X' r) < Cr", where C, v, ro are positive constants. Then, for all t > to, 1/4 pt (X, x ) _> V (X' Kt log t)' where K = K (x, ro, C, v) > 0 and to = max(ro, 3).
(16.27)
(16 . 28)
Furthermore, for any K > v there exists large enough to such that (16.28) holds for all t > to.
16.3. ON-DIAGONAL LOWER BOUNDS
425
Of course, (16.28) implies
Pt (x, x) > c (t log t)-v/2 . In general, one cannot get rid of log t here - see [169].
PROOF. For any r > 0, we obtain by the semigroup identity and the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality
f Mpt (x, )dµ ?
p2t(x,x)
f
B(x,r)
pi (x, -)du 2
B
> V x, r
r)
pt(x, -)dp
(16.29)
-
Since M is complete and the condition (16.27) obviously implies (11.22), we obtain by Theorem 11.8 that M is stochastically complete, that. is
fM Pt (x, -)dµ = 1. Using also that pt(x, x) > p2t(x, x) (cf. Exercise 7.22) we obtain from (16.29) 2
(i_fM\B(x,r) Pt (X, )dµ
1 D4 (X x) >
.
(16.30)
Choose r = r(t) so that 1
fM\B(x,r)
pt (x, -)dµ < 2 .
(16.31)
Assume for a moment that (16.31) holds. Then (16.30) yields 1/4
Pt
V (x, r(t))
,
To match (16.28), we need the following estimate of r (t):
r(t) <
Kt log t.
(16.32)
Let us prove (16.31) with r = r(t) satisfying (16.32). Setting p = d(x, -) and fixing some D > 2, we obtain by the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality 2
(fM\B(x,r)
Pt (x, ') dµ
f
fpx .) exp (Dt) d11 2
M
ED(t,x)
2
exp
( Dt) dµ
M\B(x,r)
f M\B(x,r)
2
exp (_Dt) dµ,
(16.33)
426
16. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES II
where ED (t, x) is defined by (15.24). By Theorem 12.1 and Corollary 15.9, we have, for all t > to, ED (t, x) < ED (to, x) < oo.
(16.34)
Since x is fixed, we can consider ED (to, x) as a constant. Let us now estimate the integral in (16.33) assuming that
r = r(t) > ro.
(16.35)
By splitting the complement of B(x, r) into the union of the annuli B(x, 2k+1r) \ B(x, 2kr), k = 0,1, 2, ...,
and using the hypothesis (16.27), we obtain /'
J
exp
M\B(x,r)
(-k) dµ <
exp (_z) V (x, 2kr) (16.36) k=0x, 00
<
CE r" 2v (k+
eXp
-
4kr2
Dt) . (16.37)
k=0
Assuming 2 -Dt> 1'
(16.38)
the sum in (16.37) is majorized by a geometric series whence r2
J
M\B(x,r)
exp
(-k) dµ < Car" exp l - Dt)
'
(16.39)
where C' depends on C and v. Set r (t) =
Kt log t,
(16.40)
where the constant K will be chosen below; in any case, it will be larger than D. If so then assuming that t > to = max (ro, 3)
we obtain that both conditions (16.35) and (16.38) are satisfied. Substituting (16.40) into (16.39), we obtain r /- P2) dp < C'KU/2 (1ot)v/2 exp
M\B(x r)
(\\
(16.41)
Dt
tYa
1
If a > 1 then the function Itat is decreasing for t > 3. Hence assuming K > ND we obtain from (16.41) and (16.33)
v/2
2
pt (x, )dµ M\B(x,r)
< C'Kv/2
log to tOD
ED (to, x)-
(16.42)
16.3. ON-DIAGONAL LOWER BOUNDS
427
Choosing K large enough, we can make the right hand side arbitrarily small, which finishes the proof of the first claim. If K > v then choosing D close enough to 2 we can ensure that
2K -1>0. vD Therefore, the right hand side in (16.42) can be made arbitrarily small provided to large enough, whence the second claim follows. THEOREM 16.6. Let M be a complete weighted manifold. Assume that,
for some point x E M and all r > 0 V (x, 2r) < CV (x, r),
(16.43)
and, for all t E (0, T), pt ( X, x)
-< V(xC
(16 . 44)
where T E (0, +oo] and C > 0. Then, for all t E (0, T), C
- V(x, pt (x, x) >
( 16 . 45 )
Vt-),
where c > 0 depends on C.
PROOF. It follows from (16.43) that V (x, r) < Cr' for all r > 1 and some v. Hence, by Theorem 11.8, M is stochastically complete. Following the argument in the proof of Theorem 16.5, we need to find r = r (t) so that 1
pt(x, )dµ < 2' IM\B(x,r) which implies
pt(x,x)
V(xl (t))
(16.46)
If in addition r (t) < Kf for some constant K then (16.45) follows from (16.46) and (16.43). Let us use the estimate (16.33) from the proof of Theorem 16.5, that is,
r
JM\B(x,r)
2
pt(x, )dµ
2
< ED (t, X)
JM\B(x,r)
exp
(_L) tdp
(16.47)
where p = d (x, ) and D > 2 (for example, set D = 3). Next, instead of using the monotonicity of ED (t, x) as in the proof of Theorem 16.5, we apply Theorem 16.3. Indeed, by Theorem 16.3 and Exercise 16.1, the hypotheses (16.43) and (16.44) yield, for all t E (0, T), ED (t, x) <
V( y)
(16.48)
16. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES It
428
Applying the doubling property (16.43) we obtain
r
exp
dlc
< > exp
V (x, 2k+1r)
Bbl\B(x,r) a.'
4kr2
< E Cti+1 eXp (- Dt) V (x, r) k=O
< C'V (x, r) exp (_) 2
(16.49)
provided r2 > Dt. It follows from (16.47), (16.48), and (16.49) that, for any t E (0, T), 2
(
) dti
2
Obviously, the expression exp (-a) can be made arbitrarily small by choosing r =
Kt, with K large enough, which finishes the proof.
COROLLARY 16.7. If M is a complete non-compact weighted manifold and M admits the relative Faber-Krahn inequality then pt (x, x)
c
V (x, f)
for some c > 0 and for all x E M, t > 0. PROOF. Indeed, by Theorem 15.21(a), the relative Faber-Krahn inequal-
ity implies both conditions (16.43) and (16.44) with T = +00, whence the claim follows from Theorem 16.6.
16.4. Epilogue: alternative ways of constructing the heat kernel Recall that the existence of the heat kernel was proved in Chapter 7 using the key estimate (7.18) of the semigroup Pt, that is, sup I Ptfl <_ C (1 + t-°) IIIIIL2(M), K
(16.50)
for all t > 0 and f E L2 (M), where K is any relatively compact subset of M, a = a (n) > 0, and the constant C depends on K. The estimate (16.50) was obtained in Theorem 7.6 as a consequence of the Sobolev embedding theorem W2o (M) y C (K) provided a is large enough. It is desirable to have methods of construction of the heat kernel, which would require as little use of the smoothness properties as possible, to be employed in the setting of metric measure spaces. Let us sketch three alternative methods for constructing the heat kernel, which satisfy this requirement. Let us emphasize that in all cases the existence of the heat kernel is a consequence of certain local properties of the underlying space.
NOTES AND FURTHER REFERENCES
429
1. The estimate (16.50) has received one more proof in Corollary 15.7, which depends on the following two ingredients:
Theorem 15.4 that provides the Faber-Krahn inequality in small balls;
Theorem 15.1 that provides a mean-value inequality for solutions of the heat equation assuming the Faber-Krahn inequality. The properties of manifolds that are used in this approach are the FaberKrahn inequality in small ball, which is a consequence of a local Euclidean structure, and JVdJ < 1, which reflects a special role of the geodesic distance in contrast to other possible distance functions. Although the proof of the key Theorem 15.1 is relatively long and technical, this approach has a certain advantage since it allows to jump quickly to Gaussian ofd diagonal estimates of the heat kernel (cf. Theorem 15.14 and Corollaries 15.17, 15.15). 2. It suffices to construct heat kernels pi in all relatively compact open subsets S of M. Indeed, thenTone proves define pt as the limit of pf2'' as k -* oo where {Qk} is any compact exhaustion sequence. The fact that the limit exists follows from the monotonicity of pt with respect to SZ (cf. Theorem 5.23) and from IlPi 41 < 1. (16.51) That pt is indeed the integral kernel of the heat semigroup Pt, was proved by J. Dodziuk [108) (see also [51, p.188]). Let us describe two methods for construction of pQ. (i) One first shows that the Dirichlet Laplace operator has a discrete spectrum. This was proved in Theorem 10.13 using the heat kernel and the estimate (16.50). However, to realize the present approach, it is necessary to have a proof of of the discreteness of the spectrum without using the heat kernel - see, for example, the second proof of Corollary 10.21. Then one can define the heat kernel pt by the explicit formula (10.33) via the eigenfunctions of Ln. Certain efforts are needed to verify that pt" _> 0 and (16.51), for which one employs the maximum principle. (ii) Starting with the Faber-Krahn inequality in small balls (cf. Theorem 15.4), one first obtains the same inequality in any relatively compact open set Q. This follows from Theorem 15.11, but one should have a different proof for merging Faber-Krahn inequalities without using the heat kernel (a relevant argument can be found in [179]). Then, by Theorem 14.19, the heat semigroup Po is L1 -4 L2 ultracontractive, and the ultracontractivity implies the existence of the heat kernel (see, for example, [49], [96], or [163] ).
Yet another method for construction of the heat kernel under a weaker version of the Faber-Krahn inequality can be found in [184].
Notes and further references The key idea of Theorem 16.2, that the upper bound (16.4) for JIPt f 11 implies a Gaussian estimate (16.7) for the the integral of (P t f )2 away from the support of f, is due
16. POINTWISE GAUSSIAN ESTIMATES II
430
to Ushakov [350] in the context of parabolic equations in Ill;" (see also [193]). The present proofs of Theorems 16.2 and 16.3 were taken from [151]. The finiteness of ED (t, x) on any manifold for D > 2 was proved in [141] and [146].
The on-diagonal lower bound of the heat kernel in Theorems 16.5 and 16.6 were proved in [80], [79]. Moreover, Theorem 16.5 was proved in [80] under the hypothesis V (x, r) < F (r) with a more general function F (r) than in (16.27). Further results on the topics related to this book can be found in the following references.
- the Gaussian bounds of heat kernels and Harnack inequalities: [13], [15], [35], [54], [55], [74], [75), [78], [87], [94], [95], [96], [98], [101], [120], [145], [148], [149], [150], [157], [176], [177], [179], [180], [198], [199], [230], [295], [312], [319], [320], [322], [324], [345];
- a short time behavior of the heat kernel: [36], [131], [132], [267], [275], [276], [277], [295], [336], [349].
- heat semigroups and functional inequalities: [20], [94], [95], [96], [188], [190], [313], [314), [315], [369]; - heat kernels and curvature: [18], [61], [258], [267], [307], [361], [365], [366]; [7], [8], [33], [34], [84], [114], - heat kernels on symmetric spaces and groups: [189], [218], [219], [287], [303], [304], [312], [355];
- heat kernels on metric measure spaces and fractals: [14], [22], [23], [24], [27], [124), [125], [156], [158], [162], [163], [164], [165], [166], [167], [172], [195], [202], [224], [225], [238], [331], [332], [337], [339]; - heat kernels and random walks on graphs: [5], [25], [26), [64], [68], [70], [69], [82), [99], [111], [129], [181], [182],-[1911, [233], [234], [323], [358), [359]; - heat kernels of non-linear operators: [105], [107]; - heat kernels of higher order elliptic operators: [19], [100], [237], [312]; - heat kernels of non-symmetric operators: [117), [236], [300]; - heat kernels of subelliptic operators: [30], [31], [215], [216], [239]; - heat kernels in infinite dimensional spaces: [32], [34], [112], [113]; - heat kernels and stochastic processes: [152], [155], [161], [168], [169], [170), [171], [178], [210], [334]; - heat kernels for Schrodinger operators: [21], [71], [157], [160], [201], [259], [260], [282], [283], [344], [371], [370]; - Liouville theorems and related topics: [4], [6], [28], [62], [72], [90], [91], [109],
[138], [139], [140], [143], [144], [159], [173], [204], [205], [220], [247], [248], [250), [251], [252), [254], [261], [262], [264], [284], [285), [288], [301], [338), [341]. - eigenvalues and eigenfunctions on manifolds: [36], [51], [59], [60], [174], [183], [185), [232], [247], [253], [256], [257], [289], [290], [291], [326], [362], [367]; - various aspects of isoperimetric inequalities: [11], [40], [42], [48], [53], [116], [128], [249], [302], [305], [321], [354], [362].
APPENDIX A
Reference material For convenience of the reader, we briefly review here some background
material frequently used in the main body of the book. The detailed accounts can be found in numerous textbooks on Functional Analysis and Measure Theory, see for example, [73], [88], [89], [194], [226], [229], [235], [263], [281], [310], [318], [334], [346], [368].
A.I. Hilbert spaces We assume throughout that ?-l is a real Hilbert space with the inner
product (x, y) and the associated norm IIxMI = (x, x)1/2 CAUCHY-SCHWARZ INEQUALITY. For all x, y E 71,
I X10 <- 114110-
PROJECTION. If S is a closed subspace of 3-l then for any x E 9-l there is a
unique point y E S such that (x - y) IS. The point y is called the projection of x onto S. The mapping P : 9-l -> 94
defined by Px = y is called the projector onto S. In fact, P is a linear bounded self-adjoint operator in 7, and IIPII < 1 (see Section A.5 below). Let D be a dense subspace of 3-l and 1 : D -* R be a linear functional. The norm of l is defined by
IIIII = sup
l (x)
xED\{o} IIxII
The functional l is said to be bounded if 11111 < oc. The boundedness of l is equivalent to the continuity and to the uniform continuity of 1. Hence, a bounded linear functional uniquely extends to a bounded linear functional defined on the whole space W. For example, any vector a E 7-1 gives rise to a bounded linear functional la as follows: la, (x) = (x, a). It follows from the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality that I11aii = IIail. The next theorem implies that the family {la}aE exhausts all the bounded linear functional. RIESZ REPRESENTATION THEOREM. For any bounded linear functional 1
on 7, there exists a unique vector a E 9-l such that 1 (x) = (x, a) for all x from the domain of 1. Furthermore, 11111 = Ilall. 431
A. REFERENCE MATERIAL
432
BESSEL'S INEQUALITY. Let {vk} be a orthonormal sequence in a Hilbert
space 'H. Fix a vector x ER and set xk = (x,vk).
Then
Ixk12 < IIxII2. k
PARSEVAL'S IDENTITY. Let {vk} be an orthonormal sequence in a Hilbert
space. Fix a vector x E 'l and a sequence of reals {xk} . Then the identity x = L xkvk k
holds if and only if xk = (x, vk) for all k, and Ixk12
=
IIx1I2.
k
ORTHONORMAL BASIS. In any separable Hilbert space ', there is an at most
countable orthonormal basis, that is, a finite or countable sequence {vk}k 1 such that (vk, vl)
=
J
0, 1,
k
1,
k =1,
and that any vector x E 9-l can be uniquely represented as the sum N
x = 2_, xkvk, k=1
for some real xk. In the case N = co the series converges in the norm of W.
The series >k xkvk is called the Fourier series of the vector x in the basis {vk}, and the numbers xk are called the coordinates (or the Fourier coefficients) of x.
A.2. Weak topology A sequence {xk} in a Hilbert space 9-l converges weakly to x E ' if for all yE7-1 (xk,y) -* (x,y)
In this case one writes Xk - x or x = w-lim Xk. Alternatively, the weak convergence is determined by the weak topology of ', which is defined by the family of semi-norms Nv (x) = I (x, y) I
where y varies in W.
In contrast to that, the topology of 9-l that is determined by the norm of '-l, is called the strong topology. Clearly, the strong convergence implies the weak convergence.
A.2. WEAK TOPOLOGY
433
PRINCIPLE OF UNIFORM BOUNDEDNESS. Any weakly bounded (that is, bounded
in any semi-norm) subset of a Hilbert space is strongly bounded (that is, bounded in the norm). Hence, the boundedness of a subset in the weak sense is equivalent to that in the strong sense. We say that a set S C 7-l is weakly compact if any sequence {xk} C S contains a subsequence {xkz} that converges weakly to some x E S. WEAK COMPACTNESS OF A BALL. In any Hilbert space 71, the ball
B := {x E 7-l : IjxjM < 1} is weakly compact.
For comparison let us mention that the ball B is strongly compact if and only if dim 7-l < oo.
It is also worth mentioning' that any strongly closed subspace of 7-l is weakly closed, too - see Exercise A.5. Hence, the closedness of a subspace in the weak sense is equivalent to that in the strong sense.
Exercises. A.I. Prove that if {xk} and {yk} are two sequences in 9-l such that Xk -4 x and yk -* y then (xk, yk) - (x, y)
A.2. Prove that if xk - x then Ilxll
IixkII.
A.3. Let {xk} be a sequence of vectors in a Hilbert space 1-l and x E ?-l. (a) Prove that xk -3 x if and only of
xk - x and IIxkII - jjxHI. That is, the strong convergence is equivalent to the weak convergence and the convergence of the norms. (b) Prove that xk x if and only if the numerical sequence {jjxkjj} is bounded and, for a dense subset V of 7-l, (xk, y) --> (x, y) for any y E D.
That is, the weak convergence is equivalent to the convergence "in distribution" and the boundedness of the norms.
A.4. Let {vk}' 1 be an orthonormal sequence in 9-l. (a) Prove that vk 0 as k -+ oo. (b) Prove that, for any sequence of reals ck, the series Ckvk
k=1
converges weakly if and only if it converges strongly.
A.5. A subset S of a Hilbert space 9-l if called weakly closed if it contains all weak limits of all sequences from S. Prove that any closed subspace of 7-l is also weakly closed.
434
A. REFERENCE MATERIAL
A.3. Compact operators Let X, Y be two Banach spaces. A linear operator A : X -4 Y is called bounded if := inf IIAx1Jy o0 xEX\{o} 11xIIX
A linear operator A : X -- Y is called compact if, for any bounded set S C X, its images A (S) is a relatively compact subset of Y. Equivalently, this means that, for any bounded sequence {x,}°°_1 C X, there exists a subsequence {x, } such that A (xni) converges in Y. THEOREM. Any compact operator is bounded. Composition of a compact operator and a bounded operator is compact. Let ?-G be a Hilbert space. A a bounded operator A : 7d -4 7-l is called self-adjoint if (Ax, y) = (x, Ay) for all x, y E 7-l. A vector x E 7-l is called an eigenvector of A it x 0 and Ax = \x for some scalar A, which is called the eigenvalue of x. THE HILBERT-SCHMIDT THEOREM. Let A be a compact self-adjoint operator
in a Hilbert space 7-l. Then, in the orthogonal complement (ker A)1 of the
kernel of A, there exists an at most countable orthonormal basis {vk} 1, such that each Vk is an eigenvectors of the operator A. The corresponding eigenvalues Ak are real, and if N = oo then the sequence {Ak} tends to 0 as
k-3oo. Note that all the eigenvalues Ak are non-zero because vk ker A. If the space 7-1 is separable then ker A admits at most countable orthonormal basis, say {wi}. Obviously, wi is an eigenvector of A with the eigenvalue 0. Merging the bases {vk} and {wi}, we obtain an orthonormal basis in 7-l that consists of the eigenvectors of A.
A.4. Measure theory and integration A.4.1. Measure and extension. Let M be a set and S be a family of subsets of M containing the empty set 0. A measure on S is a function µ : S -4 [0, +oo] such that p (0) = 0 and, for any finite or countable sequence {Ei} of disjoint sets from S, if the union E = UiEi is in S then fI (E) _
p (E'i)
Measure p is called o-finite if there exists a countable sequence of sets {Ei}°_°1 from S covering M and such that p (Ei) < oo. A non-empty family S of subsets of M is called a semi-ring if the following two conditions holds:
E,FES = EnFES; E, F E S from S.
E \ F is a disjoint union of a finite family of sets
A.4. MEASURE THEORY AND INTEGRATION
435
For example, the family of all intervals' in R is a semi-ring, and so is the family of all boxes2 in Rn. A non-empty family R of subsets of M is called a ring if
E,FER =
E UFandE\F are also in R.
(A.1)
It follows from (A.1) that also E fl F E R. Hence, a ring is a semi-ring.
A family E of subsets of M is called a u-ring if it is a ring and, for any countable sequence {Ei}°_1 of sets from E, also their union UiEi is in
E. This implies that the intersection fliEi is also in E. Hence, a u-ring E is closed with respect to the set-theoretic operations fl, u, \ on countable sequences of sets. A u-ring E is called a u-algebra if M E E. For any semi-ring S, there is the minimal ring R = R (S) containing S, which is obtained as the intersection of all rings containing S. In fact, R (S) consists of sets which are finite disjoint unions of sets from S. If A is a measure on S then µ uniquely; extends to a measure on R (S), also denoted by p, and this extension is given by n
(A.2)
p (A) _ > p (Ai) whenever A E R (S) is a finite disjoint union of sets A1, ..., An E S.
For any ring R, there is the minimal or-ring E = E (R) containing R, which is obtained as the intersection of all o--rings containing R. CARATHEODORY EXTENSION THEOREM. Any measure p defined on a ring
R extends to a measure on the u-ring E (R); besides, this extension is unique provided measure µ is u-finite. The extended measure, again denoted by p, is defined for any A E E (R) by
0
p (A) = inf E )u (Ai) : Ai E R, A C U Ai
.
(A.3)
i=1
i=1
Let p be a measure defined on a or-ring E. A subset of M is called a null set if it is a subset of a set from E with /L-measure 0. Measure p is called complete if all null sets belong to E. An arbitrary measure can be extended to a compete measure as follows. Denote by E the family of sets of the form
E U N where E E E and N is a null set. Then E is a u-ring, and p can be extended to E by setting p (E U N) = p (E). Measure p with domain E is
_
complete.
In fact, the formula (A.3) is valid for all A E E (R). The extension of a measure p from a ring R (or from a semi-ring S) to a complete measure on E (R) is called the Caratheodory extension. 'Including open, closed, and semi-open intervals. 2A box in ]R' is a set of the form
Ilx...xl where Ik C JR are intervals.
A. REFERENCE MATERIAL
436
As an example of application of this procedure, consider construction of the Lebesgue measure in 1[8''. Let S be the semi-ring of all intervals in
and A (I) be the length of any interval I E S; in other words, if a < b are the ends of I (that is, I is one of the sets (a, b), [a, b], [a, b), (a, b]) then set A (I) = b - a. It is easy to see that A is a measure on S and, moreover, this measure is a-finite. More generally, for any box E C IR', define its n-volume an (E) as the product of the lengths of the sides of E. It is not difficult to prove that An, is a a-finite measure on the semi-ring S J
.
of all boxes. Hence, An admits a unique extension to the minimal a-ring (in fact, a-algebra) containing S. This a-algebra is denoted by B (R'), and the elements of B (1[8n) are called Borel sets.3 Null sets in JR are not necessarily Borel. Completing the a-algebra B (Rn) by adding the null sets, we obtain the a-algebra A (IR'2) of Lebesgue measurable sets. The extension of measure An to A (Rn) is called the n-dimensional Lebesgue measure.
The Lebesgue measure has an additional property, stated in the next theorem, which is called regularity and which links the measure with the topology.
THEOREM. Let p be the Lebesgue measure in I18n. For any compact set K C Rn, the measure p (K) is finite, and, for any Lebesgue measurable set A C I18n, p(A) satisfies the identities:
p (A) = sup {p (K) : K C A, K compact}
(A.4)
p (A) = inf {p (U) : A C Sl Sl open}.
(A.5)
and
A.4.2. Measurable functions. Let [t be a measure defined on a aalgebra in a set M. We say that a subset A C M is measurable (or µmeasurable) if A belongs to the domain of measure p. We will be consider-
ing functions on M, taking values in the extended real line [-oo,+oo]. A function f : M --p [-oo, +oo] is called measurable if the set {x E M : f (x) < t} is measurable for any real t. All algebraic operations on measurable functions result in measurable
functions provided they do not contain indeterminacies o, , and oo oo. Moreover, if fl, ..., fn are measurable functions on M taking values in 118 and F (xl,..., xT-) is a continuous function on JR'2 then F (fl,..., fn) is a 3The class 5 (1R') of Borel sets is very large. In particular, it contains all open and closed sets in R'. Denote by c the family of all open sets and by F the family of all closed sets. Next, denote by Qs the family of all countable intersections of open sets, and by Fo the family of all countable unions of closed sets. Similarly, one defines even larger families Qsa, F0. , gsos, Ts,, etc, which all are called Baire classes. Since 13 (Ha) is a o-algebra, it contains all the Baire classes, even those of transfinite order. It is a deep result from the set theory that, in fact, 13 (Rn) coincides with the union of all the Baire classes.
A.4. MEASURE THEORY AND INTEGRATION
437
measurable function on M. If { fn}' 1 is a sequence of measurable functions then lim sup fn and lim inf fn are always measurable.
A.4.3. Lebesgue integration. We say that a couple (M, tt) is a measure space if tt is a complete a-finite measure defined on a a-algebra in the set M. Let (M, tt) be a measure space and f : M -3 [0, +co] be a measurable function on M. Define a partition of [0, +oo] as a finite increasing sequence of positive reals. For any partition {tk}k-1, consider the corresponding Lebesgue integral sum: tkl-t {x E M : tk < .f (x) < tk+1 } , k=1
where we set tn+1 := +00. The supremum of all Lebesgue integral sums over all partitions {tk} is called the Lebesgue integral of f against measure
IL and is denoted byt
If
f dlr.
Note that this integral takes values in [0, +oo]. Another point of view on this definition is as follows. By definition, a simple function is a finite linear combination of the indicator functions of disjoint measurable sets. Any partition {tk}k-1 of [0, +oo] is associated with the simple function n
g (x) _
E WE,
(A.6)
,
k=1
where
Ek := tt {x E M : tk < f (x) < tk+1} It is natural to define the integral of g (x) by
.
I gdl-t :_ E tkA (Ek) M
k=1
Obviously, we have f > g. On the other hand, considering a sequence of nested partitions like {2k}k__n, we obtain an increasing sequence {gn} of simple functions that converges to f pointwise as n -* oo. Hence, it is natural to set
JM
fdp=sup{fm gdp},
) 9 l where sup is taken over all simple functions g as in (A.6). Clearly, this
definition of the integral is equivalent to the one with the Lebesgue integral sums.
A measurable function f : M -* [-oo, +oc] is said to be integrable against tt if IM If I dµ < oo.
438
A. REFERENCE MATERIAL
Equivalently, f is integrable if both function f+ and f_ are integrable, where f± := f 2±f are the positive and negative parts of f . For an integrable function, define its integral against y by
fM fdJM fd- fM f_dµ.
(A.7)
In this case, the value of fm f d,u is a real number. The set of integrable functions is a linear space, and the integral is a linear functional on this space.
If f > 0 is a measurable function and A is a measurable subset of M then set
fdp :_ f M
A
The identity v (A) fA f dii defines a measure v on the same o--algebra as p. The function f is called the density of measure v with respect to p (or the Radon-Nikodym derivative of v) and is denoted by The integral fA f dµ for a signed function f is defined similarly to (A.7). We say that two measurable functions f, g are equal almost everywhere and write f = g a.e.
if f (x) = g (x) everywhere except for a null set, that is, u {x E M: f (x) zA g (x)} = 0. In the same way, a.e. applies to inequalities and other relations. It follows easily from the definition of the integral that, for a non-negative measurable function f,
and
I
f dp < oo
JM
f < oo a.e.
fdp=0< f =0a.e.
Since the measure µ is complete, changing a measurable function on a null set results in a measurable function. If f = g a.e. then the properties of
f and g with respect to integration are identical: they are integrable or not synchronously, and in the former case their integrals are equal. This allows to extend the notion of integral to functions that are defined almost everywhere (that is, outside a set of measure 0).
A.4.4. Convergence theorems. We state below the theorems about passage to the limit under the integral sign, which are most useful in applications. FATOU'S LEMMA. If { fk} is a sequence of non-negative measurable functions then JM lim fk d/l < lk f / fkdloi of
A.4. MEASURE THEORY AND INTEGRATION
439
MONOTONE CONVERGENCE THEOREM. (B. Levi's theorem)If { fk} is an increasing sequence of non-negative measurable functions then
lim fk dµ IM k oo
lim
k
oo
f
M
fkdN
DOMINATED CONVERGENCE THEOREM. (Lebesgue's theorem) Let { fk} be
a sequence of measurable functions satisfying the following two conditions: for some non-negative integrable function F,
Ifk (x) I < F (x) a.e. the limit limk-,,,,, fk (x) exists a.e.. Then (A.8) holds.
If tc (M) Goo then any bounded measurable function is integrable. Hence, we obtain the following.p`rticular case of the dominated convergence theorem. BOUNDED CONVERGENCE THEOREM. Let p (M) < oo and { fk} be a sequence of measurable functions satisfying the following two conditions: for some positive constant C, I fk (x) I < C a.e.
the limit limk-,, fk (x) exists a.e.. Then (A.8) holds.
A.4.5. Lebesgue function spaces. Let (M, p) be a measure space. The relation f = g a.e. is obviously an equivalence relation between measurable functions. For any measurable function f, denote its equivalence class by [f]. For any 1 < p < oo, define the p-norm of a measurable function f on M by 1/P
Ilfllp = (fM IfJPdp) IIfIIoo
,
1
= e uplfI :=9
[f1snpIgl
M
We say that the parameters p, q c [1, +oo] are Holder conjugate if 1
p
1
+ 1=1. q
HOLDER INEQUALITY. If p, q are Holder conjugate then, for all measurable
functions f, g, fM I fgl dy < IIf IIpIIgIIq
A. REFERENCE MATERIAL
440
Furthermore, the following identity holds dµ
If IIp = sup
UM
11911q<1
fg
fM I f9l dp s IIf II.IIgII1
and the Cauchy-Schwarz inequality IMIf9I dµ < IIfII2II9II2.
The p-norm possesses also the following properties:
IIf+gIIP<_IlfII +IIOIIp. IIAfIIp = JAI IIfIIp for any real A.
Rt
IIf IIp = 0 if and only if f = 0 a.e.`'that is, [f ] = 0. In particular, If] = [g] implies II f II p = IIgIIp, which allows to extend the p-norm to the equivalence classes of measurable functions. Define the Lebesgue space LP = LP (M) = LP (M, p) by .
I ? = J[f] : f is a measurable function on M and 11f I I p < oo } .
It follows from the above properties of the p-norm, that LP is a linear space and the p-norm is a norm on L. In fact, we will only use the spaces L1, L2, L°°, where the space L2 is of particular importance. To simplify the terminology, it is customary to say that a certain function f belongs to LP and to write f E LP, while in fact If] c LP. The 1.9--norm of a function f E LP will also be denoted by If II LP or II f II LP(M) or IIf II LP(M,Fi)
The following theorem is of paramount importance and justifies alone the measure theory and Lebesgue integration. THEOREM. The normed space LP (M, tt) is complete for any 1 < p G co; that is, LP (M, p) is a Banach space. The space L2 (M, i) is particularly useful, because its norm is associated with the following inner product4 (f, 9)L2 = im f gdyHence, L2 (M, A) is a Hilbert space. 4Here we consider only real valued functions. For complex valued functions, the definition of the inner product in L2 should be modified as follows: (f19)L2 =
where g is the complex conjugate of g.
IM
f9dA,
A.4. MEASURE THEORY AND INTEGRATION
441
We say that a sequence { fk} of functions converges to a function f f (or fl, -+ f a.e.) if almost everywhere and write fk
p{xEM: fk(x)/* f(x)}=0. IIfk-fIlp-40.
The following result is a version of the dominated convergence theorem. DOMINATED CONVERGENCE THEOREM IN LP. Let p E [1, +oo) and { fk} be a
sequence of functions from LP (M, p) satisfying the following two conditions: for some non-negative function F E LP (M, p),
Ifk(x)I
f for some function f .
Then f E LP (M, p) and fk: * f. PROOF. Function f is measurable as the limit of measurable functions. Since I fkI < F a.e. and, hence, also I f I < F a.e., function f belongs to
LP (M, p). Since If - fk I P -+ 0 a.e.,
If-fklp<2PFP, and the function FP is integrable, the dominated convergence theorem yields
IIf - fkllp=
fM
f -fkId0.
The following partial converse is true.
THEOREM. If { fk} a sequence of functions LP (M, p) and fk there exists a subsequence { fkz} such that fk,, a4' f. Recall that a simple function is a function of the form
f then
n
CklEk , k=1
where n E N, Ck E R \ {0} and Ek are disjoint measurable sets. Assuming that all ck 0 0, it is easy to see that a simple function f is integrable if and only if all sets Ek have finite measures, and in this case f E LP (M, p) for any p E [1, oo]. The following useful property of simple functions follows directly from the definition of the integral. THEOREM. The set of integrable simple functions is dense in LP (M, p) for any p E [1, oo) .
A. REFERENCE MATERIAL
442
Exercises. A.6. Let { fk} be a sequence of functions from L2 (M, µ) such that fk
z
f Prove that
esup f < liminf (esup fk)
(A.9)
einf f > lim sup (einf fk) .
(A.10)
k-too
and k-+oo
A.7. Prove that if fk
L2
f then fk L' f2Hence or otherwise show that, for any function
9 E L°°,
f fkg dµ -+ fm
f2 g dµ.
M
A.4.6. Product measures. Let X1, X2 be40two non-empty sets and
S1, S2 be semi-rings of subsets of X1 and X2, respectively. Consider the following family of subsets of the set X1 X X2:
S1xS2:={AxB:AeS1iBES2}, which is also a semi-ring. THEOREM. Assume that pi and P2 are as-finite measures on semi-rings S1 and S2 on the sets X1 and X2 respectively. Then the functional -
p(Ax B) :=pi(A) x P2 (B), is a a-finite measure on S1 x S2. By Caratheodory's extension theorem, p can be then uniquely extended to the u-algebra of measurable sets on X1 x X2. The extended measure is denoted by /-p1 X A2 or Al ® A2 and is called the product measure of µl and P2
Observe that the product-measure is c-finite (and complete). Hence, one can define by induction the product µl x ... x µ,,, of a finite sequence of a--finite measures pl, ..., IL,. This product satisfies the associative law. The following property of the product measures is frequently useful. THEOREM. The set of all finite linear combinations of functions of the form 1AxB is dense in LP (X x Y, p x v), 1 < p < oo, where A and B run over all measurable subsets with finite measures of X and Y, respectively.
A.4.7. F ubini's theorem. Given a function f (x, y) on the product X x Y of two sets X, Y, we refer to the function y H f (x, y) for a fixed x C X as the x-section of f . Similarly, the function x 1-4 f (x, y) for a fixed y c- Y is called the y-section of f. FUBINI'S THEOREM. Let p and v be complete u-finite measure on sets X and Y, respectively. Consider the product space X x Y with measure p x v.
A.4. MEASURE THEORY AND INTEGRATION
443
(i) If a function f : X x Y - [0, +oo] is measurable on X x Y then M-almost all x- and v-almost all y-sections off are measurable, the functions
xHf
f (x) y) dv (y)
and y H
Y
f
f (x, y) dy (x)
(A.11)
are measurable on X and Y, respectively, and
Ix xY
J[ff(xY)dv(Y)]dP(x)
f d (l,c x v)
,
l=[ff(xY)d(x)] dv (y)
JY
.
(ii) If f : X x Y --* R is integrable on X x Y then It-almost all x- and v-almost all y-section' of f are integrable, the functions (A.11) are integrable on X and Y respectively, and (A.12) holds. The part (i) is known also as Tonelli's theorem. The following corollary is frequently useful.
COROLLARY. If a function f : X x Y -- J is measurable and its almost all x-sections are integrable on Y then the function
x F J f (x, y) dv (y)
(A.13)
Y
is measurable.
PROOF. The integrability of the x-sections of f means that the x-sections of f+ and f_ are integrable. Hence, the functions
x H ff+(x,y)dv(y)
and
x
ff_(x,y)dv()
are finite almost everywhere. By part (i) of Fubini's theorem, these two functions are measurable. Therefore, the function (A.13) is measurable as the difference of two finite measurable functions. EXAMPLE A. 1. A classical application of Fubini's theorem is the evaluation of the following integral
I=f
e-x2dx. 00
A. REFERENCE MATERIAL
444
Indeed, using Fubini's theorem, we obtain I2
(J .7e-x2 dx) ( J 77e-y2 dy J 00
V
00 00
J
oo
e-x2dx
e-y2dy
e-(x2+y2)dy dx oo
e-(x2+y2)da, 1R2
where A is the Lebesgue measure in R2. Switching to the polar coordinates (cf. Example 3.23), we obtain
I e-(x2+y2)dA = R2
J0
-r2dOrdr Usi
f00
/ 00
0
o
= 27r r e-'r rdr = 7r f
e-r2 dr2 = 7r.
Hence, 12 = 7r and I = Vr7-, that is, °O
e-xz dx =
,/i.
A.S. Self-adjoint operators A.5.1. Operators in a Hilbert space. An operator A in a Hilbert space W is a linear mapping A : D - ?l where D is a linear subspace of 71 called the domain of A and denoted by dom A. We say that A is densely defined if dom A is dense in R. Define the norm of the operator A by IIAII =
xEdomA\{o} p
IIII
(A.14)
11X11
The finiteness of the norm IIAII is equivalent to the continuity of A and to the uniform continuity of A. Hence, if A is densely defined and IIAII < oo then
the operator A uniquely extends to an operator defined on 'H and having the same norm. The operator A is said to be bounded5 if domA = ' and IIAII < oo.
For any two operators A and B, their sum A + B and product AB are defined as follows:
(A+B)x =Ax+Bx for x E dom(A+B) :=domAf1domB and (AB) (x) = A (B (x)) for x E dom (AB) :_ {x E dom B : Bx E dom A} . 5Unlike the notion of a bounded linear functional, the definition of a bounded operator
includes the requirement that the domain is the whole space W, which is motivated by certain results of the spectral theory.
A.5. SELF-ADJOINT OPERATORS
445
Clearly, if A and B are bounded then also A + B and AB are bounded and IIA + BII _< IIAII +IIBII and IIABII <_ IIAII IIBII Therefore, the set B (7i) of all bounded operators on 7{ is a normed algebra. Furthermore, it is complete and hence is a Banach algebra. Alongside the topology associated with the operator norm, C3 (7{) features the strong operator topology, which induces the strong convergence as follows: Ak -+ A strongly if Akx --* Ax for all x E 7 1. The weak operator topology corresponds to the weak convergence defined as follows: Ak -* A weakly if (Akx, y) -3 (Ax, y) for all x, y E W. Let A be a densely defined linear operator in 7-l with the domain D. Consider the subspace D* = {y E 71 : x -+ (Ax, y) is a bounded functional in x e D}
.
(A.15)
Using the Riesz representation theorem, (A.15) can be rewritten as follows:
D*={yE7{:3!ae7-I suclfthat (Ax,y)=(x,a)for all xEDI
.
(A.16)
The adjoint operator A* is defined as follows: set dom A* = D* and, for any y E D*, set A*y = a. As a consequence of this definition, we obtain the identity (Ax, y) = (x, A* y)
for all x E dom A and y E dom A* .
Let us emphasize that the adjoint operator is defined only if A is densely defined, but in general A* is not necessarily densely defined. An operator B is called an extension of an operator A if domA C domB and BIdomA = A. In this case we write A C B. Obviously, if A C B then B* C A*. An operator A is called symmetric if (Ax, y) = (x, Ay)
for all x, y E dom A.
(A.17)
If A is a symmetric (and densely defined) operator then obviously A C A*. In particular, for any densely defined symmetric operator, its adjoint is also densely defined. We say that the operator A is self-adjoint if A* = A. Any self-adjoint operator is symmetric but the converse is in general not true. However, if A is a bounded operator then it is self-adjoint if and only if it is symmetric. If A is a symmetric operator and B is a self-adjoint extension of A then we have
ACB=B*cA*. The operator A is called non-negative definite if (Ax, x) > 0 for all x E dom A.
A. REFERENCE MATERIAL
446
Exercises. A.8. If an operator A in f is injective and surjective then one defines the inverse operator A-1 such that, for any x E 9-l, A-1x is the unique vector y E domA such that Ay = x. (a) Prove that if A-1 exists then AA-1 = id and A-1A C id. (b) Prove that if A and B are two operators such that
AB=id and BA C id then A-1 exists and A-1 = B. A.9. Prove that, for any operator A in a Hilbert space, IIAII =
sup
(Ax, y) .
(A.18)
-Edom A,11x1] <1, I{yll <1
A.10. Prove that, for any bounded operator A, the adjoint operator A* is also bounded and
IIAII = IIA*II
and
IIA*A11= IIA112.
A. 11. Let A be a densely defined symmetric non-negative definite operator. (a) Prove that, for all x, y E dom A, (Ax, y)2 < (Ax, x) (Ay, y).
(A.19)
(b) Prove that IIAII =
sup
(Ax, x) .
xEdom A,!ixjI <1
A.12. Let A be a densely defined self-adjoint operator. (a) Prove that (ran A)1 = ker A and (ker A)1 = ran A. (b) Prove that A is invertible and the inverse A-1 is bounded if and only if there exists c > 0 such that IIAx11 > c11xjI for all x E dam A.
(A.20)
A.13. A densely defined operator A in a Hilbert space 9-l is called closed if, for any sequence {xk } C dom A, the conditions Xk -* x and Axk -* y imply x E dom A and Ax = y.
(a) Prove that any self-adjoint operator is closed. (b) Prove that if A is a non-negative definite self-adjoint operator then dom A is a Hilbert space with respect to the following inner product: (x, y) + (Ax, Ay) .
A.5.2. Lebesgue-Stieltjes integration. Let F (A) be a function on IR
satisfying the following conditions:
F is monotone increasing, left-continuous, F (-oo) = 0, F (-oo) < oo. (A.21)
Function F can be used to define a new Borel measure FU on R. Indeed, first define FU when U is a semi-open interval [a, b):
F[a,b) = F (b) - F (a). This includes also F(_,,b) = F (b). It is obvious that all semi-open intervals form a semi-ring. It is possible to prove that FU is a a-additive function on this semi-ring and hence, by the Caratheodory extension theorem, FU can be extended to all Borel sets U. The measure FU on Borel sets is called the Lebesgue-Stieltjes measure. Note that the measure FU is finite because
A.5. SELF-ADJOINT OPERATORS
447
F(_00,+00) = F(+oo) < oo, which implies, in particular, that the extension FU is unique. Hence, we can integrate any Borel function6 co (A) on 1l against the measure FU. Such an integral is called the Lebesgue-Stieltjes integral of cp against F and it is denoted by +00
(A.22)
cp(A)dF(A),
f
when it exists. The function cy is called integrable against F if +00
J_00 I cp (A) I dF (A) < oo.
In particular, any bounded Borel function is integrable against F. For example, for co = 1 we have e +00
dF (A) = F (+oo) < oo,
(A.23)
JJ
and, for all a < b,
f
+00
1 [a,,b)dF (A) = F[a,,b) = F (b) - F (a). 00
Let us now extend the definition of the integral (A.22) to a larger class of functions F. Let F be any function on R. We say that a Borel function cp is integrable against F if there are two functions F1 and F2 satisfying (A.21) such that F = F1 - F2 and cp is integrable against F1 and F2. In this case,. set
f
+00
co (A) dF (A) :=
f.+wco (A) dF1(A) - f.+w w (A) dF2 (A).
(A.24)
00
In fact, the value of the right hand side in (A.24) does not depend on the choice of F1 and F2 (see Exercise A.18).
Exercises. A.M. Let F be a function satisfying (A.21), and let FU be the associated Lebesgue-Stieltjes
measure on R. Set F (a+) := lima,a,+ F (A) and prove that, for all a < b, F(a,b) F[a b]
F{a} F(a,b)
= F (b) - F (a+), = F (b+) - F (a) , = F (a+) - F (a) , = F (b+) - F (a+) .
A.15. Let {sk}k_. be a double sequence of reals and let {tk}k _. be a double sequence of positive reals such that >k tk < co. Define function F by F (A) = T tk.
(A.25)
{k:sk<)\}
(a) Prove that F satisfies the conditions (A.21). 6A function cp is called Borel if the set {A : y (A) < c} is Borel for any real c. This condition enables one to define Lebesgue integral sums of W _against any Borel measure.
A. REFERENCE MATERIAL
448
(b) Prove that, for any Borel set U, FU =
tk.
(A.26)
{k:skEU}
(c) Prove that, for any non-negative Borel function cp on IR,
f(A)dF(A)
tk(sk)
.
(A.27)
kEZ
OO
on R is integrable against F if and only if
(d) Prove that a Borel function
EtkIco(sk)I <00, kEZ
and its integral against F is given by (A.27).
A.M. Prove that if function F satisfies (A.21) and F is continuously differentiable then
+ cP (A) dF (A) = f + V,(,X) F' (A) dA,
if 00
(A.28)
00
for any non-negative Borel function V.
A.17. For any function F on R, defined its total variation on IR by
var F := sup
IF (.1k+1) - F (Ak)j
(A.29)
{ak} kEZ where the supremum is taken over all increasing double sequences {Ak}kEZ such that
Ak -* -oo as k -+ -oo and Ak -* +eo as k -3 +oo. (a) Show that F is the difference of two bounded monotone increasing functions if and only if var F < oo. (b) Show that F is the difference of two functions satisfying (A.21) if and only if F is left-continuous and var F < oo. (c) Let F be a left-continuous function on IR such that var F < oo. Prove that
varF= sup J Iw151
cp(A)dF 00
where the supremum is taken over all continuous functions cp on R such that co (A) 1 for all X.
(d) Show that if F E C1 (R) then
varF =
f
IF'(A)IdA.
A.18. Let F be any function on R. We say that a Borel function co is integrable against F if there are two functions F(' and F(2) satisfying (A.21) such that F = F(1) - F(2) and V is integrable against F(1) and F(2). In this case, set
f
P (A) dF (A)
f
+00
co (A) dF(l) (A) -
+
cP (A) dF(2) (A)
(A.30)
Prove that the value of the right hand side of (A.30) does not depend on the choice of F(1) and F12.
A.5. SELF-ADJOINT OPERATORS
449
A.5.3. Spectral resolution. With any closed subspace S C 7-l and any x E 7-1, there is a unique vector y c S such that x - yIS. The vector y is called the (orthogonal) projection of x onto S. The projector P is the operator with the domain 9-l such that Px is the projection of x onto S. For example, the identity operator id is the projector onto 3-t, and zero operator is the projector onto the trivial subspace {0}. It turns out that P is a bounded linear operator and IIPII < 1. It is obvious that p2 = P. Furthermore, P is non-negative definite and self-adjoint. DEFINITION A.2. A family {Ea}AER of operators in 9-l is called a spectral
resolution (or resolution of identity) if the following conditions are satisfied: EA is a projector for any A E R. The mapping A H E,\ is monotone in the sense that A < A' implies
ranEa C ranEA,. The mapping A
EA is strongly left continuous, and
lim Ea = 0,
lim Ea = id,
where the limits are understood also in the strong sense. It follows from this definition that, for any x E ?-L, the function F (A) IIEaxll2 satisfies the condition (A.21); in addition, we have F,(+oo) = 11x112. EXAMPLE A.3. It follows from (A.23) that +00
f
(A.31)
d11Eax112 =11x112. CKD
For any two vectors x, y e 9-l, we have
(Eax, y) = (EAx, y) = (Eax, EAY) = 4 (IlEa (x + y) 112 - I EA (x - y) 112) We see that the function F (A) _ (EAx, y) is the difference of two functions
satisfying (A.21) and hence can be integrated against. In particular, we obtain from the above two lines
f
+00
00
d(EAx,y) =
il
14 f+00 d1IEa(x-y)112 00
4 (Iix + y112 - Ilx - yI12)
(A.32)
(x, y)
LEMMA. Let co (A) be a Borel function on R. If
then the integral
f
+oo
IW (x)12 dllEaxll2 < 00 Do
+00
J_ 00
co(A)d(Eax,y)
exists for any y E ?-l and determines a bounded linear functional of y.
450
A. REFERENCE MATERIAL
Hence, by the Riesz representation theorem, there exists a unique vector, denoted by J,,x, which satisfies the identity +00
(4x, y) = J
(A.33)
co (A) d (EAx, y) .
THEOREM. Mapping x " Jx is a linear operator in 71 with domain
f
l
71+00 +00
J-
XE
I(p (A)I2 dllEaxli2 < 00
5
(A.34)
00
which is a dense linear subspace of 7-l. Moreover, Jc is a self-adjoint operator. Also, for any x E dom J., +00
J
dIIEAxl12.
(A.35)
00
Now, we can define the integral f +0 cp(A')dEA by +00
J
W (A)dE.,, := J.
(A.36)
cp(A)dEAx := Jvx,
(A.37)
00
We will also use the notation +00
J
CKD
so that the defining identity (A.33) becomes (
f+'
+00
co(A)dE. x, y) = f
w (A) d (EAx, y) .
(A.38)
00
If S is a Borel subset of R and cp is a Borel function on S then set
f 7 (A) dEa f So(A)dEA = +0_ s
0o
where p is the extension of cp to IR, which vanishes outside S.
EXAMPLE A.4. If cp - 0 then (A.33) implies that J, = 0. If cp = 1 then it follows from (A.32) and (A.33) that
(JJx, y) =
I
+00
d (EAx, y) = (x, y)
whence J. = id. In other words, +00
1-00 dEa = id. EXAMPLE A.S. Let y be a bounded Borel function. It follows from (A.31) and (A.34) that dom J. = R. Moreover, (A.35) implies that
II442 < sup 10 IIxIl2
A.S. SELF-ADJOINT OPERATORS
451
Hence, in this case J. is a bounded operator and 11411 <_ sup ICI
Exercises. A.19. Prove the following properties of projectors in a Hilbert space. (a) Any projector P is a linear bounded self-adjoint operator and P2 = P.
(b) For any bounded self-adjoint operator A such that A2 = A, its range ran A is a closed subspace and A is the projector onto ran A. (c) Any projector P is non-negative definite, and IJPII = 1 unless P = 0.
A.20. Let P be a projector and let {vk} be an orthonormal basis in 9-l. Prove that jj k
I I Pvk 112 = dim ran P.
A.21. Let {Ea}AEA be a spectral resolution in a Hilbert space W.
(a) Prove that if a < b then (A.39) EaEb = EbEa = Ea. (b) Prove that Eb - Ea is a projector for all a < b. Hence or otherwise prove that the
IIEaxJI is monotone increasing, for any x E 94. function A (c) For a Borel set U C R, define the operator
EU := [ dEa U
Prove that, for all -oo < a < b < +oo, E[a,b) = Eb - Ea.
(A.40)
(d) Prove that if the intervals [a1, b1) and [a2, b2) are disjoint then the subspaces ran E(a1,b1) and ran E1a2rb2) are orthogonal.
A.22. Let Pi, ..., Pk be projectors in 9-l such that ran Pal ran Pj for i
j. Consider the
operator A = L Ai pi, i=1
where A, are reals. Let cp (A) = ao + a1 A + ...a,,,A' be a polynomial with real coefficients, and define the operator
W (A) := ao id+a1A+ ... + a.nA".
Prove that k
(A.41)
SP(A)=EV(Ai)Pi i=1
and, for any x E 3-l, k
(),i)2
III (A) xII2 =
IIPix1I2.
i=1
Prove also that if cp and ,0 are two polynomials then cp (A) + 0 (A) _ (co -E- qb) (A)
(A.42)
and (A) V) (A) _ (wO) (A) .
(A.43)
452
A. REFERENCE MATERIAL
A.5.4. Spectrum and Spectral Theorem. For any linear operator A in a complex Hilbert space W, we say that a complex number A is a regular
value of A if the operator A - Aid has a bounded inverse; that is, if ker (A - aid) _ {0} , ran (A - aid) _ 'H, and II (A - aid)-' II < oo. Any A E C which is not a regular value is called a singular value. The set of all regular values is called the resolvent of A, and the set of all singular values is called the spectrum of A and is denoted by spec A. It is known that spec A is a closed subset of C. For example, if A is an eigenvalue of A, that A if Ax = Ax for some x y 0 then A belongs to the spectrum of A. In this case, dim ker (A - Aid) is positive and is called the multiplicity of A. If the multiplicity of A is 1 then A is called a simple eigenvalue. If A is an operator in a real Hilbert space 'H then define first the complexified space WC _ ' ® il-l, extend A by linearity to an operator AC in 'C, and then set spec A = spec Ac. We Will apply the notion of spectrum only to self-adjoint operators. THEOREM. For any self-adjoint operator A, the spectrum spec A is a nonempty closed subset of R. Also, we have
IIAII = sup
)Espec A
JAI.
(A.44)
Hence, a posteriori, we do not need to consider a complexified operator AC when we deal with the spectrum of a self-adjoint operator. It follows from (A.44) that A is bounded if and only if its spectrum is bounded. The full strength of the notion of spectrum is determined by the following theorem. SPECTRAL THEOREM. Let A be a self-adjoint operator in a real Hilbert space W. Then there exists a unique spectral resolution {E.\} in 'H such that the following spectral decomposition takes place:
A=f
+c
AdEA.
(A.45)
Furthermore, for any Borel function cp vanishing on spec A,
f+
In particular, the second statement implies that also
A=f
AdEA.
(A.46)
pec A
The integrals (A.45) and (A.46) are understood in the sense (A.36). In other words, the operator A coincides with the operator J. defined by (A.36) with the function cp(A) -= A or, more generally, with any function cp (A) that is equal to A on spec A.
A.5. SELF-ADJOINT OPERATORS
453
For any Borel function cp defined on spec A, define the operator cp (A) by setting cp (A) = J.; that is, cp(A) :_
(A.47)
fW (A) dEa, pec A
and
dom cp(A) :_ {x E W:
I
pec A
I(p (A)I2 dIIEAxIt2 <
}
(A.48)
Hence, cp (A) is a self-adjoint operator. It follows from (A.38), for all x E dom cp (A) and y E W,
(cp (A) x, y) = f
W (A) d (EAx, y).
(A.49)
pec A
Also, (A.35) implies, for all x E dom o(A), spec A
I(p (A)I2
dllEAxll2.
(A.50)
In particular, if the function cp is bounded on spec A then cp(A) is a bounded
operator and (A.51)
IIp(A)II <_ sup ICI spec A
EXAMPLE A.6. If cp (A) = A then co (A) = A. If cp - 1 then cp (A) = id. More generally, if W (A) = 1[a b) then So (A) = Eb - Ea. SPECTRAL MAPPING THEOREM. For any Borel function cp on spec A, spec cy (A) C cp (spec A),
(A.52)
where the bar means taking closure in R. If cp is continuous then, in fact, spec cp (A) = cp (spec A).
It follows that, for a continuous function cp, III (A) II =
Is! = sup
sup sEspec W(A)
Icp (,\)I.
(A.53)
)Espec A
In the case when spec A is compact, this implies that the mapping cp H cp (A)
(A.54)
is a norm-preserving mapping between the Banach spaces C (spec A) and 13 ('c).
FUNCTIONAL CALCULUS OF OPERATORS. For any self-adjoint operator A and for all Borel functions
(A)
(A)
(cp (A)
dom
(A) (A.55)
.
454
A. REFERENCE MATERIAL
and C (c b) (A)
(A) (1 domo(A)
dom
,
.
(A.56)
In particular, if both functions cp and 0 are bounded then we have cp (A) + ii (A) _ (cp + 0) (A) and cp(A)0(A) _ (cp ) (A)
.
(A.57)
Hence, the mapping (A.54) is in fact a homomorphism from the Banach algebra of functions C (spec A) to the Banach algebra of operators 8 (9i). In fact, (A.57) holds if only 0 is assumed bounded.
Exercises. A.23. Let A be self-adjoint operator, and cp and 0 be Borel functions on spec A.
(a) Prove that SP (A) +,p (A) _ (W +
_provided either both functions co, 0 are non-negative or one of them is bounded.
(b) Prove that
(A),
V (A) V) (A) =
provided & is bounded.
A.24. Let A be a densely defined self-adjoint operator. (a) Prove that if the inverse A-1 exists and is a bounded operator then A-1 = A. Here the operator A is defined by A := z/i (A) where 0 (A) = a on spec A. (b) Prove that if spec A C [0, +oo) then there exists a non-negative definite self-adjoint operator X such that X2 = A. (c) Prove that if spec A C [0, +oo) then ran e-A C dom A.
A.25. Let A be a compact self-adjoint operator, and let {vk} be an orthonormal basis in (ker A)' of the eigenvectors of A with the eigenvalues {Ak}, which is guaranteed by the Hilbert-Schmidt theorem. Prove that specA consists of the sequence {Ak} and, possibly, 0.
A.26. Let A be a densely defined self-adjoint operator. (a) Prove that A is non-negative definite if and only if spec A C [0, +oo). (b) Set a= inf (Ax, x) and b= sup (Ax, x) . xEdom A
xEdom A
1Ixll=1
HHzIl=1
Prove that
inf spec A = a and
sup spec A = b.
A.27. Let {EA} be a spectral resolution of a self-adjoint operator A. For any Borel set U C R, define the operator Eu by
Eu := lu (A) =
r
Ju
dEa.
The mapping U -+ Eu is called a spectral measure. (a) Prove that Eu is a projector. Show that if U = [a, b) where a < b then Eu = Eb-Ea. In particular, E(_,,,,,b) = Eb. (b) Prove that if Ul C U2 then ran Eu1 C ran Eu2 . (c) Prove that if U, and U2 are disjoint then ran Eu11 ran Eu2.
A.6. GAMMA FUNCTION
455
(d) Prove that if {Ui}°°1 is an increasing sequence of Borel sets in R and U = U°°1 Ui then Eu -+ EU in the strong topology. Prove that the same is true if the sequence {Ui} is decreasing and U = h°°1 Ui. A.28. Let A be a densely defined self-adjoint operator and {Ex} be its spectral resolution. 1{a} (A) is the projector onto the (a) Prove that if a is an eigenvalue of A then E{a,} eigenspace of a.
(b) Prove that if a is an eigenvalue of A with an eigenvector x then, for any Borel function co on spec A, x E dom co (A) and
cp(A)x=cp(a)x. A.29. Let A be a self-adjoint operator whose spectrum consists of a finite sequence A1, ..., Ak. Let Pi be the projector onto the eigenspace of A , that is, ran Pi = ker (A - Ai id).
Prove that A = Ek 1 AiPi. A.30. Let A be a densely defined non-negative definite self-adjoint operator in 3'l and {EA} be its spectral resolution. Let be a sequence of Borel functions on [0, +oo) such that, for all n and A E [0, +00),
o;(A) I
f
(A) dJEAx112 <
,
(A.58)
for some x E 9-l. Prove that if cp (A) -* cp (A) for any A E [0, +oo) then x E dom cp (A) fl dom cp (A) and cc
(A) x -+ cp (A) x.
A.6. Gamma function The gamma function is defined by the identity
r (z) = ftz_letdt,
(A.59)
for all z > 0. Here are some useful properties of r (z).
(1) F (z + 1) = zF (z) for all z > 0, which follows from (A.59) by integration by parts using ztz-1 dt = d (tz). (2) F (1) = 1 and F (2) = VT7r (the latter follows from (1.13)). (3) If n is a positive integer then r (n) = (n - 1)! and
Fl\\n+2)
=2
(4) For all a > 2 and r > 0, the following identity holds
J
o
s-a'2 exp
(-i--) ds
= F (a/2 - 1) 4«/21r2,
which is proved by the change t = 4s in the integral.
(A.60)
Bibliography 1. Adams R., “Sobolev spaces”, Academic Press, 1975. 2. Alexopoulos G.K., A lower estimate for central probabilities on polycyclic groups, Can. J. Math., 44 (1992) no.5, 897-910. 3. Alexopoulos G.K., An application of Homogenization theory to Harmonic analysis on solvable Lie groups of polynomial growth, Pacific J. Math., 159 (1993) 19-45. 4. Ancona A., Negatively curved manifolds,elliptic operators and the Martin boundary, Ann. of Math., 125 (1987) 495-536. 5. Ancona A., Th´eorie du potentiel sur des graphes et des vari´et´es, in: “Cours de l’Ecole d’´et´e de probabilit´es de Saint-Flour, 1988”, Lecture Notes Math. 1427, Springer, 1990. 4-112. 6. Anderson M.T., Schoen R., Positive harmonic function on the complete manifolds of negative curvature, Ann. of Math., 121 (1983) 429-461. 7. Anker J-Ph., Ji L., Heat kernel and Green function estimates on non-compact symmetric spaces, Geom. Funct. Anal., 9 (1999) 1035-1091. 8. Anker J-Ph., Ostellari P., The heat kernel on noncompact symmetric spaces, in: “Lie groups and symmetric spaces”, Amer. Math. Soc. Transl. Ser. 2, 210, (2003) 27–46. 9. Aronson D.G., Bounds for the fundamental solution of a parabolic equation, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc., 73 (1967) 890-896. 10. Aronson D.G., Non-negative solutions of linear parabolic equations, Ann. Scuola Norm. Sup. Pisa. Cl. Sci. (4), 22 (1968) 607-694. Addendum 25 (1971) 221-228. 11. Ashbaugh M. S., Isoperimetric and universal inequalities for eigenvalues, in: “Spectral theory and geometry (Edinburgh, 1998)”, 95–139. London Math. Soc. Lecture Note Ser. 273, Cambridge Univ. Press, Cambridge, 1999. 12. Atiyah M., Bott R., Patodi V. K., On the heat equation and the index theorem, Invent. Math., 19 (1973) 279–330. Errata Invent. Math., 28 (1975) 277–280. 13. Auscher P., Coulhon T., Gaussian lower bounds for random walks from elliptic regularity, Ann. Inst. Henri Poincar´e - Probabilit´es et Statistiques, 35 (1999) no.5, 605-630. 14. Auscher P., Coulhon T., Grigor’yan A., ed., “Heat kernels and analysis on manifolds, graphs, and metric spaces”, Contemporary Mathematics 338, AMS, 2003. 15. Auscher P., Hofmann S., Lacey M., McIntosh A., Tchamitchian Ph., The solution of the Kato square root problem for second order elliptic operators on Rn , Ann. of Math., 156 (2002) no.2, 633–654. 16. Azencott R., Behavior of diffusion semi-groups at infinity, Bull. Soc. Math. (France), 102 (1974) 193-240. 17. Bakry D., Coulhon T., Ledoux M., Saloff-Coste L., Sobolev inequalities in disguise, Indiana Univ. Math. J., 124 (1995) no.4, 1033-1074. 18. Bakry D., Qian Z. M., Harnack inequalities on a manifold with positive or negative Ricci curvature, Revista Matem´ atica Iberoamericana, 15 (1999) no.1, 143–179. 19. Barbatis G., Davies E.B., Sharp bounds on heat kernels of higher order uniformly elliptic operators, J. Operator Theory, 36 (1996) 179–198. 457
458
BIBLIOGRAPHY
20. Barbatis G., Filippas S., Tertikas A., Series expansion for Lp Hardy inequalities, Indiana Univ. Math. J., 52 (2003) 171-190. 21. Barbatis G., Filippas S., Tertikas A., Critical heat kernel estimates for Schr¨ odinger operators via Hardy-Sobolev inequalities, J. Funct. Anal., 208 (2004) 1-30. 22. Barlow M.T., Diffusions on fractals, in: “Lectures on Probability Theory and Statistics, Ecole d’´et´e de Probabilit´es de Saint-Flour XXV - 1995”, Lecture Notes Math. 1690, Springer, 1998. 1-121. 23. Barlow M.T., Heat kernels and sets with fractal structure, in: “Heat kernels and analysis on manifolds, graphs, and metric spaces”, Contemporary Mathematics, 338 (2003) 11-40. 24. Barlow M.T., Bass R.F., Stability of parabolic Harnack inequalites, to appear in Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 25. Barlow M.T., Coulhon T., Grigor’yan A., Manifolds and graphs with slow heat kernel decay, Invent. Math., 144 (2001) 609-649. 26. Barlow M.T., Coulhon T., Kumagai T., Characterization of sub-Gaussian heat kernel estimates on strongly recurrent graphs, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 58 (2005) no.12, 1642–1677. 27. Barlow M.T., Grigor’yan A., Kumagai T., Heat kernel upper bounds for jump processes and the first exit time, J. Reine Angew. Math., 626 (2008) 135-157. 28. Batty C.J.K., Asymptotic stability of Schr¨ odinger semigroups: path integral methods, Math. Ann., 292 (1992) no.3, 457-492. 29. Beltrami E., Delle variabili complesse sopra una superficie qualunque, Ann. Mat. Pura Appl. (2), 1 (1867) 329-366. 30. Ben Arous G., Gradinaru M., Singularities of hypoelliptic Green functions, Potential Analysis, 8 (1998) 217-258. 31. Ben Arous G., L´ eandre R., D´ecroissance exponentielle du noyau de la chaleur sur la diagonale 1,2, Prob. Th. Rel. Fields, 90 (1991) 175-202 and 377-402. 32. Bendikov A., “Potential theory on infinite-dimensional Ablelian groups”, de Gruyter Studies in Mathematics 21, De Gruyter, 1995. 33. Bendikov A., Saloff-Coste L., Elliptic diffusions on infinite products, J. Reine Angew. Math., 493 (1997) 171–220. 34. Bendikov A., Saloff-Coste L., On- and off-diagonal heat kernel behaviors on certain infinite dimensional local Dirichlet spaces, Amer. J. Math., 122 (2000) 1205– 1263. 35. Benjamini I., Chavel I., Feldman E.A., Heat kernel lower bounds on Riemannian manifolds using the old ideas of Nash, Proceedings of London Math. Soc., 72 (1996) 215-240. 36. Berger M., Gauduchon P., Mazet E., Le spectre d’une vari´et´e riemanniennes, Lecture Notes Math. 194, Springer, 1971. 37. Berline N., Getzler E., Vergne M., Heat kernels and Dirac operators, Grundlehren der mathematischen Wissenschaften 298, Springer, 1992. 38. Bers L., John F., Schechter M., “Partial differential equations”, John Wiley & Sons (Interscience), 1964. 39. Beurling A., Deny J., Dirichlet spaces, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA, 45 (1959) 208-215. 40. Biroli M., Mosco U., Sobolev and isoperimetric inequalities for Dirichlet forms on homogeneous spaces, Rend. Mat. Acc. Lincei, s.9, 6 (1995) 37-44. 41. Blumental R.M., Getoor R.K., “Markov processes and potential theory”, Academic Press, New York, 1968. 42. Bobkov S.G., Houdr´ e C., Some connections between isoperimetric and Sobolevtype inequalities, Mem. Amer. Math. Soc., 129 (1997) no. 616, viii+111pp.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
459
43. Bobkov S.G., Ledoux M., Poincar´e’s nequalities and Talagrand’s concentration phenomenon for the exponential distribution, Probab. Theory Relat. Fields, 107 (1997) no.3, 383-400. 44. Bombieri E., de Giorgi E., Miranda M., Una maggiorazioni a-priori relative alle ipersuperfici minimali non parametriche, Arch. Rat. Mech. Anal., 32 (1969) 255-367. 45. Boothby W. M., “An introduction to differentiable manifolds and Riemannian geometry”, Pure and Applied Mathematics 120, Academic Press, 1986. 46. Boukricha A., Das Picard-Prinzip und verwandte Fragen bei St¨ orung von harmonischen R¨ aumen, Math. Ann., 239 (1979) 247-270. 47. Brooks R., A relation between growth and the spectrum of the Laplacian, Math. Z., 178 (1981) 501-508. 48. Buser P., A note on the isoperimetric constant, Ann. Sci. Ecole Norm. Sup., 15 (1982) 213-230. 49. Carlen E.A., Kusuoka S., Stroock D.W., Upper bounds for symmetric Markov transition functions, Ann. Inst. H. Poincar´e Probab. Statist., 23 (1987) no.2, suppl. 245-287. 50. Carron G., In´egalit´es isop´erim´etriques de Faber-Krahn et cons´equences, in: “Actes de la table ronde de g´eom´etrie diff´erentielle (Luminy, 1992)”, Collection SMF S´eminaires et Congr`es 1, 1996. 205–232. 51. Chavel I., “Eigenvalues in Riemannian geometry”, Academic Press, New York, 1984. 52. Chavel I., “Riemannian geometry : a modern introduction”, Cambridge Tracts in Mathematics 108, Cambridge University Press, 1993. 53. Chavel I., “Isoperimetric inequalities: differential geometric and analytic perspectives”, Cambridge Tracts in Mathematics 145, Cambridge University Press, 2001. 54. Chavel I., Feldman E.A., Isoperimetric constants, the geometry of ends, and large time heat diffusion in Riemannian manifolds, Proc London Math. Soc., 62 (1991) 427-448. 55. Chavel I., Feldman E.A., Modified isoperimetric constants, and large time heat diffusion in Riemannian manifolds, Duke Math. J., 64 (1991) no.3, 473-499. 56. Cheeger J., A lower bound for the smallest eigenvalue of the Laplacian, in: “Problems in Analysis: A Symposium in honor of Salomon Bochner”, Princeton University Press. Princeton, 1970, 195-199. 57. Cheeger J., Gromov M., Taylor M., Finite propagation speed, kernel estimates for functions of the Laplace operator, and the geometry of complete Riemannian manifolds, J. Diff. Geom., 17 (1982) 15-53. 58. Cheeger J., Yau S.-T., A lower bound for the heat kernel, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 34 (1981) 465-480. 59. Cheng S.Y, Li P., Heat kernel estimates and lower bounds of eigenvalues, Comment. Mat. Helv., 56 (1981) 327-338. 60. Cheng S.Y., Eigenvalue comparison theorem and its geometric application, Math. Z., 143 (1975) 289-297. 61. Cheng S.Y., Li P., Yau S.-T., On the upper estimate of the heat kernel of a complete Riemannian manifold, Amer. J. Math., 103 (1981) no.5, 1021-1063. 62. Cheng S.Y., Yau S.-T., Differential equations on Riemannian manifolds and their geometric applications, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 28 (1975) 333-354. 63. Chernoff P.R., Essential self-adjointness of powers of generators of hyperbolic equations, J. Funct. Anal., 12 (1973) 401–414. 64. Chung F.R.K., “Spectral Graph Theory”, CBMS Regional Conference Series in Mathematics 92, AMS publications, 1996. 65. Chung F.R.K., Grigor’yan A., Yau S.-T., Upper bounds for eigenvalues of the discrete and continuous Laplace operators, Advances in Math., 117 (1996) 165-178.
460
BIBLIOGRAPHY
66. Chung F.R.K., Grigor’yan A., Yau S.-T., Eigenvalues and diameters for manifolds and graphs, in: “Tsing Hua Lectures on Geometry and Analysis”, Ed. S.-T.Yau, International Press, 1997. 79-105. 67. Chung F.R.K., Grigor’yan A., Yau S.-T., Higher eigenvalues and isoperimetric inequalities on Riemannian manifolds and graphs, Comm. Anal. Geom, 8 (2000) no.5, 969-1026. 68. Chung F.R.K., Yau S.-T., Eigenvalue inequalities for graphs and convex subgraphs, Comm. in Analysis and Geom., 2 (1994) 628-639. 69. Chung F.R.K., Yau S.-T., A Harnack inequality for Dirichlet eigenvalues, J. Graph Theory, 34 (2000) no.4, 247–257. 70. Chung F.R.K., Yau, S.-T., Eigenvalues of graphs and Sobolev inequalities, Combinatorics, Probability and Computing, 4 (1995) 11-26. 71. Chung K.L., Zhao Z., “From Brownian motion to Schr¨ odinger’s equation”, A series of Comprehensive studies in Mathematics 312, Springer, 1985. 72. Chung L.O., Existence of harmonic L1 functions in complete Riemannian manifolds, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc., 88 (1983) 531-532. 73. Conway J., “A course in functional analysis”, Graduate Texts in Mathematics 96, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1990. 74. Coulhon T., Noyau de la chaleur et discr´etisation d’une vari´et´e riemannienne, Isra¨el J. Math., 80 (1992) 289-300. 75. Coulhon T., Iteration de Moser et estimation Gaussienne du noyau de la chaleur, J. Operator Theory, 29 (1993) 157-165. 76. Coulhon T., Dimensions at infinity for Riemannian manifolds, Potential Anal., 4 (1995) no.5, 335-344. 77. Coulhon T., Ultracontractivity and Nash type inequalities, J. Funct. Anal., 141 (1996) no.2, 510-539. 78. Coulhon T., Off-diagonal heat kernel lower bounds without Poincar´e, J. London Math. Soc., 68 (2003) no.3, 795–816. 79. Coulhon T., Grigor’yan A., Heat kernel, volume growth and anti-isoperimetric inequalities, C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris, S´er. I Math., 322 (1996) 1027-1032. 80. Coulhon T., Grigor’yan A., On-diagonal lower bounds for heat kernels on noncompact manifolds and Markov chains, Duke Math. J., 89 (1997) no.1, 133-199. 81. Coulhon T., Grigor’yan A., Random walks on graphs with regular volume growth, Geom. Funct. Anal., 8 (1998) 656-701. 82. Coulhon T., Grigor’yan A., Pointwise estimates for transition probabilities of random walks on infinite graphs, in: “Fractals in Graz 2001”, Ed. P.Grabner, W.Woess, Trends in Mathematics, Birk¨ auser, 2003. 119-134. 83. Coulhon T., Grigor’yan A., Levin D., On isoperimetric profiles of product spaces, Comm. Anal. Geom., 11 (2003) no.1, 85-120. 84. Coulhon T., Grigor’yan A., Pittet Ch., A geometric approach to on-diagonal heat kernel lower bounds on groups, Ann. Inst. Fourier, Grenoble, 51 (2001) no.6, 1763-1827. 85. Coulhon T., Grigor’yan A., Zucca, F, The discrete integral maximum principle and its applications, Tohoku Math. J., 57 (2005) no.4, 559-587. 86. Coulhon T., Saloff-Coste L., Isop´erim´etrie pour les groupes et les vari´et´es, Revista Matem´ atica Iberoamericana, 9 (1993) no.2, 293-314. 87. Coulhon T., Sikora A., Gaussian heat kernel upper bounds via Phragm´en-Lindel¨ of theorem, Proc. Lond. Math. Soc., 96 (2008) no.2, 507–544. 88. Courant R., Hilbert D., “Methods of Mathematical Physics, Vol. 1”, Interscience Publishers, 1953. 89. Courant R., Hilbert D., “Methods of Mathematical Physics, Vol. 1I: Partial differential equations”, Interscience Publishers, 1962.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
461
90. Cranston M., A probabilistic approach to Martin boundaries for manifolds with end, Prob. Theory and Related Fields, 96 (1993) 319–334. 91. Cranston M., Greven A., Coupling and harmonic functions in the case of continuous time Markov processes, Stochastic Processes and their Applications, 60 (1995) no.2, 261-286. 92. Davies E.B., “One-parameter semigroups”, Academic Press, 1980. 93. Davies E.B., L1 properties of second order elliptic operators, Bull. London Math. Soc., 17 (1985) no.5, 417-436. 94. Davies E.B., Explicit constants for Gaussian upper bounds on heat kernels, Amer. J. Math., 109 (1987) 319-334. 95. Davies E.B., Gaussian upper bounds for the heat kernel of some second-order operators on Riemannian manifolds, J. Funct. Anal., 80 (1988) 16-32. 96. Davies E.B., “Heat kernels and spectral theory”, Cambridge University Press, 1989. 97. Davies E.B., Heat kernel bounds, conservation of probability and the Feller property, J. d’Analyse Math., 58 (1992) 99-119. 98. Davies E.B., The state of art for heat kernel bounds on negatively curved manifolds, Bull. London Math. Soc., 25 (1993) 289-292. 99. Davies E.B., Large deviations for heat kernels on graphs, J. London Math. Soc. (2), 47 (1993) 65-72. 100. Davies E.B., Lp spectral theory of higher-order elliptic differential operators, Bull. London Math. Soc., 29 (1997) 513-546. 101. Davies E.B., Non-Gaussian aspects of heat kernel behaviour, J. London Math. Soc., 55 (1997) no.1, 105-125. 102. Davies E.B., Mandouvalos N., Heat kernel bounds on hyperbolic space and Kleinian groups, Proc. London Math. Soc.(3), 52 (1988) no.1, 182-208. 103. De Giorgi E., Sulla differenziabilita e l’analiticita delle estremali degli integrali multipli regolari, Mem. Accad. Sci. Torino Cl. Sci. Fis. Mat. Nat., ser.3, 3 (1957) 25-43. 104. Debiard A., Gaveau B., Mazet E., Th´eor`emes de comparison in g`eom`etrie riemannienne, Publ. Kyoto Univ., 12 (1976) 391-425. 105. Dekkers S.A.J., Finite propagation speed for solutions of the parabolic p−Laplace equation on manifolds, Comm. Anal. Geom., 14 (2005) no.4, 741-768. 106. Deny J., Les potentiels d’energie finite, Acta Math., 82 (1950) 107-183. 107. DiBenedetto E., “Degenerate parabolic equations”, Universitext, Springer, 1993. 108. Dodziuk J., Maximum principle for parabolic inequalities and the heat flow on open manifolds, Indiana Univ. Math. J., 32 (1983) no.5, 703-716. 109. Donnelly H., Bounded harmonic functions and positive Ricci curvature, Math. Z., 191 (1986) 559-565. 110. Doyle P.G., On deciding whether a surface is parabolic or hyperbolic, Contemporary Mathematics, 73 (1988) 41-49. 111. Doyle P.G., Snell J.L., “Random walks and electric networks”, Carus Mathematical Monographs 22, Mathematical Association of America, Washington, DC, 1984. 112. Driver B.K., Heat kernels measures and infinite dimensional analysis, in: “Heat kernels and analysis on manifolds, graphs, and metric spaces”, Contemporary Mathematics, 338 (2003) 101-142. 113. Driver B.K., Gordina M., Heat kernel analysis on infinite-dimensional Heisenberg groups, J. Funct. Anal., 255 (2008) no.9, 2395–2461. 114. Driver B.K., Melcher T., Hypoelliptic heat kernel inequalities on the Heisenberg group, J. Funct. Anal., 221 (2005) no.2, 340–365. 115. Dynkin E.B., “Markov processes”, Springer, 1965.
462
BIBLIOGRAPHY
116. Ecker K., Huisken G., Mean curvature evolution of entire graphs, Ann. Math., 130 (1989) no.3, 453–471. 117. Escauriaza L., Bounds for the fundamental solution of elliptic and parabolic equations in nondivergence form, Comm. Partial Differential Equations, 25 (2000) 821-845. 118. Evans L.C., “Partial differential equations”, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 19, AMS, 1997. 119. Evans S.N., Multiple points in the sample paths of a L´evy process, Probab. Th. Rel. Fields, 76 (1987) 359-367. 120. Fabes E.B., Stroock D.W., A new proof of Moser’s parabolic Harnack inequality via the old ideas of Nash, Arch. Rat. Mech. Anal., 96 (1986) 327-338. 121. Friedman A., “Partial differential equations”, Holt, Rinehart, and Winston, 1969. 122. Friedrichs K.O., The identity of weak and strong extensions of differential operators, Trans. AMS, 55 (1944) 132-151. 123. Friedrichs K.O., On the differentiability of the solutions of linear elliptic differential equations, Comm. Pure Appl. Math, 6 (1953) 299-326. 124. Fukushima M., Oshima Y., Takeda M., “Dirichlet forms and symmetric Markov processes”, Studies in Mathematics 19, De Gruyter, 1994. 125. Fukushima M., Uemura T., Capacitary bounds of measures and ultracontractivity of time changed processes, J. Math. Pures Appl. (9), 82 (2003) no.5, 553–572. 126. Gaffney M.P., A special Stokes theorem for complete Riemannian manifolds, Annals of Math., 60 (1954) 140-145. 127. Gaffney M.P., The conservation property of the heat equation on Riemannian manifolds, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 12 (1959) 1-11. 128. Garofalo N., Nhieu D.-M., Isoperimetric and Sobolev inequalities for CarnotCaratheodory spaces and the existence of minimal surfaces, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 49 (1996) 1081-1144. 129. Gerl P., Random walks on graphs, Lecture Notes Math. 1210, Springer, 1986. 285-303. 130. Gilbarg D., Trudinger N., “Elliptic partial differential equations of second order”, Springer, 1977,1983,1998,2001. 131. Gilkey P.B., “The index theorem and the heat equation”, Publish or Perish, Boston MA, 1974. 132. Gilkey P.B., “Invariance theory, heat equation and the Atiyah-Singer index theory”, CRC Press, Studies in Advanced Mathematics, 1995. 133. Greene R., Wu W., “Function theory of manifolds which possess a pole”, Lecture Notes Math. 699, Springer, 1979. 134. Grigor’yan A., On the existence of a Green function on a manifold, (in Russian) Uspekhi Matem. Nauk, 38 (1983) no.1, 161-162. Engl. transl.: Russian Math. Surveys, 38 (1983) no.1, 190-191. 135. Grigor’yan A., Isoperimetric inequalities for Riemannian products, (in Russian) Mat. Zametki, 38 (1985) no.4, 617-626. Engl. transl.: Math. Notes, 38 (1985) 849-854. 136. Grigor’yan A., On the existence of positive fundamental solution of the Laplace equation on Riemannian manifolds, (in Russian) Matem. Sbornik, 128 (1985) no.3, 354-363. Engl. transl.: Math. USSR Sb., 56 (1987) 349-358. 137. Grigor’yan A., On stochastically complete manifolds, (in Russian) DAN SSSR, 290 (1986) no.3, 534-537. Engl. transl.: Soviet Math. Dokl., 34 (1987) no.2, 310-313. 138. Grigor’yan A., A criterion for the existence on a Riemannian manifold of a nontrivial bounded harmonic function with finite Dirichlet integral, (in Russian) Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR, 293 (1987) no.3, 529-531. Engl. transl.: Soviet Math. Dokl, 35 (1987) no.2, 339-341.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
463
139. Grigor’yan A., On Liouville theorems for harmonic functions with finite Dirichlet integral, (in Russian) Matem. Sbornik, 132 (1987) no.4, 496-516. Engl. transl.: Math. USSR Sbornik, 60 (1988) no.2, 485-504. 140. Grigor’yan A., Set of positive solutions of Laplace-Beltrami equation on special type of Riemannian manifolds, (in Russian) Izv. Vyssh. Uchebn. Zaved., Matematika, (1987) no.2, 30-37. Engl. transl.: Soviet Math (Iz.VUZ), 31 (1987) no.2, 48-60. 141. Grigor’yan A., On the fundamental solution of the heat equation on an arbitrary Riemannian manifold, (in Russian) Mat. Zametki, 41 (1987) no.3, 687-692. Engl. transl.: Math. Notes, 41 (1987) no.5-6, 386-389. 142. Grigor’yan A., Stochastically complete manifolds and summable harmonic functions, (in Russian) Izv. AN SSSR, ser. matem., 52 (1988) no.5, 1102-1108. Engl. transl.: Math. USSR Izvestiya, 33 (1989) no.2, 425-432. 143. Grigor’yan A., Bounded solutions of the Schr¨ odinger equation on non-compact Riemannian manifolds, (in Russian) Trudy seminara I.G.Petrovskogo, (1989) no.14, 66-77. Engl. transl.: J. Soviet Math., 51 (1990) no.3, 2340-2349. 144. Grigor’yan A., Dimension of spaces of harmonic functions, (in Russian) Mat. Zametki, 48 (1990) no.5, 55-61. Engl. transl.: Math. Notes, 48 (1990) no.5, 11141118. 145. Grigor’yan A., The heat equation on non-compact Riemannian manifolds, (in Russian) Matem. Sbornik, 182 (1991) no.1, 55-87. Engl. transl.: Math. USSR Sb., 72 (1992) no.1, 47-77. 146. Grigor’yan A., Heat kernel upper bounds on a complete non-compact manifold, Revista Matem´ atica Iberoamericana, 10 (1994) no.2, 395-452. 147. Grigor’yan A., Integral maximum principle and its applications, Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, 124A (1994) 353-362. 148. Grigor’yan A., Heat kernel on a manifold with a local Harnack inequality, Comm. Anal. Geom., 2 (1994) no.1, 111-138. 149. Grigor’yan A., Heat kernel on a non-compact Riemannian manifold, in: “1993 Summer Research Institute on Stochastic Analysis”, Ed. M.Pinsky et al., Proceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics, 57 (1995) 239-263. 150. Grigor’yan A., Upper bounds of derivatives of the heat kernel on an arbitrary complete manifold, J. Funct. Anal., 127 (1995) no.2, 363-389. 151. Grigor’yan A., Gaussian upper bounds for the heat kernel on arbitrary manifolds, J. Diff. Geom., 45 (1997) 33-52. 152. Grigor’yan A., Escape rate of Brownian motion on weighted manifolds, Applicable Analysis, 71 (1999) no.1-4, 63-89. 153. Grigor’yan A., Isoperimetric inequalities and capacities on Riemannian manifolds, Operator Theory: Advances and Applications, 109 (1999) 139-153. 154. Grigor’yan A., Estimates of heat kernels on Riemannian manifolds, in: “Spectral Theory and Geometry. ICMS Instructional Conference, Edinburgh 1998”, Ed. E.B. Davies and Yu. Safarov, London Math. Soc. Lecture Note Series 273, Cambridge Univ. Press, 1999. 140-225. 155. Grigor’yan A., Analytic and geometric background of recurrence and nonexplosion of the Brownian motion on Riemannian manifolds, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc., 36 (1999) 135-249. 156. Grigor’yan A., Heat kernels and function theory on metric measure spaces, in: “Heat kernels and analysis on manifolds, graphs, and metric spaces”, Contemporary Mathematics, 338 (2003) 143-172. 157. Grigor’yan A., Heat kernels on weighted manifolds and applications, Contemporary Mathematics, 398 (2006) 93-191. 158. Grigor’yan A., Heat kernels on metric measure spaces, to appear in Handbook of Geometric Analysis No.2 Ed. L. Ji, P. Li, R. Schoen, L. Simon, Advanced Lectures in Math., International Press, 2008.
464
BIBLIOGRAPHY
159. Grigor’yan A., Hansen W., A Liouville property for Schr¨ odinger operators, Math. Ann., 312 (1998) 659-716. 160. Grigor’yan A., Hansen W., Lower estimates for a perturbed Green function, J. d’Analyse Math., 104 (2008) 25-58. 161. Grigor’yan A., Hsu, Elton P., Volume growth and escape rate of Brownian motion on a Cartan-Hadamard manifold, in: “Sobolev Spaces in Mathematics II”, Ed. V. Maz’ya, International Mathematical Series 9, Springer, 2009. 209-225. 162. Grigor’yan A., Hu J., Off-diagonal upper estimates for the heat kernel of the Dirichlet forms on metric spaces, Invent. Math., 174 (2008) 81-126. 163. Grigor’yan A., Hu J., Upper bounds of heat kernels on doubling spaces, preprint 164. Grigor’yan A., Hu J., Lau K.S., Heat kernels on metric-measure spaces and an application to semi-linear elliptic equations, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 355 (2003) no.5, 2065-2095. 165. Grigor’yan A., Hu J., Lau K.S., Equivalence conditions for on-diagonal upper bounds of heat kernels on self-similar spaces, J. Funct. Anal., 237 (2006) 427-445. 166. Grigor’yan A., Hu J., Lau K.S., Obtaining upper bounds of heat kernels from lower bounds, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 61 639-660. 167. Grigor’yan A., Hu J., Lau K.S., Heat kernels on metric spaces with doubling measure, to appear in Proceedings of Fractal Conference in Greifswald IV 168. Grigor’yan A., Kelbert M., Range of fluctuation of Brownian motion on a complete Riemannian manifold, Ann. Prob., 26 (1998) 78-111. 169. Grigor’yan A., Kelbert M., On Hardy-Littlewood inequality for Brownian motion on Riemannian manifolds, J. London Math. Soc. (2), 62 (2000) 625-639. 170. Grigor’yan A., Kelbert M., Asymptotic separation for independent trajectories of Markov processes, Prob. Th. Rel. Fields, 119 (2001) no.1, 31-69. 171. Grigor’yan A., Kelbert M., Recurrence and transience of branching diffusion processes on Riemannian manifolds, Annals of Prob., 31 (2003) no.1, 244-284. 172. Grigor’yan A., Kumagai T., On the dichotomy in the heat kernel two sided estimates, Proceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics, 77 Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI, (2008) 199-210. 173. Grigor’yan A., Nadirashvili N.S., Liouville theorems and exterior boundary value problems, (in Russian) Izv. Vyssh. Uchebn. Zaved., Matematika, (1987) no.5, 25-33. Engl. transl.: Soviet Math. (Iz.VUZ), 31 (1987) no.5, 31-42. 174. Grigor’yan A., Netrusov Yu., Yau S.-T., Eigenvalues of elliptic operators and geometric applications, in: “Eigenvalues of Laplacians and other geometric operators”, Surveys in Differential Geometry IX, (2004) 147-218. 175. Grigor’yan A., Noguchi M., The heat kernel on hyperbolic space, Bull. London Math. Soc., 30 (1998) 643-650. 176. Grigor’yan A., Saloff-Coste L., Heat kernel on connected sums of Riemannian manifolds, Math. Research Letters, 6 (1999) no.3-4, 307-321. 177. Grigor’yan A., Saloff-Coste L., Dirichlet heat kernel in the exterior of a compact set, Comm. Pure Appl. Math, 55 (2002) 93-133. 178. Grigor’yan A., Saloff-Coste L., Hitting probabilities for Brownian motion on Riemannian manifolds, J. Math. Pures et Appl., 81 (2002) 115-142. 179. Grigor’yan A., Saloff-Coste L., Stability results for Harnack inequalities, Ann. Inst. Fourier, Grenoble, 55 (2005) no.3, 825-890. 180. Grigor’yan A., Saloff-Coste L., Heat kernel on manifolds with ends, Ann. Inst. Fourier, Grenoble, 59 (2009) 181. Grigor’yan A., Telcs A., Sub-Gaussian estimates of heat kernels on infinite graphs, Duke Math. J., 109 (2001) no.3, 452-510. 182. Grigor’yan A., Telcs A., Harnack inequalities and sub-Gaussian estimates for random walks, Math. Ann., 324 no.3, (2002) 521-556.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
465
183. Grigor’yan A., Yau S.-T., Decomposition of a metric space by capacitors, in: “Differential Equations: La Pietra 1996”, Ed. Giaquinta et. al., Proceeding of Symposia in Pure Mathematics, 65 1999. 39-75. 184. Grigor’yan A., Yau S.-T., Isoperimetric properties of higher eigenvalues of elliptic operator, Amer. J. Math, 125 (2003) 893-940. 185. Grigor’yan A., Yau S.-T., ed., “Eigenvalues of Laplacians and other geometric operators”, Surveys in Differential Geometry IX, International Press, 2004. 186. Gromov M., “Structures m´etriques pour les vari´et´es riemanniennes”, Paris: Cedic/Ferdnand Nathan, 1981. 187. Gromov M., “Metric structures for Riemannian and non-Riemannian spaces”, Birkh¨ auser, 1999,2007. 188. Gross L., Logarithmic Sobolev inequalities, Amer. J. Math., 97 (1976) 1061-1083. 189. Gross L., Heat kernel analysis on Lie groups, in: “Stochastic analysis and related topics, VII (Kusadasi, 1998)”, Progr. Probab. 48, Birkh¨ auser Boston, Boston, MA, 2001. 1–58. 190. Guionnet A., Zegarlinski B., Lectures on logarithmic Sobolev inequalities, in: “S´eminaire de Probabilit´es, XXXVI”, Lecture Notes in Math. 1801, Springer, Berlin, yab2003 1–134. 191. Guivarc’h Y., Sur la loi des grands nombres et le rayon spectral d’une marche al´eatoire, Journ´ee sur les marches al´eatoires, Ast´erisque, 74 (1980) 47-98. 192. Gushchin A.K., On the uniform stabilization of solutions of the second mixed problem for a parabolic equation, (in Russian) Matem. Sbornik, 119(161) (1982) no.4, 451-508. Engl. transl.: Math. USSR Sb., 47 (1984) 439-498. 193. Gushchin A.K., Michailov V.P., Michailov Ju.A., On uniform stabilization of the solution of the second mixed problem for a second order parabolic equation, (in Russian) Matem. Sbornik, 128(170) (1985) no.2, 147-168. Engl. transl.: Math. USSR Sb., 56 (1987) 141-162. 194. Halmos P.R., “Measure theory”, D. Van Nostrand Company, Inc., New York, N. Y., 1950. 195. Hambly B.M., Kumagai T., Transition density estimates for diffusion processes on post critically finite self-similar fractals, Proc. London Math. Soc. (3), 78 (1999) 431–458. 196. Hamel F., Nadirashvili N., Russ E., Some isoperimetric problems for the principal eigenvalues of second-order elliptic operators in divergence form, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, Ser. I, 344 (2007) 169–174. 197. Hansen W., Harnack inequalities for Schr¨ odinger operators, Ann. Scuola Norm. Sup. Pisa, 28 (1999) 413-470. 198. Hebisch W., Saloff-Coste, L., Gaussian estimates for Markov chains and random walks on groups, Ann. Prob., 21 (1993) 673–709. 199. Hebisch W., Saloff-Coste, L., On the relation between elliptic and parabolic Harnack inequalities, Ann. Inst. Fourier, 51 (2001) no.5, 1437-1481. 200. Helgason S., “Differential geometry, Lie groups, and symmetric spaces”, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 34, AMS, 2001. 201. Herbst I.W., Zhao Z., Green’s functions for the Schr¨ odinger equation with shortrange potential, Duke Math. J., 59 (1989) 475–519. 202. Hino M., Ram´ırez, J., Small-time Gaussian behavior of symmetric diffusion semigroup, Ann. Prob., 31 (2003) no.3, 1254-1295. 203. Hoffman D., Spruck J., Sobolev and isoperimetric inequalities for Riemannian submanifolds, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 27 (1974) 715–727. See also “A correction to: Sobolev and isoperimetric inequalities for Riemannian submanifolds”, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 28 (1975) no.6, 765–766. 204. Holopainen I., Rough isometries and p-harmonic functions with finite Dirichlet integral, Revista Matem´ atica Iberoamericana, 10 (1994) 143-176.
466
BIBLIOGRAPHY
205. Holopainen I., Solutions of elliptic equations on manifolds with roughly Euclidean ends, Math. Z., 217 (1994) 459-477. 206. Holopainen I., Volume growth, Green’s functions and parabolicity of ends, Duke Math. J., 97 (1999) no.2, 319-346. 207. H¨ ormander L., “The Analysis of Linear Partial Differential Operators I”, Springer, 1983. 208. H¨ ormander L., “The Analysis of Linear Partial Differential Operators III”, Springer, 1985. 209. Hsu, Elton P., Heat semigroup on a complete Riemannian manifold, Ann. Probab., 17 (1989) 1248-1254. 210. Hsu, Elton P., “Stochastic Analysis on Manifolds”, Graduate Texts in Mathematics 38, 2002. 211. Ichihara K., Curvature, geodesics and the Brownian motion on a Riemannian manifold. I Recurrence properties, Nagoya Math. J., 87 (1982) 101-114. 212. Ichihara K., Curvature, geodesics and the Brownian motion on a Riemannian manifold. II Explosion properties, Nagoya Math. J., 87 (1982) 115-125. 213. Isham C. J., “Modern differential geometry for physicists”, World Scientific Lecture Notes in Physics 61, World Scientific Publishing, 1999. 214. Ishige K., Murata M., Uniqueness of nonnegative solutions of the Cauchy problem for parabolic equations on manifolds or domains, Ann. Scuola Norm. Sup. Pisa Cl. Sci. (4), 30 (2001) no.1, 171–223. 215. Jerison D., S´ anchez-Calle A., Estimates for the heat kernel for a sum of squares of vector fields, Indiana Univ. Math. J., 35 (1986) no.4, 835-854. 216. Jerison D., S´ anchez-Calle A., Subelliptic, second order differential operators, in: “Complex analysis, III (College Park, Md., 1985-86)”, Lecture Notes Math. 1277, Springer, 1987. 46-77. 217. Jorgenson J., Lang S., The ubiquitous heat kernel, in: “Mathematics unlimited—2001 and beyond”, Springer, Berlin, 2001. 655–683. 218. Jorgenson J., Lang S., Spherical inversion on SL2 (C), in: “Heat kernels and analysis on manifolds, graphs, and metric spaces”, Contemporary Mathematics, 338 (2003) 241-270. 219. Jorgenson J., Lynne, W., editors, “The ubiquitous heat kernel. Papers from a special session of the AMS Meeting held in Boulder, CO, October 2–4, 2003”, Contemporary Mathematics 398, American Mathematical Society, Providence, RI, 2006. 220. Kaimanovich V.A., Vershik A.M., Random walks on discrete groups: boundary and entropy, Ann. Prob., 11 (1983) no.3, 457-490. 221. Karp L., Subharmonic functions, harmonic mappings and isometric immersions, in: “Seminar on Differential Geometry”, Ed. S.T.Yau, Ann. Math. Stud. 102, Princeton, 1982. 222. Karp L., Li P., The heat equation on complete Riemannian manifolds, unpublished manuscript 1983. 223. Khas’minskii R.Z., Ergodic properties of recurrent diffusion prossesses and stabilization of solution to the Cauchy problem for parabolic equations, Theor. Prob. Appl., 5 (1960) no.2, 179-195. 224. Kigami J., “Analysis on fractals”, Cambridge University Press, 2001. 225. Kigami J., Local Nash inequality and inhomogeneity of heat kernels, Proc. London Math. Soc. (3), 89 (2004) 525-544. 226. Kirillov A.A., Gvishiani A.D., “Theorems and problems in functional analysis”, Springer-Verlag, New York-Berlin, 1982. 227. Klingenberg W., “Riemannian Geometry”, de Gruyter, 1982. 228. Kobayashi S., Nomizu K., “Foundations of differential geometry. Vol.I, II”, Interscience Publishers, New York, 1963,1969.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
467
229. Kolmogorov A.N., Fomin S.V., “Elements of the theory of functions and functional analysis”, (in Russian) Nauka, Moscow, 1989. 230. Kondrat’ev V.A., Landis E.M., Qualitative theory of linear second-order partial differential equations, (in Russian) Itogi Nauki i Techniki, serija Sovremennye Problemy Matematiki, Fundamental’nye Napravlenija 32, VINITI, Moscow, 1988. 99-215. Engl. transl.: in: “Partial Differential Equations III”, Encyclopedia of Math. Sci. 32, Springer, 1990. 231. Koranyi A., Taylor J.C., Minimal solutions of the heat equation and uniqueness of the positive Cauchy problem on homogeneous spaces, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc., 94 (1985) 273-278. 232. Korevaar N., Upper bounds for eigenvalues of conformal metric, J. Diff. Geom., 37 (1993) 73-93. 233. Kotani M., Shirai T., Sunada T., Asymptotic behavior of the transition probability of a random walk on an infinite graph, J. Funct. Anal., 159 (1998) 664-689. 234. Kotani M., Sunada T., Albanese maps and off diagonal long time asymptotics for the heat kernel, preprint 1999. 235. Kreyszig E., “Introductory functional analysis with applications”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1989. 236. Krylov N.V., Safonov M.V., A certain property of solutions of parabolic equations with measurable coefficients, (in Russian) Izv. Akad. Nauk SSSR, 44 (1980) 81-98. Engl. transl.: Math. USSR Izvestija, 16 (1981) 151-164. 237. Kurdyukov Yu.A., Lp -theory of elliptic differential operators on manifolds of bounded geometry, Acta Applic. Math., 23 (1991) 223-260. 238. Kusuoka S., A dissusion process on a fractal, in: “Probabilistic methods in Mathematical Physics, Taniguchi Symp., Katana, 1985”, Ed. K.Ito and N.Ikeda, KinokuniyaNorth Holland, Amsterdam, 1987. 251-274. 239. Kusuoka S., Stroock D.W., Long time estimates for the heat kernel associated with uniformly subelliptic symmetric second order operators, Ann. Math., 127 (1989) 165-189. 240. Kuz’menko Yu.T., Molchanov S.A., Counterexamples to Liouville-type theorems, (in Russian) Vestnik Moskov. Univ. Ser. I Mat. Mekh., (1979) no.6, 39-43. Engl. transl.: Moscow Univ. Math. Bull., 34 (1979) 35-39. 241. Ladyzenskaja O.A., V.A. Solonnikov, Ural’ceva N.N., “Linear and quasilinear equations of parabolic type”, Providence, Rhode Island, 1968. 242. Ladyzhenskaya O.A., Ural’tseva N.N., “Linear and quasilinear elliptic equations”, Academic Press, New York and London, 1968. 243. Landis E.M., “The second order equations of elliptic and parabolic type”, (in Russian) Nauka, Moscow, 1971. Engl. transl.: Transl. of Mathematical Monographs 171, AMS publications, 1998. 244. Lang S., “Differential and Riemannian manifolds”, Graduate Texts in Mathematics 160, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1995. 245. Lax P.D, On the Cauchy problem for hyperbolic equations and the differentiability of solutions of elliptic equations, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 8 (1955) 615-633. 246. Li P., Uniqueness of L1 -solutions for the Laplace equation and the heat equation on Riemannian manifolds, J. Diff. Geom., 20 (1984) no.2, 447-457. 247. Li P., Curvature and function theory on Riemannian manifolds, Surveys in Diff. Geom., VII (2000) 375-432. 248. Li P., Schoen R., Lp and mean value properties of subharmonic functions on Riemannian manifolds, Acta Math., 153 (1984) 279-301. 249. Li P., Schoen R., Yau S.-T., On the isoperimetric inequality for minimal surfaces, Ann. Scuola Norm. Sup. Pisa, 11 (1984) 237-244. 250. Li P., Tam L.F., Positive harmonic functions on complete manifolds with nonnegative curvature outside a compact set, Ann. Math., 125 (1987) 171–207.
468
BIBLIOGRAPHY
251. Li P., Tam L.F., Harmonic functions and the structure of complete manifolds, J. Diff. Geom., 35 (1992) 359–383. 252. Li P., Tam L.F., Green’s function, harmonic functions and volume comparison, J. Diff. Geom., 41 (1995) 277–318. 253. Li P., Treibergs A., Applications of eigenvalue techniques to geometry, in: “Contemporary Geometry”, Univ. Ser. Math., Plenum, New York, 1991. 21-52. 254. Li P., Wang J., Convex hull properties of harmonic maps, J. Diff. Geom., 48 (1998) 497-530. 255. Li P., Wang J., Mean value inequalities, Indiana Univ. Math. J., 48 (1999) 1257-1283. 256. Li P., Yau S.-T., Eigenvalues of a compact Riemannian manifold, Proc. Symp. Pure Math., 36 (1980) 205–239. 257. Li P., Yau S.-T., On the Schr¨ odinger equation and the eigenvalue problem, Comm. Math. Phys., 88 (1983) 309–318. 258. Li P., Yau S.-T., On the parabolic kernel of the Schr¨ odinger operator, Acta Math., 156 (1986) no.3-4, 153-201. 259. Liskevich V., Semenov Yu., Two-sided estimates of the heat kernel of the Schr¨ odinger operator, Bull. London Math. Soc., 30 (1998) 596-602. 260. Liskevich V., Semenov Yu., Estimates for fundamental solutions of second-order parabolic equations, J. London Math. Soc. (2), 62 (2000) no.2, 521–543. 261. Losev A.G., Some Liouville theorems on Riemannian manifolds of a special type, (in Russian) Izv. Vyssh. Uchebn. Zaved. Matematika, (1991) no.12, 15-24. Engl. transl.: Soviet Math. (Iz. VUZ), 35 (1991) no.12, 15–23. 262. Losev A.G., Some Liouville theorems on non-compact Riemannian manifolds, (in Russian) Sibirsk. Mat. Zh., 39 (1998) no.1, 87-93. Engl. transl.: Siberian Math. J., (39) (1998) no.1, 74–80. 263. Lusternik L.A., Sobolev S.L., “Elements of functional analysis”, Hindustan Publishing Corp., Delhi, 1974. 264. Lyons T., Instability of the Liouville property for quasi-isometric Riemannian manifolds and reversible Markov chains, J. Diff. Geom., 26 (1987) 33-66. 265. Lyons T., Random thoughts on reversible potential theory, in: “Summer School in Potential Theory, Joensuu 1990”, Ed. Ilpo Laine, Publications in Sciences 26, University of Joensuu, 71-114. 266. Lyons T., Instability of the conservative property under quasi-isometries, J. Diff. Geom., 34 (1991) 483-489. 267. Malliavin P., Stroock D.W., Short time behavior of the heat kernel and its logarithmic derivatives, J. Diff. Geom., 44 (1996) 550-570. 268. Maz’ya V.G., On certain intergal inequalities for functions of many variables, (in Russian) Problemy Matematicheskogo Analiza, Leningrad. Univer., 3 (1972) 33-68. Engl. transl.: J. Soviet Math., 1 (1973) 205-234. 269. Maz’ya V.G., “Sobolev spaces”, Springer, 1985. 270. Maz’ya V.G., Classes of domains, measures and capacities in the theory of differentiable functions, in: “Analysis, III”, Encyclopaedia Math. Sci. 26, Springer, Berlin, 1991. 141-211. 271. McKean H.P., “Stochastic integrals”, Academic Press, 1969. 272. McKean H.P., An upper bound to the spectrum of ∆ on a manifold of negative curvature, J. Diff. Geom., 4 (1970) 359–366. 273. McOwen R., “Partial differential equations: methods and applications”, Prentice Hall, 1996. 274. Milnor J., On deciding whether a surface is parabolic or hyperbolic, Amer. Math. Monthly, 84 (1977) 43-46. 275. Minakshisundaram S., Eigenfunctions on Riemannian manifolds, J. Indian Math. Soc., 17 (1953) 158-165.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
469
276. Minakshisundaram S., Pleijel, A., Some properties of eigenfunctions of the Laplace operator on Riemannian manifolds, Canad. J. Math., 1 (1949) 242-256. 277. Molchanov S.A., Diffusion processes and Riemannian geometry, (in Russian) Uspekhi Matem. Nauk, 30 (1975) no.1, 3-59. Engl. transl.: Russian Math. Surveys, 30 (1975) no.1, 1-63. 278. Morgan F., Isoperimetric estimates in products, Ann. Global Anal. Geom., 30 (2006) no.1, 73–79. 279. Moser J., On Harnack’s theorem for elliptic differential equations, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 14 (1961) 577-591. 280. Moser J., A Harnack inequality for parabolic differential equations, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 17 (1964) 101-134. Correction: Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 20 (1967) 231-236. 281. Mukherjea A., Pothoven K., “Real and functional analysis. Part B. Functional analysis”, Plenum Press, New York, 1986. 282. Murata M., Positive solutions and large time behaviors of Schr¨ odinger semigroups, Simon’s problem, J. Funct. Anal., 56 (1984) 300-310. 283. Murata M., Large time asymptotics for fundamental solutions of diffusion equations, Tˆ ohoku Math. J., 37 (1985) 151-195. 284. Murata M., Structure of positive solutions to (−∆ + V )u = 0 in Rn , Duke Math. J., 53 (1986) no.4, 869-943. 285. Murata M., Positive harmonic functions on rotationary symmetric Riemannian manifolds, in: “Potential Theory”, Ed. M.Kishi, Walter de Gruyter, Berlin, 1992. 251-259. 286. Murata M., Uniqueness and nonuniqueness of the positive Cauchy problem for the heat equation on Riemannian manifolds, Proceedings of AMS, 123 (1995) no.6, 1923-1932. 287. Mustapha S., Gaussian estimates for heat kernels on Lie groups, Math. Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc., 128 (2000) 45-64. 288. Nadirashvili N.S., A theorem of Liouville type on a Riemannian manifold, (in Russian) Uspekhi Matem. Nauk, 40 (1985) no.5, 259-260. Engl. transl.: Russian Math. Surveys, 40 (1986) no.5, 235-236. 289. Nadirashvili N.S., Metric properties of eigenfunctions of the Laplace operator on manifolds, Ann. Inst. Fourier (Grenoble), 41 (1991) no.1, 259–265. 290. Nadirashvili N.S., Isoperimetric inequality for the second eigenvalue of a sphere, J. Diff. Geom., 61 (2002) no.2, 335–340. 291. Nadirashvili N.S., Toth J.A., Jakobson D., Geometric properties of eigenfunctions, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk, 56 (2001) no.6, 67–88. (in Russian) Engl. transl.: Russian Math. Surveys, 56 (2001) no.6, 1085–1105. 292. Nash J., Continuity of solutions of parabolic and elliptic equations, Amer. J. Math., 80 (1958) 931-954. 293. Nirenberg L., Remarks on strongly elliptic partial differential equations, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 8 (1955) 649-675. 294. Nirenberg L., On elliptic partial differential equations, Ann. Scuola Norm. Sup. Pisa, 13 (1959) 115-162. 295. Norris J.R., Heat kernel bounds and homogenization of elliptic operators, Bull. London Math. Soc., 26 (1994) 75-87. 296. Norris J.R., Heat kernel asymptotics and the distance function in Lipschitz Riemannian manifolds, Acta Math., 179 (1997) 79-103. 297. Oleinik O.A., Radkevich E.V., “Second order equations with nonnegative characteristic form”, AMS, Plenum Press, 1973. 298. Oleinik O.A., Radkevich E.V., The method of introducing a parameter in the study of evolutionary equations, (in Russian) Uspekhi Matem. Nauk, 33 (1978) no.5, 7-76. Engl. transl.: Russian Math. Surveys, 33 (1978) no.5, 7-84.
470
BIBLIOGRAPHY
299. Petersen P., “Riemannian geometry”, Graduate Texts in Mathematics 171, Springer, 1998. 300. Pinchover Y., Large time behavior of the heat kernel and the behavior of the Green function near criticality for nonsymmetric elliptic operators, J. Funct. Anal., 104 (1992) no.1, 54-70. 301. Pinchover Y., On non-existence of any λ0 -invariant positive harmonic function, a counter example to Stroock’s conjecture, Comm. Partial Differential Equations, 20 (1995) 1831-1846. 302. Pittet Ch., The isoperimetric profile of homogeneous Riemannian manifolds, J. Diff. Geom., 54 (2000) no.2, 255-302. 303. Pittet Ch., Saloff-Coste L., A survey on the relationship between volume growth, isoperimetry, and the behavior of simple random walk on Cayley graphs, with examples, preprint 304. Pittet Ch., Saloff-Coste L., On the stability of the behavior of random walks on groups, J. Geom. Anal., 10 (2000) no.4, 713-737. 305. P´ olya G., Szeg¨ o G., “Isoperimetric inequalities in mathematical physics”, Princeton University Press, Princeton, 1951. 306. Porper F.O., Eidel’man S.D., Two-side estimates of fundamental solutions of second-order parabolic equations and some applications, (in Russian) Uspekhi Matem. Nauk, 39 (1984) no.3, 101-156. Engl. transl.: Russian Math. Surveys, 39 (1984) no.3, 119-178. 307. Qian Z., Gradient estimates and heat kernel estimates, Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, 125A (1995) 975-990. 308. Rauch J., “Partial differential equaions”, Graduate Texts in Mathematics 128, Splinger-Verlag, 1991. 309. Reed M., Simon B., “Methods of modern mathematical physics. II: Fourier analysis, self-adjointness”, Academic Press, 1975. 310. Riesz F., Sz.-Nagy B., “Functional analysis”, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, 1990. 311. Robin L., “Fonctions sph´eriques de Legendre et fonctions sph´ero¨ıdales. Tome III”, Collection Technique et Scientifique du C. N. E. T. Gauthier-Villars, Paris, 1959. 312. Robinson D.W., “Elliptic operators and Lie groups”, Oxford Math. Mono., Clarenton Press, Oxford New York Tokyo, 1991. 313. R¨ ockner M., Wang F.Y., Weak Poincar´e inequalities and L2 -convergence rates of Markov semigroups, J. Funct. Anal., 185 (2001) 564-603. 314. R¨ ockner M., Wang F.Y., Harnack and functional inequalities for generalized Mehler semigroups, J. Funct. Anal., 203 (2003) 237-261. 315. R¨ ockner M., Wang F.Y., Supercontractivity and ultracontractivity for (nonsymmetric) diffusion semigroups on manifolds, Forum Math., 15 (2003) no.6, 893–921. ¨ 316. Roelcke W., Uber den Laplace-Operator auf Riemannschen Mannigfaltigkeiten mit diskontinuierlichen Gruppen, Math. Nachr., 21 (1960) 131–149. 317. Rosenberg S., “The Laplacian on a Riemannian manifold”, London Mathematical Society Student Texts 31, Cambridge University Press, 1997. 318. Rudin W., “Functional analysis”, McGraw-Hill, Inc., New York, 1991. 319. Saloff-Coste L., A note on Poincar´e, Sobolev, and Harnack inequalities, Internat. Math. Res. Notices, 2 (1992) 27-38. 320. Saloff-Coste L., Uniformly elliptic operators on Riemannian manifolds, J. Diff. Geom., 36 (1992) 417-450. 321. Saloff-Coste L., Isoperimetric inequalities and decay of iterated kernels for almosttransitive Markov chains, Combinatorics, Probability, Computing, 4 (1995) no.4, 419–442.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
471
322. Saloff-Coste L., Parabolic Harnack inequality for divergence form second order differential operators, Potential Analysis, 4 (1995) 429-467. 323. Saloff-Coste L., Lectures on finite Markov chains, in: “Lectures on probability theory and statistics”, Lecture Notes Math. 1665, Springer, 1997. 301-413. 324. Saloff-Coste L., “Aspects of Sobolev inequalities”, LMS Lecture Notes Series 289, Cambridge Univ. Press, 2002. 325. Saloff-Coste L., Pseudo-Poincar´e inequalities and applications to Sobolev inequalities, preprint 326. Schoen R., Yau S.-T., “Lectures on Differential Geometry”, Conference Proceedings and Lecture Notes in Geometry and Topology 1, International Press, 1994. 327. Schwartz L., “Th´eorie des distributions. I, II”, Act. Sci. Ind. 1091, 1122, Hermann et Cie., Paris, 1951. 328. Sobolev S.L., On a theorem of functional analysis, (in Russian) Matem. Sbornik, 4 (1938) 471-497. 329. Sternberg S., “Lectures on differential geometry”, Chelsea Publishing Co., New York, 1983. 330. Strichartz R.S., Analysis of the Laplacian on the complete Riemannian manifold, J. Funct. Anal., 52 (1983) no.1, 48-79. 331. Strichartz R.S., Laplacians on fractals with spectral gaps have nicer Fourier series, Math. Res. Lett., 12 (2005) no.2-3, 269–274. 332. Strichartz R.S., “Differential equations on fractals. A tutorial”, Princeton University Press, Princeton, NJ, 2006. 333. Stroock D.W., Estimates on the heat kernel for the second order divergence form operators, in: “Probability theory. Proceedings of the 1989 Singapore Probability Conference held at the National University of Singapore, June 8-16 1989”, Ed. L.H.Y. Chen, K.P. Choi, K. Hu and J.H. Lou, Walter De Gruyter, 1992. 29-44. 334. Stroock D.W., “Probability Theory. An analytic view”, Cambridge Univ. Press, 1993. 335. Stroock D.W., “A concise introduction to the theory of integration”, Birkh¨ auser Boston, Inc., Boston, MA, (1999) 336. Stroock D.W., Turetsky J., Upper bounds on derivatives of the logarithm of the heat kernel, Comm. Anal. Geom., 6 (1998) no.4, pa669–685 337. Sturm K-Th., Heat kernel bounds on manifolds, Math. Ann., 292 (1992) 149162. 338. Sturm K-Th., Analysis on local Dirichlet spaces I. Recurrence, conservativeness and Lp -Liouville properties, J. Reine. Angew. Math., 456 (1994) 173-196. 339. Sturm K-Th., Analysis on local Dirichlet spaces II. Upper Gaussian estimates for the fundamental-solutions of parabolic equations, Osaka J. Math, 32 (1995) no.2, 275-312. 340. Sullivan D., Related aspects of positivity in Riemannian geometry, J. Diff. Geom., 25 (1987) 327-351. 341. Sung C.-J., Tam L.-F., Wang J., Spaces of harmonic functions, J. London Math. Soc. (2), (2000) no.3, 789–806. 342. T¨ acklind S., Sur les classes quasianalytiques des solutions des ´equations aux d´eriv´ees partielles du type parabolique, Nova Acta Regalis Societatis Scientiarum Uppsaliensis, (4), 10 (1936) no.3, 3-55. 343. Takeda M., On a martingale method for symmetric diffusion process and its applications, Osaka J. Math, 26 (1989) 605-623. 344. Takeda M., Subcriticality and conditional gaugeability of generalized Schr¨ odinger operators, J. Funct. Anal., 191 (2002) no.2, 343–376. 345. Takeda M., Gaussian bounds of heat kernels of Schr¨ odinger operators on Riemannian manifolds, Bull. London Math. Soc., 39 (2007) 85-94.
472
BIBLIOGRAPHY
346. Taylor A.E., Lay D.C., “Introduction to functional analysis”, Robert E. Krieger Publishing Co., Inc., Melbourne, FL, 1986. 347. Tikhonov A.N., Uniqueness theorems for the equation of heat conduction, (in Russian) Matem. Sbornik, 42 (1935) 199-215. 348. Treves F., “Introduction to pseudodifferential and Fourier integral operators, I”, Plenum Press, 1982. 349. Urakawa H., Geometry of Laplace-Beltrami operator on a complete Riemannian manifold, in: “Progress in differential geometry”, Advanced Studies in Pure Math.22, Math. Soc. Japan, Tokyo, (1993) 347-406. 350. Ushakov V.I., Stabilization of solutions of the third mixed problem for a second order parabolic equation in a non-cylindric domain, (in Russian) Matem. Sbornik, 111 (1980) 95-115. Engl. transl.: Math. USSR Sb., 39 (1981) 87-105. 351. Varadhan S.R.S., On the behavior of the fundamental solution of the heat equation with variable coefficients, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 20 (1967) 431-455. 352. Varopoulos N.Th., Potential theory and diffusion of Riemannian manifolds, in: “Conference on Harmonic Analysis in honor of Antoni Zygmund. Vol I, II.”, Wadsworth Math. Ser., Wadsworth, Belmont, Calif., 1983. 821-837. 353. Varopoulos N.Th., Hardy-Littlewood theory for semigroups, J. Funct. Anal., 63 (1985) no.2, 240-260. 354. Varopoulos N.Th., Isoperimetric inequalities and Markov chains, J. Funct. Anal., 63 (1985) no.2, 215-239. 355. Varopoulos N.Th., Saloff-Coste L., Coulhon T., “Analysis and geometry on groups”, Cambridge Tracts in Mathematics, 100, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1992. 356. Vladimirov V. S., “Methods of the theory of generalized functions”, Analytical Methods and Special Functions 6, Taylor & Francis, London, 2002. 357. Weyl H., The method of orthogonal projection in potential theory, Duke Math. J., 1 (1940) 414-444. 358. Woess W., Random walks on infinite graphs and groups - a survey on selected topics, Bull. LMS, 26 (1994) 1-60. 359. Woess W., “Random walks on infinite graphs and groups”, Cambridge Tracts in Mathematics 138, Cambridge Univ. Press., 2000. 360. Yan J.-A., A formula for densities of transition functions, in: “Sem. Prob. XXII”, 92-100. Lecture Notes Math. 1321, 361. Yau S.-T., Harmonic functions on complete Riemannian manifolds, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 28 (1975) 201-228. 362. Yau S.-T., Isoperimetric constant and the first eigenvalue of a compact Riemannian manifold, Ann. Sci. Ecole Norm. Sup., 4th serie, 8 (1975) no.4, 487-507. 363. Yau S.-T., Some function-theoretic properties of complete Riemannian manifolds and their applications to geometry, Indiana Math. J., 25 (1976) 659-670. 364. Yau S.-T., On the heat kernel of a complete Riemannian manifold, J. Math. Pures Appl., ser. 9, 57 (1978) 191-201. 365. Yau S.-T., Survey on partial differential equations in differential geometry, Ann. Math. Studies, 102 (1982) 3-70. 366. Yau S.-T., Harnack inequality for non-self-adjoint evolution equations, Math. Research Letters, 2 (1995) 387-399. 367. Yau S.-T., An estimate of the gap of the first two eigenvalues in the Schr¨ odinger operator, in: “Lectures on partial differential equations”, New Stud. Adv. Math. 2, Int. Press, Somerville, MA, 2003. 223–235. 368. Yosida K., “Functional analysis”, Springer, 1980. 369. Zegarlin’ski B., Recent progress in the hypercontractive semigroups, in: “Seminar on Stochastic Analysis, Random Fields and Applications (Ascona, 1993)”, Progr. Probab. 36, Birkh¨ auser, Basel, 1995. 253–262.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
473
370. Zhang Q.S., Large time behavior of Schrodinger heat kernels and applications, Comm. Math. Phys., 210 (2000) no.2, 371–398. 371. Zhang Q.S., Zhao Z., Estimates of global bounds for some Schr¨ odinger heat kernels on manifolds, Illinois J. Math., 44 (2000) no.3, 556–573.
Some notation • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
R+ ≡ (0, +∞) esup – the essential supremum einf – the essential infimum f+ ≡ 12 (|f | + f ) - the positive part f− ≡ 12 (|f | − f ) - the negative part [f ]ba ≡ f (b) − f (a) log+ x ≡ (log x)+ ' “comparable to”; namely, f (x) ' g (x) if there exists a constant C > 0 such that C −1 g (x) ≤ f (x) ≤ Cg (x) for all x from a specified domain. Br (x) – a ball in Rn , that is, Br (x) = {y ∈ Rn : |x − y| < r} Br ≡ Br (0) = {y ∈ Rn : |y| < r} . ωn – the area of the unit (n − 1)-sphere in Rn . 1A – the indicator function of a set A, that is, 1A (x) = 1 if x ∈ A and 1A (x) = 0 otherwise. b “compact inclusion”; A b B means that the closure A of the set A is compact and A ⊂ B. H – a Hilbert space * the sign of the weak convergence (in a Hilbert space) M – a Riemannian manifold x → ∞ – a sequence of points on a manifold eventually leaving any compact set. g – the Riemannian metric on M µ – a reference measure on M ∆µ – the weighted Laplace operator on M L – the Dirichlet Laplace operator on M Lp (M, µ) – the Lebesgue function space k · k p ≡ k · k Lp u ≤ v mod W01 means that u ≤ v + w where w ∈ W01 . d – the geodesic distance on M B (x, r) – a geodesic ball on M with respect to the geodesic distance d (x, y).
475
476
SOME NOTATION
Conventions. • Summation is assumed over repeated indices. For example, n n n X X X ξi xi , aij uj = aij uj , gij v i v j = gij v i v j , ξ i xi = i=1
j=1
i,j=1
etc. • Letters c, C, c0 , C 0 , etc denote positive constants (depending on specified parameters) whose value may change at each occurrence. • positive≡strictly positive, negative≡strictly negative, decreasing≡nonincreasing, increasing≡non-decreasing
Index
|α| - order of multiindex, 15 [α] - the weighted order, 170 B (M ) - the class of Borel measurable functions on M , 59 B (x, r) - the geodesic ball, 89 Br (x) - the Euclidean ball, 17 C (Ω), 15 Cb (M ), 202 Cb (Ω), 120 Cb (Rn ), 40 C k (M ), 51 C k (Ω), 15 C0k (M ), 51 Cbk (Rn ), 41 C ∞ (Ω), 16 C0∞ (Ω), 16 ,→, 16 b, 16, 49 ', 36, 93
Eλ - a spectral resolution, 111, 113, 132, 190, 266, 449, 452 f ∗ g - convolution, 7, 17 ϕε - mollifier, 18 G - the Green operator, 341 g (x, y) - the Green function, 342 g Ω (x, y) - the Green function in Ω, 342 g - a Riemannian metric, 56 g−1 , 58 gHn - the canonical metric on Hn , 77 gRn - the canonical metric on Rn , 57 gSn - the canonical metric on Sn , 72 Γ-function, 455 Γ - a function class, 372 Γδ - a function class, 376 e δ - a function class, 376 Γ Gf , 341 GΩ f , 341 gij , 57 g ij , 58 h·, ·i - inner product of tangent vectors, 57 h·, ·i - pairing of vectors and covectors, 56 (f, g)L2 - the inner product in L2 , 440 J∗ - pullback operator, 92 L - the Dirichlet Laplace operator, 105 LΩ - the Dirichlet Laplace operator in Ω, 144 Λ - a Faber-Krahn function, 367 Λ (M ) - the class of Lebesgue measurable functions on M , 59 λk (Ω), 277 λmin (A), 265 λmin (M ), 111, 271 L - a function class, 371 Lδ - a function class, 376 e δ - a function class, 376 L ` (γ) - the length of a path, 86 Lip (M ), 296
C∞
−→, 186 D
−→, 24, 97 D0
−→, 24, 97 ∞ Wloc
−→ , 186 D 0 (M ), 97 D0 (Ω), 24 D (M ), 97 D (Ω), 23 ~ 0 (M ), 98 D ~ D (M ), 98 δji - the Kroneker delta, 56 ∆ - the Laplace operator, 1 ∆µ - the weighted Laplace operator, 68 diag, 260 d (x, y) - the geodesic distance, 86 dJ - the tangent map, 92 ED (t, x), 399 EU - the spectral measure of U , 266 477
478
Lip0 (M ), 299 Liploc (M ), 299 log+ , 378 Lp (M ), 98, 440 Lploc (M ), 98 Lp (Ω), 16 ~ p (M ), 98 L ~ p (M ), 99 L loc m (U ), 267 ∇, 6, 43, 58 k · kC k , 16 k · kLp , 440 k · kp , 439 k · kV k , k < 0, 171 k · kV k , k ≥ 0, 170 k · kW 1 , 100 k · kW k , k < 0, 37 k · kW k , k ≥ 0, 34 k · kW 2k , 183 k · kp→q , 365 k · kLip , 296 Pt - the heat semigroup = e−tL , 115, 117, 130 a convolution operator, 40 a smooth version of e−tL , 191 an integral operator, 201 PtΩ - the heat semigroup in Ω, 144 pt (x) - the heat kernel in Rn , 4 pt (x, y) - the heat kernel, 198 pt,x (y), 191 R (f ) - the Rayleigh quotient, 272 Rα - the resolvent, 106, 130, 219 Ω - the resolvent in Ω, 144 Rα rα (x, y) - the resolvent kernel, 262 Rk - the iterated resolvent, 133 supp - support of a continuous function, 3, 51 of a distribution, 26, 97 of a function from L1loc , 98 u = w mod W01 (M ), 135 1 u F≤ w mod W0 (M ), 135 , 61 V (x, r), 303, 409 V k (Ω) , k < 0, 171 V k (Ω) , k ≥ 0, 170 k (Ω), 171 Vloc W 1 (M ), 100 W01 (M ), 104 Wc1 (M ), 127 1 Wloc (M ), 128 W 2 (M ), 104 W02 (M ), 104
INDEX 2 (M ), 130 Wloc W k (Ω) , k < 0, 37 W k (Ω) , k ≥ 0, 34 W01 (Ω), 36, 158 W ∞ (Ω), 152 ∞ Wloc (Ω), 152 k (Ω) , k < 0, 38 Wloc k (Ω) , k ≥ 0, 34 Wloc W0s (M ), 188 W 2k (M ), 183 2k (M ), 183 Wloc ∞ Wloc (M ), 186 ωn , 3, 82, 83
σ-Algebra, 435 Almost everywhere, 438 Anisotropic Sobolev spaces, 170 Area function, 82 Aronson, Donald G., 215, 339, 414 Atlas, 50 Azencott, Robert, 320 Basis in a Hilbert space, 432 Beltrami, Eugenio, ix Bessel semigroup, 133 Bessel’s inequality, 432 Borel set in Rn , 436 on a manifold, 59 Bottom eigenfunction, 275 Bottom of the spectrum, 265 Boukricha, Abderrahman, 362 Bounded convergence theorem, 114, 439 Bounded geometry, 312 Brooks, Robert, 320 C-manifold, 49 Canonical Euclidean metric, 57 Canonical hyperbolic metric, 77 Canonical spherical metric, 72 Carath´eodory extension theorem, 435 Carlen, Eric A., 388 Carron, Gilles, 388 Cartan-Hadamard manifold, 368, 383 Cauchy problem, 4 in L2 (Rn ), 45 L2 -Cauchy problem, 112 Cauchy semigroup, 134 Cauchy-Schwarz inequality, 431, 440 Chain rule for Lipschitz functions, 301 for strong derivatives, 121 for the Riemannian gradient, 59
INDEX
for the weighted Laplacian, 69 in W 1 , 128 in W01 , 123, 124 Chart, 49 Chavel, Isaac, 388 Cheeger’s inequality, 275 C k -norm, 16 Closed operator, 109, 446 Compact embedding theorem, 214, 289 in Rn , 158 Compact inclusion, 16, 49 Compact operator, 168, 434 Comparison principle, 137 Complete measure, 435 Completeness of Lp , 440 Components of a vector, 55 of the metric tensor, 57 Convergence in D (Ω), 23 in D (M ), 97 Convex function, 42 Convexity lemma, 43 Convolution, 17 Cotangent space, 56 Coulhon, Thierry, 388 Countable base, 49 Counting measure, 267 Covector, 56 Cutoff function, 19 Lipschitz, 300 on a manifold, 52 Davies, Edward Brian, x, 339 Davies-Gaffney inequality, 326 De Broglie, Louis, 2 De Giorgi, Ennio, 181, 215, 414 Delta function, 24 Density function, 67 Density of measure, 438 Diffeomorphism, 92 Differential, 56 Dirac, Paul, 2 Dirichlet Laplace operator, 105 Dirichlet problem, 105 weak, 105, 111, 135 Discrete spectrum, 265 Distribution definition, 24 derivatives, 25 multiplication by a function, 25 non-negative, 136 on a manifold, 97
479
support, 26, 97 Distributional gradient, 99 Distributional vector field, 98 Divergence on a manifold, 64 weighted, 68 Divergence theorem in Rn , 3 on a manifold, 64 Dodziuk, J´ ozef, 263, 429 Dominated convergence theorem, 439, 441 Doob, 252 Doubling volume property, 410 Eigenvalue, 434 Eigenvector, 434 Einstein, Albert, 2 Elliptic operator, 4, 162 Ellipticity constant, 162 Embedding of linear topological spaces, 16 Essential spectrum, 265 Exhaustion sequence, 52, 144 compact, 52, 201 Faber-Krahn inequality, 367 in balls, 397 in unions of balls, 402 on direct products, 386 relative , 409 Faber-Krahn theorem, 367 Fatou’s lemma, 438 Fourier series, 432 Fourier transform, 8 inversion formula, 155 Fourier, Jean Baptiste Joseph, 1 Friedrichs lemma, 160 Friedrichs, Kurt Otto, 181 Friedrichs-Poincar´e inequality, 159 Fubini’s theorem, 442 Functional calculus of operators, 453 Fundamental solution of the heat equation, 243 of the Laplace operator, 342, 359 regular, 243 Fundamental theorem of calculus, 120 Γ-transform, 372 Gaffney, Matthew P., ix, 319 Gamma function, 455 Gˆ ateaux derivative, 210 Gauss-Weierstrass function, 4 Gaussian upper bounds, 391 Geodesic ball, 89
480
Geodesic completeness, 295 Geodesic distance, 86 Geodesics, 86, 295 Gradient, 58 Green formula, 104 for Laplacian on a manifold, 67 in Rn , 3 Green function, 342 upper bound, 414 Green operator, 341 Gross, Leonard, 388 Ground state, 358 Gushchin Anatolii Konstantinovich, 320 h-transform, 252 Hamilton, Richard, x Hansen, Wolfhard, 362 Hardy inequality, 259 Harmonic function, 83, 189, 229 α-Harmonic function, 229, 354, 356 Harnack inequality in Rn , 355 local, 353 Harnack principle, 356 Hausdorff space, 49 Heat kernel asymptotics as t → ∞, 292 existence, 191, 428 in half-space, 258 in Hn , 256 in Rn , 4 in Weyl’s chamber, 258 integrated upper bound, 399, 422 Li-Yau upper estimate, 413 of a weighted manifold, 198 off-diagonal upper bound, 404, 410 on model manifolds, 251 on products, 249 on-diagonal lower bound, 424 on-diagonal upper bound, 380 smoothness, 198, 208 under change of measure, 252 under isometry, 250 Heat semigroup in Rn , 40 on a manifold, 115 Hermite polynomials, 69 Hilbert space, 431 Hilbert-Schmidt theorem, 434 H¨ older conjugate, 439 H¨ older inequality, 439 Hopf-Rinow Theorem, 295, 296 H¨ ormander, Lars Valter, 181
INDEX
Hyperbolic space, 77 Induced measure, 71 Induced metric, 71 Infinity point ∞ on a manifold, 141 Initial value problem, 4 Integrable function, 437 Integral maximum principle, 321 Integration by parts formula, 3 Isometric manifolds, 92 Jacobian matrix, 60 Jorgenson, Jay, ix Khas’minskii, Rafail Zalmanovich, 241 Krylov, Nikolai Vladimirovich, 181 Kusuoka, Shigeo, 388 L-transform, 372 Landis, Evgeniy Mikhailovich , 182 Lang, Serge, ix Laplace equation, 1 Laplace operator Dirichlet, 105 distributional, 99 in Rn , 1 on a manifold, 67 weak, 99 weighted, 68 Laplace, Pierre-Simon, 1 Lax, Peter David, 181 Lebesgue integral, 437 Lebesgue integral sum, 437 Lebesgue measure, 436 Lebesgue space, 440 in Rn , 16 in Rn , local, 16 Length of a path, 86 Levy distribution, 134 Li, Peter, 415 Li-Yau estimate, 413 Liouville theorem, 355 Lipschitz constant, 33, 296 Lipschitz function, 33, 296 Local coordinate system, 49 Locally Lipschitz function, 299 Log-convex function, 43 Lyons, Terry, 320, 339 Markovian properties, 123 Maximum/minimum principle elliptic, 230, 293 elliptic, exterior, 189 elliptic, in Rn , 13
INDEX
for superaveraging functions, 350 parabolic, 223 parabolic, in Rn , 9 strong, elliptic, 229 strong, for superaveraging functions, 350 strong, parabolic, 225, 230 weak, elliptic, 136 weak, parabolic, 138, 141 Maxwell, James Clerk, 2 Maz’ya, Vladimir Gilelevich, 389 McKean, Henry P., Jr., 263 Mean value inequality, 391 Measurable function, 436 Measurable set, 436 on a manifold, 59 Measure abstract, 434 σ-finite, 434 Measure space, 437 Mehler kernel, 255, 263, 303 Minakshisundaram S., ix Minkowski metric, 77 Model manifold with two ends, 240 Mollifier, 18 Monotone convergence theorem, 439 Moser inequality, 371 Moser, J¨ urgen K., 215, 414 Multiindex, 15, 170 order of, 15 weighted order of, 170 Nash inequality, 368 generalized, 368 Nash, John Forbes, 181, 215, 388 r-Neighborhood, 324 Nirenberg, Louis, 181 Null set, 435 Oleinik, Olga Arsen’evna, 320 One point compactification, 141 Parabolic manifold, 313 Parabolic operator, 4, 172 Parseval identity, 432 Partition of unity in Rn , 19 on a manifold, 52 Perel’man, Grigory Ya., x Polar coordinates in Hn , 77 in Rn , 74 in Sn , 75 on a model manifold, 80
481
Positive spectrum, 357 Principle of uniform boundedness, 211, 433 Product measure, 442 Product rule, 53, 59, 69 for distributional derivatives, 33 of higher order, 28 for Lipschitz functions, 300 for strong derivatives, 120 for the distributional gradient, 101 in W01 , 111 Projector, 431 Pullback, 91 Push forward, 92 Push forward measure, 94 Quasi-isometric manifolds, 93 Quasi-isometry, 312 R-differentiation, 53 Radkevich, Evgenii Vladimirovich, 320 Radon-Nikodym derivative, 438 Rayleigh quotient, 272 Regular measure, 436 Relative Faber-Krahn inequality, 409 Rellich theorem, 158 Resolvent, 106, 167, 219 Riemannian manifold, 57 complete, 295 Riemannian measure, 59 Riemannian metric tensor, 56 Riemannian model, 80 Riesz Representation Theorem, 431 Safonov, Mikhail V., 182 Saloff-Coste, Laurent, 389 Schr¨ odinger, Erwin, 2 Schwartz, Laurent-Mo¨ıse, 181 Self-adjoint operator, 434 Simple function, 437 Smooth manifold, 50 Sobolev embedding theorem, 151, 214 Sobolev spaces in Rn , 34, 37 in Rn+1 , anisotropic, 170 local, 34 on manifolds, 104 Sobolev, Sergei Lvovich, 181 Spectral mapping theorem, 453 Spectral theorem, 452 Stochastic completeness, 231 Stone-Weierstrass theorem, 283 Strichartz, Robert Stephen, 215, 319 Strong derivative, 45
482
Strong topology, 432 Strongly differentiable, 45 Stroock, Daniel W., 388 Subharmonic function, 229 α-Subharmonic function, 229 Submanifold, 70 Subsolution, 391 Sullivan, Dennis Parnell, 363 sup-norm, 16 Superaveraging function, 348 Superharmonic function, 229 α-Superharmonic function, 229 Supersolution, 217 Symmetric operator, 168 T¨ acklind class, 305 Takeda’s inequality, 338 Takeda, Masayoshi, 339 Tangent space, 53 Tangent vector, 53 Test function, 23 Tikhonov class, 305 Tikhonov theorem, 12 Tikhonov, Andrey Nikolayevich, 320 Tonelli’s theorem, 443 Transmutation formula, 121 Ultracontractive semigroup, 365 Ushakov, Vladimir Ignat’evich, 430 Varadhan, Srinivasa R. S., 414 Varopoulos, Nickolas Th., x, 388 Vector field, 56 Volume function, 82 Wave equation, 121, 197 finite propagation speed, 327 Wave operators, 121 Weak compactness, 433 Weak compactness of balls, 433 Weak convergence, 432 Weak derivative, 34 Weak gradient, 99 Weak topology, 432 in D0 , 24 Weighted manifold, 67 Weighted model, 82 Weyl’s lemma, 181 Weyl, Hermann Klaus Hugo, 181 Yau, Shing-Tung, x, 319, 320, 363, 415
INDEX
Titles in This Series Alexander Grigor'yan, ileat Kernel and Analysis on Manifolds, 2001) .ah.2
Kenji Fukaya, Yong-Geun Oh, Hiroshi Ohta, and Kaoru Ono, Lagrangian httcrxrtiuu Floor Tltcorry. 2(109
417_2 Kenji Fukaya, Yong-Geun Oh, Hiroshi Ohta, and Kaoru Ono, Lagrangian Intersection Floer Theory. 2(109
la Lydia Bieri and Nina Zipser, Extensions of the Stability Theorem of the Minkowski Space in General Relativity, 2009
44. Eric Sharpe and Arthur Greenspoon, Editors, Advances in String Theory, 2008 411 Lizhen Ji, Editor, Arithmetic Groups and Their Generalizations. 2008 42-L Ka-Sing Lau, Zhou-Ping Xin, and Shing-Timg Yau, Editors, Third International Congress of Chinese Matheuiaticians, 2008
11 Wen-Ching Winnie Li, Editor, Recent Trends in Coding 'T'heory and its Applications, 2007
411 Ovidiu Caliin, Der-Chen Chang, and Peter Greiner, Editors, Geometric Analysis on the lleisenberg Gronp and Its Generalizations, 2007
12 Zhijie Chen, Sheng-Li Tan, Jianpan Wang, and Stephen S: T. Yau, Editors, Proceedings of the international Conference on Complex Geometry and Related Fields, 2007
3F1. Noriko Yui, Shing-Tong Yau, and James D. Lewis, Editors, Mirror Symmetry V, 2006
3i Lizhen Ji, Jian-Shu Li, H. W. Xu, and Shing-Tung Yau, Editors, Lie Groups and Automorphic Forms, 200(1
311 Chuu-Lian Tlerng, Editor, Integrable Systems, Geometry, and Topology, 2006 3a Felix Finster, The Principle of the Fennionic Projector. 2006 34 Ren-Hong Wong, Editor, Computational Geometry. 2003
3a Eric D'Hoker, Duong Phong, and Shing-Tang Yau, Mirror Symmetry IV, 2002 32 XI-Ping Zhu, Lectures on Mean Curvature Flows, 2002 31 Kiyoshi Igusa, Higher l r+uiz-Iteidenieister Torsion, 2002 3L1. Weiman Han and Mircea Sofonea, Quasistatic Contact Problems in Vincoeleusticity and Viscoplasticity. 21102
22 S. T. Yau and Shuxing Chen, Editors, Geometry and Nonlinear Partial Differential Equations. 2(8)2
Lh Valentin Afraimovich and Sze-Bl Hsu, Lectures on Chaotic dynamical Systems, 2002 22 M. Ram Murty, Introduction to p-adic Analytic Number Theory. 2002 26_'
Raymond Chan, Yue-Kuen Kwok, David Yao, and Qiang Zhang, Editors, Applied Probability. 2002
25. Donggao Deng, Daren Huang, Rong-Qing Jia, Wei Lin, and Jian Zhong Wong, Editors, 44avelet Analysis and Applications. 2002
2A Jane Gilrnan, William W. Menasco, and Xiao-Song Lin, Editors, Knots. Braids. and Mapping Class Groups-Papers Dedicated to Joan S. Birman, 2001 23. Cumrun Vafa and S: T. Yau, Editors, Winter School on Mirror Sysnnietry, Vector Bundles and Lagrangian Submanifolds, 2001
22 Carlos Berenstein, Der-Chen Chang, and Jingzhi Tie, Laguerre Calculus and Its Applications on the Heissenberg Group. 2001
21 Jiirgen Jost, Bea,nic Strings: A Mathematical Treatment. 2001 2L Lo Yang and S: T. Yau, Editors, First International Congress of Chinese Mathematicians, 2(101
11 So-Chin Chen and Mei-Chi Shaw, Partial Differential Equations in Several Complex Variables. 2001
117 Fangyang Zheng, Complex Differential Geometry. 2000
12 Lei Guo and Stephen S: T. Yau, Editors, Lectures on Systems. Control, and Information, 2000
TITLES IN THIS SERIES
lii Rudi Weikard and Gilbert Weinstein, Editors, Differential Fqua.tiona and I'lrysics, 200(1
ILL Ling Hsiao and Zhouping Xin, Editors, Some Current Topics on Nonlinear Conservation Laws. 2000
1A Jun-ichi Igusa, An Introduction to the Theory of Local Zeta 2(10(1 Li Vasilios Alexiades and George Siopsis, Editors, Trends in Mathematical Physics. 1999
12 Sheng Gong, The Bieberbach Conjecture, 1909 LL Shinichi Mochizuki, Foundations of p-adic Teichmiiller Theory. 19!9)
lit Duong H. Phong, Luc Vinet, and Shing-Tung Yau, Editors, Mirror Symmetry III, 1999
1 Shing-Tung Yau, Editor, Mirror Symmetry 1., 19)98
e Jilrgen Jost, Wilfrid Kendall, Umberto Mosco, Michael RiSckner, and Karl-Theodor Sturm, New Directions in Dirichlet Forms, 1998 Z D. A. Buell and J. T. Teitelbaum, Editors, Computa(.ional Perspectives on Number Theory. 1998
fi Harold Levine, Partial Differential Equations. 1599:
5 Qi-keng Lu, Stephen S: T. Yau, and Anatoly Libgober, Editors, Singularities and CUM plex Gsotnetry, 1997
1 Vyjayanthi Chari and Ivan B. Penkov, Editors, M4oclular Interfaces: Modular Lie Algebras. Quantum Groups, and Lie Superalgebras, 1997 J.
Xia-Xi Ding and Tai-Ping Liu, Editors, Nonlinear Evolutionary Partial Differential Equations, 1997
2 ') William I3. Kazez, Editor, Geometric: Topology, 1997 2L William H. Kazez, Editor, Geometric Topology, 1997 1 B. Greene and S: T. Yau, Editors, Mirror Symmetry II, 159)7
The heat kernel has long been an essential tool in both classical and modern mathematics but has become especially important in geometric analysis as a result of major innovations beginning in the 1970s. The methods based on heat kernels have been used in areas as diverse as analysis, geometry, and probability, as well as in physics. This hook is a comprehensive introduction to heat kernel techniques in the setting of Riemannian manifolds, which inevitably involves analysis of the Laplace-Beltrami operator and the associated heat equation.
The first ten chapters cover the foundations of the subject, while later chapters deal with more advanced results involving the heat kernel in it variety of settings. The exposition starts with an elementary introduction to Riemannian geometry, proceeds with a thorough study of the spectraltheoretic, Markovian, and smoothness properties of the Laplace and heat equations on Riemannian manifolds, and concludes with Gaussian estimates of heat kernels.
American Mathematical Society
Grigor'yan has written this hook with the student in mind, in particular by including over 400 exercises. The text will serve as a bridge between basic results and current research.
www.ams.org
International Press www.intlpress.com
For additional information
AMSIP/47
IN and updates on this book, visit www.ams.org/bookpages/amsip-47